diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/13055-8.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/13055-8.txt | 22473 |
1 files changed, 22473 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/13055-8.txt b/old/13055-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..82442be --- /dev/null +++ b/old/13055-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22473 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of Voyages +and Travels, Volume IX., by Robert Kerr + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: A General History and Collection of Voyages and Travels, Volume IX. + +Author: Robert Kerr + +Release Date: July 30, 2004 [EBook #13055] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOL. IX. *** + + + + +Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed +Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made +available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions. + + + + + + +A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, + +ARRANGED IN SYSTEMATIC ORDER: + +FORMING A COMPLETE HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF NAVIGATION, +DISCOVERY, AND COMMERCE, BY SEA AND LAND, FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO THE +PRESENT TIME. + +BY + +ROBERT KERR, F.R.S. & F.A.S. EDIN. + +ILLUSTRATED BY MAPS AND CHARTS. + +VOL. IX. + +MDCCCXXIV. CONTENTS + +OF + +VOL. IX. + +PART II. BOOK III. CONTINUED. + +CHAP. X. (_Continued_.) + +Early Voyages of the English to India, after the Establishment of the +East India Company + +SECT. XV. (_Continued_)--Eighth Voyage of the English East-India +Company, in 1611, by Captain John Saris + +§5. Further Observations respecting the Moluccas, and the Completion of +the Voyage to Japan + +§6. Arrival at Brando, and some Account of the Habits, Manners, and +Customs of the Japanese + +§7. Journey of Captain Saris to the Court of the Emperor, with his +Observations there and by the Way + +§8. Occurrences at Firando during the Absence of Captain Saris + +§9. Continuation of these Occurrences + +§10. Conclusion of these + +§11. Occurrences at Firando, after the return of Captain Saris + +§12. Voyage from Japan to Bantam, and thence to England + +§I3. Intelligence concerning Yedso or Jesso, received from a Japanese at +Jedo, who had been twice there + +§14. Note of Commodities vendible in Japan + +§15. Supplementary Notices of Occurrences in Japan, after the departure +of Captain Saris + +SECT. XVI. Ninth Voyage of the East-India Company, in 1612, by Captain +Edward Marlow + +SECT. XVII. Tenth Voyage of the East-India Company, in 1612, written by +Mr Thomas Best, Chief Commander + +§1. Observations during the Voyage from England to Surat + +§2. Transactions with the Subjects of the Mogul, Fights with the +Portuguese, Settlement of a Factory and Departure for Acheen + +§3. Occurrences at Acheen in Sumatra + +§4. Trade at Tecoo and Passaman, with the Voyage to Bantam, and thence +to England + +SECT. XVIII. Observations made during the foregoing Voyage, by Mr +Copland, Chaplain, Mr Robert Boner, Master, and Mr Nicholas Whittington, +Merchant + +§1. Notes extracted from the Journal of Mr Copland, Chaplain of the +Voyage + +§2. Notes extracted from the Journal of Mr Robert Boner, who was Master +of the Dragon + +§3. Extract from a Treatise by Mr Nicholas Whittington, who was left as +Factor in the Mogul Country by Captain Best, containing some of his +Travels and Adventures + +SECT. XIX. Eleventh Voyage of the East-India Company, in 1612, in the +Salomon + +SECT. XX. Twelfth Voyage of the East-India Company, in 1613, by Captain +Christopher Newport + +§1. Observations at St Augustine, Mohelia, and divers Parts of Arabia + +§2. Proceedings on the Coast of Persia, and Treachery of the Baloches + +§3. Arrival at Diul-ginde, and landing of the Ambassador: Seeking Trade +there, are crossed by the slanderous Portuguese: Go to Sumatra and +Bantam; and thence to England + +CHAP XI. Continuation of the Early Voyages of the English East India +Company to India + +Introduction + +SECT. I. Voyage of Captain Nicholas Downton to India, in 1614 + +§1. Incidents at Saldanha, Socotora, and Swally; with an Account of the +Disagreements between the Moguls and Portuguese, and between the Nabob +and the English + +§2. Account of the Forces of the Portuguese, their hostile Attempts and +Fight with the English, in which they are disgracefully repulsed + +§3. Supplies received by the Portuguese, who vainly endeavour to use +Fire-boats. They seek Peace, which is refused, and depart. Interview +between the Nabob and Captain Downton, and Departure of the English + +SECT. II. Relations by Mr Elkington and Mr Dodsworth, in Supplement to +preceding Voyage + +§1. Continuation of the Voyage from Surat to Bantam, by Captain Thomas +Elkington + +§2. Brief Observations by Mr Edward Dodsworth, who returned to England +in the Hope + +SECT. III. Journey of Richard Steel and John Crowther, from Agimere, in +India, to Ispahan, in Persia, in the Years 1615, and 1616 + +SECT. IV. Voyage of Captain Walter Peyton to India, in 1615 + +§1. Occurrences during the Voyage from England to Surat + +§2. Occurrences at Calicut and Sumatra. Miscarriage of the English +Ships, Abuses of the Dutch, and Factories in India + +§3. Brief Notice of the Ports, Cities, and Towns, inhabited by, and +traded with, by the Portuguese, between the Cape of Good Hope and Japan, +in the Year 1616 + +SECT. V. Notes, concerning the Proceedings of the Factory at Cranganore, +from the Journal of Roger Hawes + +SECT. VI. Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Ambassador from James I. to Shah +Jehanguire, Mogul Emperor of Hindoostan + +Introduction + +§1. Journey from Surat to the Court of the Mogul, and Entertainment +there, with some Account of the Customs of the Country + +§2. Occurrences in June, July, and August, 1616, from which the +Character and Dispositions of the Mogul and his Subjects may be observed + +§3. Of the Celebration of the King's Birth-day, with other Occurrences, +in September, 1616 + +§4. Broils about Abdala Khan, and Khan-Khannan: Ambitious Projects of +Sultan Churrum to subvert his eldest Brother: Sea-fight with a +Portuguese Carrack; and various other Occurrences + +§5. Continuation of Occurrences at Court, till leaving Agimere, in +November, 1616 + +§6. Sir Thomas Roe follows the Progress of the Court, and describes the +King's Leskar, &c. + +§7. A New-year's Gift--Suspicion entertained of the +English--Dissatisfaction of the Persian Ambassador--English Ships of War +in the Indian Seas + +§8 Asaph Khan and Noormahal protect the English from Hope of +Gain.--Arrival of Mr Steel.--Danger to the Public from private +Trade--Stirs about a Fort + +SECT. VII. Relation of a Voyage to India in 1616, with Observations +respecting the Dominions of the Great Mogul, by Mr Edward Terry + +§1. Occurrences during the Voyage from England to Surat + +§2. Description of the Mogul Empire + +§3. Of the People of Hindoostan, and their Manners and Customs + +§4. Of the Sects, Opinions, Rites Priests, &c. of the Hindoos; with +other Observations + +SECT. VIII. Journey of Thomas Coryat by Land, from Jerusalem to the +Court of the Great Mogul + +§1. Letter from Agimere to Mr L. Whitaker, in 1615 + +§2. Do. from Agra to his Mother, in 1616 + +§3. Some Observations concerning India, by Coryat + +SECT. IX. Account of the Wrongs done to the English at Banda by the +Dutch, in 1617 and 1618 + +SECT. X. Fifth Voyage of the Joint-stock by the English East India +Company, in 1617, under the Command of Captain Martin Pring + +§1. Occurrences on the Voyage out, and at Surat, Bantam, and Jacatra + +§2. Dutch Injustice, and Sea-fight between them and Sir Thomas Dale + +§3. Departure for Coromandel, with Occurrences there, and Death of Sir +Thomas Dale.--Capture of English Ships by the Dutch; and Occurrences at +Tecoo + +§4. News of Peace between the English and Dutch + +§5. Voyage of Captain Pring from Bantam to Patania and Japan + +§6. Voyage from Japan to Bantam, and thence to England + +SECT. XI. Voyage of the Ann-royal, from Surat to Mokha, in 1618 + +SECT. XII. Journal of a Voyage to Surat and Jasques in 1620 + +§1. Voyage from England to Surat + +§2. Voyage from Surat towards Jasques + +§3. Account of a Sea-fight with the Portuguese + +§4. Second Sea-fight with the Portuguese + +§5. Sequel of the Voyage + +SECT. XIII. Relation of the War of Ormus, and the Capture of that Place +by the English and Persians, in 1622 + +SECT. XIV. Account of the Massacre of Amboina, in 1623 + +SECT. XV. Observations during a Residence in the Island of Chusan, in +1701, by Dr James Cunningham; with some early Notices respecting China + +§1. Voyage to Chusan, and short Notices of that Island + +§2. Ancient and modern State of the Country, and coming of the English +to reside there + +§3. Manner of cultivating Tea in Chusan + +§4. Of the famous Medicinal Root called H-tchu-u + +§5. Removal of Dr Cunningham to Pulo-Condore, with an Account of the +Rise, Progress, and Ruin of that Factory + +§6. Some Account of the Factory at Pulo-Laut, with the Overthrow of that +Factory, and of the English Trade in Borneo + + * * * * * +[Illustration: CHART OF +NORTH EASTERN +AFRICA] + +Published 1st July 1813 + +A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS. + + * * * * * + +PART II. BOOK III. + +(CONTINUED.) + + * * * * * + + + + + +CHAPTER X.--_Continued_. + +EARLY VOYAGES OF THE ENGLISH TO INDIA, AFTER THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE +EAST INDIA COMPANY. + + +SECTION XV.--_Continued_. + +_Eighth Voyage of the English East India Company, in 1611, by Captain +John Saris_. + +§5. _Farther Observations respecting the Moluccas, and the Completion of +the Voyage to Japan_. + +The 10th of April, 1613, the Spanish commandant sent me a message, +requesting me to stop till the next morning, when he would visit me +along with the sergeant-major of Ternate, who had arrived with a letter +from Don Jeronimo de Sylva, allowing them to trade with me for different +things of which they were in want, and to satisfy me in what I had +requested; wherefore I resolved to stop a while longer, to see if we +could do any good. Expecting Don Fernando next day, according to +promise, and hearing nine guns from their fort, we supposed he was +coming: But it proved to be for the arrival of the prince of Tidore from +the wars, who was returned with the heads of 100 Ternatans. His force in +the expedition in which he had been engaged, consisted of sixty men +armed with matchlocks, two brass _bases_ and three or four _fowlers_. He +had over-thrown _Key Chilly Sadang_, the son of the king of Ternate, +whom the Dutch had brought over from Ternate to prevent the natives of +Machian from supplying us with cloves. While on his return to Ternate +after our departure, he was drawn into an ambush by the son of the king +of Tidore, who lay in wait for the purpose, and slew him, together with +160 men who were along with him, not one of the whole being spared. The +prince of Ternate brought home the head of Key Chilly Sadang to his +wife, who was sister to the slain prince. Key Chilly Sadang in a great +measure owed this discomfiture to a barrel of powder he had bought from +us at Machian, as it exploded at the commencement of the rencounter, and +threw his whole party into confusion. Along with the prince of Ternate, +one of his younger brothers and the king of Gilolo were both slain. +Towards evening, the sergeant-major of Ternate, who was also secretary +of the government, came aboard, and made many compliments, requesting me +to come to Ternate, where they would do for me every thing in their +power. I consented to do this the more readily, as Ternate was in my +way. + +I received a message on the 12th from the prince of Tidore, apologising +for not having yet visited me, and saying that he had a quantity of +cloves which I might have, for which I thanked him, and requested they +might be sent soon. They promised to send the cloves before next +morning; wherefore, to guard against treachery, I kept double watch, +with match in cock, and every thing in readiness: For this prince of +Tidore was a most resolute and valiant soldier, and had performed many +desperate exploits against the Dutch, having shortly before surprised +one of their ships of war when at anchor not far from where we then lay. +Before day, a galley, which the Spaniards told us they expected, came +over from _Batta China_, and were very near us in the dark before we +were aware. On hailing, they answered us that they were Spaniards and +our friends, and then made towards the shore in all haste. She was but +small, having only fourteen oars of a side. We this day found our +latitude to be 0° 50' N. + +We weighed on the 13th with the wind at N. and a current setting to the +S. In passing the fort we saluted with five guns, which they returned. +Several Spaniards came off with complimentary messages, and among these +a messenger from the prince, saying we should have had plenty of cloves +if we had waited twenty-four hours longer. But we rather suspected that +some treachery was intended, by means of their gallies, frigates, and +curracurras, which we thus avoided by our sudden departure. On rounding +the western point of Tidore, we saw four Dutch ships at anchor before +their fort of Marieca; one of which, on our appearance, fired a gun, +which we supposed was to call their people aboard to follow us. We +steered directly for the Spanish fort on Ternate, and shortened sail on +coming near, and fired a gun without shot, which was immediately +answered. They sent us off a soldier of good fashion, but to as little +purpose as those of Tidore had done. Having little wind, our ship sagged +in, but we found no anchorage. Having a gale of wind at south in the +evening, we stood out to sea, but lost as much ground by the current as +we had gained by the wind. The 14th, with the wind at S.S.W. we steered +N.N.W. being at noon directly under the equinoctial. We had sight of a +galley this day, on which we put about to speak with her; but finding +she went away from us, we shaped our course for Japan. + +Before leaving the Moluccas, it may be proper to acquaint the reader +with some circumstances respecting the trade and state of these islands. +Through the whole of the Moluccas, a _bahar_ of cloves consists of 200 +_cattees_, the _cattee_ being three pounds five ounces _haberdepoiz_, so +that the bahar is 662 pounds eight ounces English averdupois weight. For +this bahar of cloves, the Dutch give fifty dollars, pursuant to what +they term their perpetual contract; but, for the more readily obtaining +some loading, I agreed to pay them sixty dollars. This increase of price +made the natives very desirous of furnishing me, so that I certainly had +procured a full lading in a month, had not the Dutch overawed the +natives, imprisoning them, and threatening to put them to death, keeping +strict guard on all the coasts. Most of these islands produce abundance +of cloves; and those that are inhabited of any note, yield the following +quantities, one year with another. Ternate 1000 bahars, Machian 1090, +Tidore 900, Bachian 300, Moteer 600, Mean 50, Batta China 35; in all +3975 bahars, or 2,633,437 1/2 English pounds, being 1175 _tons_, twelve +_cwts._ three _qrs._ and nine and a half _libs._ Every third year is far +more fruitful than the two former, and is therefore termed the great +monsoon. + +It is lamentable to see the destruction which has been brought upon +these islands by civil wars, which, as I learnt while there, began and +continued in the following manner: At the discovery of these islands by +the Portuguese, they found fierce war subsisting between the kings of +Ternate and Tidore, to which two all the other islands were either +subjected, or were confederated, with one or other of them. The +Portuguese, the better to establish themselves, took no part with +either, but politically kept friends with both, and fortified themselves +in the two principal islands of Ternate and Tidore, engrossing the whole +trade of cloves into their own hands. In this way they domineered till +the year 1605, when the Dutch dispossessed them by force, and took +possession for themselves. Yet so weakly did they provide for defending +the acquisition, that the Spaniards drove them out next year from both +islands, by a force sent from the Philippine islands, took the king of +Ternate prisoner, and sent him to the Philippines, and kept both Ternate +and Tidore for some time in their hands. Since then the Dutch have +recovered some footing in these, islands, and, at the time of my being +there, were in possession of the following forts. + +On the island of Ternate they have a fort named: _Malayou_, having three +bulwarks or bastions, _Tolouco_ having two bastions and a round tower, +and _Tacome_ with four bastions. On Tidore they have a fort called +_Marieka_, with four bastions. On Machian, _Tufasoa_, the chief town of +the island, having four large bastions with sixteen pieces of cannon, +and inhabited by about 1000 natives: At _Nofakia_, another town on that +island, they have two forts or redoubts, and a third on the top of a +high hill with five or six guns, which commands the road on the other +side. Likewise at _Tabalola_, another town in Machian, they have two +forts with eight cannons, this place being very strongly situated by +nature. The natives of all these places are under their command. Those +of _Nofakia_ are not esteemed good soldiers, and are said always to side +with the strongest; but those of Tabalola, who formerly resided at +_Cayoa_, are accounted the best soldiers in the Moluccas, being deadly +enemies to the Portuguese and Spaniards, and as weary now of the Dutch +dominion. In these fortified stations in Machian, when I was there, the +Dutch had 120 European soldiers; of whom eighty were at _Tafasoa_, +thirty at _Nofakia_, and ten at _Tabalola_. The isle of Machian is the +richest in cloves of all the Molucca islands; and, according to report, +yields 1800 bahars in the great monsoon. The Dutch have one large fort +in the island of Bachian, and four redoubts in the isle of Moteer. The +civil wars have so wasted the population of these islands, that vast +quantities of cloves perish yearly for want of hands to gather them; +neither is there any likelihood of peace till one party or the other be +utterly extirpated. + +Leaving them to their wars, I now return to our traffic, and shall shew +how we traded with the natives, which was mostly by exchanging or +bartering the cotton cloths of Cambaya and Coromandel for cloves. The +sorts in request and the prices we obtained being as follows: +_Candakeens_ of Baroach six _cattees_ of cloves; candakeens of _Papang_, +which are flat, three cattees; _Selas_, or small _bastas_, seven and +eight cattees; _Patta chere Malayo_ sixteen cattees; five _cassas_ +twelve cattees; coarse of that kind eight cattees; red _Batellias_, or +_Tancoulas_, forty-four and forty-eight cattees; _Sarassas chere Malayo_ +forty-eight and fifty cattees; _Sarampouri_ thirty cattees; _Chelles, +Tapsiels_, and _Matafons_, twenty and twenty-four cattees; white +_Cassas_, or _Tancoulos_, forty and forty-four cattees; the finest +_Donjerijus_ twelve, and coarser eight and ten cattees; _Pouti Castella_ +ten cattees; the finest _Ballachios_ thirty cattees; _Pata chere Malayo_ +of two fathoms eight and ten cattees; great _Potas_, or long four +fathoms, sixteen cattees; white _Parcallas_ twelve cattees; _Salalos +Ytam_ twelve and fourteen cattees; _Turias_ and _Tape Turias_ one and +two cattees; _Patola_ of two fathoms, fifty and sixty cattees; those of +four fathoms and of one fathom at proportional prices; for twenty-eight +pounds of rice, a dollar; _Sago_, which is a _root_ of which the natives +make their bread, is sold in bunches, and was worth a quarter of a +dollar the bunch; velvets, sattins, taffetics, and other silk goods of +China were much in request. This may suffice for the trade of the +Moluccas. + +Proceeding on our voyage, it was calm all day on the 16th of April, but +we, had a good breeze at night from the west, when we steered N.N.W. In +the morning of the 17th, we steered north, with the wind at E. by S. but +it afterwards became very variable, shifting to all points of the +compass, and towards night we had sight of land to the northwards. On +the 18th we had calms, with much rain, and contrary winds at intervals, +for which reason I resolved to go for the island of _Saiom_, which was +to the westward, and to remain there and refresh the crew, till the +change of the monsoon might permit me to proceed on my intended voyage. +But almost immediately the wind came round to the west, and we stood N. +and N. by E. On the 19th, with little wind at W. we continued our course +N. by E. the weather being extremely hot, with much rain. It was quite +calm in the morning of the 20th, but we had a constant current setting +us to the eastwards, which indeed had been the case ever since we left +Ternate. In the afternoon, the wind came round to the northward, a brisk +gale, and we stood west to stem the current, bearing for a large island +called _Doy_, where we proposed to rest and refresh. + +In the morning of the 21st, we were fairly before that island, near its +northern extremity, which was a low point stretching southwards. We +stood in E. by S. with the wind at N. by E. and at noon sent our skiff +in search of a convenient place for anchoring; but the current set so +strong to the eastwards, that we were unable to stem it, and could +merely see at a distance a very large bay, having a great shoal off its +northern point half a league out to sea, while we had sixty fathoms +water off the shore upon a bottom of sand. As night approached, we stood +off till morning; and next day, about sun-set, we came to anchor in the +large bay, having on standing in fifty-six, thirty-five, twenty-six, and +twenty-four fathoms water. + +I sent some people ashore in the skiff on the 23d, to look out for a +convenient watering-place, and for a proper situation in which to set up +a tent to defend our men from the rain when on shore. They accordingly +found a fit place right over against the ship, and saw many tracks of +deer and wild swine, but no appearance of any inhabitants. The country +was full of trees, and, in particular, there were abundance of +_cokers_,[1] _penang, serie_, and _palmitos_, among which were plenty of +poultry, pheasants, and wood-cocks. I went ashore along with our +merchants, and had a tent set up. Our carpenter made several very +ingenious pitfalls for catching the wild-hogs. We took some fish among +the rocks with much labour, and got one pheasant and two wood-Pigeons, +which last were as large in the body as ordinary hens. Some of our +company staid all night ashore to look for the wild-hogs coming into the +traps, and some very large ones were seen on the 24th, but none were +caught. This morning, about half past seven, the moon, being at the +full, was eclipsed in a more extraordinary manner than any of us had +ever seen, being three hours and a half obscured before she recovered +her entire light, _which was very fearful_. + +[Footnote 1: Cocoa-nut trees.--E.] + +The 25th, our people searching about the woods, brought great store of +_cokers_ to the ship, together with some fowls, and the heads of the +palmito trees, which we boiled with our beef, and found them to eat like +cabbages. The 28th, the company were busily employed in taking in wood +and water. The skiff was sent out to sound the shoal, and found ten and +twelve fathoms at the northern point of the bar, near the shoal. All +this time we had prodigious rain both day and night. The 29th and 30th +were employed in bringing wood aboard, which we found as good as our +English billets. The skiff was sent on the 1st of May to sound the +western point of the bay, where the water was found very deep. On +landing at that part of the coast our people found the ruins of several +huts, among which were some brass pans, which shewed the place had been +lately inhabited, but, as we supposed, the inhabitants had been hunted +from their houses by the wars. + +We set sail on the 12th May, 1613, from this island of _Doy_, being the +north-eastmost island of _Batta-China_, or Gilolo, in the Moluccas, in +latitude 2° 35' N.[2] The variation here was 5° 20' easterly. By noon of +this day we were fourteen leagues N. by E. from the place where we had +been at anchor for twenty days.[3] The 1st June, passed the tropic of +Cancer. The 2d, being in lat 25° 44' N. we laid our account with seeing +the islands of _Dos Reys Magos._[4] Accordingly, about four p.m. we had +sight of a very low island, and soon afterwards of the high land over +the low, there being many little islands, to the number of ten or +eleven, connected by broken grounds and ledges, so that we could not +discern any passage to the westward. At night we stood off and took in +our top-sails, and lay close by in our courses till morning. The islands +stretch from S.W. to N.E. The 3d, we stood in for the land, which +appeared to us a most pleasant and fertile soil, as much so as any we +had seen from leaving England, well peopled, and having great store of +cattle. We proposed to have come to anchor about its north-east point, +and on sounding, had sixty fathoms. We saw two boats coming off to us, +and used every means to get speech of them, wishing for a pilot, and +desiring to know the name of the island, but the wind was so strong that +we could not get in, wherefore we stood away N.W. and had sight of +another island bearing N.N.W. for which we steered, and thence descried +another, N.E. half E. about seven or eight leagues off. Coming under the +western island, we observed certain rocks about two miles offshore, one +of which was above water, and the other, to the north, under water, a +great way without the other, and the sea breaking on it. + +[Footnote 2: The latitude in the text, which we have reason to believe +accurate, as Captain Saris was so long at this place, indicates the +northern end of the island of _Morty_, east and a little northerly of +the northern peninsula or leg of Gilolo.--E.] + +[Footnote 3: We have omitted in the text the naked journal of daily +winds, courses, and distances, as tending to no useful information +whatever.--E.] + +[Footnote 4: The indicated latitude, considering the direction of the +voyage between Morty and Japan, nearly coincides with the small islands +of Kumi and Matchi, west from the south end of the great Liqueo.--E.] + +On the 7th, we supposed ourselves about twenty-eight or thirty leagues +from _Tonan_.[5] In the morning of the 8th, we had sight of a high round +island, bearing E. six leagues off, with various other islands, in six +or seven directions westwards, five or six leagues off.[6] In the +morning of the 8th we had sight of land bearing N.N.E. and of six great +islands in a row N.E. from the island we descried the preceding evening; +and at the northern end of all were many small rocks and hummocks. In a +bay to the eastwards of these, we saw a high land bearing E. and E. by +S. and E.S.E. which is the island called _Xima_ in the charts, but named +_Maihma_ by the natives, while the former island is called _Segue_, or +_Amaxay_.[7] The 10th, four great fishing-boats came aboard, about five +tons burden each, having one large sail, like that of a skiff. They had +each four oars of a side, resting on pins fastened to the gunwales, the +heads of the pins being let into the middle of the oars, so that they +hung in just equipoise, saving much labour to the rowers. These people +make much more speed in rowing than our men, and perform their work +standing, by which they take up less room. They told us we were just +before the entrance to _Nangasaki_, which bore N.N.E.; the straits of +_Arima_ being N.E. by N. and that the high hill we saw yesterday was +upon the island called _Uszideke_,[8] making the straits of _Arima_, at +the north end of which is good anchorage, and at the south end is the +entrance to _Cahinoch_.[9] We agreed with two of the masters of these +fishing-boats for thirty dollars each, and rice for their food, to pilot +us to _Firando_, on which agreement their people came aboard our ship, +and voluntarily performed its duty as readily as any of our own +mariners. We steered N. by W. the pilots reckoning that we were thirty +leagues from Firando. One of the boats which came to us at this time +belonged to the Portuguese who dwelt at Nangasaki, being Christian +converts, and thought our ship had been the Portuguese ship from Makao; +but, on finding we were not, made all haste back again to advise them, +refusing every entreaty to remain with us. + +[Footnote 5: The island of Tanao-sima is probably here meant, being the +most southerly of the Japanese islands. It may be proper to remark, that +the termination _sima_, in the names of islands belonging to Japan, +obviously means _island_, like the prefix _pula_ in the names of islands +in the Malay Archipelago.--E.] + +[Footnote 6: There is a considerable cluster of small islands south from +Tanaosima, between the latitudes of 29° 30' and 30° N.--E.] + +[Footnote 7: Xima, or sima, only means island. Perhaps Mashama may be +that named Kaba-sima in modern maps, and Amaxay may possibly be Amacusa, +these islands being in the way towards Nangasaki.--E.] + +[Footnote 8: This seems the same island called before Amaxay, or +Amacusa.--E.] + +[Footnote 9: Cochinotzu is the name of a town on the south-west +peninsula of the island of Kiusiu; but Cochinoch in the text seems the +sound leading to Nangasaki, and the straits of Arima appear to be the +passage between the north side of Amacusa and Kiusiu.--E.] + +§6. _Arrival at Firando, and some Account of the Habits, Manners, and +Customs of the Japanese_. + +We came to anchor about half a league short of Firando, about three +p.m. of the 11th June, 1613, the tide being then so much spent that we +could not get nearer. I was soon afterwards visited by _Foyne Sama_, the +old king of Firando, accompanied by his nephew, _Tone Sama_, who +governed the island under the old king.[10] They were attended by forty +boats or gallies, some having ten, and others fifteen oars of a side. On +coming near our ship, the king ordered all the boats to fall astern, +except the two which carried him and his nephew, who only came on deck, +both dressed in silk gowns, under which were linen shirts and breeches. +Each of them wore two _cattans_, or Japanese swords, one of which was +half a yard long in the blade, and the other only a quarter of a yard. +They wore neither turbans nor hats, the fore part of their heads being +shaven to the crowns, and the rest of their hair very long, and gathered +into a knot behind. The king seemed about seventy-two years of age, and +his nephew, or grandchild, twenty-two, who governed under him, and each +was attended by an officer, who commanded over their slaves as they +directed. + +[Footnote 10: As the Portuguese, who first visited Japan, chose to +designate the sovereign of that country by the title of emperor, they +denominated all its provinces kingdoms, and their governors kings.--E.] + +Their manner of salutation was thus: On coming into the presence of him +they mean to salute, they put off their shoes, so that they are +barefooted, for they wear no stockings. Then putting their right hand +within the left, they hold them down to their knees, bending their +bodies, then wag or swing their joined hands a little to and fro, making +some small steps to one side from the person they salute, and say _augh! +augh!_ I immediately led them into my cabin, where I had prepared a +banquet for them, and entertained them with a good concert of music, to +their great delight. I then delivered the letters from our king to the +king of Firando, which he received very joyfully, saying he would not +open it till _Ange_ came, who would interpret it. _Ange_, in their +language, signifies a pilot, and by this name was meant one _William +Adams_, an Englishman. He had come this way in a Dutch ship from the +South Seas, about twelve years ago; and, in consequence of a mutiny +among the people, the ship was seized by the emperor, and Adams had +remained in the country ever since. After staying about an hour and a +half, the king took his leave, bidding us welcome to the country, and +promising me kind entertainment. + +He was no sooner ashore than all his nobility came to see the ship, +attended by a vast number of soldiers, every person of any note bringing +a present; some of venison, some of wild-fowl, and some of wild-boar, +the largest and fattest we had ever seen, while others brought us fish, +fruits, and various things. They greatly admired the ship, and seemed +never to be satisfied with looking at her; and as we were much pestered +by the number of these visitors, I sent to the king, requesting he would +order them to remove, to prevent any inconveniences that might arise. +The king immediately sent a principal officer of his guard, with orders +to remain aboard, to see that no injury was done to us, and ordered a +proclamation to that effect to be made in the town. The same night, +Hendrik Brewer, who was chief of the Dutch factory at Firando, came to +visit me, or rather to see what had passed between the king and us. I +wrote this day to Mr Adams, who was then at _Jedo_,[11] nearly 300 +leagues from Firando, to inform him of our arrival. King _Foyne_ sent my +letter next day by his admiral, to _Osackay_ (_Osaka_,) the nearest port +of importance on the principal island, whence it would go by post to +Jedo, and he sent notice to the emperor by the same conveyance, of our +arrival and purposes. + +[Footnote 11: Called _Edoo_, in Purchas.] + +In the morning of the 12th, we had fish brought to us in abundance, and +as cheap as we could desire. We this day weighed to make sail for the +road; and, on this occasion, the king sent at the least threescore large +boats, or gallies, well manned, to tow us into the harbour. On seeing +this multitude of boats, I was in some doubts of their intentions, and +sent my skiff to warn them not to come near the ship. But the king was +in the headmost boat, and observing my suspicions, waved his +handkerchief for all the boats to wait, and came aboard himself, telling +me that he had ordered all these boats to assist in bringing me round a +point which was somewhat dangerous, on account of the strength of the +tide, and could not be stemmed by even a good breeze of wind, and if the +ship fell into the eddy, we should be driven upon the rocks. Having got +this explanation, we sent our hawsers to the Japanese boats, on which +they fell stiffly to work, and towed us into the harbour. In the mean +time, the king breakfasted with me, and when I proposed rewarding his +people for towing me in, after we were at anchor, he would not allow +them to accept of any thing. + +We now anchored in five fathoms, on soft ooze, so near the shore that we +could have talked with the people in their houses. We saluted the town +with nine guns, but had no return, as there are no cannon at this place, +neither any fortifications, except barricades for small arms. Several +nobles came off to bid me welcome, two of whom were men of high rank, +named _Nobusane_ and _Simmadone_. I entertained them well, and, at +their departing, they used extraordinary state, one remaining on board till +the other was landed, their children and chief followers using the like +ceremony. There came continually such numbers of people on board, both +men and women, that we were not able to go about the decks. The ship +likewise was quite surrounded by boats full of people, greatly admiring +her head and stern. I permitted several women of the better sort to come +into my cabin, where the picture of Venus and Cupid was hung, rather +wantonly executed. Some of these ladies, thinking it to be Our Lady and +her blessed Son, fell down to worship with appearance of much devotion, +whispering our men, so that their companions might not hear, that they +were Christians, having been converted by the Portuguese jesuits. + +The king came aboard again, bringing four principal women along with +him, who were attired in silken gowns, overlapped in front, and girt +round them. Their legs were bare, except that they had half buskins +bound about their insteps with silk ribbon. Their hair was very black +and long, tied up in a knot on the crown, in a very comely manner, no +part of their heads being shaven, like the men. They had comely faces, +hands, and feet, with clear white complexions, but wanting colour, which +they supplied by art. Their stature was low, but they were very fat, and +their behaviour was very courteous, and not ignorant of the respect due +according to their fashions. The king requested that no person might +remain in the cabin except myself and my linguist, who was a native of +Japan, brought along with me from Bantam. He was well skilled in the +Malay language, in which he explained to me what was said by the king, +in Japanese. The women were at first somewhat bashful, but the king +desired them to be frolicsome. They sung several songs, and played on +certain instruments, one of which resembled our lute, being bellied like +it, but longer in the neck, and fretted like ours, but had only four gut +strings. They fingered with their left hands, as is done with us, and +very nimbly; but they struck the strings with a piece of ivory held in +the right hand, as we are in use to play with a quill on the citern. +They seemed to delight much in their music, beating time with their +hands, and both playing and singing by book, prickt on lines and spaces +much like our own. I feasted them, and gave them several English +commodities, and after two hours stay, they returned on shore. At this +interview I requested the king to let us have a house in the town, which +he readily granted, taking two of my merchants ashore with him, to whom +he pointed out three or four houses, desiring them to make their choice, +paying the owners as we could agree. + +On the 13th I went ashore, attended by the merchants and principal +officers, and delivered our presents to the king, to the value of about +£140, which he received with great satisfaction, feasting me and my +whole company with several kinds of _powdered_ wild-fowl and fruits. +He called for a standing cup, which was one of the presents, and ordering +it to be filled with their country wine, which is distilled from rice, +and as strong as brandy, he told me he would drink it all off to the +health of the king of England, which he did, though it held about a pint +and a half, in which he was followed by myself and all his nobles. As +only myself and the Cape merchant sat in the same room with the king, +all the rest of my company being in another room, he commanded his +secretary to go and see that they all pledged the health. The king and +his nobles sat at meat cross-legged, on mats, after the fashion of the +Turks, the mats being richly edged with cloths of gold, velvet, sattin, +or damask. The 14th and 15th were spent in giving presents; and on the +16th I agreed with _Audassee_, captain of the Chinese quarter, for +his house, paying ninety-five dollars for the monsoon of six months; he to +put it into repair, and to furnish all the rooms conveniently with mats, +according to the fashion of the country, and we to keep it in repair, +with leave to alter as we thought fit. + +This day our ship was so pestered with numbers of people coming on +board, that I had to send to the king for a guardian to clear them out, +many things being stolen, though I more suspected my own people than the +natives. There came this day a Dutchman in one of the country boats, who +had been at the island of _Mashma_, where he sold good store of pepper, +broad-cloth, and elephants teeth, though he would not acknowledge to us +that he had sold any thing, or brought any thing back with him in the +boat; but the Japanese boatmen told us he had sold a great quantity of +goods at a mart in that place, and had brought his returns in bars of +silver, which he kept very secret. + +The 21st the old king came aboard again, bringing with him several women +to make a frolic. These women were actors of comedies, who go about from +island to island, and from town, to town, to act plays, which are mostly +about love and war, and have several shifts of apparel for the better +grace of their interludes. These women were the slaves of a man who +fixes a price that every man must pay who has to do with them. He must +not take a higher price than that affixed, on pain of death, if +complained against. At the first, he is allowed to fix upon each woman +what price he pleases, which price he can never afterwards raise, but +may lower it as he likes; neither doth the party bargain with the women +for their favours, but with the master. Even the highest of the Japanese +nobility, when travelling, hold it no disgrace to send for these panders +to their inn, and bargain with them for their girls, either to fill out +their drink for them at table, as is the custom with all men of rank, or +for other uses. When any of these panders die, although in their life +they were received into the best company, they are now held unworthy to +rest among the worst. A straw rope is put round their neck, and they are +dragged through the streets into the fields, and cast on a dung-hill to +be devoured by dogs and fowls. + +The 23d, there arrived two Chinese junks at Nangasaki, laden with sugar. +By them it was understood that the emperor of China had lately put, to +death about 5000 persons for trading out of the country contrary to his +edict. Yet the hope of profit had induced these men to hazard their +lives and properties, having bribed the _Pungavas_, or officers of +the sea-ports, who had succeeded those recently put to death for the same +offence. + +The 29th, a _soma_, or junk, belonging to the Dutch, arrived at +Nangasaki from Siam, laden with Brazil wood and skins of all kinds. On +their arrival, they were said to be Englishmen, as, before our coming, +the Dutch used generally to pass by the name of English, our nation +being long known by report in Japan, but much scandalised by the +Portuguese jesuits, who represent us as pirates and rovers on the sea. +In consequence of this report, the Japanese have a song, which they call +_English Crofonio_, shewing how the English take the Spanish and +Portuguese ships, which, while singing, they act likewise with catans, +and so scare their children, as the French used to do theirs with the +name of Lord Talbot. + +The 1st July two of our company happened to quarrel, and had nearly gone +out to the field to fight, which had greatly endangered us all, as it is +the law here, that whoever draws a weapon in anger, although no harm be +done, is presently cut in pieces; and if they do even but small hurt, +not only they are so executed themselves, but all their relations are +put to death. The 2d, I went ashore to keep house at Firando, my +household consisting of twenty-six persons. At our first coming, we +found that the Dutch sold broad-cloths of £15 or 16 a-cloth, for forty +dollars, or £8 sterling the _mat_, which is a measure of two yards +and a quarter. Being desirous to keep up the price of our cloth, and hearing +that the Dutch had a great quantity, I had a conference with Brower, the +chief of their factory, proposing that we should mutually fix prices +upon such cloths as we both had, and neither of us, in any respect, sell +below the prices agreed upon; for performance of which, I offered to +enter into mutual bonds. In the morning, he seemed to approve of this +proposal, but ere night he sent me word that he disliked it, alleging +that he had no authority from his masters to make any such agreement. +Next morning he shipped away a great store of cloth to different +islands, rating them at low prices, as at twenty, eighteen, and sixteen +dollars the _mat_, that he might the more speedily sell off his own, and +glut the market before ours came forwards. + +Pepper, ungarbled, which cost 1 3/4 dollars at Bantam the sack, was +worth at our coming ten _tayes_ the _pecul_, which is 100 +_cattea_ of Japan, or 130 pounds English. A _taye_ is worth +five shillings sterling. A rial of eight, or Spanish dollar, is worth +there in ordinary payment only seven _mas_, or three shillings and +sixpence sterling, one mas being equal to a single rial. The _pecul_ +of tin was worth thirty _tayes_; the _pecul_ of elephants teeth +eighty _tayes_: Cast iron six tayes the pecul: Gunpowder twenty-three +tayes the pecul: Socotrine aloes the cattee, six _tayes_: Fowling-pieces +twenty tayes each: Calicos and such little commodities, of Guzerat or +Coromandel, were at various prices, according to their qualities. + +On the 7th of July the king of the Gotto islands, which are not far from +Firando to the S.W. came upon a visit to king _Foyne_, saying he had +heard of an excellent English ship being arrived in his dominions, which +he greatly desired to go aboard of. King Foyne requested of me that this +might be allowed, the king of Gotto being an especial friend of his; +wherefore he was banqueted on board, and several cannon were fired at +his departure, which he was much pleased with, and told me he would be +glad to see some of our nation at his islands, where they should meet a +hearty welcome. Three Japanese, two men and a woman, were put to death +for the following cause: The woman, in the absence of her husband, had +made separate assignations with both the men. He who was appointed +latest, not knowing of the other, and weary of waiting, came too soon, +and enraged at finding her engaged with another man, drew his _cattan_ +and wounded both very severely, almost cutting the man's back in two. +Yet the wounded man, getting hold of his _cattan_, wounded the +aggressor. This fray alarming the street, word was sent to king Foyne +and to know his pleasure, who accordingly gave orders to cut off all +their heads. After their execution, all who thought proper, as many did, +came to try the temper of their weapons upon the dead bodies, which they +soon hewed in small pieces, which were left to be devoured by the +ravens. + +The 10th three others were executed in the same way with the former, +being beheaded and afterwards cut in pieces, for stealing a woman long +since from Firando and selling her at Nangasaki. When any are to be +executed, they are led out of town in the following manner: First there +go two men, one having a mattock and the other a shovel, to dig the +grave, if that be allowed to the criminal. Then a third person carrying +a small table or board, on which is written the crime of the party, +which is afterwards affixed to a post on the grave in which he is +buried. Next comes the party to be executed, having his hands bound +behind him by a silken cord, and having a small paper banner, much like +one of our wind-vanes, on which the offence is written. The criminal is +followed by the executioner, having his _cattan_ or Japanese sword by +his side, and holding in his hand the cord with which the hands of the +criminal are bound. On each hand of the executioner walks a soldier +armed with a pike, the head of which rests on the criminal's shoulder, +to intimidate him from attempting to escape. In this manner I saw one +man led out to execution, who went forwards with a most wonderful +resolution, and apparently without fear of death, such as I had never +seen the like in Europe. He was condemned for stealing a sack of rice +from a neighbour, whose house was burning. + +The 11th there arrived three Chinese junks at Nangasaki, laden with +silks. The 19th the old king begged a piece of _poldavy_ from me; and +though a king, and famed as the bravest soldier in Japan for his conduct +in the wars of Corea, he had it made into coats, which he wore next his +skin, some part of it being made into handkerchiefs. The 20th, a _soma_ +or junk arrived at Nangasaki from Cochinchina, laden with silk and +benzoin, which last was exceedingly clear and good. The 29th Mr Adams +arrived at Firando, having been seventeen days in coming from Sorongo, +while we had waited no less than forty-eight days for his coming.[12] +After receiving him in a friendly manner, I conferred with him in the +presence of our merchants, as to our hopes of trade in this country. He +said the trade was variable, but doubted not we might do as well as the +Dutch, and gave great commendations of the country, to which he seemed +to be much attached. + +[Footnote 12: The first messenger, for not making haste with the letters +to Adams, was banished by the angry king.--_Purch._] + +On the morning of the 30th, an officer of the young king was cut to +pieces in the street, as it was thought for being too intimate with the +young king's mother; and one of the officer's slaves was slain along +with him, for endeavouring to defend his master. This day there came two +Spaniards to Firando, who were acquainted with Mr Adams, to request a +passage in our ship for Bantam. They had belonged to the crew of a +Spanish ship, sent from New Spain about a year before to make +discoveries to the north of Japan, and coming to Jedo to wait the +monsoon which serves for going to the northward, which begins in the end +of May, the crew mutinied against their captain, and every one went +away whither he listed, leaving the ship entirely unmanned. On receiving +this account of the Spaniards, I thought it best not to let them enter +my ship. + +On the 3d of August, king _Foyne_ sent to know what was the size of the +present from our king to the emperor, as also the number of people I +meant to take along with me to the court, that he might provide +accordingly for my going up in good order, in regard to barks, horses, +and palanquins. This day likewise I caused the presents to be assorted, +for the emperor and those of chief consideration about him, of which +presents respectively the values were as follow:-- + + For _Ogoshosama_, the emperor, ---------------------£87 7 6 + _Shongosama_, the emperor's son, ----------------43 15 0 + _Codskedona_, the emperor's secretary, ----------15 17 6 + _Saddadona_, secretary to the emperor's son,----14 3 4 + _Iccocora Juga_, judge of _Meaco_, ---------4 10 6 + _Fongodona_, admiral of _Orungo_,-----------3 10 0 + _Goto Shozavero_, the mint-master, -------------11 0 0 + ________ + Total, £180 3 10 + + +§7. _Journey of Captain Saris to the Court of the Emperor, with his +Observations there and by the Way_. + +The 7th August, 1613, being furnished by king _Foyne_ with a proper +galley, and having taken leave of him, I went aboard ship to put all +things in order for my departure.[13] This galley rowed twenty-five-oars +of a side, and was manned by sixty Japanese; and I fitted her out +handsomely in our fashion, with waste cloths, ensigns, and all other +necessaries. Leaving instructions with the master of the Clove and the +cape merchant, for the proper regulation of the ship and the house on +shore during my absence, and taking with me ten Englishmen and nine +other attendants, as the before-mentioned sixty were only to take charge +of the galley, I departed from Firando on my voyage and journey for the +court of the Japanese emperor. We rowed through among various islands, +all or most of which were well inhabited, and had several handsome towns +upon them, one of which, called _Facata_, has a very strong castle built +of freestone, but without any cannon or garrison. The ditch of this +castle is five fathoms deep and ten broad, all round about the walls, +and is passed by means of a drawbridge, and the whole is kept in good +repair. The tide and wind were here so strong against us that we could +not proceed, for which reason I landed and dined at this town, which was +very well built, and seemed to be as large as London is within the +walls. All its streets are so even, that one may see from one end to the +other. This place is exceedingly populous, and the people very civil and +courteous; only that at our first landing, and indeed at all places to +which we came in the whole country, the children and low idle people +used to gather about and follow us a long way, calling _coré, coré, +cocoré, Waré_ that is to say, _You Coreans with false hearts_; all the +while whooping and hallooing, and making such a noise that we could not +hear ourselves speak; and sometimes throwing stones at us, though seldom +in any of the towns, yet the clamour and shouting was every where the +same, as nobody reproved them for it. The best advice I can give to +those who may come after me, is to pass on without attending to these +idle rabblements, by which their ears only will be disturbed by the +noise. All along this coast, and indeed the whole way to Osaka, we found +various women who lived continually with their families in boats upon +the water, as is done in Holland. These women catch fish by diving even +in the depth of eight fathoms, that are missed by the nets and lines; +and by the habit of frequent diving their eyes become excessively red +and bloodshot, by which mark these divers may be readily distinguished +from all other women. + +[Footnote 13: The old king sent 200 tayes, worth five shillings each, to +Captain Saris, for his expences in the journey.--_Purch._] + +In two days we rowed from Firando to Facata. When eight or ten leagues +short of the straits of _Xemina-seque_,[14] we came to a great town, +where there lay in a dock a junk of 800 or 1000 tons burden, _all +sheathed with iron_,[15] and having a guard appointed to keep her from +being set on fire or otherwise destroyed. She was built in a very homely +fashion, much like the descriptions we have of Noah's ark; and the +natives told us she served to transport troops to any of the islands in +case of rebellion or war. + +[Footnote 14: The editor of Astley's Collection has altered the +orthography of this name to _Shemina seki_. In modern maps, we find a +town named _Sunono sequi_, on one side of these straits, which divide +the island of Kiusiu from the south-west end of the great island of +Niphon.--E.] + +[Footnote 15: It is not a little singular, that metallic sheathing +should have been observed by English mariners in Japan so long ago as +1613, and yet never attempted in the British or any other European navy +till more than 150 years afterwards, and then brought forwards as a new +invention.--E.] + +We met with nothing extraordinary after passing through the straits of +Xemina-seque till we came to Osaka, where we arrived on the 27th of +August. Our galley could not get nearer the town than six miles; +wherefore we were met by a smaller vessel, in which came the _goodman or +host_ of the house where we were to lodge in Osaka, and who brought with +him a banquet of wine and _salt fruits_ to entertain me. A rope being +made fast to the mast-head of our boat, she was drawn forwards by men, +as our west country barges are at London. We found Osaka a very large +town, as large as London within the walls, having many very high and +handsome timber bridges which serve to cross the river _Jodo_, which is +as wide as the Thames at London. Some of the houses here were handsome, +but not many. It is one of the chiefest sea-ports in all Japan, and has +a castle of great size and strength, with very deep ditches all round, +crossed by drawbridges, and its gates plated with iron. This castle is +all of freestone, strengthened by bulwarks and battlements, having +loop-holes for small arms and arrows, and various passages for throwing +down stones upon the assailants. The walls are at least six or seven +yards thick, all built of freestone throughout, having no packing with +trumpery within, as I was told, but all solid. The stones are large and +of excellent quality, and are so exactly cut to fit the places where +they are laid, that no mortar is used, only a little earth being +occasionally thrown in to fill up any void spaces. + +In the castle of Osaka, when I was there, dwelt the son of _Tiquasama_, +who was the true heir of Japan; but being an infant at the death of his +father, he was left under the guardianship of four chiefs or great men, +of whom Ogoshosama, the present emperor, was the principal. The other +three guardians were each desirous of acquiring the sovereignty, and +being opposed by Ogoshosama, levied armies against him; but Ogoshosama +defeated them in battle, in which two of them were slain, and the other +saved himself by flight. After this great victory, Ogoshosama attempted +what he is said not to have thought of before. Seizing the true heir of +the throne, he married the young prince to his own daughter, and +confined them in the castle of Osaka, under the charge of such persons +only as had been brought up from their childhood under the roof of the +usurper, so that by their means he has regular intelligence of every +thing they do. + +Right opposite to Osaka, on the other side of the river Jodo, there is +another town called _Sakay_, not so large as Osaka, but of considerable +extent, and having great trade to all the neighbouring country. Having +left samples and lists of prices of all our commodities with our host at +Osaka, we departed from that place on the night of the 29th of August in +a bark, and arrived at _Fusima_ next night, where we found a garrison of +3000 men, maintained there by the emperor, to keep Miaco and Osaka under +subjection. This garrison is shifted every third year, and the relief +took place while we were there, so that we saw the old bands march away +and the new enter, which they did in a most soldier-like manner. They +marched five abreast, and to every ten files or fifty men there was a +captain, who kept his men in excellent order. Their shot marched first, +being _calivers_, for they have no muskets and will not use any, then +followed pikes, next swords or _cattans_ and targets, these were +followed by bows and arrows, and then a band armed with weapons called +_waggadashes_, resembling Welsh hooks: These were succeeded by calivers, +and so on as before; but without any ensigns or colours; neither had +they any drums or other warlike instruments of music. The first file of +the band armed with cattans had silver scabbards, and the last file +which marched next the captain had their scabbards of gold. The +companies or bands were of various numbers, some 500, some 300, and some +only of 150 men. In the middle of every band there were three horses +very richly caparisoned, their saddles being covered by costly furs, or +velvet, or stammel broad-cloths. Every horse was attended by three +slaves, who led them in silken halters, and their eyes were hoodwinked +by means of leathern covers. + +After each troop or band, the captain followed on horseback, his bed and +all his necessaries being laid upon his own horse equally poised on both +sides, and over all was spread a covering of red felt of China, on the +top of which sat the captain crosslegged, like a huckster between two +paniers. Such as were old or weak in the back had a staff artificially +fixed on the pannel, on which he could lean back and rest himself as if +sitting in a choir. We met the captain-general of this new garrison two +days after meeting his first band, having in the mean time met several +of these bands in the course of our journey, some a league, and others +two leagues from each other. The general travelled in great state, much +beyond the other bands, yet the second band had their arms much more +richly decorated than the first, and the third than the second, and so +every successive band more sumptuous than another. The captain-general +hunted and hawked all the way, having his own hounds and hawks along +with him, the hawks being hooded and lured as ours in England. The +horses that accompanied him for his own riding were six in number, and +were all richly caparisoned. These horses were not tall, but of the size +of our middling nags, short and well knit, small-headed, and very +mettlesome, and in my opinion far excelling the Spanish jennet in spirit +and action. His palanquin was carried before him, being lined with +crimson velvet, and having six bearers, two and two to carry at a time. + +Such excellent order was taken for the passing and providing of these +soldiers, that no person either inhabiting or travelling in the road by +which they passed and lodged, was in any way injured by them, but all of +them were as cheerfully entertained as any other guests, because they +paid for what they had as regularly as any other travellers. Every town +and village on the way being well provided with cooks-shops and +victualling houses, where they could get every thing they had a mind +for, and diet themselves at any sum they pleased, between the value of +an English penny and two shillings. The most generally used article of +food in Japan is rice of different qualities, as with our wheats and +other kinds of grain, the whitest being reckoned the best, and is used +instead of bread, to which they add fresh or salted fish, some pickled +herbs, beans, radishes, and other roots, salted or pickled; wild-fowl, +such as duck, mallard, teal, geese, pheasants, partridges, quails, and +various others, powdered or put up in pickle. They have great abundance +of poultry, as likewise of red and fallow deer, with wild boars, hares, +goats, and kine. They have plenty of cheese, but have no butter, and use +no milk, because they consider it to be of the nature of blood. + +They have great abundance of swine. Their wheat is all of the red kind, +and is as good as ours in England, and they plough both with oxen and +horses, as we do. During our residence in Japan, we bought the best hens +and pheasants at three-pence each, large fat pigs for twelve-pence, a +fat hog for five shillings, a good ox, like our Welsh runts, at sixteen +shillings, a goat for three shillings, and rice for a halfpenny the +pound. The ordinary drink of the common people is water, which they +drink warm with their meat, holding it to be a sovereign remedy against +worms in the _maw_. They have no other drink but what is distilled from +rice, as strong as our brandy, like Canary wine in colour, and not dear: +Yet, after drawing off the best and strongest, they still wring out a +smaller drink, which serves the poorer people who cannot reach the +stronger. + +The 30th of August we were furnished with nineteen horses at the charge +of the emperor, to carry up my attendants and the presents going in our +king's name to _Surunga_. I had a palanquin appointed for my use, and a +led horse, well caparisoned, to ride when I pleased, six men being +appointed to carry my palanquin on plain ground, but where the road grew +hilly, ten were allowed. The officer appointed by king _Foyne_ to +accompany me, took up these men and horses by warrants, from time to +time, and from place to place, just as post-horses are taken up in +England, and also procured us lodgings at night; and, according to the +custom of the country, I had a slave to run before me, carrying a pike. +We thus travelled every day fifteen or sixteen leagues, which we +estimated at three miles the league, and arrived on the 6th of September +at _Surunga_,[16] where the emperor resided. The road for the most part +is wonderfully even, and where it meets with mountains, a passage is cut +through. This is the main road of the whole country, and, is mostly +covered with sand and gravel. It is regularly measured off into leagues, +and at every league there is a small hillock of earth on each side of +the road, upon each of which is set a fair pine-tree, trimmed round like +an arbour. These are placed at the end of every league, that the +hackney-men and horse-hirers may not exact more than their due, which is +about three-pence for each league. + +[Footnote 16: Suruga, Surunga, or Sununnaga, is a town in the province +of that name, at the head of the gulf of Totomina, about 50 miles S.W. +from Jedo.--E.] + +The road is much frequented, and very full of people. Every where, at +short distances, we came to farms and country-houses, with numerous +villages, and frequent large towns. We had often likewise to ferry over +rivers, and we saw many _Futtakeasse_ or _Fotoquis_, being the +temples of the Japanese, which are situated in groves, and in the +pleasantest places of the country, having the priests that attend +upon the idols dwelling around the temples, as our friars in old time +used to do here in England. On approaching any of the towns, we saw +sundry crosses, having the dead bodies of persons who had been crucified +affixed to them, such being the ordinary mode of punishment for most +malefactors. On coming near Surunga, where the emperor keeps his court, +we saw a scaffold, on which lay the heads of several malefactors that had +been recently executed, with the dead bodies of some stretched on crosses, +while those of others had been all hewn in pieces by the natives, trying +the tempers of their _cattans_, as formerly mentioned when at Firando. +This was a most unpleasant sight for us, who had necessarily to pass +them on our way to Surunga. + +The city of Surunga is fully as large as London, with all its +suburbs.[17] We found all the handicraft tradesmen dwelling in the +outward parts and skirts of the town, while those of the better sort +resided in the heart of the city, not choosing to be annoyed by the +continual knocking, hammering, and other noise made by the artisans in +their several callings. As soon as we were settled in the lodgings +appointed for us in the city of Surunga, I sent Mr Adams to the imperial +residence, to inform the secretary of our arrival, and to request as +speedy dispatch as possible. He sent me back for answer, that I was +welcome, and that after resting myself for a day for two, I should be +admitted to an audience of the emperor. The 7th of September we were +occupied in arranging the presents, and providing little tables of +sweet-smelling wood on which to carry them, according to the custom of +the country. + +[Footnote 17: It is hardly necessary to remark, that this applies to +London in the year 1613, then vastly smaller than now, when Westminster +was a separate city, at some miles distance from London; the Strand, +Piccadilly, and Oxford Street, country roads; Whitehall a country +palace; and the whole _west end_ of the town, fields, farms, or country +villas.--E.] + +On the 8th of September I was carried in my palanquin to the castle of +Surunga, in which the emperor resides, and was attended by my merchants +and others, the presents being carried before me. In entering the +castle, we had to pass three draw-bridges, at each of which there was a +guard of soldiers. The approach to the presence was by means of a fair +and wide flight of stone stairs, where I was met and received by two +grave and comely personages; one of whom was _Codske dona_, the +emperor's secretary, and the other named _Fongo dona_, the admiral. By +these officers I was led into a handsome room, the floor of which was +covered by mats, on which we sat down cross-legged. Shortly after, they +led me into the presence-chamber, in which stood the chair of state, to +which they wished me to do reverence. This chair was about five feet +high, covered with cloth of gold, and very richly adorned on its back +and sides, but had no canopy. We then returned to the former room, and +in about a quarter of an hour word was brought that the emperor was in +the presence-chamber. They then led me to the door of the room where the +emperor was, making signs for me to go in, but dared not even to look up +themselves. The presents sent from our king to the emperor, and those +which I offered as from myself according to the custom of the country, +had all been placed in a very orderly manner upon mats in the +presence-chamber, before the emperor came there. + +Going into the chamber, of presence, I made my compliments to the +emperor according to our English fashion, and delivered our king's +letter to the emperor, who took it in his hand and raised it towards his +forehead, and commanded his interpreter, who sat at a good distance +behind, to desire Mr Adams to tell me that I was welcome from a long and +wearisome journey, that I might therefore rest me for a day or two, and +then his answer should be ready for our king. He then asked me if I did +not intend to visit his son at _Jedo_.[18] Answering, that I proposed +to do so, the emperor said, that orders should be given to provide me with +men and horses for the journey, and that the letters for our king should +be ready against my return. Then, taking leave respectfully of the +emperor, and coming to the door of the presence-chamber, I found the +secretary and admiral waiting to conduct me down the stairs where they +formerly met me, when I went into my palanquin and returned with my +attendants to our lodgings. + +[Footnote 18: Always called _Edoo_ in Purchas, but we have thought it +better to use the form of the name now universally adopted in +geography; but which name, from the orthography used by Captain Saris, +is probably pronounced in Japan, _Idu_, or _Eedoo_.--E.] + +On the 9th I sent the present intended for the secretary to be delivered +to him, for which he heartily thanked me, but would in no wise receive +it, saying, the emperor had so commanded, and that it was as much as his +life was worth to accept of any gift. He took, however, five pounds of +Socotorine aloes, to use for his health's sake. I this day delivered to +him the articles of privilege for trade, being _fourteen_ in number, +which we wished to have granted. These he desired to have abbreviated +into as few words as possible, as in all things the Japanese are fond of +brevity. Next day, being the 10th September, the articles so abridged +were sent to the secretary by Mr Adams; and on being shown by the +secretary to the emperor, they were all approved except one, by which, +as the Chinese had refused to trade with the English, we required +permission, in case of taking any Chinese vessels by force, that we +might freely bring them into the ports of Japan, and there make sale of +the goods. At the first, the emperor said we might take them, since they +refused to trade with us; but, after conference with the Chinese +resident, he altered his mind, and would not allow of that article. All +the rest were granted and confirmed under his great seal, which is not +impressed in wax as with us in England, but is stamped in print with red +ink. These articles of privilege were as follow:-- + +_Privileges granted by OGOSHOSAMA, Emperor of Japan, to the Governor and +Company of the London East India Company_.[19] + +[Footnote 19: This copy Captain Saris brought home and gave +me--_Purch._] + +1. We give free licence to the subjects of the king of Great Britain, +viz. To Sir Thomas Smith, governor, and the Company of the East Indian +Merchants Adventurers, for ever, safely to come into any of the ports of +our empire of Japan, with their ships and merchandize, without any +hinderance to them or their goods; and to abide, buy, sell, and barter, +according to their own manner, with all nations; to remain here as long +as they think good, and to depart at their pleasure. + +2. We grant to them freedom from custom for all such goods as they have +brought now, or may hereafter bring into our empire, or may export from +thence to any foreign part. And we authorise all ships that may +hereafter arrive from England, to proceed immediately to sell their +commodities, without any farther coming or sending to our court. + +3. If any of their ships shall happen to be in danger of shipwreck, we +command our subjects not only to assist them, but that such parts of the +ship or goods as may be saved, shall be returned to the captain, or the +cape merchant, or their assigns. That they may build one house, or more, +for themselves, in any part of our empire that they think fittest for +their purpose; and, at their departure, may sell the same at their +pleasure. + +4. If any English merchant, or others, shall die in our dominions, the +goods of the deceased shall remain at the disposal of the cape merchant; +and all offences committed by them shall be punished by the said cape +merchant at his discretion, our laws to take no hold of their persons or +goods. + +5. We command all our subjects trading with them for any of their +commodities, to pay them for the same without delay, or to return their +wares. + +6. For such commodities as they have now brought, or may bring +hereafter, that are fitting for our proper use and service, we command +that no arrest be made thereof, but that a fair price be agreed with the +cape merchant, according as they may sell to others, and that prompt +payment be made on the delivery of the goods. + +7. If, in the discovery of other countries for trade, and the return of +their ships, they shall need men or victuals, we command that our +subjects shall furnish them, for their money, according as their needs +may require. + +8. Without other passport, they shall and may set out upon the discovery +of _Yeadso_, or _Jesso_, or any other part in or about our empire. + + From our castle in Surunga, this first day of the ninth + month, in the eighteenth year of our _dary_, or reign. + Sealed with our broad seal, &c. + (_Underwritten_) + + +MINNA MOTTONO. + +_Yei. Ye. Yeas_.[20] + +[Footnote 20: Kempper writes this other name of _Ongosio Sama_, as he +calls him, _Ijejas_; which, according to the English orthography, is +_Iyeyas_.--Astl. I. 489. b.] + +On the 11th of September, the present intended for the mint-master was +delivered to him, which he received very thankfully, and sent me in +return two Japanese gowns of taffeta, quilted with silk cotton. The 12th +Mr Adams was sent to the mint-master, who is the emperor's merchant, +having charge of the mint and all the ready money, being in great +estimation with the emperor, as he had made a vow, whenever the emperor +dies, to cut out his own bowels and die with him. The purpose of Mr +Adams waiting upon him at this time, was to carry a list of the prices +of our English commodities. About noon of this same day, being furnished +with horses and men by the emperor, as formerly specified, we set out +for Jedo. The country between Surunga and Jedo we found well peopled, +with many _Fotoquis_, or idol temples. Among others which we passed, was +one having an image of great reputation, called _Dabis_, made of copper, +hollow within, but of substantial thickness. We estimated its height to +be twenty-one or twenty-two feet, being in the form of a man kneeling on +the ground, and sitting on his heels; the whole of wonderful size, and +well proportioned, and being dressed in a gown cast along with the +figure. Some of our men went into the inside of this idol, and hooped +and hallooed, which made an exceeding great noise. It is highly +reverenced by all native travellers who pass that way. We found many +characters and marks made upon it by its visitors, which some of my +followers imitated, making their marks in like manner. This temple and +idol stand in the main road of pilgrimage to _Tencheday_, which is much +frequented for devotion, as both night and day people of all ranks and +conditions are continually going or returning from that place. + +Mr Adams told me that he had been at the _Fotoqui_, or temple dedicated +to Tencheday, to which image they make this devout pilgrimage. According +to his report, one of the fairest virgins of the country is brought +monthly into that _Fotoqui_, and there sits alone in a room neatly +fitted up, in a sober manner; and, at certain times, this _Tencheday_, +who is thought to be the devil, appears unto her, and having carnally +known her, leaves with her at his departure certain scales, like unto +the scales of fishes. Whatever questions she is desired by the _bonzes_, +or priests of the _Fotoqui_, to ask, _Tencheday_ resolves. Every +month a fresh virgin is provided for the temple, but Mr Adams did not know +what became of the former.[21] + +[Footnote 21: The editor of Astley's Collection, vol. I. p. 487, note b. +very gravely informs his readers what they certainly are aware of, that +the gallant must have been one of the _bonzes_, or priests.--E.] + +We arrived at _Jedo_ on the 14th September. This city is much larger +than _Surunga_, and much better and more sumptuously built, and made a +very glorious appearance to us on our approach; all the ridge-tiles and +corner-tiles of the roofs being richly gilded and varnished, as also the +door-posts of the houses. They have no glass in their windows, but have +large windows of board, opening in leaves, and well adorned with +paintings, as in Holland. In the chief street of the town there is a +great _cawsay_ all through from end to end, underneath which flows a +river, or large stream of water; and at every fifty paces there is a +well-head, or pit, substantially built of free-stone, having buckets +with which the inhabitants draw water, both for their ordinary uses and +in case of fire. This street is as broad as any of our best streets in +England. + +On the 15th I gave notice of my arrival to _Sadda-dona_, the secretary +of the young king, or son of the emperor, requesting him to inform the +king. I had access to the king on the 17th, and delivered to him the +presents sent by our king, as also some from myself, as is the custom of +the country. The king holds his court in the castle of Jedo, which is +much stronger and more sumptuous than that of Surunga; and the king was +besides better guarded and attended than his father the emperor. +_Saddadona_, his secretary, is father to _Codskedona_ the emperor's +secretary, his years and experience fitting him to have the government +and direction of the king or prince successor, who appeared to us to be +about forty-two years of age. + +My entertainment and access to the king here at Jedo was much like that +formerly mentioned with the emperor his father at Surunga. He accepted +very kindly the letters and presents from our king, bidding me welcome, +and desiring me to rest and refresh myself, and that his letters and +presents in return should be made ready with all speed. On the 19th I +delivered the presents to _Saddadona_. This day, thirty-two men being +committed prisoners to a certain house, for not paying their debts, and +being in the stocks within the same, it took fire in the night by some +casualty, and they were all burnt to death. Towards evening, the king +of Jedo sent me two suits of varnished armour, as a present to our king; +and sent likewise for myself a _tatch_ and a _waggadash_, the +former being a long sword which is only worn in Japan by soldiers of the +highest rank, and the latter being a singular weapon resembling a Welsh +hook. I was informed that the distance from Jedo to the norther-most +part of Japan, was estimated at twenty-two days journey on horseback. + +I left Jedo on the 21st September by boat, and came to _Oringgaw_,[22] +a town upon the sea-side, where is an excellent harbour, in which ships +may ride with as much safety as in the river Thames, and the passage +from which by sea to Jedo is very safe and good; so that it would be +much better for our ships to sail to this port than to Firando, as +Oringgaw is on the main island of Japan or _Niphon_, and is only +fourteen or fifteen leagues from Jedo, the capital and greatest city of +the empire. Its only inconvenience is, that it is not so well supplied +with flesh and other victuals as Firando, but is in all other respects +much preferable. From thence we proceeded on the 29th to Surunga, where +we remained in waiting for the letters and presents from the emperor. On +the 8th of October I received the emperor's letter, of which a +translation is subjoined, and I then also received the privileges of +trade, formerly quoted, the original of which I left with Mr Cocks.[23] + +[Footnote 22: No such place as Oringgaw is to be found in modern maps of +Japan. Jedo is situated at the head of a deep gulf of the same name, in +the south-east corner of Japan. About the distance indicated in the +text, there is a town and bay named _Odavara_, on the western side of +the gulf, and in the direct way back to Surunga, which may possibly be +the _Oringgaw_ of the text.--E.] + +[Footnote 23: The characters have by some been thought to be those of +China, but I compared them with Chinese books, and they seemed to me +quite different, yet not _letters_ to compound words by spelling, as +ours, but _words_ expressed in their several characters, such as are +used by the _Chinais_ and as the brevity manifesteth. I take them to be +characters peculiar to Japan.--_Purch._ + +In a marginal reference in the plate given by Purchas, the lines are +said to read downwards, beginning at the right hand. It may possibly be +so: But they appear _letters_, or literal characters, to _compound words +by spelling_, and to be read like those used in Europe, from left to +right horizontally. In a future portion of our work, the subject of the +Japanese language and writing will be farther elucidated; when, we +believe, it will appear that they have two modes of writing, one by +_verbal_ or _ideal_ characters like the Chinese, and the other by +_literal_ signs like all the rest of the world.--E.] + +_Letter from the Emperor of Japan to the King of Great Britain_. + +Your majesty's kind letter, sent me by your servant Captain Saris, who +is the first of your subjects that I have known to arrive in any part of +my dominions, I heartily embrace, being not a little glad to understand +of your great wisdom and power, as having three plentiful and mighty +kingdoms under your powerful command. I acknowledge your majesty's great +bounty, in sending me so undeserved a present of many rare things, such +as my land affordeth not, neither have I ever before seen: Which I +receive, not as from a stranger, but as from your majesty, whom I esteem +as myself, desiring the continuance of friendship with your highness: +And that it may consist with your good pleasure to send your subjects to +any part or port of my dominions, where they shall be most heartily +welcome, applauding much their worthiness in the admirable knowledge of +navigation, as having with much facility discovered a country so remote, +not being amazed by the distance of so mighty a gulf, nor the greatness +of such infinite clouds and storms, from prosecuting the honourable +enterprises of discovery and merchandising, in which they shall find me +to encourage them as they desire. By your said subject, I return to your +majesty a small token of my love, desiring you to accept the same as +from one who much rejoices in your friendship. And, whereas your +majesty's subjects have desired certain privileges for trade and the +settlement of a factory in my dominions, I have not only granted what +they desired, but have confirmed the same to them under my broad seal, +for the better establishment thereof. Given from my castle of _Surunga_, +this fourth day of the ninth month, in the eighteenth year of our reign, +according to our computation; resting your majesty's friend, the highest +commander in the kingdom of Japan. + +Subscribed + +Minna Muttono_[24]. _Yei. Ye. Yeas_. + +[Footnote 24: In the copy of the privileges, Purchas gives this name +_Mottono_ while the editor of Astley's Collection has altered it to +_Monttono_. In the privileges formerly inserted, the date is made in the +_nineteenth_ month, perhaps an error of the press in the Pilgrims, which +we have therefore corrected to _ninth_.--E.] + +At my return to Surunga, I found a Spanish ambassador from the +Philippine islands, who had only been once introduced to the emperor, +and delivered his presents, being certain Chinese damasks, and five jars +of European sweet wine, and could not obtain any farther access to the +emperor. The purpose of his embassy was, to require that such Portuguese +and Spaniards as were then in Japan, not authorised by the king of +Spain, might be delivered up to him, that he might carry them to the +Philippines. This the emperor refused, saying his country was free, and +none should be forced out of it: But, if the ambassador could persuade +any to go with him, they should not be detained. The cause of the +ambassador making this request was on account of the great want of men +to defend the Molucca islands against the Dutch, who were then making +great preparations for the entire conquest of these islands. After the +ambassador had waited for an answer till the time limited by his +commission was expired, and receiving none, he went away much +dissatisfied: And when at the sea side, an answer was returned, as +mentioned above, together with a slender present of five Japanese gowns, +and two _cattans_ or swords. + +About a month before I came to Surunga, being displeased with the +Christians, the emperor issued a proclamation commanding that they +should all remove immediately, and carry their churches to Nangasaki, a +maritime town about eight leagues from Firando, and that no Christian +church should be permitted, neither any mass be sung, within ten leagues +of his court, on pain of death. Some time after, twenty-seven natives, +men of good fashion, being assembled in an hospital or Christian +Leper-house, where they had mass performed, and this coming to the +knowledge of the emperor, they were all commanded to be shut up in a +house for a night, and to be led to execution next day. That same +evening, another man was committed to the same house for debt, who at +his coming was a heathen and quite ignorant of Christ or his holy +religion; but, next morning, when the officer called at the door for the +Christians to come forth for execution, and those who renounced it to +remain behind, this man had been so instructed during the night by the +others, that he came resolutely forth along with the rest, and was +crucified with them. + +We departed from Surunga on the 9th of October, and during our journey +towards _Miaco_ we had for the most part much rain, by which the rivers +were greatly swelled, and we were forced to stop by the way, so that it +was the 16th of October before we got there. _Miaco_ is the largest city +in Japan, depending mostly upon trade, and having the chief _Fotoqui_ +or temple of the whole empire, which is all built of freestone, and is +as long as the western end of St Paul's in London from the choir; being +also as high, arched in the roof and borne upon pillars as that is. Many +_bonzes_ are here in attendance for their maintenance, as priests are +among the papists. They have here an altar, on which the votaries offer +rice and small money, called _cundrijus_, twenty of which are equal to +an English shilling, which offerings are applied to the use of the +bonzes. Near this altar is an idol, called _Mannada_, much resembling +that of _Dabis_ formerly mentioned, and like it made of copper, but much +higher, as it reaches up to the arched roof. This _Fotoqui_ was begun to +be built by _Taicosama_, and has since been finished by his son, having +been ended only while we were there. According to report, there were +buried within its enclosure the ears and noses of 3000 Coreans, who were +massacred at one time; and upon their grave a mount is raised, having a +pyramid on its summit, the mount being grown over with grass, and very +neatly kept. The horse that Taicosama last rode upon is kept near this +_Fotoqui_, having never been ridden since, and his hoofs have grown +extraordinarily long by age. + +This _Fotoqui_ stands on the top of a high hill, and on either side, as +you ascend the hill, there are fifty pillars of freestone, at ten paces +each from the other, having a lantern on the top of each, which are all +lighted up with oil every night. There are many other Fotoquis in this +city. In Miaco the Portuguese jesuits have a very stately college, in +which there are several native Japanese jesuits, who preach, and have +the New Testament printed in the Japanese language. Many of the native +children are bred up in this college, where they are instructed in the +Christian religion, according to the doctrines of the Romish church; and +there are not less than five or six thousand natives professing +Christianity in this city. The tradesmen and artificers of all kinds in +this city are all distributed by themselves, every trade and occupation +having its own particular streets, and not mingled together as with us. +We remained some time in Miaco, waiting for the emperor's present, which +was at length delivered, being ten _beobs_, or large pictures, for being +hung up in a chamber. + +The 20th of October we departed from Miaco, and came that night to +_Fushimi_.[25] We arrived about noon of the next day at Osaka, where the +common people behaved very rudely to us, some calling after us _Tosin! +Tosin!_ that is, Chinese, while others called us _Coré! Coré!_ or +Coreans, and flung stones at us; even the greatest people of the city +animating and setting on the rabble to abuse us. We here found the +galley waiting for us which had brought us from Firando, having waited +for us all the time of our absence at the expence of king _Foyne_. We +embarked in this galley on the 24th of October, and arrived at Firando +on the 6th November, where we were kindly welcomed by old _Foyne_. +During the time of my absence, our people had sold very little goods, as +according to the customs of Japan no stranger can offer goods for sale +without the express permission of the emperor. Besides, as our chiefest +commodity intended for this country was broad cloth, which had latterly +been sold there at the rate of forty Spanish dollars the _matte_, which +is two yards and a quarter as formerly mentioned, and as the natives saw +that we were not much in the habit of wearing it ourselves, they were +more backward in buying it than they used to be. They said to us, "You +commend your cloth to us, while you yourselves wear little of it; your +better sort of people wearing silken garments, while the meanest are +clothed in fustians, &c." Wherefore, that good counsel, though late, may +come to some good purpose, I wish that our nation would be more inclined +to use this our native manufacture of our own country, by which we may +better encourage and allure others to its use and expenditure. + +[Footnote 25: Fusimo, a town about ten miles from Miaco, on a river that +runs into the head of the bay of Osaka.--E.] + + +§8. _Occurrences at Firando, during the Absence of Captain Saris_.[26] + +The 7th August, 1613, all things being in readiness, our general Captain +Saris departed from Firando in company with Mr Adams, for the court of +the emperor of Japan, taking along with him Mr Tempest Peacock, Mr +Richard Wickham, Edward Saris, Walter Carwarden, Diego Fernandos, John +Williams a tailor, John Head a cook, Edward Bartan the surgeon's mate, +John Japan _Jurebasso_,[27] Richard Dale coxswain, and Anthony Ferry a +sailor; having a cavalier or gentleman belonging to king Foyne as their +protector, with two of his servants, and two native servants belonging +to Mr Adams. They embarked in a barge or galley belonging to the king, +which rowed twenty oars of a side, and we fired thirteen pieces of +ordnance at their departure. The old king sent 100 _tayes_ of Japanese +money to our general before his departure, for his expenditure on the +way, which I placed to account, by our general's order, as money lent. + +[Footnote 26: This subdivision is taken from observations written by +Richard Cockes, Cape merchant, or chief factor at Firando. These +observations are a separate article in the Pilgrims of Purchas, vol. +I. pp. 395--405, and in Astley's Collection, vol. I. pp. 509--517; but +are inserted in this place as calculated to render this first account of +the English trade in Japan a complete and unbroken narrative.--E.] + +[Footnote 27: John Japan seems a fabricated name; perhaps a Japanese +Christian named John, and the addition of _Jurebasso_ may signify that +he acted as interpreter.--E.] + +Next day, I went to wait upon the two kings, as from our general, to +thank them for having so well provided for his journey, which they took +in good part. I suspect the old king had notice that some of our men had +behaved ill last night; as he desired me to remind the master to look +well to the people on board, and that I should look carefully to the +behaviour of those on shore, that all things might go on as well in the +absence of the general as when he was present, otherwise the shame would +be ours, but the dishonour his. On the 9th, a Japanese boy named Juan, +who spoke good Spanish, came and offered to serve me for nine or ten +years, and even to go with me to England if I pleased, asking no wages +but what I was pleased to give. I took him into my service, and that the +rather, because I found Miguel, the _jurebasso_ left with me by Mr +Adams, was somewhat stubborn, and loved to run about at his pleasure, +leaving me often without any person who could speak a word of the +Japanese language. This Juan is a Christian, most of his kindred +dwelling at Nangasaki, only one living here at Firando, who came along +with him and passed his word for his honesty and fidelity. Juan had +served a Spaniard at Manilla for three years, where he had acquired the +Spanish language. I engaged him, and bought for him two Japanese +garments, which cost me fourteen _mas_. + +The 13th I shewed our commodities to some merchants of _Maioco_, [Miaco] +but they bought nothing, and seemed chiefly to desire to have gunpowder. +This day _Semidono_ went to visit our ship, accompanied by several +stranger gentlemen, and came afterwards to see our English house, where +I gave them the best entertainment in my power. The 19th at night began +the great feast of the pagans, when they banquet and make merry all +night by candle-light at the graves of their deceased kindred, whom +they invite to partake.[28] It lasts three nights and the intermediate +days; when, by command of the king, every house must new gravel the +street before its door, and hang out candles all night. I was not slack +in obeying this order, and I was informed that a poor man was put to +death and his house shut up, for neglecting to comply with the order. On +this occasion, the China captain furnished me with two very decent paper +lanthorns. Being informed that the kings intended to ride about the +streets, and to make me a visit, I provided a banquet for them, and +waited till after midnight, but they came not. The 20th, 21st, and 22d, +I sent presents to both the kings, being informed that such was the +custom of the country, sending them wine and confections; as likewise to +_Nobesane_ the young king's brother; to _Semidono_, the old king's +governor, and to _Unagense_, which were all very thankfully accepted. +Some _cavalliers_, or Japanese gentlemen, came to visit me during the +festival, to whom I gave the best entertainment I could procure. + +[Footnote 28: This pagan feast is a kind of Candlemas or +Allsouls.--_Purchas_.] + +The 23d we made an end of landing our gunpowder, being in all +ninety-nine barrels, of which I advised our general by letter, +requesting him to reserve a sufficiency for the ship, in case he sold it +to the emperor. We landed several other things, which the master thought +had best be sent ashore, as our men began to filch and steal, that they +might go to taverns and brothels. This day Mr Melsham the purser and I +dined with Semidono, who used us kindly. The master and Mr Eaton were +likewise invited, but did not go. The great festival ended this day, +when three troops of dancers went about the town, with flags or banners, +their music being drums and _pans_,[29] to the sound of which they +danced at the doors of all the great men, as also at their pagodas and +at the sepulchres. + +[Footnote 29: Probably _gongs_, which very much resemble a brass +frying-pan.--E.] + +The 24th at night, all the streets were hung with candles, as the young +king and his brother, with _Semidono, Nabesone_, and many others, went +in masquerade to dance at the house of the old king. The young king and +his brother were on horseback, having canopies carried over them, all +the rest being a-foot, and they were accompanied by drums and _kettles_, +as the before-mentioned dancers, _Nabesone_ playing on a fife. I was +informed they meant to visit our house on their return, wherefore I +provided a banquet and sat up for them till after midnight; but they +returned in disorder, I think owing to some discontent, and none of them +entered our house. Captain _Brower_ likewise passed our door, but would +not look at us, and we made as little account of him. The 27th we landed +three pieces of ordnance, having three landed formerly, all whole +_culverins_ of iron. The old king came down to the shore while our men +were about this job, and seeing only twenty men, offered seventy or a +100 Japanese to help them; but our people landed them all very quickly +in his sight, at which he expressed much astonishment, saying that an +hundred of his men could not have done it so soon. He was so much +pleased with the activity of our men on this occasion, that he sent for +a barrel of wine and some fish, which he gave among them as a reward for +their labouring so lustily. + +The 28th, I received two letters from our general, dated the 19th and +20th of the month, as also two others from Mr Peacock and Mr Wickham, +which were brought me by the governor of _Shimonoseke_.[30] This +governor did not land at Firando, but delivered these letters on board +our ship to the master, proceeding directly for Nangasaki, and promising +to return hither shortly. I also carried a letter for the old king +_Foyne_, which was brought by the same governor, being accompanied on +the occasion by Mr Melsham and _Hernando_. Foyne at this visit made a +present of a _cattan_ or Japanese sword to Mr Melsham, and another with +a Spanish dagger to Hernando, giving likewise both to them and me +several bunches of garlic. He also gave us leave to dry our gunpowder on +the top of the fortress, offering some of his own people to help ours, +if we had need of them. This day I brought on shore to our house +twenty-two bars of lead, together with 125 culverin shot, round and +langridge. When we were about to sit down to supper, the old king came +to visit us, and being very merry he sat down to supper with us, and +took such fare as we had in good part. + +[Footnote 30: Simonosequi is a town on the north side of the straits +between the island of Kiusiua and the north-western end of Niphon.--E.] + +The 1st September, the old king and all his nobles made a masquerade, +and went next night to visit the young king his grandson, accompanied by +music, as formerly mentioned, all the streets being hung with lanterns. +As I was told he meant to visit our house on his return, I made ready +for him and waited till after midnight; but he passed by with all his +company without coming in. I reckoned he had more than 3000 persons in +his train, for which, as I think, he passed by, not wishing to trouble +us with so great a multitude. On the 2d _Semidono_ and others who were +appointed by the king, measured all the houses in the street, ours among +the rest; which I understood was for the purpose of a general taxation, +to be levied by appointment of the emperor, for the construction of +fortresses. I entertained them to their satisfaction. The 4th we had +news that the queen of Spain was dead, and that the king was a suitor +for the princess Elizabeth of England. The 6th, a nobleman came to visit +our English house, and brought me a present of two great bottles of wine +and a basket of pears. I entertained him as well as I could, and he went +away contented. + +We had much rain in the morning of the 7th September, accompanied by +wind, which increased in force all day, varying between the east and +south. In the night between the 7th and 8th, the wind rose to a +_tuffoon_ or storm of such extreme violence as I had never witnessed, +neither had the like been experienced in this country during the memory +of man. It overturned above an hundred houses in Firando, and unroofed +many others, among which was the house of old king Foyne. An extensive +wall surrounding the house of the young king was blown down, and the +boughs and branches of trees were broken off and tossed about with +wonderful violence. The sea raged with such fury, that it undermined a +great wharf or quay at the Dutch factory, broke down the stone wall, +carried away the landing stairs, sunk and broke to pieces two barks +belonging to the Dutch, and forty or fifty other barks, then in the +roads, were broken and sunk. At our house, the newly built wall of our +kitchen was broken down by the sea, which likewise flowed into and threw +down our oven. The tiles likewise were blown off from the roofs of our +house and kitchen, both of which were partly unroofed. Our house rocked +as if shaken by an earthquake, and we spent the night in extreme fear, +either of being buried under the ruins of our factory, or of perishing +along with it by fire; for all night long, the barbarous unruly common +people ran up and down the streets with lighted firebrands, while the +wind carried large pieces of burning wood quite over the tops of the +houses, as it whirled up the burning timbers of the several houses +previously thrown down, hurling fire through the air in great flakes, +very fearful to behold, and threatening an entire conflagration of the +town; and I verily believe, if it had not been for the extreme quantity +of rain, contrary to the usual nature of tuffoons, that the whole town +had been consumed. This terrible wind and prodigious rain were +accompanied the whole night by incessant flashes of lightning and +tremendous peals of thunder. Our ship rode out the gale in the roads, +having out five cables and anchors, of which one old cable gave way, +but, thanks be to God, no other injury was sustained, except that our +long boat and skiff both broke adrift, but were both afterwards +recovered. We afterwards learnt that this tuffoon did more damage at +Nangasaki than here at Firando; for it destroyed above twenty Chinese +junks, together with the Spanish ship which brought the ambassador from +Manilla. + +On the 12th, two merchants from Miaco came to our English house, to whom +I shewed all our commodities. They laid aside two pieces of broad cloth, +one black and the other _stammel_, the best they could find, for which +they offered seven _tayes_ the yard. They also offered for out _Priaman_ +gold eleven tayes of silver for one of gold. But they went away without +concluding any bargain. This day, one of our men named Francis Williams, +being drunk ashore, struck one of the servants of king Foyne with a +cudgel, although the man had given him no offence, and had not even +spoken to him. The Japanese came to our house making great complaints, +and was very angry, not without cause, and told me he would complain to +his king of the bad usage he had received. He had three or four others +along with him, who had seen him abused, and who said the aggressor was +just gone off to the ship. I gave them fair words, desiring them to go +on board and find out the man who had committed the offence, and they +should be sure of having him punished, and for that purpose I sent +Miguel, our _jurebasso_, on board along with them. He did so, and +pointed out Williams as the culprit, who stoutly denied the accusation +with many oaths, but the affair was too notorious, and the master +ordered him to be seized to the capstan in presence of the complainants, +upon which even they entreated for his pardon, knowing that he was +drunk. But the fellow was so unruly, that he took up an iron crow to +strike the Japanese in the master's presence, and even abused the master +in the grossest terms.[31] + +[Footnote 31: Of many misdemeanours, I permit some to pass the press, +that the cause of so many deaths in the Indies might be seen, rather to +be imputed to their own misconduct, than the intemperature of the +climate, and for a caveat to others, who may send or be sent into +_ethnicke_ regions: Yet do I conceal the most and worst.--_Purch._] + +Learning, on the 13th, that old king Foyne was sick, I sent our +jurebasso Miguel to visit him, carrying as a present a great bottle of +our general's sweet wine, and two boxes of conserves, comfits, and +sugar-bread. Miguel was likewise directed to offer my best service, and +to say that I was sorry for his sickness, and would have waited on him +myself, but that I supposed company was not agreeable to a sick man. +Foyne accepted my present in very good part, returning many thanks, and +desiring me to ask for any thing we were in need of, either for the use +of the ship or our factory, which he would take care we should be +provided with. + +The master came to the factory on the 14th early in the morning, telling +me that most of the ship's company had lain ashore all night without +leave, although the ship was aground, and there had been a heavy wind +all night. He wished therefore, that I would allow our jurebasso, +Miguel, to accompany him in seeking them out. He went accordingly +accompanied by Miguel and Mr Melsham our purser, and found several of +the men drinking and domineering, among whom he bestowed a few blows, +ordering them aboard. Two of the men, named Lambert and Colphax, though +ordered aboard, remained ashore all day, notwithstanding the great need +of hands in the ship, where it had been necessary to hire several +Japanese to assist. Lambert and Colphax being drunk, went out into the +fields and fought, on which occasion Lambert was hurt in the arm, and +remained drunk ashore all night; as did Boles and Christopher Evans, who +had done so for two or three nights before, and had a violent quarrel +about a girl. + +On the 17th, being informed that _Bastian_, the keeper of the brothel +frequented by our men, had threatened to kill me and such as came along +with me, if I came any more to his house to seek for our men, I went and +complained to the young king, the old one being sick. At my request, he +issued a proclamation, that no Japanese should admit our people into +their houses after day-light, under severe penalties; and that it should +be lawful for me, or any other in my company, to enter any of the native +houses in search of our men, not only without molestation or hinderance, +but that the native inhabitants should aid and assist me; and if the +doors were not opened at my desire, I was authorised to break them open. +A soldier was sent to inform _Bastian_ to be careful not to molest or +disturb me, as he might expect to be the first that should pay for it. +This gave much offence to our people, insomuch that some of them swore +they would have drink in the fields if they were not suffered to have it +in the town, for drink they would. + +The 26th, _Novasco-dono_ came to visit me at the factory, bringing me a +present of two bottles of wine, seven loaves of fresh bread, and a dish +of flying-fish. While he was with me, the old king came past our door, +where he stopt, saying he had met two men in the street whom he thought +strangers, and not belonging to us; he therefore desired that Swinton +and our jurebasso might go with one of his attendants to see who they +were. They turned out to be John Lambert and Jacob Charke, who were +drinking water at a door in the street through which the king had gone. +I was glad the king looked so narrowly after them, as it caused our men +to be more careful of their proceedings. + +Mr William Pauling, our master's mate, who had been long ill of a +consumption, died at the English house upon the 27th of September, of +which circumstance I apprised the king, requesting permission to bury +him among the Christians, which was granted. We accordingly put the body +in a winding-sheet, and coffined it up, waiting to carry it to the grave +next morning. Our master, and several others of the ship's company, came +ashore in the morning to attend the funeral, when we were given to +understand that the body must be transported by water as far as the +Dutch house, because the _bonzes_, or priests, would not suffer us to +pass with the corpse through the street before their pagoda, or idol +temple. Accordingly the master sent for the skiff, in which the coffin +was transported by water to the place appointed, while we went there by +land, and carried it thence to the burial-place; the purser walking +before, and all the rest following after the coffin, which was covered +by a Holland sheet, above which was a silk quilt. We were attended by a +vast number of the natives, both young and old, curious to see our +manner of burial. After the corpse was interred, we all returned to the +factory, where we had a collation, and then our people returned to the +ship. I had almost forgotten to remark, that we had much ado to get any +native to dig the grave in which a Christian was to be buried, neither +would they permit the body to be conveyed by water in any of their +boats. + +At this time the king commanded that all the streets in Firando should +be cleaned, and that gutters should be made on each side to convey the +water from them, all the streets to be new gravelled, and the +water-channels to be covered with flat stones. This work was all done in +one day, every one performing so much of it as was in front of his own +house, and it was admirable to see the diligence every person used on +this occasion. Our house was not the last in having this task performed, +as our landlord, the Chinese captain, set a sufficient number of men to +do the work. + +The 30th, some other merchants of Miaco came to look at our commodities, +who offered twelve tayes the fathom for our best _stammel_, or red +cloth; but they went away without making any bargain. At this time we +had very heavy winds, both by day and night, so that we were in fear of +another tuffoon, on which account all the fishers hauled their boats +ashore, and every one endeavoured to secure the roofings of their +houses. A week before this, a _bose_, bonze or conjurer, had predicted +to the king that this tempest was to come. About this time our surgeon, +being in his cups, came into a house where a _bose_ was conjuring for a +woman who wanted to know if her husband or friends would return from +sea. So when the _bose_ was done, the surgeon gave him three-pence to +conjure again, and to tell him when our general would return to Firando. +In the end, the _bose_ told him that the general would return within +eighteen days, pretending that he heard a voice answer from behind a +wall, both when he conjured for the woman, and now when he conjured for +the surgeon. + +On the 2d of October, the master sent me word that some of the men had +run away with the skiff. These were John Bowles, John Saris, John +Tottie, Christopher Evans, Clement Locke, Jasper Malconty, and James the +Dutchman. While in the way to the king to get boats to send after them, +our Dutch _jurebasso_ came running after me, and told me our people were +on the other side making merry at a tippling-house. On this information +I returned to the English house to get a boat for the master to go and +look them out, but they proved to be three others, William Marinell, +Simeon Colphax, and John Dench, who had hired a boat and gone to another +island, not being allowed to walk by night in Firando. By this mistake +our deserters had the more time to get away. This night, about eleven, +the old king's house, on the other side of the water, took fire, and +was burnt to the ground in about an hour. I never saw a more vehement +fire for the time it lasted, and it is thought his loss is very great. +The old king is said to have set it on fire himself, by going about in +the night with lighted canes, some sparks from which had fallen among +the mats and set them on fire. + +I went next day to visit the old king, giving him to understand, by +means of his governor, that I was extremely sorry for the misfortune +that had befallen him, and would have come in person to give all the +assistance in my power, but was doubtful if my presence would have been +acceptable, being a stranger; and begged leave to assure him, that he +should find me ready at all times, even with the hazard of my life, to +do him every service in my power. He gave me many thanks for my good +will, saying, that the loss he had sustained was as nothing in his +estimation. On my return to our house, I was met by the young king going +to visit his grandfather. Before noon, we had word that our runaways +were upon a desert island about two leagues from Firando, of which I +gave notice to both kings, requesting their aid and council how we might +best bring them back. They answered, that they would fetch them back +dead or alive, yet would be loth to kill them, lest we might want hands +to navigate the ship back to England. I returned many thanks for the +care they had of us, yet sent them word we still had a sufficiency of +honest men to carry our ship to England, even although we should lose +these knaves. In fine, the king fitted out two boats full of soldiers to +go after them, with positive orders to bring them back dead or alive, +which I made known to our master, who wished much to go along with them, +and did so accordingly. + + +9. _Continuation of Occurrences at Firando, during the Absence of the +General_. + +On the 4th of October, a report was current in Firando that the _Devil_ +had revealed to the _bose_, [bonzes] or conjurers, that the town was to +be burned to ashes that night, on which criers went about the streets +the whole night, making so much noise that I could hardly get any rest, +giving warning to all the inhabitants to extinguish their fires. But the +devil turned out a liar, for no such thing happened. The 5th, old king +_Foyne-same_ came to our house, and was entertained to the best of our +ability, when he told me our runaway seamen could not escape being +taken, as he had sent two other armed boats after them, besides the two +formerly mentioned. While I was talking with him, there came a gentleman +from the emperor's court with a letter, and told me that our general +would be back to Firando in eight or ten days, as he had received his +dispatches from the emperor before this gentleman left the court. At +this time king Foyne told me that _Bon-diu_, the king or governor of +Nangasaki, who is brother to the empress, was to be at Firando next day, +and that it would be proper for our ship to fire off three or four +pieces of cannon as he passed. He told me likewise, that the king or +governor of a town called _Seam_, was then in Firando. + +The master of our ship, Mr James Foster, returned from Nangasaki on the +7th, bringing our skiff with him, but all the deserters had got +sanctuary in that town, so that he had not been able to see or speak +with any of them. I was informed that Miguel, our jurebasso, whom I had +sent along with the master as linguist, had dealt fraudulently both with +the master and me, for several Japanese told me that he had spoken to +our people and advised them to absent themselves. Knowing this, and +being doubtful of ever recovering our people unless _Bondiu_ were +extraordinarily dealt with, I resolved to give that personage a present +to secure him in our interest. In the afternoon, as he was passing on +foot along the street in which was our house, along with the young king +who gave him the post of honour, attended by about five hundred +followers, I went out into the street and saluted them. Bon-diu stopped +at our door and thanked me for the salute given him in passing our ship. +I requested he would excuse me if I had hitherto neglected any part of +my duty towards him, which was owing to my small acquaintance with the +country and its customs, but that I meant to wait upon him either at his +lodgings or aboard his junk, before he left Firando. He answered, that I +should be heartily welcome, and remained so long in conversation, that +it was quite dark before he got to his lodgings. At this time I carried +the present to him, which he accepted in good part, offering to do our +nation all the good in his power at court, whither he was now bound, or +to serve us all he could any where else. Of his own accord, he began now +to speak about the deserters, asking me if they should all be pardoned +for his sake, if he brought them back to us? I answered, that the power +of pardon belonged to our general, not to me, and that I had no doubt +they might easily get free, except one or two of the chiefs in this and +other disorders, who richly deserved punishment. He then said that he +wished them all pardoned, without any exception: to which I answered, +that I was sure our general would most willingly do any thing desired by +his highness, or the two kings of Firando. In conclusion, he said, if I +would give it under my hand on the faith of a Christian, that all should +be pardoned for this time, and that I would procure the general to +confirm this at his return, he would then send to Nangasaki for the +deserters, and deliver them into my custody, otherwise he would not +meddle in the matter, lest he might occasion any of their deaths. I +answered, I was contented with any thing his highness was pleased to +command, and so gave him the desired writing under my hand, conditioning +that they were all to be sent back. I then returned to our house after +which the Dutch waited upon him with their present, but we were before +hand with them. + +On the 8th _Semidono_ passed our house, and told me that king _Bon-diu_ +had a brother along with him, to whom it would be proper that we should +give a present, but not so large as that given to Bon-diu. On this, +advising with the other gentlemen, I laid out a present for him, and on +going to deliver it, I found the Dutch before me with theirs, Captain +Brower going with it himself. He accepted it very kindly, promising his +interest and assistance to our nation, both at court and any where else. +He came soon afterwards to our house, accompanied by many gentlemen, +when they looked over all our commodities, yet went away without making +any purchases. On this occasion he gave me a small _cattan_, and I gave +him two glass bottles, two gally-pots, and about half a _cattee_ of +picked cloves, which he said he wanted for medicinal purposes. I +likewise gave him and his followers a collation, with which they all +seemed contented. + +Soon afterwards, _Bon-diu_ sent a gentleman to me, desiring to have my +written promise for pardon to our deserters, to which I consented, after +consulting with the other gentlemen. If I had not done this, we +certainly had never got them back, and the Spaniards would have sent +them to Manilla or the Moluccas. Immediately after this, I got notice +that _Bon-diu_ and his brother meant to visit our ship, wherefore I sent +some banqueting stuff aboard, and went myself to meet them, when they +were entertained as we best could. Bon-diu gave two _cattans_, and we +saluted them with seven guns at their departure. The brother returned +soon after, and requested to have one of the little monkeys for his +brother's children; so I bought one for five dollars from our +master-gunner, and sent it to _Bon-diu_. He being ready to go on shore, +desired to have me along with him in his boat, which I complied with, +and he was saluted with three guns at his departure, which, as I learnt +afterwards, was much esteemed by both brothers. When ashore, he insisted +to accompany me to our factory, much against my inclination, as I was +again forced to give him a collation in Mr Adamses chamber, after which +he and his companions went away seemingly satisfied. Late at night, old +king Foyne sent a man to me to enquire the particulars of the presents I +had given to both brothers, all of which he set down in writing, but I +could never know the reason of this. I forgot to mention that Bon-diu, +just before going aboard our ship, went to bathe in a new warm-bath at +the Dutch factory. The 9th Bon-diu sent one of his men to give me thanks +for the kind entertainment he had on board, and sent me by the messenger +two barrels of Miaco wine. Soon after, his brother sent me a similar +message and present. They were both very earnest to have a +perspective-glass, wherefore I sent them an old one belonging to Mr +Eaton; but it was soon after returned with thanks, as not suiting them. + +On the 10th, two sons of another governor of Nangasaki who dwells in the +town, came to see our house, both of them being Christians. After +shewing them our commodities, I gave them a collation, accompanied with +music, Mr Hownsell and the carpenter happening both by chance to be at +the factory. While we were at table, old king Foyne came in upon us +quite unexpectedly, and sat down to partake. I then desired our +jurebasso to request the speedy sending back of our runaways, which they +all promised, provided they should be pardoned, as I had formerly +promised, and which promise I now renewed. Old Foyne desired that I +would send him next day a piece of English beef; and another of pork, +sodden with onions. I accordingly sent our jurebasso next day with the +beef and pork, together with a bottle of wine, and six loaves of white +bread, all of which he very kindly accepted. He had at table with him +his grandson the young king, _Nabison_, his brother, and _Semidono_, his +kinsman. + +On the 12th I went to visit both kings, and found the old one asleep, +but spoke with his governor, after which I went to the young king, who +received me.[32] He gave me thanks for the kind entertainment I had +given the strangers, which he said his grandfather and he took in as +good part as if done to themselves. Towards night, Foyne sent to say +that he understood the strangers, who were now departed, had taken away +various commodities from me, paying only as they thought good +themselves, and not the prices I required. I answered, that they had +certainly done so, but I knew not whether it were the custom of the +country, being given to understand that they were in use to do so at +Nangasaki both with the Chinese and Portuguese, and that in reality what +they had taken from me was not worth the speaking of. I was answered, +that although this was done at Nangasaki with the Chinese, who were +forbidden to trade at Japan, they had not authority to do so with those +strangers who had the privilege of trade, more especially here at +Firando, where these people had no authority. I sent back my humble +thanks to the king for the care he used to see justice done both to +strangers and natives, saying, I would wait upon his highness myself to +inform him of the whole truth. Captain Brower sent me word that they had +taken various commodities from him, paying him just as they pleased; he +also sent an empty bottle, desiring to have it filled with Spanish wine, +as he had invited certain strangers, and had none of his own. + +[Footnote 32: It was now a great festival among the pagans, which began +on this day, said to be like the Lent of the papists.--_Purch._] + +I heard three or four guns or chambers discharged on the 13th, which I +supposed had been done at the Dutch house, in honour of the king; but I +afterwards learnt that they were shot by a Chinese junk which was +passing for Nangasaki. Shortly after, the old king sent for me to come +to dinner at the Dutch house, and to bring Mr Eaton with me, and a +bottle of wine.[33] Mr Eaton had taken medicine, and could not go out, +but I went. We had an excellent dinner, the dishes being dressed partly +in the Japanese fashion, and partly according to the Dutch way, but no +great drinking. The old king sat at one table, accompanied by his eldest +son and two brothers of the young king, as the young king had sent to +say he was not well. At the other table there sat, first, _Nabesone_, +the old king's brother, then myself, next me _Semidono_, then the old +king's governor, and below him _Zanzebar's_ father-in-law, and various +other Japanese gentlemen on the other side of the table. Captain Brower +did not sit down, but carved at table, all his own people attending and +serving on their knees. Captain Brower even gave drink to every one of +his guests with his own hands, and upon his knees, which seemed very +strange to me. When they had dined, Foyne and all his nobles went away, +and Captain Brower accompanied me to our house. I asked him why he +served these people on his knees, when he told me it was the custom of +the country, even the king serving his guests on his knees when he made +a feast, to do them the more honour. Before night the old king came to +the English house, and visited all its apartments. I gave him a +collation, and after staying an hour, and taking one thing and another, +he went his way. + +[Footnote 33: These things are mentioned to shew how poor Cockes was +imposed upon among them; as, taking advantage of his weak side, they +seem all to have wished to get from him all they could, without any +design of serving him in return.--Astl. I. 518. b.] + +On the 16th, learning that two Christians were arrived from Nangasaki, I +went to visit them, and to enquire about our runaways. One was George +Peterson, a Dutchman, born in Flushing; the other was Daman Maryn, a +native of Venice. They told me that our runaways had been conveyed away +in a small bark for _Macoro_,[34] and that they two had deserted in hope +of procuring a passage in our ship to return to their own countries; +they said they were well known to Mr Adams, and were desirous to have +gone immediately on board, being both seafaring men. The Dutchman had +served three or four and twenty years with the Spaniards, and came +master's mate in one of their ships from _Agua-pulca_ [Acapulco.] for +Manilla in the Philippine islands. They had plenty of money, and would +have sent it to our ship or to our factory; but I told them that I durst +not presume to entertain them in the absence of our general, yet would +do them all the service in my power at his return. I accordingly sent +Miguel to inform the king that these two strangers were come to seek a +passage in our ship, not being Spaniards nor subjects of Spain. The king +sent me back for answer, that they were welcome, if they were such as +they reported themselves; but, if Spaniards or Portuguese, he could not +allow them to remain in Firando, as the Spanish ambassador had procured +an order from the emperor that all Spaniards should retire to Manilla. + +[Footnote 34: Called in the sequel Macow, or Macao, the Portuguese +settlement on the coast of China, at the mouth of the _Bocca-tigris_, or +river of Canton.--E] + +The two strangers came to me early on the 17th, requesting me to +accompany them to wait upon the king, to give them the better +countenance, which I agreed to. On the way, they told me that our +fugitives had given out at Nangasaki that more of our people would +follow them, as none of any account would stay to navigate the ship +home, because their officers used them more like dogs than men. They +alleged also, that twenty resolute Spaniards might easily get possession +of our ship in one or two small boats. The old king received us very +kindly, and asked the strangers many questions about the wars in the +Molucca islands between the Spaniards and Dutch. They said the Spaniards +were resolved to prosecute this war with much vigour, having prepared a +strong force for that purpose. They also told the king that all our +fugitives had, as they believed, been secretly conveyed away from +Nangasaki seven days before, in a _soma_ that went from thence for +_Macow_.[35] The king would not believe them, saying it was impossible +such a man as Bon-diu, having given his word to restore them, should be +found false to his promise. In the end, he agreed to allow these men to +remain, and to go along with our ship, if our general pleased to take +them. So the poor men returned much contented to their lodgings, +assuring me they would prove faithful to us, and that we need not wish +any worse punishment to our fugitives than the bad treatment they would +receive from the Spaniards. + +[Footnote 35: Macow, or Macao, a town of the Portuguese near the +continent of China. Miguel, the jurebasso, servant to Mr Adams, was +suspected of double-dealing in this affair of the fugitives: the +circumstances I omit.--_Purch._] + +The 18th we had a total eclipse of the moon, which began about eleven +p.m. The 19th, about the same hour, a fire began in Firando, near the +young king's house, by which forty houses were burnt down; and, had not +the wind fallen calm, most of the town had been destroyed. Had not our +Englishmen bestirred themselves lustily, many more houses had gone to +wreck, for the fire took hold three or four times on the opposite side +of the street to our house, which they as often extinguished, for which +they were very much commended by the king and other principal people. +Old Foyne came to our door on horseback, and advised us to put all our +things into the _godown_, and daub up the door with wet clay, which +would place them in safety. Captain Brower likewise, and some of his +people, came very kindly to our house, offering to assist us either by +land or water, if needful. It could not be known how this fire began, +but there were reports among the Japanese that there would soon be a +still greater fire, which had been predicted by the devil and his +conjurers. I pray God it may not be done purposely by some villainous +people, on purpose to rob and steal what they can lay hold of during the +trouble and confusion. + +The 20th I went to visit Captain Brower at the Dutch house, to return +thanks for his friendly assistance the night before. Towards night, +Hernando the Spaniard and Edward Markes returned from Nangasaki, where +they could not procure sight of any of our fugitives, though they were +still at that place. A Portuguese or Spaniard at Nangasaki, in high +authority about sea affairs, told Markes we should never have our men +back; but that if all the rest of our people would come, leaving the +ship empty, they would be well received, and would be still more welcome +if they brought the ship with them. The Japanese, who had been sent by +king Foyne along with our people to look for our runaways, would not +allow Markes to stir out of doors for a night and half a day after their +arrival at Nangasaki, he going abroad himself, and Hernando lodging at a +different place, whence I suspect there was some fraudulent +understanding between the Japanese and Hernando, and have now lost hope +of ever getting our men back. I blamed the jesuits, and the old king +agreed with me, and told me he would take care that no more of our +people should be carried to Nangasaki, except they stole the ship's +boats, as the others had done, of which I gave notice to Mr James +Foster, our master. Foyne at this time issued an edict, strictly +forbidding any of the Japanese from carrying away any of our people, +without previously making it known to him and me. + +The 23d I was informed of a great pagan festival to be celebrated this +day, both kings and all the nobles being to meet at a summer-house +erected before the great pagoda, to see a horse-race. I think there must +have been above 3000 people assembled together on this occasion. All the +nobles went on horseback, each being accompanied by a retinue of slaves, +some armed with pikes, some with fire-arms, and others with bows and +arrows. The pikemen drew up on one side of the street, and the shot and +archers on the other, the middle being left open for the race. Right +before the summer-house, where the king and nobles were seated, was a +large round target of straw, hung against the wall, at which the +archers running at full career on horseback discharged their arrows. +The street was so crowded, that neither the present we sent, nor we +ourselves, could get admission, so we passed along the street and +returned by another way to our house. Late at night, the brother of +Zanzibar's wife came to our house, bringing me a present of a haunch of +venison and a basket of oranges, being accompanied by Zanzibar himself. +About ten at night, the Chinese captain, our landlord, came to inform us +that the king had ordered a tub of water to be kept ready on the top of +every house, as the devil had given out that the town was to be burnt +down that night: Yet the devil proved a liar: We got however a large tub +on the top of our house, which held twenty buckets of water; and all +night long people ran about the streets calling out for every one to +look well to their fires, so that it was strange and fearful to hear +them. + +This report of burning the town was still current on the 24th, and every +one was making preparations to prevent it. I made ready fifteen buckets, +which cost six _condrines_ each, which I filled with water and hung up +in our yard, setting a large tub beside them full of water, besides that +on the house top. I gave orders likewise to get two ladders ready for +carrying water to the roof, and provided nine wine casks filled with +tempered clay, ready for daubing up the doors of the _gadonge_, [godown +or fire-proof warehouse,] if need should require in consequence of a +conflagration, from which dire necessity may God defend us. All night +long, three or four men ran continually backwards and forwards in the +streets, calling out for every one to have a care of fire, and making so +horrible a noise, that it was both strange and fearful to hear them. + +On the 25th, the Chinese captain, our landlord, was taken sick, and sent +for a piece of pork, which I sent him, and immediately afterwards I went +to visit him, carrying a small bottle of Spanish wine. While I was +there, Semidono and our guardian's father-in-law came likewise to visit +him. The king sent me word, by Miguel, our jurebasso, that he had a bad +opinion of Hernando Ximenes our Spaniard, and that he meant to have run +away when lately at Nangasaki. But I knew this to be false, as he had +then free liberty to go where he pleased, and did not run away. I had +another complaint made against him, that he was a notorious gambler, and +had enticed several to play, from whom he won their money, which I +believe rather than the other accusation. I find by experience, that the +Japanese are not friendly to the Spaniards and Portuguese, and love them +at Nangasaki the worse, because they love them so well.[36] In the night +between the 24th and 25th, some evil-disposed persons endeavoured to +have set the town of Firando on fire in three several places, but it was +soon extinguished, and no harm done; but the incendiaries were not +discovered, though doubtless owing to the conjurers and other base +people, who expected an opportunity of making spoil when the town was on +fire. + +[Footnote 36: This is quite obscure, and may perhaps allude to the +efforts of the Jesuits at Nangasaki, to convert the Japanese to a new +idol worship, under the name of Christianity.--E.] + +The 26th of October, Mr Melsham being very sick, _Zanzibar_ came to +visit him, and urged him to use the physic of the country, bringing with +him a _bonze_, or doctor, to administer the cure. Mr Melsham was very +desirous to use it, but wished our surgeon to see it in the first place. +So the bonze gave him two pills yesterday, two in the night, and two +this morning, together with certain seeds; but, for what I can see, +these things did him no good. God restore his health! At this time, all +our waste-cloths, pennants, brass sheaves, and other matters, were sent +aboard, and our ship was put into order to receive our general, whose +return was soon expected. Last night another house was set on fire by +some villains, but was soon extinguished with very little harm; yet our +nightly criers of fire continue to make such horrible noises, that it is +impossible for any one to get rest. The Chinese captain still continued +sick, and sent to beg some spiced cakes and two wax-candles, which I +sent him, as I had done before. Mr Melsham now grew weary of his +Japanese doctor and his prescriptions, and returned to our surgeon Mr +Warner, to the great displeasure of Zanzibar and the bonze. + +§10. _Conclusion of Observations by Mr Cockes_. + +Our Chinese landlord came to our house on the 30th October, to inform me +of a general collection of provisions of all kinds, then making at every +house in Firando, to be sent to the two kings, in honour of a great +feast they were to give next day, together with a comedy or play. By his +advice, and after consulting with the other gentlemen of the factory, I +directed two bottles of Spanish wine, two roasted hens, a roasted pig, a +small quantity of rusk, and three boxes of confections and preserves to +be sent, as a contribution towards their feast. Before night the young +king sent one of his men to me, requesting me to furnish him with some +English apparel, for the better setting out their comedy, and +particularly to let him have a pair of red cloth breeches. I answered, +that I had nonesuch, and knew not any of our people who had; but any +clothes I had that could gratify his highness were much at his service. +At night the old king sent to invite me to be a spectator of their +comedy on the morrow, and to bring Mr Foster, our master, along with me. + +Next day, being the 31st, I sent our present, formerly mentioned, to the +kings by our jurebasso before dinner, desiring their highnesses to +excuse the master and myself, and that we would wait upon them some +other time, when they had not so much company. This however did not +satisfy them, and they insisted on our company, and that of Mr Eaton; so +we went and had a place appointed for us, where we sat at our ease and +saw every thing. The old king himself brought us a collation in sight of +all the people; Semidono afterwards did the like in the name of both +kings, and a third was brought us in the sequel by several of their +principal nobles or attendants. But that which we most noted was their +play or comedy, in which the two kings, with their greatest nobles and +princes, were the actors. The subject was a representation of the +valiant deeds of their ancestors, from the commencement of their kingdom +or commonwealth to the present time, which was mixed with much mirth to +please the common people. The audience was very numerous, as every house +in the town of Firando, and every village, place, or hamlet in their +dominions brought a present, and all their subjects were spectators. The +kings themselves took especial care that every one, both high and low, +should eat and drink before they departed. Their acting, music, singing, +and poetry, were very harsh to our ears, yet the natives kept time to +it, both with hands and feet. Their musical instruments were small drums +or tabors, wide at both ends and small in the middle, resembling an +hour-glass, on one end of which they beat with one hand, while with the +other they strained the cords which surround it, making it to sound soft +or loud at their pleasure, and tuning their voices to its sound, while +others played on a fife or flute; but all was harsh and unpleasant to +our ears. I never saw a play of which I took such notice, as it was +wonderfully well represented, yet quite different from ours in +Christendom, which are only dumb-shews, while this was as truth itself, +and acted by the kings themselves, to preserve a continual remembrance +of their affairs. + +On this occasion, the king did not invite the Dutch, which made our +being present seem the greater compliment. When I returned to our house, +I found three or four of the Dutchmen there, one of whom was in a +Japanese habit, and came from a place called _Cushma_,[37] which is +within sight of Corea. I understood they had sold pepper there and other +goods, and suspect they have some secret trade thence with Corea, or are +likely soon to have, and I trust if they do well that we shall not miss, +as Mr Adams was the man who put them upon this trade, and I have no +doubt he will be as diligent for the good of his own countrymen as he +has been for strangers. Hernando Ximenes was with Captain Brower when +the two men came from Cushma, and asked them whence they came, at which +Brower was very angry, telling him he should have no account of that +matter. + +[Footnote 37: Key-sima, an island considerably to the N.E. of Firando, +and nearly midway between Niphon and Corea, from which it may be about +forty miles distant.--E.] + +Towards night, I was informed that two Spaniards were arrived from +Nangasaki, and were lodged with _Zanzibar_. They sent for our jurebasso +to come to them, but I did not allow him, on which they and Zanzibar +came to our house. One of them was _Andres Bulgaryn_, a Genoese, who had +passed Firando only a few days before, and the other _Benito de Palais_, +pilot-major of the Spanish ship lately cast away on the coast of Japan, +the same person who came here formerly from Nangasaki to visit Captain +Adams. They said they had come to visit their friends, me in the first +place; and used many words of compliment, after which they entered into +conversation respecting our fugitives. They pretended that it was not +the fathers, as they called the jesuits, who kept our people from being +seen and spoken with, but the natives of Nangasaki, who they said were +very bad people. In fine, I shrewdly suspected these fellows of having +come a-purpose to inveigle more of our people to desert, as the others +did, wherefore I advised our master to have a watchful eye both to the +ship and boats, and to take special notice who kept company with our +men, as it was best to doubt the worst, for the best will save itself. + +On the night of the 1st November, two houses were set a-fire on the +other side of the water, which were soon extinguished, but the villains +could not be found out. This day I sent word to Mr Foster on board, to +look well to the ship and the boats, and to the behaviour of our people, +as I strongly suspected the two Spaniards of being spies, come to entice +away our men. I sent him word likewise, that I understood the Spaniards +meant to invite him that day to dinner, but wished him to beware they +did not give him a _higo_.[38] He answered, that he had the same opinion +of them I had, and should therefore be mainly on his guard. He came soon +after on shore, and the Spaniards came to our house, where by much +entreaty they prevailed on Mr Foster and Mr William Eaton to go with +them to dinner at Zanzibar's house, along with Hernando and the other +two Spaniards. But these two Spaniards came to me, and desired me to +tell Mr Foster and those who went with him, to take heed they did not +eat or drink of any thing they did not see tasted by others, as they +were not to be trusted, which I communicated to Mr Foster and Mr Eaton. +Ximenes told me that Mr Adams had goods in his hands belonging to the +pilot-major, who had come in the hope of finding Mr Adams here, and +meant to wait his return. He said they had likewise brought letters from +the bishop and other fathers to the other two Spaniards, advising them +to return to Nangasaki, but which I think they will not do. I this day +sent our jurebasso to both kings and the other nobles, to give them +thanks for the kind entertainment we had received the day before. + +[Footnote 38: From the sequel, this unexplained term seems to imply +treachery.--E.] + +The 2d, some villains set fire to a house in the fish street, which was +soon put out, and the incendiaries escaped. It is generally thought +these fires were raised by some base renegados who lurk about the town, +and who came from Miaco: Yet, though much suspected, no proof has +hitherto been brought against them. There has, however, been orders +given to construct gates and barriers in different parts of all the +streets, with watches at each, and no person to be allowed to go about +in the night, unless he be found to have very urgent business. Another +villain got this night into the house of a poor widow, meaning to have +robbed her; but on her making an outcry, he fled into the wood opposite +our house, where the Pagoda stands.[39] The wood was soon after beset +all around by above 500 men, but the robber could not be found. At +night, when we were going to bed, there was a sudden alarm given that +there were thieves on the top of our house, endeavouring to set it on +fire. Our ladders being ready, I and others went up immediately, but +found nobody, yet all the houses of our neighbours were peopled on the +top like ours on similar alarms. This was judged to be a false alarm, +risen on purpose to see whether any one would be found in readiness. At +this very time there was a house set on fire, a good way from our house, +but the fire was soon quenched. The night before, three houses were set +a-fire in different parts of the town, but the fires were all +extinguished at the beginning, so that no hurt was done. At this time, +an order was issued to give notice of all the inhabitants dwelling in +every house, whether strangers or others; and that all who were liable +to suspicion should be banished from the dominions of the two kings of +Firando. Bars or gates were erected to shut up the passages at the ends +of all the streets, and watches were appointed in different places, with +orders not to go about crying and making a noise, as had been done +hitherto without either form or fashion. Yet, notwithstanding these +precautions, a villain set fire about ten o'clock this night to a house +near the Pagoda, opposite our house. He was noticed by the watch, who +pursued him in all haste, but he escaped into the wood above the Pagoda. +The wood was immediately beset by more than 500 armed men, and old king +Foyne came in person with many of his nobles to assist in the pursuit; +yet the incendiary escaped, and I verily believe he ran about among the +rest, crying _stop thief_ as, well as the best. + +[Footnote 39: This word signifies either the idol, or the idol temple, +or both.--_Purch._] + +On the night of the 4th, fire was set to several houses, both in the +town and country round. An order was now given, to have secret watches +in various parts of the town every night, and that no person should go +out during the night except upon important occasions, and then to have a +light carried before them, that it might be seen who they were. If this +rule be duly enforced, our house-burners will be put to their wits end. +I proposed these measures to the king and others above a week before, +and now they are put in execution. + +On the 5th I received a letter from Domingo Francisco, the Spanish +ambassador, dated five days before from _Ximenaseque_, [Simonoseki,] and +another from George the Portuguese. The ambassador went over land from +that place to Nangasaki, and sent the letter by his servant, to whom I +shewed the commodities he enquired after, referring him for others till +the return of our general, but gave him an answer, of which I kept a +copy. The man chose two pieces of fine _Semian chowters_ and eight +pieces of white _bastas_, paying seven _tayes_ each for the _chowters,_ +and two _tayes_ each for the _bastas_. A Spanish friar or Jesuit came in +the boat along with the ambassador's servant, and asked to see our ship, +which the master allowed him at my request, and used him kindly; for the +old saw has it, That it is sometimes good to hold a candle to the devil. +This day Mr Eaton, Hernando, and I dined with Unagense, and were kindly +entertained. + +About ten o'clock of the 6th November, 1613, our general and all his +attendants arrived at Firando from the emperor's court, accompanied by +Mr Adams. Immediately after his arrival, he sent me, with John Japan, +our jurebasso, to visit both the kings, and to thank them for their +kindness, for having so well accommodated him with a barge or galley, +and for the care they had taken of the ship and every thing else during +his absence. They took this message in good part, saying they would be +glad to see our general at their houses. At this time certain merchants +of Miaco came from Nangasaki to our house to look at our commodities, +and among the rest took liking to ten pieces of _cassedy nill_, for +which they agreed to give three _tayes_ each. As had been done by other +merchants, I sent the goods to their lodging, expecting to receive the +money as usual; but they only sent me a paper, consigning me to receive +payment from _Semidono_, who was newly gone from Firando on a voyage, +and was met by our general. I sent back word to the merchants that I +must either have payment or the goods returned, to which they answered, +I should have neither one nor the other; and as the person with whom +they lodged refused to pass his word for payment, I was forced to apply +to both the kings for justice; but I first sent word aboard our ship, if +the boat of Miaco weighed anchor to go away, that they should send the +skiff to make her stay, which they did, and made her come to anchor +again. In the mean time I went to the kings. The younger king said that +_Semidono_ was able enough to pay me; but when I asked him if Semidono +refused to pay, whether he would, he answered no. While we were talking +about the matter, the old king came in, and told me he would take order +that I should be satisfied; so in the end the person with whom the +merchants lodged passed his word for payment of the thirty _tayes_; yet +the orders of old _Foyne Same_ had come too late, if our skiff had not +stopt the Miaco merchants. This day Captain Brower and all the +merchants of the Dutch factory came to visit our general, and +_Nobisone_ sent him a young porker as a present, with a message saying +he would come to visit him in a day or two. + +§11. _Occurrences at Firando after the Return of Captain Saris_.[40] + +The 7th of November, 1613, I sent in the first place some presents to +the two kings of Firando, and afterwards went to visit them. On the 8th, +Andrew Palmer, the ship's steward, and William Marnell, gunner's mate, +having been ashore all night and quarrelled in their cups, went out this +morning into the fields and fought. Both are so grievously wounded, that +it is thought Palmer will hardly escape with his life, and that Marnell +will be lame of his hands for life. The 9th I went aboard ship early, +and called the master and all the officers into my cabin, making known +to them how much I was grieved at the misconduct of some of them, +particularly of Palmer and Marnell, who had gone ashore without leave, +and had so sore wounded each other, that one was in danger of his life, +and the other of being lamed for ever; and besides, that the survivor +ran a risk of being hanged if the other died, which would necessarily +occasion me much vexation. I also said, I was informed that Francis +Williams and Simon Colphax were in the boat going ashore to have fought, +and that John Dench and John Winston had appointed to do the like. John +Dench confessed it was true, and that he had seen Palmer and Marnell +fighting, and had parted them, otherwise one or both had died on the +field. I told them these matters were exceedingly distressing to me, and +I trusted would now be remedied, otherwise the ship would be unmanned, +to the overthrow of our voyage, and the vast injury of the honourable +company which had entrusted us. After much contestation, they all +engaged to amend what was amiss, and not to offend any more, which I +pray God may be the case. I told them also, that old king Foyne had +complained to me, threatening, if any more of them went ashore to fight +and shed blood, contrary to the laws of Japan, he would order them to be +cut in pieces, as he was determined strangers should have no more +licence to infringe the laws than his own subjects. + +[Footnote 40: We here resume the narrative of Captain Saris. Purch. +Pilgr. I. 378. The observations of Mr Cockes, contained in the three +preceding sub-sections, break off abruptly in the Pilgrims, as +above.--E.] + + +At my return ashore, old _Foyne Same_ came to visit me at the English +house, and told me that the piece of _Poldavy_, and the sash I gave him, +were consumed when his house was burnt down. This was in effect begging +to have two others, which I promised to give him. I likewise got him to +send some of his people aboard, along with John Japan, our jurebasso, to +intimate to our men that if any of them went ashore to fight, he had +given strict orders to have them cut in pieces. This I did in hopes of +restraining them in future from any more drunken combats. Towards night, +Juan Comas, a Spaniard, came from Nangasaki, bringing two letters from +Domingo Francisco, one for me, and the other for Mr Cockes, together +with three baskets of sugar as a present to me, and a pot of conserves, +with many no less sugared words of compliment in his letters, saying how +sorry he was that our seven fugitives had gone away during his absence, +excusing himself and the Jesuits, who he pretended had no hand in the +matter, and pretending they had never spoken against us, calling us +heretics. He said our men had gone from Nangasaki, three of them in a +Chinese or Japanese _soma_ for Manilla, and four in a Portuguese vessel. +Yet I esteem all these as vain words to excuse themselves, and throw the +blame on others; for the Spaniards and Portuguese mutually hate each +other and the Japanese, as these last do them. + +The 11th I visited _Nobesane_, who used me kindly, and would have had me +dine with him next day, but I excused myself on account of the press of +business in which I was engaged, and the short time I had to stay. I met +old king Foyne at his house, who requested to have two pieces of English +salt beef, and two of pork, sodden by our cook, with turnips, radishes, +and onions, which I sent him. The 12th, the governors of the two kings +came to visit me at our factory, whence they went aboard the Clove, +accompanied by Mr Cockes, to signify to our crew that they should beware +of coming ashore to fight and shed blood; as, by the law of Japan, those +who went out to fight and drew weapons for that purpose, were adjudged +to death, and all who saw them were obliged to kill both offenders, on +pain of ruining themselves and all their kindred if they neglected +putting the combatants to death. + +The 14th I sent Mr Cockes and our jurebasso to wait upon the kings, to +entreat they would provide me twelve Japanese seamen who were fit for +labour, to assist me in navigating the ship to England, to whom I was +willing to give such wages as their highnesses might deem reasonable. +The kings were then occupied in other affairs, so that my messengers +spoke with their secretaries, who said they needed not to trouble the +kings on that business, as they would provide me twelve fit persons; but +that there were several vagrant people about the town who would be +willing enough to go, yet were very unfit for my purpose, as they would +only consume victuals, and of whom the Dutch made use without making any +request on the matter, and it was not known what had become of these men +or of the ship; but, as the matter was now referred to them, they would +look out for such as were fit for our purpose. + +The 18th, Foyne sent me word he would visit me, and meant to bring the +dancing girls of the country along with him, which he did soon after, +accompanied by three courtezans, and two or three men, who all danced +and made music after their fashion, though harsh to our ears. The 19th, +the Chinese captain, and George Duras, a Portuguese, came to visit me, +requesting me to send to _Semidono_ to procure pardon for two poor +fellows who were like to lose their lives for bidding a poor knave flee +who had stolen a bit of lead not worth three halfpence; and though the +malefactor was taken and executed, these men were in danger of the same +punishment, had I not sent Mr Cockes to _Semidono_ with my ring, to +desire their pardon for my sake, which he engaged to procure, and did in +effect. + +The 20th, _Samedon_, king of _Crats_,[41] sent me word he meant to go on +board our ship, so I went there to meet him, and he came along with both +the kings of Firando, when we saluted them with five pieces of ordnance; +and we afterwards fired three with bullets at a mark, at the request of +Samedon, who gave me two Japanese pikes, having _cattans_ or _sables_ on +their ends. At their departure we again saluted them with seven guns, +one being shotted and fired at the mark. The 22d I sent a present to the +king of _Crats_, which was delivered to him at the house of _Tomesanes_ +the young king, where he was at breakfast. Samedon accepted it very +kindly, sending me word by Mr Cockes that he was doubly obliged to me +for his kind entertainment aboard, and for now sending him so handsome a +present of such things as his country did not produce, all without any +desert on his part, and the only recompence in his power was, if ever +any of the English nation came into his dominions, he would give them a +hearty welcome, and do them all the service in his power. + +[Footnote 41: This personage must have been governor of one of the +provinces, islands, or towns of Japan; but no place in that eastern +empire bears a name in modern geography which in the smallest degree +resembles Crats.--E] + + +The 25th, the purser and Mr Hownsell came ashore, and told me that +Andrew Palmer, the steward, had died the night before, Thomas Warner, +our surgeon, affirming that he owed his death to his own obstinacy, his +wound being curable if he would have been ruled. I desired that he might +be buried on an island as secretly as possible, as we were about to get +some Japanese into our ship, who might be unwilling to embark if they +heard of any one having died. On the 28th a Japanese was put to death, +who some said was a thief, and others an incendiary. He was led by the +executioner to the place of punishment, a person going before him +carrying a board, on which the crime for which he was to be punished was +written, and the same was exhibited on a paper flag carried over his +head. Two pikemen followed the culprit, having the points of their pikes +close to his back, ready to slay him instantly if he offered to resist. + +The ship being ready to depart, several of the natives complained that +the ship's company owed them money, and desired to be paid. To prevent +greater inconvenience, I listened to these people, and wrote to the +master to make enquiry aboard as to who were in debt, that I might +satisfy their creditors, making deductions accordingly from their wages. + +On the 26th I assembled my mercantile council to consult about leaving a +factory here in Firando, upon these considerations. 1. The encouragement +we had privately received at the Moluccas. 2. That the Dutch had already +a factory here. 3. The large privileges now obtained from the emperor of +Japan. 4. The certain advice of English factories established at Siam +and Patane. 5. The commodities remaining on hand appointed for these +parts, and the expected profit which farther experience might produce. +It was therefore resolved to leave a factory here, consisting of eight +Englishmen, three Japanese _jurebassos_ or interpreters, and two +servants. They were directed, against the coming of the next ships, to +explore and discover the coasts of Corea, _Tushmay_, other parts of +Japan, and of the adjoining countries, and to see what good might be +done in any of them. + +The 5th of December, 1613, Mr Richard Cockes, captain and _Cape_ +merchant of the English factory now settled at Firando in Japan, took +his leave of me aboard the Clove, together with his company, being eight +English and five others, as before mentioned. After their departure, we +mustered the company remaining aboard, finding forty-six English, five +_swarts_ or blacks, fifteen Japanese, and three passengers, in all +sixty-nine persons. We had lost since our arrival in Japan ten +Englishmen; two by sickness, one slain in a duel, and seven who deserted +to the Portuguese and Spaniards, while I was absent at the court of the +emperor. The English whom we left in the factory were Mr Richard Cockes, +William Adams, now entertained in the service of the company at a +hundred pounds a year, Tempest Peacock, Richard Wickham, William Eaton, +Walter Carwarden, Edward Saris, and William Nelson. + +§12. _Voyage from Japan to Bantam, and thence Home to England_. + +That same day, being the 5th December, we set sail with a stiff +northerly gale, steering S. by W. 1/2 a point westerly. By exact +observation on shore, we found the island of Firando to be in lat. 33° +30' N. and the variation 2° 50' easterly.[42] We resolved to keep our +course for Bantam along the coast of China, for which purpose we brought +our starboard tacks aboard, and stood S.W. edging over for China, the +wind at N.N.E. a stiff gale and fair weather. The 7th it blew very hard +at N.W. and we steered S.S.W. encountering a great current which shoots +out between the _island_ of Corea[43] and the main land of China, +occasioning a very heavy sea. The 8th, being in lat. 29° 40' N. we +steered W.S.W, on purpose to make Cape _Sumbor_ on the coast of China. +The sea was very rough, and the wind so strong that it blew our main +course out of the bolt ropes. The 9th, in lat. 28° 23', we sounded and +had forty-nine to forty-five fathoms on an oozy bottom. The weather was +clear, yet we could not see land. The 11th we had ground in forty-nine, +forty-three, thirty-eight, thirty-seven, and thirty fathoms, the water +being very green, and as yet no land to be seen. + +[Footnote 42: The town of Firando is in lat. 33° 6' N. and even the most +northern part of the island of that name only reaches to 33° 17'. The +town is in long. 128° 42' E. from Greenwich.--E.] + +[Footnote 43: Corea was long thought to be an island after the period of +this voyage. Astl. I. 492. c.--It is now known to be an extensive +peninsula, to the east of China, having the Yellow sea interposed.--E.] + +The 12th, in thirty-five fathoms, and reckoning ourselves near the coast +of China, we had sight of at least 300 sail of junks, of twenty and +thirty tons each and upwards, two of which passed us close to windwards, +and though we used all fair means to prevail upon them to come aboard we +could not succeed, and seeing they were only fishing vessels we let them +pass. Continuing our course we soon espied land, being two islands +called the _Fishers islands_.[44] At noon our latitude was 25° 59' N. +and we had ground at twenty to twenty-six fathoms. About seven p.m. +while steering along the land, we came close by a rock, which by good +providence we had sight of by moonlight, as it lay right in our course. +When not above twice our ship's length from this rock, we had thirty +fathoms water, on which we hauled off for one watch, to give the land a +wide birth, and resumed our course S.W. after midnight. The wind was +very strong at N.E. and continually followed as the land trended. The +13th, in lat. 24° 35' N. and variation 1° 30' easterly, having the wind +strong at N.E. with fair weather, we steered S.W. keeping about five +leagues off the islands along the coast of China. The 15th we came among +many fisher boats, but had so much wind that we could not speak any of +them, but they made signs to us, as we thought to keep to the westwards. +At noon our lat. was 21° 40' N. and having the wind at N.N.E. a stiff +gale, we steered W.N.W. northerly, to make the land, and about two hours +afterwards had sight of it, although by our dead reckoning we ought +still to have been fifty-six leagues from it. It is to be noted, that +the islands along the coast of China are considerably more to the +southward than as laid down in the charts. About three p.m. we were +within about two leagues of an island called _Sancha_[45]. + +[Footnote 44: By the latitude indicated in the text, Captain Saris +appears to have fallen in with the coast of Fo-kien, and to have passed +through between that province and the island of Formosa, without +discovering the existence of that island.--E.] + +[Footnote 45: Probably the island of Tchang-to-huen, to the S.W. of the +bay of Canton, the situation of which agrees with the latitude in the +text, and the sound of the two first syllables of which name has some +affinity with that given by Saris, evidently from Spanish or Portuguese +charts. At this part, of his voyage, Saris entirely misses to notice the +large island of Hai-nan.--E.] + +The 18th, in lat. 15° 43' N. we had sight of an island called +Pulo-cotan, being high land, and is about twenty leagues, according to +report, from the shoal called _Plaxel_. In the morning of the 19th the +coast of Cambodia was on our starboard side, about two leagues off, +along which we steered S.E. by E. easterly, our latitude at noon being +13° 31' N. estimating the ship to be then athwart _Varella_. We have +hitherto found the wind always _trade_ along shore, having gone _large_ +all the way from Firando, the wind always following us as the land +trended. The 20th at noon we were in latitude 10° 53', and three +glasses, or an hour and half after, we had sight of a small island, +which we concluded to be that at the end of the shoal called +_Pulo-citi_. We found the book of _Jan Huyghens van Linschoten_ very +true, for by it we have directed our course ever since we left Firando. +The 22d we had sight of _Pulo Condor_ about five leagues off, our +latitude at noon being 8° 20' N. + +About four a.m. on the 25th we made the island of _Pulo Timon_, and two +hours afterwards saw _Pulo Tinga_. The 28th at three p.m. we had oosy +ground at twenty fathoms, having divers long islands on our starboard +and sundry small islands on our larboard, forming the straits of +China-bata, which we found to be truly laid down in a chart made by a +Hollander called _Jan Janson Mole_, which he gave to Mr Hippon, who gave +it to the company. _Pulo Bata_, one of these islands, is low land, and +is full of trees or bushes at the S.W. end. + +A little before noon on the 29th, we perceived the colour of the water +a-head of the ship to change very much, by which observation we escaped +an imminent danger. This shoal seemed of a triangular shape, the S.W. +end being the sharpest, and is not far from the entrance into the +straits of _China-bata_. At noon our latitude was 4° 6' N. At eight p.m. +we came to anchor in seven fathoms, the weather threatening to be foul +in the night, the place very full of shoals, and our experience little +or nothing. Before our anchor took hold, we had six 1/4, five 1/2, six, +and then seven fathoms, soft sandy ground. + +In the morning of the 30th we spoke the Darling, then bound for +Coromandel, her company consisting of twenty-one English and nine +blacks. By her we first learnt of the death of Sir Henry Middleton, the +loss of the Trades-increase, and other incidents that had occurred +during our voyage to Japan. In the night of the 30th God mercifully +delivered us from imminent danger, as we passed under full sail close by +a sunken ledge of rocks, the top of which was only just above water +within a stone's throw of our ship; and had not the noise of the +breakers awakened us, we had not cleared our ship. We instantly let go +our anchor, being in a rapid current or tide-way, in seventeen fathoms +upon oozy ground. When morning broke on the 31st we had sight of the +high land of Sumatra, having an island a-stern, the ledge of rocks we +had passed on our starboard, and three small islands forming a triangle +on our larboard bow. We were about eight leagues off the high land of +Java, but could not then get into the straits of Sunda, as the wind was +quite fallen. + +The 1st January, 1614, being quite calm, was mostly spent at anchor. The +2d, having a little wind, we set sail, and about eight o'clock fell in +with the Expedition, homewards bound for England, laden with pepper, by +which ship we wrote to our friends in England. The 3d we came to anchor +in the road of Bantam, end to our great grief found no lading ready for +us, for which neglect I justly blamed those I had left to provide the +same, while they excused themselves by alleging they did not expect us +so soon back. I questioned _Kewee_, the principal Chinese merchant, who +came to visit me on board, as to the price of pepper. He answered, that +it was already known ashore I was homewards bound, and must necessarily +load pepper; and, as my merchants had not provided any before hand, I +might be assured it would rise. He said the price was then at twelve +dollars for ten sacks, but he could not undertake to deliver any +quantity at that price. I offered him twelve dollars and a half the ten +sacks, but he held up so high, that we had no hope of dealing for the +present. Of the ten persons left by us in the factory when we departed +for Japan, we found only five alive at our return, while we only lost +one man between Firando and Bantam. + +I went ashore on the 4th to visit the governor of Bantam, to whom I +presented two handsome _cattans_, or Japanese swords, and other articles +of value; and this day I bargained with _Kewee_ for 4000 sacks of pepper +at thirteen dollars the ten sacks, bating in the weight 3 per cent and +directed the merchants to expedite the milling thereof as much as +possible. I employed the 5th in reducing the several English factories +at Bantam under one government, settling them all in one house; also in +regulating the expences of diet, that all might be frugally managed, to +prevent extravagance in rack-houses abroad, or in hanger-on blacks at +home, which had lately been the case. I directed also that there should +be fewer warehouses kept in the town, and that these might be better +regulated, and the goods stowed in a more orderly manner. Hitherto the +multiplication of factories, having one for each voyage, had occasioned +great expence, and had raised the price of pepper, as each outbid the +other, for the particular account of their own several voyages, with +great loss to the public. + +The 6th was employed in re-weighing the pepper received the day before, +most of the sacks being found hard weight, and many to want a part of +what was allowed by the king's beam; wherefore I sent for the weigher, +whom I used kindly, entreating him to take a little more care to amend +this fault, which he promised to do, and for his better encouragement I +made him a present to the value of five dollars. The 16th being Sunday, +I staid aboard, and about 2 p.m. we observed the whole town to be on +fire. I immediately sent our skiff ashore to assist the merchants in +guarding our goods. The wind was so violent, that in a very short space +of time the whole town was burnt down, except the English and Dutch +factories, which it pleased God of his mercy to preserve. + +Being ashore on the 20th, I procured two Chinese merchants, named +_Lackmoy_ and _Lanching_, to translate the letter which the king of +Firando in Japan had given me to deliver to our king, James I. It was +written in the Chinese character and language, which they translated +into the Malay, and which in English was as follows: + +_To the King of Great Britain, &c._ "Most mighty king, I cannot +sufficiently express how acceptable your majesty's most loving letter, +and bountiful present of many valuable things, sent me by your servant +Captain John Saris, has been to me; neither the great happiness I feel +in the friendship of your majesty, for which I render you many thanks, +desiring the continuance of your majesty's love and correspondence. I am +heartily glad at the safe arrival of your subjects at my small island, +after so long a voyage. They shall not lack my help and furtherance to +the utmost, for effecting their so worthy and laudable purposes, of +discovery and commerce, referring for the entertainment they have +received to the report of your servant, by whom I send to your majesty +an unworthy token of my gratitude; wishing your majesty long life. Given +from my residence of Firando, the sixth day of the tenth month. _Your +majesty's loving friend, commander of this island of Firando in Japan, + +FOYNE SAM-MASAM."_ + +My interpreters could not well pronounce his name, Lanching saying it +was _Foyne Foshin Sam_, while Lackmoy said it was written as above. This +comes to pass by reason of the Chinese characters, which, in proper +names, borrow the characters of other words, of the same or nearest +sound, and thereby occasion frequent mistakes. + +The 22d, such houses as had escaped in the former fire of the 16th, were +now burnt down; yet the English and Dutch houses escaped, for which we +were thankful to God. On the 26th, a Dutch ship of 1000 tons arrived +from Holland, called the Flushing. At the island of Mayo, the company +mutinied against the captain, whom they would have murdered in his +cabin, had it not pleased God that a Scotsman revealed the plot when the +mutineers were already armed to carry it into effect, so that they were +taken between decks with their weapons in their hands. In this ship +there were several English and Scots soldiers. She did not remain at +Bantam, but sailed towards evening for Jacatra. + +The 27th, our lading being fully procured, and several of our company +fallen sick, I went ashore to hasten our merchants to get us ready for +sailing. The 1st February, the Darling was forced back to Bantam; and +order was taken by mutual consultation for the proper care of her goods, +and for her immediate departure for _Succadanea_ in the island of +Borneo, and thence to Patane and Siam. + +The 13th of February we got out from the straits of Sunda, in which the +tide of flood sets twelve hours to the eastwards, and the ebb twelve +hours to the westwards. On the 16th of May we anchored in the bay of +Saldanha, where we found the Concord of London, being the first ship set +out by the united company. We now found the natives of this place very +treacherous, making us to understand by signs; that two of their people +had been forcibly carried off. They had sore wounded one of the people +belonging to the Concord; and while we were up in the land, they +assaulted the people who were left in charge of our skiff, carried away +our grapnel, and had spoiled the boat-keepers if they had not pushed off +into deep water. The 19th a Dutch ship arrived bound for Bantam, the +master being Cornelius van Harte. + +We remained here twenty-three days, where we thoroughly refreshed the +ship's company, and took away with us alive fourteen oxen and seventy +sheep, besides good store of fish and beef, which we _powdered_ there, +finding it to take salt well, contrary to former reports. For ten days +after leaving Saldanha, we had the wind N.W. and W.N.W. but after that +we had a fine wind at S.W. so that we could hold our course N.W. On the +27th September, thanks be to God, we arrived at Plymouth; where, for the +space of five or six weeks, we endured more tempestuous weather, and +were in greater danger of our lives, than during the whole voyage +besides. + +§13. _Intelligence concerning Yedzo, or Jesso, received from a Japanese +at Jedo, who had been twice there_.[46] + +Yedzo, or Jesso, is an island to the N.W. of Japan, from which it is ten +leagues distant. The natives are of white complexions, and +well-conditioned, but have their bodies covered all over with hair like +monkies. Their weapons are bows and poisoned arrows. The inhabitants of +the south extremity of this country understand the use of weights and +measures; but those who inhabit the inland country, at the distance of +thirty days journey, are ignorant of these things. They have much silver +and gold-dust, in which they make payment to the Japanese for rice and +other commodities; rice and cotton-cloth being of ready sale among them, +as likewise iron and lead, which are carried there from Japan. Food and +cloathing are the most vendible commodities among the natives of that +country, and sell to such advantage, that rice often yields a profit of +four for one. + +[Footnote 46: This article is appended to the Voyage of Saris, in the +Pilgrims, vol. I. p. 384.--E.] + +The town where the Japanese have their chief residence and mart in +Yetizo is called _Matchma_,[47] in which there are 500 households or +families of Japanese. They have likewise a fort here, called +_Matchma-donna_. This town is the principal mart of Yedzo, to which the +natives resort to buy and sell, especially in September, when they make +provision against winter. In March they bring down salmon and dried fish +of sundry kinds, with other wares, for which the Japanese barter in +preference even to silver. The Japanese have no other settled residence +or place of trade except this at Matchma [48]. Farther northward in +Yedzo there are people of a low stature like dwarfs.[49] The other +natives of Yedzo are of good stature like the Japanese, and have no +other cloathing but what is brought them from Japan. There is a violent +current in the straits between Yedzo and Japan, which comes from the sea +of Corea, and sets E.N.E. The winds there are for the most part like +those usual in Japan; the northerly winds beginning in September, and +ending in March, when the southerly winds begin to blow. + +[Footnote 47: In modern maps, the southern peninsula of Yesso, or Yedso, +is named _Matsaki_, apparently the same name with that in the text.--E.] + +[Footnote 48: In our more modern maps, there are four other towns or +residences on the western coast of the peninsula of Matsaki, named +Jemasina, Sirekosawa, Famomoli, and Aria.--E.] + +[Footnote 49: The island of Kubito-sima, off the western coast of Yedzo, +is called likewise in our maps, the Isle of Pigmies.--E.] + +§14. _Note of Commodities vendible in Japan_.[50] + +Broad-cloths of all sorts, as black, yellow, and red, which cost in +Holland eight or nine gilders the Flemish ell, two ells and three +quarters, are worth in Japan, three, four, to five hundred.[51] Cloth of +a high wool is not in request, but such as is low shorn is most +vendible. Fine _bayes_ of the before-mentioned colours are saleable, if +well cottoned, but not such as those of Portugal. Sayes, _rashes_, +single and double bouratts, silk grograms, Turkey grograms; camblets, +_Divo Gekepert, Weersetynen, Caniaut, Gewart twijne_;[52] velvets, musk, +sold weight for weight of silver; India cloths of all sorts are in +request; satins, taffetas, damasks, Holland linen from fifteen to twenty +stivers the Flemish ell, but not higher priced; diaper, damasks, and so +much the better if wrought with figures or branches; thread of all +colours; carpets, for tables; gilded leather, painted with figures and +flowers, but the smallest are in best demand; painted pictures, the +Japanese delighting in lascivious representations, and stories of wars +by sea or land, the larger the better worth, sell for one, two, or three +hundred. Quick-silver, the hundred cattees sell from three to four +hundred. + +[Footnote 50: This forms a part of the Appendix to the Voyage of Saris, +Purch. Pilg. I. 394; where it is joined to the end of observations by +the same author on the trade of Bantam, formerly inserted in this +Collection under their proper date.--E.] + +[Footnote 51: This account is very vaguely expressed; but in the title +in the Pilgrims, the sales are stated to be in _masses_ and +_canderines_, each canderine being the tenth part of a masse. The +information contained in this short subdivision is hardly intelligible, +yet is left, as it may possibly be of some use towards reviving the +trade of Japan, now that the Dutch are entirely deprived of their +eastern possessions.--E.] + +[Footnote 52: These articles, in italics, are unknown.] + +The hundred cattees of vermilion are worth from three to six hundred. +Paint for women's faces, the hundred cattees are worth twenty-eight. +Cooper in plates, 125 Flemish pounds are worth from 90 to 100. Lead in +small bars, the 100 cattees from 60 to 88. Lead in sheets is in greater +request, the thinner the better, and 100 pounds Flemish sell for 80. +Fine tin, in logs or bars, 120 pounds Flemish bring 350. Iron, twenty +five Dutch ounces worth four. Steel, the 100 cattees, worth from one to +two hundred. Tapestry. Civet, the cattee worth from 150 to 200. China +root, the 100 cattees or pekul worth 40. China sewing gold, the paper +worth three masse three. Powdered Chinese sugar, the 100 cattees or +pekul worth forty to fifty. Sugar-candy, the pekul or 100 cattees, from +fifty to sixty. Velvets, of all colours, eight ells the piece, from 120 +to 130. Wrought velvets, from 180 to 200. Taffetas of all colours, and +good silk, worth, the piece, from twenty-four to thirty or forty. Satin, +seven or eight ells long, the piece worth from 80 to 100. Figured satin, +from 120 to 150. _Gazen_, of seven pikes or ells, from forty to fifty. +Raw silk, the cattee of twelve pounds Flemish, from thirty to forty. +Untwisted silk, the weight of twenty-eight pounds Flemish, from thirty +to forty. Twisted silk, from twenty-eight to forty. + +Drinking-glasses of all sorts, bottles, canns, cups, trenchers, plates, +beer-glasses, salt-sellers, wine-glasses, beakers, gilt looking-glasses +of large size, _Muscovy glass_, salt, writing-papers, table-books, +paper-books, _lead to neal_ pots. Spanish soap is in much request, and +sells for one masse the small cake. Amber beads, worth 140 to 160. Silk +stockings, of all colours. Spanish leather, neats leather, and other +kinds of leather used for gloves, worth six, eight, or nine. Blue +_candiques_ of China, from fifteen to twenty. Black _candiques_, from +ten to fifteen. Wax for candles, 100 pounds Flemish worth from 200 to +250. Honey, the pekul, worth sixty. _Samell_ of Cochin-China, the pekul, +worth 180. Nutmegs, the pekul, twenty-five. Camphor of Borneo, or +_barous, the pound hollans_, from 250 to 400. Sanders of _Solier_, the +pekul, worth 100. Good and heavy Callomback wood, the pound, worth one, +two, three, to five. Sapan, or red wood, the pekul, from twenty to +twenty-six. Good and large elephants teeth, from 400, to 500, 600, 700, +and even 800. Rhinoceros horns, the Javan cattee, worth thirty. Gilded +harts-horns, the piece, worth 300, 400, 500. Roch allum in request, in +so much that what cost only three gilders has sold for 100 gilders; but +not in demand by every one. + +The Chinese in Japan will commonly truck for silver, giving gold of +twenty-three carats, at the rate of from fifteen to twenty times its +weight in silver, according as silver is plenty or scarce. + +The following commodities are to be bought in Japan, and at the rates +here quoted. Very good hemp, 100 cattees, being 120 pounds of Holland, +are worth from sixty-five to seventy. _Eye-colours_ for dying blue, +almost as good as indigo, made up in round cakes, and packed 100 cakes +in a fardel, worth fifty to sixty. Dye-stuff for white, turning to red +colour, made up in fardels of fifty _gautins malios_, worth five to +eight. Very good white rice, cased, worth, the _fares_, eight +three-fifths. Rice of a worse sort, the bale, worth seven three-tenths. +At Jedo, Osaka, and Miaco, there is the best dying of all sorts of +colours, as red, black, and green; and for gliding gold and silver, is +better than the Chinese varnish. Brimstone is in great abundance, and +the pekul may be bought for seven. Saltpetre is dearer in one place than +another, being worth one and a half. Cotton-wool, the pekul, may be +bought for ten. + +§15. _Supplementary Notices of Occurrences in Japan, after the Departure +of Captain Saris_.[53] + +"This subdivision consists entirely of letters from Japan, and conveys +some curious information respecting the transactions of the English in +Japan, whence they have been long excluded. They are now perhaps of some +interest, beyond the mere gratification of curiosity, as, by the entire +expulsion of the Dutch from India, there seems a possibility of the +British merchants in India being able to restore trade to that distant +country. In the _Third_ PART of our Collection, various other relations +of Japan will be inserted."--E. + +[Footnote 53: These are appended in the Pilgrims, vol. I. pp. 406--413, +to the observations of Mr. Richard Cocks, already given in conjunction +with the voyage of Captain Saris.--E.] + +No. I. _Letter from Mr Richard Cocks, dated Firando, 10th December, +1614_.[54] + +To this day, I have been unable to complete my old books of accounts, +owing to the dispatching of our people, some to one place and some to +another, and owing to the rebuilding of our house, and afterwards buying +a junk, and repairing her. She is now ready to set sail for Siam, having +been at anchor these ten days, waiting for a fair wind to proceed on her +voyage, at _Couchi_, a league from Firando, where your ship rode at your +departure from hence. She is called the Sea-Adventure, of about 200 tons +burden, in which Mr Adams goes as master, with Mr Wickham and Mr Edward +Sayers as merchants, in consequence of the death of Mr Peacock, slain in +Cochin-China, and the probability that Mr Carwarden has been cast away +in his return from thence, as we have no news of him or of the junk in +which he sailed, as I have at large informed the worshipful company. + +[Footnote 54: This letter appears to have been written to Captain +Saris.--E.] + +Since your departure from Japan, the emperor has banished all jesuits, +priests, nuns, and friars, from the country, shipping them off for +_Anacau_ [Macao] in China, or Manilla in the Philippine islands, and has +caused all their churches and monasteries to be pulled down or burnt. +_Foyne Same_, the old king of Firando, is dead, and _Ushiandono_, his +governor, with two other servants, cut open their bellies to bear him +company, their bodies being burned, and their ashes entombed along with +his. Wars are likely to ensue between _Ogusho Same_, the old emperor, +and _Fidaia Same_, the young prince, son of _Tico Same_, who has +strongly fortified himself in the castle of _Osaka_, having collected an +army of 80,000 or 100,000 men, consisting of malcontents, runaways, and +banished people, who have repaired from all parts to his standard, and +he is said to have collected sufficient provisions for three years. The +old emperor has marched against him in person, with an army of 300,000 +men, and is at the castle of _Fusima_. The advanced parties of the two +armies have already had several skirmishes, and many have been slain on +both sides. The entire city of Osaka has been burned to the ground, +excepting only the castle, so that Mr Eaton had to retire with his goods +to _Sakey_,[55] yet not without danger, as a part of that town has +likewise been burnt. So great a tempest or tuffoon has lately occurred +at _Edoo_ [Jedo,] as had never been before experienced at that place. +The sea overflowed the whole city, obliging the people to take refuge on +the hills: and the prodigious inundation has defaced or thrown down all +the houses of the nobles, which you know were very beautiful and +magnificent. + +[Footnote 55: It has been formerly explained that _Sakey_ was a town on +the river Jodo, directly opposite to Osakey or Osaka, the river only +being interposed.--E.] + +Let this suffice for Japanese news; and I now proceed to inform you of +our success in selling our goods. The emperor took all our ordnance, +with most of our lead, and ten barrels of gunpowder, with two or three +pieces of broad-cloth. Most of our other broad-cloths are sold, namely, +black, hair-colour, and cinnamon-colour, at fifteen, fourteen, thirteen, +and twelve tayes the _tattamy_; but they will not even look at +Venice-reds and flame-colours, neither are _stammels_ in such request as +formerly, but they enquire much for whites and yellows. As the Dutch +sold most of their broad-cloths at low prices, we were forced to do so +likewise. In regard to our Cambaya goods, they will not look at our _red +Zelas_, blue _byrams_, or _dutties_, being the principal part of what is +now left us; and only some white bastas sell at fourteen or fifteen +masses each. _Cassedys nill, alleias_, broad _pintados_, with spotted, +striped, and checquered stuffs, are most in request, and sell at good +profit. We have also sold nearly half of our Bantam pepper for +sixty-five _masse_ the _pekull_, and all the rest had been gone before +now, had it not been for the war. I am in great hope of procuring trade +into China, through the means of Andrea, the China captain, and his two +brothers, who have undertaken the matter, and have no doubt of being +able to bring it to bear, for three ships to come yearly to a place near +_Lanquin_,[56] to which we may go from hence in three or four days with +a fair wind. Of this I have written at large to the worshipful company, +and also to the lord-treasurer. + +[Footnote 56: As Nangasaki is uniformly named _Langasaque_ in this first +English voyage to Japan, I am apt to suspect the _Lanquin_ of the text +may have been Nan-kin.--E.] + +Some little sickness with which I have been afflicted is now gone, for +which I thank God. Mr Easton, Mr Nealson, Mr Wickham, and Mr Sayer, have +all been very sick, but are all now well recovered, except Mr Eaton, who +still labours under flux and tertian ague. May God restore his health, +for I cannot too much praise his diligence and pains in the affairs of +the worshipful company. Jacob Speck, who was thought to have been cast +away in a voyage from hence to the Moluccas, is now returned to Firando +in the command of a great ship called the Zelandia, together with a +small pinnace called the Jacatra. The cause of his being so long missing +was, that in going from hence by the eastward of the Philippines, the +way we came, he was unable to fetch the Moluccas, owing to currents and +contrary winds, and was driven to the west of the island of Celebes, and +so passed round it through the straits of Desalon, and back to the +Moluccas. The Chinese complain much against the Hollanders for robbing +and pilfering their junks, of which they are said to have taken and +rifled seven. The emperor of Japan has taken some displeasure against +the Hollanders, having refused a present they lately sent him, and would +not even speak to those who brought it. He did the same in regard to a +present sent by the Portuguese, which came in a great ship from Macao to +Nangasaki. You thought, when here, that if any other ship came from +England we might continue to sell our goods without sending another +present to the emperor; but I now find that every ship which comes to +Japan must send a present to the emperor, as an established custom. I +find likewise that we cannot send away any junk from hence without +procuring the yearly licence from the emperor, as otherwise no Japanese +mariner dare to leave the country, under pain of death. Our own ships +from England may, however, come in and go out again when they please, +and no one to gainsay them. + +We have not as yet been able by any means to procure trade from _Tushma_ +into Corea; neither indeed have the inhabitants of Tushma any farther +privilege than to frequent one small town or fortress, and must not on +pain of death go beyond the walls of that place. Yet the king of Tushma +is not subject to the emperor of Japan.[57] We have only been able to +sell some pepper at Tushma, and no great quantity of that. The weight +there is much heavier than in Japan, but the price is proportionally +higher. + +[Footnote 57: No place or island of any name resembling _Tushma_ is to +be found in our best maps. The name in the text probably refers to +_Tausima_, called an some maps _Jasus_, an island about forty miles +long, about midway between Kiusiu and Corea.--E.] + +I have been given to understand that there are no great cities in the +interior of Corea, between which inland country and the sea there are +immense bogs or morasses, so that no one can travel on horseback, and +hardly even a-foot; and as a remedy against this, they have great +waggons or carts upon broad flat wheels, which are moved by means of +sails like ships. Thus, by observing the monsoons or periodical winds, +they transport their goods backwards and forwards, by means of these +sailing waggons. In that country they make damasks, sattins, taffaties, +and other silk stuffs, as well as in China. + +It is said that _Fico Same_, otherwise called _Quabicondono_, the former +emperor of Japan, pretended to have conveyed a great army in these +sailing waggons, to make a sudden assault upon the emperor of China in +his great city of Pekin, where he ordinarily resides; but was prevented +by a nobleman of Corea, who poisoned himself to poison the emperor and +many of the nobles of Japan. On which occasion, as is said, the Japanese +lost, about twenty-two years ago, all that they had conquered in Corea. + +James Turner, the youth who used to play the fiddle, left a girl here +with child; and though I gave her two tayes in silver to bring up the +child; she killed it as soon as it was born, which is a common thing in +this country. The whistle and chain belonging to Mr Foster, the master +of the Clove, are found, and are under the charge of Mr Adams, who will +be accountable for them. I meant to have sent you a Japanese almanack by +a former letter to the same effect as this, dated the 25th _ultimo_, and +sent by the Sea Adventure by way of Siam, but forgot to do so; and which +I now send along with this letter. I pray you that this letter may +suffice for your brother, Mr George Saris, and the rest of my loving +friends: And, with hearty commendations in general, I leave you all to +the holy protection of the Almighty; resting always your ever loving +friend at command, RICHARD COCKS. + + +_No. 2. Letter from Mr Richard Cocks, dated Firando, 10th December, +1614, to the Worshipful Thomas Wilson, Esq. at his House in the +Britain-burse[58] in the Strand._ + +[Footnote 58: Perhaps that now called Exeter Change.--E.] + +My last to you was of the 1st December, 1613, from this island of +Firando in Japan, and sent by Captain John Saris in the ship Clove. In +that letter, I advised you how unkindly the Hollanders dealt with us at +the Moluccas; since which time there has not occurred any matter of +moment to communicate, except what I have detailed in another letter to +my good Lord Treasurer. It is given out here by the Hollanders, that our +East India Company and that of Holland are likely to join into one; and +if this prove true, it is thought it will be an easy matter to drive the +Spaniards and Portuguese out of these eastern parts of the world, or +else to cut them off from all trade. You would hardly believe how much +the Hollanders have already daunted the Portuguese and Spaniards in +these parts, especially in the Moluccas, where they daily encroach on +the Spaniards, who are unable to withstand them, and are even in fear +that they may shortly deprive them of the Philippine islands. The +Portuguese also are in great fear of being driven by them out of the +trade they now carry on from Ormus to Goa, and with Malacca and Macao in +China. + +There is one thing of which I cannot yet conceive the issue, and that is +the robbing and plundering the Chinese junks, which is daily done by the +Hollanders in these parts, the goods whereof must amount to great value, +and suffice to fit out and maintain a great fleet, which is worthy of +consideration. Should the emperor of Japan fall out with the Hollanders, +and debar them from the trade of his dominions, which is not unlikely, +the Hollanders will then make prize of the Japanese junks as well as of +those of China; for their strength at sea in these parts is sufficient +to do what they please, if only they had a place to retire to for +revictualling and refitting their ships; for they are of late grown so +stout, that they mock at those who were formerly their masters and +teachers. It is very certain that they have got possession of several +fortresses at the Moluccas and other parts; yet, to my certain +knowledge, the natives in these parts are more inclined towards the +Spaniards, although at the first they were glad of the arrival of the +Hollanders, having been disgusted by the intolerable pride of the +Spaniards. But now they have time to reflect, that the Spaniards brought +them abundance of money, and were liberal though proud; while the poor +Hollanders, who serve there both by sea and land, have such bare pay, +that it can hardly supply clothes and food; and their commanders +allege, that all the benefits derived from conquest or reprisals, belong +to the states and the _Winthebbers_, as they call them. It is hard to +judge how all these things may end. + +Were it not for the misbehaviour of the Hollanders, I am of opinion that +we should procure trade with China, as we only demand leave for three +ships to come and go there, and merely to establish factors there to +transact our business, without bringing any Jesuits or _padres_, whom +the Chinese cannot abide to hear of, because they came formerly in such +great numbers to inhabit the land, and were always begging and craving, +to the great displeasure of the pagans. I am however in good hope of +success, as our English nation has acquired a good fame and character +since our arrival, which I am given to understand has come to the ears +of the emperor of China, who has heard how we have been received by the +emperor of Japan, having large privileges allowed us, and also that we +have at all times held the Castilians in defiance both by sea and land. +I have been informed of these things by the Chinese who come hither, and +that the emperor and other great men of China delight to hear accounts +of our nation. I had almost forgotten to mention, that some China +merchants lately asked me, if we were allowed to trade with China, +whether the king of England would prevent the Hollanders from robbing +and spoiling their junks? Which question was rather doubtful to me, yet +I answered that his majesty would take measures to prevent the +Hollanders from injuring them. + +We have lately had news that a tuffon or tempest has done vast injury at +Jedo, a city of Japan as large as London, where the Japanese nobility +have very beautiful houses, now mostly destroyed or greatly injured. The +whole city was inundated, and the inhabitants forced to take shelter in +the hills; a thing never before heard of. The palace of the king, which +is a stately building in a new fortress, has had all its gilded tiles +carried away by a whirlwind, so that none of them could be found. The +pagans attribute this calamity to some charms or conjurations of the +Jesuits, who were lately banished: but the Japanese converts to popery +ascribe it to the vengeance of God, as a punishment for having banished +these holy men. + +We have lately had a great disaster in Cochin-China, to which place we +sent a quantity of goods and money, to the value of £730, as it cost in +England, under the care of Mr Tempest Peacock and Mr Walter Carwarden, +who went as merchants in a Japanese junk, carrying our king's letters +and a handsome present for the king of Cochin-China. They arrived at the +port called _Quinham_,[59] delivered his majesty's letters and present, +and were entertained with kind words and fair promises. The Hollanders, +seeing that we adventured to that country, would needs do the same, and +were at first kindly entertained; but in the end, Mr Peacock and the +chief Dutch merchant going ashore one day in the same boat, to receive +payment from the king for broad-cloth and other commodities they had +sold him, they were treacherously assailed on the water, their boat +overset, and both were killed in the water with harpoons, as if they had +been fishes, together with their interpreters and other attendants, who +were Japanese. Mr Carwarden being aboard our junk escaped sharing in +this massacre, and came away, but neither he nor the junk have ever been +since heard of, so that we fear he has been cast away. + +[Footnote 59: _Turon_ is the port of Cochin-China in the present time, +and _Quinham_ is unknown in modern geography; perhaps the old name of +some island or village at the port or bay of Turon.--E.] + +It is commonly reported here, both among the Chinese and Japanese, that +this was done by order of the king of Cochin-China in revenge against +the Hollanders, who had burnt one of his towns, and had slaughtered his +people most unmercifully. The origin of this quarrel was occasioned by a +large quantity of false dollars, sent to _Quinham_ by the Hollanders +some years ago, and put off in payment for silks and other Chinese +goods, to the great injury of the merchants of that country. When the +falsehood of the money was discovered, they laid hands upon the Dutch +factors, and are said to have put some of them to death. Upon this the +Dutch ships came upon the coast, and landed a body of men, who burnt a +town, putting man, woman, and child to the sword. This, as reported, was +the occasion of our present mischance, and of the slaughter of Mr +Peacock, because he was in company with the Hollanders. Along with this +letter, I send you a Japanese almanack, by which you will see the manner +of their printing, with their figures and characters. And so I leave you +to the holy protection of the Almighty, resting always, &c. + +RICHARD COCKS. + + + +No. 3. _Letter from Edmond Sayer, dated Firando, 5th December, 1615. But +having no Address_. + +I received a letter from you by the hands of Captain Copendall of the +Horiander, who arrived here on the 29th of August this year, by which I +learnt your safe arrival at the Cape of Good Hope, homewards bound, and +of the loss of some of your company; and I make no doubt that, long ere +now, you are safe arrived in England, by the blessing of God. I sent you +a letter, dated in November, 1614, by the Dutch ship called the Old +Zealand, in which I informed you of the death of Mr Peacock and Walter +Carwarden, both betrayed in Cochin-China, to our great grief, besides +the loss of goods to the company. + +The last year, Mr Wickham, Mr Adams, and I, when bound for Siam in a +junk we had bought, and meeting with great storms, our vessel sprung a +leak, and we were fain to bear up for the _Leukes_[60] islands, where we +had to remain so long, before we could stop our leaks, that we lost the +monsoon, and had to return here. We have fitted her out again this year, +and are now ready to sail again for Siam. My greatest hope in these +parts is, that we shall be able to establish trade with China, of which +we seem to have a fair prospect through the efforts of the China captain +and his brothers; and I make no doubt that we shall have a factory there +ere long. + +[Footnote 60: The Liqueo islands are here obviously meant, a group to +the south of the south-western extremity of Japan, in 28° N. and long. +129° 30' W. from Greenwich; such being the latitude and longitude of the +centre of the great Liqueo, the principal island of the group.--E.] + +This last summer we have had great troubles, in consequence of war +between the emperor and _Fidaia Same_, and we do not certainly know +whether the latter be slain or fled; but the emperor gained the victory, +with a vast loss of men on both sides.[61] Having no other news to +write, I commit you to the protection of the Almighty, and am, &c. +EDMOND SAYER. + +[Footnote 61: In the text of the Pilgrims, this loss is estimated at +400,000, and in a marginal note at 40,000, both in words at length; for +which reason the number is omitted in the text.--E.] + +No. 4. _Letter, with no address, from Edmond Sayer, dated Firando, 4th +December, 1616._ + +Worshipful Sir,--My duty always remembered. Having a favourable +opportunity, I could not omit to trouble you with a few lines. I am but +newly arrived here in Firando from a difficult and tedious voyage to +Siam, to which country we went in a junk belonging to the right +honourable company, in which Mr Adams was master, and myself factor. +Having bought there more goods than our own junk could carry, we +freighted another junk for Japan, in which Mr Benjamin Fry, the chief in +the factory at Siam, thought it proper for me to embark, for the safety +of the goods. The year being far spent, we were from the 1st June to the +17th September in our voyage between Siam and _Shachmar_, during which +we experienced many storms and much foul weather, and lost twenty of our +men by sickness and want of fresh water. The great cause of our tedious +and unfortunate voyage was in our not having a good pilot. The one we +had was a Chinese, who knew nothing of navigation; for, when out of +sight of land, he knew not where he was, nor what course to steer. +Besides he fell sick, and was unable to creep out of his cabin, so that +I was obliged to do my best to navigate our junk; which, with what small +skill I possessed, and by the aid of God, I brought safe to _Shachmar_, +where we arrived on the 17th of September, having then only five men +able to stand on their legs. In consequence, I arrived so late at +Firando that I could not go this year to Siam. But Mr William Eaton has +gone there in the company's junk, having two English pilots, named. +Robert and John Surges.--I am, &c. EDMOND SAYER. + + +_No. 5. Letter from Richard Cocks to Captain John Saris, dated Firando, +15th February, 1617.[62]_ + +[Footnote 62: Perhaps the date of this letter, according to modern +computation, ought to have been 1618, as in those days the year did not +begin till Lady-day, the 25th March.--E.] + +My last letter to you was dated 5th January, 1616, and sent by way of +Bantam in the ship Thomas, which went from hence that year along with +another small ship called the Advice. In that letter I wrote you at +large of all things that had then occurred, and mentioned having +received two of your letters from London; one dated 4th November, 1614, +and the other 15th August, 1615. The Advice has since returned to +Japan, and arrived at Firando on the 2d of August last, and by her I had +a letter from the honourable company, dated 30th January, 1616. + +You will perhaps have heard that Captain Barkeley, while on his +death-bed, narrowly escaped losing 6000 dollars, paid out for custom on +pepper; for, if he had died before it was found out, perhaps some other +man might have taken credit for paying that sum. It is a common saying, +that it is easy for those who live at Bantam to grow rich, as _no man +dies _without an heir_. We have been again this year before the emperor +of Japan, but could not procure our privileges to be enlarged, having +still only leave to carry on trade at Firando and Nangasaki, and our +ships to come only to Firando. + +Mr Edmond Sayer went last year to Cochin-China with a cargo amounting to +about 1800 tayes, in goods and money; and when ready to cone away, was +defrauded of 650 tayes, by a Chinese and others, of whom he had bought +silk for the worshipful company. He had weighed out the money, waiting +to receive the silk, and the money lay in the room where he sat; but +some of the thievish people made a hole through the cane-wall of the +room, and stole away the money unperceived. I am sorry for this +mischance; but Mr Sayer is in hopes to recover it this year, as he left +a person to follow out the suit, and goes back himself in a Chinese +junk, with 2000 tayes in silver to purchase silk. He is to be +accompanied by one Robert Hawley, as his assistant and successor, in +case be should die, and Mr William Adams goes pilot, in place of the +Chinese. God send them a prosperous voyage, and that they may recover +the lost money. Our own junk, the Sea Adventure, made another voyage +last year to Siam, Mr William Eaton being merchant; and has gone back +again this year. God send them a prosperous voyage. + +Last year, the Hollanders sent a fleet of ships from the Moluccas to +Manilla, to fight the Spanish fleet: But the Spaniards kept safe in port +for five or six months, so that the Hollanders concluded they durst not +come out at all, and therefore separated to look out for Chinese junks, +of which some say they took and plundered twenty-five, while others say +thirty-five. It is certain that they took great riches, and all under +the assumed name of Englishmen. At length the Spanish fleet put to sea, +and set upon five or six of the Dutch ships, the admiral of which was +burnt and sank, together with two other ships, the rest escaping. The +Spaniards then separated their fleet, to seek out the remaining Dutch +ships. The Spanish vice-admiral fell in with two Dutch ships one morning +and fought them both all day; but was at length constrained to run his +ship ashore and set her on fire, that she might not be taken by the +Hollanders. These two Dutch ships, and one that was in the former fight, +came afterwards to Firando, together with two other large Dutch ships +from Bantam, as big as the Clove, intending to have intercepted the +Macao ship, which they narrowly missed. Thus five great Holland ships +came this year to Firando, the smallest of them being as large as the +Clove. One of these, called the Red Lion, which was she that rode beside +us at the Moluccas, was cast away in a storm at Firando, together with a +Chinese junk they brought in as a prize. All the goods were recovered, +but were all wet. The emperor allows them to make good prize of all they +take. + +The Black Lion, one of their ships, of 900 tons burden, was sent away +for Bantam, fully laden with raw silk and other rich Chinese +commodities. Another, called the Flushing, of 700 or 800 tons, is gone +for the Moluccas, fully laden with provisions and money. The Sun, a ship +of 600 or 700 tons, with a galliass of above 400 tons, are left to scour +the coast of China, to make what booty they can, and to return next +monsoon. The galliass has sailed already, but the Sun waits for the +Macao ship departing from Nangasaki, that she may endeavour to take her. +The Macao ship had actually sailed, but seeing the galliass, she +returned to Nangasaki, and will, as I think, hardly venture to sail this +year. As I said before, the Dutch have always robbed the Chinese under +the name of Englishmen, which has greatly injured our endeavours to +procure trade in that country; so that we have been obliged to send +people to give notice to the Chinese governors, that they were +Hollanders who have taken and plundered their junks, and not Englishmen. +In fine, I have advised the worshipful company at large of every thing +of moment, which I doubt not will be communicated to you. I send you +here inclosed a copy of my last year's letter; and so, committing you to +God, I rest your loving friend at command, + +RICHARD COCKS. + + +No. 6. _Extract of a Letter from Richard Cocks, without Date or +Address_. + +There came two friars in that ship as ambassadors from the viceroy of +New Spain, with a present for the emperor; but he would neither receive +the present, nor speak with them that brought it, even sending Mr Adams +to order them to quit his dominions, as he had formerly banished all men +of their cloth, and continued still in the same mind. It is said that +_Fidaia Same_ had promised to receive the jesuits again into Japan, if +he had got the victory and been settled in the empire. Had this taken +effect, we and the Hollanders had doubtless been turned out of Japan, so +that it is better as it is. + +Last year, when we fitted out our junk, we employed a Spaniard, called +Damian Marina, the same person who thought to have gone with you in +company with George Peterson. This Damian was a good helmsman, and was +therefore employed by us, and another Spaniard, named Juan de Lievana, +went with them as passenger. The junk however lost her voyage, and they +returned to Nangasaki, where the carrak of Macao soon afterwards +arrived. Understanding that these two Spaniards had gone in our vessel, +the Portuguese arrested them and put them in irons in their ship, +condemning them to death as traitors to their king and country, for +serving their English enemies. I took their defence in hand, and +procured an order from the emperor to set them at liberty, to the great +displeasure of the Spaniards and Portuguese; and these two men are going +passengers to Bantam in the Hosiander. + +We have had great troubles in Japan, in consequence of the wars, by +transporting our goods from place to place, to save them. Mr Adams is +gone again in the junk for Siam, accompanied only by Mr Edmond Sayer. Mr +Nealson is very sick; but Mr Wickham and Mr Eaton are both well. I long +to hear from you, and I pray you to deliver the inclosed to my brother. +Yours, most assured at command, + +RICHARD COCKS. + + +No. 7. _Letter from Richard Cocks, without Address, dated Firando, 10th +March, 1620_.[63] + +[Footnote 63: In the Pilgrims, the date of this letter is made 1610, +evidently by error of the press; and, as observed of No. 5, the real +date, according to modern computation, ought to be 1621. The +introductory paragraph is a note by Purchas, distinguished by inverted +commas, retained as a curious specimen of his mode of writing.--E.] + +"Hollanders abuses of the English in those parts, are here published +for knowledge of these eastern affairs and occurrents, as it is meet in +a history. But neither were these national, but personal crimes, and +done in time and place of pretended hostility; and now, I hope, +satisfaction is or shall be made. Neighbourhood of region, religion, and +customs, are easily violated by drink, covetousness, and pride, the +three furies that raised these combustions. This history hath related +the worth of many worthy Hollanders: If it yields a close-stool for +Westarwood, as excrements rather than true Dutch, or a grain-tub or +swill-tub for some brave brewers and bores, that embrued with nobler +blood than themselves, prefer their brutish passions to God's glory, +religion, and public peace let it be no imputation to the nation, which +I love and honour, but to such baser spirits as have [like scorbutical +humours in these long voyages, and their longer peace and want of wonted +employments,] been bred as diseases to their, and infections to our +bodies. My intent is to present others with their acts, and myself with +prayers, that all may be amended."--_Purchas_. + + * * * * * + +It is now almost three years since I wrote your worship any letter. The +purpose of this is to inform you of the unlooked for and unruly +proceedings of the Hollanders against our English nation, in all these +parts of the world, not sparing us even in this empire of Japan, +contrary to the large privileges granted to us by the emperor, that the +Japanese should not meddle with or molest us. But these Hollanders, +having this year seven ships great and small in this port of Firando, +have, with sound of trumpet, proclaimed open war against our English +nation, both by sea and land, threatening to take our ships and goods, +and to kill our persons, as their mortal enemies. This was done by one +Adam Westarwood, their admiral or lord-commander, as they call him, and +was openly proclaimed aboard all their ships. They have even come to +brave us before our own doors, picking quarrels with us, and forcibly +entering our house, thinking to have cut all our throats, yet only +wounded two persons; and, had it not been for the assistance of the +Japanese our neighbours, who took our parts, they had assuredly slain us +all, as there were an hundred Hollanders to one Englishman. Not +contented with this, they took our boat when going about our business, +in which was one Englishman, whom they carried prisoner to their house, +threatening to put him to death; and indeed he was in imminent danger, +among a crowd of drunken fellows, who threatened to stab him with their +knives. This young man was Richard King, son to Captain King of +Plymouth. Besides this, as two of our barks were passing their ships, +within the town and harbour of Firando, they pointed a cannon at them, +which missed fire, yet shot at them with muskets, which missed the +Englishmen and killed a Japanese. For all this there is no justice +executed against them by the king of Firando, though he has received the +commands of the emperor to that effect. + +Yon will also please to understand, that two of these ships which they +have brought to Firando are English ships, taken by them from Englishmen +in the Indies. They also took two other ships from us, which were riding +at anchor in the road of Patania, where we have a factory, and had not +the least suspicion of any such event. In this unwarrantable affair, +they killed Captain John Jordaine,[64] our chief president for the right +worshipful company in the Indies. Several others were then slain, and +the Hollanders carried the ships and goods away; but six of the +mariners, which were in these captured English ships, escaped from them +here at Firando, and came to our house. The Hollanders sent to me, +demanding to have these men given up to them. But I answered, that I +must first see their commission, that I might know by what authority +they presumed to take our ships and goods, and to slay our men, the +faithful subjects of his majesty. Upon this, they went to the _Tono_, or +king of Firando, desiring to have their _English slaves_,[65] as they +were pleased to call our men, delivered up to them. But they were told, +that they must first demand of the emperor, and whatever he ordained +should be obeyed; but that, in the meantime, he did not consider the +English to be their slaves. This was the grand occasion on which they +grounded their quarrel against us, and meant to have killed us all. But +I trust in God and his majesty, by the solicitations of our right +honourable and right worshipful employers, that his majesty will not +suffer his true and loyal subjects to lose their lives, ships, and goods +by this thievish and unthankful rabble, who are assembled in these parts +of the world, and who make a daily practice to rob and steal from all, +whether friends or foes: And I trust that you will become a solicitor in +this so just cause, against so inveterate an enemy. + +[Footnote 64: This Captain Jordaine is said to have been treacherously +slain in the time of a treaty--_Purch._] + +[Footnote 65: And who was the happy instrument of their own delivery, +from what they accounted slavery, but the English nation?--_Purch._] + +This Adam Westarwood, their lord-commander, set my life to sale; +offering fifty dollars to any one that would kill me, and thirty dollars +for every other Englishman that they could slay: But hitherto God hath +preserved me and the rest in this place; for though they have wounded +two or three of our men, none have died. This villainous proceeding[66] +of their lord-commander was secretly told me by some of their own +people, who advised me and the rest of us to take heed to our safety. +They also informed me of the noble parentage of this their +lord-commander Westarwood, telling me that his father is a close-stool +maker at Amsterdam, or thereabouts; and that the best of their captains +are the sons of shoemakers, carpenters, or brewers. God bless their +honourable and worshipful generation! I would say, God bless me from +them. To make an end of this matter, I went up this year to the +emperor's court at Meaco, to complain of the abuses offered to us in his +dominions, contrary to the privileges his majesty had granted us. I had +very good words, and fair promises made me that we should have justice, +and that the _tono_ or king of Firando should be ordered to see it +performed: But as yet nothing has been done, though I have many times +made earnest suit on the subject. + +[Footnote 66: Unchristian, uncivil, inhumane, immane, devilish +impiety.--_Purch._] + +While I was at the court, and in the emperor's palace at Meaco, there +were several Spaniards and Portuguese there to pay their obeisance to +the emperor, as is their custom every year on the arrival of their +ships. There was also a Hollander at the court, who had lived almost +twenty years in Japan, and speaks the Japanese language very fluently. +In my hearing, and that of others, this fellow began highly to extol +their king of Holland, pretending that he was the greatest king in +Christendom, and held all the others under his command. He little +thought that we understood what he said; but I was not slack in telling +him, that he need not be so loud, for they had no king in Holland, being +only governed by a count, or rather that they governed him. Nay, if they +had any king at all in whom they could boast, it certainly was the king +of England, who had hitherto been their protector, and without whose aid +they had never been able to brag of their States. This retort made the +Spaniards and Portuguese laugh heartily at the poor Hollander, and made +him shut his mouth. + +And now for the news of this country. The emperor is great enemy to the +name of Christians, especially to the Japanese who have embraced the +faith; so that all such as are found are put to death. While at Meaco, I +saw fifty-five martyred at one time, because they would not forsake the +faith, and among them were some children of five or six years old, who +were burnt in the arms of their mothers, calling on Jesus to receive +their souls. Also, in the town of Nangasaki, sixteen others were +martyred for the same cause, of whom five were burnt, and the rest +beheaded and cut in pieces, and their remains put into sacks and cast +into the sea in thirty fathoms deep: Yet the priests got them up again, +and kept their remains secretly as relics. There are many others in +prison, both here and in other places, who look hourly to be ordered for +execution, as very few of them revert to paganism. Last year, about +Christmas, the emperor deposed one of the greatest princes in all Japan, +called _Frushma-tay_, lord of sixty or seventy _mangocas_, and banished +him to a corner in the north of Japan, where he has a very small portion +in comparison with what was taken from him, and he had the choice of +this or of cutting open his own belly. It was thought that this would +have occasioned great troubles in Japan, for all the subjects of +_Frushma-tay_ were up in arms, and meant to hold out to the utmost +extremity, having fortified the city of _Frushma_, and laid in +provisions for a long time. But the _tay_ and his son, being then at the +emperor's court, were commanded to write to their vassals, ordering them +to lay down their arms and submit to the emperor, or otherwise to cut +open their own bellies. Life being sweet, they all submitted, and those +were pardoned who had taken up arms for their _tay_. The emperor has +given their dominions, which were two kingdoms, to two of his own +kinsmen; and this year the emperor has ordered the castle belonging to +Frushma to be pulled down, being a very beautiful and gallant fortress, +in which I saw him this year, and far larger than the city of Rochester. +All the stones are ordered to be conveyed to Osaka, where the ruined +castle, formerly built by _Fico-Same_, and pulled down by _Ogosha-Same_, +is ordered to be rebuilt three times larger than before; for which +purpose all the _tonos_ or kings have each their several tasks appointed +them; to be executed at their several charges, not without much +grumbling: For they had got leave, after so many years attendance at +court, to return to their own residences, and were now sent for again +all of a sadden to court, which angreth them not a little: "But go they +must, will they nill they, on pain of belly-cutting." + +At this time there runs a secret rumour, that _Fidaia Same_ is alive, +and in the house of the _Dairo_[67] at Meaco; but I think it has been +reported several times before this that he was living in other places, +but proved untrue. There are some rich merchants here that belong to +Meaco, who are much alarmed by this report, lest, if true, the emperor +may burn Meaco; and who are therefore in haste to get home. Were Fidaia +actually alive it might tend to overthrow the emperor's power, for, +though a great politician, he is not a martial man: But be this as it +may, things can hardly be worse for us. I advised you in my last of the +destruction of all the Christian churches in Japan; yet there were some +remnants left at Nangasaki till this year, and in particular the +monastery of Misericiordia was untouched, as were all the church-yards +and burying-places; but now, by order of the emperor, all is destroyed, +all the graves and sepulchres of the Christians opened, and the bones of +the dead taken out by their parents and kindred, to be buried elsewhere +in the fields. Streets have been built on the scites of these churches, +monasteries, and burying-grounds, except in some places, where pagodas +have been erected by command of the emperor, who has sent heathen +priests to occupy them, thinking utterly to root out Christianity from +Japan. There were certain places near Nangasaki where several jesuit +fathers and other Christians were martyred, in the reign of _Ogosha +Same_, and where their parents and friends had planted evergreen-trees, +and erected altars near each tree, where many hundreds went daily to say +their prayers; but now, by command of the emperor, all these trees are +cut down, the altars destroyed, and the ground all levelled, it being +his firm resolution utterly to root out the remembrance of all matters +connected with Christianity. + +[Footnote 67: The Dairo was formerly the sovereign of Japan, uniting the +supreme civil and spiritual power, committing the military affairs to a +kind of generalissimo, who usurped supreme authority, and reduced the +Dairo to be a kind of sovereign pontiff or chief-priest.--E.] + +In the months of November and December, 1618, there were two comets seen +all over Japan. The first, rising in the east, was like a great fiery +beam, rent to the southwards, and vanished away in about the space of a +month. The other rose also in the east, like a great blazing star, and +went northwards, vanishing quite away within a month near the +constellation of Ursa-Major or Charles-waine. The wizards of Japan have +prognosticated great events to arise from these comets, but hitherto +nothing material has occurred, excepting the deposition of +_Frushma-tay_, already related. + +I am almost ashamed to write you the news which the Spaniards and +Portuguese report, though some of them have shewn me letters affirming +it to be true, of a bloody cross having been seen in the air in England; +and that an English preacher, speaking irreverently of it from the +pulpit, was struck dumb: On which miracle, as they term it the king of +England sent to the pope, to have some cardinals and learned men brought +to England, as intending that all the people of England should become +Roman catholics. I pray you pardon me for writing of such nonsense, +which I do that you may laugh; yet I assure you there are many Spaniards +and Portuguese here who firmly believe it. I know not what more to write +you at this time: But I hope to come to England in the next shipping +that comes here; and I trust in God that I may find your worship in good +health. + +RICHARD COCKS. + + + + +SECTION XVI. + +_Ninth Voyage of the East India Company, in 1612, by Captain Edmund +Marlow_.[68] + +We sailed from the Downs on the 10th February, 1612, in the good ship +James, and crossed the equator on the 11th April.[69] The 27th of that +month, at noon, we were in latitude, by observation, 19° 40' S. and in +longitude, from the Lizard, 11° 24' W. We this day saw an island +fourteen leagues from us in the S.E. which I formerly saw when I sailed +with Sir Edward Michelburne. It is round like Corvo, and rises rugged, +having a small peaked hill at its east end. Its lat. is 23° 30' S. and +long. 10° 30' W. from the Lizard; and there is another island or two in +sight, seven or eight leagues E.N.E. from this.[70] + +[Footnote 68: Purch. Pilg. I. 440.--The relation of this voyage in the +Pilgrims is said to have been written by Mr John _Davy_, the master of +the ship: Probably the same John _Davis_, or _Davies_, formerly +mentioned as having frequently sailed as master to India in these early +voyages, and from whose pen Purchas published a _Rutter_, or brief book +of instructions for sailing to India. On the present occasion, this +voyage has been considerably abbreviated, especially in the nautical +remarks, which are now in a great degree obsolete and useless, and have +been already sufficiently enlarged upon in the former voyages to +India.--E.] + +[Footnote 69: From some indistinct notices, in the commencement of this +voyage, the Dragon and Hosiander appear to have belonged to the _tenth_ +voyage of the East India Company, and the Solomon to the _eleventh_ +voyage; and that these three ships sailed from England at the same time +with the James, which belonged to the _ninth_ voyage.--E.] + +[Footnote 70: This seemeth the island of Martin Vaz.--_Purch._ The +island of Trinidad, or Martin Vaz, is only in lat. 20° 15' S. and long. +29° 32' W. from Greenwich.--E.] + +We saw the island of St Lawrence on the 29th June, and anchored in five +fathoms water in the bay of St Augustine on the 28th at night. Next day +we weighed, and brought the ship to anchor in the river, one anchor +being in thirty-five and the other in ten fathoms. A ship may ride here +in shallower water at either side, the deep channel being narrow. In +this anchorage no sea can distress a ship, being protected by the land +and shoals, so that it may well be called a harbour, from its safety. We +remained here twenty days, and sailed for Bantam on the 18th of July. + +In the morning of the 24th September we saw the islands of Nintam, in +lat. 1° 30' S.[71] The sound between the two great islands is eighteen +leagues from Priaman, and eleven leagues from the shoals before _Ticoo_, +which must be carefully avoided during the night, by laying two or three +or four leagues off till day-light. When you see three hummocks that +resemble three islands, take care always to have a person stationed on +the outer end of the boltsprit to give warning of any spots in your way, +as there are coral beds, which may be easily seen and avoided. The +course from this sound for Ticoo or Priaman is E.N.E. to these shoals. +In passing this sound, keep your lead always going, and come no nearer +the large southern island than the depth of sixteen fathoms, as there +are shoals towards the east side, and a breach or ledge also off the +northern island, on the larboard going in for Priaman. When nearing the +shoals of Ticoo, set the three hummocks on the main, which look like +islands, as all the land near them is very low; and when you have these +hummocks N.E. by E. then are you near the shoals, and when the hummocks +are N.N.E. you are past the shoals. But great care is necessary +everywhere, as it is all bad ground hereabout, till past the high land +of _Manancabo_, which is in lat 4° 30' S. or thereby. + +[Footnote 71: Pulo Mintao is probably here meant, which is to the south +of the line, but touches it at its northern extremity. The sound in the +text, is probably that between Pulo Botoa and Pulo Mintao.--E.] + +We came to anchor in the road of Priaman on the 26th September, where +we found the Thomas, and remained fourteen days to refresh our sick men, +when the Hector and our ship sailed for Bantam, where we arrived in +company with the Janus and Hector on the 23d October. The 4th November +we weighed from the road of Bantam, intending to proceed by the straits +of Sunda for Coromandel; but the winds and currents were so strong +against us, that we were forced back into the straits of Sunda to refit +our ship, which was much weather-beaten. The 11th December, we anchored +again at Pulo Panian, and went to work to trim our ship and take in +ballast. Being ballasted, watered, and refitted, we sailed again on the +10th January, 1613, for the straits of Malacca. But, being too late in +the monsoon, and both wind and current against us, we got no farther +than seventy leagues from Bantam by the first of March, with much toil +to the men. Wherefore we concluded to take in wood and water, and to +return for Bantam by the outside of Sumatra. + +Having again sailed for Coromandel, we were at noon of the 5th June, +1613, in lat. 12° N. and long. 23° W. from the salt hills, having been +carried by the currents 4° 30', or ninety leagues out of our reckoning. +Whoever sails from Bantam, either up or down, will find such uncertain +reckoning that he may well miss his destined port, unless he looks well +to the variation of the needle, which will help materially in ten or +fifteen leagues, and indeed there is no other way of dealing with these +currents. We now got sight of the land, which is so very low that the +pagodas or pagan churches are first descried. With the aid of the lead, +you may sail boldly on this coast of Coromandel in fifteen fathoms by +night, and ten by day; but a steady man must always be kept at the lead +on such occasions, as the sea shoals suddenly; for after thirteen +fathoms, it will suddenly fall off to shoal water, being like a well or +steep bank, and the ground ooze. The course along the coast is N. by E. +to Pullicate, and so to Masulipatam. + +The 6th June we anchored at noon in the road of Pullicate, in eight +fathoms on sand. There is a middle ground, having only five fathoms, and +within that another, having six, seven, and eight. The marks for the +road where we anchored, are the round hill by the other hill, W. by N. +and the Dutch fort S.W. by W. The latitude is 13° 30' N. and the +variation 18° 10'. Departing from Pullicate roads on the night of the +7th, we were on the 8th in lat. 14° 40' at noon, having sailed +twenty-three leagues since last night, our depth of water being +twenty-three to twenty-fire fathoms, and our course N. by E. but the +lead is our sure guide on this coast, under God. The 9th at noon we were +in lat. 15° 30', having the land in sight, but not the high land of +_Petapoli_ [Putapilly]. During the last twenty-four hours, we sailed +seventeen leagues north, in fifteen and sixteen fathoms. The high land +now in sight is known by a pagoda or pagan temple, and is five leagues +from the high land of Putapilly, in the road of which place we anchored +on the 10th in five fathoms on sand, this new high land bearing from us +N.N.W. the platform of palm trees upon the island E.N.E. by E. and the +bar N.W. by N. The whole sea coast is low land. The latitude here is 15° +52'. Having established a factory, in which we left Mr George Chansey +and our purser as merchants, with other seven men to assist in taking +care of our goods, we sailed from Putapilly on the forenoon of the 19th. + +We anchored in the road of Masulipatam on the 21st, where we found a +ship belonging to Holland. We remained here for six months, until the +6th January, 1614, and then set sail for Putapilly, where we arrived on +the 19th of that month, and remained there, taking in the merchants and +their goods till the 7th February, when we sailed for Bantam. We arrived +there on the 20th April, and on the 10th June set sail for Patane. By +noon of that day, being in lat. 5° 44' S. we had sight of the islands +nine leagues from Bantam, our course, after getting clear of the road, +being N.N.E. in five, six, seven, eight, twelve, fourteen, and so to +twenty-four fathoms. At six in the morning of the 11th, we were close +beside the two islands that are north from Bantam near Sumatra, in lat. +5° S. and in twenty fathoms; this being the surest course both going to +and from Bantam, but it is necessary to keep a good look-out for the +sand-banks which are even with the water. The 12th, being involved in a +strong adverse current, we were forced to anchor in a quarter less four +fathoms, in sight of a reef, twelve leagues short of Lucapara, and +forty-eight from Bantam. + +The 14th, we came in with the island of Banda and the main of Sumatra, +and went through between them in five 1/2 fathoms. In this passage it is +proper to keep nearer the Sumatra shore, though the water is deeper on +the Banda side of the strait; as that side is rocky, while the side +towards Sumatra is oozy. The 16th we came to Palimbangan point; and the +17th at noon, being in lat, 1° 10' S. we anchored in nine fathoms, on +account of it falling calm with a strong current, the isle of Pulo Tino +being to seawards. The 30th, we anchored in the road of Patane in three +1/2 fathoms. On the 1st August we sailed to Sangora to trim our ship, +being a good place for that purpose under shelter of two islands hard by +the main, and fourteen or fifteen leagues from Patane. We anchored in +Sangora road, under the eastermost of the two islands, on the 4th; and +having put our ship into good trim, we came away on the 9th September, +and returned to Patane next day. We remained there a month taking in +the goods of the Globe, to carry them to Bantam, for which place we +sailed on the 9th October, and arrived at Bantam on the 9th November. We +continued there till the 27th January, 1615, to load our ship, and to +get all things in readiness for our voyage home to England. + +The 29th we set sail from Bantam, homewards bound; and when some hundred +leagues from thence, our captain, Mr Edmund Marlow, died. He was an +excellent man, and well skilled in the mathematics and the art of +navigation. The first place at which we anchored was Saldanha bay, where +we arrived on the 29th April, 1615, and next day our consort the Globe +came in. Having well refreshed and refitted our ships, we set sail from +thence on the 17th May, and arrived at St Helena on the 3d June. Sailing +from thence along with our consort, on the 7th of that month, we arrived +in England on the 3d of August, giving praise to God for our safety. + + + + +SECTION XVII. + + +_Tenth Voyage of the English East India Company, in 1612, written by Mr +Thomas Best, chief Commander_.[72] + +From the full tide of this voyage, in the Pilgrims, we learn that there +were two ships employed in this _tenth_ voyage, named the Dragon and the +Hosiander, in which were about 380 persons; and these were accompanied +by two other ships, the James and the Solomon, which belonged to other +voyages, each voyage being then a separate adventure, and conducted by a +separate subscription stock, as formerly explained in the introduction +to the present chapter. We learn from other parts of the Pilgrims, that +the James belonged to the _ninth_ voyage, related immediately before +this, and the Solomon to the _eleventh_, to be afterwards narrated.--E. + +[Footnote 72: Purch. Pilgr. I.456.] + +§1. _Observations during the Voyage from England to Surat_. + +We sailed from Gravesend on the 1st of February, 1612. At noon on the +22d March we made the latitude 15° 20' N. and at two p.m. were abreast +of Mayo, one of the Cape Verd islands, being S.W. by S. about twelve +leagues from Bonavista. To the N. and N.N.W. of Mayo the ground is all +foul, and due N. of the high hummocks a great ledge of rocks runs out +from the land for five or six miles, a mile without which ledge there +are twenty fathoms water. On the west side of the island, you may borrow +in twelve or fifteen fathoms, till you come into the road, where we +anchored in twenty-four fathoms. + +On the morning of the 28th March, we came close by an island in lat. 23° +30', and long. from the meridian of Mayo, 1° 50' E. We did not land upon +this island, but came within two or three miles of it, and in my opinion +there is hardly any anchorage to be found. It may probably produce some +refreshment, as it certainly has wood, which we saw, and it may have +water, as we observed a fair plain spot and very green on its southern +part; but we could find no ground within two or three miles of its +coast. E.N.E. some seven or eight leagues from this, there is another +island; and E. by S. or E.S.E. from the first island, about four or five +leagues, there are two or three white rocks.[73] + +[Footnote 73: In the text it is not said if the latitude be N. or S. yet +S. is probably meant. No island is however to be found in the indicated +situation. In the _eleventh_ voyage, an island is said to have been +discovered in lat. 19° 34'S. certainly known to have been Trinidad, +Santa Maria d'Agosto, or Martin Vaz, of which hereafter.--E.] + +We remained twenty-one days in Saldanha road, and bought for the +three[74] ships thirty-nine beeves and 115 sheep, which we paid for with +a little brass cut out of two or three old kettles. We got the sheep for +small pieces of thin brass, worth about a penny or three halfpence each; +and the beeves in the same manner for about the value of twelve-pence +a-piece. This is an excellent place of refreshment, as besides abounding +in beef and mutton, there is plenty of good fish, all kinds of fowls, +and great store of fat deer, though we could not kill any of these. It +has likewise excellent streams of fresh water, and a most healthful +climate. We landed eighty or ninety sick, who were lodged in tents, and +they all recovered their health in eighteen days, save one who died. +From the 7th to the 28th June, when we set sail from Saldanha bay, we +had continual fine weather, the sun being very warm, and the air +pleasant and wholesome. + +[Footnote 74: One of the ships appears to have been separated from the +fleet, but it does not appear which.--E.] + +We sailed from Saldanha road on the 28th June, and were 100 leagues to +the east of _Cabo das Aguilhas_ before we found any current, but it was +then strong. The 31st July at noon, we found the latitude 17° 8' S. our +longitude being 20° 47' E. and at four p.m. we saw the island of _Juan +de Nova_, distant four leagues E.S.E.[75] Its size, and I think we saw +it all, is about three or four miles long, all very low and rising from +the sea like rocks. Off the west end we saw breakers, yet could not get +ground with a line of 150 fathoms, sounding from our boat. The latitude +of this island, observed with great accuracy, is 17°,[76] and it seems +well laid down in our charts, both in regard to latitude and longitude. +It is a most sure sign of being near this island, when many sea fowl are +seen, and we accordingly saw there ranch fowl, some white, having their +wings tipped only with black, and others all black. + +[Footnote 75: St Juan de Nova is in lat. 17° 50' S. and long. 45° 30'E. +from Greenwich--E.] + +[Footnote 76: In lat. 17° S. and long. 60° E. is an island or bank +called Nazareth, Corados, or Garajos, a long way however from St Juan de +Nova.--E.] + +The 3d August, in lat 13° 35' by observation, and longitude 22° 30' from +the Cape, we saw _Mal-Ilha_, one of the Comoros, about twelve leagues +off, having on the east part of it a very fair sugar-loaf hill.[77] At +the same time with this island, we had sight of that named Comoro, +bearing N.N.W. by W. being high land. At six a.m. of the 4th we were +close in with _Mal-Ilha_, and standing in for some place in which to +anchor, while some eight or nine miles from the shore, we saw the ground +under the ship in not less than eight or ten fathoms. The Hosiander, two +miles nearer the land, had four or five fathoms, and her boat was in +three fathoms. We then sent both our boats to sound, which kept shoaling +on a bank in eight, ten, and twelve fathoms, and off it only half a +cable's length had no ground with 100 fathoms. At the north end of +Mal-Ilha there is a fair big high island, about five or six miles in +circuit.[78] A bank or ledge of rocks extends all along the west side of +Mal-Ilha, continuing to the small high island; and from this little +island to Mal-Ilha may be some eight or nine miles, all full of rocks, +two of them of good height. Being at the north end of this ledge, and +the little island bearing S.E. you may steer in with the land, keeping +the island fair aboard; and within the rocks or broken ground and +Mal-Ilha there is a bay with good anchorage. To the eastwards, on coming +in from the ledge of rocks, there is a great shoal, the outermost end of +which is N.E. or N.E. by E. from the small island five or six miles, and +no ground between that we could find with forty or fifty fathoms line. +In fine, all the north side of Mal-Ilha is very dangerous, but the +above-mentioned channel is quite safe. I would have come to anchor here, +as there is a town about a mile east from the before-mentioned bay, the +people being very good, and having abundance of refreshments, as beeves, +goats, hens, lemons, cocoa-nuts in great plenty, and excellent water, +but could not get in, owing to the wind being directly south. + +[Footnote 77: Mohilla, the Mal-ilha of the text, is in lat. 16° 44° S. +and long. 44° E. from Greenwich. Its difference of long. from the Cape +of Good Hope is 23° 45' E. Thus, in every instance hitherto, the +observations of lat. and long. by Captain Best, at least as printed by +Purchas, are grossly erroneous.--E.] + +[Footnote 78: This description seems rather to refer to the island of +Mayotto, about thirty leagues E. of S. from Mohilla; the small island to +the north, or N. by W. being called Saddle Isle.--E.] + +Two of my men had belonged to a Dutch fleet, that year when they +assaulted Mosambique, on which occasion they put in here, and recovered +the healths of 400 or 500 men in five weeks. Yet it is well named +Mal-Ilha, or the bad island, for it is the most dangerous of any place I +ever saw. It is next to Comoro, from which it is distant some twelve or +fourteen leagues S.S.E. + +At dawn on the 1st September we got sight of land to the eastwards, four +or five leagues distant, my reckoning being then eighty or ninety +leagues short, owing, I suppose, to some current setting east from the +coast of Melinda; neither from the latitude of Socotoro to Damaun could +we see the sun, to know our variation. The 3d at seven a.m. we spoke two +country boats, which informed us that the town, church, and castle in +sight was Damaun. From these boats I got two men, who engaged to carry +the Dragon to the bar of Surat, promising not to bring us into less than +seven fathoms. On the 5th a Surat boat came on board with _Jaddow_ the +broker, who had served Captain William Hawkins three years, and Sir +Henry Middleton all the time he was here. There were likewise in this +boat the brother of the customer of Surat, and three or four others. All +these remained with us till the 7th, when we came to anchor at the bar +of Surat, in eight 1/4 fathoms at high water, and six 1/2 at neap tides. +At spring tides, however, I have found the tide to rise in the offing +three fathoms, and even three 1/2. The latitude of our anchorage was 21° +10' N. and the variation 16° 20' or 16° 27'.[79] On the 11th, _Thomas +Kerridge_ came aboard, with a certificate or licence under the seals of +the justice and governor of Surat, for our quiet and peaceable trade and +intercourse, and with kind entreaties to come ashore, where we should be +heartily welcomed by the people. They also brought off a letter or +narrative, written by Sir, Henry Middleton, which had been left in +charge of the _Moccadam_ of Swally. On the same day, I again sent Mr +Kerridge ashore, accompanied by Hugh Gettins. + +[Footnote 79: Sorat bar is in lat. 21° 2' N. and long. 72° 50' E. from +Greenwich--E.] + +§2. _Transactions with the Subjects of the Mogul, Fights with the +Portuguese, Settlement of a Factory, and Departure for Acheen_. + +On the 13th September, 1612, sixteen sail of Portuguese frigates, or +barks, put into the river of Surat. The 22d, we determined in council to +send a dispatch to the king at Agra, signifying our arrival, and to +require his explicit answer, whether he would permit us to trade and +settle a factory; and if refused, that we would quit his country. The +30th, I got notice that Mr Canning, our purser, and William Chambers, +had been arrested ashore; wherefore I caused a ship of Guzerat to anchor +close beside me, determining to detain her till I should see how matters +went ashore. We also stopped a bark laden with rice from Bassare, +belonging to the Portuguese, out of which we took twelve or fourteen +quintals of rice, for which we paid at the rate of thirteen-pence the +quintal. When I had taken possession of the Guzerat ship, I wrote to the +chiefs of Surat, requiring them to send me all my men, together with the +value of the goods I had landed; on which I should deliver up their ship +and people, allowing them till the 5th of October to give me an answer; +at which time, if I had not a satisfactory answer, I declared my +determination to dispose of the ship and her goods at my pleasure. There +were some 400 or 450 men aboard that ship, ten of the chiefest among +whom I brought into my ship, to serve as hostages. + +On the 6th October, _Medi Joffer_ came aboard my ship, accompanied by +four chiefs and many others, bringing me a great present, and came to +establish trade with us, and to solicit the release of the Guzerat ship. +On the 10th I left the bar of Surat, and came to Swally roads, where I +anchored in eight fathoms at high water. This road-stead is ten or +twelve miles north from the bar of Surat. The 17th, the governor of +_Aamadavar_ [Ahmedabad] came to the water side. I landed on the 19th, +having four principal persons sent aboard my ship, as pledges for my +safety. On the 21st I concluded upon articles of agreement with the +governor and merchants, of which the tenor follows: + +"Articles agreed upon, and sealed, by the governor of Ahmedabad, the +governor of Surat, and four principal merchants; and to be confirmed by +the firmaun and seal of the Great Mogul, within forty days from the date +and sealing hereof, or else to be void; for the settlement of trade and +factories in the cities of Surat, Cambaya, Ahmedabad, Goga, or in any +other part or parts of the dominions of the Great Mogul in this country. +Witnessed by their hands and seals, the 21st of October, 1612." + +1. All that concerns Sir Henry Middleton is to be remitted, acquitted, +and cleared to us; so that they shall never make seizure, stoppage, or +stay of our goods, wares, or commodities, as satisfaction for the same. + +2. They shall procure at their own proper cost, from the King or Great +Mogul, his grant and confirmation of all the articles of this agreement, +under the great seal of his government, and shall deliver the same to +us, for our security and certainty of perpetual amity, commerce, and +dealing, within forty days from the date and sealing hereof. + +3. It shall be lawful for the king of England to keep his ambassador +continually at the court of the Great Mogul, during all the time of this +peace and trade, there to accommodate and conclude upon all such great +and weighty matters as may in any respect tend to disturb or break the +said peace. + +4. At all times, on the arrival of any of our ships in the road of +Swally, proclamation shall be made in the city of Surat, during three +successive days, that all the people of the country shall be free to +come down to the shore, and there to have free trade, dealing, and +commerce with us. + +5. That all English commodities shall pay custom, according to the +value or price they bear, at the time of entry at the custom-house, +after the rate of three 1/2 per cent. ad valorem. + +6. All petty and pedlar ware to be free from duty, that does not exceed +the value of ten dollars. + +7. The English are to have ten _manu_ carried from the water side to +Surat for a _manuda_,[80] and at the same rate back; and are to be +furnished with carts on application to the _moccadam_ of Swally for +sending to Surat, and at that place by a broker with carts downwards to +the sea side at Swally. + +[Footnote 80: This unexplained rate of carriage was probably ten +_manuda_ for one _mahinoodic_.--E.] + +8. If any of our people die in the country, neither the king, the +governor, nor any inferior officer should pretend any title or claim to +any thing that had belonged to the deceased, neither should demand any +fees, taxes, or customs, upon the same. + +9. In case all the men left in these parts should die before the return +of any of our ships, then some officer appointed for the purpose shall +make a true inventory and schedule of all monies, goods, jewels, +provisions, apparel, or other things, belonging to our nation, and shall +safely preserve and keep the same, to be delivered over to the general, +captain, or merchants of the first English ships that arrive afterwards, +from whom a regular receipt and discharge shall be given for the same. + +10. That they shall guarantee all our men and goods on land, redeeming +all of both or either that may happen to be taken on the land by the +Portuguese; delivering both to us again free of all charges, or in lieu +thereof the full value of our said goods and men, and that without +delay. + +11. Insomuch as there are rebels and disobedient subjects in all +kingdoms, so there may be some pirates and sea-rovers of our nation, who +may happen to come into these parts to rob or steal. In that case, the +trade and factory belonging to the English shall not be held responsible +or liable to make restitution for goods so taken; but we shall aid the +subjects of the Great Mogul, to the best of our power who may happen to +be thus aggrieved, by application to our king for justice against the +aggressors, and for procuring restitution. + +12. That all victuals and provisions, required during the stay of our +ships in the roads of Surat and Swally, shall be free of custom, +provided they do not exceed the value of 1000 dollars. + +13. That in all questions of wrongs and injuries offered to us and to +our nation, we shall receive speedy justice from the judges and others +in authority, according to the nature of our complaints and the wrongs +done to us, and shall not be put off by delays, or vexed by exorbitant +charges or loss of time. + +On the 24th October, I landed the present intended for the Great Mogul, +which I brought to the tent of the governor of Ahmedabad, who took a +memorandum of all the particulars, as also a copy of our king's letter +to their sovereign. After which, as before agreed upon with the +governor, I sent them back aboard ship: For I had told him, unless his +king would confirm the articles agreed upon, and likewise write our king +a letter, that I would neither deliver the present nor our king's +letter; for, if these things were refused, then was their king an enemy +not a friend, and I had neither present nor letter for the enemy of our +king. At this time, however, I delivered our present to the governor, +and another to his son. + +The 14th November, a great fleet of frigates or barks, consisting of +some 240 sail, came in sight. I thought they had come to attack us, but +they were a _caffila_ of merchantmen bound for Cambaya; as there comes +every year a similar fleet from Goa, Chaul, and other places to the +southwards, for Cambaya, whence they bring the greatest part of the +loading which is carried by the caracks and galleons to Portugal. + +The 27th I received notice from Mr Canning and Edward Christian, who +were both ashore, that four galleons were fitted out from Goa, and were +coming to attack us, having been in full readiness, and at anchor on the +bar of Goa on the 14th November. The Portuguese fleet came in sight of +us on the 28th; and on the 29th drew near us with the tide of flood. At +two in the afternoon I got under weigh, and by four was about two +cables length from their vice-admiral, fearing to go nearer lest I might +have got my ship aground. I then opened a fire upon him, both with great +guns and small arms, and in an hour had peppered him well with some +fifty-six great shot. From him we received one small ball, either from a +minnion or saker, into our mizen-mast, and with another he sunk our +long-boat, which we recovered, but lost many things out of it. + +The 30th at day-light, I set sail and steered among the midst of the +Portuguese fleet, bestirring ourselves manfully, and drove three of +their four ships aground on the bar of Surat; after which I anchored +about nine a.m. This morning the Hosiander did good service, coming +through also among the enemy's ships, and anchored beside me. At the +tide of flood, the three ships that were aground floated. We then +weighed and made sail towards them, they remaining at anchor. On getting +up to them, we spent upon three of them 150 great shot, and the morning +after some fifty more. At night, we gave the admiral a salute from our +four stern guns as a farewell; in return for which he fired one of his +bow guns, a whole or demi-culverine, the shot from which came even with +the top of our forecastle, went through our _Davie_, killed William +Burrel, and carried off the arm of another of our men. The Hosiander[81] +spent the whole of this day in firing against one of the ships that was +aground, and received many shots from the enemy, one of which killed +Richard Barker the boatswain. + +[Footnote 81: Nathaniel Salmon of Leigh was master of the +Hosiander.--_Purch._] + +Night coming on, we anchored some six miles from the Portuguese ships; +and at nine p.m. they sent a frigate down towards us, which came driving +right _athwart halse_ of the Hosiander, and being discovered by their +good watch, was speedily saluted by shot. The first shot made them hoist +sail, the second went through their sails, and, they immediately made +off.[82] Their intention certainly was to have set our ships on fire, if +they had found us off our guard.[83] + +[Footnote 82: This frigate was sunk by the shot, as I was assured by Mr +Salmon the actor, and eighty of her men were taken up drowned.--_Purch._] + +[Footnote 83: On this occasion the Portuguese had four great galleons +and some twenty-six frigates, or armed barks. In these fights they lost +all their _quondam_ credit, and 160 men, or as others say 500; and the +English settled trade at Surat in spite of all their efforts.--_Purch._] + +We remained at anchor all the first December, the Portuguese not coming +to us nor we to them; though they might easily have come to us without +danger from the sands, but not so we to them. This day I called a +council, and it was concluded to go down to the south, that we might +have a broader channel, hoping that the galleons would follow us. We +accordingly went down some six or seven leagues on the 2d, but they did +not follow us; wherefore on the 3d we stood up again, and anchored +fairly in sight of them. We weighed again on the morning of the 4th, and +stood away before them, they following: But in the afternoon they gave +us over, and hauled in with the land, and at night we directed our +course for Diu. At night of the 5th, we anchored in fourteen fathoms +near the shore, four or five leagues eastwards of Diu. + +The 9th we came to _Madafaldebar_[84] which is ten or eleven leagues E. +by N. from Diu, the coast between being very fair, and having no unseen +dangers. The depth near Diu is fifteen or sixteen fathoms, halfway to +_Madafaldebar_ twelve fathoms, then ten and nine, but not less; and in +nine fathoms we anchored in a fine sandy bay, on the west side of which +is a river coming from a considerable distance inland. This place is +some five or six miles west from the isles of _Mortie_[85] The 15th we +set sail to explore the bay of _Mohar_,[86] having been reported by some +of the people who had belonged to the Ascension to be a good place for +wintering in, or waiting the return of the monsoon for sailing to the +southwards. We accordingly anchored that night in the bay, which is nine +or ten leagues E.N.E. from Madafaldebar, finding the coast and +navigation perfectly good, with ten fathoms all the way, and no danger +but what is seen. I sent my boat ashore, and got twenty excellent sheep +for three shillings each, the best we had seen in the whole voyage. We +found the ruins of a great town at this place, but very few inhabitants. + +[Footnote 84: From the indications in the text, this must be _Jaffrabat_ +on the coast of Guzerat, about thirty-one miles E. by N. from Diu. The +name used in the text must be taken from the native language, while that +of modern geography is the Persian, Mogul, or Arabic name of the +place.--E.] + +[Footnote 85: Called _Searbett_ in Arrowsmith's excellent map of +Hindostan, eight miles E.N.E. from Jaffrabat.--E.] + +[Footnote 86: Called on the margin of the Pilgrims, _Moha, Mona_, or +_Mea_; and which from the context appears to be a bay immediately west +from _Wagnagur_.--E.] + +There happened to be an army encamped in the neighbourhood of this +place, and on the 17th, the general sent four men to me, requesting a +conference. I landed on the 21st, and had much conversation with the +general, who greatly desired to have two pieces of ordnance from us, +making many fair promises of favour to our nation, and even presented me +with a horse and furniture and two Agra girdles or sashes; but I refused +him, having none to spare, and needing all we had for our defence. I +presented him in return with two vests of stammel cloth, two firelocks, +two bottles of brandy, and a knife. + +The 22d, we saw the four galleons coming towards us, and at nine p.m. +they anchored within shot of where we lay. At sun-rise next morning we +weighed and bore down upon them, and continued to fight them till +between ten and eleven a.m. when they all four weighed and stood away +before the wind. We followed them two or three hours, but they sailed +much better large than we, so that we again came to anchor, and they +likewise anchored about two leagues from us. In this days fight, I +expended 133 great shot, and about 700 small. At sunrise of the 24th we +again weighed and bore down upon the galleons, and began to fight them +at eight a.m. continuing till noon, having this day expended 250 great +shot, and 1000 small. By this time both sides were weary, and we all +stood to sea, steering S. by E. The galleons followed us till two or +three p.m. when they put about and come to anchor. I now took account of +our warlike ammunition, and found more than half our shot expended, the +store of the Hosiander being in a similar situation. We had now +discharged against the enemy 625 great shot, and 3000 small. + +Being about four or five leagues from the land, we met with a sand, on +which there was only two or two 1/2 fathoms, laying S.S.E. or thereabout +from _Mosa_. I went over it in nine fathoms, at which time the two high +hills over _Gogo_ were nearly N. from us. Upon this sand the Ascension +was cast away. Between the main and this sand, the channel is nine and +ten fathoms, and the shoaling is rather fast. We continued steering S. +with the tide of ebb, and anchored in eight fathoms, finding the tide to +set E.N.E. and W.S.W. by the compass. At midnight of the 24th we +weighed, standing S.S.E. and at two p.m. of the 25th we anchored in +seventeen fathoms at high water, full in sight of Damaun, which bore +E.S.E. In the afternoon of the 26th we anchored off the bar of Surat. +The 27th we went to Swally road, when Thomas Kerridge and Edward +Christian came aboard. + +On the 6th of January, 1613, the _Firmaun_ from the Great Mogul, in +confirmation of peace and settlement of a factory for trade, came to +Swally as a private letter; wherefore I refused to receive it, lest it +might be a counterfeit, requiring that the chief men of Surat should +come down and deliver it to me, with the proper ceremonials. +Accordingly, on the 11th, the sabandar, his father-in-law Medigoffar, +and several others, came to Swally, and delivered the Firmaun to me in +form, making great professions of respect for our nation in the name of +their king. The 14th we landed all our cloth, with 310 elephants teeth, +and all our quicksilver. This day likewise the Portuguese galleons came +within three or four miles of us. The 16th, I landed Anthony Starkey, +with orders to travel over land for England, carrying letters to give +notice of our good success.[87] + +[Footnote 87: Mr Starkey and his Indian companion or guide were poisoned +on the way by two friars.--Purch.] + +The 17th, having received all my goods from Surat, I set sail at night, +leaving these coasts. The 18th we passed the four galleons, which all +weighed and followed us for two or three hours; but we finally separated +without exchanging shots. The 19th, when abreast of Basseen, we stopt +three Malabar barks, which had nothing in them, and from one of which we +took a boat. The 20th at night we were abreast of Chaul, both town and +castle being full in sight. In the afternoon of the 21st we were abreast +of Dabul, where we boarded three junks belonging to Calicut, laden with +cocoanuts. The 22d in the morning, the Hosiander sent her boat aboard +two junks, and at noon we were at the rocks, which are ten or eleven +leagues N. of Goa, and six or eight miles from the main. Two or three of +these rocks are higher than the hull of a large ship. At six p.m. we +were abreast of Goa, which is easily known by the island at the month of +the river, on which island there is a castle. All the way from Damann to +Goa, the coast trends nearly N. and S. with a slight inclination to N.W. +and S.E. the whole being very fair and without danger, having fair +shoaling and sixteen or seventeen fathoms some three or four leagues off +shore, with good-anchorage every where. + +The 24th we saw a fleet of sixty or eighty frigates or barks bound to +the southwards, being in lat. 13° 00' 30". The high land by the sea now +left us, and the shore became very low, yet with fair shoaling of +sixteen and seventeen fathoms some three or four leagues off. In the +afternoon we went into a bay, where all the before-mentioned frigates +were at anchor, together with three or four gallies. We brought out a +ship with us, whence all the Portuguese fled in their boats, and as two +frigates lay close aboard of her, they had carried away every thing +valuable. Next day we examined our prize, and found nothing in her +except rice and coarse sugar, with which we amply supplied both ships; +and having taken out her masts, and what firing she could afford, we +scuttled and sunk her, taking out likewise all her people, being twenty +or twenty-five Moors. The 26th we met a boat belonging to the Maldives +laden with cocoa-nuts and bound for Cananor, into which I put all the +people of the prize, except eight, whom I kept to assist in labour, one +of them being a pilot for this coast. + +The 27th we were a little past Calicut, abreast of Paniany, our lat. at +noon being 10° 30' N. In the morning of the 28th, we saw Cochin, which +is known by the towers and castle, being in lat 9° 40' N. or thereby. +All the way from Goa to Cochin we never had above twenty fathoms, +though, sometimes four or five leagues from the land; and when only +three, four, or six miles off, the depths were from ten to twelve +fathoms. From lat 11° 30' N. to Cochin, the land was all very low by the +water side; but up the country it was very high all along. Four or five +leagues to the north of Cochin, there is a high land within the country, +somewhat like a table mountain, yet rounded on the top, having long high +mountains to the north of this hill. All this day, the 28th, we sailed +within six or eight miles of the land, in nine, ten, and twelve fathoms. + +We anchored on the 30th in fifteen fathoms, about twenty-six leagues to +the north of Cape Comorin right over against a little village, whence +presently came off six or eight canoes with water and all kinds of +provisions; the name of this place is _Beringar_, which our mariners +usually call Bring-John, being in the kingdom of Travancor. The 1st +February, the king sent me a message, offering to load my ship with +pepper and cinnamon, if I would remain and trade with him. The 5th we +were abreast of Cape Comorin, where we had a fresh gale of wind at E. by +N. which split our fore-top-sail and main bonnet, yet a canoe with eight +men came off to us three or four leagues from the land. We were here +troubled with calms and great heat, and many of our men fell sick, of +which number I was one. On the 8th we were forced back to the roads of +_Beringar_. This place has good refreshments for ships, and the people +are very harmless, and not friends to the Portuguese. From this place to +Cape Comorin, all the inhabitants of the sea coast are Christians, and +have a Portuguese priest or friar residing among them. It is to be +remarked, that the whole coast, even from Damaun to Cape Comorin, is +free from danger, and there is fair shoaling all the way from Cochin to +that cape, having sixteen, eighteen, and twenty fathoms close to the +land, and no ground five or six leagues off, after you come within +twenty-five or thirty leagues of the Cape. The variation at Damaun was +16° 30'; halfway to the Cape about 15°, and 14° at the cape, the +latitude of which is 7° 30' N. [_exactly_ 7° 57']. + +In the afternoon we were fair off the Cape, and found much wind at +E.S.E. giving small hope of being able to go eastwards till the end of +the monsoon, which our Indians reported would be about the end of April. +So I bore up, and came to anchor, four or five leagues within the Cape, +in twenty fathoms close by two rocks. About two miles right off these +two rocks is a sunken rock, which is very dangerous, especially if +sailing in twenty fathoms, but by keeping in twenty-four fathoms all +danger is avoided. We remained here nine days, when we again made sail. +In the morning of the 28th we had sight of Ceylon, some eight or nine +leagues E.S.E. being in lat. 7° N. At 4 p.m. we were close in with that +island, in thirteen, fifteen, and sixteen fathoms. The 1st of March, at +6 p.m. we were abreast of Columbo, the lat. of which is about 6° 30' N. +[7° 2']; having twenty-four and twenty-five fathoms three leagues off. +The 12th we stood in with the land, and anchored in twenty-four fathoms, +the wind being S.E. and S. I sent my boat ashore four leagues to the +north of _Punta de Galle_, and after some time a woman came to talk with +one of our Indians who was in the boat. She said we could have no +provisions: but by our desire she went to tell the men. Afterwards two +men came to us, who flatly refused to let us have any thing, alleging +that our nation had captured one of their boats; but it was the +Hollanders not the English. The 14th, in the morning, the southern point +of Ceylon, called _Tanadare_ [Dondra], bore E.S.E. of us, some five +leagues off. This point is in lat. 5° 30' [5° 54' N.], and is about ten +or twelve leagues E.S.E. from Punta de Galle. The 17th we were near one +of the sands mentioned by Linschoten, being two leagues from the land. +We had twenty-five fathoms water, and on the land, right opposite this +sand, is a high rock like a great tower. The land here trends E.N.E.[88] + +[Footnote 88: Owing probably to careless abbreviation by Purchas, this +solitary notice is all that is given of the voyage between Dondra-head +in Ceylon and Acheen, in the north-west end of Sumatra, to which the +observation in the text seems to refer.--E.] + +§3. _Occurrences at Acheen, in Sumatra_. + +At noon of the 12th April, 1613, we came to anchor in the road of +Acheen, in twelve fathoms, but ships may ride in ten or even eight +fathoms; the best place in which to ride being to the eastward of the +castle, and off the river mouth. I landed the merchants on the 13th; but +the king did not come to town till the 15th, when he sent me his _chop_ +or licence to land, which was brought by an eunuch, accompanied by the +_Xabander_ and six or eight more, to whom I gave 120 _mam_. I landed +along with them, and two hours afterwards the king sent me a present of +some provisions, I having sent him on my landing a present of _two +pieces_;[89] the custom being to make the king some small present on +landing, in return for which he sends several dishes of meat. + +[Footnote 89: These _pieces_, so often mentioned in the early voyages, +were probably fowling-pieces, or European fire-arms.--E.] + +On the 17th, the king sent an elephant, with a golden bason, for our +king's letter, which I accompanied to court, attended by forty of our +men, who were all admitted into the king's presence. After many +compliments, the king returned me our king's letter, that I might read +it to him; and accordingly the substance of it was explained in the +native language, with the contents of which he was well pleased. After +some time, the king told me that he would shew me some of his +diversions, and accordingly caused his elephants to fight before us. +When six of them had fought for some time, he caused four buffaloes to +be brought, which made a very excellent and fierce fight; such being +their fierceness that sixty or eighty men could hardly part them, +fastening ropes to their hind-legs to draw them asunder. After these, +some ten or twelve rams were produced, which fought very bravely. When +it was so dark that we could hardly see, these sports were discontinued, +and the king presented me with a banquet of at least 500 dishes, and +such abundance of hot drinks as might have sufficed to make an army +drunk. Between nine and ten at night, he gave me leave to depart, +sending two elephants to carry me home; but as they had no coverings I +did not ride either of them. + +On the 18th, I went again to court by appointment of the king, when we +began to treat concerning the articles formerly granted by his +grandfather to Mr James Lancaster; but when we came to that in which all +goods were to be brought in and carried out free from customs, we broke +off without concluding any thing. The 19th the ambassador of Siam came +to visit me, and told me, that about thirty months before, three +Englishmen had waited upon his king, who gave them kind entertainment, +being rejoiced at receiving letters from the king of England. He also +said that his king would be much pleased if our ships came to his ports, +telling me what great quantities of Portugal cloth, for so he called our +English cloth, would sell in his country. According to his opinion, the +colours most saleable in his country are, _stammel_ and other reds, +yellows, and other light, gay, and pleasing colours, such as those +already in most request at Surat. He also told me, that his king had +made a conquest of the whole kingdom of Pegu, as that he is now the most +powerful sovereign in the east, except the emperor of China, having +twenty-six tributary kings under his government and authority, and is +able to equip for war 6000 elephants. Their coin is all of silver, gold +being less esteemed, and of less proportional value than with us. That +country produces great abundance of pepper and raw silk; and he said the +Hollanders have factories at Patane, an excellent port, where they are +called English. Siam likewise, according to him, is a good port, and +nearer the court than Patane: Those who go to the city in which the king +resides land always at the port of Siam, whence the royal residence is +twenty days journey by land. I requested from the ambassador to give me +a letter to his sovereign, and letters also to the governors of the +maritime towns in Siam, in favour of the English nation, when we should +come upon these coasts, which he promised me. And, lastly, in token of +friendship we exchanged coins; I giving him some of our English coin, +and receiving from him the coins of Siam. I had often, after this first +interview, friendly intercourse with this ambassador. + +I went to court on the 20th, butt had no opportunity to speak with the +king; whereupon I sent to the king's deputy, or chief minister, and +complained of having been dishonoured, and of having been abused by the +_shahbander_. He promised me speedy redress, and that he should inform +the king without delay, which indeed he did that same day. On the day +following, the king sent two officers of his court to me, to intimate +that I might repair freely to his court at all times, passing the gate +without hindrance or waiting for his _criss_. He also removed the +shahbander of whom I had complained, and appointed a gentleman, who had +formerly been his vice-ambassador to Holland, to attend upon me at all +times to court, or any where else, at my pleasure. The 24th I went to +court, and had access to the king, who satisfied me in all things, and +promised to ratify and renew all the articles formerly agreed upon +between his predecessor and Mr James Lancaster. After many compliments, +he gave me leave; and presently after my return, he sent me an elephant +to attend upon me, and to carry me at all times to any place I pleased. +This is a sign of the highest honour and esteem, as no person may have +an elephant, or ride upon one, but those whom the king is pleased to +honour with that privilege. + +The 2d of May, the king invited me to his fountain to swim, and I was +there accordingly along with him, the place being some five or six miles +from the city; and he even sent me two elephants, one to ride upon, and +the other to carry my provision. Having washed and bathed in the water, +the king made me partake of a very splendid banquet, in which there was +too much arrak, the whole being eaten and drank us we sat in the water; +and at this entertainment all his nobles and officers were present. Our +banquet continued from one till towards five in the evening, when the +king allowed me to depart. Half an hour afterwards, all the strangers +were permitted to go away, and presently afterwards he came away +himself. + +On the 14th, some Portuguese came to Acheen on an embassy from the +governor of Malacca to the king; and as the wind was scant, they landed +three leagues to the east of Acheen road. I immediately sent the +Hosiander, of which I appointed Edward Christian captain, to go in +search of the bark from Malacca, which was brought to me on the 17th: +But the king sent me two messengers, desiring me to release her and her +people and cargo; which I refused, till I had examined the bark and her +contents; saying, however, that in honour and respect for his majesty, I +should then do whatever he was pleased to desire. Afterwards, I was +informed by Mr Christian, that there were only four or five bales of +goods in the bark, and that nothing she contained had been meddled with. +Being satisfied of this I went ashore, and found my merchants were at +the court. They returned presently, saying, that the king was greatly +displeased at the capture of the Portuguese bark in his port, protesting +by his god that he would make us all prisoners, if she were not +released. Having notice that I was ashore, the king presently sent for +me; and, as I was on my way to the court, I met with a gentleman from +the king, who desired me in his name to release the bark; but I told him +I must first see and speak to the king. I was then brought into the +king's presence, and, after much discourse with him, I gave him the +bark and all her contents; with which he was so much pleased, that he +gave me the title of _Arancaia Puto_, signifying the _honourable white +man_, requiring all his nobles to call me by that name. In farther proof +of his satisfaction with my conduct on this occasion, he sold me all his +benzoin at my own price, being twenty _tailes_ the bahar, though then +selling commonly at thirty-four and thirty-five tailes. He at the same +time expressed his esteem and affection for me in the strongest terms, +desiring me to ask from him whatever I thought proper. I only requested +his letters of recommendation and favour for Priaman, which he most +readily promised; and, at my taking leave, he both made me eat some +mangoes, of which he was then eating, and gave me some home with me. + +On the 27th, _Malim Cairy_ came to Acheen, by whom I received letters +from our merchants at Surat, as also a copy of the _firmaun_, sent them +from Agra, bearing date the 25th January, in the seventh year of the +then reigning Great Mogul, by which everything was confirmed that had +been agreed upon between the governor of Ahmedabad and me. The 17th of +June, a Dutch merchant came to Acheen from Masulipatam, who had been +eight months on his way, from whom we learnt the death of Mr Anthony +Hippon at Patane, and of Mr Brown, master of the Globe, who died at +Masulipatam, where our people had met with evil usage. The 24th I +received of the king his present for the king of England, consisting of +a _criss_ or dagger, a _hasega_, four pieces of fine Calicut lawn, and +eight camphire dishes.[90] + +[Footnote 90: In the translation of the letter accompanying these +presents, to be noticed hereafter, they are thus described:--"A criss +wrought with gold, the hilt being of beaten gold, with a ring of stones; +an Assagaya of Swasse, half gold half copper; eight porcelain dishes +small and great, _of camfire one piece of souring stuff_; three pieces +of callico lawns."--The passage in Italics is inexplicable, either in +the words of the letter, or in the description in the text.--E.] + +The 3d of July, the fleet of armed vessels belonging to Acheen arrived, +being only twenty days from the coast of Johor, at which place they had +captured the factory of the Hollanders, making prize of all their goods, +and had brought away some twenty or twenty-four Dutchmen as prisoners. +The 7th, I received the king's letter for Priaman, together with a +_chop_ or licence for my departure; and on the 12th, taking my leave of +Acheen, I embarked. In the morning of the 13th I set sail. It is to be +noted, that, from the 12th April to the middle of June, we had much rain +here at Acheen, seldom two fair days following, and accompanied, by much +wind in sudden gusts. From the 15th June to the 12th July, we had +violent gales of wind, always at S.W. or W.S.W. or W. + +§4. _Trade at Tecoo and Passaman, with the Voyage to Bantam, and thence +Home to England_. + +Leaving Acheen, as said before, on the 13th July, 1613, we came in sight +of _Priaman_ on the 3d of August, it being then nine or ten leagues off, +N.E. by E. and clearly known by two great high hills, making a great +_swamp_ or saddle between them. We saw also the high land of _Tecoo_, +which is not more than half the height of that of Priaman, and rises +somewhat flat. At the same time likewise we saw the high land of +_Passaman_, some seven or eight leagues north of Tecoo, mid-way between +Tecoo and Priaman, which mountain is very high, and resembles Aetna in +Sicily.[91] In the afternoon of the 7th we came to Tecoo, and anchored +to the eastward of the three islands in seven fathoms, the southmost +isle bearing W.S.W. the middle isle W.N.W. and the northern isle N. 1/2 +E. our anchorage being a mile from them. + +[Footnote 91: Perhaps this observed similarity with Aetna is meant to +indicate that this hill also is a volcano.--E.] + +I sent ashore my merchants on the 19th, and landed myself in the +afternoon. Next day, by advice of our council, the Hosiander was sent to +Priaman, with the letter of the king of Acheen. She sailed from Tecoo on +the 12th, and came back on the 18th, when she was dispatched to Bantam. +The 25th there came a junk from Bantam, the owners of which were +Chinese. They confirmed to me the reported death of Sir Henry Middleton, +with the loss of most of the men belonging to the Trades-increase, in +consequence of her main-mast breaking, while heaving her down for +careening her bottom. She was now returned from Pulo-Pannian to Bantam, +and they said that three hundred Chinese had died while employed at work +upon her. + +The 28th a boat I had sent to Passaman returned, having been well +entertained at that place, and brought with them the _Scrivano_ to deal +with me, with whom accordingly I concluded a bargain. The 29th, the +governor of Tecoo sent for me to come ashore, when I went to wait upon +him. He was in council, with all the chiefs of the district, and, after +a long discussion, we agreed on the following price of pepper. In the +first place, we were to pay eighteen dollars the bahar; then there was +8d. the bahar for lastage or weighing, 30d. for _canikens_, and 35 d. +for _seilars_: Besides all which they bargained for presents to sixteen +chiefs or great men. On the 30th, Henry Long came from Passaman, and +informed me that Mr Oliver had fallen sick, and that several others of +our men had died there; upon which I sent my pinnace to bring back Mr +Oliver and all others who survived, and to discontinue our factory at +that place. + +The 21st October, the Hosiander returned from Bantam, bringing me +letters from the English merchants at that place; saying that they had +17,000 bags of pepper ready, all of which I might have, or any part of +it I thought proper, if I chose to come for it, at thirteen dollars the +_timbane_. On this, and several other considerations, I held a +mercantile council, in which it was agreed that the Hosiander should be +left at _Tecoo_ for the sale of our Surat goods, all of which were +accordingly put on board her for that purpose, and I departed in the +Dragon for Bantam from the road of Tecoo on the 30th October. I remained +in this road of Tecoo eleven weeks, in which time I bought 115 or 120 +tons of pepper, and buried twenty-five of our men. All of these either +died, or contracted their mortal illnesses at Passaman, not at Tecoo; +and surely, if we had not attempted to trade at Passaman, all, or at +least most of these, might have now been living. Wherefore, I earnestly +advise all of our nation to avoid sending any of their ships or men to +Passaman, for the air there is so contagious, and the water so +unwholesome, that it is impossible for our people to live at that place. + +I set sail from Tecoo on the 30th October, and arrived in the road of +Bantam on the 11th November, where I anchored in a quarter less four +fathoms, [3-3/4 fathoms.] Next day I convened our English merchants on +board my ship, and agreed on the price of pepper at thirteen dollars the +_bahar_, which is 600 pounds of our weight. Having concluded my business +at this place, I set sail for Saldanha bay; where I bought for a small +quantity of copper, worth perhaps between three and four pounds, 494 +sheep, 4 beeves, and 9 calves. We sailed again from that place on the +4th March, 1614; and on the day of our departure, the natives brought us +more live-stock than we knew how to dispose of; but we brought away +alive, eighty sheep, two beeves, and one calf. + +The 24th of March we saw St Helena, eight or nine leagues to the W.N.W. +its latitude, by my estimation, being 16° S. and its long, from the Cape +of Good Hope, 22° W. At three p.m. we anchored in the road of that +island, right over-against the Chappel. While at St Helena, finding the +road from the Chappel [church valley], to where the lemon-trees grow, a +most wicked way, insomuch that it was a complete day's work to go and +come, I sent my boats to the westward, in hopes of finding a nearer and +easier way to bring down hogs and goats. In this search, my people found +a fair valley; some three or four miles to the S.W. which leads directly +to the lemon-trees, and is the largest and finest valley in the island, +after that at the Chappel, and is either the next, or the next save one, +from the valley of the Chappel. At this valley, which is some three or +four miles from that of the Chappel, and is from it the fourth valley or +swamp one way, and from the point to the westward the second, so that it +cannot be missed, it is much better and easier for getting provisions or +water, and the water is better and clearer. The road or anchorage is all +of one even ground and depth, so that it is much better riding here than +at any other part of the island; and from this place, a person may go up +to the lemon-trees and back again in three hours. We here got some +thirty hogs and pigs, and twelve or fourteen hundred lemons; but if we +had laid ourselves out for the purpose, I dare say we might have got 200 +hogs, besides many goats. + +Continuing our voyage home, we got sight of the Lizard point on the 4th +June, 1614, our estimated longitude from the Cape of Good Hope being +then 27° 20', besides two degrees carried by the currents; so that the +difference of longitude, between the Cape and the Lizard, is 29° 20', or +very nearly. Though we had then only left the Cape of Good Hope three +months before, and were only two months and nine days from St Helena, +more than half our company was now laid up by the scurvy, of which two +had died. Yet we had plenty of victuals, as beef, bread, wine, rice, +oil, vinegar, and sugar, as much as every one chose. All our men have +taken their sickness since we fell in with Flores and Corvo; since which +we have had very cold weather, especially in two great storms, one from +the N. and N.N.E. and the other at N.W. so that it seemeth the sudden +coming out of long heat into the cold is a great cause of scurvy. All +the way from the Cape of Good Hope to the Azores, I had not one man +sick. + +The 15th of June, 1614, we came into the river Thames, by the blessing +of God, it being that day six months on which we departed from Bantam in +Java. + + +SECTION XVIII. + +_Observations made during the foregoing Voyage, by Mr Copland, Chaplain, +Mr Robert Boner, Master, and Mr Nicholas Whittington, Merchant_.[92] + +[Footnote 92: Purch. Pilgr. I. 466. On this occasion, only such notices +as illustrate the preceding voyage are extracted.--E.] + +§1. _Notes extracted from the Journal of Mr Copland, Chaplain of the +Voyage_. + +The bay of Saldhana, and all about the Cape of Good Hope, is healthful, +and so fruitful that it might well be accounted a terrestrial paradise. +It agrees well with our English constitutions; for, though we had ninety +or an hundred sick when we got there, they were all as well in twenty +days as when we left England, except one. It was then June, and we had +snow on the hills, though the weather below was warmish. The country is +mixed, consisting of mountains, plains, meadows, streams, and woods +which seem as if artificially planted on purpose, they are so orderly; +and it has abundance of free-stone for building. It has also plenty of +fish and wild-fowl, as geese, ducks, and partridges, with antelopes, +deer, and other animals. The people were very loving, though at first +afraid of us, because the Dutch, who resort hither to make train-oil, +had used them unkindly, having stolen and killed their cattle; but +afterwards, and especially on our return, they were more frank and kind. +They are of middle size, well limbed, nimble and active; and are fond of +dancing, which they do in just measure, but entirely naked. Their dress +consists of a cloak of sheep or seals-skin to their middle, the hair +side inwards, with a cap of the same, and a small skin like that of a +rat hanging before their privities. Some had a sole, or kind of sandal, +tied to their feet. Their necks were adorned with greasy tripes, which +they would sometimes pull off and eat raw; and when we threw away the +guts of beasts and sheep we bought from them, they would eat them half +raw and all bloody, in a most beastly and disgusting manner. They had +bracelets about their arms of copper or ivory, and were decorated with +many ostrich feathers and shells. The women were habited like the men, +and were at first very shy; but when here on our return voyage, they +became quite familiar, even lifting their rat-skins: But they are very +loathsome objects, their breasts hanging down to their waists. The hair +both of the men and women is short and frizzled. With these people +copper serves as gold, and iron for silver. Their dwellings are small +tents, removable, at pleasure; and their language is full of a strange +_clicking_ sound, made by doubling their tongues in their throats. There +is a high hill, called the _Table Mountain_, which covers all the +adjoining territory for an hundred miles. The natives, who are quite +black, behaved to us very peaceably, but seemed to have no religion, yet +their skins were slashed or cut, like the priests of Baal; and one +seemed to act as chief, as he settled the prices for the whole. Some of +our people went a considerable way into the country, and discovered many +bays and rivers. + +When at Surat, the Guzerats took some of our sea-coal to send to their +sovereign, the Great Mogul, as a curiosity. At this place there came +against us a Portuguese squadron of four galleons, attended by +twenty-five or twenty-six armed barks or frigates, commanded by an +admiral named Nuno de Accunna, and having all red colours displayed, in +token of defiance. When advised by the sabander to keep between us and +the shore, he proudly answered, That he scorned to spend a week's +provisions on his men in hindering us from trade, as he was able to +force us to yield to his superior force in an hour. After three fights, +they sent one of their frigates against us, manned with six or seven +score of their best men, intending to set us on fire, but they were all +sunk. + +_Medhaphrabad_,[93] formerly a fine walled city, has been entirely +ruined in the wars of the Moguls. It has still a strong castle, held by +a refractory chief of the Rajapoots, and was besieged by the nabob, +having fifty or sixty thousand men in his camp. The nabob dwelt in a +magnificent tent, covered above with cloth of gold, and spread below +with Turkey carpets, having declared he would not desist from the siege +till he had won the castle. He sent a horse, and two vests wrought with +silk and gold, to our general Captain Best, with four vests for four +others. On the 23d and 24th of December, we fought again with the +Portuguese, in view of the whole army of the Moguls, and forced them to +cut their cables and flee from us, being better sailing vessels than +ours. + +[Footnote 93: Called Madafaldebar in the preceding section, and there +supposed to be the place now named Jaffrabat, on the coast of +Guzerat.--E.] + +I rode from Swally to Surat in a coach drawn by oxen, which are +ordinarily used in this country for draught, though they have plenty of +excellent and handsome horses. On the way I was quite delighted to see +at the same time the goodliest spring and harvest combined I had ever +seen any where, often in two adjoining fields, one as green as a fine +meadow, and the other waving yellow like gold, and ready to cut down; +their grain being wheat and rice, of which they make excellent bread. +All along the road there were many goodly villages, full of trees which +yield a liquor called _toddy_, or palm-wine, which is sweet and +pleasant, like new wine, being strengthening and fattening. They have +grapes also, yet only make wine from the dried raisins. In Surat there +are many fair houses built of stone and brick, having flat roofs, and +goodly gardens, abounding in pomegranates, pomecitrons, lemons, melons, +and figs, which are to be had at all times of the year, the gardens +being continually refreshed with curious springs and fountains of fresh +water. The people are tali, neat, and well-clothed in long robes of +white callico or silk, and are very grave and judicious in their +behaviour. The sabander assured us that we had slain 350 of the +Portuguese; but we heard afterwards, that above 500 were killed or +maimed. Our general sent letters for England by land, but the messenger +and his Indian attendant were poisoned by two friars. A second letter +was entrusted to a mariner, which reached its destination. + +We anchored in the road of Acheen on the 12th April, 1613, where we were +kindly received by the king. On the 2d of May, all the strangers then at +Acheen were invited to a banquet at a place six miles from the town, and +on this occasion two elephants were sent for our general. To this place +all the dishes were brought by water by boys, who swam with one hand, +while each carried a dish in--the other; and the drink was brought in +the same manner. When the guests had satisfied themselves with tasting +any of the dishes, which indeed they must of all, the remainder was +thrown into the river. In this feast there were at least 500 dishes +served, all well dressed. It continued from one o'clock till five; but +our general, who was wearied with sitting so long in the water beside +the king, was dismissed an hour before the other guests. The captain or +chief merchant of the Dutch factory, either by taking too much strong +drink, or from sitting too long in the cold water, caught an illness of +which he died soon after. + +The 2d June we were entertained by a fight of four elephants with a wild +tyger, which was tied to a stake; yet did he fasten on the legs and +trunks of the elephants, making them to roar and bleed extremely. This +day, as we were told, one eye of a nobleman was plucked out by command +of the king, for having looked at one of the king's women, while bathing +in the river. Another gentleman, wearing a sash, had his head cut round, +because it was too large. Some he is said to throw into boiling oil, +some to be sawn in pieces, others to have their legs cut off, or spitted +alive, or empaled on stakes. The 25th of June, the king of Acheen sent +our general a letter for the king of England, most beautifully written +and painted, of which the following is a translation of the +preamble.[94] + +[Footnote 94: Being merely complimentary, it has not been deemed +necessary to give any more of this letter than the hyperbolical titles +assumed by the petty Mallay rajah.--E.] + +_PEDUCKA SIRIE, Sultan, King of kings renowned in war, sole king of +Sumatra, more famous than his ancestors, feared in his dominions, and +honoured in all the neighbouring countries. In whom is the true image of +a king, reigning by the true rules of government, formed as it were of +the most pure metal, and adorned by the must splendid colours. Whose +seat is most high and complete; whence floweth, as a river of fine +crystal, the pure and undefiled stream of bounty and justice. Whose +presence is like the most pure gold: King of Priaman, and of the +mountain of gold: Lord of nine sorts of precious stones: King of two +Umbrellas of beaten gold; who sitteth upon golden carpets; the furniture +of whose horses, and his _own armour, are of pure gold; the teeth of his +elephants being likewise of gold, and every thing belonging to them. His +lances half gold half silver; his small shot of the same; a saddle also +for an elephant of the same; a tent of silver; and all his seals half +gold half silver. His bathing-vessels of pure gold; his sepulchre also +entire gold, those of his predecessors being only half gold half silver. +All the services of his table of pure gold; &c. + +This great king sendeth this letter of salutation to James, king of +Great Britain, &c._ + +This king of Acheen is a gallant-looking warrior, of middle size, and +full of spirit. His country is populous, and he is powerful both by sea +and land. He has many elephants, of which we saw 150 or 180 at one time. +His gallies are well armed with brass ordnance, such as demi-cannons, +culverins, sackers, minions, &c. His buildings are stately and spacious, +though not strong; and his court or palace at Acheen is very pleasant, +having a goodly branch of the main river surrounding and pervading it, +which he cut and brought in from the distance of six miles in twenty +days, while we were there. At taking leave, he desired our general to +offer his compliments to the king of England, and to entreat that two +white women might be sent him: "For," said he, "if I have a son by one +of them, I will make him king of Priaman, Passaman, and the whole pepper +coast; so that you shall not need to come any more to me, but may apply +to your own English king for that commodity." + +§2. _Notes concerning the Voyage, extracted from the Journal of Mr +Robert Boner, who was Master of the Dragon_. + +The regular trade-wind is seldom met with till two or three degrees +south of the equator. Tornados are sure to be encountered in two or +three degrees north of the line, and sometimes even four degrees. It is +necessary to use the utmost diligence in getting well to the south, as +in that consists the difference between a good and bad voyage, and the +health of the men depend greatly on that circumstance. In passing the +line, it is proper so to direct the course from the island of Mayo as to +cross between the longitudes of _seven_ and _nine_ degrees _west_ of the +Lizard, if possible. At all events be careful not to come within _six_ +degrees, for fear of the calms on the coast of Guinea, and not beyond +_ten_ degrees west from the Lizard if possible, to avoid the W.N.W. +stream which sets along the coast of Brazil to the West Indies; and in +crossing the line, in 7°, 8°, or 9° west of the Lizard, you shall not +fear the flats of Brazil: For the general wind in these longitudes is at +E.S.E. or S.E. so that you may commonly make a S.S.W. course, so as to +keep the ship full that she may go speedily through; for there is much +loss of time in hauling the ship too close by the wind, and it is far +better therefore to give her a fathom of the sheet. + +In making for the bay of Saldanha [_Table bay,_] keep between the +latitudes of 33° 50' and 34° 20' of S. lat. so as to be sure of coming +not much wide of the bay. If, on seeing the land, it appear high, you +are then to the S.W. of the bay: if low sand-hills, you are then to the +northward of the bay. In falling in with, the high land to the +southward, which is between the Cape of Good Hope and the bay, the land +trends N.N.W. and S.S.E. seven leagues from the Cape, and then trends +away N.E. and S.W. towards the point of the Sugar-loaf, some four +leagues. From this point of the _Sugar-loaf_ lieth _Penguin_ island; but +keep fair by the point, as two miles from Penguin island there are two +shoals. From the point to the island there are some seven or eight miles +N. and S. and so, borrowing on that point, in eight or nine fathoms, +steer a course S.E. and E.S.E. till you bring the _Table_ S.S.W. and the +_Sugar-loaf_ S.W. by W. when you may anchor in 6 or 6 1/2 fathoms as you +please; and then will the point of land by the _Sugar-loaf_ bear W.N.W. +some two leagues off, and _Penguin_ island N.N.W. some three leagues +distant. The latitude of the point going into the bay of Saldanha +[_Table bay,_] is 34° 5' S.[95] On coming in there is nothing to fear, +though the air be thick, as the land is bold within a cable's length of +the shore. + +[Footnote 95: Only 33° 54'--E.] + +In my opinion, the current near Cape _Aguillas_ sets to the southward +not above fifty or sixty leagues from the land: Wherefore, in going to +the eastwards, it is right to have sixty leagues from land, so that you +may miss that current. For 90 or 100 leagues beyond Cape _Aguillas_, the +land trends E. by N. and not E.N.E. as in the charts. + +In my opinion the gulf of Cambaya is the worst place in all India for +worms; wherefore ships going to Surat ought to use every precaution +against injury from them. At Acheen our general was denominated +_Arancaya Pattee_ by the king, who showed him extraordinary favour, +sending for him to be present at all sports and pastimes; and all our +men were very kindly used by the people at this place, more so than any +strangers who had ever been there before. + + +§3. _Extracts from a Treatise, written by Mr Nicholas Whittington, who +was left as Factor in the Mogul Country by Captain Best, containing some +of his Travels and Adventures_. + +The sheep at the Cape of Good Hope are covered with hair instead of +wool. The beeves are large, but mostly lean. The natives of that +southern extremity of Africa are negroes, having woolly heads, flat +noses, and straight well-made bodies. The men have only one testicle, +the other being cut out when very young.[96] Their apparel consists of a +skin hung from their shoulders, reaching to their waist, and two small +rat-skins, one before and the other behind, and all the rest of their +body naked, except a kind of skin or leather-cap on their heads, and +soles tied to their feet, considerably longer and broader than the foot. +Their arms are very scanty, consisting of bows and arrows of very little +force, and lances or darts very artificially made, in the use of which +they are very expert, and even with them kill many fish. They are in use +to wear the guts of sheep and oxen hanging from their necks, smelling +most abominably, which they eat when hungry, and would scramble for our +garbage like so many dogs, devouring it quite raw and foul. + +[Footnote 96: Captain Saris told me that some have two; but these are of +the baser sort and slaves, as he was told by one of these marked by this +note of gentility.--_Purch._] + +At Surat, although Sir Henry Middleton had taken their ships in the Red +Sea, they promised to deal fairly with us, considering that otherwise +they might burn their ships and give over all trade by sea, as _Mill +Jaffed_, one of the chief merchants of Surat, acknowledged to us. While +at Surat, every one of us that remained any time ashore was afflicted +with the flux, of which Mr Aldworth was ill for forty days. The custom +here is, that all strangers make presents on visiting any persons of +condition, and they give other presents in return. + +Finding it impossible to have any trade at Surat, as the Portuguese +craft infested the mouth of the river, our general removed with the +ships to Swally roads, whence we might go and come by land without +danger, between that place and Surat. Mr Canning had been made prisoner +by the Portuguese, but the viceroy ordered him to be set ashore at +Surat, saying, "Let him go and help his countrymen to fight, for we +shall take their ships and all of them together." He was accordingly +liberated, and came to us at Swally. The purser had likewise been nearly +taken; but he escaped and got on board. The 3d October, _Seikh Shuffe_, +governor of _Amadavar_, [Ahmedabad], the chief city of Guzerat, came to +Surat and thence to Swally, where he entered into articles of agreement +for trade and friendship. + +The 29th of October, four Portuguese galleons and a whole fleet of +frigates, or armed grabs, hove in sight. Our general went immediately to +meet them in the Dragon, and fired not one shot till he came between +their admiral and vice-admiral, when he gave each of them a broadside +and a volley of small arms, which made them come no nearer for that day. +The other two galleons were not as yet come up, and our consort the +Hosiander could not get clear of her anchors, so that she did not fire a +shot that day. In the evening both sides came to anchor in the sight of +each other. Next morning the fight was renewed, and this day the +Hosiander bravely redeemed her yesterday's inactivity. The Dragon drove +three of them aground, and the Hosiander so _danced the hay_ about them, +that they durst never show a man above hatches. They got afloat in the +afternoon with the tide of flood, and renewed the fight till evening, +and then anchored till next day. Next day, as the Dragon drew much +water, and the bay was shallow, we removed to the other side of the bay +at _Mendafrobay_, [Jaffrabat], where _Sardar Khan_, a great nobleman of +the Moguls, was then besieging a castle of the _Rajaputs_, who, before +the Mogul conquest, were the nobles of that country, and were now +subsisting by robbery. He presented our general with a horse and +furniture, which he afterwards gave to the governor of Gogo, a poor town +to the west of Surat. + +After ten days stay, the Portuguese having refreshed, came hither to +attack us. Sardar Khan advised our general to flee; but in four hours we +drove them out of sight, in presence of thousands of the country people. +After the razing of this castle, Sardar Khan reported this gallant +action to the Great Mogul, who much admired it, as he thought none were +like the Portuguese at sea. We returned to Swally on the 27th December, +having only lost three men in action, and one had his arm shot off: +while the Portuguese acknowledged to have lost 160, though report said +their loss exceeded 300 men. + +The 13th January, 1613, I was appointed factor for the worshipful +company, and bound under a penalty of four hundred pounds. Our ships +departed on the 18th, the galleons not offering to disturb them: and at +this time Anthony Starkey was ordered for England. Mr Canning was +seventy days in going from Surat to Agra, during which journey he +encountered many troubles, having been attacked by the way, and shot in +the belly with an arrow, while another Englishman in his company was +shot through the arm, and many of his peons were killed and wounded. Two +of his English attendants quitted him, and returned to Surat, leaving +only two musicians to attend upon him. He arrived at Agra on the 9th +April, when he presented our king's letter to the Great Mogul, together +with a present of little value; and being asked if this present came +from our king, he answered that it only came from the merchants. The +Mogul honoured him with a cup of wine from his own hand, and then +referred him, on the business of his embassy, to Morak Khan. One of his +musicians died, and was buried in the church-yard belonging to the +Portuguese, who took up the body, and buried it in the highway; but on +this being complained of to the king, they were commanded to bury him +again, on penalty of being all banished the country, and of having all +the bodies of their own dead thrown out from the church-yard. After +this, Mr Canning wrote that he was in fear of being poisoned by the +jesuits, and requested to have some one sent up to his assistance, which +was accordingly agreed to by us at Surat. But Mr Canning; died on the +29th of May, and Mr Kerridge went up on the 22d of June. + +At this time I was to have been sent by the way of Mokha to England; but +the master of the ship said it was impossible, except I were +circumcised, to go so near Mecca. The 13th October, 1613, the ship +returned, and our messenger made prisoner at the bar of Surat by the +Portuguese armed frigates, [grabs] worth an hundred thousand pounds, and +seven hundred persons going to Goa.[97] This is likely to be of great +injury here, for no Portuguese is now permitted to pass either in or out +without a surety; and the Surat merchants are so impoverished, that our +goods are left on our hands, so that we had to send them to Ahmedabad. +John Alkin, who deserted from Sir Henry Middleton to the Portuguese, +came to us at this time, and told us that several of their towns were +besieged by the Decaners, and other neighbouring Moors, so that they +had to send away many hundred Banians and others, that dwelt among them, +owing to want of provisions; and indeed three barks came now with these +people to Surat, and others of them went to Cambaya. Their weak +behaviour in the sea-fight with us was the cause of all this. + +[Footnote 97: Probably owing to careless abridgement by Purchas, this +passage is quite unintelligible. The meaning seems to be, That the ship +in which was the English messenger, having a cargo worth 100,000_l_. +sterling, and 700 persons aboard, bound on the pilgrimage to Mecca, was +taken and carried into Goa.--E.] + +About this time also, Robert Claxon of the Dragon, who had deserted to +the Portuguese for fear of punishment, came to us accompanied by a +German who had been a slave among the Turks. One Robert Johnson, who was +with the Portuguese, and meant to have come to us, was persuaded by +another Englishman, while passing through the Decan, to turn mussulman, +and remain in that country, where he got an allowance of seven shillings +and sixpence a-day from the king, and his diet from the king's table. +But he died eight days after being circumcised. Robert Trully, the +musician, fell out with Mr Kerridge at Agra, and went to the king of +Decan, carrying a German with him as interpreter. They both offered to +turn Mahometans, and Trully, getting a new name at his circumcision, +received a great allowance from the king, in whose service he continues; +but the German, who had been, formerly circumcised in Persia, and now +thought to have deceived the king, was not entertained; whereupon he +returned to Agra, where he serves a Frenchman, and now goes to mass. +Robert Claxon, above mentioned, had also turned Mahometan in the Decan, +with a good allowance at court; but, not being contented, he came to +Surat, where he was pitied by us for his seeming penitence; but being +entrusted with upwards of forty pounds, under pretence of making +purchases, he gave us the slip and returned to the Decan. Thus there are +at present four English renegadoes in the Decan, besides many +Portuguese. The 27th October, 1613, we received letters sent by Mr +Gurney of Masulipatam, written by Captain Marlow of the ship Janus, +informing us of his arrival and trade at that place. + +From Surat I went to _Periano_? three _coss_; thence to Cossumba, a +small village, ten _coss_; and thence to Broach, ten _coss_. This is a +very pretty city on a high hill, encompassed by a strong wall, and +having a river running by as large as the Thames, in which were several +ships of two hundred tons and upwards. Here are the best calicoes in the +kingdom of Guzerat, and great store of cotton. From thence I went to +_Saninga_ [Sarang], ten coss; to _Carrou_? ten c. and then fourteen c. +to _Boldia_ [Brodrah], a smaller city than Broach, but well built, +having a strong wall, and garrisoned by 3000 horse under _Mussuff Khan_. +I went thence ten c. to a river named, the _Wussach_, [the Mahy?] where +Mussuff was about to engage with the rajaputs who lay on the opposite +side of the river, the chief of whom was of the race of the former kings +of Surat. Thence other fourteen coss to _Niriand_,[Nariad] a large town +where they make indigo; and thence, ten c. more to _Amadabar_, or +Ahmedabad, the chief city of Guzerat, nearly as large as London, +surrounded by a strong wall, and seated in a plain by the side of the +river Mehindry. There are here many merchants, Mahometans, Pagans, and +Christians; with great abundance of merchandize, which chiefly are +indigo, cloth of gold, silver tissue, velvets, but nothing comparable to +ours, taffeties, _gumbucks_, coloured _baffaties_, drugs, &c. _Abdalla +Khan_ is governor of this place, who has the rank and pay of a commander +of 5000 horse. From, thence, on my way to Cambay, I went seven c. to +_Barengeo_, [Baregia] where every Tuesday a _cafilla_ or caravan of +merchants and travellers meet to go to Cambay, keeping together in a +large company to protect themselves from robbers. From thence sixteen c. +we came to Soquatera, a fine town with a strong garrison; whence we +departed about midnight, and got to Cambay about eight next morning, the +distance being ten _coss_. + +In November, we rode to _Sarkess_, three coss from Ahmedabad, where are +the sepulchres of the Guzerat kings, the church and handsome tombs being +kept in fine order, and many persons resort to see them from all parts +of the kingdom. At the distance of a coss, there is a pleasant house +with a large garden, a mile round, on the banks of the river, which +_Chon-Chin-Naw_,[98] the greatest of the Mogul nobles, built in memory +of the great victory he gained at this place over the last king of +Guzerat, in which he took the king prisoner, and subjugated the kingdom. +No person inhabits this house, and its orchard is kept by a few poor +men. We lodged here one night, and sent for six fishermen, who in half +an hour caught more fish for us than all our company could eat. + +[Footnote 98: This name seems strangely corrupted, more resembling the +name of a Chinese leader than of a Mogul Khan or Amir. Perhaps it ought +to have been Khan-Khanna.--E.] + +The 28th November, we received intelligence at Ahmedabad, that three +English ships had arrived at _Larry Bunder_, the port town of +_Guta-Negar-Tutla_, [Tatta] the chief city of _Sindy_. I was sent +thither, and came on the 13th December to _Cassumparo_, where I overtook +a cafilla or caravan travelling to _Rahdunpoor_, six days journey on my +way. We went thence to _Callitalouny_, a fair castle; thence seven c. to +_Callwalla_, a pretty village, given by the emperor Akbar to a company +of women and their posterity for ever, to bring up their children in +dancing and music. They exhibited their talents to our caravan, and +every man made them some present, and then they openly asked if any of +us wanted bedfellows. On the 16th we went eight _coss_ to _Cartya_, +where is a well-garrisoned fortress. We remained here till the 18th, +waiting for another caravan for fear of thieves, and then went to +_Deccanaura_,[99] on which day our camel was stolen and one of our men +was slain. The 19th we travelled ten c. to _Bollodo_, a fort held by +_Newlock Abram Cabrate_ for the Mogul, and who that day brought in 169 +heads of the Coolies, a plundering tribe. The 20th in thirteen c. we +came to a fort named _Sariandgo_, and the 21st in ten c. we arrived at +_Rhadunpoor_, a large town with a fort. We remained here till the 23d, +to provide water and other necessaries for our journey through the +desert. + +[Footnote 99: It singularly happens, in the excellent map of Hindoostan +by Arrowsmith, that none of the stages between Ahmedabad and Rahdunpoor +are laid down, unless possibly _Decabarah_ of the map may be _Decanauru_ +of the text; while Mr Arrowsmith actually inserts on his map the route +of Whittington across the sandy desert of Cutch, between Rahdunpoor and +the eastern branch of the Indus, or _Nulla Sunkra_, and thence through +the Delta to Tatta.--E.] + +The 23d, leaving Rhadunpoor, we travelled seven coss, and lay all night +in the fields, having that day met a caravan coming from Tatta that had +been plundered of every thing. On the 24th I sent off one of my peons +with a letter to Larry Bunder, who promised to be there in ten days, but +I think he was slain by the way; we went twelve c. that day. The 25th we +travelled fourteen c. and lodged by a well, the water of which was so +salt that our cattle would not drink it. The 26th ten c. to such +another well, where our camels took water, not having had any for three +days. The 27th after fourteen c. we lodged on the ground; and the 28th, +in ten c. we came to a village called _Negar Parkar_. In this desert we +saw great numbers, of wild asses, red deer, foxes, and other wild +animals. We stopt all the 29th, and met another caravan, that had been +robbed within two days journey of Tatta. _Parkar_ pays tribute yearly to +the Mogul; but all the people from thence to _Inno_, half a day's +journey from Tatta, acknowledge no king, but rob and spare at their +pleasure. When any of the Moguls come among them, they set their own +houses on fire, and flee into the mountains; and as their houses are +only built of straw and mortar, they are soon rebuilt. They exact +customs at their pleasure, and even guard passengers through the desert, +not willing they should be robbed by any but themselves. The 30th we +left Parkar, and after travelling six coss, we lay at a tank or pond of +fresh water. The 31st we travelled eight c. and lay in the fields beside +a brackish well. The 1st January, 1614, we went ten c. to _Burdiano_, +and though many were sick of this water, we had to provide ourselves +with a supply for four days. The 2d we travelled all night eighteen c. +The 3d, from afternoon till midnight, we went ten c. The 4th twelve c. +This day I fell sick and vomited, owing to the bad water. The 5th, after +seven c. we came to three wells, two of them salt and one sweetish. The +6th, having travelled ten c. we came to _Nuraquimire_, a pretty town, +where our company from Rhadunpoor left us. We who remained were two +merchants and myself with five of their servants, four of mine, ten +camels, and five camel-drivers. + +This town of _Nuraquimire_ is within three days journey of Tatta, and to +us, after coming out of the desert, seemed quite a paradise. We agreed +with a kinsman of the Rajah, or governor, for twenty _laries_, or +shillings, to conduct us on the remainder of our journey. We accordingly +departed on the 8th, and travelled ten c. to _Gaundajaw_, where we had +been robbed but for our guard. The 9th we were twice set upon, and +obliged to give each time five _laries_ to get free. We came to +_Sarruna_, a great town of the _rajputs_ with a castle, fourteen _coss_ +from Tatta. We visited the governor, _Ragee Bouma_, eldest son to sultan +_Bulbul_, who was lately captured by the Moguls and had his eyes pulled +out, yet had escaped about two months ago, and was now living in the +mountains inviting all his kindred to revenge. The _Ragee_ treated me +kindly as a stranger, asking me many questions about my country. He +even made me sup with him, and gave me much wine, in which he so +heartily partook, that he stared again. A banian at this place told me +that Sir Robert Sherly had been much abused by the Portuguese and the +governor of _Larry Bunder_, having his house set on fire, and his men +much hurt in the night; and that on his arrival at Tatta, thirteen days +journey from thence, he had been unkindly used by the governor of that +city. He likewise told me of the great trade carried on at Tatta, and +that ships of 300 tons might be brought up to Larry Bunder; and advised +me to prevail upon _Ragee Bouma_ to escort us to Tatta. + +According to this bad advice, we hired the _Ragee_ for forty _laries_ to +escort us with fifty horsemen to the gates of Tatta. We departed from +_Sarruna_ on the 11th January, and having travelled five coss we lay all +night by the side of a river. Departing at two next morning, the Ragee +led us in a direction quite different from our right road, and came +about daybreak into a thicket, where he made us all be disarmed and +bound, and immediately strangled the two merchants and their five men by +means of their camel ropes. After stripping them of all their clothes, +he caused their bodies to be flung into a hole dug on purpose. He then +took my horse and eighty rupees from me, and sent me and my men up the +mountains to his brothers, at the distance of twenty coss, where we +arrived on the 14th, and where I remained twenty days a close prisoner. +On the 7th February, an order came to send me to _Parkar_, the governor +of which place was of their kindred, and that I should be sent from +thence to Rhadunpoor; but I was plundered on the way of my clothes and +every thing else about me, my horse only being left me, which was not +worth taking away. + +Arriving at Parkar on the 28th February, and finding the inhabitants +charitable, we were reduced to the necessity of begging victuals; and +actually procured four mahmoodies by that means, equal to as many +shillings. But having the good fortune to meet a banian of Ahmedabad, +whom I had formerly known, he relieved me and my men. We were five days +in travelling from Parkar to Rhadunpoor, where I arrived on the 19th +March, and went thence to Ahmedabad on the 2d April, after an absence of +111 days. Thence to Brodia and Barengeo, thence sixteen c. to Soquatera, +and ten c. to Cambay. We here crossed the large river, which is seven +coss in breadth,[100] and where many hundreds are swallowed up yearly. +On the other side of the river we came to _Saurau_,[101] where is a town +and castle of the _razbootches_ or rajputs. The 16th of April I +travelled twenty-five coss to Broach. The 17th I passed the river +[Narbuddah], and went ten c. to _Cossumba_; and on the 18th thirteen c. +to Surat. + +[Footnote 100: The great river in the text is assuredly the upper part +of the gulf of Cambay, where the tide sets in with prodigious rapidity, +entering almost at once with a vast wave or bore, as described on a +former occasion in the Portuguese voyages.--E.] + +[Footnote 101: Probably Sarrode, on the south side of the entry of the +river Mahy.--E.] + +According to general report, there is no city of greater trade in all +the Indies than Tatta in Sinde; its chief port being Larry Bunder, three +days journey nearer the mouth of the river. There is a good road without +the river's mouth, said to be free from worms; which, about Surat +especially, and in other parts of India, are in such abundance, that +after three or four months riding, were it not for the sheathing, ships +would be rendered incapable of going to sea. The ports and roads of +Sinde are said to be free. From Tatta they go in two months by water to +Lahore, and return down the river in one. The commodities there are +_baffatys_, stuffs, _lawns_ [muslins], coarse indigo, not so good as +that of Biana. Goods, may be carried from Agra on camels in twenty days +to _Bucker_ on the river Indus, and thence in fifteen or sixteen days +aboard the ships at the mouth of the Indus. One may travel as soon from +Agra to Sinde as to Surat, but there is more thieving on the Sinde road, +in spite of every effort of the Mogul government to prevent it. + +The inhabitants of Sinde consist mostly of Rajputs, Banians, and +Baloches, the governors of the cities and large towns being Moguls. The +country people are rude; going naked from the waist upwards, and wear +turbans quite different from the fashion of the Moguls. Their arms are +swords, bucklers, and lances; their bucklers being large and shaped like +bee-hives, in which they are in use to give their camels drink, and +their horses provender. Their horses are good, strong, and swift, and +though unshod, they ride them furiously, backing them at a year old. The +Rajputs eat no beef or buffalo flesh, even worshipping them; and the +Moguls say that the Rajputs know how to die as well as any in the world. +The Banians kill nothing, and are said to be divided into more than +thirty different casts, that differ somewhat among them in matters of +religion, and may not eat with each other. All burn their dead; and when +the husband dies, the widow shaves her head, and wears her jewels no +more, continuing this state of mourning as long as she lives. + +When a Rajput dies, his wife accompanies his body to the funeral pile in +her best array, attended by all her friends and kindred, and by music. +When the funeral pile is set on fire, she walks round it two or three +times, bewailing the death of her husband, and then rejoicing that she +is now to live with him again: After which, embracing her friends, she +sits down on the top of the pile among dry wood, taking her husband's +head on her lap, and orders fire to be put to the pile; which done, her +friends throw oil upon her and sweet perfumes, while she endures the +fire with wonderful fortitude, loose not bound. I have seen many +instances of this. The first I ever saw was at Surat, the widow being a +virgin of ten years old, and her affianced husband being a soldier slain +in the wars at a distance, whence his clothes and turban were sent to +her, and she insisted on burning herself along with these. The governor +refused to give her permission, which she took grievously to heart, and +insisted on being burnt; but they durst not, till her kindred procured +leave by giving the governor a present, to her great joy. The kindred of +the husband never force this, but the widow esteems it a disgrace to her +family not to comply with this custom, which they may refrain from if +they choose: But then they must shave their heads, and break all their +ornaments, and are never afterwards allowed to eat, drink, sleep, or +keep company with any one all the rest of their lives. If, after +agreeing to burn, a woman should leap out of the fire, her own parents +would bind her and throw her in again by force; but this weakness is +seldom seen. + +The Banian marriages are made at the age of three years or even under; +and two pregnant women sometimes enter into mutual promises, if one of +their children should prove male and the other female, to unite them in +marriage. But these marriages are always in the same cast and religion, +and in the same trade and occupation; as the son of a barber with the +daughter of a barber, and so on. When the affianced couple reach three +years of age, the parents make a great feast, and set the young couple +on horseback dressed in their best clothes, a man sitting behind each to +hold them on. They are then led about the city in procession, according +to their state and condition, accompanied by bramins or priests and many +others, who conduct them to the pagoda or temple; and after going +through certain ceremonies there, they are led home, and feasts are +given for several days, as they are able. When ten years of age, the +marriage is consummated. The reason they assign for these early +marriages is, that they may not be left wifeless, in case their parents +should die. Their bramins are esteemed exceedingly holy, and have the +charge of their pagodas or idol temples, having alms and tithes for +their maintenance; yet they marry, and follow occupations, being good +workmen and ready to learn any pattern. They eat but once a day, washing +their whole bodies before and after meat, and use ablutions after the +natural evacuations. + +The _Baloches_ are Mahometans, who deal much in camels, and are mostly +robbers by land or on the rivers, murdering all they rob; yet are there +very honest men among them in Guzerat and about Agra. While I was in +Sinde, they took a boat with seven Italians and a Portuguese friar, all +the rest being slain in fight. This was ripped up by them in search of +gold.[102] + +[Footnote 102: This is obscurely expressed, leaving it uncertain _what_ +was ripped up in search of gold: The boat, the bodies of the slain, or +the prisoners.--E.] + +John Mildnall, or Mildenhall, an Englishman, had been employed with +three other young Englishmen, whom he poisoned in Persia, to make +himself master of the goods. He was himself also poisoned, yet, by means +of preservatives, he lived many months afterwards, though exceedingly +swelled, and so came to Agra with the value of 20,000 dollars. On this +occasion I went from Surat for Agra, on the 14th May, 1614. I arrived +first at _Bramport_, [Bushanpoor] where Sultan _Parvis_ lives, situated +in a plain on the river _Taptee_ or of Surat, which is there of great +breadth, and at this place there is a large castle. Thence I went to +Agra in twenty-six days, having travelled the whole way from Surat to +Agra, which is 700 coss or 1010 English miles, in thirty-seven days of +winter, during which time it rained almost continually. From Surat to +Burhanpoor is a pleasant champain country, well watered with rivers, +brooks, and springs. Between Burhanpoor and Agra the country is very +mountainous, not passable with a coach, and scarcely to be travelled on +camels. The nearest way is by _Mando_, passing many towns and cities on +every day's journey, with many high hills and strong castles, the whole +country being well inhabited, very peaceable, and clear of thieves. + +Agra is a very large town, its wall being two coss in circuit, the +fairest and highest I ever saw, and well replenished with ordnance; the +rest of the city being ruinous, except the houses of the nobles, which +are pleasantly situated on the river. The ancient royal seat was +_Fatipoor_, twelve coss from Agra, but is now fallen into decay. Between +these two is the sepulchre of the king's father, to which nothing I ever +saw is comparable: yet the church or mosque of _Fatipoor_ comes near it, +both being built according to the rules of architecture. In Agra the +Jesuits have a house and a handsome church, built by the Great Mogul, +who allows their chief seven rupees a-day, and all the rest three, with +licence to convert as many as they can: But alas! these converts were +only for the sake of money; for when, by order of the Portuguese, the +new converts were deprived of their pay, they brought back their beads +again, saying they had been long without pay, and would be Christians no +longer. In consequence of the Portuguese refusing to deliver back the +goods taken at Surat, the king ordered the church doors to be locked up +and they have so continued ever since; so the _padres_ make a church of +one of their chambers, where they celebrate mass twice a day, and preach +every Sunday, first in Persian to the Armenians and Moors, and +afterwards in Portuguese for themselves, the Italians, and Greeks. + +By them I was informed of the particulars of Mildenhall's goods, who had +given them all to a French protestant, though himself a papist, that he +might marry a bastard daughter he had left in Persia, and bring up +another. The Frenchman refusing to make restitution, was thrown into +prison and after four months all was delivered up. + +Between Agumere and Agra, at every ten _coss_, being an ordinary day's +journey, there is a _Serai_ or lodging house for men and horses, with +hostesses to dress your victuals if you please, paying a matter of +three-pence for dressing provisions both for man and horse. And between +these two places, which are 120 coss distant, there is a pillar erected +at every _coss_, and a fair house every ten coss, built by Akbar, on +occasion of making a pilgrimage on foot from Agra to Agimere, saying his +prayers at the end of every coss. These houses serve for accommodating +the king and his women, no one else being allowed to use them. The king +resides at Agimere on occasion of wars with _Rabna_, a rajput chief, who +has now done homage, so that there is peace between them. I made an +excursion to the Ganges, which is two days journey from Agra. The +Banians carry the water of the Ganges to the distance of many hundred +miles, affirming that it never corrupts, though kept for any length of +time. A large river, called the _Geminie_ [Jumna], passes by Agra. + +On the 24th of May, 1616, while on our voyage home to England, we went +into Suldunha bay, where were several English ships outwards bound, +namely, the Charles, Unicorn, Janus, Globe, and Swan, the general being +Mr Benjamin Joseph. We arrived safe at Dover on the 15th September, +1616. + + * * * * * + +John Mildenhall, mentioned in the foregoing article, left England on the +12th February, 1600, and went by Constantinople, Scanderoon, Aleppo, +Bir, Caracmit, Bitelis, Cashbin, Ispahan, Yezd, Kerman, and Sigistan, to +Candhar; and thence to Lahore, where he arrived in 1603. He appears to +have carried letters from Queen Elizabeth to the Great Mogul, by whom he +was well received, and procured from him letters of privilege for trade +in the Mogul dominions. He thence returned into Persia, whence he wrote +to one Mr Richard Staper from Cashbin, on the 3d October, 1606, giving +some account of his travels, and of his negociations at the court of the +Mogul. This letter, and a short recital of the first two years of his +peregrinations, are published in the Pilgrims, vol. I. pp. 114--116, but +have not been deemed of sufficient importance for insertion in this +collection.--E. + + + + +SECTION XIX. + +_Eleventh Voyage of the East India Company, in 1612, in the +Salomon_.[103] + + +We sailed from Gravesend on the 1st February, 1611, according to the +computation of the church of England, or 1612 as reckoned by others. We +were four ships in company, which were counted as three separate +voyages, because directed to several parts of India: The James, which +was reckoned the _ninth_ voyage, the Dragon and Hosiander the _tenth_, +and our ship, the Salomon, as the _eleventh_. + +[Footnote 103: Purch. Pilgr. I. 486. This unimportant voyage is only +preserved, for the sake of continuing the regular series of voyages +which contributed to the establishment of the East India Company. We +learn from Purchas that it was written by Ralph Wilson, one of the mates +in the Salomon, who never mentions the name of his captain. This voyage, +as given by Purchas, contains very little information, and is therefore +here abridged, though not extending to two folio pages in the +Pilgrims.--E.] + +I would advise such as go from Saldanha bay with the wind at E. or S.E. +to get to a considerable distance from the land before standing +southwards, as otherwise the high lands at the Cape will take the wind +from them; and if becalmed, one may be much troubled, as there is +commonly in these parts a heavy sea coming from the west. Likewise, the +current sets in for the shore, if the wind has been at N.N.W. or W. or +S.S.W. And also the shore is so bold that no anchorage can be had. + +The 18th October, we espied the land, being near _Celeber_ in the island +of Sumatra, in about 3° of south latitude. The 2d November, coming +between Java and a ragged island to the westwards of the point of +_Palimbangan_, we met a great tide running out so fast that we could +hardly stem it with the aid of a stiff gale. When afterwards the gale +slacked, we came to anchor, and I found the tide to run three 1/2 +leagues in one watch. I noticed that this tide set outwards during the +day, and inwards through the night. This day at noon the point of +Palimbangan bore N.E. by E. three leagues off, and from thence to the +road of Bantam is five leagues, S.S.E. 1/3 E. The latitude of Bantam is +6° 10' S. and the long. 145° 2' E. This however is rather too much +easterly, as I think the true longitude of Bantam is 144° E. from +Flores.[104] + +[Footnote 104: The long. of Bantam is 106° E. from Greenwich. That in +the text appears to have been estimated from the island of Flores, which +is 31° 20' W. from Greenwich, so that the longitude of Bantam ought to +have been stated as 137° 20' E. from Flores, making an error of excess +in the text of seven or eight degrees.--E.] + +The 7th March, at five p.m. while in lat. 20° 34' S. we descried land +nine leagues off, N.E. 1/2 N. The S.E. part of this island is somewhat +high, but falleth down with a low point. The W. part is not very high, +but flat and smooth towards the end, and falls right down. The south and +west parts of this island is all surrounded with shoals and broken +ground, and we did not see the other sides; yet it seemed as if it had +good refreshments. The longitude of this island is 104° from Flores, but +by my computation 107°.[105] In these long voyages, we do not rely +altogether on our reckoning, but use our best diligence for discovering +the true longitudes, which are of infinite importance to direct our +course aright. + +[Footnote 105: No island is to be found in the latitude and longitude +indicated in the text.--E.] + + + +SECTION XX. + +_The Twelfth Voyage of the East India Company, in 1613, by Captain +Christopher Newport_.[106] + + +The full title of this voyage, as given in the Pilgrims, is as +follows:--"A Journal of all principal Matters passed in the Twelfth +Voyage to the East India, observed by me _Walter Payton_, in the good +ship the _Expedition_.--Whereof Mr _Christopher Newport_ was captain, +being set out _Anno_ 1612. Written by the said _Walter Payton_." The +date of the year of this voyage, according to our present mode of +computation, was 1613, as formerly explained at large, the year being +then computed to commence on the 25th March, instead of the 1st +January.--E. + +[Footnote 106: Purch. Pilgr. I. 488.] + +§1. _Observations at St Augustine, Mohelia, and divers Parts of Arabia_. + +The 7th January, 1613, we sailed from Gravesend for India, in the good +ship Expedition of London, about the burden of 260 tons, and carrying +fifty-six persons; besides the Persian ambassador and his suite, of whom +there were fifteen persons, whom we were ordered to transport to the +kingdom of Persia, at the cost of the worshipful company. The names of +the ambassador and his people were these. Sir Robert Sherley the +ambassador, and his lady, named Teresha, a Circassian; Sir Thomas +Powell, and his lady, called Tomasin, a Persian; a Persian woman, named +Leylye; Mr Morgan Powell; Captain John Ward; Mr Francis Bubb, secretary; +Mr John Barbar, apothecary; John Herriot, a musician; John Georgson, +goldsmith, a Dutchman; Gabriel, an old Armenian; and three Persians, +named Nazerbeg, Scanderbeg, and Molhter. + +In the morning of the 26th April; we fell in with a part of the land of +Ethiopia, [Southern Africa,] close adjoining to which is a small island, +called _Conie island_, [Dassen island] all low land, and bordered by +many dangerous rocks to seawards. It is in the lat. of 33° 30' S. The +wind falling short, we were constrained to anchor between that island +and the main, where we had very good ground in nineteen or twenty +fathoms. We sent our boat to the island, where we found Penguins, geese, +and other fowls, and seals in great abundance; of all which we took as +many as we pleased for our refreshment. By a carved board, we observed +that the Hollanders had been there, who make great store of train-oil +from the seals. They had left behind them the implements of their work, +together with a great copper cauldron standing on a furnace, the +cauldron being full of oil; all which we left as we found them. + +Having spent two days here at anchor, and the wind coming favourable, we +weighed and proceeded for the Cape of Good Hope, and arrived, by God's +grace, at Saldanha on the 30th of April, where we found six ships at +anchor. Two of these, the Hector and James, were English, and the other +four Hollanders, all homeward bound. We here watered, and refreshed +ourselves well with reasonable abundance of the country sheep and +beeves, which were bought from the natives, and plenty of fresh fish, +which we caught with our seyne. The 10th May the Pepper-corn arrived +here, likewise homewards bound; and as she was but ill provided with +necessaries, we supplied her from our scanty store as well as we could +spare. + +Being all ready to depart with the first fair wind, which, happened on +the 15th May, we then sailed altogether from the bay, taking leave +according to the custom of the sea, and we directed our course for St +Augustine. In our way we had sight of _Capo do Arecife_,[107] part of +the main land of Africa, in lat. 33° 25' S. on the 24th May, the compass +there varying 6° 9'. The 15th June we got sight of the island of St +Lawrence or Madagascar, and on the 17th came to anchor close beside port +St Augustine, meaning to search the soundings and entrance into the bay +before we went in, as there was no one in the ship well acquainted with +it. Having done this, we went in next day, and came to anchor in ten +fathoms, yet our ship rode in forty fathoms. We had here wood and +water, and great abundance of fresh fish, which we caught in such +quantities with the seyne as might have served for six ships companies, +instead of our own. But we could get no cattle from the natives, who +seemed to be afraid of us; for, though they came once to us, and +promised to bring us cattle next day, they seemed to have said so as a +cover for driving away their cattle, in which they were employed in the +interim, and they came no more near us. Some days after, we marched into +the woods with forty musketeers, to endeavour to discover some of the +natives, that we might buy cattle; but we only found empty houses, made +of canes, whence we could see the people had only gone away very +recently, as their fires were still burning, and the scales of fish they +had been broiling were lying about. We also saw the foot-marks of many +cattle, which had been there not long before, and had to return empty +handed. + +[Footnote 107: The latitude in the text indicates Burtrenhook, near the +mouth of the Groot river, this being probably the Dutch name, while that +in the text is the Portuguese.--E.] + +The entry into the port of St Augustine resembles that of Dartmouth +haven; and on going in, you must bring the wood, called +Westminster-hall, to which it has some resemblance, to bear N.E. by E. +and then steer due E. borrowing a little towards the south side of the +bay, where your soundings will be thirteen, nine, eight, and seven +fathoms, all good ground, till you be shut within the shoal. After this +you have deep water till you come into the road, and then have seven, +eight, and ten fathoms. But if you go too far behind the hill on the +larboard hand, which resembles an old barn, you shall then have thirty +and forty fathoms. St Augustine is in lat 23° 30' S. the var. being 15° +40'.[108] + +[Footnote 108: Long. 44° 20' E. from Greenwich.--E.] + +We sailed from St Augustine on the 23d June, directing our course for +the island of Mohelia, and on the 3d July we had sight of an island +called Juan, nine or ten leagues E. by S. from Mohelia. We came also +this day to anchor at Mohelia, between it and some broken land off its +southern side. We had here great abundance of refreshments, and very +cheap; for we bought five bullocks in exchange for one Levant sword, and +had goats, hens, pine-apples, cocoa-nuts, plantains, oranges, lemons, +and limes, for trifles worth little. Such bullocks as we had for money +cost a dollar each, or ten pieces of 4-1/2d.; at which rate we +purchased forty-one beeves. The natives of this island are chiefly Moors +[negroes], but there are Arabians, Turks, and others also among them; +and they are much engaged in wars with the people of _Juan_, [Hinznan or +Johanna,] and Comoro islands in their neighbourhood. They told us that +the king of the island died the day we arrived, being succeeded by his +son, _Phanehomale_, who was only of tender years, and was to reign under +the protection of the queen his mother. His brother-in-law, as chief +man, accompanied by several other people of condition, came down to bid +us welcome, and used us very kindly. Both he and many others of the +islanders spoke tolerably good Portuguese, so that I had much +conversation with them, and was informed of every thing I wished to +know. + +In this island they build barks, in which they trade along the coast of +Melinda and Arabia, disposing of slaves and fruit, by which means they +supply themselves with dollars, and with such articles as they need. I +suspect also that they have some dealings with the Portuguese, but they +would not let us know this, lest we might suspect them of treachery. +They told me that we were welcome, and that the whole island was at our +command to do us service; but, if we had been Portuguese, they would +have put us all to the sword. In my opinion, however, it would be +dangerous to repose too much confidence in them. The king's +brother-in-law shewed me a letter of recommendation of the place, +written in Dutch, and left there by a Hollander; and he requested of us +to leave a letter to the same purport, certifying their honest and +friendly dealings, that they might be able to show to others of our +nation. To this we consented, and I gave them a writing, sealed by our +captain, expressing the good entertainment we had received, and the +prices of provisions; yet recommending to our countrymen, not to trust +them any farther than might seem consistent with their own safety. They +speak a kind of Moorish language, somewhat difficult to learn; so that I +could only pick up the few words following, which may serve to ask for +provisions and fruits, by such as do not understand Portuguese, or in +speaking to any of the natives who have not that language. + + _Gumbey_, a bullock. + _Buze_, a goat. + _Coquo_, a hen. + _Sinzano_, a needle. + _Seiavoye_, cocoa-nuts. + _Demon_, lemons. + _Mage_, water. + _Surra_, a kind of drink. + _Soutan_, the king. + _Quename_, a pine-apple. + _Cartassa_, paper. + _Tudah_, oranges. + _Arembo_, bracelets. + _Figo_, plantains. + +This island of Mohelia is in lat 12° 10' S.[109] and has good anchorage +in its road in forty fathoms. Having watered and refreshed ourselves +sufficiently, we sailed from thence on the 10th of July, directing our +course for the island of Socotora. The 19th we passed to the north of +the equator; and on the 25th we had sight of land, which we supposed to +have been Cape Guardafui, at the entrance into the Red Sea; and so, +taking a departure for Socotora, we were unable to find it. We were +therefore obliged to consider how we might shelter ourselves against the +fury of the winter in these parts, and also to procure refreshments; +wherefore we determined to sail for the islands of _Curia Muria_, which +are in about the latitude of 18° N.[110] over against the desert of +_Arabia Felix_. In our way; the weather was continually so foggy, that +we were unable at any time to see half an English mile before us, such +being usual in these seas in the months of July, August, and September. +In all this time both the sun and stars were so continually obscured, +that we were never able to get an observation, by which to regulate or +correct our dead reckoning; but, God being our guide, we at length +groped out the land by means of the lead. We could now clearly perceive +the colour of the water to be changed to white, with many yellow grassy +weeds floating on the surface; and heaving the lead continually as we +advanced, we at length struck ground in forty-three fathoms. Proceeding +nearer the land, our sounding lessened to twenty-two fathoms, when we +anchored on good ground; and though we distinctly heard the rut of the +shore at no great distance, we could not perceive the land till next +day, when the weather was somewhat clearer. We then sent our skiff in +shore, to see if any place could be discovered of more security for our +ship to ride in; but, on account of the great sea that came rolling into +the bay, the surge was so violent that they could not come near the +shore, and had to return as they went; only that they had been able to +descry some fair stone-houses by the sea-side, which proved to be +_Doffar_, in Arabia Felix. + +[Footnote 109: Lat. 13° 35' S. Long. 45° 30' E. from Greenwich.--E.] + +[Footnote 110: These islands are at the mouth of a bay of the same name +on the oceanic coast of that portion of Arabia named Mahra, in long, 55° +30' E. from Greenwich.--E.] + +When God sent us a little clear weather, we could perceive a high cape +on the western side of the bay, which we discovered from our skiff the +second time it was sent, and could plainly see that it formed a very +good road for all kinds of winds, except between the E. and S. by E. +points. We were thankful to God for this discovery, and warped our ship +to that road, with much toil to our men, as it was six or seven leagues +from the place where we had anchored. On the 3d of August, having +brought our ship to anchor in that road, we went ashore in the boat to a +little village by the sea-side, called _Resoit_, inhabited mostly by +Arabian fishermen, who entertained us kindly, and gave us all the +information we desired respecting the country. The governor also of +_Doffar_ came down to us, whose name was _Mir Mahommed Madoffar_, who +bade us kindly welcome, and presented us with three bullocks, and some +sheep, goats, hens, sugar-canes, plantains, cocoa-nuts, and the like. In +return we made him a present of a fine damasked fowling-piece, double +lockt, which he greatly admired. He appeared to desire our friendship as +much as we did his; and he gave us licence to land at all times when we +were inclined. He also gave orders to have a market established for us +at the village of Resoit, that we might be supplied with every kind of +provision that the country affords. Their cattle were both dear and +lean, and fresh water so scarce, bad, and difficult to be had, that we +were forced to hire the natives to bring it down to us in skins from a +distance, paying them at the rate of twenty-four shillings for the fill +of five pipes. + +Before leaving this place, Mir Mahommed desired us to leave a writing of +commendation in his favour, specifying the kind and good entertainment +we had received. This was accordingly granted, and I wrote it upon +parchment, beginning it in large letters, the purport being similar to +that granted at Mohelia, and this also was signed by the captain. The +governor also sent us three notes signed by himself, for the purpose of +being given by us to other ships, if they should happen to come upon +this part of the coast, as we had been constrained to do, by which he +might know our ships from those of other nations, and give them good +entertainment accordingly. Cape _Resoit_ is in lat. 16° 38' N. and has +good anchorage in 5-1/2 or 6 fathoms. + +The 28th August, we set sail from thence, directing our course for the +coast of Persia, coasting along the oceanic shore of Arabia; it being +our chiefest object to set the lord ambassador on shore, as, by reason +of the news we had received at the Cape of Good Hope, our expectations +of trade at Surat, Dabul, and all other parts thereabouts, were +frustrated. The 2d September, we sailed close beside an island on the +coast of Arabia, called _Macyra_, in lat. 20° 30' N. And on the 4th of +that month we passed the eastermost point of Arabia, called Cape +_Rassalgat_, in lat. 22° 34' N.[111] + +[Footnote 111: This Cape is in lat. 23° N. and long. 58° 45'E. from +Greenwich.--E.] + + * * * * * + +_Note_.--In explanation of the disappointment of trade at Surat, &c. +there is the following marginal note in the Pilgrims, vol. I. p. +490.--"These news at the Cape were, Captain Hawkins coming away in +disgust, as denied leave to trade; the English being often wronged by +the Mogul, in frequent breach of promise, as already shewn; for which +they forced a trade in the Red Sea on the Mogul subjects. Which +afterwards procured the privileges granted to Captain Best, as already +related, lest the Moguls should have the sea shut up to them, and all +their trade stopt. They were the more induced to grant these privileges +to the English, on seeing them able to withstand the Portuguese, whose +marine force had held the Guzerat people under maritime subjection, and +made them afraid to trade with the English."--_Purch._ + +§2. Proceedings on the Coast of Persia, and Treachery of the Baloches_. + +Having crossed the gulf from Cape Rasalgat, on the 10th September we got +sight of the coast of Persia, in the lat. of 25° 10' N. When some seven +leagues from the land, we sent our skiff ashore to make enquiry +concerning the country, and to seek out some convenient place in which +to land his lordship, having Sir Thomas Powell, with two of the +ambassador's Persian attendants, and _Albertus_, our own linguist, that +we might be able to converse with the natives. They came to a little +village called _Tesseque_,[112] where they spoke with some camel-drivers +and other country-people; from whom they learnt that the country was +called _Getche Macquerona_ [Mekran], and the inhabitants _Baloches_, all +living under the government of a king, named _Melik Mirza_, whose chief +residence was some five or six days journey from thence, at a port named +_Guadal_. They were farther informed, that all the country of _Mekran_ +paid tribute yearly to the king of Persia. When informed of our purpose +to land the ambassador, they told us that, by means of _Melik Mirza_, +his lordship might have a safe conveyance in nine days to _Kermshir_, in +the province of _Kerman_; and from thence might travel in eleven days +more to _Ispahan_ in Persia. + +[Footnote 112: Tize is laid down upon this part of the Persian coast, in +lat 25° 25' N. and long. 60° 80' E. from Greenwich: Perhaps the Tesseque +of the text.--E.] + +We then sailed along the coast, and on the 11th of the month we sent our +boat ashore with Sir Thomas Powell, accompanied as before, to make +farther enquiries, and to endeavour to hire a pilot to direct our course +for Guadal, as we were unacquainted with the coast. They came to a place +called _Pesseque_, about a day's journey from Tesseque, where they had +similar accounts with the former, all commending the port of Guadal as +the best place at which the ambassador could land. Wherefore, being +unable to procure a pilot, we resolved, with God's blessing, to sail to +that place with all the speed we could. On the 13th, while on our way, +we espied coming towards us from the eastwards, two great boats, called +_teradas_, which were sailing along shore for Ormus. Whereupon, that we +might procure a pilot from them, we manned our skiff sufficiently to +bring them by force to our ship, if entreaties were unavailing, yet +without meaning to offer them the smallest injury, or even to send them +away dissatisfied. + +When our skiff came up with them, instead of answering the hails of our +men, they waved our skiff to leeward with a drawn sword; on which, +thinking to fear them, and make them lower their sail, our men fired a +random shot towards them, which they answered by firing another directly +at our skiff, followed by half a hundred arrows, to which our men +answered by plying all their muskets. But our skiff was unable to hold +way with them, as they were under sail, and had therefore to return to +the ship, with one man very dangerously wounded by an arrow in the +breast, who afterwards recovered. As we in the ship saw the skiff +returning without them, we hoisted out our long-boat, and sent her after +the two _teradas_, we following with the ship as near the shore as we +could with safety; for it was now of much importance that we should +speak with them, on purpose to avoid their spreading scandalous reports +of us in the country, which might have frustrated our chief hopes of +landing the ambassador at _Guadal_, being the place we most depended +upon, and being destitute of any other place for the purpose, should +this fail, considering the unwelcome intelligence we had got concerning +Guzerat at the Cape. + +Our long boat, having fetched up with the _teradas_, drove them into a +bay whence they could not escape; on which the native mariners sailed so +far into the bay, that one of the teradas was cast away on the beach, +and the other had nearly shared the same fate, but was saved by our men +just without the surf. Most of the _balloches_ leapt overboard, and +several of them narrowly escaped drowning; while nine of them were +brought by our men to our ship along with the _terada_, part of whom +they had taken out of the water. There were originally twenty-six +balloches in the two teradas, but all the rest escaped ashore by +swimming through the surf. When these men came aboard our ship, they +were found to belong to Guadal; and when told that we were sorry for the +loss of their other bark, as we meant them no harm, but only wished to +speak with them, that we might learn the navigation to their port, they +were glad to learn we had no evil intentions, thinking we had been as +merciless as themselves, and acknowledged their loss proceeded from +their own folly. + +We then informed them that we were bound for Guadal, on purpose to land +a Persian ambassador there, and that we earnestly entreated the master +of the terada, whose name was _Noradin_, to pilot us to that place, for +which we would satisfy him to his contentment. Knowing that he could not +chuse, he consented to go with us, on condition we would permit the +terada and his men to proceed to Muscat, whither they were originally +bound; but we did not think this quite safe, lest they might communicate +news of our arrival among the Portuguese, and thought it better to take +the bark along with us to Guadal, to manifest our own good intentions. +Noradin accordingly consented, between fear and good will, and was much +made of by us to reassure his confidence. On the passage to Guadal, we +had much conference with him and his men, both respecting the state of +the country, the character of their king, and the means of the +ambassador travelling from thence into Persia. Their answers and reports +all confirmed what we had been already told on the coast, and gave us +hopes of success. The terada was about fifteen tons burden, and her +loading mostly consisted in the provisions of the country, as rice, +wheat, dates, and the like. They had a Portuguese pass, which they +shewed us, thinking at first we had been of that nation. I translated +this, to show in what subjection the Portuguese keep all the natives of +these countries, as without such a pass they are not suffered to +navigate these seas, under penalty of losing their lives, ships, and +goods. + +_Antonio Pereira de la Cerda, Captain of the Castle of Muscat, &c._ + +"Know all to whom these presents are shewn, that I have hereby given +secure licence to this _terada_, of the burden of fifty _candies_, +whereof is master Noradin, a Mahomedan _baloche_, dwelling in Guadal, of +the age of fifty years, who carries for his defence four swords, three +bucklers, five bows, with their arrows, three calivers, two lances, and +twelve oars. And that in manner following: She may pass and sail from +this castle of Muscat, to Soar, Dobar, Mustmacoraon, Sinde, Cache, +Naguna, Diu, Chaul, and Cor. In going she carries goods of _Conga_, as +raisins, dates, and such like; but not without dispatch from the +custom-house of this castle, written on the back hereof. In this voyage +she shall not carry any prohibited goods, viz. steel, iron, lead, +tobacco, ginger, cinnamon of Ceylon, or other goods prohibited by his +majesty's regulations. And conforming thereto, the said _terada_ shall +make her voyage without let or hindrance of any generals, captains, or +any of the fleets or ships whatever of his majesty she may happen to +meet with. This licence shall be in force for one whole year, in going +and returning; and if expired, shall continue in force till the +completion of her voyage. + + _Given at the Castle of Muscat, this_ 16_th November_, 1611. + _Written by Antonio de Peitas, notary of the said factory, + &c._ + + _Sealed and signed by_ + ANTONIO PEREIRA." + + The certificate on the back was thus: + "_Registered in the book of Certificates, folio xxxii, et sequ._ + Signed, ANT. PEITAS." + +The 17th September, we sailed past some high rugged cliffs, close to +which, as Noradin told us, was a good watering place, at a village named +_Ivane_, fifteen leagues west from Guadal. That same evening we arrived +at Guadal, and anchored for the night off the mouth of the port, whence +about thirty boats came out next morning to fish, some of which came to +speak with the _balloches_ we had aboard. What conversation passed among +them we did not understand, being in the _balloche_ language. Betimes on +the 18th, we cleared our pilot and his boat, and he departed well +contented. Soon after, the ambassador sent Nazerbeg, one of his Persian +attendants, on shore in our skiff, with a message to the governor +concerning his landing and passing through that country into Persia. +While on the way, our skiff was met by the governor's boat, coming off +to our ship, and Nazerbeg was taken into that boat, which carried him to +the shore, whence he was accompanied by many of the natives to the +governor's tent. He here delivered his message in Persian, which these +people understand as well as their own language, and was kindly +entertained. The answer from the governor was to this effect: That, +although this country of Mekran did not belong to the king of Persia, it +yet owed love and duty thereto, having been long tributary to the king +and his predecessors, and still was. He farther said, that the king of +Mekran was the king of Persia's slave, with many other hollow +compliments, and that the ambassador should be made as welcome as in +Persian all this only tending to allure his lordship ashore by treachery +to his ruin, as appeared by the event. + +With this answer Nazerbeg returned, being accompanied on board by about +a dozen of the most ancient men of the balloches, to confirm the same. +On coming aboard, these men saluted the ambassador most submissively, in +the name of the governor of Guadal, and on their own behalf some even +offering to kiss his feet; and told his lordship that he was most +fortunate in coming to their city at this time, as only the day before +the viceroy had come down with a troop of men, to visit a saint, and +therefore his lordship would be conducted with infinite safety through +the country, and protected from the danger of rebels and thieves, who +infested the country between Mekran and Persia, and might either go +through Kerman or Segistan to Ispahan. They added, that the viceroy +would supply his lordship with camels and horses, and every other +requisite for the journey, and would gladly give him every other +accommodation in his power. They said, moreover, that they were much +rejoiced at having such an opportunity of shewing their unfeigned love +and duty towards the king of Persia, and that the ambassador should be +dispatched on his journey from Guadal in two days, if he were so +inclined. They told us, that our ship should be supplied with water, and +every other necessary of which we were in want; and they gave us three +bags of bruised dates, of about 300 pounds weight, with two boats, +saying the fishing-boats were ordered to give us two fish a-piece daily, +on account of their government, which they did accordingly. + +By these shews of good-will, all men concurring in the same fair story, +both now and formerly, we were thoroughly satisfied, and had no distrust +that they meant not as well as they said. The lord ambassador, +especially, was much rejoiced at the prospect of being thus enabled to +reach Persia in twenty days, as they said; and we not less so, in +bringing our long-desired hopes to a bearing. But God, from whom no +secrets of the heart can be hidden, knew their treacherous intentions +towards us; and had not his mercy exceeded his justice, we had been +utterly destroyed, and it had never been known what became of us, our +ship, or our goods. + +Being quite satisfied with these fair promises, the ambassador got every +thing in readiness, and in the morning of the 19th September, sent his +money and all his baggage on shore with the _balloches_ boats, which +came aboard for the purpose. They also brought a message from the +viceroy and governor, saying they had provided tents for his lordship +and all his followers, close to their own, where they would be happy to +receive him as soon as he pleased to land. Into this tent accordingly +all the ambassador's goods were carried, and some of his followers were +appointed by his orders to remain there in charge of them, till he +should himself land, intending to have gone ashore the same day, about +four in the afternoon, of which he sent word to the viceroy. In the mean +time our boat went ashore with empty casks to bring off fresh water, and +in her went the Persian followers of the ambassador, and three or four +more of his people, to see the careful landing of his goods, and to +accompany them to the tents. + +While the ambassador's baggage was landing, some of the natives asked, +if these were all the things the ambassador had to send ashore? To which +it was answered, that these were all, except jewels and such like +things, which were to come along with himself. Some other natives +standing by, observed among themselves, That it was no matter, as these +were enough for the soldiers. This was overheard and understood by +Nazerbeg, who concealed it for the time, though it raised some suspicion +in his mind, as he said afterwards: Yet so strongly was he prepossessed +by the agreement of all that had passed before, that he could not bring +himself to believe their intentions were bad. He listened, however, more +attentively to all that was said afterwards among them, but could hear +nothing that savoured of double-dealing. + +A little while afterwards, Nazerbeg met with one _Haji Comul_,[113] whom +God made an instrument to disclose the devilish project of the balloches +to circumvent and destroy us, and who now revealed the particulars of +their bloody designs. Nazerbeg was amazed, and even chid _Comul_ for not +having told this before the goods were landed. As the time appointed for +the landing of the ambassador was at hand, Nazerbeg was fearful he might +have come ashore before he could get to our ship to forewarn him. +Wherefore, hastening to the shore, where, as God would have it, our +skiff was still filling water, he told our men there was treachery +plotting against us on shore, and entreated them to row him to the ship +with all possible speed. He was therefore brought off immediately, yet +hardly a moment too soon, as the ambassador and all his suite, together +with our captain and all the principal officers among us, willing to +grace the ambassador as far as we could for the honour of our country, +were already in the waste, and ready to go on shore. When Nazerbeg had +communicated his news, we were as ready to change our purpose as we had +been before to go ashore. The purport of what he had learnt from _Haji +Comul_ was as follows:-- + +The viceroy and governor had agreed together to entice as many of us as +they possibly could ashore, on purpose to cut all our throats; which +done, they meant to have set upon the ship, and having taken her, to +seize every thing she contained. They had made minute enquiry into our +numbers, and had got a particular enumeration of the state and condition +of every person in the ship, all of whom they intended to put to death +without mercy, except the surgeon, the musicians, the women, and the +boys. Their reverence for the king of Persia, of which they had so +boasted, was all a mere pretence to deceive; for they were all rebels, +and it was death to talk of the king of Persia in Guadal. Though we now +understood their intended plot, for which God be praised, and were +sufficiently put upon our guard to prevent its execution by arming +ourselves, knowing that we were able to defend ourselves from injury on +board, although they had great numbers of boats, and above 1500 men +armed with muskets, besides others; yet were we at a loss how we might +recover his lordship's goods, and his three men who were ashore along +with them. But God, who had thus miraculously delivered us from their +cruel treachery, opened likewise our understandings, so that we +recovered all according to our wish, in the following manner:-- + +As the viceroy and his fellows expected the immediate landing of the +ambassador and followers, together with the captain and others of us, we +sent Nazerbeg again ashore, with instructions what to do. He was to +inform the viceroy that the ambassador was not very well, and had +therefore deferred his landing till next morning, which was Monday the +20th September. He was also directed to request the viceroy and +governor, to send two or three of their boats for him very early, to +bring the women and others of his company ashore, as the ship's boats +were too small; and to say, that the ambassador expected to be attended +by some men of condition from the viceroy, to come in the boats, out of +respect to the king of Persia, whose person he represented. This +message, being well delivered, took the desired effect, and the viceroy +readily promised to comply with every thing required. Having finished +this part of his introductions, Nazerbeg was to repair to the tent where +the baggage was lodged, and to fetch from one of the trunks, two bags of +money containing £200 sterling, and some other things of value, if he +could so contrive without being noticed, as it was wished to conceal the +knowledge we had of the villainous intentions of these barbarians. +Nazerbeg was also desired to use dispatch, and to desire the three +servants of the ambassador to remain all night at the tents, with +promise of being relieved next morning. All was done as directed, and +not only was the money brought away, but a trunk also containing Lady +Shirley's apparel. When the balloches enquired the reason of taking that +trunk back to the ship, they were told it contained the lady's +night-clothes, and that it was to be brought ashore again next day. + +[Footnote 113: In Purchas this person is named _Hoge_ Comul; but we +suspect it ought to be _Haji_, intimating that he had made the +pilgrimage of Mecca and Medina.--E.] + +The ambassador having thus recovered his money, wished much to get back +one other large trunk, containing things of value, and the three men +which were ashore with his baggage, even if all the rest were lost. For +this purpose, we filled, over night, a large chest and a night-stool, +with billets of wood, rubbish, stones, and other useless matters, to +make them heavy, binding them up carefully with mats and ropes to give +them an air of importance. Nazerbeg was instructed to take these on +shore, to be left in place of the large trunk which he was to bring +away, under pretence that it belonged to one of the merchants, and had +been landed by mistake. The three men at the tent were to accompany him +back to the ship, with their musical instruments, and the _balloches_ +were to be told they were wanted by the lord ambassador to accompany him +with their music on his landing. + +Every thing being thus properly arranged, we saw next morning early, the +three boats coming off for the purpose of bringing his lordship on +shore, according to promise. We then manned our skiff, and sent her +ashore to put our plan into execution, by which we hoped to entrap the +_balloches_ in the snare they had laid for us. In the mean time, we +received the people from the three boats into our ship, consisting of +seven or eight persons of some condition, among whom was our friend +_Haji Comul_; all the rest being slaves and fishermen. We kept them in +discourse on various matters, to pass away time till our skiff could get +back. During this conversation, one of them said that the viceroy +earnestly desired we might bring our _slurbow_[114] ashore with us, as +he wished much to see it, which we readily promised, to satisfy them. We +soon after had the pleasure to see our skiff returning, having been +completely successful, as it not only brought away the trunk and the +three men, but also one of the chief men among the _balloches_, whom +Nazerbeg enticed along with him. As soon as he came on board, he and the +rest desired to see our gun-rooms, in which they had been told we had +all our fire-works, of which they were in great dread, particularly of +our _slurbow_ and fire-arrows; and this answered exactly to our wishes, +as we meant to have enticed them below, that we might disarm them of +their long knives or daggers. When all these principal persons were down +below in the gun-room, all our people being armed and in readiness, and +dispersed in different parts of the ship, some on deck, some between +decks, and others in the gunroom, to arrest and disarm the traitors; +and when the concerted signal was given, this was instantly +accomplished, to their great astonishment, yet without resistance. + +[Footnote 114: From circumstances mentioned in the sequel, this seems to +have been a species of cross-bow for discharging fire-arrows.--E.] + +We then laid open to them our knowledge of their murderous intentions, +saying their lives were now in our hands, as they had themselves fallen +into the pit they had dug for us; and, if we served them right, we +should now cut them in pieces, as they meant to have done by us. Yet +they stoutly denied the whole alleged plot. We detained six of the +chiefest men among them, and two of their boats, sending all the rest +a-shore, being all naked rascals, except one, by whom we sent a message +to the viceroy and governor, That, unless he sent us back all the goods +and baggage we had ashore, without abstracting even the smallest +portion, we would carry off those we had now in our custody. When this +message was delivered to the viceroy and governor, they sent back word +by the same messenger, that, if we would release the _balloches_, all +our goods should be sent to us, and at the same time making many hollow +declarations that no evil had ever been intended against us. On +receiving this message, and in sight of the messenger, all our prisoners +were immediately put in irons; and two letters were wrote to the viceroy +in Persian, one by us and the other by the prisoners, intimating in the +most determined terms, that the prisoners would be all put to death, if +the goods were not safely returned without delay, giving only two hours +respite at the most, the sand-glass being set before them as the +messenger left the ship, that he might be induced to make haste. By +these sharp means, we constrained them to restore every thing in the +most ample manner; and this being done, we released the men and boats, +according to promise, and sent them away. One man named _Malim +Simsadim_, whom we had learnt, from _Haji Comul_, was an experienced +pilot for _Sinde_ and _Cambay_, we detained for that purpose, promising +to reward him according to his merits. + +Thus, by God's assistance, to whom be endless praise for our +deliverance, we happily extricated ourselves from this dangerous and +intricate affair, which was entirely concluded by six p.m. of the 20th +September. We set sail that same night with our new pilot and _Haji +Comul_, which last remained along with us, as his life would have been +in danger among that accursed crew, for revealing their diabolical plot. +We now bent out course for Sinde, as willing to avoid all subsequent +dangers which these blood-thirsty balloches might attempt to plot +against us. In our way, we had much conversation with Comul, whom we +much esteemed and respected for the excellent service he had done +towards us. _Comul_ was a native of Dabul in India, his father being a +Persian of the sect of Ali, in which _Comul_ was a churchman, or priest, +having likewise some skill in medicine and surgery, in which capacity he +had resided in the tent of the governor of Guadal, and owing to which +circumstance he had overheard their infernal plot. He had obtained leave +to come aboard our ship, under pretence of procuring certain ointments +or balsams, which he alleged had been promised him by our surgeons. He +said that, on hearing their murderous intentions, his heart yearned +within him, to think we should be led like sheep to the slaughter by +such bloody butchers, and that God willed him to reveal their plot to +us. He farther told us, that to his knowledge, they had already betrayed +three ships in the same manner; that they were all rebels against the +King of Persia, refusing to pay the tribute which they and their +ancestors had been accustomed to; and that the king of Persia had levied +an army, which waited not for from Guadal, with the purpose to invade +the country next winter. + +This country of _Macquerona_, or Mekran, is on the main land of Asia, +bordering upon the kingdom of Persia. The port of _Guadal_ is nearly in +the lat. of 25° N, the variation being 17° 15' [lat. 24° 40' N. long. +61° 50' E.]. It has good anchorage in four or five fathoms. At night of +the 21st September, the day after leaving Guadal, our _balloche_ pilot +brought our ship in danger of running on a shoal, where we had to come +suddenly to anchor till next morning. The 24th at night, while laying +to, because not far from Cape Camelo, a Portuguese frigate, or bark, +passed close beside us, which at first we suspected to have been an +armed galley, for which cause we prepared for defence in case of need. + +3. _Arrival at Diul-ginde,[115] and landing of the Ambassador: Seeking +Trade there, are crossed by the slanderous Portuguese: Go to Sumatra and +Bantam; and thence Home to England_. + +[Footnote 115: This singular name ought perhaps to have been Diul-Sinde, +or Diul on the Indus, or Sinde river, to distinguish it from Diu in +Guzerat.--E.] + +The 26th September, 1613, we came to anchor right before the mouth of +the river _Sinde_, or Indus, by the directions of a pilot we had from +one of the boats we found fishing at that place. We rode in very good +ground, in a foot less five fathoms, the mouth of the river being E. by +N. being in the latitude of 24° 38' N.[116] That same day, the +ambassador sent two of his people, to confer with the governor about his +coming ashore, and procuring a passage through that country into Persia. +The governor, whose name was _Arah Manewardus_, who was of _Diul_,[117] +was most willing to receive the ambassador, and to shew him every +kindness, both in regard to his entertainment there, and his passage +through his province or jurisdiction. To this intent, he sent a +principal person aboard, attended by five or six more, to welcome his +lordship with many compliments, assuring him of kind entertainment. +Presently after there came boats from _Diul_ for his accommodation, in +which he and all his people and goods went ashore on the 29th September, +all in as good health as when they embarked in our ship from England. At +his departure we saluted him with eleven guns, and our captain entrusted +him with a fine fowling-piece, having two locks, to present to the +governor of Tatta, a great city, a day's journey from Diul,[118] both +cities being in the dominions of the Great Mogul. We also now set ashore +our treacherous _balloche_ pilot, _Sim-sadin_, though he better merited +to have been thrown into the sea, as he endeavoured twice to have cast +us away; once by his own means, as formerly alluded to, and afterwards +by giving devilish council to the pilot we hod from the fisher boat at +this place. + +[Footnote 116: The river Indus has many mouths, of which no less than +_seventeen_ are laid down in Arrowsmith's excellent map of Hindoostan, +extending between the latitudes of 24° 45' and 23° 15' both N. and +between the longitudes of 67° 12' and 69° 12' both east. That mouth +where the Expedition now came to anchor, was probably that called the +_Pitty_ river, being the most north-western of the Delta, in lat 24° 45' +N. and long. 67° 12' E. from Greenwich; being the nearest on her way +from Guadal, and that which most directly communicates with Tatta, the +capital of the Delta of the Indus.--E.] + +[Footnote 117: Such is the vague mode of expression in the Pilgrims; but +it appears afterwards that he was governor of Diul, at which place Sir +Robert Shirley and his suite were landed. It singularly happens, that +Diul is omitted in all the maps we have been able to consult; but from +the context, it appears to have been near the mouth of the Pitty river, +mentioned in the preceding note. It is afterwards said to have been +fifteen miles up the river, in which case it may possibly be a place +otherwise called _Larry Bunder_, about twenty miles up the Pitty, which +is the port of Tatta.--E.] + +[Footnote 118: Tatta is not less than seventy-five English miles from +the mouth of the Pitty, and consequently sixty from Diul.--E.] + +When the lord ambassador left us, we requested he would send us word how +he found the country disposed, and whether we might have trade there; +and for this purpose, we gave his lordship a note in writing of what we +chiefly desired, which was to the following purport: "That our coming to +this port was purposely to land his lordship; yet, as we had brought +with us certain commodities and money, we were willing to make sales of +such and so much of those as might suit, if we could obtain licence and +protection for quiet trade; and, with the governor's permission, would +settle a factory at this place, to which, though now but slenderly +provided, we would afterwards bring such kinds and quantities of goods +us might be most suitable for sale. The commodities we now had, were +elephants and morse teeth, fine fowling-pieces, lead and tin in bars, +and some Spanish dollars. If we could not be permitted to trade, we +requested leave to provide ourselves, with refreshments, and so to +depart." + +The 30th September, the ambassador had an audience of the governor +concerning all his business, to whom he shewed the _firmaun_ of the king +of Persia, as also the pass of the king of Spain, thinking thereby to +satisfy the jealousy of the Portuguese residents at that place, who +reported, on pretended intelligence from Ornus, that Don Roberto Shirley +was come from England with three ships to the Indies, on purpose to +steal. They peremptorily refused to give credence to the Spanish pass, +saying it was neither signed nor sealed by their king, in which they +could not possibly be mistaken, knowing it so well, and therefore that +it was assuredly forged. On this, the ambassador angrily said, that it +was idle to shew them any king's hand-writing and seal, as they had no +king, being merely a waste nation, forcibly reduced under subjection to +the king of Spain, and mere slaves both to him and his natural subjects. +Yet the Portuguese boldly stood to their former allegations, insisting +that the ambassador had other two ships in the Indies. Then _Arah +Manewardus_ sharply reproved them for their unseemly contradictions of +the Persian ambassador, and ordered them out of the room. + +The ambassador then made a speech to the governor concerning our +admittance to trade at his port, on which the governor expressed his +readiness to do so, all inconveniences understood, and desired the +ambassador to send for one or two of our merchants, that he might confer +with them on the subject. Upon this the ambassador wrote to us on the 2d +October, saying what he had done in our affairs, and sending us +assurance for our safe going and returning. Being thereby in good hope +of establishing trade at this place, if not a factory, and to make sale +of the small quantity of goods we now had, Mr Joseph Salbank and I, by +advice of the captain and others, made ourselves ready and went ashore +that same morning in one of the country boats. Our ship lay about four +or five miles from the mouth of the river, from whence we had fifteen +miles to travel to _Diul_, where the ambassador was, so that it was late +in the evening before we landed there. + +In our way we met a Portuguese frigate or bark, bound for Ormus, on +purpose to prevent any of their ships coming till we were gone. This +bark went close past our ship, taking a careful review of her, and so +departed. As soon as we were landed, three or four Portuguese came up to +us, asking if we had brought any goods ashore, and such like questions; +but we made them no reply, pretending not to understand their language, +that we might the better understand them for our own advantage, if +occasion served. There then came another Portuguese, who spoke Dutch +very fluently, telling me many things respecting the country and people, +tending to their ill conduct and character, thinking to dissuade us from +endeavouring to have any trade there. Soon after, the officers of the +customs came, and conducted us to the castle, but we could not have an +audience of the governor that night, as it was already late. The +officers, who were mostly banians, and spoke good Portuguese, searched +every part about us for money, not even leaving our shoes unsearched; +and perceiving that we were surprised at this, they prayed us to be +content therewith, as it was the custom of the country. To this I +replied, that though the Portuguese might give them cause for so bad a +fashion, yet English merchants did not hide their money in their shoes +like smugglers. Then the governor's servants came to us, and lighted us +from the castle to the house in which the ambassador lodged, where we +were made heartily welcome, and were lodged all the time we staid in +Diul, and at no expence to us. Seeing us landed, and hearing we came to +treat with the governor for settling trade at that place, the Portuguese +spread many slanderous and malignant lies against our king, country, and +nation, reporting that we were thieves, and not merchants, and that we +derived our chief subsistence by robbing other nations on the sea. + +In the morning of the 3d October, the governor sent word to the +ambassador that he would see and converse with us in the afternoon. In +the mean time, we had notice that the Portuguese were using every effort +with him and others to prevent our being entertained, both by offering +him gratifications if he would refuse us, and by threatening to leave +the place if we were received, pretending that they would not remain +where thieves were admitted. Yet the governor sent for us, commanding +four great horses, richly caparisoned, to be sent to the ambassador's +house, for his lordship, Sir Thomas Powell, Mr Salbank, and me, and sent +also a number of his servants to conduct us to the castle; all the +ambassador's servants went likewise along with him, each carrying a +halbert. In this manner we rode through some part of the city, the +people in all the streets flocking out to see us, having heard talk of +Englishmen, but never having seen any before, as we were the first who +had ever been in that part of the country. + +On coming to the castle, we were received in a very orderly manner, and +led through several spacious rooms, where many soldiers were standing in +ranks on each side, all cloathed from head to foot in white dresses. We +were then conducted to a high turret, in which the governor and some +others sat, who rose up at our entrance and saluted us, bidding us +kindly welcome. We then all sat down round the room, on carpets spread +on the floor, according to their fashion. The governor again bid us +welcome, saying he was glad to see Englishmen in that country; but said, +in regard to the trade we desired to have there, that the Portuguese +would by no means consent to our having trade, and threatened to desert +the place if we were received. Yet, if he could be assured of deriving +greater benefit from our trade than he now had from that of the +Portuguese, he should not care how soon they left him, as he thought +well of our nation. In the mean time, however, as he farmed the customs +of that port from the king, to whom he was bound to pay certain sums +yearly for the same, whether they were actually received or not, he was +under the necessity of being circumspect in conducting the business, +lest he might incur the displeasure of the king, to his utter ruin. He +then told us that the customs from the Portuguese trade, together with +what arose from their letting out their ships to hire to the Guzerats +and Banians, amounted to a _lack_ of rupees yearly, which is £10,000 +sterling.[119] + +[Footnote 119: A rupee is two shillings, or somewhat more, and a _lack_ +is 100,000.-_Purch._] + +He then desired to know the kinds and quantities of the commodities we +had brought, and what amount we had in money? To all which we gave him +distinct answers, as nearly as we could remember; adding, that though we +now brought but small store, we would engage to furnish his port at our +next coming, which would be in about twenty-two months, with such +commodities as were now brought by the Portuguese, and with such +quantities of each kind as might be requisite to satisfy the demands of +that port. He appeared to approve of this, and concluded by saying, as +our present stock of commodities were so small, the Portuguese would +only laugh at him and us if we were now admitted to trade, wherefore he +wished us to defer all trade till our next coming; but that he was ready +to give us a writing under his hand and seal to assure us of good +entertainment at our next coming, provided we came fully prepared as we +said, and on condition we should leave him a written engagement not to +molest any of the ships or goods of the king of the Moguls, or his +subjects. We agreed to all this, and requested he would allow us to sell +those goods we now had; but which he would by no means consent to, for +fear of offending the Portuguese, as stated before. + +We then desired that we might have leave to provide our ship with water, +and other necessary refreshments, for our money, after which we should +depart as soon as possible. To this he said, that as soon as we sent him +the writing he desired, he would send us the one he had promised, and +would give orders to his officers to see our wants supplied; but desired +that the Portuguese might know nothing of all this. Seeing no remedy, we +then desired to know what kinds of commodities he wished us to bring, +and also what were the commodities his country could afford in return. +We were accordingly informed, that the commodities in request in Sinde +were broad-cloths of various prices, and light gay colours, as stammels, +reds, greens, sky-blues, indigo-blues, azures, &c. also elephants teeth, +iron, steel, lead, tin, spices, and money. The commodities to be had +there were, indigo of Lahore, indigo of _Cherques_, calicoes of all +sorts, pintadoes, or painted chintzes of all sorts, all kinds of +Guzerat and Cambay commodities, with many kinds of drugs. We then took +our leave, and returned to the ambassador's house, whence I sent him a +letter, according to his desire, signed by Mr Salbanke and me, on which +he sent us another, in the Persian language, which is written backwards, +much like the Hebrew, and which was interpreted to us by the ambassador, +in English, as follows: + +"WHEREAS there has arrived at this port of Diul, an English ship called +the Expedition, of which is captain, Christopher Newport, and merchants, +Joseph Salbank and Walter Peyton, and has landed here Don Robert +Shirley, ambassador of the king of Persia, who has desired us to grant +them trade at this port under my government, which I willingly would +have granted, but not having brought merchandize in sufficient quantity +to begin trade, and the Portuguese, from whom I reap benefit, refusing +their consent, threatening to go away if I receive the English nation, +by which I should be left destitute of all trade, whence arises those +sums I have yearly to pay to the king, and in default whereof I should +incur his majesty's displeasure, to my utter ruin. Yet, from the love I +bear to the king of Persia, by whose ambassador I am solicited, and from +affection for the English, together with the faithful performance of the +writing left with me under their hands and seals by the two merchants +before named, I hereby promise the English nation, under my hand and +seal, if they will come like themselves, so fitted that I may derive +more advantage from them than from the Portuguese, that I will +infallibly grant them trade here, with such reasonable privileges as we +may agree upon." + +_Given at Diul, this 3d of October_, 1613. + +ARAH MANEWARUS. + +Having received this writing on the 4th October, together with orders +from the governor to his officers for our being furnished with water and +refreshments, we made haste to return to our ships. A little before we +went away, the ambassador fell into discourse with us about procuring a +_firmaun_ from the Great Mogul, for which purpose he wished Mr Salbank +to accompany him to Agra, the principal residence of that sovereign, +affirming that he would procure that grant of trade for us in a short +time, for which he alleged there was now a favourable opportunity, both +because he had other business to transact at the court of the Mogul, and +in consequence of the willingness of _Manewardus_ to admit us to trade +at his port. He alleged likewise that we might never have so favourable +an opportunity, and assured us that he would therein shew himself a +true-hearted Englishman, whatever the company of merchants might think +of him; and that Mr Salbank should be an evidence of his earnest +endeavours to serve the merchants in procuring this _firmaun_, not only +for Diul, but for other parts of the Mogul dominions, and should also +carry the grant with him over-land to England. All this seemed +reasonable, and as Mr Salbank had been before in these parts, he was +very willing to go, provided it met with the approbation of the captain +and me, and the other gentlemen in the ship; for which purpose the +ambassador wrote a letter to our captain, to urge his consent, which we +carried with us. + +We left Diul that same day about four in the afternoon, and on going to +the river side to take boat, many of the natives flocked about to look +at us. We were likewise joined by about a dozen Portuguese, who began to +talk with us in Dutch, as before, asking many frivolous questions. I now +answered them in their own language, on purpose that the Banians, who +were present, might understand what I said; telling them that they were +a shameless and lying people to spread so many slanderous and false +reports of our nation, while they knew their own to be much inferior to +ours in many respects, and that their scandalous conduct proceeded +merely from malignant policy to prevent us from participating with them +in the trade of India. To this I added, that if they did not restrain +themselves within due peaceful bounds, amending their behaviour both in +words and actions, they should be all driven out of India, and a more +honest and loyal nation substituted in their place. Then one of the +principal men among them stepped forwards, and made answer, that they +had already too many enemies, and had no need of more; but that they had +substantial reasons for speaking of us as they had done, as not long +since one of their ships had been taken near Surat, and, as they +supposed, by an English ship. To which I answered, that this was more +like to have been done by the Hollanders. They then became more civil, +and finally wished that we might trade in all parts of India with them, +and they with us, like friends and neighbours, and that our kings might +enter into some agreement to that effect. They then kindly took leave of +us, and we departed. + +We got back to our ship on the 6th, when it was agreed that Mr Salbank +should accompany the ambassador to Agra, as proposed. For which purpose +he got himself in readiness, meaning to have gone ashore next day. In +the mean time, the captain, the purser, and his man, went on shore to +buy fresh victuals and necessaries to take with us to sea; but, on +coming to the city, they were presently ordered away by the governor, +and an express order issued by proclamation, that none of the natives +should hereafter bring any of the English ashore, on pain of death. We +were much astonished at this sudden alteration of affairs, for which we +could not divine any cause: but, on the 9th, finding we could get +nothing done here, nor any farther intercourse, we set sail, directing +our course for Sumatra. All the time we were here in Sinde, we had not +the smallest intimation of trade having been settled at Surat, for if we +had, we might have taken a different course. + +We came to anchor in the road of Priaman on the 20th November, going in +between the two northermost little islands, and anchored close by the +northermost of these, in five fathoms. We immediately began to bargain +for pepper, the price of which we beat down from twenty-two dollars, as +first asked, to seventeen dollars the bahar, at which price we got two +bahars, which were brought to us on board: but the governor would not +allow us, although we made him a present of a musket, to hire a house, +or to buy pepper ashore, unless we would consent to bestow presents on +some twenty of the officers and merchants of the place. On the 22d, we +received a letter from Captain Christen, of the Hosiander, then at +Tecoo, earnestly advising us to come there immediately, as we could not +fail to get as much pepper as we wished at that place, and in a short +time; and, as we were not acquainted with the place, Captain Chrisen +sent Richard Hall, one of his master's mates, to pilot us through among +the dangerous shoals that lay about the roads of Tecoo. Accordingly we +went to that place, and anchored in four fathoms, Richard Hall returning +on board the Hosiander, where he died that same night, being ill of the +flux. + +Before our arrival, the natives had offered their pepper to Captain +Christen at twelve and thirteen dollars the bahar, taking payment in +Surat commodities; but they now demanded twenty-two dollars in ready +money, refusing to barter with them any longer for goods. They also +demanded at this place as many presents as had been required at Priaman; +beside which, they insisted upon having seventy-two dollars for +anchorage duty. Being now in a worse situation than before, and having +no time to waste in delays, we determined to come to short terms with +them; wherefore we told them roundly, that we would on no account submit +to their unreasonable demands, even though we might not get a single +_cattee_ of pepper. For this purpose I drew out a letter from our +captain, which he signed and sealed, addressed to the head governor, +stating that he had not used our nation so well as we had reason to +expect, both in unreasonable demands of presents, which were not usually +given upon compulsion, but rather from good-will, or in reward of good +behaviour, and likewise by their improper delay in implementing their +promises, so very unlike mercantile dealings; since our ships have at +various times remained at their port for three, four, and even five +months, depending on their promises of having full lading, which might +as well have been accomplished in one month, in so far as respected the +small quantity of pepper they had to dispose of. This letter was +translated by the interpreter in the Hosiander, an Indian, named Johen, +who perfectly understood their language. + +The governor, in consequence of this remonstrance, gave orders that we +might purchase pepper from any one who was inclined to sell; but sent us +a message, wishing that one of us might come on shore, that the pepper +might be there weighed. But still doubting that they meant to teaze us +with delay, we sent back word that we could not remain so long as it +would require for weighing the pepper ashore, and therefore if they +would bring it to us on board, we would pay them eighteen dollars a +bahar for their pepper, together with two dollars as custom to the +governor, making exactly twenty dollars. As they still put off time, we +set sail, as if meaning to have gone away, on which the governor sent +another messenger, who spoke Portuguese tolerably, entreating us to come +again to anchor, and we should have as much pepper as we could take in. +We did so accordingly, and they brought pepper off to us in proas as +fast as we could conveniently weigh it, and continued to do so till we +had got about 200 bahars. They then began to grow slack in their +proceedings, on which, fearing to lose the monsoon by spending too much +time at this place, we weighed and proceeded for Bantam. + +We left Tecoo on the 8th December, three of our men remaining in the +Hosiander, which needed their assistance, and proceeded towards Bantam, +mostly keeping in sight of Sumatra. At our entrance into the straits of +Sunda, on the 16th of that month, we met the Dragon on her homeward +voyage, by which ship we sent letters to England. Next day, the 17th, we +anchored in Bantam roads, and went immediately ashore to provide our +lodging, and by the 29th our whole cargo was completed. + +We set sail from Bantam on the 2d January, 1614, for England, not having +hitherto lost a single man by sickness during our whole voyage, for +which we were thankful to God. This same day, as we were going out by +way of Pulo Panian, we met General Saris in the Clove, then returning +from Japan; and we came to anchor, that we might have his letters for +England, together with four chests. We likewise spared him two of our +hands, of which he was in great need; one being a youth, named Mortimer +Prittie, and the other a carpenter's mate, named Thomas Valens, as he +had not a single carpenter alive in his ship. + +Having settled all these matters with the Clove, we resumed our voyage +for England on the 4th January, and came to anchor in Saldanha bay on +the 21st March, where we got a sufficient supply of beeves and sheep +from the natives, with abundance of fish, caught in our own seine. We +left that place on the 9th April, with prosperous winds, which continued +favourable till we were three degrees north of the equator, which we +crossed the 11th May. When in lat. 00° 22' N. many of our men began to +fall sick, some of them of the scurvy, and with swelled legs. On the +10th July, 1614, by the blessing of God, we came to anchor in the Downs. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +CONTINUATION OF THE EARLY VOYAGES OF THE ENGLISH EAST INDIA COMPANY TO +INDIA. + +INTRODUCTION. + + +In the immediately preceding chapter, we have given a series of the +first twelve voyages fitted out by the English East India Company, in +the prosecution of their exclusive trade to India, as preserved by +Samuel Purchas; and we now mean, chiefly from the same source, to +continue the series for a few years longer. At the close of the last +voyage of the foregoing chapter, Purchas informs us, that "The order of +reckoning must be now altered, because the voyages of the company were +for the future set forth by means of a _joint stock_, instead of by +particular ships, each upon a separate subscription, having separate +stocks and factories; the whole proceedings being, in the sequel, at the +general risk of, and accountable to the entire society or company of +adventurers." He farther adds, "That the whole of these joint-stock +voyages had not come into his hands; but that such as he had been able +to procure, and were meet for publication, he had inserted in his +Collection." + +The learned historiographer of the East India Company[120] gives rather +a different account of the former series of separate or unconnected +voyages, than that which we have taken from Purchas, terming the last +voyage in our former chapter only the _ninth_, while Purchas denominates +it the _twelfth_. + +[Footnote 120: Ann. of the Hon. E.I. Co, I. 162.] + +This difference, which is not at all material, may have arisen from +Purchas having considered some of the ships belonging to _single_ +adventurers or subscriptions, which made separate voyages or parts of +voyages, as _separate_ adventures. We come now to a new era in the mode +of conducting the English exclusive trade to India, of the motives for +which the Annals give the following account.[121] + +[Footnote 121: Id. I. 165.] + +"The inconveniences which had been experienced from separate classes of +adventurers, partners in the East India Company, fitting out equipments +on their own particular portions of stock, induced the directors, or +committees, to resolve, in 1612, that, in future, the trade should be +carried on by a joint stock only; and, on the basis of this resolution, +the sum of £429,000 was subscribed: and, though portions of this joint +stock were applied to the equipment of four voyages, the general +instructions to the commanders were given in the name, and by the +authority, of the governor, deputy-governor, and committees of the +company of merchants in London trading to the East Indies, who explained +that the whole was a joint concern, and that the commanders were to be +responsible to the company for their conduct, both in the sale and +purchase of commodities in the East Indies, and for their general +conduct, in extending the commerce, within the limits of the company. +The transition, therefore, from trading on _separate adventures_, which +has been described as an imitation of the Dutch, to trading on a _joint +stock_, arose out of the good sense of the English nation, which, from +experience, had discovered the evil consequences of internal opposition, +and had determined to proceed on a system better calculated to promote +the general interest of the East India Company. + +"Notwithstanding this resolution, the proportions of this aggregate sum +were applied to what has been termed the _tenth, eleventh, twelfth_, and +_thirteenth_ voyages, in the following manner: In 1613, the _tenth_ +voyage was undertaken, the stock of which was estimated at £18,810 in +money, and £12,446 in goods, the fleet consisting of _eight_ vessels. In +1614, the stock for the _eleventh_ voyage was £13,942 in money, and +£23,000 in goods, the fleet being _eight ships_. In 1615, the stock for +the _twelfth_ voyage was £26,660 in money, and £26,065 in goods, with +_six ships_. In 1616, the stock for the _thirteenth_ voyage was £52,087 +in money, and £16,506 in goods, the fleet containing _seven ships_. The +purchase, repair, and equipment of vessels during these four voyages +amounted to £272,544, which, with the specified stock and cargoes, +accounts for the disbursement of the £429,000, the sum subscribed on the +joint stock in 1613.[122] + +[Footnote 122: The enumerated particulars amount to £462,060, and exceed +the subscribed joint stock by £33,060.--E.] + +"The profits on this joint stock are stated to have amounted, on the +first two voyages, to £120 per cent. on the original subscription; but +they were subsequently much diminished, by the difficulties which the +English trade to the East Indies began to experience, from the +opposition of the Dutch in the Spice Islands; so that, at the conclusion +of this first joint stock, in 1617, the average profits of the four +voyages did not exceed £87:10s. per. cent on the original subscription, +notwithstanding the cargo of one of the vessels (the New-year's Gift) +cost only 40,000 rials of eight, and the sale produce, in England, +amounted to £80,000 sterling." + +It is not the purpose of this Collection to enlarge on the history of +the East India Company, any farther than by giving relations of its +early voyages, so far as these have come down to us in the Pilgrims of +Purchas, their only published record; and we now therefore proceed with +such of these voyages as are contained in that curious collection, and +seem to be worth including in this work.--E. + + + + +SECTION I. + +_Voyage of Captain Nicholas Downton to India, in 1614._[122] + +The ships employed on this voyage, the _second_ set forth by the _joint_ +stock of the East India Company, were the New-year's Gift admiral, of +650 tons, on board of which Captain Downton sailed as general or chief +commander; the Hector of 500 tons, vice-admiral; the Merchant's Hope, +of 300 tons; and the Salomon of 200 tons. We have thus only_ four_ ships +enumerated by Purchas, as employed in the _second_ voyage of the new +joint stock, instead at _eight_ mentioned in the _Annals_, as before +stated in the introduction to the present chapter. In this voyage, Mr +William Edwards was lieutenant, or next in command under Captain +Downton, being likewise Cape merchant, and commander of the Hector. Mr +Nicholas Easworth was Cape merchant, and commander of the Merchant's +Hope. Mr Thomas Elkington, Cape merchant, and commander of the Salomon. +Mr Peter Rogers minister; Martin Pring. Arthur Spaight, Matthew +Molineux, and Hugh Bennet, masters of the four ships, assisted by sundry +mates,--Purch. + +[Footnote 122: Purch. Pilg. I. 500.--Extracted from the journal of +Captain Downton] + + +§1. _Incidents at Saldanha, Socotora, and Swally; with an Account of +Disagreements between the Moguls and Portuguese, and between the Nabob +and the English._ + +We sailed from England on the 1st March, 1614, and arrived in the road +of Saldanha, or Table Bay, on Wednesday the 15th June, being saluted on +our arrival by a great storm. While every person was busy in mooring the +ship, John Barter, who had lost his reason in consequence of a long +fever, was suddenly missing, and was supposed to have made away with +himself. The 16th we erected our tents, and placed a guard for their +defence. We landed half our casks on the 17th, to be overhauled and +seasoned; and this day _Choree_, the Saldanian or Hottentot, presented +me a young steer. The 18th we landed more of our beer casks, to be +washed, repaired, and seasoned. This day, _Choree_ departed into the +interior, carrying with him his copper armour, javelins, and all things +belonging to him, promising to be back the third day after, but he never +returned. + +The 29th I sent George Downton ashore, to take observations of the +latitude and variation, in consideration of the great difference in the +variations, as observed in this and my former voyage in the Pepper-corn. +We made the latitude exactly 34° S. and the variation 1° 45' W. by an +azimuth, whereas most of the former variations at this place were +easterly. We this night took down our tents, and brought every thing on +board, making our ships ready to depart next day, which we did +accordingly. + +We came to anchor in the bay of St Augustine in Madagascar on the 6th +August, when the inhabitants abandoned the place, so that we could have +no intercourse with them, but we afterwards got some refreshments from +them. We here cut down some straight timber for various uses. We set +sail on the 12th August, and anchored in Delisa bay in Socotora on the +9th September. Next day we went ashore to wait upon the king, who was +ready with his attendants to receive me, and gave me an account of the +existing war in India, where the Mogul and the kings of the Deccan had +united to drive the Portuguese from the country, owing to their having +captured a ship coming from Juddah in the Red Sea, in which were three +millions of treasure. He also informed me of two great fights which +Captain Best had with the Portuguese, and of other news in these parts. +I here procured such refreshments as the place could furnish, and bought +2722 pounds of aloes from the king. + +Leaving Delisa on the 14th September, we got sight of the Deccan coast +near Dabul on the 2d October, where we found great hindrance to our +navigation, till we learnt by experience to anchor during the ebb tide, +and continue our course with the tide of flood. Continuing this +procedure, we anchored in the evening of the 14th, two and a half miles +short of the bar of Surat; when presently a fleet of fourteen frigates +or barks came to anchor near us, which we discovered by their lights, as +it was quite dark. But as they could easily see us, by the lights at our +ports, that we were in readiness for them, they durst not come any +nearer, so that we rode quietly all night. Early of the 15th, we weighed +with the land-wind, and coming somewhat near the frigates, they also +weighed and stood to the southwards. We held on our course past the bar, +towards South Swally, where we soon after arrived, though much opposed +by contrary winds. + +Soon after we were anchored, I sent Molineux in his pinnace, and Mr +Spooner with Samuel Squire in my _gellywatte_,[123] to take the +soundings within the sands. In a channel where we found only five feet +at low water in our former voyage, Mr Molineux had now three fathoms; +and Mr Spooner had now seven or eight feet, where our boats could not +pass at all formerly. Seeing some people on the shore in the afternoon, +whom I supposed might be some of our merchants from Surat, I sent my +pinnace to them; but they were some of the people belonging to _Coge +Nozan_, sent to discover what nation we were of. From them I got farther +information respecting the wars with the Portuguese, being told that the +Moguls were besieging Damaun and Diu, Mocrib or Mucrob Khan being the +general of the Mogul forces against Damaun; and I also learnt to my +sorrow, that Mucrob Khan was governor and viceroy, as it may be called, +not only over Surat, but all the country round, as, from former +experience, I considered him to be a great enemy of our nation, and a +friend to the Portuguese. From these people likewise, I heard of the +health of Mr Aldworth and the rest of our factory, and wrote to hasten +his presence, sending my letters by the servants of Coge Nozan. + +[Footnote 123: From this singular term, what is now called the +_jollyboat_ has probably derived its name.--E.] + +I sent my purser on shore in the pinnace, early of the 16th, to purchase +such necessaries as I thought might easily have been got; but he +returned about ten o'clock a.m. without buying any thing for our +purpose, bringing with him Mr Aldword, the chief merchant of our factory +at Surat, along with whom was one Richard Steel, who had come over-land +to Surat from Aleppo.[124] Mr Aldworth endeavoured to persuade me that +Mucrob Khan was our friend, and that we had now an excellent opportunity +to obtain good trade and satisfactory privileges while the Moguls were +engaged in war with the Portuguese; and as both the Nabob and all the +natives were rejoiced at hearing of our arrival, they would assuredly +give us a most favourable reception. Pleased with these hopeful +circumstances, I yet still wished some other person here in command +instead of Mucrob Khan, of whom I remained doubtful, and that we should +have no free trade from him, but in his accustomed manner, which I +believed to have been, of his own accord to cross us, and not as so +constrained by direction of his king; and the event turned out +accordingly, though we were wise behind the band, as will appear in the +sequel. Even the name he bore ought to have opened our eyes as to his +influence with the Great Mogul: as _Mocrub_ signifies as much as _his +own bowels, Khan_ meaning _great lord_. Yet I was deluded to believe +that his favour with the king was tottering, and that he might easily be +brought into disgrace, by complaint of any thing done contrary to the +will or humour of the king; so that we were too bold, and injured our +business when we found him opposing us, as we thought unreasonably. On +enquiring into the state of our business, and the health of our factory, +Mr Aldworth informed me that Paul Canning and several others had died; +that Thomas Kerridge had long since been agent in his room at the court +of the Mogul, and that the factory at Surat now only contained himself +and William Bidulph. + +[Footnote 124: Mr Richard Stell, or Steel, had gone to Aleppo, to +recover a debt from a merchant of that city, who had fled to India; and, +following him through Persia, Mr Steel had arrived at Surat. On his +report, the factors at Surat made an experiment to open a trade with +Persia, which will form the subject of a future section of this +chapter.--E.] + +In the morning of the 17th, I called a council to advise upon the best +manner of conducting our affairs here, and to consider who might be the +best person to send to Agraas resident. Then entering upon the six +interrogatories, inserted in the second article of our commission, I +required Mr Aldworth to give direct answers to every question.--1. In +what favour was Paul Canning with the emperor and his council, and how +did he conduct himself at court in the business entrusted to him? He +answered, That on his first arrival at court, he was well respected by +the emperor, till the Jesuits made known that he was a merchant, and not +sent immediately from our king; after which he was neglected, as he +himself complained: and, as for his carriage and behaviour there, so far +as he knew, it was sufficiently good;--3. Then demanding, whether it +were needful to maintain a resident at court? Mr Aldworth answered, That +it was certainly necessary, as the emperor required that one of our +nation should reside there; and therefore, that the person ought to be a +man of good respect, for preventing and counteracting any injuries that +might be offered by the Jesuits, our determined adversaries; as he might +also be extremely useful in promoting and directing the purchase and +sale of various commodities.--6. Being questioned as to the expences of +a resident at court? he said, according to the estimate of Paul Canning, +it might be about £300 per annum; but, some time afterwards, his +estimate was found to extend to five, six, and seven hundred pounds a +year.--Being afterwards questioned, Whether he thought it fit that Mr +Edwards should proceed to court under the designation of a merchant, +according to the strict letter of the company's commission? his opinion +was, by the experience of the late Mr Canning, that such a resident +would not be at all respected by the king. + +In the morning of the 24th, Coge Nozan came down to the water side, and +rested in my tent till I landed. I repaired to him, accompanied by all +our merchants, and attended by a strong guard, armed with halberts, +muskets, and pikes, having a coach to carry me from the landing place to +the tent. On alighting from my coach, Coge Nozan came immediately to +meet me. Before entering on business, he was told that a present for the +Nabob was to be delivered to him, which was brought in. This consisted +of a case containing six knives, two pair of knives, six sword-blades, +six Spanish pikes, one case of combs, one mirror, one picture of Mars +and Venus, one ditto of the Judgment of Paris, two Muscovy hides, and +one gilded case of bottles filled with strong rich cordials. I then made +the following present to himself: Six knives in single sheaths, four +sword-blades, two pikes, one comb-case, a mirror, a picture of Moses, +and a case of bottles, in consideration of the promise made by the nabob +to our people, that whatever Coge Nozan agreed to, he the nabob would +perform. + +I then moved for the enlargement of our privileges, and lessening of our +customs, especially at Baroach, and that we might have a daily bazar or +market at the water side, where we might purchase beef for our people, +according to the _firmaun_ already granted by the Mogul, and because +other flesh did not answer for them. He answered, that the nabob would +shew us every favour in his power, if we would assist him against the +Portuguese; that the customs of Baroach were out of his power to +regulate, as the king had already farmed these to another person at a +stipulated rent; and that we should have a regular market, but that +bullocks and cows could not be allowed, as the king had granted a +firmaun to the Banians, in consideration of a very large sum of money, +that these might not be slaughtered. In fine, I found he had no power to +grant us any thing; yet, willing to leave me somewhat contented, he +proposed that I should send some of our merchants along with him to the +nabob, where our business might be farther discussed. + +I accordingly sent along with him, Mr Aldworth, Mr Ensworth, Mr +Dodsworth, Mr Mitford, and some others. Two or three days afterwards, +they had access to the nabob, to whom they explained our desires, as +before expressed. He then desired to know whether we would go with our +ships to fight for him against Damaun, in which case, he said, we might +count upon his favour? To this it was answered, that we could not on any +account do this, as our king and the king of Spain were in peace. He +then asked if we would remove our ships to the bar of Surat, and fight +there against the Portuguese ships, if they came to injure the subjects +of the Mogul? This likewise was represented to be contrary to the peace +between our kings. On which he said, since we would do nothing for his +service, he would do nothing for us. Several of the merchants of Surat +endeavoured to persuade our merchants, that I ought to give way to the +reasonable request of the nabob, and might still do what I thought +proper; as, notwithstanding of our ships riding at the bar, the +Portuguese frigates could go in and out on each side of me, owing to +their light draught of water. To this I answered, that the proposal was +utterly unfit for me to listen to; as whatever I promised I must +perform, though at the expence of my own life and of all under my +command, and that I could not possibly lend myself to fight against the +Portuguese on any account whatever, unless they first attacked me, as it +was absolutely contrary to my commission from my own sovereign. I added, +that, if the Portuguese provoked me by any aggression, I would not be +withheld from fighting them for all the wealth of the nabob: But he made +small account of this distinction, and, seeing that we refused to fulfil +his wishes, he opposed us in all our proceedings as far as he could, so +that we nearly lost all our former hopes of trading at this place. In +this dilemma, I made enquiry respecting _Gengomar_ and _Castellata_, and +also of _Gogo_:[125] but could get poor encouragement to change for +better dealing, so that we remained long perplexed how to act, and +returned to our business at the ships. + +[Footnote 125: Gogo is on the west shore of the gulf of Cambay. In an +after passage of this voyage, what is here called Gengomar _and_ +Castellata, is called Gengomar _or_ Castelletto, which may possibly +refer to Jumbosier, on a river of the same name, about sixty miles north +from Surat. Castelletta must have been a name imposed by the +Portuguese.--E.] + +The 27th, in the morning, when Nicholas Ufflet went ashore, he found all +the people belonging to Swally had gone away from the water-side in the +night, as also all those who used to stay beside the tents, in +consequence of an order from the nabob; and was farther informed that +our merchants were detained at Surat, having been stopped by force when +attempting to cross the bridge, and had even been beaten by the guard +set there by the nabob. The gunner's boy and his companion, formerly +supposed to have run away, and who were in company at the time with our +merchants, being on their return to the ships, were also well beaten, +and detained with the rest. The 31st we began to take in fresh water, to +be ready for departing, as our stay here seemed so very uncertain. This +day, Thomas Smith, the master's boy, had most of the outer part of one +of his thighs bitten off by a great fish, while swimming about the ship. +The ravenous fish drew him under water, yet he came up again and swam +to the ship, and got up to the bend, where he fainted. Being brought +into the gun-room, the surgeon endeavoured to do what he could for his +recovery; but he had lost so much blood that he never recovered out of +the swoon, and shortly died. + +In the evening of the 2d November, Mr Aldworth and Mr Elkington came +down from Surat, where they left Mr Ensworth very sick. They reported to +me their proceedings with the nabob, as formerly stated; but said they +were now reconciled, and that he had made fair promises of future +respect, with a free trade through all the country under his government. +I do not attribute his severe proceedings hitherto to any hatred or +ill-will to our nation, but to his fears lest we might unite with the +Portuguese against him, owing to my refusing to assist him against +Damaun. These his doubts and fears were increased by a knavish device of +the subtle and lying Jesuits; who, taking advantage of my refusal to +fight against the Portuguese without cause, at Damaun or elsewhere, +pretended with the nabob that they had a letter from the viceroy, +saying, That he and his friends the English meant to join their forces +and come against Surat. This devilish device gave much hindrance to our +business, by occasioning continual doubt in the nabob's mind of our +friendly intentions; and unfortunately likewise, Mr Aldworth had +strengthened these doubts and fears, though ignorant of the lying +inventions of the jesuits; for, thinking to mollify their rigour, he +rashly advised them to beware, lest their ill usage might force us to +join with the Portuguese against them. We likewise believed that the +order of the nabob, forbidding the people to trade with us on board, +proceeded entirely from his desire to thwart us: But we afterwards +learnt, by letter from Thomas Kerridge, that Mucrob Khan, and all other +governors of sea-ports, had express orders from the Mogul, not to allow +any trade with us till they had first chosen and purchased, for the +king's use, all kinds of strange and unusual things we might have to +dispose of. + +On the 3d I called a council to deliberate concerning our business, and +especially how far we might proceed in aid of the natives against the +Portuguese, for which purpose we carefully examined our commission and +instructions. We also arranged the appointments of the merchants for +their several places of employment, both such as were to remain in the +factory at Surat, and those who were to proceed on the voyage. This day +likewise, sixty bales of indigo, and eleven packs of cotton-yarn, came +aboard from Surat, being goods that belonged to the _twelfth_ voyage. +It was my desire to have been ashore among our merchants, that I might +assist in arranging our business at Surat; and this the rather because +of the turbulent, head-strong, and haughty spirit of----,[126] who was +ever striving to sway every thing his own way, thwarting others who +aimed at the common good, and whose better discretion led them to more +humility. But such was the uncertain state of our business, partly owing +to the nabob and his people, and partly to the Portuguese, who I heard +were arming against us; and besides, because I understood that the nabob +proposed to demand restitution for the goods taken by Sir Henry +Middleton in the Red Sea, at under rates, as they say, though I know +they had goods for goods even to the value of a halfpenny. On all these +accounts, therefore, I thought it best to keep nearest my principal +charge, referring all things on shore to the merchants of my council, in +most of whom I had great confidence. + +[Footnote 126: This name is left blank in the Pilgrims, probably because +Purchas, a contemporary, did not wish to give offence.--E.] + +The 22d November, I finished my letters for Persia; being one for the +company, to be forwarded over land, one for Sir Robert Shirley, and one +of instructions for Richard Steel. The 23d, _Lacandus_, the Banian, came +down to us, with news of discontent and hard speeches that had passed +between the nabob and our merchants, but who were now again reconciled. +This was occasioned by Mr Edwards refusing to let him see the presents, +which he was at last obliged to consent to. All these merchants wrote me +at this time separately, that the viceroy was certainly arming against +us. At this time Mr Ensworth and Timothy Wood died within an hour of +each other. John Orwicke, Robert Young, and Esay But, were now +dispatched to provide such cloths and cotton-yarns as we had formerly +agreed on. The 25th Mr Edwards wrote me of the coming of three great +men, bringing seven firmauns from the Great Mogul; in whose presence the +nabob bestowed upon him 850 _mahmudies_, ten fine _basties_, thirty +_top-seels_, and thirty _allizaes_; at the same time he gave ten +_top-seels_ to Mr Elkington and Mr Dodsworth, a cloak to Mr Aldworth and +another to Mr Elkington, Mr Dodsworth having had one before. He likewise +promised free trade to all places under his command, and abundant +refreshments for our people in the ships. + +The 27th, John Crowther came from Surat, to inform me he had been +appointed by the chief merchants at Surat to accompany Mr Steel into +Persia, and had therefore come to take leave of me, and to fetch away +his things from the ship. This day also Mr Edwards wrote to me, by +Edmund Espinol, to send him fifty elephants teeth, indifferently chosen +as to size, as a banian merchant was in treaty for them all, if they +could agree on terms. The 6th December, the nabob seemed ashamed that he +had not shewn me the smallest respect since my arrival, and, being +desirous to excuse himself, he this day entreated Mr Edwards to go on +board along with the great banian who had bought our ivory, and +Lacandas, the banian merchant of the junk belonging to the king of +_Cushan_.[127] He chose this last, on account of his former familiarity +with our people, and commissioned him to buy sword-blades, knives, and +mirrors. By them he sent me a present, consisting of two _corge_ of +coarse _bastas_, ten fine _bastas_, ten _top-seels_, ten _cuttonies_, +and three quilts, together with a message, certifying that the nabob +proposed to come down to visit me in a day or two at the most. At their +going ashore, I gave them a salute of five guns. + +[Footnote 127: Kessem, on the coast of Arabia Felix, is probably here +meant.--E.] + +They told me, that the nabob had certain intelligence from Goa, that the +viceroy was fitting out all the force he could muster to come against +us; and expressed a wish, on the part of the nabob, that I would convoy +one or two of his ships for two or three days sail from the coast, which +were bound for the Red Sea. To this I answered, that I could not do +this; as, if once off the coast, the wind was entirely adverse for our +return: But, if he would further our dispatch, so that we might be ready +in any convenient time, I would do any thing reasonable that he could +desire. The 9th, the nabob's son came to the shore, but would not +venture on board, wherefore I went ashore to him. He had a horse ready +for me on landing to fetch me, and desired me to sit down beside him, +which I did. He then commanded some horsemen, who accompanied him, to +amuse me, by shewing their warlike evolutions on the sands, chasing each +other after the fashion of the Deccan, whence they were; and at his +desire I caused eleven guns to be fired, to do him honour. Though he +refused to drink any wine at this interview, he sent for it after his +departure, as also for a fowling-piece he had seen in the hands of one +of our people, both which I sent him, together with a bowl from which to +drink the wine. + +§2. _Account of the Forces of the Portuguese, their hostile Attempts, +and Fight with the English, in which they are disgracefully repulsed_. + +On the 16th of December, 1613, Mr Elkington wrote me, That the nabob had +told him the Portuguese frigates had burnt Gogo, with many _gouges_ or +villages in its vicinity, together with ten large ships, of which the +_Rehemee_ was one, and an hundred and twenty small vessels. He said +likewise, that the nabob was much displeased with me for not having +fired upon the Portuguese vessels, as they passed our anchorage, which +circumstance had renewed his suspicions of our friendly intelligence +with the Portuguese; and, although Mr Elkington had said every thing he +could to explain the reason of our conduct, as stated formerly, he could +not satisfy the nabob of its propriety. The 23d two boats came off to us +for lead; and on the same day we saw twenty-two Portuguese frigates, +which came to anchor in the night between, us and the mouth of the +river, where they continued most part of next day. + +The 24th, in the morning, we saw four boats coming down the river +towards us; but, on seeing the Portuguese frigates, they immediately +turned back, and were chased up the river by two of the frigates. +Finding they could not get up with the boats, the Portuguese landed and +set fire to two or three poor cottages, and carried off two or three +cattle, and then returned to their squadron at the mouth of the river. +In the afternoon, they all went up the river in company. In the morning +early of the 25th, we saw five or six frigates under sail. An hour or +two after, we saw a boat standing towards us, which was presently chased +by two frigates, on which the men in the small boat ran her a-ground and +forsook her; but as the frigates could not float near where the boat +was, and the tide was ebbing fast, they departed without farther harm. +The 26th in the morning, I sent the Hope a good way to the northward +from the rest of our fleet, to see whether the Portuguese would assail +her. + +Early in the morning of the 27th, the Portuguese frigates came and made +a bravado before our ship, and then before the Salomon, which was next +us; and from thence went directly against the Hope, which rode a great +way from us, in which manoeuvre they had all their men close stowed +below, and not one to be seen. The master of the Hope hailed them twice, +but they would give no answer; on which they let fly at them from the +bow-chases of the Hope, which only could be brought to bear, and by +which they were forced with some loss to stand away. The master of the +Hope was satisfied, if he had not shot at them, that they would have +attempted to board, or to have set his ship on fire, as they had the +advantage of both wind and tide, and were so directly a-head of his ship +that he could hardly get any of his guns to bear upon them, while the +rest of our ships could not have come up to his rescue. In the +afternoon, I sent the Salomon to keep company with the Hope; and, going +to the northwards of her, she made several shots at the frigates, but we +did not perceive that any harm was done. I therefore ordered a gun to be +fired, as a warning to desist, on which the Salomon stood in again and +came to anchor. + +In the morning of the 28th, I went in the pinnace aboard the Hope and +Salomon, to enquire the reason of their firing. And the Portuguese, +seeing our boats pass to and fro, removed in the afternoon, and anchored +a little way without us, obviously for the purpose of cutting off our +intercourse. In the meantime, the boat which had been chased ashore on +the 25th, came aboard the Gift, bringing some letters from Mr Elkington, +which our master sent to me, as I was then in the Hope. Having answered +Mr Elkington's letter, I sent back the _gelliwat_ to the Gift, with +directions to go thence to Surat in the night. But, as the _gelliwat_ +[galivat] returned, she was chased by the frigates; which perceiving, I +waved her to return, but she held on her way, not observing my signal. +The frigates held her so close in chase, that they got within shot of +her, and even fired one gun; and had not the Gift slipped one cable and +veered another, and plied her ordnance at the Portuguese, they had +surely taken or sunk the _gelliwat_. This forced the Portuguese to give +over the chase, not without damage. Late at night, on the tide of ebb, I +made the Hope and Salomon set sail and come near the other two ships, +and then returned on board the Gift. + +Perceiving on the 29th, that my continuing off the bar of Surat was +quite unavailing, as the Portuguese frigates could pass and repass to +and from the river, by going across the sands, where there was not +water to float my ships; and that no boats could come to us to fetch +away our goods, for fear of the frigates, neither could we have any +intercourse with our friends ashore, to know what passed; I therefore +set sail for Swally roads, where I arrived next day, having very little +wind. + +On the 14th January, 1614, we heard of many frigates being arrived, +which rode at the bar of Surat all next day till night; and, leaving +that place after dark, they came and rode within shot of us till next +morning, when they weighed and stood back to the southwards. While they +remained at anchor, supposing they might be the Mallabars, which the +nabob had formerly promised to send me, I put forth a flag of truce, and +sent Mr Spooner, one of our master's mates, towards them, directing him +to keep a watchful eye to our signals, which we should make if we saw +any reason of suspicion. Seeing our gallivat draw near, and no sign of +friendship in answer to ours, I hoisted my flag and fired a shot to +recall our boat, which immediately came back. At this time, our sentinel +at the mast-head descried another fleet of frigates, which afterwards +assembled at the bar of Surat, and went all into the river. By this I +was satisfied they were all Portuguese, and was glad our men and boat +had escaped their hands. Thinking these frigates were forerunners of a +greater force, I ordered the decks to be cleared, all our guns thrown +loose, and every thing to be in readiness for action, both for the great +guns and small arms, and to fit up barricades for close quarters. In the +night of the 17th, all the frigates came out of the river, and in the +morning were all at the point of the bar. + +The 18th, Maugie, the banian captain formerly mentioned, accompanied by +another great man, who was son to _Clych Khan_, came to the water side +to speak with me, to whom I went ashore. Not long after, word was +brought from on board, that they had descried a fleet of ships far off, +which looked very big, but which we could not see from the shore, owing +to its being very low. Taking leave of my visitors, I returned aboard, +and made every thing be put in readiness, which was done immediately. +Towards night, we made them out to be six galleons, with three smaller +ships, besides the sixty frigates which were here before. Two gallies +belonging to this armament were not yet come up. The tide being spent, +they came to anchor till next day. The 19th, they plied up to the +entrance of our new channel, where they came to anchor, and where they +were joined by the two gallies. One of their great ships, being too +forward, came too near the sands and grounded, but was soon got off +again. + +On this occasion, Mucrob Khan, the nabob of Surat, sent the sabandar and +several others of the principal men of Surat, with a great present of +provisions to the Portuguese, and to endeavour to enter into terms of +peace; but though great policy was used on both sides, they broke off +without coming to any terms. This was done by the nabob to my great +mortification, for he and all the country despaired of my being able to +resist such disproportionate force, and he was therefore willing before +hand to conciliate the viceroy by presents; considering, if I were once +overthrown, his own turn would come next, either to endure a severe +assault, or to make such a peace as the enemy chose to dictate. Peace +was certainly most desirable for the viceroy, that he might restore +trade with the Moguls. Yet, seeing the tractableness of the nabob, and +his apparent earnestness for peace, the viceroy made light of it for the +present, expecting to bring it to bear with great advantage after he had +overthrown us, which he made no doubt easily to accomplish. When this +was performed, he expected to receive great presents, and great +submission from the Moguls to the dictates of the conqueror. But it +pleased God, who beheld the injustice of his attempt, to turn the event +contrary to the expectations both of the viceroy and the nabob. After +failing in all his attempts against me, and finding he could not even +gain a _boats thole_ from me in all the time he spent here, with loss +and disgrace, the viceroy was fain to revive the former despised proffer +of peace with the nabob: While the nabob on the other hand, confirmed by +the experience of a month, and seeing that the viceroy, after all his +boastful threatenings, and with so vast an armament, was unable to +prevail against our four merchant ships, or even to remove our small +force one foot from their place, gave for answer, that he would not make +peace with the viceroy. Thus was the viceroy frustrated in both his +hopes, of an easy victory over us, and an advantageous peace with the +Moguls. After this digression, I now return to our proceedings. + +When we formerly heard of the force which the viceroy was fitting out +against us; we had no conception it would be so formidable as it now +appeared, and therefore deemed it expedient to consult how, by God's +help, we might best resist. The odds and advantages on their side, made +me calculate every thing that made against me. Being far out-numbered +by his forces, which I esteemed the principal ships and means belonging +to the Portuguese in India, and having all the people of greatest rank +and valour, I considered it might be too hazardous for us to put out +into deep water, as by their numbers they would be able to intercept and +overcharge me, and to force me irrecoverably aground, on one side or +other. Such were my apparent disadvantages in going out to sea; while I +knew, on the other hand, that their numerous smaller vessels might much +annoy us with fire-works, or put us otherwise into great hazard, in the +place where we now rode at anchor, where I was hopeful their great ships +could not or durst not come, owing to the shoal water. Though my numbers +were considerably lessened by sickness and deaths, all my people, from +the highest to the lowest, seemed quite courageous, yet ignorant both of +our danger and how it was to be prevented; but their brave spirit gave +me great hope. Yet my anxiety was not small, how I might best act in +maintaining the honour of my country, and not neglect the valuable +property entrusted to my care by my friends and employers; as not only +was the present charge to be put in hazard, but all hopes also of future +benefits, if I were now overthrown; as the enemy, if he now got the +mastery, would be able to make peace with the Moguls on his own terms, +to the expulsion of our nation for ever. + +Besides these considerations, I leave to such parents as are tender for +the safety of their dutiful and obedient children, to imagine how great +was my anxiety for the safety of the people under my command. So great +was my cares all this time, that I had little time for conversation, or +even almost to shew myself sensible of the approaching dangers. Whenever +I could get free from others, I very earnestly craved the aid and +direction of the almighty and ever merciful God, who had often delivered +me before from manifold dangers, praying that he would so direct me that +I might omit nothing having a tendency to the safety of my charge, and +our defence against the enemy. I had strong confidence that the Almighty +would grant my request, and yet was often led to doubt, through my +manifold and grievous offences. I resolved at length what to do, by +God's assistance, providing the masters of the ships would agree to +second me. Being satisfied, if we should-receive a defeat while at +anchor, our disgrace would be great, and our enemies could in that case +be little injured by us; while by setting sail, the viceroy, in his +greediness and pride, might do himself some wrong upon the sands, by +which he might cripple his own force, and thereby open a way for our +getting out through the rest. Yet this plan seemed only fit for ultimate +necessity, considering that much of our goods were now on their way, and +others were expected from day to day; and, if once out, unless it +pleased God to make us the conquerors, so as to drive the viceroy clean +away, I should on no account be able to return to my anchorage, where +only I could get in my lading. Considering also that the viceroy would +hold his honour in such high estimation, that he would rather die than +give way; and besides, that my people would be tired and half spent with +labour, before going to fight, by heaving at the capstan to get up our +anchors, setting the sails, and so forth, which in this hot country +makes them both weary and faint, to the great diminution of their +courage; while the viceroy and his soldiers being troubled with no +labour, which among them is done by slaves and inferior mariners, would +come fresh into the battle. Likewise, even supposing the viceroy to lose +many men in the fight, he could be again supplied from the nearest towns +belonging to the Portuguese, by means of his frigates; whereas we could +not have a single man replaced, whatever number we might have slain or +disabled. + +Having none of our merchants aboard, as they were all employed in the +country, or with Mr Elkington in our factory at Surat, I sent for all +the masters, on the night of this Thursday the 19th January, desiring +them and some of the mates to come to supper with me on board the Gift. +I then made them a speech on our present situation, desiring every one +to give his opinion freely, how we might best proceed in our present +straits. I declared to them my confidence in God, notwithstanding all +the force of these bragging Portuguese, that their injurious attempts +would not prevail against us, who had been careful not to wrong them in +the Indies. I represented also to them, the jealousy entertained of us +by the nabob and other chief men of the country, because we had +refrained from firing at the saucy bragging frigates. + +I found all the masters willing and tractable to my heart's desire. We +had some few discourses about our provident mooring, as also about +removing a little lower down. I then proposed my plan to them, desiring +to have their free opinion. I represented that our ships were now in as +good condition for battle as we could make them, yet our danger by +night, if we continued where we were, was not small, however provident +we might be. Wherefore, I thought it fit in the morning at low water, to +send one ship to ride as far down as we could have water for all our +ships at the lowest ebb, at which time none of the enemies ships could +come to annoy her. This, as I thought, might induce the viceroy to make +some attempt at high water, when our other three ships might bear down +against the stream, the springs being now at the highest, when we should +see what efforts the viceroy might make, and might attend to the same +and act accordingly, in the hope that the viceroy might commit some +error to the weakening of his own force and our advantage. And if such +should happen, it would then be proper for us to put out to sea, in the +darkness of the following night, when the viceroy would not be in +condition to make sail to hinder us. Or, if we saw reason, we might make +sail daily on the flood, working to and again, which would somewhat +dismay the Portuguese, and encourage our own men. My proposal was +unanimously agreed to, as the best way of proceeding; and finding Mr +Molineux quite willing to fall down with the Hope at low water next +morning, this was directed accordingly. + +In the morning of the 20th, at low water, the Hope went down to induce +the enemy to make some attempt against her when the tide rose, and then +we in the other ships stood after her. The viceroy, and all the worthy +knights about him, thinking I was about to flee, hastened as soon as the +flood would permit to stop the passage, and prevent our getting out. We +all came to anchor short of the Hope, yet not so as to leave her +destitute of our help, but rather doubting of sufficient depth for our +ships at low water so far down. On coming to anchor, I went down into my +cabin, meaning to have given our friends ashore notice of my purposes, +that they might know it proceeded from no rashness, but in good +discretion to wait upon advantages to the prejudice of our enemies. But +presently I had notice, that three of the Portuguese ships and most of +their frigates were coming stem on before the wind upon the Hope, +followed by all the galleons. + +We endeavoured to weigh our anchor, but having no time for that, we cut +our cables, and made sail for the rescue of the Hope. Before we could +get sufficiently near, the enemies ships were close aboard of her, and +had entered their men, boarding her with great appearance of resolution. +But they had no quiet abode there, nor could they rest in their own +ships, neither could they cast them loose from the Hope, so greatly were +they annoyed by our great guns and small arms. At length, their +principal officers being slain, the rest in great numbers leapt into the +sea, whence many of them were taken up by their frigates. But, before +quitting their ships, they set them on fire, thinking to have burnt the +Hope along with them. But, praised be the Lord of Hosts, they were burnt +without harm to the Hope; for, so soon as the fire had well kindled, the +flaming ships were cast loose and drifted on the sands, where they +continued burning till quenched by the flowing tide. So long as +day-light lasted, we continued exchanging shots from all our ships with +the galleons, they being on the outside of a spit of sand, and we on the +inside. They did us little injury in our hulls, but much to our ropes +and sails overhead. In this conflict, besides those who were wounded, we +had five men slain. By a great mischance, the main-top-sail, top-mast, +and shrouds got afire, communicated from the main-top, in consequence of +the fire-works lodged there taking fire, the man being slain who had the +charge there. All these were burnt quite away, together with a great +part of the main-mast; and this misfortune prevented us from going out +into deep water to try our fortune with the viceroy in close fight. We +were likewise put to our shifts, not knowing by what means we might get +the mast replaced. + +The 21st I got the anchor weighed, which we had been obliged to cut from +the day before. On the 22d, I was informed that many great men, +accompanied by a Portuguese friar, and escorted by five or six hundred +horse, had come down to Swally, meaning to send the friar next day, with +three or four principal Moors, to negociate a peace with the viceroy. +But the nabob sent me word, that he sought for no such thing, and was +resolved to conclude no peace, unless we were included. He also granted +me what timber we might need, of which we availed ourselves, and +promised to supply us with provisions. The Portuguese remaining quiet on +the 25th, the _muccadam_ of Swally came to me, saying that the +before-mentioned friar had sent to entice him to poison the well whence +we had our water, which he would not consent to, and had therefore put +some live tortoises into it, that these might shew by their deaths, if +poison should be put therein by the Portuguese. At night, part of the +120 bales of indigo we had purchased came to the water side, and was +presently got aboard. This day _Isaac Beg_ sent me a present of fruit +from his own garden; and this day likewise the rest of the timber for +repairing the Hope's mast was brought down to us. + +The 27th, I sent all our boats to sound the _Swash_ at low water, being +chiefly on purpose to keep the Portuguese in ignorance of my real +intentions. They sent one galley and five frigates, thinking to have cut +off our boats; but in this they failed, as in every thing else they +attempted against us. The 28th, the nabob sent great store of provisions +to the viceroy, as goats, bread, plantains, and the like, together with +a banquet of sweetmeats. Coge Nozan sent me a present of five bullocks. +Several of our men died about this time of fluxes and other diseases. +The 31st, we received aboard from Cambay, fifty bales of indigo. In the +afternoon, one _Coge Arson Ali_ came aboard, and presented me with +several goats, a large supply of bread, roast-meat, plantains, sugar, +and other such things. Along with him came an old acquaintance of mine, +a Persian, who said there were news from Damaun, that the Portuguese had +sent there 350 men to be buried; and we computed, that there could not +be less than 100 more, killed and burnt in their ships, besides those +who were drowned. They also told me, that not only were the Portuguese +opposed here in India, but also by the Persians at Ormus, and that the +Malays were in arms against them at Malacca. They likewise assured me, +that the negociations between Mucrob Khan and the viceroy were entirely +at an end, and that no peace would take place between them. + +I had long wished to see this man, who, till now, could never get leave +of the nabob, without which no one dared use that freedom. This jealousy +of the nabob proceeded, as he said, from a great charge enjoined by the +king to procure for his use all curious things of value, and he is +fearful lest any of these should pass through other hands, to his +disgrace, which forces him to employ strange and severe means to prevent +this happening. Day being nearly spent, I sent them ashore, making them +a present, and giving money to all their people, having first shewn them +how far some of our great guns could throw a ball. They then took their +leave and departed. + +§3_Supplies received by the Portuguese, who vainly endeavour to use +Fire-boats. They seek Peace, which is refused, and depart. Interview +between the Nabob and Captain Downton, and Departure of the English_. + +On the 3d February, 1615, there arrived at the waterside twenty-four +bales of indigo, seven packs of white, seven of black, and four of blue +_bastas,_ six packs of cotton yarn, three of _candikens,_ and one pack +of _crecany,_ all of which were brought immediately on board. This day +also the supplies for the viceroy came in sight, being two ships of +burden, two junks, and eight or ten of the country boats. The nabob sent +me a message by _Lacandas,_ that these were not for the purpose of +fighting, but were full of combustibles, meant to be set on fire, and +allowed to drift with the tide upon our ships in the night. I was glad +of this information, and took immediate measures to prevent the +consequences of such an attempt, as well as to defend ourselves from the +smaller vessels. The spring-tides were now near the highest, and were +consequently fittest for their attacks, so that I expected them every +tide; and to let them see I was ready for their reception, and how +little I cared for them, I directed the setting and clearing our watch, +mornings and evenings, to be announced by a volley of shot from every +ship, pointing the best piece in my ship at the prow of the viceroy's +ship, to try his temper, and to daunt the courage of his people. It +pleased God this morning, when I had least leisure for mourning, to call +my only son, George Downton, to his mercy, who was buried next morning +ashore, and the volleys intended to insult the viceroy, served also to +honour his obsequies. + +This morning also, while expecting an assault from the Portuguese, I was +visited by one _Mousa Attale,_ a Malabar captain, together with his +troop, from whom I got a description of the principal ports and harbours +of his country, expressing my anxious desire to become acquainted with +them, and to have league and intercourse between them and the English, +with mutual trade and friendship. He seemed willing to encourage this +proposal, and requested letters to that effect from me, which their +ships might shew to my countrymen when they happened to meet, which I +gave him, as also a letter for his king, requesting kind usage for my +countrymen if any of their ships should come into his harbours. After +some conference, he departed, and I presented him with a sword-blade, +and three or four knives.[128] This day the master of the Hope +represented that he had several men killed in the former engagement, and +many hurt, bruised, and disabled from service, on which I sent him three +men from my ship, four from the Hector, and four from the Salomon. + +[Footnote 128: These knives, so often mentioned as presents in India, +were probably daggers.--E.] + +The 5th I had letters from Mr Aldworth, informing of his arrival at +Baroach with his companions, and saying that he had been set upon by 200 +Rajput thieves, nine _coss_ from Baroach, the day before, the thieves +being armed with pikes, matchlocks, and bows and arrows; but, after some +skirmishing, they fled, three of them being slain, and more wounded. In +this affair Humphrey Elkington was shot through the thigh with an arrow, +one of the horsemen sent by Surder Khan to guard our people was killed, +and Mr Aldworth's horse sore wounded. The nabob sent me word that the +viceroy proposed to assault me this day, and therefore sent Coge Nozan +to guard the land. Nozan came accordingly to the water side, and sent +his son, _Mamud Iehad,_ to visit me on board, accompanied by a chief +named _Kemagee,_ the son of _Leckdarsee, rajput_ chieftain of _Guigamar_ +or _Castelletto,_[129] who had for a long time maintained war with the +Moguls and Portuguese. These chiefs entreated permission to see and +partake in the fight, and as no assault was made that day, they remained +all night on board. The _rajput_ chief went ashore next morning, but the +other remained on board two or three days, and seeing the enemy would do +nothing, he went likewise ashore. + +[Footnote 129: On a former occasion supposed to have been +Jumbosier.--E.] + +On the forenoon of the 8th, we received more indigo aboard, and in the +afternoon all the Portuguese frigates, with the two junks, and two +gallies, came driving up with the flood, as if for some attempt against +us, either by fire, which I most doubted, or otherwise. We therefore got +under weigh and advanced to meet them, upon which they all made off as +fast as they could, and we came again to anchor. This was merely a +device, to make us believe their fire-boats were to come against us +from the south, and that we might have no suspicion of their coming from +the northwards; wherefore they again assembled all their junks, +frigates, and galleys next night, a little without the sands, to call +our attention from the northern quarter. But I was aware of that being +the place of greatest danger; and though I commanded a careful outlook +to be kept both ways, I especially enjoined to be watchful in the north +quarter, as it fell out accordingly. A little within the night, between +us and a great light to the westwards, upon the island of Gogo, we could +discern them creeping up to the north upon the flood; and then, about +ten o'clock at night, when very dark, and before the moon rose, upon the +last quarter of the ebb tide, there came down towards us two fire-boats, +towed by two frigates, which we happily descried before they came nigh, +and plied them heartily both with great guns and small arms. By this we +soon beat off the frigates, which set the fire-boats adrift, and made +sail from us. + +One of the fire-boats drifted clear of the Gift, Hector, and Salomon, +but got athwart the cable of the Hope, and presently blew up; but, +blessed be God, the Hope received no harm, having cut her cable and got +clear. The other fire-boat came up likewise on the quarter of the Hope, +all in flames, but did no harm, as she drifted past with the ebb. She +came up again with the tide of flood, and was like to have got foul of +us; but our boats towed her ashore continually burning. The former one +floated likewise back with the flood, but sank near us in the morning. +This day I had a letter from Thomas Kerridge, specifying that Nicholas +Whittington had gone distracted, and expressing some doubts of Richard +Steel. + +The 10th, at night, about the same time as before, two other fire-boats +came against us, towed by four or five frigates, bearing directly on the +Hector. Immediately on perceiving them, the Gift and Hector let drive at +them with great guns and small arms, so that the frigates threw them +adrift, firing them sooner than they otherwise would. The burning boats +floated toward the Hector, but having a stiff breeze, drifted past to +leewards. Within half an hour after, we perceived many boats drifting +towards the Hector, against which we again let drive, forcing the +frigates to abandon them in such a hurry that they only set two of them +on fire, there being four of them chained together. Fortunately we had +a stiff gale, and by edging up to windward, they all floated clear to +leeward. While passing, our gunner made a shot at one of the boats that +was unfired, which struck her and set her on fire. The vehemence of the +flames reached the fourth boat, and set her likewise on fire; so they +all drifted ashore in flames, hard by our landing-place. My pinnace took +three of the actors in a small canoe, in which they thought to have +escaped. Two of these men were brought aboard my ship, the third being +left in the Hector. Besides these, our _gelliwat_ picked up another, +which she brought with her. Thus did God disappoint all the malicious +practices of our enemy. + +Seeing himself foiled in all his injurious attempts, the viceroy set +sail on the 11th, and fell down to the bar of Surat, where he anchored. +Being suspicious that he meant to attempt taking Surat, I resolved, in +that case, to have gone with my ships to set upon his fleet, which must +have constrained him to desist from his enterprise against Surat, as I +was desirous to assist in defending a place where we had so great a +stock, and so many of our merchants. But the viceroy durst not trust me +so far as to unman his ships, lest I should come against him. In the +night he sent all his frigates into the river, and sent some person to +propose peace, but received a flat denial. The 12th, the nabob sent +_Lacandas_ to inform me that five or six frigates had gone to the +northwards, having four or five fire-boats, which they meant to let +drive upon us in the night, and therefore wished me to keep a good +look-out. I acknowledged his kindness, and was glad of his care, though +needing no such admonition, as I was equally suspicious of their +practices when out of sight as when they rode near us. The nabob had +this intelligence from the Jesuits, with whom he kept on fair terms, for +his better security, if he should have been put to the worst. As the +frigates, or other vessels in the offing, could not well discern the +place where our ships rode during the darkness of the night, by reason +of the shadow of the shore, they had lights made for them ashore for +guiding them where to find us during their hellish incendiary plans. +Having observed this light, night after night, always in the same place, +and seeing it as before on the night of the 13th, I sent William Gurdin +ashore with twenty men, armed with muskets and pikes, directing them to +endeavour to surround this fire-blazer, supposing him to be some traitor +inhabiting the neighbourhood. But, on coming near, the fire was +presently put out, and was again seen at another place, quite contrary +to the direction of their pursuit; and so going up and down for a long +time, they gave it over, esteeming it some delusion of the devil. This +night the viceroy set sail from the bar of Surat, leaving about twenty +of his frigates in the river to keep in check the Malabar frigates which +were there for the defence of the town. + +The 14th, the nabob sent a great man, who, in token of friendship, was +called his brother, to visit me. This person gave as his opinion that +the viceroy was gone with all his fleet to Goa, leaving some frigates to +keep possession of the river, and others to return to Diu and Ormus. But +my own opinion is, that the viceroy has only gone somewhere to refresh +his people, and to reinforce his ships, against our putting to sea, when +no sands will be in the way of his greatest ships coming against me. He +also told me that the king had sent down forces for the purpose of +conquering Damaun and all the sea coast. He said likewise, that they +were more willing to give entertainment and trade to our nation than the +Portuguese, which I thought very reasonable, as the Portuguese had +always been injurious, and had done many vile things against them. Yet, +unless we continue able to resist the Portuguese, they will soon unsay +that speech for their own ease. When he had viewed our ship, with our +ordnance and defensive preparations, we sent him and his train on shore +in oar boats, in all courtesy. + +We now set seriously to work in clearing and loading the Hope for +England, having hitherto taken in our goods confusedly and by hasty +snatches, some into one ship, and some into others, not deeming it +proper to hazard all in one bottom while exposed to so much danger from +the Portuguese. I had resolved to send home the Hope, not that I +esteemed her burden the fittest for the goods we had provided, but +because of the many impediments and disabilities of that ship, as daily +complained of by the master and carpenter; in particular, that her +stern-post within the rudder was unsheathed, a strange and dangerous +neglect and unaccountable oversight, on which account it was fitting she +should soonest return; besides, we were in danger of losing our +quicksilver which was in her, and lay on her keel and bilges. + +The 18th, the nabob sent to me Cage Arson Ali, the sabandar, and other +merchants of Surat, requesting me to remain for fifteen days, which I +would in no sort consent to. They then importuned me to stop for ten +days, which likewise I refused, shewing them how prejudicial so long +delay might be to my voyage. The cause of their request was, lest the +viceroy might come with all his forces against Surat after my departure. +Seeing them discontented at my denial, and loth to give displeasure to +the nabob, which might be prejudicial to our affairs afterwards, and +considering that it would require six days of the ten before we could +get the Hope ready, I at last consented to their request, to their great +satisfaction. At night on the 22d I had a letter from Surat, informing +me that the nabob meant to visit me next day, and accordingly two +elephants and six camels came down in the morning of the 23d, bringing +his tents and other matters for his reception. The 24th, Mr Aldworth +came down with the rest of the merchants to finish all business with me +previous to our departure. + +In the morning of the 25th, the nabob came down with a great train, with +six other elephants, and was two hours at the water side before I knew +of his arrival. When told, I was sorry for the neglect, and sent Mr +Aldworth, Mr Elkington, and Mr Dodsworth ashore to compliment him, and +to keep him in discourse till I could go on shore, which I did soon +after. I proposed to have gone to him as a son to his father, in my +doublet and hose, without arms or any great train, according to custom, +to shew the trust and confidence I reposed in him; but my friends +persuaded me to the contrary, insisting that I should go well appointed, +and attended by a sufficient guard, to which I consented, though I +afterwards repented that I had not followed my own way. I went +accordingly ashore with about 140 men, part pikes, and part firelocks, +who gave me a volley of small arms as I entered the nabob's tent. The +nabob received me with much kindness, seeming much pleased at my coming +ashore to him. We sat for some time under a very fair tent, open on all +sides, and surrounded by many people, both his attendants and mine. + +At length he brought me into a more private room, near adjoining, having +only along with him Ali Khan, a great Persian captain, with Henie the +Banian as his interpreter; while I was accompanied by Messrs. Aldworth, +Elkington, and Dodsworth. We there conferred about the state of his +country, and about our affairs. At last I invited him to go on board to +view our ship, to which he readily consented. He then presented me with +his own sword, with many complimentary speeches, saying it was the +custom of his country to honour with arms such captains as had deserved +well. This sword, as he said, was made in his own house, the hilt being +of massy gold. In return, I presented to him my own arms, being sword +and dagger, together with my girdle and hangers, by me much esteemed, +and making a much finer shew than his, though of less value. We came +forth together from the private tent, and I walked down to the shore to +wait for his coming, whither he sent me a present of ten _cuttonee_ +quilts and twenty _topseels_. + +Soon after the nabob came to the shore, and we took boat together, going +on board my ship. Having shewn our ordnance, and the manner of pointing +the guns, and explained all our other preparations for defence, I +presented him with a very handsome gilt cup and cover, some fair knives, +a rundlet of Muscadine wine, and some other toys. Desiring to see some +of our ordnance shot off, and how far they could carry their balls on +the water, I caused three guns to be fired. He would then have taken +leave, but I accompanied him ashore, and ordered him to be saluted at +his departure with eleven guns. When we parted at the water side, the +nabob gave me four baskets of grapes. He likewise gave among the gunners +and trumpeters 200 mahmoodies, and 500 among the ship's company, +together with 100 _books_ of white _bastas_, worth two mahmoodies each. +Thus, after some compliments, we took leave of each other and parted. +While rowing up along shore for my better getting on board, as the tide +ran very swiftly, _Lacandas_ came running towards the boat, bearing a +message from the nabob to ask if he should erect a tomb over the grave +of my son. I returned my hearty thanks for the kind offer, desiring +Lacandas to say that I had already begun to do so. The nabob then went +away to Surat, and not long after his tent was taken down and went after +him, with all the rest of his carriages. + +The 26th, the nabob's son and son-in-law, a very ingenious young man, +came to visit me, upon whom I bestowed some knives and other things, +such as I had left, which could not be much, as I had every now and then +some great man or other to visit me, to all of whom I had to give +something. The 27th, the three sons of Ali Khan came to visit me, the +eldest of whom, named Guger Khan, presented me with two antilopes, a +male and a female, of which I was very glad, having endeavoured before +ineffectually to send some home to Sir Thomas Smith. After viewing all +our ship, with our ordnance and warlike preparations for defence, I gave +him four Spanish pikes, and some other things of my own, and saluted him +with eleven guns at his departure. + +In the afternoon of the 3d March, upon the tide of ebb, and having a +light gale from the north, sufficient to give steerage-way to our ships, +we hastened to get up our anchors, meaning to set sail in the +prosecution of our voyage, though our friends, the Malabars, who had +desired to go with us, made no attempt to come out. At this time we saw +another fleet of Portuguese frigates standing in from the westwards, and +being willing to do my best to hinder them from going into the river of +Surat, were it only to shew our good-will to the country people, we shot +at the nearest of them, though without hope of doing them any hurt, as +there was room for them to pass on either side of us, beyond reach of +our shot. I was willing also to shew our friends on land, as also to +those who I made no doubt would go down the coast to give notice to the +galleons of our coming, that we shot at their frigates going into Surat, +that they might also expect that we cared little for their greater +strength. + +In our passage this night we had various flaws of inconstant winds, +which obliged us to come to anchor for some time. As the wind became +afterwards steady, though faint, we again made sail, continuing our +course S. by E. along shore. At day-light nest morning we began to +descry, between us and the shore, the Portuguese galleons and two +gallies; all of which made sail on perceiving us, following with a light +breeze, while we stood somewhat out of our course with all our sails, +partly to gain time to prepare ourselves perfectly for battle, and +partly to give rest to my people, who had taken much fatigue the night +before, as also to draw the enemy farther from the coast, and from +having the convenience of fresh supplies. Ere long, the tide of flood +obliged us to anchor, not having sufficient wind to stem the current. +The enemy, resting his hopes on the wind, kept longer under sail, to his +great disadvantage. But as I did not consider this at the time as an +error in them, I was is great doubt lest they might intend going against +Surat with all their force, now that we were at sea, and there work +their wills upon our friends and goods, which I could only prevent by +following them. Yet the season was now so far advanced that I doubted, +even with our best haste, we should hardly get off the coast before the +foul weather set in; and this gave me hope that the viceroy would not +expose himself to the danger of the approaching winter. While +considering these things, the tide of flood was spent, and it was time +for us to use the ebb, when, to my great satisfaction, I saw the viceroy +and his whole fleet standing towards us, with a fresh breeze. We +likewise made sail, and stood our course before him all that ebb, and so +spent that night to the best advantage, partly at anchor, and partly +under sail, according as wind and tide served. + +In the morning of the 5th, the enemy had gained very little way upon us. +We spent this day, as before, in riding or sailing, as the tide +answered. This night the viceroy gained much ground upon us, and by this +time we had got a good way from the coast, and had advanced well to the +southwards, so that I was now satisfied the Portuguese forces could not +this year give any annoyance to Surat. I considered that my purposes in +these parts, both by the authority of my king, and to fulfil the designs +of my employers, were, in merchant ships, fitted indeed for defence, to +seek honest commerce, without striving to injure any; wherefore I held +it fit for me to proceed soberly and discreetly, neither basely to flee +from the enemy, nor to tempt danger by proudly seeking it, if it might +be honourably avoided. The viceroy was quite differently situated. He +had been sent by his master with the principal ships of all India, and +all the gallants and braggarts of these parts, not only to disturb and +intercept the peaceable trade of the English with the subjects of the +Mogul, but to take and burn them in the harbours of that great king. The +viceroy was furnished with abundance of all things the country could +afford, and only wanted an upright cause. He found what he was in search +of,--four poor merchant ships, having few men, many being dead, and more +sick; and these bragadocios, measuring our hearts by their own, thought +we could never stand against what they esteemed so superior a force; +and, seeing their intent, I baited my hook, which the fish presently ran +after. + +The Hope, being heavily laden, was in tow of the Hector, and being +sternmost, three of the Portuguese ships, and thirty or forty of their +frigates, as I had expected, boarded her with the flower of all their +chivalry. But, by the hand of God, and to their great amazement, they +received such a blow that few of them escaped, and these by +extraordinary chance, and three of their ships were burnt.[130] Thus it +pleased God to baffle this their first assault. Ever after, though they +beleaguered us round about for many days together, with all sorts of +ships, our people still in action, and sadly worn out with continual +labour, even shifting goods from ship to ship in that time, yet did they +never gain from us even the value of a _louse_ in all that time, except +our bullets, which we most willingly gave them roundly, their fire-boats +always failing, and nothing prospering in all their efforts. For many +days together I sent the viceroy a defiance once every twenty-four +hours, which must needs lie heavy on the stomach of so courageous a +gentleman. Craving pardon for this digression, I now proceed with my +narrative. + +[Footnote 130: I strongly suspect this to be a mere recapitulation of +what happened in Swally roads, as already related, as this second attack +on the Hope by the Portuguese is entirely omitted by Elkington and +Dodsworth.--E.] + +The 6th, in the morning, I sent for my master, letting him know that I +proposed, when the viceroy should come up near us, to cast about and +charge him suddenly, that we might strike unexpected terror in his +people, who now bragged us, seeing us flee before them. To this end I +went on board all the ships, giving them directions how to act, and gave +orders to the Hector, by means of her pinnace and mine, to take in an +hundred bales of goods from the Hope, to lighten her, and even staid to +see it done. By this time it was mid-day, when my ship struck sail for +my better getting on board; at which, the viceroy thinking it staid for +him in contempt, as we imagined, be and his consorts bore up with the +shore, and gave up all hope of mending their fortunes by following us +any farther; which course I very well liked, as there is nothing under +his foot to make amends for the loss of the worst man's finger in all +our ships. Besides, I wished for no occasion of fighting unless for the +honour of my king and country as I would rather save the life of one of +my poorest sailors than kill a thousand enemies. + +Having now finished with the viceroy, I set myself to write letters for +the dispatch of the Hope, yet still thinking to have stood in for the +bar of Goa to endeavour to have left some compliments there for the +viceroy at his return. This was my earnest desire, but we were so long +delayed in dispatching the Hope, that by the time we had finished, we +were far beyond Goa. + + * * * * * + +"The rest of this journal is wanting, as he is also wanting who should +have finished it. But, alas! this is the imperfection of man's best +perfections; death lying in ambush to entrap those whom by open force he +could not devour. He dying in this voyage, and following his son, hath +left this glorious act, _memoriae sacrum_, the memorable epitaph of his +worth, savouring of a true heroic disposition, piety and valour being in +him seasoned by gravity and modesty."--_Purch._ + + +SECTION II. + +_Relations by Mr Elkington and Mr Dodsworth, in Supplement to the former +Voyage_.[131] + +"Since writing the voyage of Captain Downton, I have obtained the +journal of Captain Elkington, in which the reader may proceed with this +worthy captain to Bantam, and thence to his grave; this history +succeeding the former, as its author did in command."--_Purch._ + +[Footnote 131: Purch. Pilgr. I. 514.] + +In employing the journals of Mr Elkington and Mr Dodsworth, to continue +the account of the voyage set forth under the command of Captain +Downton, only so much of both are here inserted as answers that purpose, +to avoid prolix repetition of circumstances, already sufficiently +related. The journal of Elkington breaks off abruptly, like that of +Downton, and probably from the same cause; as we learn from Purchas, in +the preceding notice, that Elkington died at Bantam. The journal of +Dodsworth entirely relates to the voyage of the Hope to England, after +parting company with the other two ships, except that it mentions +several incidents of the transactions previous to the departure of that +ship, most of which are here omitted, as already sufficiently +explained.--E. + +§1. _Continuation of the Voyage from Surat to Bantam, by Captain Thomas +Elkington_. + +On the 4th March, 1615, we descried the Portuguese fleet, which +immediately gave us chace, which it continued all that day and the next. +On the 6th, the general came aboard us, wishing us to make ready, as he +proposed to turn suddenly round and give an onset upon the enemy: But, +about noon that day, the Portuguese bore up and stood for the coast, and +in three hours after we lost sight of them. At night of the 10th, the +Hope departed from us. The 15th we saw three water-spouts at no great +distance; one of them, which was very large, continued for the space of +half an hour. The 19th we doubled Cape Comorin. + +The 10th May, the wind and current both against as, the general went to +a green island, to the north or the salt hill, where we came to anchor +in twenty fathoms on good sand. We here sought fresh water, but found +none. There were plenty of bogs and pigs on this island, where likewise +we gathered abundance of cocoa-nuts. All about this island is good +anchorage, within a stone's throw of the shore, in twelve fathoms. The +pinnace brought water from another island, about four leagues off but it +was brackish.[132] The 2d June we came to anchor in Bantam road. + +[Footnote 132: So vaguely is this journal expressed, or rather so +miserably abbreviated by Purchas, that there are no indications by which +to guess even where this island lay, except that it was on the way +between Cape Comorin and Bantam.--E.] + +The 3d July we weighed mace, and received silk towards furnishing the +Salomon for Masulipatam, to which place we agreed to send the following +merchants: George Chancie, Ralph Preston, Humphry Elkington, Timothy +Mallory, George Savage, and Robert Savage. The 8th we loaded porcelain +into the Salomon. This day we had news by a junk from the Moluccas, that +the Thomasine was there; and that there were twelve sail of Hollanders +at Ternate, who endeavoured to prevent all others from trading. The 11th +our old house very narrowly escaped burning, in conscience of a fire +very near. The 20th, Mr Jordan had letters from. Mr Ball at Macasser, +complaining of violent ill usage from the Hollanders, who had driven him +from thence, and stating that they proposed coming with all their force +to take possession of Bantam, and to place the king of _Motron_ in the +government. The 21st Mr Bennet set sail in the Salomon. The 25th, the +Advice and Attendance arrived from England, after a voyage of eight +months. They met the Globe and James at the Cape, to which ships they +spared eighteen men. These ships departed for England on the 17th July, +and the Advice and her consort on the 18th, meeting a ship near the +Cape, which we suppose might be either the Samaritan or the Hope, bound +for England. + +The 5th of August I went aboard to visit the general, Captain Nicholas +Downton, who was then very ill, and we got word of his death next +day.[133] Mr Evans the preacher, and Mr Hambdon, followed him, on the +8th, as we supposed by taking laudanum, as they were both well a little +before. On the 11th the Advice was sent to Japan, having a complement of +twenty-two Englishmen, together with five blacks, and Fernando the +Spaniard. The Concord returned on the 14th from Succadanea in Borneo and +Macasser. That night we had a prodigious tempest of rain, with thunder +and lightning, and the mosque of Bantam was split in two by a +thunderbolt, on which occasion the chief priest was nearly slain, which +the king and people took for a bad omen, and therefore determined to +make peace with Jacatra. The 16th the boat belonging to the Thomasine +came to Bantam, with twenty-two English and five blacks, bringing +intelligence of that ship having been lost on certain flats the night +before, twenty-two leagues from Macasser, owing to the carelessness of +Wilson the master, while all the people were asleep, he only being at +the helm. They saved all the money, which they brought along with them; +and as Mr Bailey told us that his wrecked crew had compelled him to pay +them their wages, we caused them to restore the money. + +[Footnote 133: By order in the box, Mr Elkington succeeded in the +command.--_Purch._] + +On the 19th, the Hollanders clapped three blacks into the bilboes, whom +Mr Bailey had brought with him from Celoar, pretending they were caught, +climbing over the rails of their house, and also, as they were brought +from a place under their protection, they refused to give us them back. +We are in various ways most vilely abused by these Hollanders, neither +do I see any means to right ourselves, unless we go to war with them; +for we believe this matter to have been done on purpose, and these +blacks enticed by them to it, as if taken by force. I was much offended +with Mr Bailey for his conduct in taking away these blacks, as the +means of making us hated as man-stealers, in, places where we used to be +well received, which the Hollanders will take care to blaze abroad to +our disgrace. + +In the night of the 13th September, the watch discovered a fire in the +thatch over the house in which Mr Jordan lodged, which was soon +extinguished; but we could plainly perceive it had been done apurpose, +as we found the cane by which it had been kindled sticking in the +thatch, for which we suspected a Spaniard named Francisco, who had +appostatized and turned Javan. The 2d October, Sophonee Cossock, a +merchant, came in a small pinnace from Puloway, accompanied by an +_Orancay_, to confer on trade with that place. The 22d, I went ashore, +accompanied by Mr Pring and Mr Bailey, to confer with the Dutch general, +concerning certain idle complaints made by them against our mariners. I +found him and the president of their factory very impatient, calling us +insolent English, threatening that our pride would have a fall, with +many other disgraceful and opprobrious words.[134] Such was the +entertainment we received from that boorish general, named Garrat +Reynes, in his own house. He had formerly shewn the like or worse to Mr +Ball, on going aboard his ship at Banda: And four of our men, who took +passage with him from thence to _Cambello_, were brought all the way in +the bilboes, for no cause. + +[Footnote 134: Quis tulerit Gracchos de seditione querentes? It was +Dutch policy to cry _rogue_ first.--_Purch._] + +I went ashore on the 3d November, when Captain Jordan called together +the merchants, and sent for the _orancay_ of Banda, whose letter he got +translated; the purport of which was, that, in regard to the ancient +friendship between them and the English, especially with Captain +Keeling, and provoked by the cruelty and injustice of the Hollanders, +their earnest desire was to trade only with the English for the spices +of Puloway, Puleron, and Nera, on condition that the English would +supply them with provisions, ordnance, and ammunition, and help them to +recover the castle of Nera, desiring that some person might be sent to +Banda, to confer with the orancays. To this we answered, That we could +not give them assistance to recover the castle of Nera, without orders +from England, and that at present we had no ordnance to spare; but would +willingly supply them with provisions, and every thing else in our +power, till we had farther orders from England, and would trade with +them for spices, for which purpose we proposed to send a ship, and a +person to confer with the _orancays_, and particularly to know how we +might have security, and whether they would grant us permission to build +a fort for that purpose. + +The 23d five Hollanders anchored in the outer road, four of which came +last from the Mauritius, having been nineteen months on the voyage from +Holland. At that island they found that General Butt had been cast away +with three ships, two being totally lost, the men and goods of the third +being saved. A fourth, which was in company, went home under jury-masts, +along with a pinnace that came there by chance. One of these ships that +was at the Mauritius came away before the rest, and they found her +driving up and down off the mouth of the straits, having lost 160 men, +and having only eight remaining. The 25th, by letters from Priaman, we +had notice of the death of Mr Ozewicke and Samuel Negus. + +§2. _Brief Observations by Mr Edward Dodsworth, who returned to England +in the Hope_. + +The 16th October, 1614, while in the bay of Surat, Mr Aldworth and Mr +Steel came on board, and next day Mr Aldworth was examined, according to +the company's commission and instructions,[135] concerning the behaviour +of Paul Canning to the king, and the king's conduct towards him. To +which he answered, That his behaviour was right, and the king's +entertainment of him satisfactory, till the Jesuits insinuated he was +only a merchant, and not sent immediately by the king of England. After +this he was neglected, and died since.[136] Also, that he thought it fit +that some one of our nation of good respect should remain at court, to +procure redress of any wrongs that might be offered; to which function +Mr Edwards was chosen to go to Agra, as the person most answerable to +the company's instructions, on which occasion some question was made, +whether it would be proper he should proceed in the character of a +merchant, according to the strict letter of the instructions, which Mr +Aldworth conceived would procure him disrespect with the king; and, +after some contest, some way was given to Mr Edwards in this affair, +lest they should disagree in their proceedings, especially as it had +been reported by some already, that he was a messenger from the king of +Britain. + +[Footnote 135: This commission had six questions, of which I only +insert what is fit for the public eye.--_Purch._] + +[Footnote 136: It has been said on a former occasion, that he died of +poison, given, as was thought, by the jesuits.--_Purch._] + +After much opposition to our desire of trade, there came a _firmaun_ +from the king on the 24th November, which, according to custom, the +nabob met in state two miles from the city, attended by 600 horse. Next +day we were kindly entertained, and the nabob gave Mr Edwards 850 +mahmoudies, thirty pieces of _topseels_, ten of fine calicoes, and other +things. The money being to bear the charges of carrying up the present +to the king, who was not willing we should incur any expence on that +account, and the stuffs as a gratification to those who carried them up. +To the merchants also he gave fifteen pieces of _topseels_, five to +each, with his _chop_ or licence for our departure, and promises of kind +usage, all this being done in presence of those who brought the +_firmaun_. The 30th, Mr Edwards and we set out for _Amadavar_ +[Ahmedabad.] + +The 2d of December we reached Broach, whence the governor sent a guard +of horse with us to _Demylode_, and there we had a new escort of horse +and foot to _Charmondo_;[137] whence we departed on the 7th with +twenty-five soldiers, all notorious thieves, as we afterwards found. +With these we went ten coss, when we pitched our tents in a plain, +barricading ourselves as usual with our carts. While at supper, we had +nearly been assaulted by fifty horse, who passed close by us, but they +found us well provided for our defence, and it appeared that the charge +we carried was well known in all the country through which we travelled. +The 8th we came to _Brodera_, [Brodrah] and made a present to the +governor, who received it very kindly, and particularly requested to see +our mastiff dog. Brodrah stands in a plain, which seemed fertile, and is +well watered, a thing rather uncommon in those parts. We departed thence +with an escort of 100 horse and foot, voluntarily offered from respect +for the king's present, yet were they a considerable charge to us. We +came next to Arras,[138] a town mostly inhabited by banians, and where +their superstition of not killing any thing occasioned us to have very +bad fare. On the 13th we came to Ahmedabad, whence we gave a commission +to Richard Steel and John Crowther to proceed on their journey to +Persia; and hence Mr Edwards departed from us for Agra. + +[Footnote 137: On this part of the indicated route, between Broach and +Brodrab, no stations are to be found in our best maps resembling these +two names, unless Simlode may have been corrupted into Demylode by +typographical error.--E.] + +[Footnote 138: No such name is now to be found in the road between +Brodrah and Ahmedabad, neither is it of much importance in any view, as +the route is so vaguely indicated in the text.--E.] + +All this time, the merchants at Ahmedabad, being in hopes of peace with +the Portuguese, held up the price of their indigos, on which we resolved +to proceed for _Sarques_ [Sarkess,] to make trial with the country +people who are the makers of that commodity. We did so on the 7th, and +found plenty of employment, packing in four days no less than 400 bales: +after which Mr Edwards returned to Ahmedabad, where he found the +merchants greatly more tractable. _Sarkess_ is a town of no great size, +three coss from Ahmedabad, its territory being considered the best soil +in all these parts for the production of indigo. All of the dealers in +this commodity are apt to put tricks upon us, by mingling or otherwise. +At Sarkess there are two of the most ancient monuments that are to be +found in all that country; one being the tomb of a saint or prophet who +was buried there, to which many pilgrims resort from great distances; +and the other is the sepulchres of their ancient kings. To the north of +the town, is the place where _Khan-Khana_ first put the Guzerates to +flight, who were the original inhabitants of the country, all the rest +of the kingdom being shortly after reduced under the subjection of +Akbar, father to the present Great Mogul. This field of victory is +strongly walled round with brick, about a mile and half in circuit, all +planted within with fruit-trees, and delightfully watered; having a +costly house called by a name signifying _Victory_; in which Khan-Khana +resided for some time, but he now resides at Burhanpoor. + +The 24th of December we had leave from the governor of Ahmedabad to +depart; but hearing that several persons had been robbed and murdered +that night close by the city, order was given for us to wait till a +sufficient guard could be provided for us. The 26th we departed, having +with us forty carts, loaded with indigo and other goods, and came on the +27th to _Mundeves_,[139] where the gates were shut upon us by order of +_Sarder Khan_. This put us in much doubt, and we procured a person to +speak with the governor, who told him of letters he had received from +Mucrob Khan, nabob of Surat, informing of the gallant action of our +general at Swally and the safety of Surat from the Portuguese, through +the bravery of the English. It was therefore agreed that we should not +depart without a sufficient guard, which was to be ready for us next +day. We did not however depart till the 29th; and, at Brodrah, the men +belonging to Sarder Khan procured more soldiers to assist them, as there +were several companies of rajputs lying in the way to intercept us, and +many robberies and murders were committed daily in that part of the +country. + +[Footnote 139: This name also is so corrupted as not to have any +resemblance in the modern geography of Hindoostan.--E.] + +On the 2d of February, while passing through a narrow lane inclosed on +both sides with hedges, we were assaulted by above 300 rajputs, where we +could not hurt them, as they did our caffila or caravan by their arrows +and shot. We therefore made all the haste we could to gain the plain, +while they in the mean time cut off two of our carriages. Having got to +the open ground we made a stand; but the rajputs betook themselves again +to their hedges, to look after their prey, lest one thief should rob +another. Many of our party were hurt on this occasion, among which was +Humphrey Elkington. Next day we got to Baroach, and on the 5th to Surat, +where we returned thanks to Macrob Khan for the care he had taken of our +safety. + +Hearing of an assault to be made next day on our ships by the +Portuguese, we got his leave to go down to Swally and went aboard, but +the Portuguese deceived our expectation. On occasion of the last attempt +of the Portuguese to set our ships on fire, by means of four fire-boats +chained together, four of them were taken in smaller boats, which +captives confessed that this was the last attempt of the viceroy for +this year, as he was now under the necessity of returning to Goa, for +want of water and provisions. One of these captives, taken in Swally +roads, and carried aboard the New-year's Gilt, emitted the following +declaration:-- + + +_Examination of Domingo Francisco, on the 20th of February_, 1615. + +"He saith, that he was born in Lisbon, being the son of a mariner, and +served under Nunna d'Acunha in the seafight against Captain Best, in +one of the four galleons. He afterwards went to Macao on the coast of +China, and returned thence to Goa; where, after remaining ten months, he +was ordered on board a galleon called the St Antonio, in this expedition +for the road of Swally, where he was made prisoner on the 8th of this +month. The purpose of the viceroy, _Don Jeronimo de Savedo_, in this +expedition, as the examinant says, was to destroy the English at Surat. +The viceroy's ship was called the All-saints, of 800 tons, with 300 men, +and twenty-eight cannon. Michael de Souza was captain on the St Bennet +of 700 tons, 150 men, and twenty guns. John Cayatho of the St Lawrence, +of 600 tons, 160 men, and 18 guns. Francisco Henriques of the St +Christopher, of 600 tons, 155 men, and 18 guns. Francisco de Mirande of +the St Jeronymo, of 500 tons, 180 men, and 16 guns. Gaspar de Meall of +the St Antonio, of 400 tons, 140 men, and 14 guns. These were the +galleons: The ships were, the St Peter of 200 tons Captain Francisco +Cavaco, 150 men and eight guns; the St Paul of 200 tons, Captain Don +Juan de Mascarenha, 150 men and eight guns; a pinnace of 120 tons, +Captain Andrea de Quellio, eighty men and four guns. Lewis de Bruto was +captain of one galley, and Diego de Suro of the other, each having fifty +men. There were sixty barks or frigates, each having twenty soldiers, +and rowing eighteen oars of a side. The reinforcement which joined +afterwards, consisted of two ships of 200 tons each, two India junks, +and eight small boats, which were employed to endeavour to set us on +fire. In the viceroy's ship, the ordnance were all of brass, those in +the other galleons being half brass and half iron:" Against all which +the Almighty protected us, blessed be his name for ever. + +On the 11th March, 1615, we parted from the general, he and the other +two ships being bound for Acheen and Bantam, and we in the Hope for +England. On the 12th we passed by the north end of the Maldives, where +we found many shoals and islands most falsely laid down in the charts, +as if purposely to render the navigation of these seas more dangerous. +We arrived on the 17th of June in Saldanha bay, where we found a fleet +of four English ships bound for Surat, under the command of Captain +Keeling; which fleet, after consultation held with us, and receiving +intelligence of the state of affairs there, departed on its voyage. On +the 20th I met with _Crosse_ and his company, left there for +discovery,[140] and entreated some of them to acquaint _Coree_ with my +arrival. These were set upon by the savages and wounded, wherefore I +delivered four muskets to Crosse at his earnest request; after which he +procured Coree to come down with his whole family, and we afterwards got +some cattle. He told me that there was discord among the savages, +through which the mountaineers had come down and robbed them. We +departed on the 26th June, leaving our longboat with Crosse, together +with powder, shot, and provisions. + +[Footnote 140: Of Crosse and his company of condemned persons, set on +shore at the Cape of Good Hope, see afterwards in Peyton's +voyage.--_Purch._] + +In the latitude of 29° N. we fell in with a Dutch ship from the +Mauritius, having gone there to cut timber, which seemed a bastard +ebony. Contrary to their expectation, they found there the lamentable +wreck of four ships come from Bantam and the Moluccas, which had gone to +pieces on the rocks. The goods and men of two of these were totally +lost, most of the goods of the third were saved, with part of which this +ship was laden. The fourth was driven out to sea in a storm, and +returned under jury-masts. The master of this ship promised to keep us +company, but finding us a hindrance, he left us after ten days, without +so much as a farewell or offering to carry a letter, which I imputed to +their inbred boorish disposition. Ill weather followed, and we were much +weakened; yet, I thank God, we lost none till my arrival in Ireland off +the river of Limerick on the 27th October, 1615; where also we had to +endure a storm, till we hired a Scottish bark, detained by contrary +winds, to pilot us into harbour. There also, a remainder of Captain M. +his ungodly crew, who had lately obtained their pardon, put me in great +fear; till Sir Henry Foliat secured us by a supply of men, and I sent +off letters for London. + + +SECTION III. + +_Journey of Richard Steel and John Crowther, from Ajmeer in India, to +Ispahan in Persia, in the Years_ 1615 _and_ 1616.[141] + +Having been detained at Agimere[142] from February, Mr Edwards received +a letter on the 17th March, 1615, from the Great Mogul, of which he +delivered a copy, together with his other letters, to Richard Steel, +promising to procure the king's firmaun for our safety and furtherance, +and to send it after us to Agra, where he directed us to wait for its +reception. We went that night two coss to _Mandill_.[143]We had four +servants, two horses, and a camel. The 18th we went twelve coss to +_Bander Sandree_, [Bunder-Sanory,] a small _aldea_.[144] The 19th, ten +coss to _Mosobade_, [Morabad.] The 20th to _Pipelo_, [Peped,] thirteen +coss. The 21st to a town called _Chadfoole_, [Gohd?] seven coss. The 22d +to _Lalscotte_, thirteen coss. The 23d to _Mogolserai_, twelve coss. The +24th to _Hindone_, fourteen coss. the 25th to _Bramobad_, twelve coss. +The 26th to _Futtipoor_, twelve coss. This has been a fair city, which +was built by Akbar, and contains a goodly palace belonging to the king. +It is walled round in a handsome manner, and has many spacious gardens +and sumptuous pleasure houses; but is now falling to ruin, and ranch +ground within the walls is now sown with corn, the king having carried +off much of the best stone to his new city of Agra. The 27th we went +twelve coss to Agra. In the English house there, we found one Richard +Barber, an apothecary, who came over with Sir Robert Shirley, and had +been sent here by Mr Kerridge to take care of Nicholas Whithington. + +[Footnote 141: Purch. Pilgr. I. 519.--In the title of this article in +the Pilgrims, Agimere, or Azmere, as it is there called, is said to have +been the residence of the Great Mogul at the commencement of this +journey, and Spahan, or Ispahan, the royal seat of the kings of +Persia.--E.] + +[Footnote 142: This place, named Azmeer in the Pilgrims, is known in +modern geography under the name of Ajmeer, or Agimere.--E.] + +[Footnote 143: A coss, or course, as it is uniformly denominated in the +Pilgrims, is stated on the margin by Purchas, to be equal to a mile and +a half, and in some places two English miles. As more precisely +determined in modern geography, the Hindoostanee coss is equal to 1 +4/7th English miles, and the Rajput coss to 2 1/6th miles nearly. It +would overload this article to attempt critically following all the +stations in the present journal, in which the names of places are often +so corrupt as to be unintelligible. Such corrections of the text as can +be ventured upon are included within brackets.--E.] + +[Footnote 144: This is a Spanish or Portuguese term, signifying country +village.--E.] + +Within two days journey of Agra, we passed by the country and city of +Biana, where the finest indigo is made, the best being then worth +thirty-six rupees the maund at Agra, but much cheaper in the country. +Finding the promised firmaun came not, and the hot season of the year +fast approaching, we departed on the 3d April in the prosecution of our +journey, leaving directions with Richard Barber to send it after us. We +came that night to a serai called Boutta, six coss. The 4th to the town +of _Matra_, fourteen coss, where we lay in a fair _serai_,[145] and +there we received the firmaun. The 5th we went twelve coss to a serai +called _Chatta_, [Chautra.] The 6th to a serai built by Azam Khan, nine +coss. The 7th to a serai built by Sheic Ferreede, called _Puhlwall_, +eleven coss. The 8th to a serai built by the same person, ten coss. The +9th to _Dillee_, [Delhi,] nine coss. This being a great and ancient +city, formerly the seat of the kings, where many of them are interred. +At this time, many of the great men have their gardens and pleasure +houses here, and are here buried, so that it is beautified with many +fine buildings. The inhabitants, who are mostly Banians or Hindoos, are +poor and beggarly, through the long absence of the court. + +[Footnote 145: These are fair buildings for the accommodation of +travellers, many of which were erected by great men._Purch._] + +The 10th we went ten coss from Delhi to _Bunira_. The 11th to +_Cullvower_, twelve coss. The 12th to _Pampette_, [Paniput,] twelve +coss. This is a small handsome city, where they manufacture various +sorts of girdles and sashes, and great quantities of cotton-cloth, and +have abundance of handicrafts. The 13th to _Carnanl_, twelve coss. The +14th to _Tanisera_, [Tahnessir,] fourteen coss. The 15th to _Shavade_, +[Shahabad,] ten coss. The 16th to _Mogol-Sera_, or _Gaugur_, fifteen +coss. The 17th to _Sinan_,[146] fourteen coss, which is an ancient city, +where they manufacture great store of cottons. The 18th to _Duratia_, +fifteen coss. The 19th to _Pullower_, [Bullolepoor,] eleven coss. We +this day passed in a boat over a great river called Sietmege[147] which +is very broad, but full of shoals, and runs westward to join the Sinde, +or Indus. The 20th we came to a small town called _Nicodar_, eleven +coss. The 21st to _Sultanpoor_, an old town having a river which comes +from the north, over which is a bridge of six arches. At this place +great store of cotton goods are made. Four coss beyond this place we +passed another small river. The 22d to _Chiurmul_,[148] eleven coss. We +were this day boated across a river as broad as the Thames at Gravesend, +called _Vian_, which runs westwards to join the Sinde. On its banks +Allom Khan, ambassador from the Great Mogul to the king of Persia, had +pitched his camp, which looked like a little city. The 23d we went to +_Khan Khanum Serai_, seventeen coss, and the 24th we reached Lahore, +seven coss. + +[Footnote 146: This is probably Sirhind, which is directly in the route, +but so disguised in the text as to defy emendation.--E.] + +[Footnote 147: This is clearly the Sutuluge, or Setlege, called likewise +the Beyah-Kussoor, and Chato dehr, being the easternmost of the Punjab +or five rivers, which form the Indus. It was called Hesudrus by the +ancients.--E.] + +[Footnote 148: From the river mentioned in the text as passed, on this +day's journey, this may have been what is now called Gundwall, a little +beyond the river Beyab, which is here 100 yards broad.--E.] + +All the country between Agra and Lahore is exceedingly well cultivated, +being the best of India, and abounds in all things. It yields great +store of powdered sugar, [raw sugar] the best being worth two 1/2 to two +3/4 rupees the great _maund_ of forty pounds. The whole road is planted +on both sides with trees, most of which bear a species of mulberry. In +the night, this road is dangerously infested with thieves, but is quite +secure in the day. Every five or six coss, there are serais, built by +the king or some great man, which add greatly to the beauty of the road, +are very convenient for the accommodation of travellers, and serve to +perpetuate the memory of their founders. In these the traveller may have +a chamber for his own use, a place in which to tie up his horse, and can +be furnished with provender; but in many of them very little +accommodation can be had, by reason of the banians, as when once any +person has taken up his lodging, no other may dispossess him. At +day-break the gates of these serais are opened, and then all the +travellers prepare to depart; but no person is allowed to go away +sooner, for fear of robbers. This made the journey very oppressive to +us, as within two hours after the sun rose we were hardly able to endure +the heat. + +Lahore is a great and goodly city, being one of the fairest and +ancientest in India. It stands on the river Indus or Sinde;[149] and +from this place came the most valuable of the Portuguese trade when they +were at peace with the Moguls, as it formed the centre of all their +traffic in Hindoostan. They here embarked their goods, which were +carried down the river to Tatta, and were thence transported by sea to +Ormus and Persia; and such native merchants as chose to go that way +between India and Persia, paid them freight. They had also a great trade +up this river, in pepper and other spices, with which they furnished +that part of India. At this time, the merchants of India assemble at +Lahore, where they invest a great part of their money in commodities, +and, joining in caravans, they pass over the mountains of Candahar into +Persia; by which way it is computed there now pass yearly twelve or +fourteen thousand camel loads, whereas formerly there did not go in this +way above three thousand, all the rest going by way of Ormus. These +merchants are put to great expences between Lahore and Ispaban, besides +being exposed to great cold in winter and fervent heat in summer, and to +bad and dangerous roads, usually spending six or seven months in the +journey, and they estimate the charges of each camel's load at 120 or +130 rupees. In this way Persia is furnished with spiceries, which are +brought all the way from Masulipatam by land. We remained in Lahore from +the 24th of April to the 13th of May, refreshing both ourselves and our +horses, and providing servants and necessaries for the journey. We also +procured here recommendatory letters from an ambassador to the king of +Persia. + +[Footnote 149: Lahore is upon the Ravey, the second of the five rivers +forming the Indus, counting from the east, and was the Hydroates of the +ancients. The Indus proper, or Nilab, is considerably farther west.--E.] + +We left Lahore on the 13th May, proposing to overtake a caravan which +set out two months before, and went that day eleven c. to a small town +named _Chacksunder_. The 14th to _Non-serai_, fifteen c. The 15th to +_Mutteray_, eight c. The 16th to _Quemal khan_, nineteen c. The 17th to +_Herpae_, sixteen c. The 18th to _Alicasaca_, twelve c. The 19th +_Trumba_, twelve c. and this day we overtook a small caravan that left +Lahore eight days before us. The 20th to _Sedousehall_, fourteen c. The +21st to _Callixechebaut_, fifteen c. The 22d to _Multan_,[150] twelve c. +This is a great and ancient city, having the river Indus at the distance +of three coss. All caravans must remain here ten or twelve days, before +leave can be procured from the governor to proceed, on purpose that the +city may benefit by their stay. It yields white plain cotton cloth and +diaper. We remained five days, and were then glad to get leave to +depart, by means of a present. + +[Footnote 150: In the whole of this itinerary, from Lahore to Multan or +Mooltan, down the Ravey river, not a single name in the text, except the +two extremities, bears the smallest resemblance to any of those in +modern geography.--E.] + +We passed the river on the 28th, and went twenty c. to a small village +named _Pettoallee_. The 29th we passed another great river by a boat, +and came that same night to a small river called _Lacca_, where we +found the caravan we wished to overtake.[151] We presented the caravan +_basha_ with a mirror and knife, when he directed us to pitch our tent +near his own, that we might be more immediately under his protection. +This caravan had been here ten days, and remained till the 2d of June, +waiting for an escort of cavalry to convoy them to _Chatcza_,[152] a +small fort in the mountains, having received information that a former +caravan had been injured by the mountaineers. The 2d June we resumed our +journey, and travelled twelve c. entering into the mountains, where we +were much distressed for want of fresh water, what water we met with +being brackish. The 3d and 4th we travelled all night, climbing high +mountains, and following water-courses with various turnings and +windings, insomuch that in travelling twelve coss our direct course did +not exceed six c. The 5th we again followed the bed of a water-course or +river, full of large pebbles, travelling eight c. The 6th we rested. The +7th we went four c. still along the water-course, the 8th eight c. the +9th twelve c. and the 10th three c. when we came to _Chatcza_, [Chatzan] +a small fort with mud walls, inclosed with a ditch, where the Mogul +keeps a garrison of eighty or 100 horse, to scour the road from thieves, +yet these are as great thieves as any, where they find an opportunity. +The captain of this castle exacted two _abacees_ for each camel in the +caravan, though nothing was legally due, as he and his troops have their +pay from the king. In the whole of our way, from the river Lacca to +Chatzan, we found no sustenance for man or beast, except in some places +a little grass, so that we had to make provision at Lacca, hiring a +bullock to carry barley for our horses. The _Agwans_ or _Afgans_, as the +people of the mountains are called, came down to us every day at our +resting place, rather to look out what they might steal, than to buy as +they pretended. + +[Footnote 151: The great river passed on the 29th must have been the +Sinde, Indus, or Nilab, and from the circumstance of falling in next day +with the _Lacca_ or Lucca, Pettoallee in the text may possibly be what +is named _Joghiwallah_, on the east side of the Indus, almost opposite +the mouth of the Lacca.--E.] + +[Footnote 152: Chatzan, a town or fortress in Sewee, or the country of +the Balloges; to the west of a ridge of rocky mountains, described as +consisting of hard black stone, which skirt the western side of the vale +of the Indus, and on the north join the mountains of Wulli in Candahar. +Chatzan is in lat. 31° 3' N. and long 69° 42' W. from Greenwich--E.] + +Having made provision for three days at Chatzan, we went thence on the +12th June, and travelled fourteen c. The 13th ten c. The 14th ten c. +This day the mountaineers brought down to us sheep, goats, meal, butter, +and barley, in abundance, sufficient both for us and our cattle, all of +which they sold at reasonable prices; and from this time forwards, they +did the same every day, sometimes also bringing felts and striped +carpets for sale. The 15th we went six c. the 16th four c. the 17th ten +c. the 18th nine c. the 19th nine c. when we came to a small town of the +Afgans called _Duckee_, [Dooky], where the Mogul keeps a garrison in a +small square mud fort, the walls of which are of a good height. This +fort is a mile from the town. We stopt here three days, as the caravan +could not agree with the captain of the fort, who demanded a duty on +every camel, and at last an _abacee_ and a half was paid for each camel. +The 23d we went six c. the 24th we passed a place called _Secotah_, or +the three castles, because of three villages standing near each other on +the side of a hill, forming a triangle. We this day went eight c. The +25th we rested, on account of bad weather. The 26th we went ten c. The +27th fourteen c. This day we passed through the _durues_ or gates of the +mountains, being narrow straits, with very high rocks on both sides, +whence with stones a few men might stop the passage of a multitude, and +where many caravans have been accordingly cut off. We this night, where +we lodged, suffered much insolence from the Afgans; and next day, as we +passed a small village called _Coasta_, they exacted from us two 1/2 +_abacees_ for each camel. The 28th we went five c. the 29th, passing a +village called _Abdun_, eight c. the 30th six c. The 1st. July in seven +c. we came to a place called _Pesinga_ [Pusheng or Kooshinge], where +there is a small fort like that at _Dooky_ in which is a garrison for +securing the way. At this place the captain exacted half an _abacee_ for +each camel. The 3d we left the caravan and went forwards six c. The 4th +we passed over a mighty mountain, and descended into the plains beyond, +having travelled that day fourteen c. The 5th we went twenty c. and were +much distressed to get grain for our cattle. The 6th, in like distress +both for them and ourselves, we went twelve c. and on the 7th, after +eight c. we got to the city of Candahar. + +These mountains of Candahar are inhabited by a fierce people, called +_Agwans_ or _Potans_, [Afgans or Patans] who are very strong of body, +somewhat fairer than the natives of Hindoostan, and are much addicted to +robbery, insomuch, that they often cut off whole caravans. At present +they have become more civil, partly from fear of the Mogul, and partly +from experiencing the advantages of trade, by selling their grain, +sheep, and goats, of which they have great store, and by purchasing +coarse cotton goods and other necessaries. Still, however, if they find +any one straggling or lagging behind, they are very apt to make them +slaves, selling them into the mountains, and houghing them to prevent +their running away, after which they are set to grind grain in +handmills, or to other servile employments. The chief city, called +likewise Candahar, is very ancient, and was in old times inhabited by +Banians. At this place the governor of the whole country resides, who +has a garrison of twelve or fifteen thousand horse, maintained there by +the Great Mogul, in regard of the neighbourhood of the Persians towards +the north. To the west, the city is environed by steep and craggy rocks, +and to the south and east by a strong wall. In consequence of the +frequent passage of caravans, it has been considerably increased of +late, so that the suburbs are larger than the city. Within the last two +years, in consequence of the Persian trade by way of Ormus being +stopped, through war with the Portuguese, all the caravans between +Persia and India must necessarily pass through this place; and here they +hire camels to go into India, and at their return for Persia have to do +the same. They cannot return without leave of the governor, who causes +them to stop a month here, or at the least fifteen or twenty days; owing +to which, it is inhabited by many lewd people, as all such places of +resort commonly are. + +Victuals for man and beast are to be had in great abundance at Candahar, +yet are very dear owing to the great concourse of trade, occasioned by +the meeting at this place of many merchants of India, Persia, and +Turkey, who often conclude their exchanges of commodities here. At this +place the caravans going for India usually unite together, for greater +strength and security in passing through the mountains of Candahar; and +those that come here from India generally break into smaller companies, +because in many parts of the route through Persia, a greater number +would not find provisions, as all Persia, from hence to Ispahan, is +extremely barren, so that sometimes not a green thing is to be seen in +two or three days travel; and even water is scarce, and that which is to +be got is often brackish, or stinking and abominable. We remained at +this city for fourteen days, partly to procure company for our farther +journey, and partly for refreshment after the fatigues and heats of our +late journey, especially on account of John Crowther, who was so weak +that he at one time doubted being able to proceed any farther. + +We joined ourselves to three Armenians and a dozen Persian merchants, +along with whom we left the city of Candahar on the 23d July, and went +ten c. to a village called _Seriabe_.[153] The 24th we came in twelve c. +to _Deabage_, a small _dea_ or village. The 25th in eight c. to +_Cashecunna,_ a small castle in which the Mogul has a garrison, being +the utmost boundary of his dominions westwards, and confining with +Persia. The 26th we travelled seventeen c. and lodged in the open fields +by the side of a river. The 27th, after four c. we came to a castle +called _Greece_, the first belonging to the king of Persia. Here we +delivered to the governor the letter we had got from the Persian +ambassador at Lahore, and presented him a mirror and three knives. He +would take nothing for our camels, while the others had to pay five +_abacees_ for each camel. He promised to give us a safe conduct under an +escort of horse to the next governor, but we saw none; neither were we +sorry for the omission, for he was little better than a rebel, and all +his people were thieves. + +[Footnote 153: We here lose the almost infallible guide of Arrowsmith's +excellent map of Hindoostan, and are reduced to much inferior helps in +following the route through Persia.--E.] + +The 28th we departed at night, going two _parasangs_, and lodged at a +_dea_ or village called _Malgee_. A _farcing_ or parasang is equal to +two Indian cosses and a half.[154] The 29th we went ten p. and lodged in +the open fields, where we could get nothing but water. The 30th we went +five p. to a small castle named _Gazikhan_. The 31st other five p. to an +old ruined fort, where we could get nothing but water, and that was +stinking. The 1st August we proceeded other five p. to an old fort +called _Dilaram_, where we paid an _abacee_ and a half for each camel. +We staid here one day to rest our cattle, which was termed making +_mochoane_; and on the 3d we went seven p. to an old castle called +_Bacon_. The 4th four p. and lodged in the open fields, where we found +nothing but water. The 5th four p. and the 6th five p. to _Farra_.[155] + +[Footnote 154: In a side-note, Purchas says a parasang consists of sixty +furlongs. This is a most egregious error, as the parasang or farsang is +exactly equal to 2.78 English miles, or twenty-two two-5ths +furlongs.--E.] + +[Footnote 155: Farra, the capital of a district of the same name in the +north of Segistan, is in lat 33° 40' N. long. 62° 40' E.--E.] + +_Farra_ is a small town, surrounded by a high wall of bricks dried in +the sun, as are all the castles and most of the buildings in this +country, and is of a square form, about a mile in circuit. It has a +handsome bazar or market-place, vaulted over head to keep out the rain, +and in which all kinds of necessaries and commodities are sold. It is +situated in a fertile soil, having plenty of water, without which +nothing can be raised in this country; and it is wonderful to see with +what labour and ingenious industry they bring water to every spot of +good ground, which is but seldom to be found here, often carrying it +three or four miles in trenches under ground. At this town, all +merchants going into Persia must remain for seven, eight, or ten days; +and here the king's treasurer sees all their packs weighed, estimating +the value of their commodities at so much the maund, as he thinks fit, +and exacts a duty of three per cent. ad valorem on that estimate. On +their way into Persia, merchants are used with much favour, lest they +should make complaints to the king, who will have merchants kindly +treated; but on their return into India, they are treated with extreme +rigour, being searched to the very skin for money, as it is death to +transport any gold or silver coin from Persia, except that of the +reigning king. They likewise look narrowly for horses and slaves, +neither of which are allowed to be taken out of the country. + +We remained here two days waiting for certain Armenians, with whom we +travelled the rest of the journey, leaving our former companions. The +9th of August we went only one parasang to a river. The 10th we +travelled seven p. and lodged in the open fields. The 11th, four p. to a +small village, where we had plenty of provisions. The 12th, four p. +where we had to dig for water. The 13th, eight p. and the 14th five p. +to a village named _Draw,_ [Durra,] where we remained a day, as it is +the custom of those who travel with camels to rest once in four or five +days. The 16th, we advanced three p. The 17th, four p. The 18th, five p. +to _Zaide-basha,_ [Sarbishe,] where abundance of carpets are to be had. +The 19th we came to a village named _Mude,_ [Moti,] where also are +carpets. The 20th, five p. to _Birchen,_ [Berdjan,] where are +manufactured great quantities of fine felts, and carpets of camels hair, +which are sold at the rates of from two to five abacees the _maund._ At +this place we rested a day. The 22d, we went to _Dea-zaide,_ [Descaden,] +where all the inhabitants pretend to be very religious, and sell their +carpets, of which they have great abundance, at a cheap rate. The 23d, +three p. The 24th, five p. to _Choore,_ [Cors or Corra,] an old ruined +town. The 25th, three p. The 26th, seven p. when we had brackish +stinking water. The 27th we came to _Dehuge,_ [Teuke,] where is a +considerable stream of hot water, which becomes cool and pleasant after +standing some time in any vessel. The 28th we went seven p. to +_Dea-curma._ + +The 29th we went five p. to _Tobaz,_[156] where we had to pay half an +abacee for each camel. At this plce all caravans take four or five days +rest, the better to enable them to pass the adjoining salt desert, which +extends four long days journey, and in which many miscarry. We found +here a small caravan of an hundred camels, which set off the next day +after our arrival. Here, and in the former village, there is great store +of dates; and 3000 maunds of the finest silk in Persia are made here +yearly, and is carried to _Yades_, [Yezd,] a fair city, where likewise +they make much raw silk, and where it is manufactured into taffaties, +satins, and damasks. The king does not allow the exportation of raw +silk, especially into Turkey; but the Portuguese used to carry it to +Portugal. _Yades_, [Yezd,] is about twelve days journey from Ispahan, +and is twelve p. out of the way from the Indian route to the capital. + +[Footnote 156: Tabaskili, or Tobas Kileke, in Cohestan, is probably the +place here meant, in which case the route appears to have passed from +Farra by the south of the inland sea or lake of Darrah, but which is not +noticed by our travellers. Our conjectural amendments of the names of +places on the route are placed within brackets.--E.] + +The 30th of August we advanced nine p. into the desert, and lay on the +ground, having to send our beasts three miles out of the way for water, +which was very salt. The 31st, after travelling ten p. we came to water +which was not at all brackish. The 1st September we went five p. and had +to send two miles for water. The 2d we went nine p. to a small castle, +where we procured a small quantity of provisions. The 3d, five p. and +lay in the fields, having to send far for water. The 4th, ten p. to +_Seagan_. The 5th, four p. The 6th, ten p. to a castle called _Irabad_, +[Hirabad,] where we paid half an _abacee_ for each camel. The 7th, six +p. The 8th, eight p. to _Ardecan_, where we rested till the 10th, when +we went four p. to _Sellef_. The 11th, three p. to a small castle named +_Agea Gaurume_. The 12th, nine p. to a spring in the fields. The 13th, +three p. to _Beavas_. The 14th, four p. to _Goolabad_, whence Richard +Steel rode on to Ispahan, without waiting for the caravan. The 15th we +came to _Morea Shahabad_, five p. The 16th, to _Coopa_, five p. The +17th, to _Dea Sabs_, five p. The 18th, four p. and lay in the fields. +And on the 19th, after three p. we came to _Ispahan_. + +Richard Steel reached this city on the 15th, at noon, and found Sir +Robert Shirley already provided with his dispatches from the king of +Persia as ambassador to the king of Spain. Sir Robert, attended by his +lady, a bare-footed friar as his chaplain, together with fifty-five +Portuguese prisoners, and his own followers, were preparing in all haste +to go to Ormus, and to embark thence for Lisbon. The purpose is, that +seeing the Portuguese not able to stand, the Spaniards may be brought +in.[157] Six friars remain as hostages for his safe return to Ispahan, +as otherwise the king has vowed to cut them all in pieces, which he is +likely enough to do, having put his own son to death, and committed a +thousand other severities. + +[Footnote 157: The meaning of this passage is quite obscure in the +Pilgrims, and the editor does not presume upon clearing the +obscurity.--E.] + +On his arrival at Ispahan, Richard Steel delivered his letters to Sir +Robert,[158] who durst hardly read them, except now and then, as by +stealth, fearing lest the Portuguese should know of them. He afterwards +said it was now too late to engage in the business of our nation, and +seemed much dissatisfied with the company, and with the merchants and +mariners who brought him out. But at length he said he was a +true-hearted Englishman, and promised to effect our desires. On the +19th, the friars being absent, he carried both of us to the master of +the ceremonies, or _Maimondare,_ and took us along with him to the Grand +Vizier, _Sarek Hogea_, who immediately called his scribes or +secretaries, and made draughts of what we desired: namely, three +_firmauns_, one of which John Crowther has to carry to Surat, one for +Richard Steel to carry to England, and the third to be sent to the +governor of _Jasques_, all sealed with the great seal of the king. The +same day that these firmauns were procured, being the last of September, +Sir Robert Shirley set out for Shiras in great pomp, and very honourably +attended. + +[Footnote 158: Of the landing of Sir Robert Shirley, see Peyton's first +voyage before; and of the rest of his journey see the second voyage of +Peyton, in the sequel.--_Purch._] + +_Copy of the Firmaun granted by the King of Persia._ + +"Firmaun or command given unto all our subjects, from the highest to the +lowest, and directed to the _Souf-basha_, or constable of our country, +kindly to receive and entertain the _English Franks_[159] or nation, +when any of their ships may arrive at Jasques, or any other of the +ports in our kingdom, to conduct them and their merchandize to what +place or places they may desire, and to see them safely defended upon +our coasts from any other Franks whomsoever. This I will and command you +to do, as you shall answer in the contrary. Given at our royal city, +this 12th of _Ramassan_, in the year of our _Tareag_, 1024. [October, +1615.]" + +The chief commodities of Persia are raw silks, of which it yields, +according to the king's books, 7700 _batmans_ yearly. Rhubarb grows in +Chorassan, where also worm-seed grows. + +[Footnote 159: Frank is a name given in the East to all western +Christians, ever since the expedition to the Holy Land, because the +French were the chief nation on that occasion, and because the French +council at Clermont was the cause of that event.--Purch.] + +Carpets of all sorts, some of silk and gold, silk and silver, half silk, +half cotton, &c. The silver monies of Persia are the _abacee, mahamoody, +shakee_, and _biftee_, the rest being of copper, like the _tangas_ and +_pisos_ of India. The _abacee_ weighs two _meticals_, the _mahmoody_ is +half an abacee, and the _shahee_ is half a _mahamoody_. In the dollar or +rial of eight there are thirteen shahees.[160] In a shahee there are two +_biftees_ and a half, or ten cashbegs, one _biftee_ being four +_cashbegs_, or two _tangs_. The weights differ in different places; two +_mahans_ of Tauris being only one of Ispahan, and so of the _batman_. +The measure of length, for silks and other stuffs, is the same with the +pike of Aleppo, which we judge to be twenty-seven English inches. + +[Footnote 160: Assuming the Spanish dollar at 4s. 6d. sterling, the +shahee ought therefore to be worth about 4d. 1-6, the mahamoody,8d. 1-3, +and the abecee, 1s. 4d. 2-3.--E.] + +John Crowther returned into India, and Richard Steel went to England by +way of Turkey, by the following route. Leaving Ispahan on the 2d +December, 1615, he went five p. to a serail. The 3d, eight p. to another +serail. The 4th, six p. to a village. The 5th, seven p. to _Dreag_. The +6th, seven p. to a serail. The 7th, eight p. to _Golpigan_, +[Chulpaigan.] The 8th, seven p. to _Curouan_. The 9th, seven p. to +_Showgot_. The 10th, six p. to _Saro_, [Sari.] The 11th, eight p. to +_Dissabad_. The 12th, twelve p. to a fair town called _Tossarkhan_, +where he rested some days, because the country was covered deep with +snow. The 15th, six p. to _Kindaner_. The 16th, eight p. to _Sano_. The +17th to _Shar nuovo_, where I was stopped by the _daiga_; but on shewing +him letters from the vizier, he bade me depart in the name of God and of +Ali. The 18th we passed a bridge where all travellers have to give an +account of themselves, and to pay a tax of two _shakees_ for each camel. +The 19th we came to _Kassam-Khan_, the last place under the Persian +government, and made a present to the governor, that he might give me a +guard to protect me from the Turkomans, which he not only did, but gave +me a licence to procure provisions free at his villages without payment, +which yet I did not avail myself of. + +The 21st of December I began to pass over a range of high mountains +which separate the two empires of Persia and Turkey, which are very +dangerous; and, on the 22d, at the end of eight p. I arrived at a +village. The 23d, after travelling seven p. I lay under a rock. The 24th +I came to _Mando_, eight p. a town belonging to the Turks. The 25th, +eight p. to _Emomester_. The 26th, eight p. to _Boroh_, passed over a +river in a boat, and came that night to Bagdat. I was here strictly +examined and searched for letters, which I hid under my saddle; but +observing one trying there also, I gave him a sign, on which he +desisted, and followed me to my lodging for his expected reward. I fared +better than an old Spaniard, only a fortnight before, who was imprisoned +in chains in the castle, and his letters read by a Maltese renegado. I +found here a Portuguese, who had arrived from Ormus only two days before +me. The pacha made us wait here twenty days for a sabandar of his. + +The 16th of January, 1616, we passed the river Tigris, and lay on the +skirt of the desert. The 17th we travelled five _agatzas_, being leagues +or parasangs. The 18th we came to the Euphrates at _Tulquy_, where +merchandize disembarked for Bagdat, after paying a duty of five per +cent. passes to the Tigris, and thence to the Persian gulf. After a +tedious journey, partly by the river Euphrates, and partly through the +desert, and then by sea, we arrived at Marseilles, in France, on the +15th April, and on the 10th May at Dover. + + +SECTION IV. + +_Voyage of Captain Walter Peyton to India, in 1615._[161] + +This voyage seems to have been under the command of Captain Newport, who +sailed as general in the Lion; but is called, in the Pilgrims, The +_Second_ Voyage of Captain Peyton to the East Indies, because the former +voyage of Newport was written by Peyton, who, though he occasionally +mentions the general, never once names him. In this voyage Peyton sailed +in the Expedition; the fleet consisting of three other ships, the +Dragon, Lion, and Pepper-corn. The journal appears to have been +abbreviated by Purchas, as he tells us it was _gathered out of his +larger journal_. This voyage is chiefly remarkable as introductory to +the embassy of Sir Thomas Roe to India, contained in the subsequent +section, as Sir Thomas and his suite embarked in this fleet. Instead of +giving the remarks of Sir Thomas Roe in his own journal, so far as they +apply to the voyage between England and Surat, these have been added in +the text of the present voyage, distinguishing those observations by +T.R. the initials of his name, and placing them all in separate +paragraphs. + +[Footnote 161: Purch. Pilgr. I. 528.] + +We learn by a subsequent article in the Pilgrims, I. 603, That Captain +William Keeling was general, or chief commander of this fleet, and +sailed in the Dragon, Robert Bonner master. The other two ships were the +Pepper-corn, Captain Christopher Harris, and the Expedition, Captain +William Peyton.--E. + +§1. _Occurrences during the Voyage from England to Surat_. + +We sailed from Gravesend on the 24th January, 1615, and on the 2d +February Sir Thomas Roe, ambassador from his majesty to the Great Mogul, +repaired on board the Lion, with fifteen attendants. At the same time, +Mr Humphry Boughton embarked in the Pepper-corn, being recommended by +the king to the company for a passage to India. We carried out in the +fleet eleven Japanese, who were brought to England in the Clove, divided +proportionally among the ships; likewise fourteen Guzerates, brought +home in the Dragon, together with nineteen condemned persons from +Newgate, to be left for the discovery of unknown places, the company +having obtained their pardons from the king for this purpose. On the +20th, some of the Dragon's men, among whom were the _Newgate birds_, +attempted to run away with the pinnace, but were prevented: Yet next +night one of these condemned men, and two of the crew of the +Pepper-corn, carried away her pinnace. Two of my men conspired to carry +away my boat that same night, but were discovered. + +The 23d February we set sail from the Downs, and on the 6th March we +lost sight of the Lizard. The 26th we saw land, supposed to be the +western part of Fuerteventura, but it proved to be part of Barbary. One +of the points of land at the mouth of the river _Marhequena_, we found +to be laid down wrong, a whole degree more northerly than it ought to +be; as likewise cape Bajadore is misplaced a whole degree, which we +found by experience, escaping great danger caused by that error in our +charts. The 26th of April we got into the trade wind; and on the 10th +May, being by estimation 620 leagues west of the Cape of Good Hope, we +saw many _pintadoes, mangareludas_, and other fowls. + +The 5th June we came to anchor in Saldanha bay, having only buried three +or four men since leaving England, out of our whole fleet, and had now +about thirty sick, for whom we erected five tents ashore. _Corey_[162] +came down and welcomed us after his manner, by whose means the savages +were not so fearful or thievish as at other times. They brought us +cattle in great abundance, which we bought for shreds of copper. Corey +shewed his house and his wife and children to some of our people, his +dwelling being at a town or _craal_ of about an hundred houses, five +English miles from the landing place. Most of these savages can say _Sir +Thomas Smith's English ships_, which they often repeat with much pride. +Their wives and children came often down to see us, whom we gratified +with bugles, or such trifles; and two or three of them expressed a +desire to go with us to England, seeing that Corey had sped so well, and +returned so rich, with his copper suit, which he preserves at his house +with much care. Corey also proposed to return with us, accompanied by +one of his sons, when our ships are homeward-bound. On the east side of +the _Table_ mountain there is another village of ten small houses, built +round like bee-hives, and covered with mats woven of bent grass. + +[Footnote 162: Corey, or Coree, was a savage, or Hottentot chief; who +had been in England.--_Purch._] + +"The land at the Cape of Good Hope, near Saldanha bay, [Table bay] is +fertile, but divided by high and inaccessible rocky mountains, covered +with snow, the river Dulce falling into the bay on the east side. The +natives are the most barbarous people in the world, eating carrion, +wearing the guts of sheep about their necks, and rubbing their heads, +the hair on which is curled like the negroes, with the dung of beasts +and other dirt. They have no clothing, except skins wrapped about their +shoulders, wearing the fleshy side next them in summer, and the hairy +side in winter. Their houses are only made of mats, rounded at the top +like an oven, and open on one side, which they turn as the wind +changes, having no door to keep out the weather. They have left off +their former custom of stealing, but are quite ignorant of God, and seem +to have no religion. The air and water here are both excellent, and the +country is very healthy. The country abounds in cattle, sheep, +antilopes, baboons, pheasants, partridges, larks, wild-geese, ducks, and +many other kinds of fowls. On the Penguin isle [Dassen or Robber's +island,] there is a bird called penguin, which walks upright, having no +feathers on its wings, which hang down like sleeves faced with white. +These birds cannot fly, but walk about in flocks, being a kind of +mixture, or intermediate link, between beast, bird, and fish, yet mostly +bird. The commodities here are cattle and _ningin_ roots; and I believe +there is a rock yielding quicksilver.[163]The Table mountain is 11,853 +feet high.[164] The bay is full of whales and seals, and is in lat. 33° +45' S."--T.R. + +[Footnote 163: Ningin, or Ginseng, is mentioned afterwards. The +quicksilver rock has not been found.--E.] + +[Footnote 164: This height is probably an exaggeration, or was measured +up its slope or talus, not ascertained perpendicularly.--E.] + +On the 16th of June, after a consultation, we set ashore ten of our +condemned persons to remain at the Cape. These were John Crosse, Henry +Cocket, Clerke, Brand, Booth, Hunyard, Brigs, Pets, Metcalf, and +Skilligall. These men agreed that Crosse should be their chief, and we +gave them weapons for their defence against men and wild beasts, +together with provisions and clothes. The natives at this place are +especially desirous of brass, and care not much for copper, chiefly +wishing to have pieces of a foot square. They care little for iron +hoops. We caught seven or eight hundred fishes in the river, at one haul +of our seyne. The country people brought us for sale a root called +_Ningin_,[165] of which we bought a handful for a small piece of copper +an inch and half long. Our men got some of this, but not so good, this +not being the season when it is ripe; for, when in full perfection, it +is as tender and sweet as anise-seeds. + +[Footnote 165: A medicinal root, much prized at Japan, somewhat like a +_skerrit_.--_Purch._ Probably that named Ginseng, in high repute in +China and Japan for its fancied restorative and provocative powers, like +the mandrake of holy writ, but deservedly despised in the Materia Medica +of Europe. Its whole virtues lay in some supposed resemblance to the +human figure, founded on the childish doctrine of signatures; whence, +at one time, every thing yellow was considered specific against +jaundice, with many other and similar absurd notions.--E.] + +We sailed from Saldanha on the 20th June, and on the the 21st we had +sight of land in 34° 28' S. being the land to the west of cape _de +Arecife_, laid down 28' more northwardly than it ought in the charts of +_Daniel_. On the 6th July we ought to have seen the coast of Madagascar, +by most of our computations, and according to Daniel's charts, upon +Mercator's projection, which proved false by seventy leagues in distance +of longitude between the coast of Ethiopia at cape Bona Speranza and the +isle of St Lawrence, as is evident from the charts projected _in plano_ +by _Tottens_. The 22d all the four ships anchored at _Mohelia_, where we +had water from wells dug a little above high-water mark, eight or nine +feet deep, close by the roots of trees. _Doman_ is the chief town of +this island, where the sultan resides, to whom we gave a double-locked +piece and a sword. For very little money we were plentifully supplied +with provisions, as poultry, goats, bullocks, lemons, oranges, limes, +tamarinds, cocoa-nuts, pines, sugar-canes, and other fruits. Among the +inhabitants of this island there are Arabs, Turks, and Moors, many of +whom speak tolerable Portuguese. From them I had a curious account of +the current at this place, which they said ran alternately fifteen days +westerly, fifteen days easterly, and fifteen days not at all; and which +I partly observed to be true: For, at our first coming, the current set +westerly, and on the 28th it set easterly, and so continued during our +stay, which was six days, but we went away before trial could be +perfectly made of this report. + +I learned here that the king of _Juanni_ [Joanna or Hinzuan] was +sovereign of this island, but entrusted its government to the sultan, +who resides here. The 29th, a vessel arrived at _Doman_ from +_Gangamora_, in the island of Madagascar, and I was desired by the +general to examine what were its commodities, which I found to consist +of rice, and a kind of cloth manufactured of the barks of trees, which +makes very cool garments. I enquired from the pilot, who spoke good +Portuguese, respecting Captain Rowles and the other Englishmen who were +betrayed on that island. He knew nothing of all this, but said that two +or three years before, an English boy was at Gangamora along with the +Portuguese, whom he now thought dead, but knew not how he came there. +This town of _Doman_ contains about an hundred houses, strongly built of +stone and lime, and its inhabitants are orderly and civil. They carry +on trade with the coasts of Melinda, Magadoxa, Mombaza, Arabia, and +Madagascar, carrying slaves taken in their wars, which they sell for +nine or ten dollars each, and which are sold afterwards in Portugal for +100 dollars a-head. At Mombaza and Magadoxa, they have considerable +trade in elephants teeth and drugs; and it was therefore agreed to +advise the honourable company of this, that they might consider of +sending a pinnace yearly to make trial of this trade. In Mohelia, we +bought two or three bullocks for a bar of iron of between twenty and +twenty-five pounds weight. We bought in all 200 head of cattle, and +forty goats, besides poultry, fruits, &c. + +"_Malalia_ [Mohelia] is one of the Commora islands, the other three +being _Angazesia_, [Comoro] _Juanny_, [Joanna or Hinzuan] and Mayotta, +stretching almost east and west from each other. _Angazesia_ [Comoro] +bears N. by W. from Mohelia, and is the highest land I ever saw. It is +inhabited by Moors trading with the main and the other three eastern +islands, bartering their cattle and fruits for calicoes and other cloths +for garments. It is governed by ten petty kings, and has abundance of +cattle, goats, oranges, and lemons. The people are reckoned false and +treacherous. _Hinzuan_ lies east from Mohelia and Mayotta. All these +three islands are well stored with refreshments, but chiefly Mohelia, +and next to it Hinzuan. Here lived an old woman who was sultaness of all +these islands, and under her there were three deputies in Mohelia, who +were all her sons. The sultan in whose quarter we anchored is so +absolute, that none of his people dared to sell a single cocoa-nut +without his leave. Four boats were sent to his town to desire this +liberty, which was granted. Captain Newport went ashore with forty men, +and found the governor sitting on a mat, under the side of a junk which +was then building, and attended by fifty men. He was dressed in a mantle +of blue and red calico, wrapped about him to his knees, his legs and +feet bare, and his head covered by a close cap of checquer work. Being +presented with a gun and sword, he returned four cows, and proclaimed +liberty for the people to trade with us. He gave the English cocoa-nuts +to eat, while he chewed betel and areka-nut, tempered with lime of burnt +oister shells. It has a hot biting taste, voids rheum, cools the head, +and is all their physic. It makes those giddy who are not accustomed to +its use, producing red spittles, and in time colours the teeth black, +which they esteem handsome, and they use this continually. From the +governor they were conducted to the carpenter's house, who was a chief +man in the town. His house was built of stone and lime, low and little, +plaistered with white lime, roofed with rafters, which were covered with +leaves of the cocoa-nut tree, the outsides wattled with canes. + +"Their houses are kept clean and neat, with good household stuff, having +gardens inclosed with canes, in which they grow tobacco and plantains. +For dinner, a board was set upon tressels, on which was spread a fine +new mat, and stone benches stood around, on which the guests sat. First, +water was brought to each in a cocoa-shell, and poured into a wooden +platter, and the rinds of cocoa-nuts were used instead of towels. There +was then set before the company boiled rice, roasted plantains, quarters +of hens, and pieces of goat's flesh broiled. After grace said, they fell +to their meat, using bread made of cocoa-nut kernels, beaten up with +honey, and fried. The drink was palamito wine, and the milk of the +cocoa-nuts. Those who went to see the sultan, named _Amir Adell_, found +all things much in the same manner, only that his behaviour was more +light, and he made haste to get drunk with some wine carried to him by +the English. The people of these islands are strict Mahomedans, and very +jealous of letting their women or mosques be seen. For, on some of the +English coming near a village, they shut them up, and threatened to kill +them if they came nearer. Many of them speak and write Arabic, and some +few of them Portuguese, as they trade with Mosambique in junks of forty +tons burden, built, caulked, and rigged all out of the cocoa-nut tree. +Here we bought oxen and cows, fat but small, Arabian sheep, hens, +oranges, lemons, and limes in abundance, paying for them in calicoes, +hollands, sword-blades, dollars, glasses, and other trifles."--T.R. + +We sailed from Mohelia on the 2d August, and on the 17th got sight of +cape Guardafui, where the natives seemed afraid of us. The 20th we +anchored in the road of _Galencia_ in Socotora, where the fierceness of +the wind raised the sea into a continual surf all round about us, and by +the spray, blown about us like continual rain, our masts, yards, and +tackle were made white all over by the salt, like so much hoar-frost; +The 23d we anchored at _Tamara_, the town where the king resides, and on +the 24th at _Delisha_. They here demanded thirty dollars for the quintal +of aloes, which made us buy the less. The _Faiking_ told us that Captain +Downton had bought 100 quintals, and it was still so liquid, either +from newness, or because of the heat, that it was ready to run out of +the skins. The quintal of this place, as tried by our beam, weighed 103 +1/2 pounds English. Aloes is made from the leaves of a plant resembling +our sempervivum, or house-leek, the roots and stalk being cut away, the +rest strongly pressed, and the juice boiled up to a certain height, +after which it is put into earthen pots, closely stopped for eight +months, and is then put into skins for sale. The north part of Socotora +is in 12° 30', and the body in 120° 25'.[166] It is fourteen leagues +from this island to _Abdul Curia_, and as much more from thence to cape +Guardafui. Such as mean to sail for Socotora, should touch at that cape, +and sail from thence next morning a little before day-break, to lose no +part of the day-light, the nights here being dark and obscure, with fogs +and boisterous winds, during the months of August and September. On +getting into _Abdul Curia_, they may anchor on the west side in seven or +eight fathoms, under the low land; or, if they cannot get to anchor, +should keep close hauled in the night to the southward, lest the wind +and northerly current put them too much to leeward before day. +Notwithstanding the monsoon, the winds do not blow steadily, being +sometimes S. by W. and S.S.W. but seldom to the east of south. + +[Footnote 166: These two numbers unquestionably relate to the longitude +and latitude respectively, though strangely expressed. The true lat. is +13° 20'N. and long. 53° E. from Greenwich.--E.] + +"Socotora is an island not far from the mouth of the Red Sea, being the +_Dioscuria_ or _Disoscordia_ of the ancients, in lat. 13° 20' N. It was +governed when we were there by a sultan, named Amir Ben-said, son of the +king of Fartaque, in Arabia Felix, which lies between the latitudes of +15° and 18° N. on the coast of Arabia. This king was in peace with the +Turks, on condition of assisting them with 5000 men when required, and +then these troops to be paid and maintained by the Turks, to whom he +paid no other acknowledgement. Near to the sea about Dofar, there is +another petty Arab sovereign, whom he of Fartaque dare not meddle with, +because he is under the protection of the Grand Signior. + +"The sultan of Socotora came down to meet us at the shore, accompanied +by 300 men, and had a tent set up for his accommodation. He was on +horseback, as were two of his principal attendants, and a third on a +camel, the people running before and behind him shouting. He had two +companies of guards, one composed of his own subjects, and the other +consisting of twelve hired Guzerates, some armed with Turkish bows, some +with pistols, and some with muskets, but all having good swords. He had +also a few kettle-drums, and one trumpet. He received the general in a +courteous manner, and was so absolute, that no person could sell any +thing except himself. His people sat about him very respectfully; his +clothes were of Surat cloths, made in the Arabian fashion, with a +cassock of red and white wrought velvet, and a robe of which the ground +was cloth of gold. He wore a handsome turban, but his legs and feet were +bare. + +"Every night these people all stand or kneel towards the setting sun, +the _zerife_ throwing water on their heads, being all Mahomedans. The +king's town, named Tamara, is built of stone and lime, all whited over, +the houses built with battlements and pinnacles, and all flat-roofed. At +a distance it looks well, but within is very poor. Mr Boughton had leave +to see the king's house, and found it such as might serve an ordinary +gentleman in England. The lower rooms were used as warehouses and +wardrobe, a few changes of robes hanging about the walls, and along with +them were some twenty-five books of their law, religion, history, and +saints lives. No person could be permitted to go up stairs to see his +three wives, or the other women; but the ordinary sort might be seen in +the town, their ears all full of silver rings. In the mosque the priest +was seen at service. Mr Boughton had for his dinner three hens, with +rice, his drink being water, and a black liquor called _cahu_, [coffee] +drank as hot as could be endured. + +"On a hill, a mile from Tamara, there is a square castle, but we could +not get leave to see it. The inhabitants are of four sorts. The first +are Arabs, who have come in by means of conquest, who dare not speak in +presence of the sultan without leave, and kissing his hand. The second +sort are slaves, who kiss his foot when they come into his presence, do +all his work, and make his aloes. The third sort are the old inhabitants +of the country, called Bedouins, though I think these are not the oldest +of all, whom I suppose to have been those commonly called Jacobite +Christians: For, on Mr Boughton going into a church of theirs, which the +Arabs had forced them to abandon, he found some images and a crucifix, +which he took away. The Mahomedans would not say much about these +people, lest other Christians might relieve or support them. These +Bedouins, having had wars with the Arabs, live apart from them in the +mountains. The fourth kind of people, or original natives, are very +savage, poor lean, naked, and wear their hair long. They eat nothing but +roots, ride about on buffaloes, conversing only among themselves, being +afraid of all others, having no houses, and live more like wild beasts +than men, and these we conjecture to have been the original natives of +the place. + +"The island is very mountainous and barren, having some beeves, goats, +and sheep, a few dates and oranges, a little rice, and nothing else for +the food of man. All its commodities consist of aloes, the inspisated +juice of a plant having a leaf like our house-leek. The only manufacture +is a very poor kind of cloth, used only by slaves. The king had some +dragon's blood, and some Lahore indigo, as also a few civet cats and +civet. The dead are all buried in tombs, and the monuments of their +saints are held in much veneration. The chief of these was one _Sidy +Hachun_,[167] buried at Tamara, who was slain about an hundred years +before we were there, and who, as they pretend, still appears to them, +and warns them of approaching dangers. They hold him in wonderful +veneration, and impute high winds to his influence."--T.R. + +[Footnote 167: Sidy, or Seid, signifies a descendant or relative of +Mahomet, and Hachem, a prophet.--E.] + +The 31st of August we sailed from Socotora. The 10th September we had +quails, herons, and other land-birds blown from the land, and unable to +return. The 14th we had sight of Diu, and the 16th of Damaun, both +inhabited by the Portuguese, and strongly fortified. On the 18th we +passed the bar of Surat, and came to anchor in the road of Swally. Next +day we sent a messenger on shore, and our boat returned the same night, +bringing off Mr William Bidulph, who told us of all the affairs of the +country, and that _Zulphecar Khan_[168] was now governor of Surat. At +this place we bought sheep for half a dollar each, and got twenty hens +for a dollar. On the 22d Mr Barker and other merchants were sent to +Surat to provide furniture for a house to accommodate the lord +ambassador, Sir Thomas Roe. They were searched most narrowly, even their +pockets, and the most secret parts of their dress, according to the base +manner of this country, in which a man has to pay custom for a single +dollar in his purse, or a good knife in his pocket; and if one has any +thing rare, it is sure to be taken away by the governor, under pretence +of purchase. + +[Footnote 168: In the Pilgrims this person is named Zuipher-Car-Chan, +but we believe the orthography in the text is more correct.--E.] + +The lord ambassador landed on the 25th, accompanied by our general, all +the captains and merchants, and eighty men under arms, part pikes, and +part muskets. Forty-eight guns were fired off from the ships, which were +all dressed out with colours and streamers, flags and pendants. On +landing, he was received in a splendid tent by the chief men of Surat, +who welcomed him to India. There was much to do about their barbarous +search, which they would have executed on all his attendants, which he +strenuously resisted, and at length he and three or four of his +principal followers were exempted, while the rest were only slightly +handled for fashion-sake. A great deal passed on this occasion between +the governor and the ambassador, about these rude and barbarous +exactions, Sir Thomas justly contending for the honour and immunity of +an ambassador from an independent king; while they insisted to make no +difference between him and others of similar rank in those parts, and of +our own likewise, who had formerly assumed the name of ambassadors. +Their barbarous usage not only perplexed him there, and detained him +long till an order came from court, but gave him much plague all the +time he remained in the country, as will appear afterwards from his own +journal. They could not easily be persuaded to allow of any difference +between him and Mr Edwards, who had been considered by them in the same +light with Sir Thomas. + +Mr Barwick's man, who had been inveigled to run away by a deserter from +Captain Best who had turned Mahomedan, was brought back from Surat on +the 1st of October. Others afterwards ran away to Damaun, and wrote to +their comrades to induce them to do the same. The 2d, two Hollanders +came on board, who had travelled by land from Petapulli, on the +Coromandel coast. On the 10th, the governor's brother came on board, +making many fair speeches, and had a present given him. The governor +impudently urged us to give him presents, though he had already received +three, but found fault with them, and even named what he would have +given him, being beggar and chooser both at once. We had this day news +of Mr Aldworth's death; and on the 5th November we received intelligence +of the lord ambassador having fallen sick at Burhanpoor, and that Mr +Boughton was dead. + +The most current coin at Surat is rials of eight, or Spanish dollars, of +which the old with the plain cross passes for five mahmoodies each. The +new dollars, having flower-de-luces at the ends of the cross, if not +light, are worth four 3/4 mahmoodies. The _mahmoody_ is a coarse silver +coin, containing thirty _pice_, and twelve _drams_ make a _pice_. The +English shilling, if full weight, will yield thirty 1/2 pice. Larines +are worth much the same with mahmoodies.[169] There are sundry kinds of +rupees, some of which are worth half a dollar, and others less, by which +one may be easily deceived. The trade at Surat is conducted by brokers, +who are very subtle, and deceive both buyer and seller, if not carefully +looked after. In weights, each city of India differs from another. The +commodities are infinite, indigos being the chief, those of Lahore the +best, and those from Sarkess inferior. Great quantities of cloths made +of cotton, as white and coloured calicoes, containing fourteen yards the +book or piece, from 100 to 200 mahmoodies each. Pintadoes, chintzes, +chadors, sashes, girdles, cannakens, trekannies, serrabafs, aleias, +patollas, sellas, quilts, carpets, green ginger, suckets or confections, +lignum aloes, opium, sal amoniac, and abundance of other drugs. Vendible +commodities are knives, mirrors, pictures, and such like toys; English +cloth, China wares, silk, and porcelain, and all kinds of spices. The +Guzerates load their great ships, of nine, twelve, or fifteen hundred +tons, at Gogo, and steal out unknown to the Portuguese. + +[Footnote 169: From this explanation, the _mahmoody_ and larine may be +assumed as worth one shilling; the _pice_ as equal to a farthing and a +half, and the dram at about 1-10th of a farthing.--E.] + +The chief places for trade on the river Sinde, or Indus, are Tatta, +_Diul-sinde_, Mooltan, and Lahore. The Expedition, on her former voyage, +had landed the Persian ambassador, Sir Robert Shirley, at _Diul-sinde_; +and of him I have thought it right to give the following particulars, as +an appendix to my former voyage, having learnt them from some of his +followers at Agra. Being weary of _Diul-sinde_, through the evil conduct +of the governor, and the attempts of the Portuguese to molest him, who +even used their endeavours to cut him off, for which purpose twelve of +them had gone there from Ormus, he asked leave to proceed to Tatta; but, +being refused permission, he went without leave, and having by the way +to pass a river where none durst ferry him over, because prohibited by +the governor on pain of death, he constructed a raft of timber and +boards, on which he and Nazerbeg embarked. They were no sooner shoved +off than twenty or thirty horse came from the governor in great haste to +detain them. And as Nazerbeg was unable to guide the raft against the +tide, some men swam to the raft and brought them back, on which occasion +they narrowly escaped being drowned. Some of his followers being +indignant at this rude dealing, one Mr John Ward shot off his pistol in +their faces, and was instantly slain by another shot, and all the rest +were carried back prisoners to _Diul-sinde_, being pillaged by the +soldiers on their way. After some time in prison, they were permitted to +proceed to Tatta, where they were kindly entertained by the governor of +that place, who was a Persian. Before leaving Diul-sinde, Sir Thomas +Powell and Mr Francis Bub died. Sir Robert Shirley remained at Tatta +till a fit opportunity offered of proceeding to Agra, where he went at +last, finding the way long and tedious, and much infested by thieves. He +went there however in safety, going in company with a great man who had +a strong escort, and for whom he had to wait two months. + +In this time Lady Powell was delivered of a son, but both she and her +child died soon after, together with Mr Michael Powell, brother to Sir +Thomas, losing their lives in this tedious waiting in boats for the +great man. On his arrival at Agra, Sir Robert was favourably entertained +by the Great Mogul, who sent for the Banian governor of Diul-sinde to +answer at court to the complaint, and promised Sir Robert to have his +own revenge if he would stay; but he hasted away to Persia, after +receiving many presents from the Mogul, who gave him an escort, and all +necessaries for his journey, in which he had not a single English +attendant, as John Heriot died at Agra, and Mr Richard Barber, his +apothecary, returned to Surat. Of all his company, three only remained +with him, his lady and her female attendant, two Persians, the old +Arminian, and the Circassian. His Dutch jeweller came to Surat along +with Mr Edwards. + +§2. _Occurrences at Calicut and Sumatra, Miscarriage of the English +Ships, Abuses of the Dutch, and Factories in India_. + +We took a Portuguese prize on the 29th of February, 1616. The 3d March, +while at anchor in the road of Calicut, the deputy of the Zamorin came +aboard, attended by many boats, signifying the joy of his master at our +arrival, and his earnest desire to confer with our nation, and entreated +therefore that we would tarry a few days, that he might send to the +Zamorin, who was then at Cranganore besieging a castle belonging to the +Portuguese. We had here abundance of provisions brought to us on board, +and at reasonable rates. That same evening, there came a messenger from +the Zamorin, entreating us to anchor for two or three days off +Cranganore, which we accordingly did on the 5th, anchoring two leagues +off shore. About noon the Zamorin sent to request the general would come +ashore, to visit him, but this was not deemed right without a pledge, +and Mr George Barkley went ashore to wait upon him; but the Zamorin +refused to reveal his intentions to any one except our general, and +seemed much displeased at his not coming ashore. + +The general accordingly landed on the 8th, and had an audience of the +Zamorin, who wished the English to establish a factory in his dominions, +for which purpose he offered a good house rent-free, freedom from custom +or other exactions, for all goods brought there or carried thence, and +made many protestations of affection for our nation. This was for the +present declined, because most of our goods had been left at Surat, and +because we were now bound for Bantam. To this the Zamorin answered, that +it was no matter whether any goods were left for the present, as he only +desired we might leave two or three Englishmen there, who should want +for nothing, as he only wanted to be assured of our return next year +with a supply of men and goods. He assured us we might be sure of +loading one ship yearly with pepper, and might make sale of our +commodities to a considerable extent. Upon this it was agreed to leave a +factory at this place, with such goods as we could spare, which went +accordingly on shore on the 9th; George Woolman being appointed chief of +this new factory at Cranganore, Peter Needham and Roger Hares +under-factors, together with Richard Stamford, and a boy named Edward +Peake, who was appointed to learn the language. The name of the king is +_Pendre Quone[170] Zamorin_, to whom was given, as a present, a minion +or small cannon, and a barrel of powder; on which he promised, if he won +the fort of Cranganore, to give it up to the English. + +[Footnote 170: Named _Underecon Cheete_ in a subsequent article.--E.] + +The 10th we received the Zamorin's letter of agreement for our +privileges, with many fair protestations of love. We sailed the same +day, passing before Cochin, which we could see distinctly. Next day we +had a view of the town and castle of Coulan, where was a ship riding at +anchor under the guns of the castle, which we boarded and brought forth +without any hurt from the guns, all the crew having fled ashore. This +was a Portuguese ship of four or five hundred tons, lately arrived from +Bengal and Pegu, laden with rice, grain, Bengal cloths, butter, sugar, +gum lack, hard wax, drugs, and other things. The 12th we espied another +ship, to which we gave chase, and came up with about midnight, when she +surrendered at the first shot.[171] I sent for her chief men on board my +ship, the others being three or four miles a-stern, and set some of my +people on board the prize, with strict charges to hurt no person. There +were in this ship eighteen or twenty Portuguese, and about eighty +others, men, women, and children. Her chief loading was rice, butter, +sugar, lack, drugs, and Bengal cloths. We offered these people our first +prize, with victuals to carry them ashore, which they refused, as +fearing to be ill-used by the Malabars, having lately escaped with +difficulty from a fleet of theirs of fourteen sail. Next day we landed +them where they desired, and allowed them to go away unsearched for +money or jewels. We had now three English ships[172] and three prizes. + +[Footnote 171: These prizes were taken from the Portuguese in part +satisfaction for their unjust vexations and hostilities at Surat and +other places.--_Purch._] + +[Footnote 172: No notice is taken of the fourth ship, the Lion, probably +left at Surat; indeed, the whole of this relation is exceedingly vague +and unsatisfactory, the name even of the general never being once +mentioned.--E.] + +The 14th we arrived at _Brinion_, in lat. 8° 30', where we took out of +the first prize what we thought useful, and then set her adrift. At +_Brinion_ there is a small town in a round bay, which may be known by a +long white beach to the north, and to the south is all high land, having +a red cliff two leagues to the south, close to the sea. From thence to +cape Comorin is sixteen leagues, the course being S.E. by S. along a +bold free coast. The inhabitants of Brinion[173] are no way subject to +the Portuguese. The 1st of April the island of Ceylon bore E. by S. +seven leagues off. On the 10th the Peak of Adam bore north. I this day +took my leave of the general, the Dragon and Pepper-corn being bound for +Acheen, while I, in the Expedition, went for Priaman, Tecoo, and Bantam. + +[Footnote 173: In 8° 22' N. at the distance indicated from cape Comorin, +is a place called Billingham, which may possibly be the Brinion of the +text.--E.] + +It is good to remain in Brinion till the end of March, when the easterly +monsoon ends, and not to pass cape Comorin sooner, on account of calms, +and because the southerly current sets towards the Maldives. All who +come from the west for Priaman and Tecoo, ought to continue so as to +have sufficient day-light for passing between _Nimptan_[174] and the +other adjacent islands, the best channel being to the north of that +island. On the 30th of April I met the Advice going for Tecoo; but, at +my request, she returned for Bantam, whence she was sent to Japan. I +arrived at Bantam on the 1st of May, where I found the Hosiander newly +arrived from Japan, and the Attendance from _Jambo_, most of their men +being sick or dead. I here learnt the death of Captain Downton, and of +the arrival of Captain Samuel Castleton with the Clove and Defence, +which, with the Thomas and Concord, were gone to the Moluccas, the +Thomas being appointed to proceed from thence to Japan. + +[Footnote 174: Pulo Mintaon, off the S.W. coast of Sumatra, nearly under +the line, is probably here meant.--E.] + +The 19th of May I sailed from Bantam, and the 10th June I put into +Tecoo. The 3d July I hove my ship down on the careen to sheath her. It +is of great use to double sheath such ships as go to Surat, as though +the outer sheathing may be eaten like a honey-comb by the worms, the +inner is not at all injured. It were also of great use to have the +rudder sheathed with thin copper,[175] to prevent the worms from eating +off its edges, which is very detrimental in steering, and cannot be +easily remedied, being so deep in the water. The natives of Sumatra +inhabiting Priaman are barbarous, deceitful, and continually craving +presents or bribes; and sometimes I have been in imminent hazard of +being murdered, a hundred of them drawing their crisses upon us at once, +because we refused to let them have our goods on trust, or at prices of +their own making. The 20th, Thomas Bonnar, master of the Expedition, +died, and was succeeded by John Row, who was the third master in this +voyage. + +[Footnote 175: We had formerly occasion to notice a ship sheathed with +iron at Japan, and this is the first indication or proposal for using +copper in that way. Iron sheathing has never been adopted into British +practice, while copper sheathing is now universal. Captain Peyton does +not appear to have been aware that copper sheathing is incompatible +with iron fastenings, which indeed was only learnt long after, by woeful +experience, and the loss of many ships and men. In consequence of a +strong predisposing chemical afinity, exerted by the contiguity of the +copper and iron in the sea water, the muriatic acid corrodes the iron +bolts and other fastenings, all of which are now made of copper in ships +that are to be copper sheathed.--E.] + +The 26th, the Dragon and Pepper-corn arrived from Acheen, where they had +purchased pepper, carried there from Tecoo in large junks and praws, +which navigate between these places, but never out of sight of land. The +king of Acheen commands the people of Tecoo to bring their pepper to his +port, and allows none to purchase it there, but those who barter their +Surat goods at such rates as he pleases to impose. Often likewise, he +sends to Priaman and Tecoo the Surat commodities procured by him in that +manner, obliging the merchants there to buy at rates by him imposed, and +no person is allowed to buy or sell till his goods are sold. This makes +our trade with them the better.[176] _Jambo_ is on the east side of +Sumatra, and yields a similar large-grained pepper with what is procured +at Priaman, but is not under the dominion of the king of Acheen, as are +Baruse, Passaman, Tecoo, Priaman, Cottatinga, and other places on the +western side of that island. _Baruse_ is to the north of Passaman, and +yields considerable quantities of benzoin; _Cottatinga_ yields gold, and +the other places pepper. Our general brought the king of Acheen's letter +to these places, where the chief men received it with great submission, +each of them kissing it and laying it on his head, promising to obey its +injunctions, yet all failed in performance. It were proper, in these +letters from the king, to procure all the particulars of the trade to be +inserted. I set sail from Tecoo for Bantam on the 4th September. + +[Footnote 176: It is so expressed in the Pilgrims; yet it would seem +that such arbitrary proceeding in the sovereign, assuming the character +of merchant, would be destructive of all trade.--E.] + +The best gold, and the largest quantity, is to be had at the high hill +of Passaman, where likewise is the best, cheapest, and most abundant +produce of pepper. But the air is there so pestiferous, that there is no +going thither for our nation without great mortality among the men. +Fortunately this is not necessary in procuring pepper, as the Surat +commodities at Tecoo are sufficiently attractive. I have even observed +many of the natives to labour under infectious diseases, the limbs of +some being ready to drop off with rottenness, while others had huge +wens or swellings under their throats, as large as a two-penny loaf; +which they impute to the bad water.[177] Though a barbarous people, they +are yet acquainted with the means of curing their diseases. The people +of Tecoo are base, thievish, subtle, seeking gain by every kind of +fraud, or even by force when they dare; using false weights, false +reckonings, and even attempting to poison our meats and drinks while +dressing, and crissing our men when opportunity serves: But it is to be +hoped they may be inforced to keep better order, by the influence and +authority of the king of Acheen. At Acheen our Portuguese prizes were +disposed of, and shared according to the custom of the sea, a sixth part +being divided among the captors, and the rest carried to the account of +our employers. There were only five left in the factory. Many of our men +were sick, owing to their immoderate indulgence in drinking arrack. + +[Footnote 177: The _goitre_ was long ignorantly imputed in Europe to +drinking snow water; but is now well known only to affect the +inhabitants of peculiar districts, as Derbyshire in England, and the +Valais in Switzerland, and this district in Sumatra, where certain +mineral impregnations render the water unwholesome.--E.] + +When at Bantam, in October 1616, there were four English ships, and five +Hollanders at Jacatra, which raised the price of pepper; and that the +more, because the Dutch boasted of having brought this year in ready +money 1,600,000 dollars, which is probably a great exaggeration to brave +our nation. Their last fleet of six ships took two or three ships of the +Portuguese, of which they made great boasts. They endeavour to depress +our nation by every manner of abuse throughout the Indies, acting +towards us in a most unfriendly and unchristian manner. Even in Bantam, +where they acknowledge our equal right, they threaten to pull our people +out of our factory by the ears, sometimes picking quarrels with them in +the streets, and even imprisoning them; and when they themselves have +caused an uproar, complaining to the king of Bantam of our unquietness, +and bribing him to take their parts. He receives their money, and tells +us of their dealings, taking advantage of this disagreement to fleece +both sides. Even at Pulo-way, an island freely surrendered to the king +of England, they abused our people, leading them through the streets +with halters round their necks, carrying an hour-glass before them, and +proclaiming that they were to be hanged when the sand was run out. And +though they did not actually proceed to that extremity, they kept them +three or four days in irons, and afterwards sent them aboard the Concord +and Thomasine, under a forced composition never to return. Likewise, at +the return of the Hosiander from Japan, which brought thirty tons of +wood for them, free of freight and charges, they reported she would have +returned empty, but for their timber; which also they might have said of +my ship, which brought for them, from Surat to Bantam, thirty-one +_churles_ of indigo and a chest of pistoles, freight-free. + +Captain Castleton went to the Moluccas with four ships, the Clove, +Defence, Thomas, and Concord, that he might be better able to defend +himself against the Hollanders; yet, being threatened by eleven of their +ships, they returned without doing much business, having only a few +cloves in the Clove. The captain died there of the flux; and the bad +success of that expedition, together with other faults, was laid to his +charge. The Trades-increase was twice set on fire by the Javans, and the +fire quenched by our people; but on a third attempt, she was fired in so +many places at once, that it was impossible to save her. The Darling was +laid up at Patane, in June 1615, by order of Mr Larkine and the factory, +as incapable of repair. Herrold, her master, was reported of having a +design to carry her off to the Portuguese; and, being prevented, he went +himself. The Thomasine was cast away, in September 1615, upon a shoal in +the night, seventeen leagues W. from Macasser, while returning from the +Moluccas. On this occasion her goods were lost, which were not of much +value, but they saved the money, being 2000 dollars, and all their +provisions, remaining fourteen days on a desolate island, where they +fitted up their boat, which brought themselves and their money to +Bantam. All their goods and other things were left behind, and seized by +the king of Macasser, who refused to make restitution. At Jacatra the +Hector sunk in three fathoms water while careening, her keel being +exceedingly worm-eaten. The Concord is there also laid up, so rotten +and leaky that they had to take out her provisions, and let her sink +close to the shore. The Hosiander, on the 15th October 1616, was +appointed to sail for the Coromandel coast. + +The factories which are at present established for our company in the +East Indies, so far as I could hear, are these: Bantam, Jacatra, +Ahmedabad, Agra, Agimere, Burhanpoor, Calicut, Masulipatam, Patepulli, +Patane, Siam, Banjermassen, Succodania, Macasser, Acheen, Jambo, Tecoo, +Banda, and Firando in Japan. At Bantam, Mr George Barclay was chief, +with John Jordan, George Ball, Ralph Copendale, and several other +factors and assistants. The principal purpose of the factory at Acheen, +is to solicit for our better proceedings at Priaman and Tecoo. The place +is unwholesome, more especially for such as indulge in the use of hot +fiery drinks, as _arack_ and _aracape_, which bring many to untimely +graves; and throw discredit on the voyage. It is not to be imagined at +home, how unruly are the common men abroad, never being satisfied unless +when their brains are reeling with liquor. Even the king of Acheen is +said to have a strange habit of getting drunk when the English resort to +him, as if thereby to do them honour, and it seems dishonourable to them +not to conform with him, in sitting in the water, drinking hard, and +many other strange customs. He is very tyrannical and cruel to his +subjects, daily cutting off the hands, arms, and legs of many, on very +small and frivolous causes; or causing them to be thrown to the +elephants, he himself commanding a sagacious elephant to toss the +culprits so high and so often, as either to bruise or kill them, +according to his caprice at the time. No one that arrives at his port +may land without his _chop_ or licence. On one occasion, a Dutch general +came on shore without his licence, by desire of the principal factor, +who presumed on his favour with the king. When the general came to the +palace-gate, where another chop is necessary, the king found this +irregularity to have proceeded from the presumption of the resident, +whom he sent for and laid before the elephant, who tossed him three +times, but so gently as not to bruise him much, giving him thus a +warning how he should neglect the king's commands another time. The +Dutch general stood by the while, fearing to come in for his share of +this strange discipline; but the king forgave him, as ignorant of the +law. The poor factor, being called into the king's presence, humbly +acknowledged his punishment to have been merited, yet fled with the rest +of the factory at the departure of the ships; on which the king placed +us in their house. + +We sailed from Bantam, homeward bound, on the 1st November 1616. The 5th +January 1617, I was unable to weigh our anchor, owing to the violence +of the wind, to follow the Dragon to Penguin island. Ships that go round +the Cape of Good Hope from India, at this season of the year, ought not +to anchor short of Saldanha road, [Table Bay,] but ought to bear to +leeward for Penguin island, and anchor there with two anchors at once, +till the wind serve. In December, January, and February, the S.S.E. wind +blows there with great violence from new to full moon. Yet I hold it +dangerous to neglect this place, trusting to refreshments at St Helena, +a certainty for an uncertainty; as the obscurity of the sun and moon, +owing to thick mists at this season, may disappoint the most experienced +navigators, and occasion the loss of ship, cargo, and men. While at the +Cape, Corey came down with three sheep, and promised more, but went away +in great haste to his wife and family, who dwelt now farther from the +bay than formerly. It appears that the Hollanders had frightened the +natives, by landing and going up the country with above an hundred men +at once. Owing to this, our chief refreshment here was fresh fish. + +The 9th April 1617, we passed through great quantities of sea-weeds, +called _seragasso_, which float in long ridges or rows along with the +wind, and at considerable distances from each other. This plant has a +leaf like samphire, but not so thick, and carries a very small yellow +berry. It reaches from 22° 20' to 32° both of N. latitude. We anchored +in the Downs on the 29th of May 1617. + + +3. _Brief Notice of the Ports, Cities, and Towns, inhabited by, and +traded with, by the Portuguese between the Cape of Good Hope and Japan, +in_ 1616. + +The river of _Quame_, or _Cuamo_, on the eastern coast of Africa, where +they are said to trade yearly for gold, elephants teeth, ambergris, and +slaves. _Mozambique_, an island on the same coast, where they trade for +gold, ambergris, and slaves, in barter for iron, lead, tin, and Cambay +commodities, _Magadoxo_, which has abundance of elephants teeth, some +ambergris, and various kinds of drugs. From these ports they trade +yearly to Cambay, the Red Sea, and other places, observing the monsoons, +which blow W. in April, May, June, July, August, and part of September, +and the E. monsoon prevails an the other months. A few days between the +cessation of one monsoon and the commencement of the other, the winds +are variable, attended by calms, but become regular in a few days. To +the east of Sumatra, however, the two monsoons continue only five months +each way, the two intermediate months having variable winds. + +_Ormus_ in the gulf of Persia, whence the Portuguese trade to Persia, +Diul-sinde, Arabia, &c. They fetch much pearl from Bassora;[178] and +they load a ship or two with Persian commodities for Diul-sinde, where +they arrive between the end of August and middle of September, taking +likewise with them great store of dollars. Ormus is their best place in +the Indies except Goa. At _Muskat_ they have a fort and some small +trade, keeping the natives in such awe by land and sea, that they dare +not trade without their licence, and this practice they follow in all +parts of India where they are strong. _Diul-sinde_ on the Indus in the +dominions of the Great Mogul. _Diu_, where they have a strong castle. +Damaun, where they have a castle, and are said to have an hundred +villages under their authority. _Basseen_, or _Serra de Bazein_, a +little south from _Damaun_, and bordering on the Deccan; between which +and _Chaul_ they have three ports, _Gazein, Banda_, and _Maia_. _Chaul_ +is a great city with a castle. At _Dabul_ they have a factory, but no +fort. + +[Footnote 178: This is a mistake for the isle of Bahrein.--E.] + +_Goa_ is their metropolitan city in India, which stands in a small +island, being the seat of their viceroy, and the anchoring place of +their caracks. _Onore_ has a small fort. _Barcellore_, a town and +castle, yields pepper, ginger, and many kinds of drugs. _Mangalore_, a +town and castle. _Cananore_, a city and castle, yielding similar +commodities with Barcellore. From _Calicut_ they have been expelled by +the Zamorin, who endeavours to do the same at _Crangator_, [Cranganore,] +where they have a fort. _Cochin_ is a strong city and castle, pleasantly +situated on the sea in a wholesome air, with a fine river for the +reception of ships. _Coulan_, a town with a small castle; near which is +a village named St Lawrence, chiefly inhabited by friars and jesuits. +_Quiloan_, a small city with a castle. _Tuckatra_, a town and castle, +the inhabitants being mostly Christians. + +_Manaar_ is on the island of Ceylon, between Cape Comorin and +Point-de-Gale, where they have a town inhabited by Portuguese. In this +island also they have _Columbo_, and many other small places, having +conquered most of the island, which yields cinnamon and various drugs. +_Negopatnam_ is a city of great trade, on the coast of Coromandel, where +they have only a factory. St Thomas, or _Meliapoor_, is a walled town +inhabited by the Portuguese. In Bengal, up the river Ganges, they have a +town, besides some factories and many small habitations. They have a +factory in Pegu, another in Aracan, and one in the river of Martaban. +Also at _Junkceylon_ they have a great factory, whence they fetch +considerable quantities of tin to the Malabar coast. + +_Malacca_ is a strong city and castle belonging to the Portuguese, and +the centre of a great trade in those parts of India. From this place the +king of Acheen has long sought to root them out, and has burnt and +plundered some of their ships this year, 1619. At _Macao_, an island on +the coast of China, they have a city with a castle, where they are said +to carry on much trade with the Chinese. They have a factory in Japan, +but neither town nor fort; and trade thence with the coast of China. The +Dutch are said to make much spoil of the vessels employed on this trade, +Portuguese, Chinese, and others, accounting all fish that fall into +their net. + +SECTION V. + +_Notes, concerning the Proceedings of the Factory at Cranganore, from +the Journal of Roger Hawes.[179]_ + +[Footnote 179: Parch. Pilgr. I. 608.--Hawes sailed in the fleet under +Keeling, in 1615, which carried out Sir Thomas Roe, already related in +Sect. IV. of this chapter; and the present short article almost +exclusively relates to the new factory at Cranganore on the Malabar +coast, in which Hawes was left as one of the factors. This is a very +imperfect and inconclusive article, yet gives some idea of the manners +and customs of the Malabars.--E.] + +On the 4th of March 1615, we chased a Portuguese frigate, which ran into +a creek and escaped. While on our way towards Cape Comorin, a Tony came +aboard of us, with messengers from the Zamorin to our general, Captain +William Keeling. Next day, the governor sent a present, and entreated +the general to proceed to Cranganore, which we did next day, taking with +us the messengers sent from the Zamorin, who requested the general to +come on shore to speak with him. But, while he was doing so, some +frigates came and anchored near the shore, by which he was constrained +to go on board the Expedition, Captain Walter Peyton. On this occasion +some shots were exchanged, but little harm was done. The general went +ashore on the 8th, accompanied by Mr Barclay, the cape merchant, and +several others. They were well used, and agreed to settle a factory in +the dominions of the Zamorin, the following being the articles agreed +upon:-- + +_"UNDERECON CHEETE, Great Zamorin, &c. to JAMES, King of Britain, &c._ +Whereas your servant and subject, William Keeling, arrived in my kingdom +at the port of Cranganore, in March 1615, with three ships, and at my +earnest solicitation came ashore to see me; there was concluded by me +for my part, and by him for the English nation, as followeth. + +"As I have ever been at enmity with the Portuguese, and propose always +so to continue, I do hereby faithfully promise to be and to continue in +friendship with the English, both for myself and my successors: And, if +I succeed in taking the fort of Cranganore, I engage to give it to the +English, to possess as their own, together with the island belonging to +it, which is in length along the sea-coast nine miles, and three in +breadth; and I propose to build therein a house for my own people, to +the number of one hundred persons. + +"I shall hereafter endeavour, with the aid of the English, to conquer +the town and fort of Cochin, which formerly belonged, to my crown and +kingdom, and shall then deliver it to the English as their own. Provided +that the charges of its capture be equally borne by both parties, one +half by me, and the other half by the English nation; and in that case, +the benefit of the plunder thereof, of whatsoever kind, shall belong +half to me, and half to the English. And thereafter, I shall claim no +right, title, or interest in the said town, precincts, or appurtenances +whatsoever." + +"I also covenant for myself, my heirs and successors, that the whole +trade of the English, in whatsoever commodities, brought in or carried +out, shall be entirely free from all custom, imposition, tax, toll, or +any other duty, of any quality or description." + +"To these covenants, which the shortness of time did not permit to +extend in more ample form, I, the Zamorin, have sworn to perform, by the +great God whom I serve, and not only for myself but for my successors; +and in witness thereof have laid my hand upon this writing.[180] And the +said William Keeling promises to acquaint the king his master with the +premises, and to endeavour to procure his majesty's consent thereto." + +[Footnote 180: This probably alludes to a custom mentioned in one of our +earlier volumes, of imprinting the form of the hand, smeared with ink, +on the paper, instead of signature or seal.--E.] + +This being agreed upon, a stock was made out for a factory, such as the +shortness of time would permit, and three factors were appointed. These +were, George Woolman, chief, Peter Needham, second, who was one of the +general's servants, and I, Roger Hawes, third; together with a youth, +named Edward Peake, as our attendant, who was to learn the language. +John Stamford, a gunner, was likewise left to assist the Zamorin in his +wars. On the 10th the ships departed, leaving us and our goods in a +_shrambe_ at the water side, together with a present for the Zamorin. We +continued there till the 13th, at which time the last of our goods were +carried to the Zamorin's castle; whose integrity we much suspected, +after having thus got possession of our goods. On the 20th, he insisted +to see Mr Woolman's trunk, supposing we had plenty of money. Needham had +told him we had 500 rials; but finding little more than fifty, he +demanded the loan of that sum, which we could not refuse. He offered us +a pawn not worth half; which we refused to accept, hoping he would now +allow us to proceed to Calicut, but he put us off with delays. He +likewise urged us to give his brother a present. + +On the 28th, the Zamorin came into the apartment where we were, and gave +Mr Woolman two gold rings, and one to each of the rest; and next day he +invited us to come to his tumbling sports. That same night, Stamford +went out with his sword in his hand, telling the boy that he would +return presently. The next news we had of him was, that he was in the +hands of the Cochin nayres. He had lost His way while drunk, and meeting +with some of them, they asked where he wished to go; he said to the +Zamorin, to whom they undertook to conduct him, and he knew not that he +was a prisoner, till he got to Cochin. This incident put us in great +fear, but the Zamorin gave us good words, saying he was better pleased +to find him a knave now, than after he had put trust in him. + +We had leave in April to depart with our goods to Calicut, where we +arrived on the 22d of that month, and were well received; but had to +remain in the custom-house, till we could get a more convenient house, +which was made ready for us on the 6th of May, with promise of a better +after the rains. We were very desirous, according to our orders from +the general, to have sent a messenger with his and our letters to +Surat, to acquaint our countrymen that we were here; but the governor +would not consent till we had sold all our goods. On the 18th of June, +one was sent. On the 26th, part of our goods were sold to the merchants +of Calicut, by the governor's procurement, with fair promises of part +payment shortly. But it is not the custom of the best or the worst in +this country to keep their words, being certain only in dissembling. Mr +Woolman was desirous of going to Nassapore to make sales, but the +governor put him off with divers shifts from time to time. The 3d July, +our messenger for Surat returned, reporting that he had been set upon +when well forwards on his way, and had his money and letters taken from +him, after being well beaten. Among his letters was one from Captain +Keeling to the next general, the loss of which gave us much concern; yet +we strongly suspected that our messenger had been robbed by his own +consent, and had lost nothing but his honesty. A broker of Nassapore +told Mr Needham, that our dispatches had been sold to the Portuguese, +and when the governor heard of this, he hung down his head, as guilty. +We here sold some goods to merchants of Nassapore. + +Mr Woolman died on the 17th of August. We could not procure payment of +our promised money, and were told by our broker, that some one of our +debtors would procure a respite from the governor, by means of a bribe, +on which the rest would refuse till they all paid. On the 24th, the +Zamorin's sister sent us word, that she would both cause our debtors to +pay us, and to lend us any money we needed; but we found her as false as +the rest The queen mother also made us fair promises, and several others +made offers to get letters conveyed for us to Surat; but all their words +were equally false. Thus wronged, Mr Needham farther wronged himself by +his indiscretion, threatening, in presence of a nayre who attended us, +and who revealed his threats, that he would go to the king of Cochin, +making shew of violent revenge to put the governor in fear. He behaved +outrageously likewise to a _scrivano_,[181] who is the same as a justice +with us, taking him by the throat, and making as if he would have cut +him down with his sword, for detaining some of our money which he had +received. Our broker also told Mr Needham, that it was not becoming to +go up and down the streets with a sword and buckler; and indeed his +whole conduct and behaviour more resembled those we call +_roaring-boys_,[182] than what became the character of a merchant. For +my admonitions, he requited me with ill language, disgracing himself and +injuring the affairs of the company. + +[Footnote 181: This term is obviously Portuguese, and cannot be the +proper appellation for a judge on the Malabar coast.--E.] + +[Footnote 182: This character is now only to be met with in some of our +old plays such as Captain Bobadil in Every Man in his Humour.--E.] + +A Dutch ship, which had been trading in the Red Sea, arrived here on the +23d of September, with the intention of settling a factory, and they +were referred by the governor to the Zamorin, promising to carry a +letter for us, but went without it; so that our delays continued. Mr +Needham went himself to the Zamorin on the 4th November, and returned on +the 25th, having got a present of a gold chain, a jewel, and a gold +armlet, with orders also from the king to further our purposes; but the +performance was as slow as before. The 20th December, a Malabar captain +brought in a prize he had taken from the Portuguese, and would have +traded with us; but we could not get in any of our money, due long +before. We also heard that day of four English ships being at Surat. The +governor and people continued their wonted perfidiousness; the former +being more careful in taking, and the latter in giving bribes, than in +paying our debts. We used a strange contrivance of policy to get in some +of these; for, when we went to their houses, demanding payment, and +could get none, we threatened not to leave their house till they paid +us. We had heard it reported, that, according to their customs, they +could neither eat nor wash while we were in their houses; and by this +device we sometimes got fifty _fanos_ from one, and an hundred from +another. They would on no account permit us to sleep in their houses, +except one person, with whom we remained three days and nights, with +three or four nayres. They were paid for watching him, but we got +nothing. The nayre, who had been appointed by the king to gather in our +debts, came to demand a gratuity from us, though he had not recovered +any of our money. He would go to the debtor's houses, taking three or +four _fanos_, and then depart without any of our money. + +On the 9th of January, 1616, Mr Needham went to demand payment of a +debt, and being refused permission to pass by a nayre who struck him, as +he says, he gave the nayre a dangerous wound in the head with his sword, +of which it is thought he cannot recover, and others of the natives were +hurt in the fray. Word was presently brought to us to shut up our doors, +lest the nayres should assemble to do us some mischief, as feuds or +kindred-quarrels and murders are common among them, having no other law +or means of vengeance. Our nayre with his kindred, to the number of +thirty or more, with pikes, swords, and bucklers, guarded Mr Needham +home, on which occasion we had to give a gratuity. Our house had to be +guarded for three or four days and nights, none of us daring to go out +into the streets for money or other business for a week, though before +we used to go about in safety. After that, our broker advised us never +to go out, unless attended by a nayre, as they had sworn to put one of +us to death, in revenge for him who was slain. + +The 20th, the Portuguese armado of thirty-four sail, passed by from the +south, of which fourteen were ships, and the rest frigates or grabs. +They put into the harbour, in which three Malabar frigates lay at +anchor, and a hot fight ensued, in which the Portuguese were forced to +retreat with disgrace, having only cut the hawser of one of the +frigates, which drove on shore and was stove in pieces. This belonged to +the governor, who was well served, for he remained like a coward in the +country, keeping four or five great guns that were in the town locked +up, except one, and for it they had only powder and shot for two +discharges. Before the fight ended, some 4000 nayres were come in from +the country, and several were slain on both sides. Nine or ten +Portuguese were driven ashore, and two or three of the chiefs of these +were immediately hung up by the heels, and being taken down after two +days, were thrown to be devoured by wild beasts. + +On the 28th of January, we were told by a Pattemar, that the governor +was only our friend outwardly, wishing rather to have the Portuguese in +our room, as we did no good in the country, bringing only goods to sell, +whereas the Portuguese did good by making purchases. The 8th of February +we had letters from Surat; and on the 4th of March, the Zamorin wrote to +us, that if our ships came, he wished them to come to Paniany, and that +we need not be anxious for our money, as he would pay us, even if he +were forced to sell his rings. + +SECTION VI. + +_Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Ambassador from King James I, to Shah +Jehanguiro, Mogul Emperor of Hindoostan_.[183] + +INTRODUCTION. + +There are two editions of this journal in our older Collections of +Voyages and Travels, but both exceeding defective and imperfect. The +_first_ of these is in the Pilgrims of Purchas, which is said to have +been "_Collected out_ of the Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Knight, Lord +Ambassador from his Majesty of Great Britain, to the Great Mogul." It is +evidently to be considered as an _abridgement_ made by Purchas, which, +indeed, he fully acknowledges in a postscript, in the following +terms:--"Some readers may perhaps wish they had the whole journal, and +not thus contracted into _extracts_ of those things out of it which I +conceived more fit for the public. And for the whole, myself would have +wished it; but neither with the honourable Company, nor elsewhere, could +I learn of it, the worthy knight himself being now employed in like +honourable embassage from his majesty to the _Great Turk_." Besides that +it is a mere abridgement, often most confusedly, and almost +unintelligibly tacked together, this article in The Pilgrims breaks off +abruptly in a most interesting part of the narrative, which we have now +no means to supply. The full title of this article in The Pilgrims is as +follows:--"Observations collected out of the Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, +Knight, Lord Ambassador from his Majesty the King of Great Britain, to +the Great Mogul. Consisting of Occurrences worthy of Memory, in the way, +and at the Court of the Mogul; together with an Account of his Customs, +Cities, Countries, Subjects, and other Circumstances relating to India." + +[Footnote 183: Purch. Pilgr. I. 535. Churchill's Collect. I. 617.] + +The _other_ edition of this journal is in the collection published by +the Churchills, of which we quote from the third edition of 1744, +reprinted by Lintot and Osburn, booksellers in London. Of this edition +the editor of that collection gives the following account:--"Sir Thomas +Roe has before appeared in print, in part at least, in the collection of +Purchas, since translated into French, and published in the first volume +of the collection by Thevenot. He now comes again abroad with +considerable additions, not foisted in, but taken from his own original +manuscript, of which it would appear that Purchas only had an imperfect +copy. These additions, it is true, are not great in bulk, but they are +valuable for the subject; and several matters, which in the other +collection are brought in abruptly, are here continued in a more +methodical manner." + +After an attentive comparison of these two former editions, it obviously +appears that the edition by Purchas, in 1625, is in general more +circumstantial and more satisfactory than that of Churchill, in 1744, +notwithstanding its superior pretensions, as above stated. Yet, on +several occasions, the edition in Churchill gives a more intelligible +account of particulars, and has enabled us, on these occasions, to +restore what Purchas, by careless abbreviation, had left an obscure and +almost unintelligible jumble of words. The present edition, therefore, +is formed upon a careful collation of these two former, supplying from +each what was defective in the other. On the present occasion, the +nautical and other observations made by Sir Thomas Roe during the voyage +from England to Surat, are omitted, having been already inserted into +the account of that voyage by Captain Peyton. + +It were much to be desired that this first account of the political +intercourse between Britain and Hindoostan could have been given at full +length, more especially as that extensive, rich, populous, and fertile +country is now almost entirely reduced under the dominion of the British +crown; and as Sir Thomas Roe, even in the garbled state in which we are +forced to present his observations, clearly shews the inherent vices of +the Mogul government, through which it so rapidly fell into anarchy, and +was torn in pieces by its own cumbrous and ill-managed strength. Perhaps +the archives of the East India Company are still able to supply this +deficiency in the history of its original establishment; and it were +surely worthy of the more than princely grandeur of that great +commercial company, to patronise the publication of a collection of the +voyages, travels, negotiations, and events which have conduced to raise +it to a degree of splendour unexampled in the history of the world. The +importance of this first embassy from Great Britain to the Great Mogul, +and the vast consequences, both commercial and political, which have +since arisen from that early intercourse, have induced us to give the +following additional information respecting the mission of Sir Thomas +Roe, from the Annals of the East India Company, vol. I. p. 174, _et +sequ._, which will in some measure supply the defects in this journal, +as published by Purchas and Churchill.--E. + + * * * * * + +"The information which the Court [of Committees or Directors of the +East India Company] had received, in the preceding season, [1613-14] +induced them to apply to the king to grant his royal authority that an +ambassador should proceed in his name to the Great Mogul. King James, in +compliance with the wishes of the Company, on the 14th January, 1614-15, +granted his commission to the celebrated Sir Thomas Roe, "to be +ambassador to the Great Mogul, or king of India," the company agreeing +to defray the expence, in consideration, that, under their exclusive +privileges, they were to acquire such benefits as might result from this +mission. + +"Sir Thomas Roe sailed from England in March 1615, on board the Lion, +Captain Newport, and arrived at Surat, whence he proceeded to the +Mogul's court at Agimere, which he reached in December, 1615; and on the +10th January, 1616, was presented to the Mogul as ambassador from the +king of England, when he delivered the king's letter and presents. Of +these, an English coach was the chief article, and with it the Mogul was +pleased to express his satisfaction, and to give the ambassador a +gracious reception. From the company's agents having already been too +profuse in their presents to the ministers and favourites, Sir Thomas +found that the articles which he carried out as presents were not so +highly estimated as he expected; he therefore informed the court that +nothing less than valuable jewels would be deemed worthy of acceptance; +and at the same time he advised that 'four or five cases of red wine' +should be sent as presents to the king and prince, as, in his own words, +'never were men more enamoured of that drinke as these two, and which +they would more highly esteem than all the jewels in Chepeside.' + +"In describing his own situation, he stated that the natives could not +comprehend what was meant in Europe by the rank or quality of an +ambassador, and that in future it would be preferable to employ an agent +only, who could bear these affronts without dishonour, which an +ambassador, from, his rank, could not encounter. He complains also, +that, from want of an interpreter, he had experienced much difficulty in +explaining to the Mogul, and to his ministers, the object of his +mission; in particular, the grievances which the English had suffered +from the governor of Ahmedabad, because the native brokers, whom he was +obliged to employ, were afraid to interpret literally, lest they should +either incur the king's displeasure, or be disgraced by his ministers. +In his application for redress from the governor of Ahmedabad, he +discovered that this officer was supported by sultan Churrum, the +Mogul's eldest-son,[184] and Asaph Khan, the favourite. By perseverance +and firmness, however, the ambassador at length obtained the relief he +solicited. + +[Footnote 184: Sultan Chesuro appears to have been the eldest son of +Jehanguire, but held in confinement for having endeavoured to supplant +his father in the succession, and Churrum seems only to have been the +third son.--E.] + +"On the 24th January, 1616, Sir Thomas had a second audience of the +Mogul, at which he complained of the injuries the English had sustained +from the arbitrary conduct of the governor of Surat, and so effectual +were his remonstrances, that this officer was dismissed. The ambassador +then proposed to renew the articles of the _phirmaund_, or treaty +between the Mogul and the English nation, and solicited to have the +treaty ratified by the signatures[185] of the Mogul and Sultan Churrum, +which being procured, the treaty was concluded.[186] + +[Footnote 185: This expression is rather ambiguous, as the ratifications +of such papers in India were by the seals of the princes, and not what +we understand by the term used in the text--E.] + +[Footnote 186: It has not been thought necessary to insert the substance +of this treaty as contained in the Annals, as it is given in the +Journal.--E.] "The dispatches of Sir Thomas, of this year, concluded +with recommending to the company, as a commercial speculation, to send +out annually a large assortment of all kinds of toys, which would find a +ready sale at the great festival of _Noroose_, [the new year] in the +month of March. + +"In 1616 we discover a jealousy in the factory at Surat, of Sir Thomas +Roe, notwithstanding his efforts and success in obtaining phirmaunds +from the Mogul favourable to the factories at Surat and Ahmedabad, and +in general for the encouragement of English trade in the Mogul +dominions; for the factors represented to the court that a merchant or +agent would be better qualified for a commercial negociator than a +king's ambassador; and, in support of this opinion, referred to the +practice of the king of Spain, who on no occasion would send an +ambassador, but always a commercial agent; and stated that Sir Thomas +Roe, besides, considered himself to be vested with the exercise of a +controlling power over the commercial speculations of the Surat factory, +and held himself to be better qualified to judge of the English +interests by combining the political relations which he wished to +introduce between the Mogul and the king of England, than by forwarding +any projects for trade which the factory might devise as applicable to +the Mogul dominions. + +"In this year he reported that he had returned thanks to Sultan Churrum +for the protection which he had afforded to the English in relieving +them from the extortions of Zulfeccar Khan, the late governor of Surat, +and had remonstrated against the partiality which had been shown to the +Portuguese; representing to the Mogul that the king of Portugal had +assumed the title of king of India, and that the Portuguese trade could +never be so beneficial as that of England, as the English annually +exported from India calicoes and indigo to the amount of 50,000 rials. +To strengthen this remonstrance, Sir Thomas offered to pay to the sultan +12,000 rupees yearly, on condition that the English should be exempted +from the payment of customs at the port of Surat; and then gave it as +his opinion, that the plan of the agency at Surat, of keeping permanent +factories at Surat, and other parts of the Mogul dominions, ought to be +abandoned, as it would be preferable to make the purchases of goods +inland, by the natives, [particularly the indigo from Agra, and the +Bengal goods] who could obtain them at reasonable rates. But if the +court were of opinion that English factors ought to be stationed at +Agra, he recommended sending the goods in carts rather than on camels. +He concludes this part of his report by advising that agents should +reside at Cambay and Baroach, because the best cloths in India could be +procured at these towns. + +"Though Sir Thomas Roe appears to have procured a phirmaund through the +means of Noor-Mahal, the favourite sultana or empress, for the general +good treatment of the English at Surat, and had desired that an +assortment of English goods, perfumes, &c. should be forwarded to him as +presents to her and to her brother, Asaph Khan, he yet describes, in +1618, the governor of Surat as reluctant to shew that favour to the +English which the phirmaund had enjoined. It therefore became a question +with him, as the governor of Surat would not allow the English to +strengthen or fortify their factory for the protection of their goods +and servants, whether it might not be expedient to remove to some other +station, where the means of self-defence might be more practicable. At +one time he thought of Goga, and subsequently of Scindy; but, after a +review of the whole, decided that it would be more expedient to remain +at Surat, though, from the character of the natives, and the instability +of the Mogul government, all grants of privileges must be considered as +temporary, and any agreement or capitulation which might be procured, +ought not to be depended on as permanent. He concludes, that, though a +general phirmaund for trade in the Mogul dominions had been obtained, +and of course a foundation laid for the English intercourse with the +rich provinces of Bengal, yet the attempt to enter on that trade would +be unwise, from being in the exclusive possession of the Portuguese. + +"Sir Thomas Roe returned from the embassy to Surat in the spring of +1618-19, when it appears that the opposition in opinion between him and +the factors at that place had subsided, as the efforts of both were +united to establish a distinct system for the trade of the English at +Surat. It has been already stated that Sir Thomas Roe had procured a +phirmaund to the English from the Mogul, for the establishment of a +general trade in his extensive dominions, but that the relaxed situation +of the government, which always, under the administration of the Moguls, +preceded an expected succession to the throne, had rendered the governor +of Surat, at this juncture, less obsequious to the orders of his +sovereign than the absolute nature of the constitution would otherwise +have prescribed. Under these circumstances, and to improve upon the +general treaty already mentioned, Sir Thomas Roe made proposals to +Sultan Churrum to enter into an alliance for resisting the pretensions +of the Portuguese. After long discussions with that prince, this treaty +was concluded, and the following are its leading articles. + +"That the governor of Surat should lend ships to the English, to be +employed in the defence of that port. The English, however, to be only +allowed to land ten armed men at one time; but the resident merchants to +be allowed to wear arms. That the English should be allowed to build a +house in the city, but distant from the castle.[187] That the governor +of Surat should receive the ambassador and his suite with marks of +honour. That the English should enjoy the free exercise of their +religion, and be governed by their own laws. That in any dispute between +the English and the natives; reference was to be made to the governor +and his officers, who should decide speedily and justly; but disputes +among themselves were to be decided by their own factory. That liberty +of trade was to be allowed the English, in its fullest extent, on +payment of the usual duties on landing the goods, from which pearls, +jewels, &c. were to be exempted. That freedom of speech was to be +allowed to the English linguists and brokers, in all matters regarding +the trade of their employers. And, lastly, That all presents intended +for the court were to be opened and examined at the customhouse of +Surat, and then sealed and given back to the English, and to pass +duty-free; but, in case these presents were not made, then these +articles were to become liable to pay duty. + +[Footnote 187: Though not so expressed in the Annals, this appears to +have been a _fortified_ house; as, on an occasion, when Surat was taken +and plundered by an armed force belonging to Sevagee, the first +sovereign of the Mahrattas, the English were able to defend their +factory from injury.--E.] + +"During his residence in India, Sir Thomas Roe had likewise used his +best endeavours to promote the trade of the English with the ports of +Persia, in which considerable opposition was experienced from the +Portuguese, who tried every expedient to engross the Persian trade to +themselves, and to exclude the English from any participation. In this +opposition Sir Robert Shirley had been implicated, who had gone to +Europe in 1615, on a mission from the king of Persia, to form a contract +with the king of Spain, then sovereign of Portugal, not only to sell to +his subjects the whole of the Persian silk, but to grant them licence to +fortify the sea-ports of Persia for the protection of their shipping and +factories. Mr Connock, the English agent in Persia, under these +circumstances, recommended the necessity of applying to king James, and +submitting to his consideration the danger of allowing the Portuguese to +enjoy the exclusive possession of that trade, which would render them +the most powerful European nation in the East Indies. In the mean time, +he represented to the king of Persia the necessity of seizing the island +of Ormus from the Portuguese, under the protection of which the Persian +dominions could be supplied by the English with all kinds of Indian +commodities. + +"In this critical situation of the company's agents at Ispahan, an +ambassador arrived from the king of Spain, in June 1617, authorised to +adjust and settle the contract which Sir Robert Shirley had projected. +The English agent, in consequence, urged the factory at Surat to +dispatch the whole of the company's ships to Jasques for the defence of +that port, as the Portuguese fleet had rendezvoused at Muscat, and had +determined to blockade the passage into the Persian gulf against the +English trade. These events induced Sir Thomas Roe to grant a +commission, and to give instructions to the company's agent at Ispahan, +authorising him to treat with the king of Persia, in the name of the +king of England. + +"In 1618, Captain Shillings, of the company's ship Ann, went to Mokha, +and obtained a phirmaund from the governor, by which the English were +allowed free trade, and protection to their persons and property, on +condition of paying three per cent. on merchandize, and three per cent. +on the prices of all goods exported by them from Mokha. On receiving +information of this event, Sir Thomas Roe addressed a letter to the +governor of Mokha, requesting that these privileges might be confirmed +by the Grand Signior, and promising, on the part of the English, that +all kinds of European goods should be regularly brought to Mokha, and +that the English should defend that port against all enemies, and +particularly against the Portuguese. + +"This appears to have been the last transaction of Sir Thomas Roe in the +East Indies. In his voyage home he touched at Saldanha bay [Table bay] +in May, 1619, where he met, and held a conference with the Dutch admiral +Hoffman, who commanded the outward-bound fleet from Holland of that +season. From this officer he learned that the respective governments in +Europe, alarmed at the commercial jealousies and animosities between +their subjects in the East Indies, had appointed commissioners to take +that subject into consideration. It was therefore, with a becoming sense +of duty, agreed between them that each should address a letter to the +chiefs of their respective factories in India, recommending to them to +abstain from any opposition or violence against each other, till each +had received specific instructions from their superiors, or should be +informed of the result of the conferences between the commissioners of +the two nations in Europe." + +§1. _Journey from Surat to the Court of the Mogul, and Entertainment +there, with some Account of the Customs of the Country_. + +I landed at Surat on the 26th September, 1615, and was received in an +open tent by the chief officers of the town, well attended. On this +occasion I was accompanied by the general, and principal merchants, +Captain Harris being sent to make me a court of guard with an hundred +shot, and the ships, all dressed out to the best advantage, saluted me +with their ordnance as I passed. There was much controversy about +searching my servants, but at length they passed free to the city, where +we had a house provided for us. We continued there to the 30th October, +suffering much vexation from the governor, who forcibly caused search +many of our chests and trunks, taking away what he thought fit. + +The 30th October I departed from Surat, and that day travelled only four +coss to _Sumaria_.[188] The 1st November I went eleven miles to a +village. The 2d, to _Biarat_, twenty-one miles, where there is a castle, +this town being on the borders of the kingdom of Guzerat, subject to the +Mogul, and belonging to _Abraham Khan_. The 3d I entered the kingdom of +_Pardaff shah_,[189] a pagan lord of the hills, who is subject to +nobody; and at the end of fifteen miles we lodged in the fields, beside +a city of note, called _Mugher_. The 4th we travelled nine miles by a +rocky way, and lay in the fields, beside a village called Narampore. The +5th, fifteen miles, and lay in the fields. The 6th, twenty miles, to a +city called _Nundabar_, in the kingdom of _Brampore_, [Burhanpoor] which +is subject to the Mogul. At this place we first procured bread, after +leaving Surat, as the Banians, who inhabit all the country through which +we had travelled, make only cakes instead of bread. The country +peculiarly abounds in cattle, as the Banians never kill any, neither do +they sell any for being slaughtered. One day I met at least 10,000 +bullocks loaded with grain, in one drove, and most other days I saw +smaller parcels. + +[Footnote 188: In this journal the names of places are exceedingly +corrupted, and often unintelligible. Such as admitted of being +corrected, from the excellent map of Hindoostan, by Arrowsmith, have +their proper names placed within brackets.--E.] + +[Footnote 189: In the miserable map of Hindoostan, accompanying this +journal in the Pilgrims, this prince is called Partap-sha.--E.] + +The 7th we went eighteen miles to _Ningull_. The 8th, fifteen to +_Sinchelly_, [Sindkera.] The 9th, other fifteen to _Tolmere_, [Talnere.] +And the 10th, eighteen to _Chapre_, [Choprah] where we pitched our tents +without the town, and the king's officers guarded us all night with +thirty horse and twenty shot, for fear of out being attacked by robbers +from the mountains, as I refused to remove into the town. The 11th we +travelled eighteen miles, eighteen on the 12th, and fifteen on the 13th, +which brought us to _Brampore_, [Burhanpoor] which I guessed to be 223 +miles east from Surat.[190] The country is miserable and barren, the +towns and villages only built of mud. At _Bartharpore_,[191] a village +two miles short of Burhanpoor, I saw some of the Mogul ordnance, most of +which is too short, and too open in the bore. On coming to Burhanpoor, +the _cutwall_ met me, well attended, having sixteen stand of colours +carried before him, and conducted me to a _serai_ appointed for my +lodging. He took leave of me at the gate, which had a handsome stone +front; but, when in, I had four chambers allotted for me, no bigger than +ovens, with vaulted roofs and bare brick walls, so that I chose to lodge +in my tent. I sent word to the cutwall, threatening to leave the town, +as I scorned such mean usage, but he desired me to be content till +morning, as this was the best lodging in the city, which I afterwards +found to be the case, as it consists entirely of mud cottages, excepting +the houses inhabited by _Sultan Parvis_, the Mogul's second son, that of +_Khan Khanan_, and a few others. Sultan Parvis here represents the king +his father, living in great state and magnificence, but Khan Khanan, who +is the greatest subject of the empire, is at the head of a large army, +in which are 40,000 horse, and governs every thing, the prince only +having the name and pomp allowed him. + +[Footnote 190: The particulars of the journey in the text amount to 214 +miles.--E.] + +[Footnote 191: Perhaps Babaderpore, but it is twelve or fifteen miles +short of Burhanpoor.--E.] + +On the 18th, both to satisfy the prince who desired it, and whom I was +not willing to displease, and to see the fashions of the court, and +because it was proposed to establish a factory here, where sword-blades +were in great request for the army, and sold well, I went to visit the +prince, to whom, I carried a present. I was conducted by the cutwall, +and in the outer court of the palace I found about an hundred horsemen +under arms, who formed a line on each side, being all gentlemen waiting +to salute the prince on his coming forth. In the inner court the prince +sat in a high gallery encircling the court, having a canopy over head, +and a carpet spread before him, appearing in much, yet barbarous state. +Going towards him through a lane of people, an officer came and told me +that I must touch the ground with my head, and with my hat off. I +answered, that I came to do the prince honour by visiting him, and was +not to be subjected to the custom of slaves. So I walked on till I came +to a place railed in, just under where he sat, where there was an ascent +of three steps; and having there made him a reverence, to which he +answered by bending his body, I went within the rails, where stood all +the great men then in the town, holding their hands before them like +slaves. This place, as mentioned before, was covered over head by a rich +canopy, and all the floor was spread with carpets. It resembled a large +stage, and the prince sat on high, like a mock king in a theatre. + +On entering, as I had no place assigned me, I went right forwards, and +stood before him at the bottom of the three steps, on which stood his +secretary, readily to convey to him any thing that is said or given. I +told him that I was ambassador from the king of England to his father; +and, while passing his residence, I could not but in honour visit his +highness. He answered that I was welcome, and asked me many questions +about the king my master, to which I gave fit answers. While standing in +that manner at the foot of the steps, I asked leave to come up and stand +beside him; but he said, even if the king of Persia, or Grand Turk, were +there, such a thing could not be allowed. To this I replied, that I must +be excused for believing he would, in such a case, come down and meet +them at his gate; and that I required no higher privilege than was +allowed to the ambassadors of these sovereigns, with whom I considered +myself entirely equal. He declared I should have that privilege in all +things. I then demanded to have a chair, to which it was answered, that +no person was ever allowed to sit in that place, but I was desired to +lean against a pillar covered over with silver, which supported the +canopy. I then requested his favour for an English factory to be +established at Burhanpoor, which readily granted, and gave immediate +orders to the _Buksh_ to draw up a _firmaun_, license, for their coming +and residence. I also requested an order for carriages for conveying the +presents for the king his father, which he gave in charge to the cutwall +to see provided. I then made him a present, which he took in good part. +After some other conference, he said, though I might not come up to +where he then sat, he would go to another place, where I might come to +him with less ceremony. But one part of the present I made him happened +to be a case of cordials, of which he tasted so freely by the way, that, +after waiting some time, I heard he had made himself drunk, and one of +his officers came to me with an excuse, desiring me to go home then, and +come some other time to see him. But that very night I was taken ill of +a fever. + +The 27th of November, though, still sick, I was carried, from Burhanpoor +three coss to _Raypora_; the 28th, fifteen c. to _Burgome_, [Burgaw]; +the 30th, seven c. December the 1st, ten c. to _Bicangome_; the 2d, +seven c. the 3d, five c. the 4th, eleven c. to _Ekbarpoor_, which stands +on a good river, [the Nerbudda] which runs into the sea near _Buroach_. +The 5th, I passed the river _Nerbuddah_. The 6th, I travelled eight c. +and lay in a wood, not far from the king's famous castle of _Mandoa_, +[Mundu] which stands on a steep hill, of great extent, the walls being +fourteen c. in circuit, this castle being of wonderous extent and great +beauty. The 7th, I proceeded ten c. the 8th, eight c. the 9th, ten c. +the 10th, twelve c. the 11th, sixteen c. the 12th, fourteen c. the 13th, +six c. the 14th we halted to take rest. The 15th, six c. the 16th, six +c. the 17th, twelve c. the 18th, five c. when we arrived at _Cytor_, +where I was met by Mr Edwards accompanied by Thomas Coryat, who had +travelled to India on foot. + +_Cytor_, [Chitore] is an ancient town in ruins, situated on a hill, but +shews the remains of wonderful magnificence. There are still standing +above an hundred temples, all of carved stone, with many fair towers and +domes, supported by many enriched pillars, and innumerable houses, but +not a single inhabitant. The hill, or rock rather, is precipitous on all +sides, having but one ascent cut out of the rock in a regular slope; in +which ascent there are four several gates before reaching the gate of +the city, which last is extremely magnificent. The top of the hill, +about eight coss in circuit, is inclosed all round with walls, and at +the S.W. end, is a goodly old castle. I lodged close by a poor village +at the foot of the hill. + +This city stands in the country of the _Rama_,[192] a prince newly +subdued by the Mogul, or rather brought to submit to pay tribute and +acknowledge subjection; and _Cytor_ was reduced by _Akbar Shah_, the +father of _Shah Jehan-Guire_, the present king of the Moguls. This +Hindoo raja is lineally descended from _Porus_, the valiant Indian +sovereign who was conquered by Alexander the Great; so that I suppose +this city to have been one of the ancient seats of Porus, though Delly, +much farther north, is reported to have been the chiefest, a famous +place, though now only in ruins. Near that stands a pillar erected by +Alexander the Conqueror, with a Greek inscription. The present Mogul and +his ancestors, descendants of Tamerlane, have reduced all the ancient +cities to ruin, dispeopling them and forbidding their restoration; I +know not wherefore, unless that they would have no monuments of +greatness remain, beyond their own commencement, as if they and the +world were co-equals in antiquity. + +[Footnote 192: This is probably an error of the press in the Pilgrims +for the _Ranna_.--E.] + +The 19th I proceeded twelve c. on my journey; the 20th ten c. the 21st +ten c. the 22d nine c. the 23d ten c. and arrived at _Ajimere_. The +first six days journeys from Burhanpoor towards Ajimere were west, or +northwest, to get round the hills; but after that northwards, so that +these two places bear nearly N. by W. and S. by E. from each other: the +whole distance being 209 cosses,[193] which I judge to be 418 English +miles; the cosses here being longer than near the sea.[194] On my +arrival at Ajimere I was so ill as to keep my bed; but on the 10th +January, 1616, at four in the afternoon, I went to the _Durbar_, which +is the place where the Mogul sits in public daily to entertain +strangers, to receive petitions and presents, to issue commands, and to +see and be seen. Before proceeding to give an account of my reception, +it may be proper to digress a little, that I may give some account of +the customs of the court. + +[Footnote 193: The particulars in the text only amount to 200 cosses; +but the extent of one day's journey is omitted, which may explain the +difference.--E.] + +[Footnote 194: The coss at Surat is repeatedly explained, in Purchas and +Churchill, to be 1-1/2 English mile, while that of Hindoostan Proper is +rated at two miles.--E.] + +No men, except eunuchs, are permitted to come within the private +lodgings or retiring rooms of the royal palace, within which his women +keep guard with warlike weapons, and there likewise they execute justice +upon each other for offences. Every morning, the Mogul comes to a +window, called the _jarneo_,[195] which looks into the plain or open +space before the palace-gate, where he shews himself to the common +people. At noon he returns to the same place, where he sits some hours, +amusing himself with seeing fights of elephants and other wild beasts, +the men of rank then at court attending below within a railed space. He +then retires to sleep within the female apartments. In the afternoon he +comes to the before-mentioned Durbar. At eight in the evening, after +supper, he comes down to a fair court, called the _guzalcan_, in the +midst of which is a throne of freestone, on which he sits, yet +sometimes below in a chair of state, at which time only men of high +quality are admitted into the presence, and even of these only a few +have that privilege, unless by special leave. He here discourses very +affably on all subjects with those around him. No business is transacted +with him, concerning affairs of state and government, or respecting war +and peace, but at one or other of these two last-mentioned places, +where, after being publicly propounded and resolved upon, it is +registered by attendant secretaries, and any one, who has the curiosity, +may see the register for two shillings; insomuch that the common people +know as much of the affairs of state as the ministers and counsellors of +the king, and every day the king's acts and resolutions are circulated +as news, and are freely canvassed and censured by every rascal. This +course of proceeding is unchangeable, except when prevented by the +sickness of the king, or in consequence of his getting drunk, which must +always be known. Thus, though all his subjects are slaves, he lives in a +state of reciprocal bondage, being so tied to the observance of these +hours and customs, that if he were unseen one day, and no sufficient +excuse given, the people would mutiny; and no excuse will sanction his +absence for two days, unless the gates are opened, and he be seen by +some for the satisfaction of the rest. Every Tuesday, he sits in +judgement at the _jarneo_,[196] where he attends to the complaints of +his meanest subjects, listening patiently to both parties; and where +likewise he sometimes sees, with too much delight in blood, execution +performed on offenders by his elephants. _Illi meruere, sed quid tu ut +adesses_? + +[Footnote 195: in subsequent passages, this is called the Jarruco.--E.] + +Before going to the durbar, I had required to be allowed the customs of +my own country, which were freely granted. At the durbar, I was led +directly before the king, at the entrance of an outer rail, where two +noble slaves came to conduct me nearer. On entering the outer rail, I +made a profound reverence, at my entry within an interior rail I made a +second reverence, and a third when I came directly under where the king +sat. The place in which the durbar is held is a great court, to which +all sorts of people resort. The king sits in a small raised gallery; +ambassadors, great men belonging to the court, and strangers of quality, +are within the innermost rail directly under him, that space being +raised from the ground, covered overhead with canopies of silk and +velvet, and laid underfoot with good carpets. The meaner men, +representing what we would call gentry, are within the outer rail; the +common people being on the outside of all, in a base court, so that all +may see the king. The whole of this disposition hath much resemblance to +theatrical representation. The king sitting as in a gallery, the great +men raised as actors on a stage, and the vulgar below in a pit gazing at +the show. The king, on my presentation, interrupted the dull formality +of my interpreter, bidding me welcome to the brother of the king my +master. I then delivered a translation of the king's letter, and then my +commission, on both of which he looked curiously; and afterwards on my +presents, which were well received. He asked some questions; and, with a +seeming regard for my health, offered to send me his own physicians, +advising me to keep the house till I recovered strength, and that I +should freely send to him in the meantime for any thing I needed, with +assurance that I should have whatever I desired. He dismissed me with +more signs of grace and favour, if I were not flattered by the +Christians, than ever were shewn to any ambassador from the Turks or +Persians or any other nation. + +[Footnote 196: This place, formerly described as a window looking to the +esplanade in front of the palace, called _jarneo_ in Purchas, is called +_jarruco_ in Churchill.--E.] + +On the 14th I sent to offer a visit to Sultan _Churrum_,[197] the third +son of the Great Mogul, but first in favour. Hearing that he was an +enemy to all Christians, I therefore feared some affront; yet he sent me +word that I should be received with all due respect, and should have as +much content as I had already from his father. This prince is lord of +Surat, our chief residence in the empire, and his favour, therefore, was +important for our affairs. I went accordingly to visit him on the 22d at +nine in the morning, at which time he sits in public, in the same manner +as his father, to dispatch his business, and to be seen of his +followers. His character was represented to me as naturally proud, so +that I was in some fear for my reception; but, on hearing of my arrival, +instead of coming out to his public durbar, he sent one of his principal +officers to conduct me into a good inner room, never before done to any +one. The officer here entertained me with discourse concerning my +mission for half an hour, till the prince was ready; who now came forth +and used me better than his promise. I delivered him a present, but not +in the name of his majesty, as it was too mean for that purpose; but +excused the omission, by saying, That my sovereign could not know of his +being lord of Surat, which had been so lately conferred upon him; but I +had no doubt the king of England would afterwards send him one more +suited to his high rank, the one now presented being only sent by the +English merchants, who humbly commended themselves to his favour and +protection. He received all in very good part. After stating some +grievances and injuries suffered by the English at Surat, from his +governors, and of which I had forborne to complain to the king from +respect to him, he promised me speedy and effectual justice, and to +confirm our security in any way I might propose. He professed to be +entirely ignorant of any past transactions there, as stated by me, +except as informed by Asaph Khan; and especially denied having given any +order for our dismissal, which the governor had falsely alleged, and for +which he should dearly pay. He then dismissed me, full of hopes to have +our decayed state and reputation rectified, making me a promise of an +effectual firmaun for our trade and secure residence at Surat. + +[Footnote 197: In the Pilgrims, this prince is uniformly named Corone; +but the name in the text has been adopted from the authority of Dow's +History of Hindoostan. He succeeded to his father in 1627, when he +assumed the name of Shah Jehan; and was, in 1659, dethroned and +imprisoned, by his third son, the celebrated Aurungzebe, who assumed the +name of Alumguire.--E.] + +The 24th, I went again to the royal durbar to visit the king; who, on +seeing me far off, beckoned with his hand, that I should not wait the +ceremony of asking leave, but come up to him directly, and assigned me a +place near himself, above all other men, which I afterwards thought fit +to maintain. On this occasion I gave a small present; as it is the +custom for all who have any business to give something, and those who +cannot get near enough to speak, send in or hold up their gift, which he +always accepts, be it only a rupee, and demands to know their business. +He held the same course with me; for having looked curiously at my +present, and asked many questions respecting it, he demanded to know +what I wanted of him. I answered that I wanted justice. For, on the +assurance of his firmaun, which had been sent to England, the king my +master had not only given leave to his subjects to make a long and +dangerous voyage to his dominions with their goods, but had deputed me, +as his ambassador and representative, to congratulate and compliment his +majesty on the amity so happily commenced between two so mighty nations, +and to confirm the same. Yet I found that the English, who were settled +at Ahmedabad, were injured and oppressed by the governor in their +persons and goods, being fined, subjected to arbitrary exactions, and +kept as prisoners; while at every town new customs were demanded for +their goods on their passage to the port, contrary to all justice, and +in direct contravention of the formerly conceded articles of trade, as +contained in his majesty's firmaun. To this he answered, that he was +sorry to hear of such things, which should be immediately rectified; and +he gave orders for two firmauns to be immediately extended according to +my desire. By one of these, the governor of Ahmedabad was commanded to +restore the money he had exacted from Mr Kerridge, and to use the +English in future with all favour. By the other, all customs required on +any pretence by the way were abolished, and all such as had been taken +was ordered to be restored. Finally, he desired me, if these gave not +speedy and effectual remedy, that I should renew my complaint against +the disobeyer, who should be sent for to answer for his conduct; and so +dismissed me. + +The 1st of March, I rode out to see a pleasure-house belonging to the +king, two miles from Agimere, which had been given him by Asaph Khan. It +was situated between two vast rocks, by which it was so sheltered that +scarcely could the sun be any where seen. The foundations and some rooms +were hewn out of the solid rock, the rest being built of freestone. +Close adjoining was a handsome small garden, with fine fountains, with +two great _tanks_ or ponds of water, one being thirty steps higher than +the other. The way to this retreat is so narrow that only two persons +could go abreast, and is almost inaccessible, being very steep and +stony. It is a place of much melancholy, yet of great security and +delight, abounding in peacocks, turtle-doves, wild fowl, and monkies, +which inhabit the rocks impending on every side around. + +The 2d of March began the feast of _Norsose_ in the evening. This is the +festival of the new year, the ceremonies of which begin on the first new +moon after, which this year fell together. It is kept in imitation of +the Persian feast of that cause, signifying in that language _nine +days_, as anciently it continued only for that number; but these are now +doubled. On this occasion, a throne is erected about four feet high in +the _durbar court_; from the back of which, to the place where the king +comes out from the inner apartments, a space of fifty-six paces long by +forty-three broad is railed in, and covered over by _semianes_, or +canopies, of cloth of gold, velvet, and rich silk, all joined over +head, and held up by canes covered with similar stuffs. At the upper or +west end, were set out the pictures of the king of England, the queen, +the Princess Elizabeth, the Countesses of Somerset and Salisbury, and of +a citizen's wife of London. Below, there was a picture of Sir Thomas +Smith, governor of the East India Company. The whole floor was laid with +rich Persian carpets of large size, and into this place come all the +great men to wait upon the king, except a few, who were within a smaller +railed space, right before the throne, appointed to receive his +commands. Within this square there were set out many small houses, one +of which was of silver, and other curiosities of value. On the left +side, Sultan Churrum had a pavilion, the supporters of which were +covered with silver, as were also some others of those near the king's +throne. This was of wood and of a square form, inlaid with mother of +pearl, resting on four pillars covered with cloth of gold; and overhead +was a fringed drapery like a vallence of network, all of real pearls, +whence hung down pomegranates, apples, and pears, and other fruits, all +of gold, but hollow. Within that pavilion, the king sat on cushions, +very rich in pearls and other jewels. All round the court before the +throne, the principal men had tents or pavilions, mostly lined with +velvet, damask, and taffety, and some few with cloth of gold, in which +they were stationed, making shew of their wealth. Anciently, the kings +used to go to every tent, taking away whatever pleased him best: But now +the custom is changed, as the king remains on his throne, and receives +there such new-year's-gifts as are brought to him. He makes his +appearance every day, and retires at the usual hours of the durbar; and +in the interval all sorts of great gifts are made to him, which are very +great and almost incredible, though not equal to report. At the close of +this feast, in recompence for these gifts, the king advances some of his +courtiers, making additions to their charges of horse, according to his +pleasure. + +On the 12th[198] I went to visit the king, and was brought immediately +before him to deliver my present, which gave him much satisfaction. He +then appointed me to come within the rail, that I might stand beside +him; but not being allowed to step up on the raised platform on which +the throne was placed, I could see little, as the railing was high, and +covered with carpets. But I had permission to view the inner room at +leisure, which, I must confess, was very rich; but consisted of so many +articles, all unsuitable to each other, that it seemed patched work, +rather than magnificent, as if it aimed to shew all; as if a lady, among +her plate on a magnificent cupboard, should exhibit her embroidered +slippers. This evening, the son of the Raima, the new tributary formerly +mentioned, was brought before the king, with much ceremony, being sent +by his father with a present. After kneeling three times, and knocking +his forehead on the ground, he was brought within the inner rail, when +the king embraced his head. His gift was an Indian tray or voider full +of silver, upon which was a carved silver dish full of gold. He was then +conducted to pay his respects to the prince. This evening, some +elephants were shewn, and some music girls sang and danced.--_Sic +transit gloria mundi_. + +[Footnote 198: It may be proper to observe, that Churchill's edition +gives the commencement of this festival on the 11th, and says Sir Thomas +went to the durbar next day.--E.] + +The 13th at night, I went again to wait upon the king at the _Guzalcan_, +at which is the best opportunity for transacting business, and took with +me my Italian interpreter, determined to walk no longer in darkness, but +to prove the king, as I had hitherto been delayed and refused on all +hands. I was sent for in, along with my old broker, but my Italian was +kept out, because Asaph Khan mistrusted I might say more than he was +willing should come to the king's ears. On coming to the king, he +appointed me a place to stand just before him, and sent to ask me many +questions respecting the king of England, and about the present I had +made him the day before. To some of these I made answers; but I at +length said, that my interpreter was kept out, and as I could not speak +Portuguese, I wanted the means of satisfying his majesty. On this, +though much against the wish or Asaph Khan, my Italian interpreter was +called in. I then made him tell the king that I requested leave to speak +to him, to which he answered, willingly. On this, the son-in-law of +Asaph Khan pulled away my interpreter by force, and that faction so +hemmed in the king, by gathering round him, that I could scarcely see +his majesty, nor could my Italian approach. Upon this, I ordered the +Italian to speak aloud, that I craved audience of the king; who +immediately called me before him, and the others made way. Asaph Khan +stood on one side of my interpreter, and I on the other: I to inform him +what to say, and the other to awe him by winks and signs. + +I desired him to say, that I had now been two months at court, one of +which I had spent in sickness and the other in compliments, and had +effected nothing of all on which I had been sent by the king my master; +which was to conclude a firm and lasting treaty of peace and amity +between the two sovereigns, and to establish a fair and secure trade and +residence for my countrymen in his majesty's dominions. He answered that +this was already granted. I replied, it was so; but that it still +depended upon so slender a thread, and such weak conditions, as to be +very uncertain in its continuance. That an affair of so high importance +required an agreement dear and explicit in all points, and a more formal +and authentic confirmation than it now had, by ordinary firmauns, which +were merely temporary commands, and respected accordingly. He asked me +what presents we would bring him? To which I answered, the league was +yet new and weak; that many curiosities were to be found in our country, +of rare value, which the king of England would send; and that our +merchants would search for such things in all parts of the world, if +they were made sure of a quiet trade and secure protection on honourable +conditions, having been hitherto subjected to manifold wrongs. He asked +me what kind of curiosities I meant, and whether these were jewels or +precious stones? To this I answered, that we did not deem such things +fit to be sent back from Europe to India, of which he was the principal +sovereign, as they were common here in India, and of much higher price +with us in Europe: But that we would endeavour to find such things for +his majesty as were rare and uncommon in his dominions; such as +excellent specimens of painting, carving, enamelling, figures in brass, +copper, and stone, rich embroideries, stuffs of gold and silver, and the +like. + +The king said that these things were all very well, but that he wished +to have an English horse. I answered, that this was utterly impossible +by sea, and that the Turks would not allow of any being sent by land. In +reply, he said he thought it not impossible by sea; and, when I +represented the dangers from storms, he said if six were sent in one +ship, one of them surely might live, and though it came lean, it might +be here made fat. I then told him, I feared it could not be done by so +long a voyage; yet, for his majesty's satisfaction, I should give due +notice of his desire. + +He then asked to know what were my demands? I answered, That his majesty +would be pleased to sanction by his royal signature, certain reasonable +conditions which I should propound, in confirmation of a league of +peace and amity, and for the security of our nation in their residence +and trade in his dominions; as they had hitherto been often wronged, and +could not continue on their present terms, of which I forbore to make +any specific complaint, because I hoped to procure amendment from his +majesty. At these words, Asaph Khan offered to pull away my interpreter, +but I held him fast, while Asaph Khan continued to make signs to him not +to interpret my words. On this the king became suddenly very angry, +pressing to know who had wronged us, and seemed in such fury, that I was +unwilling to follow it out, and spoke in broken Spanish to my +interpreter, desiring him to say, That I would not trouble his majesty +with what was past, but would seek justice of the prince his son, whose +favour I doubted not to obtain. Not attending to what my interpreter +said, but hearing the name of his son, the king mistakingly conceived I +accused him; and hastily saying _mio filio! mio filio_! he called for +the prince, who came in great fear, humbling himself. Asaph Khan +trembled, and all those present were amazed. + +He chid the prince roundly, and he excused himself. But as I perceived +the king's error, I made both the king and prince understand the +mistake, by means of a Persian prince who offered himself as +interpreter, as my Italian understood Turkish better than Persian. By +this means I appeased the king, saying that I in no respect accused the +prince, but wished to inform his majesty that I should appeal to the +prince's justice, in regard to the past wrongs our nation had suffered +in those places which were under his government. The king then commanded +the prince, that he should give as effective justice. In his +justification, the prince said that he had already offered me a firmaun, +which I had refused. The king asked me the reason of this. To which I +answered, that I humbly thanked the prince, but he knew that it +contained a condition I could not accept; and besides, that I wished to +propound our own demands, in which I would insert all the desires of the +king my master at once, that I might not daily trouble his majesty and +the prince with complaints. And, when the conditions on both sides were +mutually agreed upon, I would reciprocally bind my sovereign, to mutual +offices of friendship, and to such reasonable conditions for the benefit +of his majesty's subjects as he might propose: All of which being drawn +up in tripartite, I hoped his majesty would graciously sign one, his son +the prince another, and I would confirm the third in the name of my +sovereign, in virtue of my commission. + +The king pressed to know what was the condition in the prince's firmaun +which I had refused, which I stated. So we fell into earnest dispute +before the king, with some heat. Mukrob Khan interposed, saying he was +advocate for the Portuguese, and spoke slightingly of us, alleging that +the king ought to grant no articles to us that were unfavourable for +them. I answered, that I did not propose any against them, but only in +our own just defence, and that I had not conceived he was so great a +friend to the Portuguese. On this the jesuit and all the Portuguese +faction struck in, so that I explained myself fully concerning them; and +as I offered a conditional peace, so I valued the friendship of the +Portuguese at a very low rate, and their enmity at a still lower. After +some time, having explained my demands, the king said my proposals were +just and my resolution noble, and bade me clearly propound the +conditions I desired. Asaph Khan, who had stood silent during all this +debate, and who now wished to end it, as we were warm, now interposed, +saying, If we talked all night, it could only come to this at last, that +I should draw my demands in writing and present them; which, if found +reasonable, would be granted by the king. The king said he certainly +would do so; and at my request the prince engaged to do so likewise. The +king then rose to go away, but on my request he turned round, and I +desired my interpreter to say, That I came the day before to see his +majesty and his greatness, and the ceremonies of the feast, on which +occasion I was placed behind him, in an honourable place certainly, but +where I could not see around; and therefore humbly requested his majesty +would be pleased to let me stand on the platform beside his throne. In +answer to this, he commanded Asaph Khan to let me choose my own place in +future. + +In the morning of the 14th, I sent a messenger to Asaph Khan, lest he or +the prince might have misunderstood me, by reason of the king's mistake, +and had supposed I had complained against either of them, which I did +not, neither did I so intend; yet I was willing to let them see that I +did not entirely depend upon Asaph Khan, by whom I had hitherto done my +business with the king; but, if he should continue his manner of only +delivering to the king what he himself pleased, and not what I said, I +would find another way. My message was intended to clear up any such +doubts, if they remained, and to entreat he would move the prince to +favour my demands respecting our residence and trade at Surat. His +answer was, that neither the prince nor he had any reason to suspect I +intended to complain against them, the error being sufficiently obvious; +and that, for his part, he had ever been disposed to favour the English, +and would so continue. + +The 15th I went again in the evening to see the ceremonies of the +_Norose_; and according to the Mogul's order, I chose my place of +standing on his right hand, and on the raised platform, the prince and +the son of the Ranna standing on the other side. I here had a full view +of every thing that was to be seen; viz. the presents, and the +exhibition of the elephants, horses, and dancing girls. + +The 23d, the Mogul condemned one of his own nation on suspicion of +felony; but as he was one of the handsomest men in India, and the proof +was not very clear against him, instead of condemning him to death, he +sent him in irons to me as a slave, to be disposed of as I pleased. This +was looked upon as a great favour, and I accordingly returned thanks; +yet added, that we had no slaves in England, not thinking it lawful to +make the image of God like unto a beast, but that I should employ him as +a servant, and should restore him to liberty if he behaved well. The +king was well pleased with this message. + +I went to the _Guzalcan_ on the 26th, and it delivered in the articles +which I had drawn up, which were referred to Asaph Khan for his +consideration and report. Some time after, Asaph Khan sent a message, +desiring me to remove from the place I occupied near the king, because I +stood alone, which was not the custom. I refused at the first; but, as +he still insisted I should rank myself among the nobles, I removed to +the other side, where the prince and young Ranna were. This still more +displeased Asaph Khan, who persuaded the prince to complain of me to the +king, which he did. On hearing their complaint and my answer, that I had +changed my place by order of Asaph Khan, the Mogul said I had done well, +and they were wrong to pretend to displace me. So I kept my place in +quiet. The following is the substance of the articles delivered to the +Great Mogul, which were delayed and opposed: But the conclusion +respecting them will be seen hereafter. + +_Proposed Articles of Treaty, between the Great Mogul and the King of +Great Britain_. + +1. There shall be perpetual peace and amity between the king of Great +Britain and his majesty the emperor of India.--2. The subjects of +England shall have free trade in all the ports of India.--3. The +governors of all sea ports shall make public proclamation of this +agreement three several times, upon the arrival of any English +ships.--4. The English merchants and their servants, shall not be liable +to search, or to any ill usage.--5. No presents sent to the Mogul shall +be opened.--6. The goods belonging to the English shall not be stopped +more than twenty-four-hours at the custom-houses; where they shall only +be sealed, and sent to the house or factory of the merchants, to be +there opened and rated within six days afterwards.--7. No governor shall +take any goods by force, nor unless upon payment at the owner's price; +neither shall any be taken away under pretence of being for the king's +service.--8. The English merchants shall not be hindered from selling +their goods to whom they please, nor from sending them to other +factories; neither shall they pay any more in this case than has been +already paid at the port of entry.--9. Whatever goods the English may +purchase in any part of the dominions of the Mogul, shall be allowed to +be transmitted to the ports, without any hindrance or molestation, and +shall pay no other duty than may be agreed upon at the port of +shipping.--10. No goods already entered at a port shall be again opened, +the English shewing a certificate of their numbers, qualities, and +conditions, from the governor or other proper officers of the place +where they were purchased.--11. No confiscation shall be made of the +goods or money belonging to any of the English who may die in +India.--12. No duties shall be demanded for provisions, purchased during +the stay of English ships at any of the ports.--13. The servants of the +English merchants, whether English or natives, shall not be punished or +beaten for doing their duty.--14. The Mogul shall cause any governor or +officer to be punished for the breach of any of these articles.--15. The +English ships shall permit all others to pass and repass freely, to and +from the ports in the dominions of the Mogul, except those of their +enemies with whom they are at war: And the English, while ashore, shall +conduct themselves quietly and peaceably, as merchants.--16. The English +shall yearly furnish the Mogul with all such European rarities, and +other things, as he may desire, and at reasonable rates.--17. The +English shall pay duty on their commodities, reasonably rated, at three +and a half per cent. and two per cent. on rials of eight or money, and +shall not be liable to any other duty or exaction whatsoever.--18. The +English shall be ready to assist the Great Mogul against all his +enemies. And, lastly, The Portuguese shall be admitted to come into this +peace within six months; or, if they refuse, the English shall be at +liberty to exercise all hostilities against them. + +On the 31st of March, the Great Mogul dined at the house of Asaph Khan, +all the way from the palace, which was an English mile, being laid under +foot with silks and velvet sewed together, but rolled up as the king +passed. It was reported that this feast, and the present made on the +occasion, cost six lacks of rupees, which amount to £60,000 +sterling.[199] + +[Footnote 199: According to Thevenot, a _lack_ contains 100,000 rupees, +and a rupee is a French crown and five sols. At which rate, the _six +lacks_ must amount at least to £150,000 sterling.--_Churchill_. + +The editor of Churchill's Collection must here have been mistaken the +French crowns alluded to by Thevenot. The rupees in India are various, +and consequently differ in their value; but two shillings may be assumed +as a fair average, in which case the computation in the text is quite +correct.--E.] + +I received intelligence on the 26th April, that the prince had made one +of his servants ask the king at the durbar wherefore he gave so great +countenance to the English as to banish the Portuguese from Surat, who +brought much more profit to the king in rubies, pearls, and other jewels, +while the English came there only in search of profit, by the sale of +cloths, swords, knives, and other articles of small value? The king +acknowledged that this was true, yet could not be mended. By this the +affections of the prince were made sufficiently manifest, and I had fair +warning to be on my guard, that I might study to preserve ourselves in +the good graces of the king, in which only we could be safe. I resolved, +however, to take no notice of this, except by endeavouring to give the +prince a better opinion of our nation. + +On the 22d of May I went to the king at the durbar, to solicit his +authority to get back a youth named Jones, who had run away from me to +an Italian, who protected him to the disgrace of our nation, by using +the king's name. The king gave me an order for his delivery; but the +prince, who waited every opportunity to injure us, for the sake of his +favourite, _Zulphecar Khan_, moved the king in private to send for the +youth first, to the Guzalcan, which was done. I had newly broken off +from conferring with the prince, on account of his partiality to +Zulphecar Khan, and had sent him word that I would no longer refrain +from stating our grievances to the king in person, which was the cause +of his enmity towards me. When Jones was brought before the king, being +instigated by the protection and countenance of the prince, he railed +against me to my face, with the most virulent malice, beseeching the +king to save his life; on which the king resolved not to deliver him up +to me, but to send him as a prisoner to Surat. But the prince, to brave +me, begged to have him for a servant, as the fellow had renounced his +country, on which the king did so, in spite of every thing I could +allege. On this the prince gave him 150 rupees, with the pay of two +horsemen, and commanded me not to meddle with him. + +On the night of the 23d, Jones came and threw himself at my feet, asking +pardon for his lies and mad behaviour. I told him I would not now keep +him prisoner, as he was the prince's servant; but I would not give him +any answer till he had made public reparation for his misbehaviour, as +far as he could. Accordingly, on the next day, he contrived to get to +the _Guzalcan_, and there asked pardon of the king for the lies he had +spoken against me, denying every word he had then spoken, alleging he +had done so to protect himself against me, whom he had offended, and +prayed the king to send for me, that he might ask my pardon in public. +The king was well pleased, but the prince fell into a rage. I went to +the Guzalcan on the 25th, when the king protested he never believed what +Jones had said against me, and that he considered him a villain, yet +could not but protect him, as he had cast himself on his mercy. Jones +was sent for, and asked my pardon on his knees, declaring on oath to the +king that he had in every thing belied me, and that he now made this +declaration in a voluntary manner, as he durst not return to his +country. The king chid him a little, saying to me that neither he nor +any good man could believe such a slanderer. The prince grew angry, and +endeavoured to make Jones stand to what he had said formerly against me; +and as Jones refused, the prince basely desired him to restore the 150 +rupees he had received for bearing witness against me. Jones promised to +return the money, for which purpose an under-treasurer was sent along +with him to the house in which he lodged, as I would not suffer him to +come to mine. + +I was forced to seem content, having no way to seek redress, as I had no +presents to give, and the king never listens to any request unless well +backed, and will even demand it in plain terms, of which the prince +takes advantage, urging that the Portuguese bring rich jewels, rubies, +and pearls, and treating our English commodities with great scorn. On +the 29th of May the Portuguese were admitted to the king with a present, +and to sell a ballass ruby, which was said to weigh thirteen _toles_, +two and a half of these being equal to an ounce.[200] For this they +asked five lacks of rupees, but the king only offered one lack. Asaph +Khan also was an advocate for the Portuguese, who made him a present of +jewels. They had many rich rubies, ballasses, emeralds, pearls, and +other jewels, for sale, with which they so much gratified the king and +his great men, that we were for a time eclipsed. The prince and the +jesuit fell out about presenting them, which the prince desired, but it +had been promised before to Asaph Khan. I had formerly judged concerning +the credit of the Portuguese at court by report, but I now experienced +the difference between them and us; for they were sought after by all, +while they only bought our commodities as it were by way of giving us +charity. Besides, the Portuguese had an advantage over us in consequence +of their establishments in the neighbourhood, by which they could hinder +trade into the Red Sea, being always more at hand to do harm than we, +who are only entertained out of a little fear, while our trade and +commodities are little cared for. + +[Footnote 200: This must be an enormous exaggeration, or error, as in +this case the ruby would have weighed 5 1-5th ounces.--E.] + +§2. _Occurrences in June, July, and August 1616, from which the +Character and Dispositions of the Mogul and his Subjects may be +observed_. + +The 12th of June a resolution was taken that Sultan Churrum should go to +the wars in the Deccan, and a day was fixed for his setting out on his +journey, for which all the Bramins were consulted. On this occasion it +is reported that Sultan _Parvis_, who is to be recalled, wrote to his +father the Mogul, that if his elder brother were sent to assume the +command, he would readily obey; but, if dishonoured by sending this his +younger brother, he, in the first place, would fall upon him, and would +afterwards finish the Deccan war. All the captains, such as Khan-Khanan, +Mahomed Khan, Khan Jeban, and others, refuse to serve under the command +of Sultan Churrum, who is reputed a tyrant, of whom all men are in +greater awe than of the king, more especially now that he is to have the +command of the army. Yet the king cannot be persuaded to change his +resolution, so that the departure of the prince, with his favourite +Zulphecar Khan is determined to take place at the distance of twenty-two +days; wherefore I must make haste to finish my business, as after his +departure with his minion, Zulphecar Khan, I shall have no chance to +recover a single penny, nor to get any justice against him. + +The 18th, the king commanded one of his brother's sons, who had been +made a Christian out of policy, to bring him into hatred of the people, +to touch a lion on the head which was brought in before the king. But he +refused it, being afraid, on which the king desired his youngest son to +touch the lion, which he did, without receiving any harm. On this the +king commanded his nephew to be taken to prison, whence he is never +likely again to be released. + +On the 24th a son was born to Sultan Churrum, and being now preparing to +set out for the Deccan wars, all men's eyes are upon him, either for +flattery, gain, or envy, none for love. He has received twenty lacks of +rupees, equal to £200,000 sterling, towards his expences, and begins to +act with more than his usual liberality. Notwithstanding this shew of +his father's affection, a khan at court endeavoured to persuade the king +that this expedition would be productive of danger, as prince Parvis, +whose honour would be thereby wounded, would certainly not submit +without revenge. To this the king answered, "Let them fight, and he who +proves the better captain, shall pursue the war." + +The 25th I had an audience of the king, being sent for by Asaph Khan, +and was received by his majesty with much courtesy. This Asaph Khan was +much in the prince's favour, wherefore I was unwilling to disoblige him, +though he had given me several provocations. At this time Mukrob Khan, +another of the great men, made me offers of service, being of a contrary +faction to Asaph Khan, but I thought it best to endeavour to make +friends of them both. Among other subjects of discourse, Mukrob told me +that the English brought too much cloth and broad-sword blades for sale +to India, and hardly any thing else, wherefore he advised they should +forbear for two or three years, and rather bring the curiosities of +China and Japan, which would be more acceptable, and to bring from +England the best cloth of gold, and the richest silks wrought with gold +and silver, and above all things, large quantities of Arras hangings. + +The 30th I visited Abdalla Hassan, having need of his friendship; and, +what is rare in this country, he refused to accept of any present. +Abdalla is captain over all the soldiers maintained at court, and +treasurer of all the armies. He entertained me with great civility, and +few compliments, and made me sit beside him to see the soldiers shoot at +marks with their bows and firelocks. Most of them hit the mark with a +single bullet, being about the size of a hand, affixed to a butt. We had +some discourse together about the manner of using weapons in Europe, +after which I took my leave and departed. + +Most of July passed in soliciting the prince to sign the articles I had +presented to the king, as mentioned before. On the 13th I sent him three +bottles of Alicant, and a letter concerning the difference between us +and the Portuguese about trade, offering to take all the customs to +farm, both inwards and outwards, for the use of the company. The prince, +according to his usual barbarous custom of transacting all business in +public, caused my letter to be twice read over to him by his secretary, +often interrupting him with discourse, and sent word that he would read +it again at night and consider its contents, and that I should have his +answer through _Mirza Sorocalla_. + +That night I went to the durbar to visit the king, who, as soon as I +came in, sent Asaph Khan to say that he heard I had an excellent painter +in my house, and that he wished to see some of his work. I replied, +there was only a young man, a merchant, who drew some figures for his +amusement, in a very ordinary manner, with a pen, but which were far +from having any claim as paintings. The king said I need not fear his +taking any man from me by force, as he would neither do me any injury +himself, nor suffer any to be done me by others, and desired he might +see the young man and his work. I answered, I had no fears of injury +from his majesty, and, for his satisfaction, should bring the young man +to the Guzalcan with such drawings as he might have, which were probably +figures of elephants, deer, or the like. On this the king bowed his +head, saying, if I desired to have an elephant, or any other thing in +his country, I had only to let him know freely what I wished, and he +would give it me, for he was my friend. I made a low reverence, humbly +thanking his majesty, and said that elephants were of no use to me, +neither was it the custom of any person of our nation, especially of my +rank, to ask any thing: Yet, if his majesty were pleased to give me even +the value of a rupee, I should thankfully accept it as a mark of his +favour. He answered, that he knew not what I might wish for, but there +were many things in his country rare in mine, and desired I might not be +dainty, but speak to him freely, and he would give me such things as +were most acceptable. He then desired me to be merry, for he was the +friend of our nation and of me, and should take care we had no injury +done to us. He then desired me to attend that night at the Guzalcan, and +to bring with me the young man who painted pictures. Then Asaph Khan +wished me to send for him to come to his house, where also he invited me +to go till the time when the king came out again, assuring me I should +be welcome, which I agreed to. I had never before been so graciously +treated by the king as now, which all the great men took notice of, and +accordingly altered their deportment towards me. It so happened that the +jesuit acted as my interpreter on this occasion, by the king's +appointment. + +I went from the durbar to the house of Asaph Khan, according to +invitation, and continued there till the king came out again, when I was +conducted back, accompanied by Mr Hughes, the supposed painter, with +whom the king had some discourse. After this, I shewed the king a +curious picture I had of a friend of mine, which pleased him much, and +he shewed it to all his company. The king sent for his chief painter, +who pretended he could make as good, which I denied, on which a wager of +a horse was made between Asaph Khan and me in the king's presence, and +to please him, but Asaph afterwards retracted. After this, the Mogul +fell to drinking some Alicant wine which I had presented him, giving +some of it to those about him, and then sent for a full bottle, and +drinking a cup, sent it to me, saying it soured so fast it would be +spoiled before he could drink it, and I had none. This done, he turned +him to sleep, when all the candles were put out, and I had to grope my +way out in the dark. + +This day, a gentlewoman attendant upon _Noor-mahal_ was taken in the +king's house in some improper act with an eunuch, when another animal of +the same kind, who loved her, slew her paramour. The poor woman was set +up to the arm-pits in the ground, with the earth hard rammed around her, +being condemned to remain there three days and two nights in that +situation, without sustenance, her head and arms exposed to the violence +of the sun. If she survived, she was then to be pardoned. The eunuch was +condemned to the elephants. This damsel was found to be worth, in +pearls, jewels, and money, sixteen lack of rupees.[201] + +[Footnote 201: In Purchas this sum is rated in words at sixteen hundred +thousand, while in Churchill it is only in figures 160,000.--E.] + +On the 22d, I had letters from Burbanpoor in answer to those I had +written to Mohabet Khan, who granted my desire of a firmaun in favour of +our nation, granting them a house near the governor's, strictly +commanding that no person should molest them by sea or land, neither to +exact from them any customs, or to give them trouble on any pretence, +with entire liberty to buy, sell, and transport any commodities at their +pleasure, without let or hindrance. I received this in a letter from +himself, full of civility and kindness, far exceeding any I had hitherto +met with in India, protesting the highest respect, and his earnest wish +to give me every content in whatever I might desire. I caused this +firmaun to be immediately sent to Surat, so that Broach is now provided +as a good retreat from the prince's injuries, and the customs given up, +by which £1500 a-year will be saved, besides all manner of searches and +extortions. No person doubts the performance of this firmaun, as Mohabet +Khan careth not for the prince, and feareth no man, neither needeth he +any person's favour, being much beloved of the king, and reckoned the +second man in the empire. He has all his life been liberal of his purse, +and honourable in his word, so that he has the good report of all men. +In regard to the customs on trade, as the king takes none, and the +governors convert them to their own profit, he professes to scorn +abusing the liberties of the king's ports. + +On the 6th of August I was sent for to the durbar, where I had much talk +with the king, who asked me many questions to satisfy his curiosity, and +desired me to come to the Guzalcan at night, when I should see my +picture so exactly copied, that I should not know the copy from the +original. He asked me what reward I would give the painter who had made +the copy so like, to which I answered, I would give fifty rupees, a +painter's reward. To which the king replied, that his painter was a +gentleman, and my proffered reward was too small. I said, that I gave +the picture willingly, esteeming it rare, and had no inclination to make +comparisons or wagers; and that, if his majesty's servant had performed +well, and would not accept my gift, his majesty was most fit to reward +him. So, after many merry jests, and brags of the arts in his dominions, +his majesty asked me how often I drank in the day, and how much, and +what we drank in England. Mentioning beer, he asked what beer was, how +it was made, and whether I could make it here in India. To all of which +serious state questions I answered to his satisfaction. + +He sent for me again at night, being impatient to triumph in the skilful +execution of his painter, and shewed me six pictures, all pasted on one +board, one being my own, and the other five done by his artist, and all +so like, that by candle-light I was at some loss to determine which was +which, being greatly beyond my expectation. At length, by closer +inspection, I pointed out my own, and explained the differences between +it and the copies, which were not apparent to an inexperienced eye. The +king was much pleased that I had not seen the difference at first sight, +for which he was full of mirth, and exulted over me. I gave him way, and +satisfied him much by praising his painter, saying, that I saw his +majesty needed no pictures from our country. He then asked me what +reward I would give his painter? To which I answered, I would double my +former offer, and if he came to my house, would give him an hundred +rupees to buy a nag. The king took this kindly, but said his painter +would not accept money, but some other gifts which I had before +promised. I said this was referable to my own discretion. To which he +answered, that this was true, yet he wished I would name it. To this I +said, I would give him a good sword, a pistol, and a picture. "Then," +said the king, "you confess he is a good workman, send for him to your +house, and shew him such rarities as you have, and let him choose one, +in return for which you shall have any one of these pictures you please, +that you may shew in England we are not so unskilful as you supposed." +He then pressed me to make a choice, which I did, and which the king +wrapped in paper, and placed in a little book of mine, expressing much +exultation at the supposed victory of his painter. I then shewed him a +picture I had of his majesty, far inferior to the work I now saw, saying +I had judged from it, supposing it among the best. When told where I got +it, he asked why I bought any such thing? "Have not I the best, and have +not I told you that I would give you any thing you desired?" I thanked +his majesty, but said I held it impertinent for me to trouble him in +trifles, especially as a beggar. To this he replied, that it was no +shame to ask from him, and desired me to speak freely at all times, and +pressed me to ask for something. To this I answered, that I would not +make choice of any gift, as whatever he was pleased to give, I would +joyfully accept as a mark of honour. He then said, if you desire my +picture, I will either give you one for yourself or for your king. To +this I answered, that if his majesty thought proper to send one to my +king, I would gladly carry it, and knew that my sovereign would esteem +it much, and take it as a mark of friendship; but, as his majesty had +emboldened me by his gracious condescension, I would humbly ask one for +myself, which I would keep and leave to my posterity, as a memorial of +his majesty's favour. He answered, as my king did not desire one, but I +did, I should have one, and so gave immediate order for its making. He +then turned himself to sleep, and we had to go out as before, in the +dark. + +The 9th of August a band of an hundred robbers were brought in chains +before the Great Mogul, together with their accusation. Without any +ceremony of trial, he ordered them to be carried away for execution, +their chief being ordered to be torn in pieces by dogs, and all the rest +to be put to death in the ordinary manner. The prisoners were divided +into portions, sent for execution to several quarters of the city, and +executed in the streets. Close by my house, the chief was torn in pieces +by twelve dogs, and thirteen of his fellows, having their hands and +feet tied together, had their necks cut by a sword, yet not quite +through, and their naked and bloody bodies were left to corrupt in the +street, to the annoyance of the whole neighbourhood. + +On the 10th, 11th, and 12th, I was occupied at court in giving notice to +the king and prince that a Dutch ship lay before Surat, and refused to +give notice of its object till the arrival of a fleet to which it +belonged, which was expected with the first fair wind. I took advantage +of this circumstance to make them apprehensive of the designs of the +Hollanders, and the dangers that might arise from them, all of which was +well taken. And, being consulted on the subject, I advised not to come +to a rupture with them, and yet to exclude them from trade. + +The last of these days I went to visit _Gemaldin Ussen_,[202] the +viceroy of _Patan_,[203] and lord of four cities in Bengal, a man of +seventy years of age, who had often been employed as an ambassador by +the Mogul, had more understanding and courtesy than all his countrymen, +was universally esteemed for his hospitality and regard to strangers, +and was considered as entirely free from secret ambition. He had often +invited me to his house, to which I went this day, and was received with +extraordinary kindness and friendship. He even offered me a lack of +rupees, and such other demonstrations of courtesy, as bespoke their own +refusal. He offered me likewise his credit and favour with the king, and +his best advice in every emergence; indeed, omitting nothing that could +evince his desire to serve me. All this seemed cordially to proceed from +the heart, especially from a person of his years and experience; and, in +the course of our conversation, he spoke so plainly of many of the chief +men about the court, which, from my own experience, I knew for truth, +that I was satisfied he was a true-hearted and well-disposed old man. He +gave me much information respecting the customs of this empire, their +want of laws, their servitude, the increase of the empire, and many +other things, having served in grace and favour under three successive +kings. He shewed me a book containing the annals of all memorable +actions in his time, which he daily committed to record, and offered me +a copy if I would procure it to be translated. This also treated +concerning the king's revenue, and the manner in which it was raised, +besides confiscations, gifts, and deductions upon the great men. He +shewed me that the government of every province paid yearly a certain +rent to the king. Thus, for his government of Patna, he gave yearly to +the king eleven lacks of rupees;[204] all other profits of the +government being his own, he having entire power and authority to take +what he thought fit. His government was estimated at 5000 horse, the pay +of each being 200 rupees yearly, of which he only kept 1500 on foot, +being allowed the surplus as dead pay. Besides which, he had a daily +pension of 1000 rupees, and enjoyed some smaller governments. Yet he +assured me that several of the great lords had double the emoluments he +enjoyed, and that there were above twenty equal to himself. + +[Footnote 202: This name does not appear rightly reported, yet we have +no means of correcting its orthography, neither is it of much +importance. Perhaps it may have been Jemal-ul-dien Ussan Khan.--E.] + +[Footnote 203: This is probably a mistake for Patna in Bengal, and he +may have been Nabob, or Nawab, perhaps Soubah of Bengal.--E.] + +[Footnote 204: Eleven lack, or 1,100,000 rupees, on the computation +formerly assigned, are equal to £110,000. In the Pilgrims, at this +place, the rupee is said to equal 2s. 2d, which would add £9166:12:4 to +that sum.--E.] + +In the course of our conversation, this lord praised the good prophet +Jesus, and his laws, and was full of much pleasant and profitable +discourse. Some days after this visit, when I thought his kindness had +been at an end, he borrowed the king's banqueting-house and +pleasure-garden, called _Havar Gemall_, a mile from town, on purpose to +treat me, and earnestly inviting me, I promised to come. He went there +himself at midnight, carrying his tents and all requisite furniture and +provisions, and fitted up a place very handsomely, by the side of the +tank, for the entertainment. I went there in the morning, and on my +arrival he came to meet me with extraordinary civility, carrying me into +the pavilion he had prepared, where he had some company, among whom were +two of his sons, of whom he had thirty in all. He had likewise an +hundred servants attending. To amuse me, he carried me to see the king's +little closets and retiring rooms, which were painted in the antique +manner, having pictures of some of the French kings, and other Christian +princes, on several of the pannels. He said he was only a poor servant +of the king, yet wished I might have some content, and had therefore +invited me to a slight banquet, that we might eat bread and salt +together, to seal a friendship which he entreated me to accept. There +were many great men, he alleged, who were better able to shew me +kindness, but were proud and false-hearted, and he wished me therefore +to trust none of them. For, if I had any business to transact concerning +the Portuguese or any other, they who acted as my interpreters would +never deliver the truth, but only what pleased themselves, or would give +satisfaction in the relation. That, therefore, I should never be rightly +understood, nor be able to effect my business without being abused and +cheated, nor ever clearly know the situation in which I stood, until I +had an Englishman who could speak Persian, who was able rightly to +deliver what I wished to have said, without using any other person. And, +if I could find any such, the king would readily grant me leave to +employ him, having conceived a good opinion of me; insomuch, that the +preceding night, at the Guzalcan, when the jewels of _Sheik Ferid_, +governor of Lahore, who was lately deceased, were presented to him, he +remembered me of his own accord, and seeing a picture of himself which +pleased him, he delivered it to Asaph Khan, commanding him to send it to +me, that I might wear it for his sake, with many words of favour +concerning me, which would make all the great men respect me. + +While thus conversing, dinner was served. So sitting down on a carpet, a +cloth was spread, divers kinds of banqueting dishes were set before us. +The like was done a little on one side for the gentlemen of his company, +with whom he went to eat, as they hold it a kind of uncleanness to +mingle with us. Upon this, I told him that he had promised we should eat +bread and salt together, and without his company I felt little appetite, +whereupon he arose from the rest, and sat down beside me, and we fell +heartily to our repast. It consisted of various kinds of dishes, +together with raisins, almonds, pistachio nuts, and various fruits. +After dinner, he played at chess, and I walked about, and after some +time spent in discourse, I offered to take my leave. But he said he had +invited me to eat with him, and hitherto we had only had a collation, +wherefore he entreated I might not depart till we had supped together, +to which I readily consented. + +About an hour after, the ambassador of one of the kings of the Deccan +came to visit him, whom he presented to me, using him with civility, but +much inferior to the respect he had shewn me. He afterwards asked me, +if the king my master would scorn the offer of service from so poor a +man as he was, and if he would vouchsafe to accept a present from a +stranger, as he proposed to send a gentleman to England with me to kiss +the hands of my sovereign, and to see our country. I answered him as +became me, with all civility; so he sent for one presently, whom he +questioned if he would venture upon such a journey, and as this person +seemed willing, he presented him to me, saying he would provide some of +the curiosities of the country for the king my master, and send them by +this gentleman along with me. By the manner all this seemed to be in +earnest. + +While we thus spent our time in friendly converse, supper was brought +in; and, as in the morning, two cloths were spread, one before me and my +chaplain, with one merchant, on which were set various dishes of roast, +fried, and boiled meats, with rice and sallads. On this occasion my +honourable entertainer desired me to excuse his company, as it was their +custom to eat among themselves, and his countrymen might take it ill if +he did not eat with them; so he and his guests, and I with my +companions, solaced ourselves with good cheer. The meats were not amiss, +but the attendance and order were excellent, as the servants were very +diligent and respectful. After the manner of this country of giving +presents to invited guests, he made me a present of five cases of +sugar-candy flavoured with musk, and a loaf of the finest sugar, as +white as snow, weighing fifty pounds, and requested my acceptance of an +hundred such against my departure. He then addressed me in these +terms:--"You refuse these from me, thinking I am poor, but being made in +my government, it costs me nothing, as it comes to me _gratis_." To this +I answered, that he had already much too far obliged me, yet would I not +refuse his kindness when ready to go away. On which he replied, that he +might not be then provided, and therefore desired I would accept now, +that he might not lose both his offer and his labour. Thus, calling +himself my father, and me his son, we took leave of each other, with +many compliments. + +I went to visit the king on the 16th, who, as soon as I came in, called +to his women, and reached out his own picture set in gold, and hanging +to a chain of gold wire, with a pendant of foul pearl, which he +delivered to Asaph Khan, whom I warned not to demand any reverence from +me on the occasion which I would not willingly perform; as it is the +custom here, when he bestows any gift, that the receiver kneels down and +touches the ground with his head; and which ceremony had been exacted +from the ambassador of Persia. Then Asaph Khan came to me with the +picture, which I offered to take in my hand, but he made a sign to me, +to take off my hat and put it about my neck, leading me right before the +king. Not understanding his purpose, and doubting he might require my +conformance with the custom of the country, called _sizeda_, I resolved +rather to forego the present than comply. He made a sign to me to return +thanks to the king, which I did after the fashion of our country; on +which some of the officers called for me to make _sizeda_, but the king +immediately said, No, no, in Persian. So, with many gracious words, I +returned to my place. You may judge of the king's liberality by this +mighty gift, which was not in all worth thirty pounds, yet was five +times the value of such as he usually gives of that kind, and which are +yet held as a special favour, as all the great men wear the king's +picture, which yet none may do but those to whom it is given. This +ordinarily consists of only a small gold medal, not bigger than a +sixpence, impressed with the king's image, having a short gold chain of +six inches to fasten it on their turbans; and to which, at their own +charges, some add precious stones or pearl pendents. + +_Gemaldin Ussen_, who had invited me to the _Havaer Gemal_, as before +mentioned, being newly appointed governor of _Sinde_, came to dine at my +house on the 19th, accompanied by two of his sons and two other +gentlemen, and attended by about an hundred servants. He partook of some +part of the banquet, which had been prepared at my house by a Mahomedan +cook, but declined eating of any of the dishes which were cooked after +our English fashion, though he seemed to have a good inclination, being +influenced by a superstitious notion; yet he desired that four or five +dishes, of his own choice, might be sent to his own house, being all +baked meats, dressed in a way he had not before seen, saying he would +afterwards eat of them in private, which was accordingly done. At this +entertainment, he offered us a free trade and secure residence at the +chief town, of Sinde, his new government, and having filled himself with +my banquet, he took his leave, after receiving a small present from me, +according to the fashion of the country. This day, Mr Hall, my chaplain, +died suddenly, to my great grief. He was a man of mild and gentle +manners, and a most sincere Christian, of unspotted life and +conversation. + +On the 20th and the night before, there fell a vast storm of rain, +called in this country the _elephant_, owing to which such prodigious +streams of water flowed into the great tank, the head of which is of +stone and apparently of great strength, that it gave way in one place, +causing a sudden alarm that the whole fabric would give way and drown +all that part of the town in which I dwelt. Insomuch that the prince and +all his women forsook their house, and my nearest neighbour carried off +his goods and his wife to the skirts of the hills on his elephants and +camels. All persons had their horses ready at their doors, that they +might save their lives by flight in case of necessity. We were in the +utmost consternation, and sat up till midnight, having no alternative, +as we thought, but to flee ourselves and abandon all our goods, for it +was reported that the water would rise three feet higher than the top of +our house, and carry all away, being only a slight mud building. The +foot of the tank was level with our dwelling, and the water was of great +extent and very deep, so that the surface of the water stood +considerably higher than the top of my house, which stood in a hollow, +in the very course of the water, and where every ordinary heavy rain +occasioned such a current at my door as to be for some hours impassable +by man or horse. But the king caused a sluice to be cut during the +night, to conduct the water by another course, so that we were freed +from the extreme danger; yet the excessive rain had washed down a +considerable part of the walls of my house, and so weakened it by +breaches in different parts, that I now feared its falling down, as much +as I had dreaded its being swept away by the flood. It was every where +so bemired with dirt and water, that I could hardly find a place in +which to sit or lie dry, and was forced to be at material charges in +having it repaired. Thus were we every way afflicted, by fires, smoke, +floods, storms, heats, dust, and flies, and had no season of temperate +air and quietness. + +On the 27th, I received advice from Surat, that the Dutch had obtained +permission to land their goods, and to secure them in a warehouse at +that place, carrying on trade till the pleasure of the prince were +known, and under condition that they should depart at the first warning. + +The king went to _Havar Gemal_ on the 29th, whence he employed himself +in hunting. At that place, a resolution was taken, to remove the court +to Mundu, a castle near Burhanpoor, where there is no town. At this +time, Sultan Parvis came from the Deccan wars in disgrace, and arrived +with his train near Agimere; and the king commanded him to retire to +Bengal, refusing to admit him into his presence. Having thus dispatched +him, without the inconvenience dreaded from a meeting between the +brothers, he now proposed to settle Sultan Churrum in the Deccan wars, +although all the chief men of the court were averse from this measure; +on which account, the king feared to send him down, as was formerly +proposed, and had therefore delayed this measure until Prince Parvis was +withdrawn, and now meant to establish Churrum by means of his own +presence at Mundu, in the neighbourhood of the Deccan. If this +resolution is executed, it will put us to much trouble and expence, as +we must build a new house both for ourselves and goods, because that +castle stands on a hill, and has no buildings near it. + +The king returned from hunting on the night of the 30th, and about +eleven o'clock sent me a very large and fat wild boar, desiring to have +the tusks back, and accompanied by a message, saying it was killed by +his own hand, and therefore desiring me to be merry, and to eat it with +good cheer. On this occasion, I desired Jaddow, who brought this message +from the king, to tell Asaph Khan, that I proposed to visit him next +day, when I hoped to receive from him a firmaun of the privileges +granted by the king. Asaph Khan sent me back word, that they would not +be then ready, but it should be sealed some days after, and that he did +not wish to see me till he had given me satisfaction. + +§3. _Of the Celebration of the King's Birth Day, with other Occurrences +in September 1616_. + +The 2d of September was the birth-day of the Great Mogul, which was +solemnized with extraordinary festivities. He was then weighed against a +variety of articles, as jewels, gold, silver, stuffs of gold and silver, +silk, batter, rice, fruits, and many other things, of each a little, all +of which is given to the Bramins. On this occasion, the king ordered +Asaph Khan to send for me; who did so, and appointed me to come to the +place where the king held his durbar. But the messenger mistook, so that +I went not in time, and missed the sight. Being there before the king +came out, he sent for me as soon as he noticed me, and enquired why I +had not come to see the ceremony of weighing, for which he had given +order. I explained the reason, as it actually was, on which he chid +Asaph Khan publicly for the omission. He was at this time so richly +ornamented with jewels, that I must confess I never saw at any one time +such unspeakable wealth. He now amused himself in seeing his greatest +elephants brought in before him. Some of these were lord-elephants, +having their chains, bells, and furniture all of gold and silver, being +attended by many gilt flags and streamers, and each having eight or ten +inferior elephants to wait upon him, clothed in gold, silk, and silver. +In this way there passed about twelve troops, all very splendidly +furnished. The first lord-elephant had all the plates on his head and +breast set with rubies and emeralds, being a beast of most wonderful +stature and beauty. They all bowed down before the king, making their +reverences very orderly, and formed as fine a shew of beasts as I had +ever seen. The keepers of each chief elephant made a present to the +king. After this was over, the king made me some gracious speeches, and +went into the interior apartments. + +About ten o'clock at night, after I was in bed, the king sent me a +message, saying he had heard I had a picture which I had not shewn him, +and desired I would come then to him, bringing the picture with me; and +if I would not part with it, that he might see it, and have copies taken +for his wives. I rose and carried the picture with me, and when I came +to the presence, I found him sitting cross-legged on a little throne, +his robes all covered over with diamonds, pearls, and rubies. Before him +stood a golden table, on which were above fifty pieces of gold plate, +all set with precious stones, some of them being large and of great +value. His nobles were all around him in their best attire, whom he +commanded to drink cheerfully of several kinds of wine, which stood +there in large flaggons. + +On my approach he asked for the picture, on which I shewed him two. He +seemed astonished at one of these, and asked whose it was; to which I +replied, that it was the portrait of a friend who was dead. He asked if +I would give it him. I replied, that I valued it more than any thing I +had, as being the portrait of one I had loved dearly; but if his majesty +would pardon my attachment to that picture, and accept the other, which +was French and of excellent work, I would most willingly give it. He +thanked me, saying it was that only picture which he desired, and which +he loved as much as I did; and, if I would give it him, he would value +it more than the richest jewel in his house. I answered that I was not +so much in love with any thing, but that I would part with it to satisfy +his majesty, being extremely glad to have any opportunity to serve him, +and was ready even to present him with my heart, if I could thereby +demonstrate my affection. He bowed to me, saying he had never before +seen so much art and beauty, and conjured me to tell him truly if ever +such a woman had lived. I answered, that there certainly did once live a +lady whom this portrait resembled in every thing but perfection. He then +said, that he accepted my readiness to give him what I so valued as a +great kindness; but would only shew it to his ladies, and cause his own +painter make five copies, and if I knew my own I should have it back. I +answered, that I had freely given it, and would be glad of his majesty +accepting it: But he said he would not keep it, and loved me better for +putting so much value on the image of my departed friend. He knew, he +added, that it would be doing me an injury to take it from me, and would +only have five copies taken, which his wives should wear, and would then +return me the original with his own hand. In this art of limning or +painting in water colours, his artists are wonderfully expert. But he +liked not the other picture, which was painted in oil. + +He then told me that this was his birth-day, and all men made merry, and +asked me therefore if I would drink with them. I said I would willingly +do whatever he was pleased to command, as I sincerely wished him many +prosperous days, and that the ceremony of this day might be repeated for +an hundred years. He asked me what wine I would have, whether that of +the grape or made wine, and whether strong or weak. I said whatever he +was pleased to order, hoping he would neither command me to have it too +strong or in too large quantity. So he called for a gold cupful of +mingled wine, half of the grape and half artificial, which he sent me by +one of his nobles, with this message, that I should drink it off twice, +thrice, four times, or five times, for his sake, and accept the cup and +appurtenances as a present. On drinking a portion of it, I found it +stronger than any I had ever tasted, insomuch that it made me sneeze, at +which he laughed, and called for raisins, almonds, and sliced lemons, +which he sent me on a gold plate, and desired me to eat and drink what I +liked, and no more. I then made a reverence for my present, after my own +manner, though Asaph Khan wanted me to kneel and knock my head upon the +ground, but the king accepted it in my own way. The cup was of gold, set +all over with small rubies and turquoises; the cover being likewise +gold, and set with great rubies, emeralds, and turquoises; and there was +likewise a suitable dish or salver on which to set the cup. I know not +the value, because many of the stones are small, and the greater, which +also are numerous, are not all clean; but there are above two thousand +stones in all, and the gold weighs about twenty ounces. On giving me +this splendid present, he sent me word that he esteemed me more than +ever he had done a Frank, and asked if I were merry in eating the wild +boar he had sent me, how I had it dressed, what I drank with it, and +many such compliments; which public shew of his grace and favour did me +much service in the eyes of all his nobles, who strove to shew me +respect. + +After this, he threw among those that stood below, two chargers of +rupees, and among us who were round the throne two chargers of hollow +almonds made of gold and silver mingled; but I would not scramble as did +his great men, for I saw his son did not take any up. He then +distributed sashes and girdles of gold tissue to all the musicians and +servants, and many others. So drinking heartily himself, and commanding +others to drink, he and his nobles became as jovial as could be, and of +a thousand humours. But the prince, Asaph Khan, two old men, the former +king of Candahar, and I, refrained from drinking. When the king was not +able any longer to hold up his head, he lay down to sleep, and we all +departed. While going out, I moved Asaph Khan for the dispatch of our +privileges, assuring him his majesty could give me no present so +acceptable. I said farther, that I had no doubt it lay in his power to +dispatch me; but if he did not think proper to do so, or if any other +hinderance was in my way, I should on the morrow again apply to the +king. He desired me not to do so, for the king loved me and had given +orders for dispatching my business, which had been hindered by the +preparations for this feast; but he would now send it to me with all +speed, and do me all manner of service. + +Seven months had now been vainly spent in soliciting the signing and +sealing of the articles of amity and commerce, formerly detailed, and I +had nothing but promises and delays, from day to day, and from week to +week. Therefore on the 3d September, the English fleet being hourly +expected to arrive at Surat, I delivered to him a memorial, containing +the articles I desired to have an order for, that they might be observed +in the unloading of the ships. These were, 1. That the presents coming +for the king and prince, should not be opened at the port, but sent up +to court under the seals of the customhouse officers. 2. That +curiosities sent for presents to other persons, and for the merchants to +sell, should also be sent to the court sealed, for the prince to make +the first choice. 3. That the gross merchandize should be landed, +reasonably rated, and not detained at the customhouse, but that the +merchants, on paying the customs, should have full liberty to sell or +dispose of it as they pleased; and that the ships should be fully +supplied with provisions, without paying any custom for the same. + +On the 4th, Asaph Khan sent me back my articles, after so long +attendance and so many false promises, some of them altered, and others +struck out, together with a letter, saying there was no need of any +articles, as an order from the prince to trade at Surat was quite +sufficient, he being lord there, and that no grant of trade at Bengal or +Sinde could ever be allowed. Notwithstanding all this vexation, I durst +not change my mode of proceeding, or wholly quit the prince and Asaph +Khan. I therefore drew up other articles, leaving out what seemed +displeasing in the former, and desired Asaph Khan to put them into form +and procure them to be sealed, or else to allow me to apply to the king, +that if he denied me I might leave the country. The substance of these +new articles was as follows:--1. That all the subjects of the Great +Mogul should receive the English in a friendly manner, suffering them to +land their goods peaceably, and to procure provisions for their money +without paying customs for them.--2. To have liberty, after paying +customs for their goods, to sell them to any one they pleased, and none +to force them to sell at an under rate.--3. To have liberty to pass with +their goods to any part of the empire, without any farther exactions +than those payable at the port.--4. To have the presents for the Mogul +and prince sealed without being opened, and sent to the ambassador.--5. +To have the goods of those that might die freed from confiscation, and +delivered to the surviving English factors.--And finally, That no injury +should be offered to any of the English. + +On the 8th, Asaph Khan sent me word in plain terms, that absolutely he +would procure nothing for me sealed, that in any respect concerned the +government belonging to the prince, and that I must rest satisfied with +a firmaun or order, signed by the prince, which was quite sufficient, +and I needed not to apply any more to him. This clearly revealed the +purpose he had so long intended, that we should be entirely dependent on +the prince; and I now had just cause to look out for new friends, Asaph +Khan having forsaken me. He that first took him for our solicitor +engaged us in all this misery, for he was the known protector of our +enemies, and a slave to their numerous bribes. I therefore determined to +try the prince, and to seem entirely dependent upon him. So I went to +the prince on the 10th, and desired he would grant his firmaun for the +four articles formerly sent to his secretary, which he threw down to his +secretary, so that I hoped to be at rest. I received it on the 11th, but +on reading it over, I found two of the four clauses much altered, and +one entirely left out; so I returned it, declaring roundly I could not +accept it, neither would I suffer any goods to be sent ashore. Never was +any man so distressed with such pride, covetousness, and falsehood. + +At night, I rode to visit the prince's secretary, _Mirza Socrolla_, with +whom I expostulated the business, declaring my resolution to depart. But +I now found the firmaun quite different than I had been informed, and +containing all the clauses I had required, though in some phrases rather +ambiguous in my judgment, which the secretary interpreted favourably, +declaring it was the prince's intent to satisfy me entirely, and that +every thing was quite sufficient for our purpose. After urging the +obscurity of some points, and as he had declared the meaning of the +prince to me, I requested he would explain them in the same sense to the +governor of Surat, which he agreed to; and especially gave order that +the customer should pay for fifty pieces of cloth, which he had bought +many months before, and wished now to return upon the factors, to their +extreme loss. At the close of our conference, he expressed the prince's +desire that we would rely entirely on him, and not cross him in matters +belonging to his government, by applying to the king, declaring that we +should so find him a better friend than we expected. Being thus +satisfied, I was in some hope of success, especially as this man is no +taker of bribes, and is reputed honest, and pledged his credit that we +should sustain no loss or injury, every thing being referred to him by +the prince. So I accepted the firmaun, which, on having it translated, I +found very effectual and satisfactory. + +The 16th, I went to visit the prince, intending to seem entirely +dependent upon him, till I heard what entertainment our ships were +likely to meet with. But I found him in much perplexity, fearing the +coming of Sultan Parvis to court, he being only at the distance of eight +coss, anxiously desiring leave to kiss his father's hands. The king had +even granted his desire, but by the influence of Nourmahal, the +favourite queen, he had revoked the permission, and Sultan Parvis was +ordered away directly to Bengal.[205] The resolution of the king to +remove the court from Agimere still continued, but no one knew certainly +where he intended to go. + +[Footnote 205: At this place there is an expression in the Pilgrims, +coupled with this sentence, which is quite inexplicable. "Yea, although +the king had fallen down, and taken his mother by the feet, to obtain +her leave to see her son." We are not sufficiently conversant in the +secret history of the Zenana of Shah Jehan-guire to explain this; yet +strongly suspect that this sentence ought to have run thus: Although the +prince's mother fell at the king's feet to obtain leave to see her +son.--E.] + +§4. _Broils about Abdala Khan and Khan-Khannan: Ambitious projects of +Sultan Churrum to subvert his eldest Brother: Sea Fight with a +Portuguese Carrack; and various other Occurrences_. + +Several days now passed in soliciting the king and great men, and paying +my court to them, without any remarkable occurrence; till on the 9th +October, I had letters from Surat, giving me an account that four +English ships had arrived there. On the 10th, Abdala Khan, the great +governor of Ahmedabad, being sent for to court in disgrace, to answer +for many insolent and contemptuous neglects of the king's commands, +thought to stand upon his defence and to refuse compliance. But Sultan +Churrum, whose ambitious views sought to turn every thing to his +advantage, being desirous to oblige so great a man, who was reckoned one +of the chiefest captains in the empire, prevailed upon him to submit, on +his word to protect him. Abdala came therefore, in pretended humility, +habited as a pilgrim, attended by forty servants on foot, until he +arrived within a day's journey of the court, having 2000 horse attending +him at some distance behind. He was this day brought to the _Jarruco_, +the place where the king sits in public to see sports and hear +complaints, and advanced towards the king, between two noblemen, having +chains on his legs, and holding his turban over his eyes, that he might +see no one till he had the happiness to behold the king. After making +his humble reverence, and answering a few questions, the king forgave +him, caused his irons to be taken off, and clothed him in a new vest of +cloth of gold, with a turban and sash, as is the custom. + +The prince, Churrum, now intended to establish his honour and power on +the Deccan wars, which his elder brother Sultan Parvis had been recalled +from in disgrace, and which the great commander, Khan-Khannan, had not +conducted prosperously, being strongly suspected of a secret +understanding with the princes of the Deccan, from whom he was believed +to receive pensions. Churrum, therefore, induced his father to recall +Khan-Khannan, who refused to obey; and wrote to the king, not to send +Churrum to the war, but one of his youngest sons, then only about +fifteen. This gave Churrum much uneasiness, as he was exceedingly intent +upon having the conduct of this war, for which reason he promised to +give the subordinate command of the army to Abdala Khan, under himself, +if he could contrive to get Khan-Khannan displaced. Fearing troubles +from the ambition and factious practices of his son Churrum, the +discontent of the two elder sons, Cuserou and Parvis, and the power of +Khan-Khannan, the king was anxious to accommodate matters in the Deccan +by accepting a peace, and continuing Khan-Khannan in his government; to +which end he wrote him a letter of favour, and proposed to send him a +vestment, as a sign of reconciliation, according to custom. Before +dispatching these, he acquainted a kinswoman of Khan-Khannan, who lived +in the seraglio, with his purpose. Whether she was false to her +relation, through the secret influence of Sultan Churrum, or was grieved +to see the head of her family so unworthily dealt with, who merited so +highly, does not certainly appear: But she plainly told the king, that +she did not believe Khan-Khannan would wear any thing the king sent, as +he knew his majesty hated him, and had once or twice already sent him +poison, which he had put into his bosom instead of his mouth, and proved +by trials. For this reason, she was confident Khan-Khannan would not +dare to put on any thing sent from his majesty. The king offered to +wear the dress himself in her presence for an hour, which she might +certify in a letter to her relative. To this she answered, that +Khan-Khannan would trust neither of them with his life; but, if allowed +to continue quietly in his command, would do his majesty good service. +Upon this, the king altered his plans, and resolved to invest Sultan +Churrum in the supreme command of the Deccan wars, and to follow after +him with another army, to ensure his reception. + +Khan-Khannan, having due notice of the storm preparing against him, +practised with the Deccan sovereigns, who were at his devotion, to offer +favourable terms of peace for a season, as he saw no other way of +averting the cloud that hung over both him and them, unless by +temporizing till the king and the prince were established farther off. +For this purpose, there came two ambassadors at this time to court, from +the princes of the Deccan, bringing horses richly caparisoned as +presents. The king refused to listen to them, or to accept their gifts, +and turned them over to his son, saying that peace or war rested +entirely with him. The prince was so puffed up by this favour, though +informed that the proposed conditions of peace were highly honourable, +that he declared proudly he would listen to no terms, till he was in the +field at the head of the army, being resolved that Khan-Khannan should +not deprive him of the honour of finishing that war. + +The ambitious views of this young prince are quite obvious, and form the +common talk of the country, yet the king suffers him to proceed, +although he by no means intends him as his successor. Sultan Cuserou, +the eldest son, is highly beloved and honoured of all men, and almost +adored, for his excellent parts and noble dispositions, with which the +king is well acquainted, and even loves him dearly. But he conceives +that the liberty of this son would diminish his own glory, and does not +see that the ambition of Churrum greatly more tarnishes his own fame +than would the virtuous character and noble actions of the other. Thus +the king fosters division and emulation among his sons, putting so much +power into the hands of the younger, which he believes he can undo at +his pleasure, that the wisest here foresee much fatal division in this +mighty empire when the present king shall pay the debt of nature, +expecting that it will then be rent in pieces by civil wars. + +The history of this country, for the variety of its incidents, and the +many crooked practices of the present king during the reign of his +father, Akbar Shah, and these latter troubles, were well worthy of being +committed to writing. But, as the country is so remote, many would +despise such information, and as the people are esteemed barbarous, few +persons would give it credit. I content myself, therefore, with +privately contemplating the singular history of this nation, although I +could narrate so many singular and amusing state intrigues, subtle +evasions, policies, answers, and adages, as could not be easily equalled +in the history of one age or country. One incident, however, that +occurred lately, I cannot omit relating, as it evinces the wisdom and +patience of the emperor, the incorruptible fidelity of a servant, the +detestable falsehood of a brother, and the impudent boldness of a +faction, ready to dare every infamous action, when permitted by the +supreme ruler to exercise an authority beyond the limits of their +condition, and contrary to the dictates of reason and true policy. + +The favourite Prince Sultan Churrum, together with the favourite Queen +_Nourmahal_, aunt to his wife, Asaph Khan father-in-law to Churrum, and +brother of _Nourmahal_, and _Etiman Dowlet_, father of _Asaph Khan_ and +_Nourmahal_, being the faction that now governed the emperor, and who +believed their bad influence in danger of being overthrown if the prince +_Cuserou_ were allowed to live, determined to use every effort for his +destruction, and to endeavour to get him into their power, that they +might end his days by poison, for they knew that he was universally +beloved among the nobles, and that his remaining in life and restoration +to liberty must some day overthrow and punish their ambitious projects. +To attain their infamous purposes, Nourmahal was instructed to practise +upon the king's weakness, by false tears and bewitching blandishments, +to insinuate that Sultan Cuserou was not in sufficiently safe custody, +and that he still meditated aspiring projects, contrary to the authority +and safety of the emperor, who listened to all her insinuations, yet +refused to understand her, as she did not plainly speak out her meaning. + +As this plan failed, the prince, with Etiman Dowlet and Asaph Khan, took +the opportunity of the emperor being drunk, to persuade him, as if for +the greater safety and honour of Sultan Cuserou, that it were fitter he +should be in the company of his brother Churrum, who would be more +regardful of his safety and happiness than could be expected from an +idolatrous rajput, to whose custody he had been committed by the +emperor. They therefore humbly implored his majesty that Prince Cuserou +might be confided to the care of his dear brother Churrum. This was +granted by the intoxicated monarch, who immediately fell asleep. + +They now deemed their project successful, as having the royal authority; +and, considering their own greatness, they believed no one would dare to +dispute the warrant, or to refuse delivering the prince into their +hands. Accordingly, Asaph Khan went that same night with a guard to the +house of _Anna-Rah_, a rajput Rajah, or prince, to demand from, him, in +the king's name and authority, the person of Sultan Cuserou, who had +been confided to his custody by the king. Anna-Rah declared that he was +the most humble slave of Prince Churrum, whose name Asaph Khan used upon +this occasion; but having received charge of Prince Cuserou directly +from the hands of the emperor, he would deliver him up to no other +person. He therefore entreated that Prince Churrum would have patience +till next morning, when he would discharge his duty to the king, whose +pleasure, once known, he would implicitly obey. This answer overturned +the whole contrivance. In the morning Anna-Rah went to the king, to whom +he communicated the demand made upon him in the name of Prince Churrum, +saying. That his majesty had given his son Cuserou to his charge, +together with the command of 4000 horse, with all of whom he was ready +to die at the imperial gate, rather than resign the prince into the +hands of his enemies: But, if his majesty required, he was ready at all +times to obey his commands. To this the king replied, "You have done +honestly and faithfully, and have answered discretely. Continue your +purpose, and take no notice of any orders. I will not seem to know any +thing of this, neither do you speak of it any farther. Preserve your +fidelity, and let us see how far they will prosecute this affair." + +Next day, finding the king silent on the subject, the prince and his +faction took no notice of any thing, hoping the king might forget what +had passed in his cups over night. I have communicated this incident, +that you may beware of scattering your goods in this country, or of +engaging your servants and stock too deeply; for the time will come when +the whole of this empire will be in commotion, and it is not a few years +war that will put a period to the inveterate enmity accumulated on all +hands against a day of vengeance. Should Sultan Cuserou prevail in +procuring his rightful inheritance, this empire will become a sanctuary +for Christians, whom he loves and honours, being a patron of learning, +and an encourager of true valour and just government, abhorring all +covetousness, and despising the base custom of accepting bribes and +presents, in use among his ancestors and the nobility of this empire. +Should Sultan Churrum ascend the throne, it will be a great loss to us, +as he is a rigid adherent to the superstition of Mahomet, a hater of all +Christians, proud, subtle, false, and barbarously tyrannical.[206] + +[Footnote 206: From this paragraph it appears that the journal of Sir +Thomas Roe was addressed to the Governor and Committees, or Directors of +the East India Company.--E.] + +The king returned from hunting on the night of the 13th October, and +sent me a wild pig. An ambassador is daily expected here from Shah +Abbas, king of Persia. This day I received advice of the arrival of four +of our ships in safety at Swally roads, and at the same time received +letters from England. The fleet, originally consisting of six ships, +left England on the 9th March, 1616, losing company of the Rose about +the North Cape, in foul weather. The other five arrived safely in +Saldanha bay on the 12th June, where the Lion was waiting for a wind, +homewards bound, her officers and people all in good health. After +staying some time at the Cape without news of the missing ship, they +dispatched the Swan for Bantam, and sailed on the 29th June with the +other four ships for Surat. On this passage, on the 6th August, when in +lat. 12° 50' S. near the Comora islands, they got sight of a carrack of +1500 tons burden, and 600 men, being the admiral of a fleet for Goa. The +Globe fetched her to windward, and after the usual salutations of the +sea, the carrack commanded her to leeward, and seconded this order with +five shots through her hull, to which the Globe replied with eighteen, +and then luffed off. The admiral of the English got now up with all his +ships, and demanded satisfaction for the injury, which was replied to +with scorn. On this an engagement ensued, in which the commander, +Benjamin Joseph, was soon slain, but his successor continued the battle. +Towards evening the carrack ran herself ashore on the rocks of +_Angazesia_. Our fleet came to anchor in the offing to wait the event, +and sent a boat to offer fair terms of battle. But about midnight the +carrack was set on fire, and continued to burn all next morning. The +English sent their boats to give assistance, but could not approach, and +they had reason to believe that not one man was saved.[207] The new +viceroy of Goa was in this ship, by whose obstinacy the death of all the +rest was occasioned. Our fleet came to anchor off Swally on the 24th +September, 1616. + +[Footnote 207: It was afterwards known that some few escaped with life +and poverty. A more particular account of this fight will be found in +the subsequent journal of Alexander Child.--_Purch._] + +The 14th October I waited on the emperor, to whom I imparted his +majesty's salutations, which were courteously received, but he +immediately began to enquire what presents had been sent to him. I +mentioned our late fight and victory, at which he seemed to rejoice, and +applauded the valour of our nation; but he immediately shifted the +discourse, asking what our king had sent him. I answered, that he had +sent many tokens of his love and affection; but knowing that his majesty +was lord of the best portion of Asia, and the richest monarch of the +East, my sovereign was satisfied the sending of rich gifts to his +majesty were to cast pearls into the sea, their common mother and +storehouse; but that my master, together with the warmest assurance of +his love, had sent him many curiosities, which I hoped would give him +entire satisfaction. He urged me to mention particulars, some of which I +named. He asked me for French _muffe_ or velvet, to which I answered, +that all my letters were not arrived. He then enquired if there were any +dogs. To which I answered, that some had been slain in the battle at +sea, but that two were preserved for him, at which he seemed much +rejoiced. He then said, if I could procure him one of our great horses, +such as I had described, being a _roan_ or Dutch horse, he would value +it more than an additional kingdom. I answered, that I should use my +best endeavours to satisfy his majesty, but much feared it could not be +effected, owing to the length of the voyage. He said he would willingly +give a lack of rupees for such a horse. I then desired he would be +pleased to give an order for the transmission of the presents without +being searched, and for the good usage of our people. He answered, that +the port belonged to his son, but sent for him, and publicly gave orders +for what I required; that the presents should not be searched, nor pay +any custom, but should be sent up safe to me with all expedition, that I +might distribute them at my discretion. He likewise commanded the prince +to give orders for the good usage of our people, and that I should be +satisfied in all my demands. This order did not extend to the grant of a +fort, as Asaph Khan had absolutely refused to deliver in that clause. +This charge was very round and hearty on the part of the king, and a +great grace to me. The prince called Asaph Khan forwards in my presence, +and promised, before his father and the whole court, to give me all +reasonable satisfaction. All this was on the strength of the new +presents. + +That same day I sent for the Portuguese jesuit who resided at court, and +gave him an account of the engagement between our ships and the carrack, +offering to make peace between our nation and the Portuguese upon equal +terms. He promised to acquaint the viceroy of Goa with my offer, and so +departed. The 15th I received accounts from Masulipatan that Captain +Keeling had taken a Portuguese ship and two barks; one on the coast of +Cochin, laden with tin, and the other freighted from Bengal, both of +which were carried to Bantam. I was also informed that Sir Robert +Shirley had been dismissed with disgrace from Goa, and was on his way +overland to Masulipatan, to procure a passage; but am apt to believe +this intelligence is untrue. + +The 16th, being with the prince's secretary about the dispatch of our +affairs, he proposed to me, by his master's orders, to procure him two +gunners from our fleet to serve him in the Deccan war, offering good pay +and good usage. This I undertook to perform, knowing that indifferent +artists might serve there. While at the prince's palace, Abdala Khan +came to visit him, so magnificently attended, that I have not before +seen the like. He was preceded by about twenty drums, and other martial +music, on horseback, who made abundant noise. After them followed fifty +persons bearing white flags, and two hundred well-mounted soldiers, all +richly clothed in cloth of gold, velvet, and rich silks, who all entered +the gate with him in regular array. Next his person were forty +targeteers, in the richest liveries. After making his humble reverence, +he presented a black Arabian horse, splendidly caparisoned, all his +furniture being studded with flowers of enamelled gold, and set with +small precious stones. According to custom, the prince returned a +turban, a vest, and a girdle. + +Still persisting in his purpose of personally finishing the war in the +Deccan, he would give no answer to the ambassadors from that country, +but detained them till he should come to the frontiers. Being now about +to depart, he and his party thought themselves not secure if Sultan +Cuserou remained under the safeguard of Anna-Rah, lest, during the +absence of Churrum, the king might be reconciled to Cuserou, by whose +liberty all the hopes and power of their faction would be overthrown, in +which case their ambition and the injuries they had done could hardly +escape punishment. In this view they continued to urge the king to +deliver Sultan Cuserou into the custody of Asaph Khan, as deputy on that +occasion to Churrum, under pretence that this measure would intimidate +Khan-Khannan and the Deccan princes, when they shall learn that Sultan +Churrum is so favoured that the king has delivered his eldest son into +his keeping, giving him as it were present possession of the kingdom, +and the certain prospect of succession. Accordingly, on the 17th of +October, Sultan Cuserou was delivered up as they desired, the soldiers +of Anna-rah were discharged, and those of Asaph Khan placed over him, +assisted by 200 horse belonging to the prince. The sister of Sultan +Cuserou, and several other women in the seraglio, have put themselves in +mourning, refuse to take their food, and openly exclaim against the +dotage and cruelty of the king; declaring, if Cuserou should die, that +an hundred of his kindred would devote themselves to the flames, in +memory of the king's cruely to the worthiest of his sons. + +The king endeavoured to sooth them by fair words, protesting that he had +no evil intentions towards his son, whom he promised speedily to deliver +from captivity, and even sent his favourite Nourmahal to endeavour to +appease the enraged and disconsolate ladies; but they refused to admit +her visit, loading her with curses and threatnings. The common people +universally condemn the king's conduct, saying, that he has not only +delivered his son's life, but his own into the keeping of an ambitious +prince and treacherous faction, and that Cuserou cannot perish without +extreme scandal to his father, unless he amply revenge his death, for +which cause the party will dispatch the king first, and his eldest son +afterwards, that through their deaths the ambitious and unnatural +Churrum may mount the throne. Every hour new rumours are spread of the +deliverance of Cuserou, which are speedily contradicted; for he still +remains in the tyger's den, refuses food, and requires that his father +may take away his life, and not leave him to be a sport and prey to his +inveterate enemies. The whole court is filled with rumours and secret +whispers; the nobles are sad, and the people full of turmoil and noise, +without any head, having no one to direct their rage to any specific +object. The issue seems involved in dangers, especially for us, as, in +regard to themselves, it matters not who wins. Although the elder prince +have more right, and is of a more honourable character, he is still a +Mahomedan, and can hardly be a better prince than his father, whose +dispositions are good, yet so facile that he allows all to govern at +their will, which is even worse than if he were a tyrant, for we had +better suffer injuries from one prince than from a host of ministers and +subordinate agents. + +The 19th of October _Mahomet Reza Beg_, the Persian ambassador, made his +entry into the city with a great cavalcade, partly sent out by the king +to meet him. There were at least an hundred elephants, with many +musicians; but no man of quality went out on this occasion beyond the +ordinary official receivers of strangers. His own train consisted of +about fifty horse in splendid dresses of cloth of gold, their bows, +quivers, and targets being richly adorned. Together with these he had +about forty musqueteers, and about 200 ordinary _peons_ and attendants +on his passage. He was conducted to a room within the outer court of the +palace, to rest himself till the evening, at which time I sent my +secretary to the durbar, to give me an account of the ceremonial. On +coming into the presence, and reaching the first rail, he made three +_tessalims_ and one _sizeda,_ which is prostrating himself and knocking +his head three times against the ground. On entering within the rail he +did the same, and then presented the letter of his master, _Shabas_, +[Shah Abbas.] This the king took with a slight inclination of the body, +saying only, _How doth my brother_? without using any title of majesty. +After some few words, the ambassador was placed in the seventh rank, +close to the rail beside the door, and below many of the king's +servants, which, in my opinion, was a very mean place for the ambassador +of Persia; but he richly merited this degradation for doing that mean +reverence to the dishonour of his master which all his predecessors had +refused, and by which he gave much offence to many of his nation. It is +reported that he had orders from Shah Abbas to give content in all +things, and hence it is conjectured that he is sent to obtain some aid +in money against the Turks, in which kind the court of Persia often +finds liberal succour from the Mogul government. Others pretend that his +object is to mediate a peace for the princes of the Deccan, whose +protection Shah Abbas is said to have much at heart, being jealous of +the extension of this empire. + +According to custom, the king gave him a handsome turban, a vest of +cloth of gold, and a girdle, for which he again made three _tessalims_ +and a _sizeda_, or ground courtesy. The present he brought consisted of +three times nine Persian and Arabian horses, this being among them a +ceremonious number; nine very large and handsome mules; seven camels +laden with velvet; two suits of European _Arras_, or tapestry, which I +suppose was Venetian; two chests of Persian hangings; one rich cabinet; +four muskets; five clocks; a camel's load of cloth of gold; eight silk +carpets; two balasss rubies; twenty-one camel loads of wine made of +grapes; fourteen camel loads of distilled sweet waters; seven of +rose-water; seven daggers and five swords adorned with precious stones; +seven Venetian mirrors, all so fair and rich that I was ashamed of the +relation. + +These presents were not now delivered, but only a list of them in +writing. His own equipage was rich, having nine led horses, their +trappings all studded with gold and silver. His turban was encircled by +a chain of pearls, rubies, and turquoises, having three pipes of gold, +in which were three plumes of feathers. Having thus caused accurate +observation to be made of his reception, and compared it with my own, I +find it in nothing more gracious than my own, and in many things +inferior, except only in being met without the town, which, owing to my +sickness, was not demanded; neither did the king receive the letter of +Shah Abbas with so much respect as that of the king, my master, whom he +called the king of England, his brother, naming the Persian barely his +brother, without addition. This observation was made by the jesuit, who +understood the language. + +§5. _Continuation of Occurrences at Court, till leaving Agimere, in +November_, 1616. + +The 20th of October I received the prince's letter to send to Sarat, +with orders for the governor of that city to sit along with the judge +of the custom-house, to take care that no wrong was done to the English. +The clause about sending up the presents sealed and unsearched to me, +was so obscure and unintelligible, that it was susceptible of various +constructions, which I believed was done designedly, that they might +come into the hands of the prince, so as to become his own. I sent it +back therefore to his secretary to be altered; and getting it returned +still more intricate than at first, I went to the prince on the 21st, +and desired to have that clause of his letter explained, at which he +stuck a little, and I perceived he was as hollow as I had imagined. He +plainly asked, How then he should have his presents, or see such +curiosities as came up? and proposed to accompany me to where they were. +I answered, that I could not do this till I had delivered my master's +message and presents to the king, after which I should wait upon his +highness with his presents, and that every rarity that came to me should +be sent after him. He pressed me to pass my word for the performance of +this, which I did, and then I had the letter for Surat made out to my +content. + +At this interview the prince observed a white feather in my hat, and +asked if I would give it to him. I answered, that I could not presume to +offer any thing I had worn; but if he were pleased to command it, that +or any thing else in my power was at his service. He then asked if I had +any more; to which I answered, that I had three or four others of +different colours. He desired to have them all, as he was to shew his +horses and servants to the king within two days, and wanted some, being +rare in these parts. I therefore promised to bring all I had next day, +when his highness might take what pleased him. + +This day Abdalla Khan waited on the prince with a gallant equipage, +himself and servants being anticly apparelled, yet soldier-like, +according to their fashion. On this occasion he made a present to the +prince of a handsome white horse, full of spirit and high mettled, the +saddle and furniture all ornamented with enamelled gold. The prince +returned him a plain sword with a leathern belt. Many other swords were +brought before him, the hilts and scabbards being of silver, set with +small stones, together with targets covered with gold velvets, some +painted and embossed with gold and silver, all of which he distributed +among his servants. Against this muster many saddles and other +horse-furniture were provided, richly ornamented with gold and precious +stones, intended for spare horses. His boots were embroidered, and every +thing was of the highest magnificence, so that the expence is +wonderful, and the wealth seen daily is inestimable. There is a report +going, that, on the past night, six of the servants of Sultan Churrum +went to murder Sultan Cuserou, but were refused the key by the porter +who has charge of him. It is farther said that the queen mother is gone +to the king to lay before him an account of this matter. But the truth +of these things is hard to be found, and it is dangerous to ask +questions. + +In the evening I went to the durbar to wait upon the king, where I met +the Persian ambassador with the first muster of his presents. He seemed +a jester or juggler, rather than a person of any gravity, continually +skipping up and down, and acting all his words like a mimic player, so +that the _Atachikanne_ was converted as it were into a stage. He +delivered all his presents with his own hand, which the king received +with smiles and a chearful countenance, and many gracious words. His +tongue was a great advantage to the Persian in delivering his own +business, which he did with so much flattery and obsequiousness, that he +pleased as much that way as by his gifts, constantly calling his majesty +king and commander of the world, forgetting that his own master had a +share of it; and on every little occasion of favourable acceptance, he +made his _tessalims_. When all was delivered for that day, he prostrated +himself on the ground, making _sizeda_, and knocking his head on the +floor as if he would have entered it. + +The gifts this day were a handsome quiver for a bow and arrow, richly +embroidered; all sorts of European fruits, artificially made, and laid +on dishes; many folding purses, and other knacks, of leather, curiously +wrought in coloured silks; shoes stitched and embroidered: great mirrors +in richly inlaid frames; one square piece of velvet, highly embroidered +with gold in panes, between which were Italian pictures wrought in the +stuff, which he said were the king and queen of Venice, being, as I +suppose, the hanging called Venetian tapestry, of which six were given, +but only one shown. There were besides, many other curiosities of small +value; after which came the three times nine horses and mules, the +latter being very handsome, but the horses had lost their beauty and +condition, as, except one or two, they were very unfit for being sent or +accepted between princes. This done, the Persian returned, with many +antic tricks, to his place, which was far inferior to mine, as I stood +alone, and above all the subjects, though Asaph Khan at first wanted to +put me from it, but I maintained it as my right, having been appointed +me by the king. This was only the first act of the play presented by +the Persian ambassador, which will not be finished in ten days. + +The 22d I went to the prince's secretary for the promised Surat letter; +but his highness had changed his mind, and, loth to let the presents +pass without ransacking them, refused to seal the letter. The secretary +pretended they could not be allowed to pass without search, lest the +merchants, under that pretence, might defraud the customs. I was +offended, and going away; but the secretary prevailed on me to go with +him to the prince, to whom I delivered some feathers, being two +_plurides_ and two birds of paradise, which he graciously accepted; and +having made known my determination not to have the presents opened, or +to be sent up by any others than my own servants, he at last yielded, +and commanded his secretary to make out the dispatch in my own way. + +At night I went to the durbar to observe the Persian ambassador, whom I +found standing in his place, but often removed and set lower, as the +great men came in. The king once spoke to him, on which he played off +his monkey tricks, but gave no present; only the king gave command that +he should be feasted by the nobles. Most of the time was spent in seeing +saddles and furniture, against the removal of the court, some of which +the king presented to his followers, as the court was daily expected to +move; the king's tents having been pitched four days. I sent that night +to the secretary for my firmaun, but was put off with excuses. + +The 24th the king removed to Havar Gemal, and called for the Persian +ambassador, who at night eat and drank before the king along with the +nobles, as I had done on the birth-day. On this occasion the king gave +him 20,000 rupees for his expences, for which he made innumerable +_tessalims_ and _sizedas_, which greatly pleased the king, being base +yet profitable idolatry. As the prince was in attendance on the king, I +could not get my business dispatched. + +The king returned to the city in the evening of the 25th, having been +far gone in wine the night before. Some person, either by chance or from +malice, spoke of the last merry night, when many of the nobles had drank +wine, which none may do without leave. Having forgot his own order, the +king demanded to know who gave? It was answered that it had been given +by the _buxy_, as no one dared to say it was the king, seeing he doubted +it. The custom is that the king drinks alone, though sometimes he will +give command that the nobles shall drink also, which to refuse is +likewise an offence, so every one who takes the cup of wine from the +officer has his name written down, and makes _tessalim_, though perhaps +the king's eyes are misty. The king called for the _buxy_, and asked if +he gave the order, which he falsely denied; though he actually gave it +as ordered, calling by name such as were to drink with the ambassador. +The king then called for the list, and fined the delinquents, some 1000, +some 2000, and others 3000 rupees. Some that were near his person, he +caused to be whipped in his presence, receiving 130 stripes with a most +terrible instrument of torture, having at the ends of four cords irons +like spur-rowels, so that every stroke made four wounds. When they lay +for dead, he commanded the standers-by to spurn them with their feet, +and the door-keepers to break their staves upon them. Thus cruelly +mangled and bruised, they were carried away, one of them dying on the +spot. Some would have excused themselves, by blaming the ambassador; but +the king said he had only ordered a cup or two to be given to him. +Though drunkenness be a common and frequent vice in the king, it is yet +strictly forbidden; and no one can enter the _guzelkhan_ where the king +sits, till the porters have smelt his breath, and if he have only tasted +wine he is refused admittance; and if this reason of his absence be +known, he shall scarcely escape the whip. When the king has taken +offence at any one, even a father dares not speak for his son. Thus the +king made all the company pay for the Persian ambassador's reward. + +The 26th, I went to _Sorocolla_, the prince's secretary, to get the +promised firmaun; when he sent me a copy as fraudulent and ambiguous as +the former, which I refused to accept. I drew up the clause I so much +disliked myself, which I sent back, and was promised to have it sealed +next day. + +The day of the king's removal being at hand, I sent on the 28th to Asaph +Khan, to have a warrant for carriages, as our merchants had sought all +over the town for carriages to convey their goods to Agra, and could not +procure any. As I was enrolled by the king, I received an order for +twenty camels, four carts, and two coaches, to be paid for at the +king's price; of which I appointed for the use of the factors as many as +they needed. + +At this time the following incident took place, being either a wonderful +instance of baseness in this great monarch, or a trial of my +disposition. The king had condemned several thieves to death, among whom +were some boys, and there was no way to save their lives, except by +selling them as slaves. On this occasion, the king commanded Asaph Khan +to offer two of them to me for money, which he directed to be done by +the _cutwall_, or marshal. He came accordingly and made the offer to my +interpreter, who answered without my knowledge, that the Christians kept +no slaves, and, as I had already set free those the king had given me, +it was in vain to propose the matter to me. I afterwards suspected this +were done to try me whether I would give a little money to save the +lives of two children, or, if it even were in earnest, I thought there +was no great loss in doing a good deed. So, to try the scope of this +affair, I directed my interpreter to inform Asaph Khan, that being made +acquainted with the offer, and the answer my interpreter had given, I +had reprehended him for presuming in any case to answer for me; and +that, if any money were to be given to save the lives of the children, +either to those whom they had robbed, or to redeem them from the law, I +was ready to give it, both out of respect for the king's command, and +for charity; but I would not buy them as slaves, only meaning to pay +their ransom, and set them free; and, if he would let me know the king's +pleasure, that I might give them their lives and liberties without +offence, I was very willing to do it. + +Asaph Khan agreed to accept the money, making many commendations of my +extraordinary goodness, and said I might dispose of the boys as I +thought fit, desiring me to send the money to the _cutwall_, yet made no +offer of informing the king, which was one chief purpose of my +liberality. I had no inclination to be cheated, yet resolved to pay the +money in such a way that the king should learn I had more mercy than he, +and that a Christian valued the life of a Mahomedan beyond money. I sent +therefore a factor and my interpreter to the _cutwall_, to acquaint him +with my communication to Asaph Khan, and that, if he informed the king +of my offer to redeem the prisoners for charity, and his majesty +consented to give them their pardon and liberty, I was ready to send +the money; but that I would not buy them as slaves, even for an hour. +Thus I put them to the test as to their base offer. This sum did not +exceed ten pounds, a poor affair for which to impose upon a stranger, or +to be gained by so great a king. The _cutwall_ answered that he would +enquire the king's pleasure, and let me know the result. Some would have +me believe, that this was, a signal favour of the king, chusing out any +great man to do this good and honourable work of redeeming prisoners, as +the money is given in satisfaction to the person robbed, and that those +who are thus appointed to ransom them, make _sizeda_ to the king, as for +a mighty benefit. But I see no honour in a king thus to impose upon a +stranger, to whom he gives neither maintenance nor liberality. I went to +the durbar, to see if the king would himself speak to me, that I might +declare my own offer. The _cutwall_ made many motions, and brought in +his executioner, who received some commands, but I understood them not. + +I this day sent my secretary with a message to the Persian ambassador, +to say I would visit him, if he gave his word to return my visit. He +sent me for answer, with much respect, that it was not the custom of the +country for ambassadors to visit each, other without leave of the king, +which he would ask; and which given, he would thankfully accept my +visit, and repay it with all manner of pleasure. + +On the 1st November, Sultan Churrum took his leave and went to his +tents. On this occasion the king sat in his durbar at noon, when the +prince passed his establishment in review before his father, consisting +of about 600 elephants richly caparisoned, and about 10,000 horse, all +splendidly arrayed, many of his followers being clad in cloth of gold, +and their turbans adorned with herons plumes. The prince himself was in +a dress of cloth of silver, all over embroidered, and splendidly +decorated with pearls and diamonds, shining like the firmament in a +clear night. The king embraced and kissed him with much affection, +presenting him with a rich sword, the hilt and scabbard all of gold set +with precious stones, valued at 100,000 rupees, a dagger valued at +40,000, together with an elephant, and a horse, the furniture of both +magnificently adorned with gold and jewels. At his departure, he gave +him a coach, made in imitation of that sent by the king my master to the +emperor, and commanded the English coachman to drive the prince to the +tents. Churrum went accordingly into the coach, sitting in the middle +thereof, all the sides being open; and was attended by all his chief +nobles a-foot, all the way to the camp, which was about four miles. +Being followed by a vast concourse of people, he scattered all the way +among them handfuls of quarter rupees. At one time he reached his hand +to the coachman, and put about 100 rupees into his hat. + +On the 2d, the king removed, with his women and all the court, to the +tents, about three miles from town. I went that morning to attend upon +him at the _Jarruco_ window of the palace, and went up to the scaffold +under the window, being desirous to see this exhibition. Two eunuchs +stood upon tressels, having long poles headed with feathers, with which +they fanned him. On this occasion, he dispensed many favours, and +received many presents. What he gave was let down by a silk cord, rolled +on a turning instrument; and what he received was drawn up in the same +manner, by a venerable, fat, and deformed old matron, all hung round +with _gymbals_ like an image. Two of his principal wives were at a +window on one side, whose curiosity led them to break holes in a lattice +of roods that hung before the window, to gaze on me. At first I only saw +their fingers; and afterwards, applying their faces to the holes, I +could at times see an eye, and at length could discern their entire +countenances. They were indifferently fair, having their black hair +smoothed up from their foreheads; and they were so adorned with pearls +and diamonds, that I might have seen them without the help of any other +light. On my looking at them, they retired very merry, and, as I +supposed, laughing at me. + +After some time, the king departed from the window, and we all went to +the durbar, to wait his coming out of the inner apartments. He came not +long after, and remained in the durbar for about half an hour, till his +ladies had mounted their elephants, which were in all about fifty, all +richly caparisoned, especially three, which had turrets or _howders_ of +gold, with grates of gold wire for the ladies to see through, and rich +canopies over head of cloth of silver. The king then descended the +stairs, amid such acclamations of _health to the king_, as would have +drowned the noise of cannon. At the foot of the stairs, where I +contrived to be near him, a person brought to him a large carp, and +another presented a dish of some white stuff like starch, into which the +king dipped his finger, with which he touched the fish, and then rubbed +it on his forehead. This ceremony was said to presage good fortune. Then +came another officer, who buckled on his sword and buckler, all set with +large diamonds and rubies. Another hung on his quiver with thirty +arrows, and his bow-case, being that which had been presented by the +Persian ambassador. On his head, the king wore a rich turban, with a +plume of heron's crests, not many but long: On one side hung a rich +unset ruby as large as a walnut; on the other side a diamond of equal +size; and in the middle an emerald much larger, shaped like a heart. His +sash was wreathed about with a chain of great pearls, rubies, and +diamonds, drilled. A triple chain of excellent pearls, the largest I had +ever seen, hung round his neck. He had armlets above his elbows, richly +set with diamonds; and three rows of diamonds round each wrist. His +hands were bare, having a rich ring on almost every finger; and a pair +of English gloves were stuck into his girdle. His coat, without sleeves, +was of cloth of gold, over a fine robe as thin as lawn. On his feet he +wore buskins embroidered with pearls, the toes being sharp and turned +up. + +Thus richly accoutred, he went into the coach, which waited for him +under the care of his new English servant, who was dressed as gaudily as +any player, and more so, and had trained four horses for the draught, +which were trapped and harnessed all in velvet and gold. This was the +first coach he had ever been in, made in imitation of that sent from +England, and so like it that I only knew the difference by the cover, +which was of gold velvet of Persia. Having seated himself at one end, +two eunuchs attended at each side, carrying small golden maces set all +over with rubies, to which horse-tails were fastened, for driving away +flies. Before him went drums, bad trumpets, and loud music; with many +canopies, parasols, and other strange ensigns of majesty, all of cloth +of gold, and adorned with rubies. Nine spare horses were led before him, +some having their furniture garnished with rubies, some with pearls, and +others with diamonds, while some had only plain gold studs. Next behind +the coach came three palanquins, the carriages and feet of one being +plated with gold, set with pearls, and a fringe of great pearls in +strings a foot long, the border being set all round with rubies and +emeralds. Beside this, a man on foot carried a stool of gold, set with +precious stones. The other two palanquins were covered and lined with +cloth of gold. + +Next followed the English coach, newly covered and richly trimmed, which +he had given to his favourite queen, Nourmahal, who sat in the inside. +After this came a coach, made after the fashion of the country, which I +thought seemed out of countenance, in which were his younger sons. This +was followed by about twenty spare royal elephants, all for the king's +own use, all so splendidly adorned with precious stones and rich +furniture, that they outshone the sun. Each elephant had several flags +and streamers of cloth of silver, gilded sattin, or rich silk. His +noblemen accompanied him on foot, which I did likewise to the gate, and +then left him. His women, who accompanied him on elephants, as before +mentioned, seemed like so many parroquitos in cages, and followed about +half a mile in the rear of his coach. On coming to the door of the house +in which his eldest son was kept prisoner, he caused the coach to stop, +and sent for prince Cuserou; who immediately came and made reverence, +having a sword and buckler in his hands, and his beard grown to his +middle, in sign of disfavour. The king now commanded his son to mount +one of the spare elephants in the royal train, so that he rode next his +father, to the great joy and applause of the multitude, who were now +filled with new hopes; and on this occasion, the king gave him 1000 +rupees to throw among the people; his gaoler, Asaph Khan, and all the +ministers, being still attendant on foot. + +To avoid the press and other inconveniences, I took horse and crossed +out of the _leskar_, getting before the king, and then waited for him +till he came near his tents, to which he passed all the way from the +town between a guard of turreted elephants, having each on the four +corners of their howdars a banner of yellow taffety, and a _sling_[208] +mounted in front, carrying a bullet as big as a tennis-ball. There were +about three hundred elephants armed in this manner, each having a +gunner; besides about six hundred other elephants of honour, that +preceded or followed the king, all covered with velvet or cloth of gold, +and all carrying two or three gilded banners. Many men afoot ran before +the king, carrying skins of water with which to sprinkle the road to +prevent dust from annoying him; and no one was allowed to approach the +coach on horseback by two furlongs. + +[Footnote 208: The sling in the text appears to have been a _slung_ +musquetoon, or small cannon, mounted in that manner to avoid +recoil.--E.] + +Having gone before a-horseback, as before mentioned, I hastened to the +tents, to await the king's arrival. The royal encampment was walled +round, half a mile in circuit, in form of a fortress, with high screens +or curtains of coarse stuff; somewhat like Arras hangings, red on the +outside, the inside being divided into panes or compartments, with a +variety of figures. This inclosure had a handsome gateway, and the +circuit was formed into various coins and bulwarks, as it were; the +posts which supported the curtains being all surmounted with brass tops. +The throng was very great, and I wished to have gone into the enclosure, +but no one was allowed, even the greatest of the land having to sit down +at the gate. At length I was admitted, but the Persian ambassador and +all the nobles were refused. At this gate, and for the first time, I was +saluted by the Persian ambassador as I passed, by a silent _salam_. + +In the midst of this enclosure, there stood a throne of mother-of-pearl, +borne aloft on two pillars, under cover of a high tent or pavilion, the +pole of which was headed by a golden knob, the roof being of cloth of +gold, and the ground covered by carpets. When the king came near, +several noblemen were admitted, together with the Persian ambassador; +all of us making a kind of lane, the ambassador being on one side, and I +on the other. As the king came in, he cast his eye on me, whereupon I +made him a reverence, to which he answered by bowing and laying his hand +on his breast. Turning to the other side, he nodded to the Persian. I +followed close at his heels till he ascended the throne, every one +calling out, _joy, health, and good fortune_. The king then called for +water, with which he washed his hands, and then retired into an interior +tent, to join his women, who had entered by another gate to their own +quarters; there being about thirty divisions with tents within the royal +inclosure. His son I saw not. All the noblemen now retired to their +quarters, which were all very handsome, some having their tents green, +others white, and others again of mixed colours, all handsome in form +and arrangement, and all as orderly inclosed as their houses in the +city, so that the whole composed the most curious and magnificent sight +I had ever beheld. The whole vale seemed like a magnificent city, no +mean tents or baggage being allowed to mix among these splendid +pavilions. I was utterly unprovided with carriages or tent, and ashamed +of my situation, for indeed five years of my allowances would not have +enabled me to take the field any thing like the others; every one having +a double set of pavilions, one of which goes before to the next station, +where it is set up a day before the king removes. On this account, I was +obliged to return to my poor house in the town. + +On the 5th November I rode about five miles, to the tents of the prince, +Sultan Churrum. I made him my compliments of leave taking, wishing him +all prosperity and success; but he ordered me to return and take my +leave two days afterwards, as I had moved him on some business, +respecting debts due to the English, which he promised to examine and +dispatch. He sat in state, in the same greatness and magnificence I have +mentioned of his father; his throne being plated all over with silver, +inlaid with gold flowers, having a square canopy over head, borne up by +four pillars covered with silver; his arms, such as his sword, buckler, +bows, arrows, and lance, being on a table before his throne. I observed +him curiously, now that he was in absolute authority, and took especial +notice of his actions and behaviour. He had just received two letters, +which he read standing, before he ascended his throne. I never saw any +one having so settled a countenance, or maintain a so constant gravity +of deportment, never once smiling, or shewing by his looks any respect +or distinction of persons, but evincing an extreme pride and thorough +contempt for all around him. Yet I could perceive that he was every now +and then assailed by some inward trouble, and a kind of distraction and +brokenness in his thoughts, as he often answered suitors in a disjointed +manner, as if surprised, or not hearing what they had said. If I can +judge, he has left his heart among his father's women, with whom he is +allowed to converse. The day before, Noormahal went to visit him in the +English coach; and, on taking leave of him, she presented him with a +robe, all embroidered with diamonds, rubies, and pearls; and, if I do +not mistake, she carried away with her all his attentions from other +business. + +The 6th I had a letter from Mr Brown at Ahmedabad, giving an account of +a fray begun by the Portuguese. Five of them assailed an English boy at +Cambay, whose arms they took from him. On notice of this, John Brown and +James Bickeford went to rescue the boy, and were set upon by seven +Portuguese, one of whom fired a pistol and wounded Brown in the hand. +They defended themselves bravely and honourably like Englishmen, killed +one, wounded some others, and chaced the rest up and down the town like +cowards, to the great shame of such villains, and the reputation of our +nation. To revenge this, the Portuguese came ashore in considerable +numbers from their frigates, no more English being in the town except +the three already mentioned. The governor, being informed of this +affair, sent the cutwall with a guard to our house, and ordered the +water port to be shut, expelling the Portuguese from the town, and +commanding them, on pain of chastisement, not to meddle with the +English, whom he dismissed in safety from Cambay, and they are now +returned to Ahmedabad. + +The 9th, the prince being to remove, sent one of his guards for me in +haste. I was not prepared for going, but the messenger pressed me, +urging that his master waited for me, and he had orders not to return +without me. He added, that the whole court talked of the prince's favour +for me, and it was reported he had asked leave from the king for me to +accompany him to the war, and had promised to use me so well that I +should be forced to acknowledge his favour to our nation. I accordingly +took horse after dinner; but on my arrival, I found the prince already +under march. I met a Dutchman, the prince's jeweller, who confirmed +every thing the soldier had said, and added so much more in the same +strain, that I disbelieved the whole. I sent word to the prince of my +arrival, when he returned for answer, That I should go on before to the +tents, and wait his arrival, when he would speak with me. It was night +when he came. He sat a short while, only giving me a look, and arose to +retire among his women. As he passed, he sent a servant to desire me to +wait a little, till he came out to hold his guzalcan, when he should +take leave of me. + +He came out in half an hour, but I could not get any one to remind him +of me, and he was fallen to play, and either forgot me, or proposed to +play me a state trick. I then told the waiters, that I had been sent for +by the prince, and only waited his orders, for which I had too long +waited, as it was late, and I must return to my house; and therefore, if +the prince had any business for me, I desired it might be sent after me, +as I scorned to be so used. Before I could mount, messengers came +running after me, and called me back to wait upon the prince. Going in, +I found him earnestly engaged at cards, but he excused himself of +forgetfulness, blaming the officers formally for not reminding him, and +shewed more than ordinary attention, calling me to see his cards, and +asking me many questions. I expected he would have spoken of my going +along with him; but, finding no such discourse, I told him I had come +only in obedience to his commands, and to take my leave, and craved his +pardon for being in haste, as I had to return to Agimere, having no +convenience for staying all night in camp. He answered, that he had sent +to speak with me before his departure, and that I should be presently +dispatched. He then sent in an eunuch into the interior apartments, and +several of his officers came to me smiling, who said that the prince +meant to give me a magnificent present, and if I feared to ride late, I +should have a guard of ten horsemen to see me safe home, making as much +of the matter as if I had been to get his best chain of pearls. By and +by came a cloak of cloth of gold, which the prince had once or twice +worn, which he caused to be put on me, and for which I made my reverence +very unwillingly; yet I urged some business, and having an answer, took +my leave. It is here reputed the highest favour, to give one a garment +that has been worn by a prince, or that has merely been laid on their +shoulders. The cloak now given me might have answered well for an actor +who had to represent the character of his ancestor, Tamerlane, on the +stage, but was to me of no importance. On my way out, I was followed by +his porters and waiters, begging in a most shameless manner, so that I +half paid the value of the cloak before I could get out from among them. + +On the 10th November, almost every body had removed from the town of +Agimere, so that I was left nearly alone, and could neither get carts +nor camels for my removal, notwithstanding my warrant. The Persian +ambassador was in a similar predicament, but complained, and was soon +redressed. I therefore sent to court, and on the 11th I received two +warrants, for being supplied with carts and camels at the king's price: +but it was not easy to procure either, as the great men had soldiers in +every direction, to take up all for their use; and indeed it was +wonderful, how two leskars or camps, belonging to the king and prince, +could both remove at once. + +The 16th, an order was given by the king to set fire to the whole leskar +at Agimere, that the people might be compelled to follow, which was duly +executed. I was left almost destitute; and the Persian ambassador, who +had fought, chid, brawled, and complained, without any remedy, was in +the same state with me. We sent messages of condolence to each other; +and, by his example, I resolved to buy, as many were disposed to sell, +who would not hire at the king's price, and I calculated that by +purchasing I should almost save hire, though carts were dear, as the +hire of three months would have exhausted the price of purchase. +Necessity enforced me to remove, as the town was burnt and utterly +desolate, and I was in great danger from thieves, as the soldiers came +from camp and robbed during the night. So desolate was the town, that I +could not even procure bread. Yet I sent again to court, to make one +trial more, before I purchased. + +The 17th I received accounts from Goa, which were said to be true, that +Don Emanuel de Meneses, with about 300 of those who were saved ashore +out of the Admiral, had arrived at Goa in a very poor condition, having +been robbed and plundered by the inhabitants of Angazesia, who had also +slain many. On the 24th October, not one of the Lisbon fleet had reached +Goa, to their great wonder and disappointment. The Mosambique galleon +was fought with by the Hollanders that lately went from Surat, and had +cruised off Goa to meet the expected ships. This galleon was very rich +in gold and other commodities, but she escaped. + +I received an order for camels and carriages, but was continually +delayed and disappointed; and being afraid to remain, I bought two +carts, and was continually promised camels, yet none appeared. Mr +Bidulph remained in the prince's leskar to receive money. The leskar of +the king was still only twelve cosses from Agimere. The 18th, the +Portuguese Jesuit took leave of me, being under the necessity of +purchasing a carriage, although he had an order for one out of the +king's store; but every one was distressed, owing to the scarcity. +Having nothing material to say, respecting my own affairs, during my +solitude at Agimere, I shall here digress, to mention the state of +Sultan Cuserou, of whose new delivery into the hands of his enemies, the +hearts and mouths of all men were now full. + +Though the king had so far condescended to satisfy his proud son Churrum +at his departure, as again to place Cuserou in confinement, yet it seems +that he did not mean to wink at any injurious behaviour to his eldest +son: And, partly to render his situation the more secure, in the custody +of Asaph Khan, and partly to satisfy the murmurs of the people, who +feared some treachery against him, he took occasion to declare his mind +respecting him in the public durbar. Asaph Khan had been to visit his +new prisoner, and in his behaviour towards him, did not treat him with +the respect due to a prince, but rudely pressed into his presence +against his will, and in a disrespectful manner. Some are of opinion he +did this purposely to pick a quarrel, knowing the bravery of the prince, +who would not suffer an indignity, meaning to tempt him to draw his +sword, or to use some violence, which the guard might suddenly revenge; +or that he might have opportunity to represent to the king, that the +prince had attempted to kill his keeper, on purpose to escape. But the +prince acted with patient prudence, and only procured a friend to +acquaint the king with the rude behaviour of Asaph Khan. Accordingly, +one day at the durbar, the king called Asaph Khan before him, and asked +when he had seen his charge? To which he answered, he had seen him two +days before. The king then asked, What he had then done to him? He said +he had only visited him. But the king pressed to know what reverence and +fashion he had carried towards the prince. Asaph Khan then saw that the +king knew what had passed. He therefore said, That he had gone to wait +upon the prince, in all reverence and affection, to offer his service, +but that the prince refused him admittance into the apartment; +wherefore, as he was entrusted with his safety, he thought it both +necessary for him to see the prince, and discourteous in him to deny, +and had therefore pressed in. On this, the king quickly asked, "And when +you were in, what did you say and do?" Asaph Khan stood confounded, and +confessed that he did not make any reverence. Whereupon, the king told +him roundly, "That he would make his proud heart know the prince as his +eldest and beloved heir, and his prince and lord; and, if he ever heard +again of the smallest disrespect or want of duty in his behaviour +towards the prince, he would command his son to trample him under his +feet." He added, that he loved his son Prince Churrum, yet did not +entrust his eldest son Cuserou among them for his ruin and destruction. + +The 20th I received a new warrant for carriages, which procured me eight +camels, but such poor ones as were quite unable to suffice for our +baggage, and I was therefore under the necessity of purchasing the rest. +The 22d I removed to my tents. The 23d and 24th I waited for the +merchants; and on the latter of these days I had a letter from Ispahan, +saying that my letters had been dispatched for Aleppo, and that we were +expected in Persia, but on condition that we seconded the wishes of Shah +Abbas, by diverting the sale of his silks from Turkey. My letters added, +that the general of the Turks lay with a mighty army at _Argerone_, +[Arzerom,] six days march short of Tauris, as if uncertain whether to +attack that city, or to enter Gurgestan and Gilan, the provinces in +which silk is produced, so as to win that by conquest which was refused +in the way of trade. To guard against both attempts, Shah Abbas was +encamped at _Salmas_, whence he could march either way as might be +required. But, it was farther said, if the armies did not come to battle +in two months, the approach of winter, and the wants attendant on such +numerous bodies of men, would constrain both to quit the field. It is +thought the Persians will not adventure a battle, though 180,000 strong, +as, being light, and unencumbered with cannon or baggage, they are +fitted for rapid marches, and can harass the Turkish army with perpetual +skirmishes and assaults on all sides, hovering round about, and wasting +them, without hazard to themselves. + +§6. _Sir Thomas Roe follows the Progress of the Court, and describes the +King's Leskar, and some Places through which he passed; with instances +of the King's Superstition and Drunkenness, and some curious Incidents +respecting a Present_. + +The 25th of November I removed four cosses from Agimere, but waited +during the remainder of that month, for the arrival of a caravan, going +from Agra to Surat, by which I might transmit my papers in safety. The +caravan departed from Agimere at midnight of the 30th November: and on +the 1st December I went six cosses to Ramsor, where the king had left +the naked bodies of an hundred men, put to death for robbery. The 2d I +travelled seven c. I rested the 3d, because of rain. The 4th I went five +c. and this day I overtook a camel, laden with 300 heads, sent from +Candahar to the king, the people to whom these heads had belonged having +been in rebellion. Travelling five c. on the 5th, and four c. on the +6th, I that day overtook the king at a walled town called _Todah_, in +the best and most populous country I had seen in India since I landed. +The district was quite level, having a fertile soil, abounding in corn, +cotton, and cattle, and the villages were so numerous and near together, +as hardly to exceed a coss from each other in any direction. This town +was the best built of any I had seen in India, many of the houses being +two stories high, and most of them good enough for decent shop-keepers, +all covered with tiles. It had been the residence of a Rajput rajah, +before the conquests of Akbar Shah, and stood at the foot of a great and +strong rock, about which were many excellent works of hewn stone, well +cut, with many tanks, arched over with well-turned vaults, and large and +deep descents to them. Near it was a beautiful grove, two miles long and +a quarter of a mile broad, all planted with mangoes, tamarinds, and +other fruit-trees, divided by shady walks, and interspersed with little +temples, and idol altars, with many fountains, wells, and summer-houses +of carved stone curiously arched, so that I must confess a poor banished +Englishman might have been content to dwell here. But this observation +may serve universally for the whole of this country, that ruin and +devastation operates every where; for, since the property of all has +become vested in the king, no person takes care of any thing, so that in +every place the spoil and devastations of war appear, and no where is +any thing repaired. + +On the 7th the king only removed from one side of Todah to the other. +The 8th I was at the guzalcan, but found the king so nearly drunk, that +he became entirely so in half an hour, so that I could not have any +business with him. The 9th I took a view of the royal _leskar_, or camp, +which is one of the greatest wonders I had ever seen, and chiefly as I +saw it finished and set up in less than four hours, all except the tents +of some of the great men, who have double suits. It could not well be +less in circuit than twenty English miles, the extent in some directions +being three cosses, including the out-skirts. In the middle, where the +streets are orderly and the tents joined, there are all sorts of shops, +so regularly disposed, that all persons know where to go for any thing +they want. Every man of quality, and every trade, is regularly appointed +how far they are to be from the king's tents, in what direction, and +what ground they shall occupy, which continues ever the same without +alteration. All this may equal almost any town in Europe for size. But +no person must approach on any side within a musket shot of the +_atoskanha_, or royal quarter, which is so strictly observed that no one +is ever admitted but by name. The evening durbar is omitted, the time +being spent by the king in hunting or hawking rather, on tanks, by means +of boats, in which he takes great delight, his barges being moved along +with the leskar on carts. On these occasions he sits by the sides of the +tanks, to view the sport, these tanks being often a mile or two over. +The king is seen every morning at the _Jaruco_, formerly mentioned; but +business or speaking to him at this time is prohibited; all business +being conducted at night in the _guzalcan_, and there the opportunity is +often missed, his majesty being so frequently overcome by drowsiness, +proceeding from drunkenness. + +There was now a whisper about the court of a new affinity between Sultan +Cuserou and Asaph Khan, and great hope was entertained of the prince +recovering his liberty. I will find an opportunity to discourse of this +hereafter, because the particulars are worthy of being preserved, as the +wisdom and goodness of the king were manifest above the malice of +others: And, in this affair, Noormahal made good the observation, that +women have always great influence in court factions, and she shewed that +they are not incapable of managing business. This history will discover +a noble prince, an excellent wife, a faithful counsellor, a crafty +step-mother, an ambitious son, a cunning favourite; all reconciled by a +patient king, whose heart was not understood by any of them all. But +this will require a separate place,[209] as not fit to be mingled with +matters of ordinary business. At this time the English complained of +being ill used at Surat; but their drunkenness, and riotous behaviour +proceeding from that cause, were so notorious, that it was rather +wonderful they were not all put to death. + +[Footnote 209: This story does not however appear, the journal of Sir +Thomas Roe being left imperfect, both in the Pilgrims and in the +Collection of Churchill.--E.] + +The 16th of December I visited the king, who was just returned from his +sports, having all his game laid out before him, both fish and fowl. He +desired me to take my choice, and then distributed all the rest among +his nobles. I found him sitting on his throne, having a beggar at his +feet, a poor silly old man, all in rags and ashes, attended on by a +young one. The country abounds in these professed poor and holy men, who +are held in great reverence, and who, in voluntary sufferings and +mortified chastisements of their bodies, exceed all the boasted +performances of heretics and idolaters in all ages and countries. With +this miserable wretch, who was cloathed in rags, crowned with feathers, +and covered, with filth, his majesty conversed for about an hour, with +such kindness, as shewed a humility not common among kings. All this +time the beggar sat before the king, which is not even permitted to his +son. The beggar gave the king as a present, a cake made by himself of +coarse grain, burnt on the coals, and all foul with ashes; which yet the +king accepted, broke off a piece and eat it, which a dainty person would +hardly have done. He then wrapt up the rest in a clout, and put it into +the poor man's bosom, and sending for 100 rupees, he poured them into +the beggar's lap, gathering up with his own hands any that fell past, +and giving them to him. When his collation or banquet was brought in, +whatsoever he took to eat, he gave half of to the beggar. Rising, after +many humiliations and charities, and the old wretch not being nimble, he +took him up in his arms, though a dainty person would have scrupled to +touch him, and embraced him three times, laying his hand on his heart +and calling him father, and so left him, all of us greatly admiring such +virtue in a heathen prince. This I mention with emulation and sorrow; +wishing, as we have the true vine, that we should not produce bastard +grapes, or that this zeal in an unbeliever were guided by the true light +of the gospel. + +The 23d, being about three cosses short of a city called _Rantepoor_, +[Rantampoor,] where it was supposed the king would rest, and consult +what way to take in his farther progress, he suddenly turned off towards +_Mundu_, but without declaring his purpose. I am of opinion, he took +this way for fear of the plague at Agra, rather than from any purpose of +being near the army; for we only marched every other day no more than +four cosses, and with such a train of baggage as was almost impossible +to be kept in any degree of order. + +The 26th we passed through woods and over mountains, torn with bushes +and tired by the incommodiousness of an almost impassable way, in which +many camels perished, and many persons, wearied of these difficulties, +went away to Agra, and all complained. In this laborious day's march, I +lost my tents and carts, but by midnight I again fell in with them. The +king now rested two days, as the leskar could not again recover its +order in less time; many of the king's women, and thousands of camels, +carts, and coaches, being left in the woody mountains, where they could +neither procure food nor water. The king himself got through upon a +small elephant, which beast can climb up rocks, and get through such +difficult passes, that no horse or other animal I have seen can follow. +The 29th we encamped beside the river _Chambet_, [Chumbull.] + +The first of January, 1617, I complained to Asaph Khan of the injuries +offered to the English at Surat, though I was at the same time much +perplexed by various relations, giving me a bad account of the +disorderly and outrageous behaviour of my countrymen. Asaph Khan advised +me not to carry my complaint to the king, which would incense the +prince; but desired me to ask leave of his majesty to go to visit Sultan +Churrum, with a letter from him recommending the dispatch of my +business, and good usage to our nation; so that, carrying a present to +the prince, I should please both, and succeed in my business. This was +the same plan I had already formed, and therefore pleased me the better; +more especially as the king now certainly designed to go forwards to +Mundu, which is only eight days journey from Burhanpoor, where the +prince was; and I thought I might as well ride over to him, as remain +idle in the fields. At noon this day I visited the Persian ambassador, +being the first time we had leisure for this ceremony, and was received +by him with much respectful civility. After compliments on both sides +were over, I proposed to him the settlement of trade in his master's +dominions, which he engaged to promote as much as lay in his power. He +gave me a banquet of bad fruit, but being a good fellow, it went off +well, and he outdid in courtesy every thing I had met with in India. He +railed loudly against the court, and the king's officers and council, +using most unusual liberty. He offered to be my interpreter, desiring +that I might pitch my tents beside his, and he would impart whatever I +thought proper to the king. When about to part, after long discourse, he +pressed me to accept a horse with handsome furniture, which was brought +to the door, but I refused. He then sent for nine pieces of Persian +silks, and nine bottles of wine, that I might not depart without some +testimony of his love, but these also I refused to accept, with many +protestations of affectionate regard. I observed him looking earnestly +at my sword, which I offered to give him; but, following my example, he +refused. + +At night I visited the king, who spent his time sadly with an old man, +after reading long letters, and few spoke with him. At his rising, he +presented to this person, who was a cripple from age, 5000 rupees, and +took his leave of him with many embraces. I here again met the Persian +ambassador, who, after some compliments, repenting that he had refused +my sword, and having a liking to it, now asked it from me, saying, that +such liberty among friends was reckoned good manners in his country. We +continued to remove four or five c. every other day, and came on the 7th +to the goodly river _Shind_. The 18th, the king passed through between +two mountains, the road having been cut through the woods, but with so +much trouble and difficulty, and so much encumbrance to the baggage, +that it was left behind, without provisions for man and beast. This day +likewise I lost my tents and baggage, but found them again at midnight, +having been obliged till then to take up my lodging under a tree. This +part of the country is much infested by thieves, and is hardly under +obedience to government, except so far as it is kept under by force. It +belongs to a rajah, who has no desire to see the king. The exactor +complained, and some few of the people that fled being taken, were +chained by the neck and brought before the king, all the rest having +fled into the mountains. At night the king caused the town near which he +was encamped to be set on fire, appointing a new governor, with orders +to re-build and new-people the town, and to reduce the district under +more regular government and better civilization. He left a party of +horse with the new governor, to enable him to perform this service. + +On the 20th, the people who had fled to the mountains, being enraged at +the burning of their town, set upon a number of stragglers who had been +left behind, killing many of them, and plundering the rest. The 22d, +having no accounts of the presents I expected from Surat, I went at +night to visit the king, to observe how he might receive me. I found him +seated in an unusual manner, so that I knew not what place to occupy, +and not willing to mix among the great men, as was offered me, and +doubting whether I might go into the apartment where the king was, which +was cut down in the bank of a river, I went to the brink and stood +alone. There were none near the king, except _Etiman Dowlet_ his +father-in-law, Asaph Khan, and three or four others. The king observed +me, and having allowed me to stay a while, he called me in with a +gracious smile, and pointed with his hand for me to stand beside him, a +favour so unusual, that it pleased and honoured me, and of which I soon +experienced the good effects, in the behaviour of the great men of the +court. He led me to talk with him, and when I called for an interpreter, +he refused it, pressing me to use such Persian words as I had learnt. +Our discourse, in consequence, had not much sense or coherence, yet he +was pleased with it, and shewed his approbation in a very courteous +manner. + +On the 24th of January, news came to court, that the Deccaners were not +to be frightened out of their dominions, as had been pretended by Asaph +Khan and Noormahal, on purpose to persuade the king into this +expedition. For they had sent off all their baggage and other +impediments into the interior of their country, and lay upon the +frontiers with 50,000 horse, resolved to fight in defence of their +dominions; while Sultan Churrum had hitherto advanced no farther than +Mundu, afraid both of the enemy and Khan Khana. The king's councellors +now changed their advice, declaring that they expected the Deccaners +would have been so alarmed by his majesty's passage over the last hills, +as to have submitted at the terror of his approach; and as they now +found the contrary, they advised the king to convert his journey into a +hunting excursion, and to turn his course towards Agra, as the Deccaners +were not worthy of exposing his sacred person. He answered, that this +consideration came now too late, as his honour was engaged by having +advanced so far, and he was resolved to prosecute their former advice +and his own purpose, whatever might be the hazard. He now daily +dispatched fresh troops to reinforce the army of his son Churrum, partly +from his own followers, and the rest commanded from different +governments. These reinforcements were said to be 30,000 horse, but the +actual musters were not so numerous. Water was sometimes very scarce in +camp, and provisions grew daily scarcer and dearer, the part of the +country in which we now were not being well reduced to good government. +Not feeling these distresses, the king took no care to have them +alleviated; and as his khans, or great men, had their provisions brought +after them, they neglected to inform the king. The whole burden fell +upon strangers, the soldiers, and the poor followers of the camp, who +were worst able to endure the hardships. Every alternate day, as +formerly, the king removed his camp, three, four, or five cosses; yet on +the 29th of January, we were still sixty cosses short of Mundu. + +On the 3d of February, having left the road of the leskar for my own +ease, and for the benefit of the shade, and while resting me under a +tree, Sultan Cuserou came upon me suddenly, seeking the same +conveniences. This is the king's eldest son, formerly mentioned as in +confinement by the practices of his brother Churrum and his faction, and +taken out of their hands by the king at his leaving Agimere. He was now +riding on an elephant, with no great guard or attendance. His people +called out to me to give place to the prince, which I did, yet I staid +to look at him, and he called on me to approach; and, after asking some +familiar and civil questions, I departed. His person is comely, his +countenance chearful, and his beard hung down as low as his middle. This +I noticed, by his questions, that he seemed quite ignorant of all that +passed at court, insomuch that he had never heard of any English, or of +me their ambassador. The 4th and 5th we continued our march without +halting, and on the 6th at night, we came to a little tower, newly +repaired, where the king pitched his tent in a pleasant place, on the +banks of the river _Sepra_, one coss short of the city of _Ugen_, +[Oojain,] the chief city of Malwa. This place, called _Callenda_, was +anciently a seat of the Gentoo kings of Mundu, one of whom was there +drowned while drunk. He had once before fallen into the river, and was +taken out by the hair of his head, by a person who dived for him. When +he came to himself, it was told him how he had been saved from drowning, +in hopes of having the slave rewarded. He called his deliverer before +him, and asking how he dared to be so bold as to touch his sovereign's +head, caused his hands to be cut off. Not long afterwards, while sitting +drunk beside his wife, and no other person near, he had the same +misfortune to tumble into the water, at which time she might easily have +saved him, but did not. Being afterwards asked why she had not, she said +she knew not but she likewise might have had her hands cut off for her +reward. + +The 10th we removed one coss beyond Oojain; and on the 11th, the king +rode to that city, to speak with a dervise, or holy man, who dwelt upon +a hill, and was reported to be 300 years old, but I did not think this +miracle worth my examination. At noon this day, I received news by a +foot-post, that the prince, notwithstanding all the firmauns and +commands of his father, had intercepted the presents and goods on their +way up, to satisfy his own base and greedy inclinations; and no +entreaty, gifts, or persuasions, that Mr Terry could offer, who had the +charge of them, could prevail on him to part with them, and he compelled +them by force to follow him towards Burhanpoor. Yet he forbore to break +open the packages, but pressed the English to consent, which they +refused by my orders, and he thought to win them to his purpose by +vexatious usage. For it is the custom in this country, for the great men +to see all merchant goods before even the king, that they may chuse +first; but I resolved, if possible, to break that bad custom, in our +behalf. + +That he might satisfy his own cupidity, the prince sent up a courier to +the king, before I could get intelligence, giving notice of having +detained the goods, but without mentioning that they were presents, and +requested his authority to have them opened, that he might purchase what +he fancied. This faithless proceeding of the prince, contrary to his +promise and his own written orders, satisfied me that I was justifiable +in the eyes of all, if I carried my complaint directly to the king, +having used every possible means to procure favour from the prince, and +having already suffered beyond the patience of a free-born man; so that +I must now be blameless by using rougher means, having already +fruitlessly proved all smoother expedients. I therefore resolved to +appeal for justice, by complaint to the king in person, yet as calmly +and warily as possible. I feared to go to Asaph Khan on this occasion, +lest he might oppose my purpose, yet thought my neglect of him might be +displeasing; wherefore, if I sent to acquaint him that I proposed to +visit the king at the guzalcan, I dreaded he might suspect my purpose, +if he had learnt the injury I meant to complain of. For all which +reasons, I considered how best to avoid being counteracted. + +The visit of the king to the dervise, just mentioned, gave me a good +opportunity, and my new linguist, who was a Greek I had sent for from +Agimere, being ready, I rode out to meet the king, who was returning +from the holy man on his elephant. On his majesty's approach, I +alighted, and made a sign that I wished to speak to the king, who +immediately turned his monster towards me, and prevented me, by saying, +"My son has taken your goods and my presents; be not therefore sad, for +he shall not touch nor open a lock or a seal; for at night I shall send +him an order to set them free." He made other gracious speeches, +intimating that he knew I had come brim-full of complaints, and that he +had spoken first to ease me. At this time, seeing that the king was on +the road, I could do no more; but at night, without farther seeking to +Asaph Khan, I went to the guzalcan, determined to proceed with my +complaints, to get back my goods, and to seek redress for the charges, +troubles, and abuses at Surat, and all our other grievances. + +As soon as I came in, the king called my interpreter before him, and, by +means of his own, intimated that he had already dispatched his orders so +effectually, that not even to the value of a hair should be abstracted +from our goods. In reply, I stated that the injuries, charges, and +abuses we suffered from the prince's officers, were so numerous and +intolerable as could not be endured, and that I craved effectual +redress. To this it was answered, that I must apply to his son for all +past matters; but I could obtain nothing except fair words, through the +intermediation of Asaph Khan, so that I was forced to seem satisfied, +and to seek opportunities as might be for redress, when this false +friend and pretended advocate was out of the way. The good king fell at +length to dispute about the laws of Moses, Jesus, and Mahomet; and, +being in drink, turned lovingly to me, saying, "As I am a king, you +shall be all welcome, Christians and Jews as well as Mahometans, for I +meddle not with their faiths; they all come in love, and I will protect +them from wrong while they are under my dominion, and no one shall be +allowed to molest or oppress them." This he frequently repeated, but +being extremely drunk, he fell a-weeping, and into various passions, and +so kept us till midnight. + +Any one may easily conceive how much I was now disconcerted by the +unjustifiable conduct of the factors, who had detained the presents for +four months at Surat, and now sent them to fall into the hands of the +prince, who was then within two days march of Burhanpoor, by which my +trouble was infinitely increased. But having now began, and suspecting +that the prince was already sufficiently exasperated upon matters of +small importance, I thought I might as well lose his favour upon great +as small matters, so I resolved to try what I could do with the king; +and, while I waited the result, I sent back the messenger to Mr Terry, +who was with the presents, desiring him to remain firm, waiting for the +king's ultimate orders, which I should send him soon. + +During this interval, the king had caused the chests to be privately +brought to him, and had opened them, which came to my knowledge, on +which I determined to express my dissatisfaction at this usage, and +having obtained an audience, I made my complaint. He received me with +much mean flattery, more unworthy even of his high rank than the action +he had done, which I suppose he did to appease me, as seeing by my +countenance that I was highly dissatisfied. He began by telling me that +he had found some things that pleased him much, particularly two +embroidered cushions, or sweet-bags, a folding glass cabinet, and the +mastiff dogs, and desired me not to be discontented, for whatever I was +not disposed to give him, he would return. I answered, that most of +these things were intended for his majesty, but that it was a great +indignity to the king my master thus to seize upon what was meant to be +presented, and not permitted to come through my hands, to whom they were +sent in the first place. I added, that besides what were destined for +his majesty, some of these things were intended for Noormahal, some for +the prince, and the rest to remain in my hands, to serve as occasion +might require, to bespeak his majesty's favour to protect us from +injuries daily offered to us by strangers, and some for my friends, or +my own use, while the rest belonged to the English merchants, with which +I had no concern. He desired me not to be grieved that he had thus got +his own choice, as he had not patience to forbear from seeing them, in +which he did me no wrong, as he believed I wished him to be served +first, and that he would make satisfaction to the king my master, to +whom he would justify me. As for the prince and Noormahal, they were all +one with himself. As to bringing any presents hereafter to procure his +favour, I might be easy on that score, as it was merely a needless +ceremony, for I should be always welcome to come to him empty-handed, +and he would hear me, as it was not my fault, and he would see me +righted at all times. That he would return me some things to enable me +to go to his son, and he would pay the merchants for such things as +belonged to them. He concluded by desiring me not to be angry with the +freedom he had taken, as he meant well. As I made no reply, he pressed +to know if I were pleased, to which I answered, that his majesty's +satisfaction must always please me. + +He then began to enumerate all the things he had taken, beginning with +the mastiffs, embroidered sweet bags, the case of combs and razors, and +so forth; saying, with a smile, "You would not have me to restore these +things, and I am delighted with them?" To which I answered in the +negative. He then mentioned two glass-cases, as mean and ordinary, +asking me for whom they were intended. I answered, that one was intended +for his majesty, and the other for Noormahal. "Why then," said he, "you +will not ask me for that I have, but will be satisfied with one?" To +this I was under the necessity of yielding. He next asked for whom +certain hats were intended, which his women liked? I answered, that +three were for his majesty, and one for myself. He then said, I surely +would not take back those meant for him, and that he would return mine +if I needed it; and would not bestow it upon him. To this likewise I had +to agree. He then asked, whose were the pictures? I answered, that they +were sent me to use as occasion offered, and to dispose of as my +business might require. So he called for these, and caused them to be +opened, examining me about the women, and other little questions, asking +my judgment and opinions concerning them. The third was a picture of +Venus leading a satyr by the nose. Commanding my interpreter not to tell +me what he said on this subject, he shewed it about among his nobles, +asking them to expound its moral or interpretation, pointing out the +satyr's horns and black skin, and many other particulars. Every one +answered according to his fancy; but, liking none of their expositions, +he reserved his own opinion to himself, and commanding that all these +notions should be concealed from me, he ordered the interpreter to ask +me what it meant. I answered, that it was an invention of the painter, +to shew his art, and that it represented some poetical fable, which was +all I could say, having never seen it before. He then called upon Mr +Terry to give his opinion, who could not; on which the king asked him, +why he brought up with him an invention in which he was ignorant? On +this I interposed, saying Mr Terry was a preacher, and did not meddle +with such matters, neither had he any charge of them, having only come +along with them. + +I have related this anecdote of the picture for the instruction of the +gentlemen of the East India Company, and for him who may succeed me, to +be very careful that what they send into this country may not be +susceptible of an evil interpretation; for the king and people are +pregnant with, and full of, scrupulosity and jealousy. For, though the +king concealed his opinion, yet I had ground, from what he did say, to +believe he thought the picture was meant in derision of the Asiatics, +whom he conceived to be represented by the satyr, as being of their +complexion; and that Venus leading him by the nose denoted the great +influence exercised by the women of that country over the men. He was +satisfied that I had never seen the picture, and therefore pressed me no +farther about its explanation; yet he shewed no discontent, but rolled +up the pictures, saying he would accept even the satyr as a present from +me. As for the saddle, and some other trifles, he said he would have +them sent to his son, for whom they were fit, as a present from me, to +whom he would write so effectually, pursuant to his promise, that I +should stand in no need of a solicitor near him in any of my affairs. He +added many compliments, excuses, professions, and protestations, such as +might proceed either from a very noble or very base mind. + +He then enquired what was meant by the figures of the beasts, and +whether they had been sent for me to give him? I had understood that +they were very mean and ill-shaped images, from which the varnish had +come off, and were ill-formed lumps of wood. I was really ashamed of +them, and told him this was no fault of mine, those who had seized them +being guilty of the affront, in conveying them to his majesty, for whom +they were not intended, having only been sent to shew the forms of +certain animals in our country. He quickly replied, "Did you think in +England that a horse or a bull were strange to me?" I answered, that I +thought not upon such mean matters, the sender being an ordinary man, +who had sent these things out of good-will to me, and that I could not +know what might have been his thoughts. The king then said he would keep +them all; but that he desired I would procure for him a horse of the +largest size, a male and female mastiff, some tall Irish greyhounds, and +such other hunting-dogs as we had in England, adding, on the word of a +king, if I would procure him these, he would fully recompense me, and +grant every thing I desired. I answered, that I would engage to have +them sent by the next ships, but could not answer for their lives in so +long a voyage, but should direct their skins and bones to be preserved +if they died, to convince his majesty I had obeyed his commands. Upon +this he bowed to me repeatedly, laid his hand on his heart, and shewed +me so much kindness, favour, and familiarity, that all present declared +they had never seen him use the like to any man before. + +This was all my recompence, except that he often desired me to be merry, +as he would royally requite the wrongs he had done me, and send me home +to my country with grace and rewards befitting a gentleman. Thus, seeing +nothing returned of all that was seized but words, I requested his +majesty would order the velvets and silks to be delivered back, as these +were merchant goods sent up among mine by the command of his majesty, by +which they had escaped the rapacity of the prince's officers. He then +desired Mr Bidulph to be called for, that he might agree with and pay +him for their value. I then delivered in a memorial, which I had ready +written, containing my demands for privileges and justice, as otherwise +I should return home a mere useless person, and under disgrace with my +sovereign. I pressed likewise to have justice in regard to a debt due by +Zulphecar Khan, lately deceased. He replied, that he would take such +order with his son, in regard to our affairs at Surat, that I should +have no cause to complain, and would give such orders for other places +as should in every respect shew his regard for me; and, that I might +return to my master with honour, he would send by me a rich and worthy +present, together with his letters certifying my good behaviour, and +giving me much praise. He likewise commanded me to name what I thought +would be most acceptable. To this I answered, that I could not crave, as +that was not our custom, neither was it consistent with the honour of my +sovereign; but I had no doubt that whatever he was pleased to send would +be acceptable from so potent a monarch, who was already so much loved by +my master. He then said, that I thought he only asked in jest to please +me, as he saw I was still discontented; but he assured me he was my +friend, and would prove so in the end, and swore by his head that he +spoke sincerely in regard to the presents, and that therefore I must not +refuse to name some for his satisfaction. + +This earnestness forced me to say, that, if his majesty pleased, I +thought some large Persian carpets might be fittest, as my master did +not look for gifts of cost and value. To this he answered, that he would +provide them of all sorts and sizes, and should add to them what else he +thought fit, that my master might know how great was his respect. Having +venison of various kinds before him, he gave me half a stag, which he +said he had himself killed, and that I should see the rest bestowed on +his ladies. This was presently cut up into four pound pieces, and was +sent into the interior apartments by his young son and two women in +their bare hands, just as if he had been doling out such small fragments +to the poor by way of charity. I had now as abundant grace and fair +words as might have flattered me into conceit, but our injuries were not +to be compensated by words, though I was glad of these as a colour for +dissembling my discontent. In conclusion, he repeated his expressions of +desire to satisfy me, saying, he hoped I went away contented. To which I +answered, that his majesty's favour was sufficient to make me any +amends. He then said that he had only one farther question to ask: "How +comes it, now that I have seen your presents for two years, that your +master, before you came, sent by a mean man, a merchant, five times as +many and more curious toys, and having sent you his ambassador, with a +commission and his letters mentioning presents, that you should have +brought so little, so mean, and so much inferior to the other? I +acknowledge you as an ambassador, and have found you a gentleman in your +behaviour, but am amazed you are so slightly provided." + +I was about to reply, when he cut me short, saying, "I know that all +this is not your king's fault nor yours, but I shall shew you that I +esteem you more than those who employed you. At your return, I shall +send you home with honour and reward, according to your quality and +merit, not regarding what you have brought me, and shall send a present +to your lord and master, befitting a king to send. Only this will I +require from you, and do not expect it from the merchants, that you will +take with you patterns of the following articles: a quiver and bow-case, +a coat of mail, a cushion to rest my head upon in our fashion, and a +pair of boots, which you shall cause to be embroidered for me in England +in the richest manner, as I know they can do these things in your +country better than any I have seen. These things I shall expect from +you, and if you send them, I promise you, on the word of a king, that +you shall be no loser." This I most chearfully undertook, and he +commanded Asaph Khan to send me the patterns. He then asked if I had +any grape wine, which I said I had. He desired to have some of it to +taste next night, and if he liked it, he would be obliged to me to let +him have it, otherwise I might make merry with it myself. Thus the whole +of this night being spent in discourse only with me, he rose up, and I +departed. + +On the 3d of March we arrived at Mundu, into which the king was expected +to make his entry; but the day for that was not yet fixed, as he waited +till the astrologers had determined upon an auspicious hour for the +ceremony, so that we had all to remain without, waiting for the good +hour. The 6th I entered Mundu, and my servants, whom I had sent before +to seek out for quarters, had taken possession of a fair court, well +walled round, in which was a goodly temple and a tomb. Some of the +king's servants had already taken up their quarters there, but I got +possession and kept it, being the best within the whole circuit of +Mundu, though two miles from the king's house; yet it was so nearly +sufficient, that a very small charge was sufficient to make it +defensible against the rains, and save me 1000 rupees. The air was +wholesome, and the prospect pleasant, as it was on the very edge of the +hill. + +I went at night of the 11th to meet the king, but was told, that, on the +news of a lion[210] having killed some horses, the king had gone out to +hunt for that animal. I thus had leisure to look out for water; for such +was the unaccountable want of foresight, that we were brought, with a +multitude of people and beasts, to a hill on which was no water, so that +the men and cattle were ready to perish. What little was to be found in +certain wells and tanks had been taken possession of by the great men, +and kept by force, so that I could not procure any. The poor forsook the +city; many more were commanded away by proclamation, and all horses or +other cattle were ordered to be removed. Thus, those who were in hopes +of rest, were enforced to seek out new dwelling places, and had to go +away some two, three, and even four cosses, to the extreme trouble and +inconvenience of all, and occasioning provisions to rise greatly in +price. For my own part, I was greatly troubled how to determine. My +house was very good, and, though far from markets, it was still less +inconvenient to submit to that trouble than to remain in the fields +without house or shelter, where I must have gone to encamp, but then I +was in want of water. Riding about with this view, I came to a great +tank or pool, which was guarded for a khan, to whom the king had granted +its use. I sent to acquaint him of my needs, and asked leave to draw +water at his tank, when he was pleased to allow me to have four loads +daily. This satisfied me in some sort; and, by selling off some of the +goods that had been sent me from Surat, and putting away some of my +cattle, I had hope of being able to live; for which purpose I sent two +of my carriages, with their servants and cattle, to remain out of town, +and thus relieved myself from this public calamity. There was not a +misery or inconvenience that I was not subjected to, in thus following +the court of the Mogul, owing to the want of good management in the +government, and the intemperature of the climate. + +[Footnote 210: It is almost certain that the lions of these early +voyages and travels, at least in India, were tigers.--E.] + +§7. _A New-Year's Gift.--Suspicions entertained of the English.--Trade +of Dabul.--Dissatisfaction of the Persian Ambassador.--English Ships of +War in the Indian Seas_. + +On the 12th March, 1617, I carried, as a new-year's gift to the king, a +pair of very handsome knives belonging to myself, and six glasses +belonging to the Company, making an apology for the smallness of the +present, which was well received, and the king used me very graciously, +saying, that whatever came from my hands he looked on as a sufficient +present, and as a proof of my love, and that it was now his part to give +me. He gave orders to an officer to send for Mr Bidulph, to pay him his +demands to his satisfaction, and all others who were indebted to us were +ordered by name to pay what they owed to the Company. The king said +likewise, that he would write to the prince in our favour. But I found +him unwilling to part with any of our things, of which the best sweet +bag then lay before him. I replied, that I was very unwilling to go +empty-handed. The king then commanded that I should come up and stand +beside him on the steps of the throne, where stood on one side the +Persian ambassador, and the old king of Candahar on the other, with whom +I ranked. As soon as I had taken my place, the king asked me for a +knife, which I sent him next day. The king then called the Persian to +stand before him, to whom he gave a jewel and a young elephant, for +which he kneeled and saluted the ground with his head. + +On this occasion the same throne and furniture were used as last year, +the upper end of the hall being adorned with the pictures of the king my +master, the queen, the princess Elizabeth, Sir Thomas Smith, and some +others, with two pieces of beautiful Persian tapestry hung below them. +The throne was of gold, bespangled all over with rubies, emeralds, and +turquoises. On one side, on a little stage or scaffold, was a company of +women-singers. I this day sent a dispatch to Surat, giving my advice +respecting the trade of Persia, and of what had passed on that subject +with the ambassador, and sent some remembrance to the governor, Ibrahim +Khan. I had a letter from him in return, stating that the English nation +had been wronged without his knowledge; but as his authority was now +augmented by Prince Churrum, we might rest confident in his protection, +as while he lived and held authority at that place, we should never more +be liable to abuses, but should be allowed to reside and trade in +perfect freedom and security. + +The 13th I sent as a present to Asaph Khan a richly embroidered pair of +gloves, and a fair wrought night-cap of my own. He received the cap, but +returned the gloves, as useless in this country, and requested to have +some Alicant wine, which I sent him next night. Aganor, whose diligence +now gave me great hope of success in my desires, sent his Banian +secretary to inform me that he had orders for the dispatch, of the +merchant goods, and that his man should attend Mr Bidulph to finish that +business; that the patterns should be sent me, and that the Mogul meant +to give me a robe, and money to bear my charges in going to wait upon +the prince. I returned for answer, that I had no need of a garment or of +money, but begged his majesty would graciously consider the injuries of +which I had complained, and of which I had already given an account in +writing, and that he would please to give me a letter to the prince, +with some of our own presents which were intended for him, or else state +my excuse in writing, that his majesty had intercepted and appropriated +the whole. This was all I wished, as instead of gifts from the king, I +only required justice. + +The 21st I discovered that the Mogul suspected that I meant to steal out +of the country. These doubts had been insinuated by the prince, either +as a cover for his own guilt, or out of fear, or perhaps as a cunning +pretence to cover his own designs. He had informed the king that the +English meant next year to surprise Surat, and retain possession of that +place. Indeed, their own folly gave some colour to the idea; as lately, +upon one of the usual brawls at that place, our people had landed 200 +musqueteers, with whom they marched towards Surat; and, during their +march, some of the jovial tars gave out to all they met that they meant +to take the place. This was a most absurd bravado, for a handful of men +to march twelve miles against a walled town that was able to oppose them +with 1000 horse, and as many foot armed with match-locks, and having +besides to pass a river which could be defended by a handful of men +against an army. It gave, however, just occasion both of scorn and +offence; and the prince, perhaps to serve some ends of his own, took +occasion from it to strengthen the fortifications of the town and +castle, and to send down ordnance for their defence; perhaps a good +precaution to have an open door to flee to in case his brother should +live, and have the means of checking his ambitious views. But this +information concurring with my discontents here, and some free language +on that occasion, and my pressing demands to be allowed to go to +Burhanpoor, together with flying reports that we had taken Goa, and were +preparing a great fleet in England, raised suspicions in the mind of the +king, though he concealed them as well as he could from me. By my +explanations, however, I satisfied the king thoroughly, though I was by +no means so, having been fed only with words, and knew well that our +residence was only permitted out of fear. The complaints I was enforced +to make at this court against the misconduct of its officers towards us, +greatly offended all the great men, as being in some sort their own +case; for they all live by farming the several governments, in which +they all practise every kind of tyranny against the natives under their +jurisdiction, oppressing them with continual exactions, and are +exceedingly averse from any way being opened by which the king may be +informed of their infamous proceedings. They grind the people under +their government, to extract money from them, often hanging men up by +the heels to make them confess that they are rich, or to ransom +themselves from faults merely imputed with a view to fleece them. Thus +my complaints against exaction and injustice made me hated of all about +the court, as an informer. + +The 25th I received a letter from Captain Pepwell, then in Dabul roads, +stating,--That, according to advice, he had stopped the junk bound for +Mokha; but having well weighed the caution I had given him respecting +the correspondence between that prince and Masulipatam, where the +Solomon then was, he had freed her without spoil. By this courtesy he +had procured such good entertainment as is seldom had in the Indies, +being allowed free trade, with a promise of taking 300 pieces of +broad-cloth yearly, and had sold a good quantity of lead for ready +money, besides some ordnance. This part of his procedure I do not like +much, as tending to arm the Indians, and the Portuguese, their friends, +against the Moguls. If these courtesies proceeded not from the junk +being still under his command, they give good prospect of an yearly sale +at that port. However, the freeing of this junk gives me good assurance +that Captain Pepwell will do nothing prejudicial to the Company, and +will deliver himself honestly from the jealousies entertained of him at +Dabul. He signifies his intention of proceeding to Calicut, and if that +factory be not likely to succeed, he proposes transferring it to Dabul. + +The 27th, by a foot-post from Masulipatam, I received advice that the +Solomon had put to sea, and that the Hosiander was arrived from Bantam, +with the bad news of the loss of the Hector and Concord, while careening +in the roads of Jacatra, in the island of Java; but with the good news +that the Dragon, Clove, and Defence were laden homewards from Bantam. I +took the opportunity of this post to convey a letter to the governor of +Dabul respecting the overture made by him of trade to that port; and, +though I had no great opinion of the place, I would neither have it +entirely neglected, nor would I encourage the next fleet to proceed +there, unless on better assurance than a forced friendship, and offers +made when their junk was in our power. I signified the causes of our +having stopped their goods formerly for refusing trade to Sir Henry +Middleton; but finding him now better disposed, and willing to establish +a league of trade and amity, and to take a good quantity of our cloth, I +required to know if he were hearty in these motions; and willing to act +as a man of honour; as a pledge of which, I requested him to procure for +us a firmaun from his sovereign, with such privileges as were fit for +merchants, with a royal engagement under his seal to fulfil all the +friendly offers made to us by this officer; desiring this firmaun might +be transmitted to me with all expedition, to my present residence at +the Mogul court. By this, I said, I should be satisfied that they meant +to treat us with good faith, and on its reception, I would undertake, on +the behalf of the king of England, that a firm and lasting peace should +be established with his master, whose subjects should have free passage +on the seas without molestation from our ships; and should send yearly a +ship to trade at his port, or, if desired, should establish a resident +factory there. I have no doubt, either through fear or favour, that some +good sales may be made there yearly, but I doubt of being able to +procure any valuable investments. + +In this I proceed cautiously, as all men ought on such occasions, not +with too eager apparent desire, nor swallowing hungrily any offered +conditions, without due assurances. Strict care in the first settling is +of the utmost importance, as you can never mend your first +establishment, and may often impair it. Every man succeeds best at +first, when new and a stranger; for, by the natural levity of these +barbarians, they are fond of changes, and grow weary of things in their +usual train. I have committed this dispatch to the care of Mr Bangham, +whom I have directed to make diligent enquiry into the commodities, +advantages, and inconveniences attendant on our projected trade, and to +make himself acquainted with the humours and affections of the Deccaners +towards us. + +On the 30th of April the Persian ambassador sent to excuse himself for +going away without paying his respects to me, alleging illness, but his +messenger said he was not so sick as he pretended; but, finding no +success in his negociations with the king, he had taken his leave, and +made a present of thirty-five horses at his departure. In return, the +king gave him 3000 rupees, which he took in great scorn. Upon which, to +justify himself, the king caused two lists to be drawn up, in one of +which all the presents made by the ambassador were enumerated, with +their values, meanly rated, much lower than their real worth; and, in +the other, all the gifts the king had presented to him since his +arrival,--as slaves, melons, pine-apples, plantains, hawks, plumes of +feathers, the elephant, and not even forgetting the drink he had +received, all charged at extremely high prices, much above their value. +These two lists were laid before the ambassador, with their amounts +summed up, offering him the rest of the money to make up the balance. +Owing to this bad usage, the Persian feigned himself sick of a fever, as +an excuse for not waiting upon Asaph Khan and Etemon Dowlet, for which +reason he could not come through the town to visit me, without +discovering the counterfeit, but desired his messenger to acquaint me +with the truth, which Aganor as freely delivered, and with no small +bitterness against the king, and to which I seemed unwilling to listen. +The ambassador also desired him to assure me that he was ready to serve +my nation in his country, to the utmost of his power. I presented him +with some Alicant wine, and a few knives, to be taken to his master, and +so we parted. The 12th May I received news of a great blow given by the +Turkish army to the Persians, the former having taken and utterly +destroyed Tauris; and that Shah Abbas was unable to keep the field. + +On the night of the 25th, a lion and a wolf[211] broke into my quarters, +and gave us great alarm, carrying off some sheep and goats that were in +my court-yard, and leaping with them over a high wall. I sent to ask +leave to kill them, as in that country no person may meddle with lions +except the king. Receiving permission, and the animals returning next +night, I ran out into the court upon the alarm, and the beast missing +his prey, seized upon a little dog before me, and escaped; but my +servants killed the wolf, which I sent to the king. + +[Footnote 211: More likely to have been a tyger and hyena.--E.] + +The 14th of June, a cabinet belonging to the jesuits was sent up from +Cambay, containing medicines and other necessaries, and a letter, which +were betrayed by the bringer, and delivered to the king. He opened the +cabinet, and sent for the _padre_ to read the letter, and to see every +thing contained in the boxes; but, finding nothing to his liking, he +returned all. I mention this circumstance as a caution to all who deal +in this country, to be careful of what they write or send, as it is the +humour of this prince to seize and see every thing, lest any curiosity +or toy should escape his greed. + +The 18th, I had letters from Ahmedabad, advising that indigo had greatly +fallen in price, in consequence of the non-arrival of the flotilla from +Goa. The unicorn's horn had been returned, as without virtue, concerning +which I sent new advice.[212] Many complaints were made concerning Surat +and others, which I do not insert. I received two letters from +Burhanpoor, stating the doubtfulness of recovering the debt due to Mr +Ralph Fitch. Spragge had returned from the leskar or camp of the Deccan +army, where Melick Amber, with much show of honour, had given instant +orders for searching the whole camp; but the Persian had fled to +Visiapour, so that the business was referred by letter to a Dutchman who +resided there. The general of the Deccan army desired Spragge to be the +means of sending English cloth and swords to his camp, which is within +six days march of Burhanpoor; and, in my opinion, this might be a good +employment for some idle men, and an excellent opportunity to get vent +for our dead commodities. + +[Footnote 212: This of the unicorn's horn, or rather the horn of a +rhinoceros, may allude to some supposed inherent virtue of detecting +poison, anciently attributed to cups made of that material.--E.] + +The 30th of July I received news from Surat of two Dutch ships being +cast away on the coast near Damaun. They were from the southwards, laden +with spices and China silks, and bound for the Red Sea; but losing the +season, with much bad weather, they had tried to take shelter in +Socatora, or some other port on the coast of Arabia, but failing after +beating about many weeks, they bore away for Surat, hoping to be able to +ride out the adverse monsoon in safety, as they had done in other years. +But the years differ, and being forced to come to anchor, they had to +cut away their masts by the violence of the gale; the smaller vessel of +sixty tons was beaten to pieces, and the cables of the other breaking, +she was driven ashore in oosy ground, within musket shot of the land. +The ship kept upright; but having lost their long-boat, and the skiff +being unable to live, four men got ashore on a raft. The spring-tides +heaved her up so near the shore, that much of her goods and all her +people were saved. + +_Maree Rustam_, who had been king of Candahar, came to visit me on the +21st of August, and brought a present of wine and fruit, staying about +half an hour, and concluded his visit by begging a bottle of wine. This +day Sultan Cusero had his first prospect of long-hoped liberty, being +allowed to leave his prison, and to take the air and his pleasure in a +banqueting house near mine. Sultan Churrum had contracted a marriage at +Burhanpoor, without waiting for the king's consent, for which he had +fallen under displeasure; and some secret practices of his against the +life of his brother had been discovered, on which he was ordered to +court in order to clear himself. By the advice of their father, Etimon +Dowlet, Noormahal and Asaph Khan now made proposals of friendship and +alliance with Cusero. This news has diffused universal joy among the +people, who now begin to hope that their good prince may recover his +full liberty. The 22d the king feasted Asaph Khan. The 25th Asaph Khan +feasted Noormahal. It is reported the Prince Cusero is to make a firm +alliance, as above stated, and is to take a wife of his father's choice. +This will produce his entire liberty, and the ruin of our proud +oppressor, Churrum. + +The 1st of September was the solemnity of the king's birth-day, when he +is publicly weighed, to which I went. I was conducted into a beautiful +garden, in the middle of which was a great square pond or tank, set all +round with trees and flowers, and in the middle was a pavilion or +pleasure-house, under which hung the scales in which the king was to be +weighed. The scales were of beaten gold, set with many small stones, as +rubies and turquoises. They hung by chains of gold, large and massy, yet +strengthened by silken ropes for more security. The beam and tressels +from which it hung were covered with thin plates of gold. In this place +all the nobles of the court attended, sitting round on rich carpets; and +waiting the king's arrival. He appeared at length, cloathed, or laden +rather, with diamonds, rubies, pearls, and other precious vanities, +making a great and glorious shew. His sword, target, and throne were +corresponding in riches and splendour. His head, neck, breast, and arms, +above the elbows, and at the wrist, were all decorated with chains of +precious stones, and every one of his fingers had two or three rich +rings. His legs were as it were fettered with chains of diamonds, rubies +as large as walnuts, and some larger, and such pearls as amazed me. He +got into one of the scales, crouching or sitting on his legs like a +woman; and there were put into the other scale, to counterpoise his +weight, many bags said to contain silver, which were changed six times, +and I understood his weight was 9000 rupees, which are almost equal to a +thousand pounds sterling. After this, he was weighed against gold, +jewels, and precious stones, as I was told, for I saw none, as these +were all in bags, and might only have been pebbles. Then against cloth +of gold, silk stuffs, cotton goods, spices, and all sort of commodities; +but I had to believe all as reported, as these were all in packages. +Lastly, against meal, butter, and corn, all of which is said to be +distributed to the Banians, with all the rest of the stuff, but I saw +all carefully carried away, and nothing distributed. The silver only is +reserved for the poor, and serves for the ensuing year, as it is the +king's custom at night frequently to call for some of these before him, +to whom, with great familiarity and humility, he distributes some of +this money with his own hands. + +While the king was sitting in the scale, he looked upon me and smiled, +but spoke not, as my interpreter could not be admitted. After he was +weighed, he ascended the throne, and had basins of nuts, almonds, and +spices of all sorts, artificially made of thin silver, which he threw +about, and for which his great men scrambled prostrate on their bellies. +I thought it not decent for me to do so, which seeing, he reached one +basin almost full, and poured the contents into my cloak. The nobles +were so bold as to put in their hands to help themselves, and so thick, +that they had soon left me none, if I had not pocketed up a remainder. +Till I had myself been present, I was told that he scattered gold on +this occasion, but found it to be only silver, and so thin, that all I +had at first, being thousands of small pieces, had not weighed sixty +rupees, of which I saved to the amount of twenty rupees, yet a good +dishful, which I keep to shew the ostentation of this display of +liberality; for, by my proportion, I think all he cast away could not +exceed the value of an hundred pounds. At night he drinks with his +nobles from rich plate, to which I was invited; but, being told that I +must not refuse to drink, and their liquors being excessively hot and +strong, I durst not stay to endanger my health, being already somewhat +indisposed with a slight dysentery. + +On the 9th September the king rode out to take the air on the banks of +the river _Darbadath_, [Nerbuddah] a distance of five cosses. As he was +to pass my house, I mounted my horse to meet him; and, as it is the +custom for all men whose gates he passes, to make him some present, +which is taken as a good sign, and is called _mombareck_, or good news; +and as I had nothing to give, neither could go with nothing, nor stay +without offence, I ventured to take with me a fair book, well bound, +filleted, and gilt, being the last edition of Mercator's Maps of the +World, which I presented, saying, That I had nothing worthy the +acceptance of so great a king, but begged to offer him the world, in +which he had so great and rich a share. He accepted it in good part, +laying his hand repeatedly on his breast, saying, that every thing which +came from me was welcome. He asked about the arrival of our ships, which +I said we daily expected. He then said, he had some fat wild-hogs lately +sent him from Goa, and if I would eat any he would send me some at his +return, I made him due reverence, answering, that any thing from his +majesty was to me a feast. + +He rode on upon his elephant, and when I offered to accompany him to the +gate, the way being stony, he desired me to return, bidding God keep me. +He asked which was my house, and being told, praised it, as indeed it +was one of the best in the place, though only an old temple and a large +tomb, enclosed by a wall. Repeating his farewell, he said the way was +bad, and desired me to go home, with much shew of courtesy and kindness, +on which I took my leave. + +On the 16th I went to repay the visit of Maree Rustam, prince of +Candahar, who sent word at my arrival that he dared not receive any +visit unless he asked leave of the king, or acquainted Etimon Dowlet or +Asaph Khan, which he would do at the next durbar. I made answer, that he +needed not, as I never meant any more to trouble myself about so uncivil +a person. That I knew well this was a mere shift out of ill manners, as +the king would be no more angry for his receiving me at his house than +for coming to mine, and that I cared not for seeing him, and had only +come in pure civility to return his visit. His man desired me to wait +till he had reported what I said to his master, but I would not. At +night I waited upon the king at court, who spoke to me about the book of +maps; but I forbore to speak to him about our debts. But on the 25th, +though very weak, I went again to court to make trial of the king about +our debts. _Muckshud_, one of our debtors, having pled in excuse for not +paying that he had missed receiving his _prigany_, and knew not how to +pay unless he sold his house. I delivered the merchants petition to the +king, which he caused to be read aloud by Asaph Khan; all the names of +the debtors, with the sums they owed, and their respective sureties, +being distinctly enumerated. The king then sent for Arad Khan, the chief +officer of his household, and the cutwall, and gave them some orders +which I did not understand. Then reading over the names, and finding +some of them dead, and some strangers, he made enquiry as to their +abilities and qualities, and what goods they had received. Concerning +Rulph,[213] Asaph Khan undertook to speak to the prince on the subject, +and to get that affair concluded when he came. + +[Footnote 213: In the edition by Churchill, this person is named Sulph, +but no elucidation is given.--E.] + +My interpreter was now called in, and the king, turning to me, said that +our merchants had trusted people according to their own fancies, and to +whom they pleased, not coming to him with an inventory of their goods, +and therefore, if their debtors were insufficient, it was their own +faults, and they had no reason to expect payment of their money from +him. This I supposed to allude to his servant _Hergonen_, lately dead, +whose goods had been seized to the king's use. He added, however, as +this was the first time, he would now assist me, and cause our money to +be paid: but, if the English should hereafter deliver their goods to his +servants without money, they must stand to the hazard themselves. But if +when they brought their commodities to court, they would bring the +inventory of the whole to him, he would first serve himself, and then +distribute the rest among such as were willing to buy them; and then, if +any failed in payments, he would pay the money himself. + +This indeed is the custom of the Persian merchants, who bring all to the +king, as I have often seen. He first takes his own choice, and delivers +the rest among his nobles, his scribes writing down the names of all to +whom they are delivered, and the sums, another officer settling the +prices. After which a copy is given to the merchant, who goes to their +houses for his money; and if they do not pay, there is a particular +officer who has orders to enforce payment. It was then told to my +interpreter that Arad Khan was to call the debtors before him, and cause +them to pay. This did not satisfy our merchants, but it seemed to me a +just and gracious answer, and better than private persons usually get +from great princes. + +Hearing that I had been sick and was in want of wine, the king ordered +me to have five bottles, and when these were done that I should send for +five more, and so from time to time as I needed. He sent me also the +fattest wild-hog I ever saw, which had been sent from Goa by Mucrob +Khan. This was sent to me at midnight by a _huddy_, with this message, +that it had eaten nothing but sugar and butter since it came to the +king. I accepted this as a sign of great favour, which, in this court, I +know to be a great one. He then sent for the book of maps, saying, that +he had shewed it to his _mulahs_, and not one of them could read a word +of it, wherefore I might have it again. To this I answered, that his +majesty in this would use his pleasure; and so it was returned. + +The 26th, a rajah of the Rajpoots being in rebellion in the hills, not +above twenty cosses from the leskar, the king sent out two Omrahs with a +party of horse to fetch him in a prisoner. But he stood on his defence, +slew one of the omrahs and twelve _maansipdares_, [munsubdars] and about +500 men, sending an insulting message to the king to send his son +against him, as he was no prey to be subdued by ordinary forces. + +The 2d September, Sultan Churrum made his entry into Mundu, accompanied +by all the great men, in wonderous triumph. Contrary to all our +expectations, the king received him as if he had been an only son. All +the great men and the queen-mother[214] went to meet him at the distance +of five cosses from the town. I had sent to Asaph Khan to excuse me not +meeting him, for I was not able to stir from sickness, and besides, had +no presents to give. I also sent some of my servants with my just excuse +to the prince, to which he, in his pride, only answered by a nod. + +[Footnote 214: Both in the Pilgrims and in Churchill's Collection this +personage is termed the king's mother; but it is more probable she was +the mother of Sultan Churrum.--E.] + +The 5th of September I received advice of our ships being arrived at +Surat, the admiral amissing, but all the rest well, and that they had +taken two English rovers or pirates, which were found in chase of the +queen-mother's ship returning from the Red Sea, which they fortunately +rescued and brought safe in. Had this ship been taken, we had all been +in trouble. With these letters, I received the Company's letter, the +invoice of the goods, and instructions for Persia, with various other +notes of advice. They advised me also, that, owing to the admiral's +absence, they knew not what course to take with the pirates they had +taken. I immediately sent orders to Surat concerning all business, as +will appear in my letters. + +The 6th, I rode to visit the prince at his usual hour of giving +audience, intending to bid him welcome, and to acquaint him with our +business, meaning to shew him all proper respect; and, that I might not +come empty-handed, I bought a fine gold chain, made in China, which I +proposed to have presented to him. On sending in to acquaint him that I +was in waiting, he returned a message, desiring me to come next morning +at sun-rise, when he sat to be worshipped, or to wait till he rode to +court, which I must have done at his door. I took this in high dudgeon, +having never been denied access by the king his father; but such is this +prince's pride, that he might even teach Lucifer. This made me answer +roundly, that I was not the prince's slave, but the free ambassador of a +great king; and that I would never more visit or attend upon him who had +denied me justice; but I should see him at night with the king, to whom +only I should now address myself, and so I departed. I went at night to +the king, who received me graciously. I made my reverence to the prince, +who stood beside his father, but he would not even once stir his head. +Then I acquainted the king, that, according to his order, I had brought +an abstract to him of our merchandize, and waited his commands. After +his usual manner, he asked many questions as to what were brought, and +seemed mightily satisfied with what was in the inventory, especially +with the tapestry, promising me all the favour and privileges I could +desire. He enquired for dogs, but I could say nothing on that subject. +He then asked for jewels, but I told him these were dearer in England +than in India, at which he rested satisfied. I durst not name the pearls +for many reasons, but chiefly as I knew our people in that case would be +way-laid by the prince, and it would have cost me infinite trouble to +get them back. I thought they might easily be brought on shore, and so +to court, by stealth, and I thought they would be the more valued the +less they were expected: but my main reason of concealment was, that I +expected to make friends by their means; therefore; when Asaph Khan +pressed me on that head, I desired him to make the answer already +mentioned of their dearness, saying that I would speak to him farther +when alone. He readily understood me, and made my excuse accordingly. + +Seeing the king to be well pleased, I thought it a good time to move +him again about our debts; and having my petition ready, I opened it and +held it up, as offering it to the king. He happened not to notice this, +and it being discovered by some others what was its contents, who knew +the king would be enraged that his order was neglected, one of them +stept up to me, and gently drew down my hand, requesting me not to +present that petition. I answered, that Arad Khan had absolutely refused +me justice, and I had no other resource. Arad heard this, being by, and +went in much fear to Asaph Khan, desiring him to hinder me from making +my complaint. I answered, that our ships were arrived, and we could +neither brook nor endure such delays and loss of time. Thereupon they +consulted together, and calling the cutwall, gave directions for him to +put the king's orders, into execution. The cutwall, accordingly, beset +the tents of our debtors that very night, and catched some of them; so +that we shall now have justice. I had many thanks from all the omrahs +for the protection given to the queen's ship, and the civility shown by +our people to the passengers. This they said they had properly +represented to the king, who took it kindly, and they all declared they +were obliged in honour to love our nation, and would do us every service +in their power; yet they all wondered we could not govern our own +people, and that any should presume to take ships out of the kingdom, +and to rob upon the seas without leave of our king. + +When the king arose, Asaph Khan carried me with hint to his +retiring-place, where we first translated the inventory of our goods +into Persian, to shew the king an hour after. In this inventory I +inserted the money with some addition, that the king might see we +brought profit into his dominions by our trade. I next inserted the +cloths of different kinds, with the fine wares; and, lastly, the gross +commodities, concluding by praying his majesty to give orders for what +he wished to purchase, and then to give us liberty of selling the rest. +When this was finished, Asaph Khan asked why I wished to speak with him +in private, desiring me to speak my mind with freedom, bowing, and +protesting such friendship as I never could have expected. I told him, +that my reason for asking this private conference was to have his +advice. It was certainly true that I had some things which were not +enumerated, but had been so badly used last year that I durst not trust +any one; but, to shew my confidence in him, I was willing to open +myself to him, on his oath of secrecy, which he readily gave. I then +told him that I had a rich pearl, and some other strings of fair pearls, +and knew not whether it were fit to tell the king, lest the prince might +be displeased. I informed him likewise, how I had gone in the morning to +visit the prince, and of his discourtesy, and my consequent +determination; yet I knew his favour was necessary for us, and I had +hopes to recover it by means of this pearl, which I had purposely +concealed for him. This was my purpose, and the reason of my +concealment; and as he was father-in-law to the prince, and the king's +favourite, I was desirous to please both, and therefore begged his +advice. + +After embracing me, he said I had done discreetly, and should acquaint +neither; for, if I did, I should never get out of trouble. If the king +were to know of it, he would indeed use me courteously, but would make a +great stir to get it into his hands, and then, according to custom, I +might sue in vain to recover my own. The prince, I knew, was ravenously +greedy and tyrannical, and wearied all with his scandalous exactions. He +desired me to steal all ashore, trusting none, and explained to me many +means of conveyance, bidding me observe the usage of the Portuguese on +the like occasions; adding, that he wished to purchase the pearl, and if +I would grant his desire, would deposite its value in my hands, whatever +I chose to ask, and, in recompence for this confidence I had reposed in +him, he would hereafter be my solicitor in all things, and assured me I +could do nothing without him. I answered, that I was most willing to let +him have the pearl, and hoped he would never betray my confidence. +Having received his oath, and a ceremony of mutual covenant, by crossing +thumbs according to the custom of the country, we embraced. I promised +to be guided entirely by him, and he engaged to do every thing I +required for the safe conveyance of the other things, engaging to give +me firmauns so that no person should touch any thing, but all should +come safely to me, to dispose of at my pleasure. + +He engaged likewise to reconcile me to the prince, and would take me +with him the next time he went to visit him, and would make the prince +use me with all manner of grace and favour; adding, that I should have a +particular judge assigned me to take care of our business, and to give +us every satisfaction we could desire. He also advised me to make a +present to his sister, Queen Noormahal, and she would prevail upon the +king to give me money. To this I replied, that I wished only for the +good usage of my countrymen. He then carried me to the king, to whom I +presented the inventory translated into Persian, and was graciously +received. He asked me if the arras were a present, to which I answered +in the affirmative, as the prince was by, lest it might be seized. In +conclusion, the king said he would take a considerable quantity of our +cloths and other commodities, desiring me to cause them to be brought up +speedily, and directed Asaph Khan to make out an order for their free +passage in the prince's name. I was well pleased with the success of +this day; for though I knew that there was no faith to be placed in +these barbarians, yet I was sure Asaph Khan would deal truly in this, as +he was to help himself, and durst not betray me, lest he should miss the +pearl, neither could I suspect him afterwards, as he could not betray my +secret without discovering his own falsehood to the prince. + +§8. _Asaph Khan protects the English for hope of Gain, as also +Noormahal.--Arrival of Mr Steel.--Danger to the Public from private +Trade.--Stirs about a fort_. + +On the 12th October, according to his promise, Asaph Khan carried me +along with him to visit the prince, and introduced me into his private +apartment, when I presented ham with a small Chinese gold chain in a +china cup. He used me indifferently, but Asaph Khan persuaded him to +alter his course towards us, representing that he gained yearly by us a +lack of rupees, and that as our trade increased every year, it would in +time bring him greater profit; but that if we were harshly used, we +would be enforced to quit both Surat and the country, from which great +inconveniences might arise. We were in some measure his subjects, and +if, from desire of procuring rarities, he used us ill, we would +necessarily strive to the utmost to conceal all we brought from his +knowledge; but if he gave us that liberty and encouragement which was +fitting, we would then use our endeavours to bring every thing to him. +He represented, that my only study was to give content to his highness, +and to procure his favour and protection, and therefore that he ought to +receive me honourably when I came to visit him, and according to my +quality, which would give satisfaction to my nation, and encourage me to +serve him. Finally, be moved his highness to give me a firmaun for our +present use, which he easily obtained, with a promise of all manner of +satisfaction. The prince accordingly gave immediate orders to his +secretary to draw it up in every point to our content, and to write a +letter to the governor recommending it to his attention; adding, that I +should at all times have any other letters I desired. + +It is thus easy to be seen what base and unworthy men I have to deal +with. For the sordid hope only of buying some toys, Asaph Khan has +become so reconciled to me as to betray his son-in-law, and is +obsequious even to flattery. The ground of all his friendship is his +desire to purchase the gold taken in the prize, and some other knacks; +for which purpose he desires to send down one of his servants, which I +could not deny without losing him, after having so long laboured to gain +his favour; neither was this any disadvantage to us, as his payment is +secure, and will save us much trouble and charge in selling elsewhere, +especially the wine and other luggage that is apt to spoil in carriage. +For this purpose he obtained an order from the prince under false +pretences, and wrote himself in our favour to the governor of Surat, +doing us all manner of kindness. There is a necessity for his +friendship, as his word is a law in this empire, and therefore I did not +choose to seem to notice his unworthiness. I hope by this procedure to +win him to our advantage, or at least to make our present good use of +him. On this occasion I moved him to procure us a firmaun for trade with +Bengal, which he has promised, though he would never before hearken to +that request. He likewise now prosecutes our debtors as if they were his +own; and in passing the residence of the cutwall on his elephant, he +called upon him to command dispatch, which was a most unusual favour. +Upon this _Groo_ was immediately imprisoned, and _Muckshud_ had only two +days allowed him to pay us. Thus I doubt not that in ten days we shall +recover to the amount of 44,000 rupees, though our debtors are the most +shifting false knaves in all India. + +On the 21st, a servant came to me from Asaph Khan, bearing a message +from Noormahal, intimating that she had moved the prince for another +firmaun, which she had obtained, and by which all our goods were taken +under her protection; and that she was ready to send down her servant +with authority to take order for our good establishment, and to see that +we were no way wronged. He said farther, that Asaph Khan had done this, +for fear of the prince's violence, and to guard against his custom of +delays; and that now when the queen his sister had desired to be our +protectress, he was sure the prince would not meddle; and farther +assured me, upon his honour, that I should receive every thing consigned +to me, for which the queen had written the most positive orders, and had +directed her servant to assist our factors, that we might never more +have any cause of complaint at Surat. He desired, therefore, that I +might write a few lines to the captains and factors, directing them to +use the queen's servant kindly, and allow him to buy for her some toys, +such as I could spare. This I durst not deny, though I clearly saw the +greediness which was covered under this request; and I gave him a note, +as desired, making a condition that I should see a copy of the firmaun, +which was already sealed, and could not be seen without leave. + +By all this you may see how easy it were to sell commodities here, by a +little good management. Last year we were not looked at; but now, that I +have translated the inventory of fine wares for the king, yet concealing +the pearls, every one is ready to run down to Surat, to make purchases. +Noormahal and Asaph Khan now study how to do me good offices; and many +of the great men are soliciting me for letters, that they may send down +their servants, so that if you had trebled the present consignment, it +might all have been bought up aboard ship, and have saved you the +customs, expence of carriage, and much spoil. I have therefore directed +the factory to sell to the servants of Noormahal and Asaph Khan, +whatsoever can be spared, so as to leave me a decent proportion for my +uses at court. By this, much trouble and charges will be saved, the +prince prevented from plunder and exactions, and our friends confirmed; +and yet I hope to have enough remaining to please the king and his son. +At the delivery of their presents, Asaph Khan has undertaken to procure +the phirmaunds for our trade at Bengal or any other port, and even to +procure us a general privilege for free trade and residence in every +part of the king's dominions. + +On the 24th of October the king departed to a considerable distance from +Mundu,[215] and went from place to place among the mountains, leaving us +quite at a loss what way we should take, as no one knew his purpose. On +the 25th I had a warrant for ten camels at the king's rates of hire; and +on the 29th I removed to follow the king, being forced to quit Mundu, +which was now entirely deserted. The 31st I arrived at the king's tents, +but found he had gone with few company on a hunting party for ten days, +no person being allowed to follow without leave. The leskar or camp was +scattered about in many parts, suffering great inconveniences from bad +water, scarcity and consequent dearness of provisions, sickness, and all +sorts of calamities incident to so great a multitude; yet nothing can +prevent the king from following his pleasures. I here learnt that it was +quite uncertain whether the king proposed going to Agra or Guzerat; and, +though the latter was reported, the former was held to be more probable, +as his counsellors wished to be at rest. Yet, because the king was +expected to linger here about a month, I was advised and thought it best +to send for the goods and presents, and endeavour to conclude my +business, rather as defer it upon uncertainties. By this means, I hoped +to obtain some rest, which I much needed, as I was very weak, and not +likely to recover by daily travel, and the use of cold raw muddy water. + +[Footnote 215: In the edition of Churchill, the king is said to have +removed twenty-four cosses from Mundu, while in the Pilgrims it is +called only four cosses.--E.] + +Richard Steel and Jackson arrived on the 2d November, 1617, with the +pearls and other small matters, which they had brought privately on +shore according to my order, which I received and gave them acquittance +for. I had a conference with Mr Steel about his projects of water-works, +intended to advance the sale of lead, which I did not approve of, +because I knew the character of this people, and that this affair must +be begun at our expence, while after trial we should not enjoy the +profit, but the natives be taught.[216] Besides, it did not promise any +advantages for the sale of our commodity, as the lead would be trebled +in price by land-carriage, and could not be delivered at Agra so cheap +as other lead could be purchased there. Yet I was willing that he should +make a trial, by carrying his workmen to Ahmedabad, and meeting me +there; where, by the aid of Mukrob Khan, who only among these people is +a friend to new inventions, I would make offer to the king of their +inventions, and try what conditions might be procured; but, in my +opinion, it is all money and labour thrown away. The company must shut +their ears against these projectors, who have their own emoluments much +more in view than the profits of their masters. Many things look fair in +discourse, and in theory satisfy curious imaginations, which in practice +are found difficult and fanciful. It is no easy matter to alter the +established customs of this kingdom; where some drink only of rain +water, some only that of a holy river, and others only of such as is +brought at their own cost. + +[Footnote 216: This project is no where explained, but might possibly be +intended for conveying water, by means of machinery and leaden pipes, +for the supply of some palace or city in India.--E.] + +As for his second project, of inducing the caravans and merchants of +Lahore and Agra, who are in use to travel by Candahar into Persia, to +come by the river Indus and to go by sea in our ships to Jasques or the +Persian gulf it is a mere dream. Some men may approve of it in +conversation, but it will never be adopted in practice. The river Indus +is but indifferently navigable downwards, and its mouth is already +occupied by the Portuguese; while its navigation upwards, against the +stream, is very difficult. Finally, we must warrant their goods, which +cannot be done by a fleet; neither did even the Portuguese transport any +of these goods, excepting only those of Scindy and Tatta, which traded +by means of their own junks, having _cartas_ or passes from the +Portuguese, for which the natives paid a small matter, to secure them +from being captured by the Portuguese cruizers; and the emoluments of +these passes came into the pockets of the chiefs of Diu, Damaun, and +Ormus. Even if all other difficulties were removed, yet will the caravan +of Lahore be never induced to take this passage, as it mostly consists +of returning Persians and Armenians, who know the journey from Jasques +to be almost as bad as that through Candahar; and the small trade from +the environs of Scindy is not worth mentioning. Yet, for his better +satisfaction, I am content that he may learn his errors by his own +experience, so that it be not done at the charges of the company: But I +suppose he will let it fall to the ground, not knowing at which end to +begin. + +As to the third project, for uniting the trade of the Red Sea with this +of Surat, I recommended to him to use his endeavours; for it is already +begun. The peril of this trade in the Guzerat ships is very obvious, +owing to pirates in these seas; wherefore I have no doubt that many +merchants may be induced to load their goods in our ships on freight; by +which means we should make ourselves many useful friends among these +people, supply our own wants, save the export of bullion, and for this +year employ one of the ships belonging to the old account, that should +return in September, receiving the remains of this joint stock, which +will be sufficient to re-load a great ship, and would otherwise be +transported at great loss. This I explained and urged, shewing which +way it might be accomplished, and recommended by him to the commander, +the Cape merchants and your factors, as will appear by my letters. This +measure, if followed, must evidently be to your profit, even if nothing +were procured towards it by freight from the Guzerat merchants; as, +having so many empty vessels for so small a stock, and two pirate ships +fallen into your hands, they had better even go empty as not go. There +are many good chances in the Red Sea and in the way, and though they did +nothing else than bring back the goods you have at Mokha and other ports +in that sea, this would repay the charges of the voyage and be ready in +time. + +I find Mr Steel high in his conceits, insomuch that he seems to have +forgotten the respect due to me. He and Mr Kerridge are at variance, +which I use every endeavour to assuage. As for his wife, I have told +Steel that she cannot remain in this country without much inconvenience +to us, and injury to his masters, as she could not be allowed her +expences of travelling and living at the charges of the Company; that he +must live frugally and like a merchant, as others do, and must therefore +send home his wife. If he did so, he was welcome to remain in the +Company's service; but otherwise, I should have to take measures with +them both, much against my inclination. Having thus persuaded him, I +likewise endeavoured to deal in the same manner about Captain Towerson's +wife. You know not the danger, the trouble, and the inconvenience, of +granting these liberties. For this purpose, I persuaded Abraham, his +father-in-law, to hold fast; stating the gripings of this court, and the +small hope of any relief by this alliance, from which he expected great +matters, and endeavoured to persuade him to return quietly. To further +this, I wrote to your chief factor, that such things as he had brought +and were vendible, should be bought for your use by bill of exchange, +and at such profit to him as might answer both parties; but I utterly +prohibited the taking of his trash, to remain a dead stock on your +hands, on any conditions. Such inconveniences do you bring upon your +hands by these unreasonable liberties. + +By the strict commands in your letter respecting private trade, as well +respecting your own servants as others, I find you do not mean him to +have that liberty he expects; for he is furnished to the value of above +£1000, first cost here, and Steel to at least £200. This, as he proposes +sending home his wife, and his merit is so good towards you, I shall +send home; as I presume you will admit of this to get rid of such +cattle. I will not buy these goods however, but order them to be marked +and consigned to you, by which you will have the measure in your own +hands. By these liberties, you discourage all your old servants. Some +may do all things for fair words, and some will do nothing for good +actions. I could instance some, gone home two years since, who only +employed themselves in managing their own stock, and did no other +business, who now live at home in pleasure; and others that raised their +fortunes on your monies, trading therewith from port to port, and are +now returned rich and unquestioned. Last year a mariner had twenty-six +_churles_ of indigo, others many fardles; another had to the value of +7000 mahmudies in bastas, chosen at Baroach and purchased with your +monies, and he would not probably chuse the worst for himself; a fourth +did the same to the value of above £150. I do not mention these things +out of spite or ill will, but to induce you to equality of proceeding +with your servants, that an impartial restraint be imposed upon all, and +that by such instances your profits may not be all swallowed up. + +For effecting these purposes, the sending the woman home, and the +prosecution of trade to the Red Sea, I have sent back Richard Steel to +Surat with the necessary orders. As it is now declared that the king +intends going to Guzerat, I have altered my purpose about the goods and +presents; and have appointed Richard Steel, after having dispatched +other matters, to meet me there with the goods and presents, and his +engineers. I have also sent my advice and directions to Captain Pring, +to make out an inventory of all the monies and goods in the two pirate +ships, and to land the whole, making it over to your stock; to give a +passage home to some of the chiefs, and to take the rest into your +service, referring to you at home to deal with the owners. My own fixed +opinion is, that their capture is legal and justifiable, and all their +goods forfeited. If you are pleased to restore any thing, be it at your +pleasure; but the more rigour you show to these, the better example you +will give to such scandalous piracies; for, if this course be pursued, +you may bid adieu to all trade at Surat and in the Red Sea, and let the +Turkey Company stand clear of the revenge of the Grand Signior. + +I went to Asaph Khan on the 6th November, and shewed him the pearls +according to promise. As I had been previously informed, he told me the +sorts were not fit for that country; yet he was so pleased that I had +kept my word with him, that I believe I may say to you in the words of +Pharaoh, "The land is before you, dwell where you will, you and your +servants." We talked not about the price, but he vowed the utmost +secrecy, and that for my sake he would give more for them than their +value, not returning any, and would pay ready money. Of this he +professed to be in no want, and even offered to lend me whatever I +needed. I have promised to visit his sister, whom he has made our +protectress; and indeed, every contentment that good words can give, I +have received, besides good deeds. When the presents arrive, I shall +take care not to be too liberal to your loss; a little shall serve in +that way. Indeed Asaph Khan himself has given me this advice, saying +that such things are as well taken in this country sold as given, which +I find by the experience of others to be true. + +Finishing these conferences in his bed-chamber, Asaph Khan rose to go to +dinner, having invited me and my people; but he and his friends dined +without, appointing us our mess apart, for they scruple to eat with us. +I had good cheer, and was well attended, the residue being given to my +servants. After dinner, I moved about the debt due by Groo, and told him +of the delays. He desired me to say no more, as he had undertaken that +business; that Groo, at his orders, was finishing accounts with a +jeweller, and he had given orders, as the money was paid, that it should +remain in the hands of the cutwall for us. This I found afterwards to be +true, and the cutwall has promised to finish in three days, desiring me +to send no more to Asaph Khan on that business. + +I must not omit to mention here, an anecdote of baseness or favour, call +it which you please. When the prisons are full of condemned men, the +king commands some to be executed, and sends others to his omrahs, to be +redeemed at a price. This he esteems a courtesy, as giving the means of +exercising charity: But he takes the money, and so sells the virtue. +About a month before our remove, he sent to me to buy three Abyssinians, +whom they suppose to be all Christians, at the price of forty rupees +each. I answered, that I could not purchase men as slaves, as was done +by others, by which they had profit for their money; but that I was +willing to give twenty rupees each for them in charity, to save their +lives and restore them to liberty. The king was well pleased with my +answer, and ordered them to be sent me. They expected the money, which I +was in no haste to give, and even hoped it had been forgotten. But the +king's words are all written down[217], and are as irrevocable decrees. +Seeing that I sent not for the malefactors, his officers delivered them +into the hands of my _procurator_, in my absence this day, taking his +note for the sixty rupees, which I paid at my return, and set free the +prisoners. + +[Footnote 217: Dixit, et edictum est; fatur, et est factum.--_Purch_.] + +Having notice of a new phirmaund sent down to Surat to disarm all the +English, and some other restrictions upon their liberty, owing to a +complaint sent up to the prince, that we intended to build a fort at +Swally, and that our ships were laden with bricks and lime for that +purpose, I visited Asaph Khan on the 10th November, to enquire into this +matter. This jealousy arose from our people having landed a few bricks +on shore, for building a furnace to refound the ship's bell; yet the +alarm was so hot at court, that I was called to make answer, when I +represented how absurd was this imaginary fear, how dishonourable for +the king, and how unfit the place was for any such purpose to us, having +neither water nor harbourage. The jealousy was however so very strongly +imprinted in their minds, because I had formerly asked a river at Gogo +for that purpose, that I could hardly satisfy the prince but that we +intended some such sinister end. You may judge from this how difficult +it were to get a port for yourselves, if you were so disposed. +Notwithstanding all remonstrances, this furnace must be demolished, and +a _huddey_ of horse sent down to see it done. The disarming of our men +was what chiefly disobliged our people, though the weapons were only +lodged in the custom-house, and those only belonging to the ship's +company. I told Asaph Khan, that we could not endure this slavery, nor +would I stay longer in the country, as the prince gave us one day a +phirmaund for our good usage, with a grant of privileges, and +countermand all the next by contradictory orders, in which proceedings +there was neither honour nor good faith, and I could not answer for my +continuing to reside among them. Asaph Khan said, he would speak to the +king at night on the subject, in the presence of the prince, and +afterwards give me an answer. + +I went again to wait upon Asaph Khan on the 18th, when he made many +protestations of the Mogul's affection to my sovereign and nation, and +to me, and assured me he had risked the prince's disfavour for our +sakes, and had full assurance of a complete redress of all our +grievances: and that he proposed getting the _prigany_ of Surat +transferred to himself, which the prince would have to resign, as he had +been made governor of Ahmedabad, Cambay, and that territory. To satisfy +me that he did not dissemble, he desired me to come at night to court, +bringing the king my master's letter and the translation, as the time +was favourable for its delivery; desiring me at the same time to persist +in my complaint, and to offer taking leave, when I should see what he +would say for us. Accordingly, I went at night to wait upon the king, +whom I found surrounded by a very full court. The king was sitting on +the ground, and when I delivered the letter, it was laid before him, of +which he took no great notice, being busy at the time. Asaph Khan +whispered to his father, Etimon Dowlet, desiring him to read the letter +and assist us, which he could better do than himself. Etimon Dowlet took +up both letters, giving that in English into the king's hands, and read +the translation to the king, who answered many of the complaints. On +coming to that point, of procuring our quiet trade, by his authority +with the Portuguese, he demanded if we wanted him to make peace with +them? I answered, that his majesty knew long since I had offered to be +governed entirely by him, and referred that matter to his wisdom, and +waited therefore to know his pleasure. On this he said, that he would +undertake to reconcile us, and to cause agreement to be made in his +seas, which he would signify in his answer to my master's letter, in +which he would farther satisfy his majesty in all his other friendly +desires. + +Notwithstanding of this, I asked leave to go before to Ahmedabad, to +meet the king's presents, and to prepare for my return home. Upon this, +a question arose between the king and the prince, who complained that he +derived no profit from us, and was very willing to be rid of us. Asaph +Khan then took up the discourse, and plainly told the king, that we +brought both profit and security to the port of Surat and to the +kingdom, but were very rudely treated by the prince's servants, and that +we could not continue our trade and residence, unless matters were +amended; for which reason it would be more honourable for his majesty to +licence and protect us, than to treat us discourteously. The prince +angrily replied, That he had never wronged us, and had lately given us a +phirmaund at the desire of Asaph Khan. It is true, replied Asaph Khan, +that you granted him a phirmaund to his satisfaction; but in ten days +you sent down another, virtually to contradict and annul the former; and +as he stood as surety between both, and had undertaken our redress on +the prince's word, the shame and dishonour of this double procedure fell +upon him. He said he spoke for no ends, but for the king's honour and +justice, as he owed me nothing, nor I him, and for the truth of his +words he appealed to me, who complained that our goods were taken away +from us by force, and that Rulph,[218] who began this two years ago, +would never pay us, and his officers continued the same procedure every +season. If the prince were weary of the English, he might turn us away; +but then he must expect that we would seek for redress at our own hands +upon the seas. He demanded whether the king or the prince gave me the +means of living, or, as they did not, at whose expence I was maintained? +saying, that I was an ambassador and a stranger, who lived in this +country and followed the progress of the king at great charges; and if +our goods continued to be taken from us by force, so that we could +neither get back our goods, nor yet their value in money, it would be +impossible for us to subsist. + +[Footnote 218: On a former occasion, where this person is mentioned, it +has been said that his name, in the edition of this journal given by +Churchill, is written Sulph. From the circumstances in the context at +this place, it is possible that Sulpheckar Khan, or Zulfeccar Khan, +governor of Surat under Sultan Churrum, may be here meant.--E.] + +This was delivered with some heat, and the king, catching at the word +force, repeated it to his son, whom he sharply reprehended. The prince +promised to see me paid for all that had been taken. He said likewise +that he had taken nothing, having only caused the presents to be sealed; +and, as his officers had received no customs on these, he desired to +have them opened in his presence. This I absolutely refused to consent +to, telling the king that I only did my duty to my master, in insisting +to deliver the presents free from duty, and that, when I had so done, I +should give the prince full satisfaction in all other things. At this +time, Etimon Dowlet, who had been made our friend by his son Asaph Khan, +whispered to the king, and read a clause or two from my master's letter, +on which the king made the prince stand aside. Asaph Khan joined in this +private conference, which they told me was for our good; and in +conclusion, the prince was commanded to suffer all the goods to come +quietly to me, and to give me such privileges for our trade as were fit, +and as should be proposed by Asaph Khan. + +The prince would not yield the presents, unless Asaph Khan became his +surety that he should have a share, which he did, and we were then all +agreed on that point. The king paid me many compliments in words, and +even gave me two pieces of _pawne_ out of the dish then before him, +desiring me to partake of what he was eating. I then took my leave for +Ahmedabad; and that same night I began my journey, leaving my tents, as +I expected to reach that city the next day: But I had to ride two +nights, with the intermediate day and half of the next, with excessively +little accommodation or refreshment; and arrived at Ahmedabad on the +15th at noon. + +The 8th January, 1618, there was some question about presents by the +prince, whom I told that his were ready whenever he was ready to receive +them. He asked me, why I had broken the seals? On which I said, that it +would have been dishonourable and discourteous in me to have delivered +the king's presents in bonds, and having waited his highness' licence +during twenty days, but seeing no hope of its arrival, I had been under +the necessity of breaking open the seals. Some heat was likely to have +arisen on this subject, but a gentleman from the king, who was sent to +observe what passed between us, told us both that the king commanded our +presence before him immediately, at a garden where he then was, on the +river side, a coss from the town. The prince went there immediately in +his palanquin, and I followed in a coach, well attended upon by the +servants of the king and prince. On my arrival, the women were going in, +on which occasion no man dare enter except the prince, who accordingly +made bitter complaints against me for having broke open the seals, +taking out from the packages whatever I pleased, without his knowledge. +Asaph Khan was called, who was my surety, and the prince laid the blame +of all this upon him, but he strenuously denied all knowledge or +participation; yet I had not accused him, but took it all upon myself, +knowing he would deny it, as is the custom, to excuse himself, and I +knew myself better able to bear it. + +I was then sent for to the water-side, where the king had been sitting +in private, and went in, having the presents along with me, but the king +was gone into the female apartments. Asaph Khan blamed me for breaking +his word, saying, that the prince had shamed him. I answered, through +Jaddow, that he well knew I had his consent, of which this man was a +witness. He denied this to us both, and when I again said, that, +although I would not lay the blame on him, that it was still true, as +this man could witness; Jaddow refused to interpret my answer, saying, +that he durst not tell Asaph Khan to his face that he lied. This is a +quite usual thing among them; for if any command comes from the king +which he afterwards forgets or denies, he that brought the message will +deny it stoutly. I bore up as high as I could, on which some of the +great men said that it was a great affront, of which no other man durst +have been guilty, while others smiled. I answered, it was by no means so +great as the prince had often done to me. We thus spent the day, during +which the king never appeared, having privately stole away, leaving us +all in anxious expectation. + +At night, word came that the king was gone, when I offered to have gone +home, but was so well attended, that I was in some measure constrained +to force my way. While on the road, new messengers came to seek me, and +I had to return to court, without having either eaten or drank. The king +was not however come back, and I could not get free from my attendants, +who yet used me very respectfully. After waiting an hour, a sudden order +was given to put out all the lights. The king now came in an open +waggon, drawn by bullocks, having his favourite Noormahal along with +him, himself acting as waggoner, and no man near. When he and his women +were housed, the prince came in on horseback, and immediately called for +me into the place where the king was. It was now midnight, and I found +the king and prince only attended upon by two or three eunuchs. Putting +on an angry countenance, the king, as he had been instructed by his son, +told me I had broken my word, and he would trust me no more. I answered +roundly, that I held it fit to give freely, not upon compulsion, and had +committed no offence, according to my judgment; and if their customs +were so very different from ours, I had erred only from ignorance, and +ought therefore to be pardoned. After many disputes, the prince offered +his friendship, with many fair promises, and we were all reconciled. + +I then opened the chests, gave the king his presents, and the prince +his, and sent in those intended for Noormahal. We were about two hours +engaged in viewing them. The king was well pleased with the tapestry, +but said it was too coarse, and desired to have a suit of the same +quality with the sweet bags. Three articles were detained besides the +presents; and for these the prince said he would pay, as his father had +taken them. He likewise desired me to come to see him in the morning, +promising to be my protector and procurator, which I willingly accepted +in all things except the goods. + +I waited upon the prince on the 10th, when I was well received, and had +orders for a phirmaund about the murdered man[219]. He likewise made a +public declaration of his reconcilement, desiring all his officers to +take notice of it, and act accordingly. He likewise ordered his chief +_Raia_ to be in future my procurator, and to draw out whatever +phirmaunds I required. I presented to him Captain Towerson, and some +others of the English, whom he received graciously; and, in confirmation +of our renewed friendship, he presented me with a robe of cloth of +silver, promising to be the protector of our nation in all things we +could desire. I then told him about Mr Steel and his workmen, when he +desired me to bring a small present at night to the king, to whom he +should present them, which I did. He kept his word, and spoke in our +favour to the king, who seemed disposed to entertain them. On this +occasion I presented Captain Towerson to the king, who called him up, +and after a few questions, rose. At the _Gitshel Choes_[220] I presented +Mr Steel and his workmen. The king called for Mr Paynter, and gave him +ten pounds, promising to take him and all the rest into his service. On +this occasion the king sat all night in a hat which I had given him. + +[Footnote 219: This circumstance is perhaps explained in the sequel, as +relating to the death of a person at Burhanpoor.--E.] + +[Footnote 220: This is probably meant for the same public audience +called, in other parts of the journal, the Gazul Khan.--E.] + +The 13th, the Dutch came to court, bringing a great present of China +ware, saunders-wood, parrots, and cloves, but were not allowed to +approach the third degree, or raised platform. After some time, the +prince asked me, who they were? I answered, that they were Hollanders +who resided at Surat. He then enquired if they were our friends? I +answered, that they were of a nation which was dependent upon the king +of England, but not welcome in all parts, and that I did not know their +business. He then said, since they were our friends, that I ought to +call them up. So I was obliged to call upon them, that they might +deliver their presents, on which occasion they were placed beside our +merchants, yet without any farther speech or conference. Finally, every +thing I asked was complied with, or at least promised, and I now wait +for performance and money. I am satisfied, that, without this +contestation, I had never succeeded in our just demands; for I told the +prince's messenger, in the presence of all the English, that if he chose +to use force against me or my goods, he certainly might, but it should +cost blood, for I would set my _chop_ upon his master's ship, and send +her to England. + +On the 18th I received notice from Surat of the imprisonment of Spragge +and Howard at Burhanpoor, where their house and goods were seized, and +their lives in question, on the following account:--The cutwall had been +drinking at their house, and one of his men had died that night, on +which they were accused of having poisoned him, and the cutwall, in +excuse for having been at their house, pretended that he had gone to +fetch away a man's wife who was detained by Thomas Spragge. What may be +the truth of this affair I know not; but information has been sent to +the king against them. I went therefore to the prince, who had promised +to undertake all our causes, but could not get speech of him, though I +had likewise to complain of force having been used against a caravan of +ours on the way, notwithstanding a phirmaund from the rajah of the +country, on both of which subjects I shall present a petition at night +to the king. My trouble with this barbarous and unjust people is beyond +all endurance. When at the prince's, I found the promised phirmaund +drawn up indeed, but half of the agreed conditions were omitted, upon +which I refused to accept it, and desired leave to depart, that I might +treat with them in the sea.[221] + +[Footnote 221: This obscure expression seems to imply a threat of taking +vengeance, or making reprisals at sea, for the oppressions of the Mogul +government against the English trade.--E.] + +On the 21st, a command was issued to set free the English at Burhanpoor, +and to restore their goods; on which occasion the king observed, that, +if they had killed the Mahometan who came to drink at their house, he +had only met with his just reward. Another order was issued, commanding +Partap-shah to repay us all exactions whatsoever, and that he should +hereafter take no duties upon our goods in their way to the sea-port, +threatening, in case of failure, to deliver his son into my hands. On +the 22d, I went in person to receive these phirmaunds, and carried the +merchants along with me, together with some pearls the prince was eager +to see, and which were pretended to belong to Mr Towerson. The prince +had received some vague accounts of our having pearls to the value of +twenty or thirty thousand pounds, which he hoped to have extracted from +us. When his secretary saw our small pearls, he observed that his master +had _maunds_ of such, and if we had no better, we might take these away. +You may judge how basely covetous these people are of jewels. I told him +that we had procured these from a gentlewoman to satisfy the prince, and +as they could not be made better, it was uncivil to be angry with +merchants who had done their best to shew their good will. + +I then spoke to him about the phirmaunds, when he bluntly told me I +should have none; for as we had deceived the prince's hopes, he would +disappoint us. I had asked leave to depart, and I might come to take +leave whenever I pleased. To this I answered, that nothing could please +me more, but that I should requite their injustice in another place, for +I should now apply to the king, and depend no more on them, as I saw +their conduct was made up of covetousness and unworthiness. So I arose +to depart, but he recalled me, desiring that I might come next day to +the king and prince together, when I should have complete satisfaction. + + + * * * * * + +"And now, reader, we are at a stand: some more idle, or more busy +spirits, willing either to take their rest, or to exchange their labour; +and some perhaps wishing they had the whole journal, and not thus +contracted into extracts of those things out of it which I conceived +more fit for the public. And, for the whole, myself could have wished +it, but neither with the honourable Company, nor elsewhere, could I +learn of it; the worthy knight himself being now employed in like +honourable embassage from his majesty to the Great Turk. Yet, to supply +the defect of the journal, I have given thee the chorography of the +country, together with certain letters of his, written from India to +honourable lords, and his friends in England; out of all which may be +hewed and framed a delightful commentary of the Mogul and his subjects. +Take them therefore, reader, and use them as a prospective glass, by +which thou mayst take easy and near view of these remote regions, +people, rites, and religions."--_Purchas_. + + * * * * * + +In the Pilgrims, in supplement to the journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Purchas +has inserted a formal complimentary letter from king James to the Great +Mogul, or emperor of Hindoostan, together with another from the Mogul to +king James, containing nothing besides hyperbolical expressions of +regard; both of which are here omitted, as entirely devoid of interest, +amusement, or information. Purchas has also added several letters said +to have been found among the papers of Sir Thomas Roe, with some others +which he says were transcribed from _Sir Thomas Roe's own book_. As +these letters merely repeat circumstances and opinions already more +fully and more methodically expressed in the preceding journal, they +could only have served unnecessarily to swell our pages, without any +adequate advantage, and are therefore omitted. + +Purchas also informs us that Sir Thomas Roe, before he left the court of +the Great Mogul on his return for England, requested to be favoured with +a recommendatory letter from the Mogul to king James. This request was +granted with the utmost readiness, and a letter written accordingly; but +the Mogul, or his ministers, shewed much scrupulousness about the +placement of the seal to this letter, lest, if placed under the writing, +it might disparage the dignity of the Mogul, or, if placed over the +letter, king James might feel disobliged. On this account, the letter +was delivered to Sir Thomas unsealed, and the seal was sent separately, +that it might be afterwards affixed, according to the pleasure of the +king of England. + +This seal was of silver, and Purchas has given an engraving, or _fac +simile_ of it, consisting of an inner and larger circle, bearing the +style or title of the reigning king, or _Padishah_ Jehanguire; +surrounded circularly by eight smaller circles, containing the series of +his direct ancestors, from Timor, or Tamerlane, downwards. These are all +of course in the Persian language and characters; but Purchas gives +likewise a copy or translation of the same in English letters. It seemed +quite superfluous to insert here the Persian _fac simile_, being merely +writing without ornament, armorial bearing, or cognizance. The following +is the series, expressed in English characters; the last being the +central circle, which contains the name and title of the reigning +emperor:-- + + 1. Ebn Amir Temur Saheb Quran. + 2. Ebn Miran Shah. + 3. Ebn Mirza Soltan Mohamed. + 4. Ebn Soltan Abu Said. + 5. Ebn Mirza Amar Shah. + 6. Ebn Bahar Padishah. + 7. Ebn Humaiun Padishah. + 8. Ebn Akbar Padishah. + 9. Abu Amozaphar Nurdin Jebanguire Padishah. + + +SECTION VII. + +RELATION OF A VOYAGE TO INDIA IN 1616, WITH OBSERVATIONS RESPECTING THE +DOMINIONS OF THE GREAT MOGUL, BY MR. EDWARD TERRY.[222] + +INTRODUCTION. + +According to Purchas, Mr Edward Terry was master of arts, and a student +of Christ Church in Oxford, and went out to India as chaplain to Sir +Thomas Roe. In the first subdivision of this narrative, we have combined +the observations of Captain Alexander Childe, who was commander of the +ship James, during the same voyage, under Captain Benjamin Joseph, of +the ship Charles, who was slain in a sea-fight with a Portuguese carack, +off one of the Komoro islands. The notes extracted by Purchas from the +journal of Captain Childe,[223] are so short and unsatisfactory, that we +have been induced to suppress them, except so far as they serve to +elucidate the narrative of Terry, in the first subdivision of this +section.--E. + +[Footnote 222: Purch. Pilgr. II 1464.] + +[Footnote 223: Id. I. 606.] + +§1. _Occurrences during the Voyage from England to Surat_. + +Apologies often call truth into question, and having nothing but truth +to offer in excuse for this narrative, I omit all unnecessary preface, +desiring only that the reader may believe what I have faithfully +related. Our fleet, consisting of six goodly ships, the Charles, +Unicorn, James, Globe, Swan, and Rose, under the supreme command of +Captain Benjamin Joseph, who sailed as general in the Charles, our +admiral ship, fell down from Gravesend to Tilbury-hope on the 3d of +February, 1616. + +After long and anxious expectation, it pleased God to send us a fair +wind at N.E. on the 9th March, when we departed from that road, and set +sail for the East Indies. The wind continued favourable till the 16th, +at night, when we were in the bay of Biscay, at which time we were +assailed by a most fearful storm, during which we lost sight both of the +Globe and the Rose. The Globe rejoined us on the 26th following, but the +Rose was no more heard of till six months afterwards, when she arrived +at Bantam. The storm continued with violence from the 16th to the 21st. +The 28th we got sight of the grand Canary, and of the Peak of Teneriffe, +which is so extremely high that it may be seen in a clear day more than +forty leagues out at sea, as the mariners report. The 31st, being +Easter-day, we passed under the tropic of Cancer, and on the 7th of +April had the sun in our zenith. The 16th, we met with these winds +called _tornadoes_, which are so variable and uncertain, as sometimes to +blow from all the thirty-two points of the compass within the space of a +single hour. These winds are accompanied by much thunder and lightning, +and excessive rains, of so noisome a nature, as immediately to cause +people's clothes to stink on their backs; and wherever this rain-water +stagnates, even for a short space of time, it brings forth many +offensive animalcules. The tornadoes began with us when in about 12° of +N. latitude, and continued till we were two degrees to the south of the +equinoctial line, which we passed on the 28th of April. The 19th of May, +being Whitsunday, we passed the tropic of Capricorn, so that we were +complete seven weeks under the torrid zone. + +Almost every day, while between the tropics, we saw various kinds of +fish, in greater abundance than elsewhere. As the whale, or mighty +_Leviathan_, whom God hath created to take his pastime in the seas; +Dolphins also, and Albicores, with Bonitoes, flying-fishes, and many +others. Some whales were of an exceeding greatness, which, in calm +weather, would often rise and shew themselves above the water, appearing +like vast rocks; and, while rising, they would spout up a great quantity +of water into the air, with much noise, which fell down again around +them like heavy rain. The dolphin is called, from the swiftness of its +motion, the arrow of the sea. This fish differs from many others, in +having teeth on the top of its tongue. It is pleasing to the eye, the +smell, and the taste, having a changeable colour, finned like a roach, +covered with very small scales, giving out a delightful scent above all +other fishes, and is in taste as good as any. These dolphins are very +apt to follow our ships, not, so far as I think, from any love they bear +for men, as some authors write, but to feed upon what may be thrown +overboard. Whence it comes to pass that they often become food to us; +for, when they swim close by the ships, they are struck by a broad +instrument full of barbed points, called a harping-iron, to which a rope +is fastened, by which to pull the instrument and the fish on board. This +beautiful dolphin may be taken as an emblem of a race of men, who, under +sweet countenances, carry sharp tongues. The bonitoes and albicores are +much like our mackerels in colour, shape, and taste, but grow to a very +large size. The flying-fishes live the most unhappy lives of all others, +as they are persecuted in the water by the dolphins, bonitoes, and +albicores, and when they endeavour to escape from their enemies in the +water, by rising up in flight, they are assailed by ravenous fowls in +the air, somewhat like our kites, which hover over the water in waiting +for their appearance in the other element. These flying-fishes are like +men who profess two trades and thrive in neither. + +Early in the morning of the 12th June, we espied our long-wished-for +harbour, the bay of Saldanha, [Table-bay] about twelve leagues short +from the Cape of Good Hope, into which we came happily to anchor that +same forenoon. We here found one of the Company's ships, the Lion, +commanded by Captain Newport, come from Surat, and homeward-bound for +England. We made ourselves merry with each other on this happy meeting; +and having a fair gale, the Lion sailed on the night of the 14th. We +found here water in abundance, but little refreshments for our sick men, +except fresh fish, as the natives brought us nothing. We remained in +this harbour till the 28th, on which day we departed, the Swan steering +her course for Bantam. The 29th we doubled the Cape of Good Hope, in the +lat. of 35° S. Off this cape there continually sets a most violent +current to the westwards, whence it happens, when it is met by a strong +contrary wind, their impetuous opposition occasions so rough a sea that +some ships have been swallowed up, and many more endangered among these +mountainous waves. Few ships pass this way without encountering a storm. + +The 22d of July we got sight of the great island of Madagascar, commonly +called of St Lawrence, being between that island and the main, but +touched not there. Proceeding on our course, on the 1st of August we +fell in with a part of the main land of Africa, called Boobam,[224] in +lat. 16° 35' S. the variation being 13° 12'. The 5th we drew near the +little islands of Mohelia, Gazidia, and St Juan de Castro, [Moelia, +Hinzuan or Johanna, Mayotta or St Christopher, and Augasi,] generally +known by the name of the Komoro islands, in about the lat. of 12° S. + +[Footnote 224: The head-land of Mosambique is probably here meant.--E.] + +Early in the morning of the 6th of August, our men in the tops looking +out for land, espied a sail about three or four leagues off directly in +our course. About noon, the Globe, which was our smallest ship, and +sailed better than the rest of the fleet, came up with her on the +broadside to windward, and hailed her according to the custom of the +sea, asking whence she came? She answered, indirectly, that she came +from the sea, and her people insulted ours most outrageously, calling +them thieves, rogues, heretics, and devils; and, in conclusion of their +rude compliments, spoke in the loud language of the cannon's roar, +discharging seven pieces of large artillery at our Globe, six of the +balls piercing her hull, and maiming some of her men, but killing none. +Our Globe replied in the same voice, and afterwards fell astern and +stood in for our general and the rest of our fleet, now four sail in +all, shewing us the discourtesy of the Portuguese. + +About three in the afternoon, the Charles, our admiral, came up with the +Portuguese ship, which was the admiral of the caracks that sailed this +year from Lisbon, but had parted from all the rest of their fleet. When +within pistol-shot, Captain Benjamin Joseph, our commander, proceeded +deliberately to work, offering treaty before he attempted revenge. So we +saluted her with our trumpets, to which she replied with her +wind-instruments. Captain Joseph then called out, that their commander +might come on board, to make satisfaction for the wrong they had done to +our consort. They made answer, that they had no boat; on which our +general said he would send them one, and immediately caused his barge to +be manned and sent to the carack, which brought back one of their +officers and two mean men, with this answer from their commander, that +he had resolved never to leave his ship, to which he might be forced, +but would not be commanded to leave her. + +On receiving this message, Captain Joseph used them civilly who had +brought it, and commanded them to be shewn our ship, and how she was +prepared to vindicate our honour. This made the poor Portuguese much +afraid, and they desired Captain Joseph to write a few words to their +commander, which, added to their persuasions, might perchance induce him +to come to terms. Willing to preserve his honour, and to prevent the +effusion of blood, Captain Joseph caused a few words to be written to +the Portuguese commander, to the following effect:--"Whereas the +commander of the carack has offered violence to our ship the Globe, +while sailing peaceably beside him, he is desired to come aboard +immediately, and give satisfaction for that wrong, or else at his +peril," &c. He then sent back the Portuguese, accompanied by one of our +master's mates, carrying the writing, together with this verbal message, +"That if he refused to come, he would force him, or sink by his side." +The words of dying men are said to be prophetic, so these his words came +to pass, for he was slain not long after by a great shot from the +carack. + +Notwithstanding this message, the Portuguese commander remained firmly +to his resolute answer. Wherefore, on the return of our men, Captain +Joseph himself fired the three first shots, which surely did them much +mischief; as we conjectured, by the loud outcry we heard among them +after these shots were fired. The shot now flew thick from both sides; +and our captain, chearing his men to behave gallantly, ascended the +half-deck, where he had not been above ten minutes when a great shot +from the quarter of the carack deprived him of life in the twinkling of +an eye. It hit him fair in the breast, beating his heart and other parts +out of his body, which lay round him among his blood. After he was +slain, our master continued the fight for about half an hour, when, +considering that another person was to succeed in the supreme command, +and the night approaching, he thought proper to desist, and having +fallen astern, he hung out a flag as a signal of council, to call the +captain of the vice-admiral on board, Captain Henry Pepwell, who was to +succeed, together with the other masters, that they might consult about +the prosecution of this enterprize. As the night was now come, it was +resolved not to proceed any farther for the present. So the carack +proceeded on her course, putting up a light on her poop, as if in +defiance of us to follow, and about midnight came to anchor under the +island of Moelia; and when we perceived this island, we too let fall our +anchors. + +Early in the morning of the 7th, before day began to dawn, we prepared +for a new assault, first recommending ourselves to God in prayer. When +morning came, we found the carack so close to the shore, and the nearest +of our other ships at least a league from us, that we held our hands for +that day, waiting till the carack might weigh and stand out to sea, as +fitter there to deal with her. In the afternoon, we chested our slain +commander, and committed him to the deep, over against the isle of +Moelia, omitting any ceremony of firing funeral-guns usual on such +occasions, that the enemy might not know our loss. + +A little before night the carack put to sea, when we also weighed and +made sail after her. The day now left us, and our proud enemy, +unwilling, as it seems, to have the appearance of escaping by flight, +put forth a light on his poop as before, as if for us to follow him, +which we did to some purpose. The night being well spent, we again +commended ourselves and our cause to God in prayer. Soon afterwards, the +day began to dawn, and appeared as if covered by a red mantle, which +proved a bloody one to many who now beheld the light for the last time. +It was now resolved that our four ships were to take their turns in +succession, to endeavour to force this proud Portuguese either to bend +or break. Our ship, the Charles, played her part first;[225] and ere she +had been half an hour engaged with her adversary, a shot from the carack +hitting one of our iron guns on the half-deck, flew all in pieces, +dangerously wounding our new general, and three other mariners who stood +beside him. Captain Pepwell's left eye was beaten out, and he received +two other wounds in his head, and a third in his leg, a ragged piece of +the broken shot sticking fast in the bone, which seemed, by his +complaining, to afflict him more than the rest. Thus was our new +commander welcomed to his authority, and we all considered his wounds as +mortal; but he lived till about fourteen months afterwards, when he died +peaceably in his bed, on his way back to England. + +[Footnote 225: This account of the battle is chiefly taken from Terry, +who is more particular in his narrative; but Childe says that Captain +Pepwell, the new general, gave him leave to begin this day's action, as +his ship sailed better, and that, after three or four broadsides, he +gave place to the general. According to modern naval tactics, all four +at once would have assailed the enemy, taking vantage stations on her +quarters and bows.--E.] + +By the same shot, Mr Richard Hounsell, the master of our ship, had a +great piece of the flesh of his arm carried off, which rendered him +unserviceable for a time. The captain and master being thus disabled, +deputed their authority to the chief master's mate, who behaved with +great prudence and resolution. Thus we continued one after the other to +fight all day, the vice-admiral and the Globe and James taking their +turns in succession. Between three and four in the afternoon, the +mainmast of the carack fell overboard, and presently afterwards the +foremast and mizen followed, and she had received so many and large +wounds in her thick sides, that her case was quite desperate, and she +must soon either yield or perish. Her commander, Don Emanuel de Meneses, +a brave and resolute person, stood in for the shore in this distressed +condition, being not far from the island of Gazidia.[226] We pursued as +far as we durst venture, without hazard of shipwreck, but gave over at +five o'clock, when about a league from the shore, which is extremely +steep, and no ground to be had within less than a cable's length of the +rocks, the shore being moreover to leeward. + +[Footnote 226: According to Childe, it was the most northern of the +islands, named Komoro, or Augasi, not far north from Moelia, where the +fight began,--E.] + +We now sent off our barge with a flag of truce to speak the carack, and +as he waved us with a similar flag, Mr Connock, our chief merchant, who +was employed on this occasion, boldly went aboard the carack, and +delivered a message to Don Emanuel, stating, that he brought an offer of +life and peace if he would accept it; and as he deserved well for his +undaunted valour, so he should be honourably and respectfully treated if +he would put himself into our hands, and sent to Goa in safety. He, +however, as an oak gathering strength from his wounds,[227] and +contemning the misery he could not prevent, resolutely answered Mr +Connock to the following purpose: "That no misfortune should make him +alter his former resolution; for he was determined again to stand out to +sea, if possible, and to encounter us again; and then, if forced by fire +and sword, he might by bad chance be taken, but he would never yield; +and, if taken alive, he hoped to find the respect due to a gentleman, +till when we had our answer." + +[Footnote 227: Duris, ut ilex tonsa bipennibus-ducit opes animumque +ferro.--_Terry._] + +Our messenger was thus dismissed, and shortly afterwards this sore +distressed ship, being entirely unmanageable for want of masts and +sails, was forced by the winds and waves upon the adjacent island of +Gazidia or Komoro, where she stuck fast between two rocks. Those who +remained alive in the carack got ashore by means of their boats; and +when all were landed, willing, as it would seem, to consume what they +could not keep, they set their carack on fire, that she might not become +our prize.[228] After leaving their ill-fated carack, the poor +Portuguese were most inhumanly used by the barbarous islanders, who +spoiled them of every thing they had brought on shore for their succour, +and slew some of them for opposing their cupidity. Doubtless they had +been all massacred, had they not been relieved by two small Arab vessels +who were there engaged in trade, and which, I suppose in hope of a great +reward, took them in, and conveyed them in safety to their own city of +Goa. + +[Footnote 228: Childe says, he could not say whether she was fired +accidentally or on purpose.--E.] + +In the morning of the 9th, Mr Alexander Childe, who commanded one of the +English ships, sent his mate, Anthony Fugars, ashore in his long-boat, +to see if any of the Portuguese were saved, to fetch such away, and to +learn how she was set on fire. But the carack was still burning, and not +a man belonging to her was to be seen. There were many negro islanders +on the coast, over against the carack, who held up a flag of truce to +invite the English on shore, but it was impossible to land in that +place, or any where within three leagues to the east or west, as the +rocks were all extremely high and rugged. + +In this long conflict, only five men were lost out of our four ships, +three belonging to the admiral, and two out of the James. Besides whom, +there were about twenty wounded in our fleet, all of whom afterwards +recovered. But, of 700 who sailed in the carack, there came not above +250 to Goa, as we were afterwards credibly informed. In this fearful +engagement, our ship, the Charles, discharged 375 great shot against the +adversary, as reported by our gunners, besides 100 musqueteers who plied +their small arms all the time. Neither were the enemy idle, for our ship +received at least 100 great shot from them, many of which dangerously +took place in her hull. Our foremast was shot through the middle, our +mainmast wounded, the main stay, and many of the main shrouds, cut +asunder. + +After we had seen the carack set on fire, which was about midnight of +the 8th, we stood off and on till morning, to see if we might find any +thing in her ashes. Finding this ineffectual, we sought about for some +place where we might find succour and refreshment for our sick and +wounded on shore. The land was very high, and the sea every where too +deep for anchoring, so that it was the 10th before we could find a good +harbour, which was in the S.W. part of the island, where we anchored. +The James came to anchor in twenty-two fathoms, with one of her anchors, +while the other was only in fourteen. This harbour was over against a +town called Mattoma. + +This island seemed very pleasant, full of goodly trees, covered all over +with green pasture, and abounding in beeves, goats, poultry, +sugar-canes, rice, plantains, lemons, oranges, and cocoa-nuts, with many +other wholesome things; of all which we procured sufficient to relieve +our whole company for a small quantity of white paper, a few glass +beads, and penny knives. For instance, we bought as many oranges as +would fill a hat for half a quarter of a sheet of white paper, and all +other kinds of provision in the same proportion. The islanders brought +much of their fruits to us in their little canoes, which are long and +narrow boats, like troughs, hollowed out of single trees; but their +cattle we bought on shore. I observed the people to be straight, +well-limbed, and able-bodied men, of a very dark tawny colour. Most of +the men, and all the women, were entirely naked, except merely enough to +hide their parts of shame. Some few of the men wore long garments, after +the fashion of the Arabs, whose language they spoke, and were likewise +of the Mahometan religion, and so rigid, that they would not suffer us +to come near their places of worship. They have good convenient +dwellings, and fair sepulchres for their dead. + +They scorned to live under strict obedience to a king, whose residence +was some miles up the country, as they required to have his leave, which +was sent for, before they would sell us any provisions. When informed of +our arrival, their king sent a message of welcome to our commander, +together with a present of beeves, goats, and choice fruits; in return +for which, he was well recompensed and contented, by a present of paper, +and other English toys. We saw some Spanish money among them, of which +they made so small account, that some of our men got rials of eight, in +exchange for a little paper, or a few beads. What use they made of the +paper, we could not guess. The cocoa-nut tree, of which this island has +abundance, may have the pre-eminence of all trees, in my opinion, by its +universal usefulness. Without the help of any other, one may build and +furnish out a ship for sea, with every thing requisite. Of the body of +this tree may be made timbers, planks, and masts; its gum may serve for +paying the bottom; the rind of the same tree will make sails and +cordage; and the large nut, being full of kernel and pleasant liquor, +will serve those who navigate the ship both for meat and drink, as also +for merchandize. + +Being well stored with these nuts, and other good provisions, after six +days abode here, the breaches in our ships received in fight being all +repaired, and our men well refreshed, we put again to sea on the 16th of +August, with a prosperous wind. On the 24th, we passed under the line, +without any heat to offend us, bending our course for Socotora, near the +mouth of the Red Sea, an island whence comes our Socotorine aloes. But +an adverse wind from the coast of Arabia prevented us from being able to +fetch that island, which we passed on the 1st September. + +In the year before, our English fleet touched at this island, on which +occasion the petty king came to the water-side, and hearing some of our +wind-instruments, asked if they ever played David's Psalms, which he had +heard of, being a Mahometan. He was answered by one who stood by, that +they did. On which he observed, that it was an evil invention of him who +first mingled music with religion; as God, before that, was worshipped +in heart, but by this only in sound. I mean not by this story to condemn +the use of music in churches; leaving it to him who bids us praise the +Lord with stringed instruments and organs, to plead that cause. + +Missing our port of Socotora, we proceeded on our voyage; and, on the +4th of September, we celebrated a solemn funeral in memory of our slain +commander; when, after sermon, the great guns and small arms gave a loud +peal to his honourable remembrance. At night on the 6th September, to +our great admiration and fear, the water of the sea seemed as white as +milk. Others of our nation since, passing in the same course, have +observed the same phenomenon, of which I am yet to learn the cause, as +it was far from any shore, and we could find no ground. + +On the 21st of September we discovered the main land of India; and on +the 22d had sight of Diu and Damaun, cities inhabited by the Portuguese. +The 25th we came safely to anchor in Swally roads, within the bay of +Cambay, which is the harbour for our fleet while in this part of India, +when we were visited by the merchants of the Surat factory, the +principal of whom was Mr Thomas Kerridge. + +§2. _Description of the Mogul Empire_ + +Although this account of Hindoostan, or the Mogul empire in India, be +very incorrect, and in some places hardly intelligible, it is here +retained, as a curious record of the knowledge possessed on that subject +by the English about 200 years ago. We have two editions of this account +in Purchas, one appended to his narrative of Sir Thomas Roe, and the +other in this relation by Terry, which he acknowledges to be the most +correct, and which therefore is alone retained. On the present occasion, +instead of encumbering the bottoms of our pages with the display of +numerous explanatory notes on this topographical list of places and +provinces, a running commentary has been introduced into the text, so +far as seemed necessary, yet distinguished sufficiently from the +original notices by Terry. The observations, by way of commentary, are +marked, as this paragraph.--E. + + * * * * * + +The large empire of the Great Mogul is bounded on the east by the +kingdom of Maug;[229] on the west by Persia; on the north by the +mountains of Caucasus [Hindoo-Kho] and Tartary; and on the south by the +ocean, the Deccan, and the bay of Bengal. The Deccan is divided among +three Mahometan kings and some Indian rajahs. This extensive monarchy of +the Mogul is called, in the Persian language, by the Mahometan +inhabitants, Indostan or Hindoostan, meaning the land of the Hindoos, +and is divided into _thirty-seven_ distinct and large provinces, which +were anciently separate kingdoms. Their several names, with their +principal cities, their rivers, situations, and borders, together with +their length and breadth, I shall now enumerate, beginning at the +north-west. + +[Footnote 229: Meckely, now a province of the Birman empire; perhaps +called Maug in the text, from a barbarous tribe called the Muggs, or +Maugs, who inhabit, or did inhabit, the mountains east of Bengal, and +who are said to have laid waste and depopulated the Sunderbunds, or +Delta of the Ganges.--E.] 1. _Candahar,_ the chief city of which is of +the same name, lies N.W. from the heart or centre of the Mogul +territory, bordering upon Persia, of which kingdom it was formerly a +province. + +2. _Cabul,_ with its chief city of the same name, lies in the extremest +north-west corner of this empire, bordering to the north on Tartary for +a great way. The river Nilab takes its rise in this country, and runs to +the southwards, till it discharges its waters into the Indus.--This is a +material error. The Nilab is the main stream of the Indus, and rises far +to the north in Little Thibet, a great way N.E. of Cabul. The river of +Cabul is the Kameh, which runs S.E. and joins the Nilab, Sinde, or +Indus, a few miles above Attock. Another river, in the south of Cabul, +called the Cow, or Coumul, follows a similar direction, and falls into +the western side of the Indus, about forty miles below the Kameh.--E. + +3. _Multan,_ Moultan or Mooltan, having its chief city of the same name, +is south [south-east] from Cabul and Candahar, and on the west joins +with Persia.--This is an error, as Hajykan, to be noticed next in +order, is interposed.--E. + +4. _Hajacan,_ or Hajykan, the kingdom of the Baloches, who are a stout +warlike people, has no renowned city. The famous river Indus, called +_Skind_ [Sind or Sindeh] by the inhabitants, borders it on the east, and +Lar, or Laristan, meets it on the west, a province belonging to Shah +Abbas, the present king of Persia.--In modern geography, the country of +the Ballogees, or Baloches, is placed considerably more to the +north-west, bordering on the south-east of Candahar; and the Sewees are +placed more immediately west of this province. The seats, however, of +barbarous hordes, in a waste and almost desert country, are seldom +stationary for any continuance; and the Ballogees and Sewees are +probably congeneric tribes, much intermixed, and having no fixed +boundaries. We have formerly seen the Baloches, or a tribe of that +nation, inhabiting the oceanic coast of Persia about Guadel, and one of +their tribes may have been in possession of Hajykan, which perhaps +derived its name from their chief or khan having made the Haji, or +pilgrimage of Mecca. The assertion that Hajykan joins with Lar, or +Laristan, is grossly erroneous, as the eastern provinces of Persia which +confine with Hindoostan, are Segistan in the north, bordering with +Candahar, and Mekran in the south, bordering with the provinces of +Hindoostan which are to the west of the Indus. Lar or Laristan is a +Persian province within the gulf of Persia, at least 850 English miles +from the most westerly part of Hindoostan.--E. + +5. _Buckor_, or Backar, its chief city being Buckor-Suckor. The river +Indus pervades this province, which it greatly enriches.--In modern +maps, the city of Backar is placed in a small island in the middle of +the Indus, at the junction of the Dummoddy from the N.E. Suckar, whence +probably our word sugar is derived, is given as a distinct place, on the +western side of the Indus. Indeed, in the map of India given in the +Pilgrims, Backar and Suckar are made distinct places, but their +situations are reversed.--E. + +6. _Tatta_, with its chief city of the same name. This province is +exceedingly fertile and pleasant, being divided into many islands by the +Indus, the chief arm of which meets the sea at Synde, a place very +famous for curious handicrafts.--The most western branch of the Indus, +called the Pitty river, from a place of that name on its western shore +near the mouth, is probably that here meant. That branch leads to +Larry-bunder, the sea-port of Tatta; and the Synde of Terry is probably +the Diul-sinde of other authors, a place situated somewhat in this +neighbourhood, but which is not to be found in modern maps.--E. + +7. _Soret_, the chief city of which is called Janagur, is a small, but +rich province, which lies west from Guzerat, having the ocean to the +south.--Soret is not now recognized as a distinct province or district, +but seems the modern Werrear, the western district of Guzerat, +Rhadunpoor appearing to be its chief town. Janagur, in this district, is +on the west side of the river Butlass, or Banass, which runs into the +head of the gulf of Cutch.--E. + +8. _Jesselmere_, of which the chief city has the same name, joins with +Soret Backar and Tatta, being to the south of Soret and Tatta, and +having Backar on the west. + +9. _Attock_, the chief city being of the same name, lies on the east +side of the Indus, which parts it from Hajykan.--This account is +erroneous, as Attock-Benares is much farther up the river Indus than +Hajykan, having the eastern extremity of Cabul on the opposite side of +the Indus.--E. + +10. _Punjab_, which signifies the _five waters_, because it is seated +among five rivers, all tributaries to the Indus, which, somewhat to the +south of Lahore, form only one river. This is a great kingdom, and +extremely rich and fertile. Lahore, the chief city, is well built, very +large, populous, and rich, being the chief mart of trade in all India. + +11. _Chishmeere_, Kyshmir, Cachmir, or Cashmere, its chief city being +Siranakar. The river Phat passes through this country, and, after +creeping about many islands, falls into the Indus.--The rivers of +Cashmere, here called the Phat, are the Chota-sing, or Jellum, in the N. +and the Jellium, or Colhumah, in the S. which unite in the W. to form +the Jhylum or Babut, the Phat or Bhat of Terry and Purchas, and the +Hydaspes of the ancients, one of the _five rivers_ of the Indus. The +present capital of Cashmere is likewise named Cashmere; but has in its +close neighbourhood a town or fortress called Sheergur, the Siranakar of +Terry.--E. + +12. _Banchish_, with its chief city named Bishur. It lies east southerly +from Cashmere, from which it is divided by the river Indus.--No such +province or city is to be found in the modern geography of Hindoostan, +neither any names in the indicated direction that have any resemblance +to these. In the map of the Mogul empire in the Pilgrims, appended to +the journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Banchish and Bishar are placed on a river +named the Kaul, being the _fourth_ of the Punjab or five rivers, +counting from the west, and therefore probably the Ravey, or Hydraotes +of the ancients. Near the head of that river, and to the east of +Cashmere, is a town, called Kishtewar, which may possibly have been the +Bishur of Terry: But there is a little-known district near the head of +the Jumna, S.S.E. from Cashmere, named Besseer, that has considerable +resemblance in sound to Bishur, and is in the indicated direction.--E. + +13. _Jeugapor_, with its chief city likewise so named, lies on the Kaul, +one of the five rivers that water the Punjab.--The only place upon the +Ravey, which answers to the Kaul, which has the smallest resemblance +with Jengapor, or Jenupur, as it is likewise called by Purchas, is +Shawpoor, N.E. from Agra. Yet Jaypoor, otherwise called Jyenagur, in +Ajmeer, is more probably the district and city here meant, though not in +the Punjab.--E. + +14. _Jenba_, its chief city so called, lies east of the Punjab.--This +may possibly be Jambae, north of Lahore.--E. + +15. _Delli_, or Delhi, its chief city being of the same name, lies +between Jenba and Agra, the river Jemni, which runs through Agra and +falls into the Ganges, begins in this province. Delhi is a great and +ancient city, the seat of the Mogul's ancestors, and where most of them +are interred.--The Jumnah, or Jemni of Terry, rises far to the north of +Delhi, in the high-peaked mountain of Cantal to the east of +Cashmere.--E. + +16. _Bando_, its chief city so called, borders with Agra on the +west.--No such name is to be found in modern maps.--E. + +17. _Malwa_ is a very fertile province, of which Rantipore is the chief +city.--In the other edition of this list in the Pilgrims, Ugen, Nar, and +Sering, or Oojain, Indore, and Serong, are said to have been the +capitals of Malwa. The Rantipore of Terry may have been that now called +Ramypoor.--E. + +18. _Chitor_, an ancient and great kingdom, its chief city being of the +same name.--Chitore is in the south of Ajmeer. In the edition of this +list given by Purchas at the end of the journal of Sir Thomas Roe, he +gives the following account of Chitore: "Chitore stands upon a mighty +hill, and is walled round in a circuit of ten English miles. There still +remain at this place above an hundred temples, the palace of the +ancient kings, and many brave pillars of carved stone. There is but one +ascent to the place, cut out of the solid rock, and passing through four +magnificent gateways. Within the walls are the ruins of 100,000 houses +of stone, but it is now uninhabited. This was doubtless one of the +residences of Porus, and was won from the Ranna, his descendant, by +Akbar shah, the father of the reigning Mogul. The Ranna fled into the +fastnesses of his mountains, and took up his residence at Odeypoor; but +was at length induced, in 1614, to acknowledge the Mogul as his superior +lord, by Sultan Churrum, third son of the present emperor Shah +Jehanguire. This kingdom lies N.W. from Candeish, N.E. from Guzerat, and +in the way between Agra and Surat; the Ranna keeping among the hills to +the west of Ahmedabad.--"_Purch._ + +19. _Guzerat_ is a goodly and mighty kingdom, and exceedingly rich, +which incloses the bay of Cambay. The river Taptee waters the city of +Surat, which trades to the Red Sea, to Acheen, and to divers other +places. + +20. _Khamdesh_, the chief city of which is Brampore, [Boorhanpoor, or +Burhampore,] which is large and populous. Adjoining to this province is +a petty prince called Partap-shah, tributary to the Mogul; and this is +the most southerly part of the Mogul dominions. + +21. _Berar_, the chief city of which is called Shahpoor. The +southernmost part of this province likewise bounds the Mogul +empire.--The Shahpoor of Terry may possibly be Saipoor in the north of +Berar. In modern days, the chief cities of the great province or kingdom +of Berar, now belonging to a Mahratta chief; are Nagpoor, Ruthunpoor, +and Sonepoor.--E. + +22. _Narwar_, its chief city being Gohud, is watered by a fair river +that falls into the Ganges.--This province of Narwar, now called Gohud, +from its chief city, is to be carefully distinguished from Marwar to the +westwards.--E. + +22. _Gualior_, with its chief city of the same name, in which the Mogul +has a great treasury in bullion. In this city likewise there is an +exceedingly strong castle, in which state prisoners are kept.--Gualior +is, properly speaking, in the same province or district with Gohud.--E. + +24. _Agra_ is a principal and great province, its chief city being of +the same name. From Agra to Lahore, the two chief cities of this empire, +the distance is about 400 English miles, the country in all that +distance being without a hill, and the road being planted the whole way +with trees on both sides, forming a beautiful avenue. + +25. _Sanbal_, with its chief city of the same name. The river Jumna +parts this province from that called Narwar.--This province and city are +not to be traced in modern maps.--E. + +26. _Bakar_, the chief city of which is Bikaneer, lies on the west side +of the Ganges.--Nothing resembling either name can now be found in the +indicated situation in modern maps. Bicaneer is a district and town in +the desert, far west of the Ganges.--E. + +27. _Nagracutt_, or Nakarkut, with its chief city of the same name, in +which there is a temple most richly adorned, the ceiling and pavement +being of plates of pure gold. In this place they have an idol called +Matta, visited yearly by many thousands of the Indians, who, from +devotion, cut out part of their tongues, which they sacrifice at his +altar. In this province likewise, there is another famous place of +pilgrimage, Jallamaka, where there are daily to be seen incessant +eruptions of fire, out of cold springs and hard rocks, before which the +idolaters fall down and worship.--In the edition of this list, appended +by Purchas to the journal of Sir Thomas Roe, this district and city are +said to be in the northeasternmost confines of the Mogul dominions, N.E. +from the head of the bay of Bengal. This description is however entirely +at variance with the accompanying map in the Pilgrims, in which +Nagracutt and its capital are placed east from the Punjab; the capital +being on the easternmost of the five rivers of the Setlege, and towards +its head. In the edition of this list given by Churchill, as an appendix +likewise to Sir Thomas Roe, Nagracutt is said to lie to the north, +between the Punjab and Jamboe. In our best modern maps, no district or +place, having the smallest resemblance in name, is to be found in any of +these indicated situations. Terry gives no reference as to situation; so +that we may conjecture that Nagracutt may refer to Nucker-gaut, the +passage of the Ganges through the Sewalick mountains, between Serinagur +and Hindoostan.--E. + +28. _Siba_, the chief city of which is Hardwair, or Hurdwar, where the +famous river Ganges seems to begin, and issues out of a rock, which the +superstitious Gentiles imagine resembles a cow's head, which animal they +hold in the highest veneration; and to this place they resort daily in +great numbers to wash themselves. + +29. _Kakares_, the principal cities being Dankalec and Purhola. This +country is very mountainous, and is divided from Tartary by the +mountains of Caucasus, being the farthest north of any part of the Mogul +dominions.--In the map of Purchas, this province or kingdom is called +Kares, and is placed directly to the north of where the Ganges breaks +through the Sewalick mountains, above Hurdwar, at the _Cow's-mouth_. In +that direction are the little-known districts of Serinagur, +Badry-cazram, and others; but no names either of towns or districts that +in the least resemble those given by Terry.--E. + +30. _Gor_, its chief city of the same name. This province is full of +mountains, and in it begins the river Persilis, which discharges its +waters into the Ganges.--In the other copy of this list in Purchas, so +often already referred to, Gor is said to lie in the northern part of +the Mogul dominions. From this, and the mountainous nature of the +country, as stated by Terry, it may possibly be Gorcah, one of the +little-known _twenty-four rajahs_, to the west of Napaul; and the +Persilis of Terry may be the Sursutty or the Marshandy, both head +streams of the Gunduck.--E. + +31. _Pitan_, and its chief city so named. The river Kanda waters this +province, and falls into the Ganges on its confines.--This is probably +one of the _twenty-four_ rajahs, called Peytahn, in the mountainous +country to the north of Oude, which is watered by several of the head +streams of the Gunduck and Booree or Rapty rivers.--E. + +32. _Kanduana_, the chief city of which is called Karhakatenka. The +river Sersili parts it from Pitan; and this province, with Pitan and +Gor, are the north-east boundaries of this great monarchy.--The +indicated connection with Gor and Pitan, or Gorcah and Peytahn, would +lead to suppose that Napaul is here meant. Karhakatenka may possibly be +some name of Catmandoo, or may have some reference to Kyraut, a district +in the east of Napaul, bordering on Bootan. The river Sersili of this +district is evidently the Persilis mentioned in Gor, and may refer to +the Sursutty.--E. + +33. _Patna_, the chief city of which has the same name. The river +Ganges bounds this province on the west, and the Sersilis on the east. +It is a very fertile province.--In the former edition of this list by +Purchas, this province is said to be watered by four rivers, the Ganges, +Jumna, Sersili, and Kanda, all of which rivers here unite. Patna is +seated on the south side of the Ganges, which is joined a little way +higher up by the Jumna. Opposite to Patna the Gunduck falls into the +Ganges, probably the Kanda of Purchas, of which the Sursutty, formerly +supposed to be the same with the Sersili, or Persilis, is one of the +feeders. Patna is well known as a principal city of Bahar.--E. + +34. _Jesual_, the chief city of which is called Rajapore, lies east of +Patna.--This may possibly refer to the district and city of Hajipoor in +Bahar, to the N.E. of Patna.--E. + +35. _Mevat_, the chief city of which province is Narnol, is a very +mountainous country.--In the map of the Pilgrims, Mevat and Narnol are +placed to the east of Jesual, but the geography of this part of +Hindoostan in that map is utterly unintelligible, and no conjecture can +be hazarded respecting either Mevat or Narnol.--E. + +36. _Udessa_, the chief city of which is called Jokanat, is the most +easterly territory in the kingdom of the Mogul.--In the other edition of +this list given by Purchas, Udessa, or Udeza, is said to border on the +kingdom of Maug, a savage people dwelling between this province and the +kingdom of Pegu. Its eastern situation would lead to the province of +Chittagong or Islambabad. The Maugs, or Mugs, are probably the barbarous +mountaineers of Meckley to the north of Aracan; but no names in modern +maps have any reference to Udessa, Udeza, or Jokanat, unless Jokanat be +some strange corruption of Chittagong.--E. + +37. _Bengal_, a mighty and fertile kingdom, bounded by the gulf or bay +of the same name, into which the river Ganges discharges itself by four +great branches, into which it divides.--In the other edition of this +list, by Purchas, so often referred to, Ragamahall and Dakaka, or +Rajemal and Dacca, are mentioned as the chief cities of Bengal. It would +require far too long a commentary, to explain some farther ignorant +indications of the havens and provinces of Bengal, contained in that +former list, and in the map of the Pilgrims; both being so faulty in +positions, and so corrupted in the names, as to be useless and +unintelligible. By the labours of Rennel, as since extended and improved +by Arrowsmith, the geography of Bengal is now as completely elucidated +as that of Britain.--E. + +Here I must take notice of a material error in our geographers, who, in +their globes and maps, make Hindoostan and China neighbours, though many +large countries are interposed between them. Their great distance may +appear, from the long travels of the Indian merchants, who are usually +more than two years in their journey and return, between Agra and the +wall of China. The length of these before-named provinces, from N.W. to +S.E. is at least 1000 cosses, every Indian coss being two English miles. +From N. to S. the extent is about 1400 miles. The greatest breadth, from +N.E. to S.W. is about 1500 miles. The northernmost part is in 43° of +north latitude.[230] + +[Footnote 230: The northern mountains of Cashmere, are only in lat. 35° +30' N. so that the 43° of the text is probably a mistake for 34°.--E.] + +To give an exact account of all these provinces, were more than I am +able to undertake; yet, from what I have observed of a few, I may +venture to conjecture concerning the rest, and I am convinced that the +Great Mogul, considering the extent of his territories, his wealth, and +the rich commodities of his dominions, is the greatest known monarch of +the east, if not in the whole world. This widely extended sovereignty is +so rich and fertile, and so abounding in all things for the use of man, +that it is able to subsist and flourish of itself, without the help of +any neighbour. To speak first of food, which nature requires most. This +land abounds in singularly good wheat, rice, barley, and various other +grains, from which to make bread, the staff of life. Their wheat grows +like ours, but the grain is somewhat larger and whiter, of which the +inhabitants make most pure and well-relished bread. The common people +make their bread in cakes, which they bake or fire on portable iron +hearths or plates, which they carry with them on their journeys, using +them in their tents. This seems to be an ancient custom, as appears from +the instance of Sarah in our bible, when she entertained the angels. + +To their bread, they have great abundance of other excellent provisions, +as butter and cheese in great plenty, made from the milk of their +numerous cows, sheep, and goats. They have likewise a large animal, +called a buffalo, having a thick smooth skin without hair, the females +of which give excellent milk. Their flesh resembles beef, but is not so +sweet or wholesome. They have plenty of venison of several kinds, as red +and fallow deer, elks, and antelopes. These are not any where kept in +parks, the whole empire being as it were a forest, so that they are seen +every where in travelling through the country; and they are free game +for all men, except within a certain distance of where the king happens +to reside. They have also plenty of hares, with a variety of land and +water fowl, and abundance of fish, which it were too tedious to +enumerate. Of fowls, they have geese, ducks, pigeons, partridges, +quails, pheasants, and many other good sorts, all to be had at low +rates. I have seen a good sheep bought for about the value of our +shilling: four couple of hens for the same price; a hare for a penny; +three partridges for the same money; and so in proportion for other +things. + +The cattle of this country differ from ours, in having a great bunch of +grisly flesh on the meeting of their shoulders. Their sheep have great +bob-tails of considerable weight, and their flesh is as good as our +English mutton, but their wool is very coarse. They have also abundance +of salt, and sugar is so plentiful, that it sells, when well refined, +for two-pence a pound, or less. Their fruits are numerous, excellent, +abundant, and cheap; as musk-melons, water-melons, pomegranates, +pomecitrons, lemons, oranges, dates, figs, grapes, plantains, which are +long round yellow fruits, which taste like our Norwich pears; mangoes, +in shape and colour like our apricots, but more luscious, and ananas or +pine-apples, to crown all, which taste like a pleasing compound of +strawberries, claret-wine, rose-water, and sugar. In the northern parts +of the empire, they have plenty of apples and pears. They have every +where abundance of excellent roots, as carrots, potatoes, and others; +also garlic and onions, and choice herbs for sallads. In the southern +parts, ginger grows almost every where. + +I must here mention a pleasant clear liquor called _taddy_, which issues +from a spungy tree, growing straight and tall without boughs to the top, +and there spreads out in branches resembling our English colewarts. They +make their incisions, under which they hang small earthenware pots; and +the liquor which flows out in the night is as pleasant to the taste as +any white wine, if drank in the morning early, but it alters in the day +by the sun's heat, becoming heady, ill-tasted and unwholesome. It is a +most penetrating medicinal drink, if taken early and in moderation, as +some have experienced to their great happiness, by relieving them from +the tortures of the stone, that tyrant of maladies and opprobrium of +the doctors. + +At Surat, and thence to Agra and beyond, it only rains during one season +of the year, which begins when the sun comes to the northern tropic, and +continues till he returns again to the line. These violent rains are +ushered in, and take their leave, by most fearful tempests of thunder +and lightning, more terrible than I can express, but which seldom do any +harm. The reason of this may be the subtile nature of the air, breeding +fewer _thunder-stones_, than where the air is grosser and more cloudy. +In these three months, it rains every day more or less, and sometimes +for a whole quarter of the moon without intermission. Which abundance of +rain, together with the heat of the sun, so enriches the soil, which +they never force by manure, that it becomes fruitful for all the rest of +the year, as that of Egypt is by the inundations of the Nile. After this +season of rain is over, the sky becomes so clear, that scarcely is a +single cloud to be seen for the other nine months. The goodness of the +soil is evident from this circumstance, that though the ground, after +the nine months of dry weather, looks altogether like barren sands, it +puts on an universal coat of green within seven days after the rains +begin to fall. Farther to confirm this, among the many hundreds of acres +I have seen in corn in India, I never saw any that did not grow up as +thick as it could well stand. Their ground is tilled by ploughs drawn by +oxen; the seed-time being in May or the beginning of June, and the +harvest in November and December, the most temperate months in all the +year. The ground is not inclosed, except near towns and villages, which +stand very thick. They do not mow their grass for hay as we do; but cut +it either green or withered, when wanted. They sow abundance of tobacco, +but know not the way to cure it and make it strong, as is done in +America. + +The country is beautified by many woods, in which are a great variety of +goodly trees; but I never saw any there of the kinds we have in England. +In general their trees are full of sap, which I ascribe to the fatness +of the soil. Some have leaves as broad as bucklers; others are much +divided into small portions, like the leaves of ferns. Such are those of +the tamarind tree, which bears an acid fruit in a pod somewhat like our +beans, and is most wholesome to cool and purify the blood. One of their +trees is worthy of being particularly noticed: Out of its branches there +grow certain sprigs or fibres, which hang downwards, and extend till +they touch the ground, in which they strike roots, and become +afterwards new trunks and firm supporters to the boughs and arms; whence +these trees come in time to grow to a great height, and extend to an +incredible breadth.[231] All trees in the southern parts of India are +perpetually clothed in verdure Their flowers rather delight the eye than +please the sense of smelling, having beautiful colours, but few of them, +except roses and one or two other kinds, are any way fragrant. + +[Footnote 231: The Banian tree, a species of Indian fig.--E.] + +India is watered by many goodly rivers, the two chief of which are the +Indus and the Ganges. There is this remarkable in the water of the +Ganges, that a pint of it weighs less by an ounce than that of any other +river in the empire; and therefore, wherever the Mogul happens to +reside, it is brought to him for his drinking. Besides rivers, there are +abundance of well-fed springs, on which they bestow great cost in many +places, constructing many stone-buildings in the form of ponds, which +they call _tanks_, some of which exceed a mile or two in circuit, made +round or square or polygonal, girt all round with handsome stone-walls, +within which are steps of well-dressed stone encompassing the water, for +people to go down on every aide to procure supplies. These tanks are +filled during the rainy season, and contain water for the supply of +those who dwell far from springs or rivers, till the wet season again +returns. Water, the most ancient beverage in the world, is the common +drink of India, being more sweet and pleasant than ours, and agrees +better with the constitution in this hot country than any other liquor. +Some small quantity of wine is made among them, which they call arrack, +but is not common, being distilled from sugar, and the spicy rind of a +tree, which they call _jagra_. This is very wholesome, if used in +moderation. Many of the people, who are strict in their religion, use no +wine at all. They use a liquor which is more wholesome than pleasant, +called _cohha_; being a black seed boiled in water, which does not much +alter the taste of the water, but is an excellent helper of digestion, +serving to quicken the spirits, and to purify the blood.[232] There is +also another help for digestion and to comfort the stomach, used by +those who refrain from wine. This is an herb called betel, or _paune_, +its leaf resembling that of our ivy. They chew this leaf along with a +hard nut, called _areka_, somewhat like a nutmeg, mixing a little pure +white lime among the leaves; and when they have extracted the juice, +they throw away the remains. This has many rare qualities: It preserves +the teeth, comforts the brain, strengthens the stomach, and prevents a +bad breath. + +[Footnote 232: The author here describes coffee, now so universally +known in Europe.--E.] + +Their houses are generally very mean, except in the cities, where I have +seen many fair buildings. Many of the houses in these are high, with +flat roofs, where, in the cool of the mornings and evenings, they enjoy +the fresh air. Their houses have no chimneys, as they use no fires, +except for dressing their victuals. In their upper rooms, they have many +windows and doors, for admitting light and air, but use no glass. The +materials of their best houses are bricks and stone, well squared and +built, as I have observed in Ahmedabad, which may serve as an instance +for all. This is an extensive and rich city, compassed about with a +strong stone-wall, and entered by twelve handsome gates. Both in their +towns and villages, they have usually many fair trees among the houses, +being a great defence against the violence of the sun. These trees are +commonly so numerous and thick, that a city or town, when seen at a +distance from some commanding eminence, seems a wood or thicket. + +The staple commodities of this empire are indigo and cotton. To produce +cotton, they sow seeds, which grow up into bushes like our rose-trees. +These produce first a yellow blossom, which falls off, and leaves a pod +about the size of a man's thumb, in which the substance at first is +moist and yellow. As this ripens, it swells larger, till at length it +bursts the covering, the cotton being then as white as snow. It is then +gathered. These shrubs continue to bear for three or four years, when +they have to be rooted out, and new ones substituted. Of this vegetable +wool, or cotton, they fabricate various kinds of pure white cloth, some +of which I have seen as fine as our best lawns, if not finer. Some of +the coarser sorts they dye in various colours, or stain with a variety +of curious figures. + +The ships that go usually from Surat to Mokha, are of exceeding great +burden, some of them, as I believe, exceeding 1400 or 1600 tons; but +they are ill built, and though they have good ordnance, they are unable +for any defence. In these ships there are yearly a vast number of +passengers: As, for instance, in that year in which we left India, there +came 1700 persons, most of whom went not for profit, but out of +devotion, to visit the sepulchre of Mahomet at Medina near Mecca, about +150 leagues from Mokha. Those who have been upon this pilgrimage are +ever after called _hoggeis_, [_hajim_] or holy men. This ship, from +Surat for the Red Sea, begins her voyage about the 20th of March and +returns to Surat about the end of September following. The voyage is +short, and might easily be made in two months; but during the long +season of the rains, and a little before and after, the winds are mostly +so violent that there is no putting to sea without extreme hazard. The +cargo of this ship, on its return, is usually worth £200,000 sterling, +mostly in gold and silver. Besides this, and the quantities of money +which come yearly out of Europe, which I do not pretend to calculate, +many streams of silver flow continually thither, and there abide. It is +lawful for all to bring in silver, and to carry away commodities, but it +is a capital crime to carry away any great sums. + +All the coin or bullion that comes to this country is presently melted +down and refined, and coined with the stamp of the Mogul, being his name +and title in Persian characters. This coin is purer silver than any +other that I know, being of virgin silver without alloy, so that in the +Spanish dollar, the purest money in Europe, there is some loss. Their +money is called _rupees_, which are of divers values, the meanest being +worth two shillings, and the best about two shillings and nine-pence. +This is their general money of account. There is in Guzerat a coin of +inferior value, called _mamoodies_, worth about twelve-pence each. Both +these and the rupees are likewise coined in halves and quarters; so that +three-pence is the smallest piece of current silver in the country. That +which passes current for small change is brass money, which they call +_pices_, of which three, or thereabout, are worth an English penny. +These are made so massy, that the brass in them, when put to other uses, +is well worth the quantity of silver at which they are rated. Their +silver money is made both square and round; but so thick, that it never +breaks or wears out. + +For farther commodities; India yields great store of silk, which they +weave very ingeniously, sometimes mixed with gold or silver. They make +velvets, sattins, and taffetas, but not so rich as those of Italy. This +country also produces many drugs and gums, and particularly the gum-lac, +from which hard sealing-wax is made. The earth also yields abundant +minerals, as lead, iron, copper, and brass, and, as they say, silver; +yet, though this be true, they need not work their silver mines, being +already so abundantly supplied with that metal from other nations. They +have spices from other countries, and especially from Sumatra, Java, and +the Molucca islands. They have curious pleasure gardens, planted with +fruit-trees and delightful flowers, to which nature lends daily such +ample supply, that they seem never to fade. In these places they have +pleasant fountains, in which to bathe, and other delights by various +conveyances of water, whose silent murmurs sooth their senses to sleep, +in the hot season of the day. + +Lest this remote country might seem an earthly paradise, without any +inconveniences, I must notice that it contains many lions, tigers, +wolves, and jackals, which are a kind of wild dogs, besides many other +noxious and hurtful animals. In their rivers they have many crocodiles, +and on the land many overgrown snakes and serpents, with other venomous +and pernicious creatures. In the houses we often meet with scorpions, +whose stinging is most painful and even deadly, unless the part be +immediately anointed with an oil made of scorpions.[233] The abundance +of flies in those parts is likewise an extreme annoyance; as, in the +heat of the day, their numbers are so prodigious, that we cannot have +peace or rest for them in any part. They cover our meat the moment it is +set on the table, wherefore we are obliged to have men standing ready to +drive them away with napkins, while we are eating. In the night, +likewise, we are much disquieted with musquetos, like our gnats, but +somewhat less; and, in the cities, there are such numbers of large +hungry rats, that they often bite people as they sleep in their beds. + +[Footnote 233: This is a mere fancy, as any bland oil is equally +efficacious.--E.] + +In this country the winds, which are called monsoons, blow constantly, +or altering only a few points, for six months from the south, and other +six months from the north. The months of April and May, and the +beginning of June, till the rains come, are extremely hot; and the wind, +which then sometimes blows gently over the parched ground, becomes so +heated, as much oppresses all who are exposed to it: Yet God so +mercifully provides for our relief, that most commonly he sends so +strong a gale as greatly tempers the sultry air. Sometimes the wind +blows very high during the hot and dry season, raising up vast +quantities of dust and sand, like dark clouds pregnant with rain, and +which often prodigiously annoy the people among whom they fall. But +there is no country without its inconveniences; for the wise Disposer of +all events hath attempered bitter things with sweet, to teach mankind +that there is no true or perfect contentment to be found, but only in +the kingdom of God. + +This country has many excellent horses, which the inhabitants know well +how to manage. Besides those bred in the country, they have many of the +Tartarian, Persian, and Arabian breeds, which last is considered as the +best in the world. They are about as large as ours, and are valued among +them at as dear a rate as we usually esteem ours, perhaps higher. They +are kept very daintily, every good horse being allowed one man to dress +and feed him. Their provender is a species of grain called _donna_, +somewhat like our pease, which are boiled, and then given cold to the +horses, mixed with coarse sugar; and twice or thrice a week they have +butter given them to scour their bodies. There are likewise in this +country a great number of camels, dromedaries, mules, asses, and some +rhinoceroses. These are huge beasts, bigger than the fattest oxen to be +seen in England, and their skins lie upon their bodies in plaits or +wrinkles. + +They have many elephants, the Great Mogul having not fewer than 1400 for +his own use, and all the nobles of the country have more or less, some +having to the number of an hundred. Though the largest of all +terrestrial animals, the elephants are wonderfully tractable, except +that they are mad at times; but at all other times, a little boy is able +to rule the largest of them. I have seen some thirteen feet high; but I +have been often told that some are fifteen feet in height at the least. +Their colour is universally black, their skins very thick and smooth, +and without hair. They take much delight to bathe themselves in water, +and they swim better than any beast I know. They lie down and rise again +at pleasure, as other beasts do. Their pace is not swift, being only +about three miles an hour; but they are the surest footed beasts in the +world, as they never endanger their riders by stumbling. They are the +most docile of all creatures, and of those we account merely possessed +of instinct, they come nearest to reason. Lipsius, _Cent_. 1, _Epist_. +50, in his observations, taken from others, writes more concerning them +than I can confirm, or than any can credit, as I conceive; yet I can +vouch for many things which seem to be acts of reason rather than of +mere brute sense, which we call instinct. For instance, an elephant will +do almost any thing which his keeper commands. If he would have him +terrify a man, he will make towards him as if he meant to tread him in +pieces, yet does him no hurt. If he would have him to abuse a man, he +will take up dirt, or kennel water, in his trunk, and dash it in his +face. Their trunks are long grisly snouts, hanging down betwixt their +tusks, by some called their hand, which they use very dexterously on all +occasions. + +An English merchant, of good credit, told me the following story of an +elephant, as having happened to his own knowledge at Ajimeer, the place +where the Mogul then resided:--This elephant used often to pass through +the bazar, or market-place, where a woman who there sold herbs used to +give him a handful as he passed her stall. This elephant afterwards went +mad,[234] and, having broken his fetters, took his way furiously through +the market-place, whence all the people fled as quickly as possible to +get out of his way. Among these was his old friend the herb-woman, who, +in her haste and terror, forgot to take away her little child. On coming +to the place where this woman was in use to sit, the elephant stopped, +and seeing the child among the herbs, he took it up gently in his trunk, +and laid it carefully on a stall under the projecting roof of a house +hard by, without doing it the smallest injury, and then continued his +furious course. A travelling Jesuit, named Acosta, relates a similar +story of an elephant at Goa, as from his own experience.--The king keeps +certain elephants for the execution of malefactors. When one of these is +brought forth to dispatch a criminal, if his keeper desires that the +offender be destroyed speedily, this vast creature will instantly crush +him to atoms under his foot; but if desired to torture him, will break +his limbs successively, as men are broken on the wheel. + +[Footnote 234: This temporary madness of the male elephants is usual in +the rutting season.--E.] + +The Mogul takes great delight in these stately animals, and often, when +he sits in state, calls for some of the finest and largest to be +brought, which are taught to bend before him, as in reverence, when they +come into his presence. They often fight before him, beginning their +combats like rams, by running furiously against each other, and butting +with their foreheads. They afterwards use their tusks and teeth, +fighting with the utmost fury, yet are they most careful to preserve +their keepers, so that few of them receive any hurt in these +rencounters. They are governed by a hooked instrument of steel, made +like the iron end of a boat-hook, with which their keepers, who sit on +their necks, put them back, or goad them on, at pleasure. + +The king has many of his elephants trained up for war; each of which +carries an iron gun about six feet long, which is fastened to a strong +square frame of wood on his back, made fast by strong girths or ropes +round his body. This gun carries a bullet about the size of a small +tennis-ball, and is let into the timber with a loop of iron. The four +corners of the wooden frame have each a silken banner on a short pole, +and a gunner sits within, to shoot as occasion serves, managing the gun +like a harquebuss, or large wall-piece. When the king travels, he is +attended by many elephants armed in this manner, as part of his guard. +He keeps many of them likewise, merely for state, which go before him, +and are adorned with bosses of brass, and some have their bosses made of +silver, or even of gold; having likewise many bells jingling about them, +in the sound of which the animal delights. They have handsome housings, +of cloth, or velvet, or of cloth of silver, or cloth of gold; and, for +the greater state, have large royal banners of silk carried before them, +on which the king's ensign is depicted, being a lion in the sun. These +state-elephants are each allowed three or four men at least to wait upon +them. Other elephants are appointed for carrying his women, who sit in +pretty convenient receptacles fastened on their backs, made of slight +turned pillars, richly covered, each holding four persons, who sit +within. These are represented by our painters as resembling castles. +Others again are employed to carry his baggage. He has one very fine +elephant that has submitted, like the rest, to wear feathers, but could +never be brought to endure a man, or any other burden, on his back. + +Although the country be very fertile, and all kinds of provisions cheap, +yet these animals, because of their vast bulk, are very chargeable in +keeping; such as are well fed costing four or five shillings each, +daily. They are kept out of doors, being fastened with a strong chain by +one of their hind legs to a tree, or a strong post. Thus standing out in +the sun, the flies are often extremely troublesome to them; on which +occasions they tread the dry ground into dust with their feet, and throw +it over their bodies with their trunks, to drive away the flies. The +males are usually mad once a year after the females, at which time they +are extremely mischievous, and will strike any one who comes in their +way, except their own keeper; and such is their vast strength, that they +will kill a horse or a camel with one blow of their trunks. This fury +lasts only a few days; when they return to their usual docility. At +these times they are kept apart from all company, and fettered with +strong chains to prevent mischief. If by chance they get loose in their +state of phrenzy, they run at everything they see in motion; and, in +this case, the only possible means of stopping them is by lighting a +kind of artificial fire-works called wild-fire, the sparkling and +cracking of which make them stand still and tremble. + +The king allows four females to each of his great elephants, which are +called their wives. The testes of the males are said to lie about his +forehead, and the teats of the female are between her fore-legs. She +goes twelve months with young. The elephant is thirty years old before +he attains his full growth, and they live to seventy or eighty years of +age. Although very numerous, elephants are yet so highly prized in +India, that some of the best are valued at a thousand pounds or more. + +§3. _Of the People of Hindoostan, and their Manners and Customs_. + +The whole inhabitants of Hindoostan were anciently Gentiles, or +notorious idolaters, generally denominated Hindoos, hot ever since the +time of Tamerlane they have been mixed with Mahometans.[235] There are, +besides, many Persians, Tartars, Abyssinians, and Arminians, and some +few of almost every nation in Asia, if not in Europe, that reside here. +Among these are some Jews, but not esteemed, for their very name is +proverbial, as a term of reproach. In stature, the natives of Hindoostan +are equal to ourselves, being in general very straight and well-made, +for I never saw any deformed person in that country. They are of a dark +tawny or olive colour, having their hair as black as a raven, but not +curled. They love not to see either a man or a woman very fair, as they +say that is the colour of lepers, which are common among them. Most of +the Mahometans, except their molahs or priests, or such as are old and +retired, keep their chins shaved, but allow the hair on their upper-lips +to grow long. They usually shave all the hair from their heads, leaving +only one lock on their crowns for Mahomet to pull them by up to heaven. +Both among the Gentiles and Mahometans they have excellent barbers. The +people often bathe and wash their bodies, and anoint themselves with +perfumed oils. + +[Footnote 235: The Mahomedans made extensive conquests in India long +before the era of Timor.--E.] + +The dresses of the men and women differ very little from each other, and +are mostly made of white cotton cloth. In fashion, they sit close to +the shape to the middle, and from thence hang loose to below the knee. +Under this they wear long close breeches down to their ancles, crumpled +about the small of their legs like boots. Their feet are put bare into +their shoes, which are made like slippers, that they may be readily put +off on entering their houses, the floors of which are covered with +excellent carpets of the country manufacture, as good as any made in +Turkey or Persia. Instead of these carpets, some have other +floor-cloths, according to the quality of the owner. On these they sit +when conversing or eating, like tailors on the shop-board. The men's +heads are covered by turbans, being sashes, or long webs of thin cloth, +white or coloured, wreathed many times about. They do not uncover their +heads in making reverence, instead of which they bow their bodies, +placing the right hand on the top of the head, after which they touch +the earth with that hand, as if indicating that the party saluted may +tread upon them if he please. Those who are equals take each other by +the chin or beard, as Joab did Amasa; but salute in love, not in +treachery. + +The Mahometan women, except such as are poor or dishonest, never appear +abroad. Though not fair, they are all well favoured, have their heads +covered with veils, and their hair hanging down behind, twisted with +silk. Those of quality are decorated with many jewels hung around their +necks, and about their wrists and arms; and they have several holes +round their ears in which they hang pendents, besides that every woman +has a hole in her nostrils, in which to wear a ring, which seems to have +been an ancient ornament, being mentioned in the Old Testament. Their +women are happy above all others I have ever heard of; in the ease with +which they bear their children, being one day able to ride with their +infants unborn, and to ride again the next with their child in their +arms. + +The language of the common people of this country, called Hindoostanee, +is smooth, and easily pronounced, and is written from left to right, as +we do. The learned tongues are the Persian and Arabic, which are written +backwards, from right to left, like the Hebrew. There is but little +learning among them, which may be owing to the scarcity of books, which +are all in manuscript, and therefore few and dear; but they are a people +of good capacity, and were they to cultivate literature among them, +would assuredly produce many excellent works. They have heard of +Aristotle, whom they name _Aplis_, and have some of his writings +translated into Arabic. The noble physician, Avicenna, was a native of +Samarcandia, the country of Tamerlane, and in this science they possess +good skill. The most prevalent diseases of this country are dysenteries, +hot fevers, and calentures, in all which they prescribe abstinence as a +principal remedy. The filthy disease produced by incontinence is +likewise common among them. They delight much in music, having many +instruments, both stringed and wind; but, to my ears, their music seemed +all discordant. They write many pretty poems, and compose histories and +annals of their own country. They profess great skill in astrology, and +the king places great confidence in men of that profession, so that he +will not undertake a journey, nor do any thing whatever of importance, +unless after his wizard has indicated a prosperous hour for the +undertaking. + +The idolaters begin their year on the 1st of March, and the Mahometans +at the instant when the sun enters Aries, as calculated by their +astrologers. From which time the king keeps a festival, called the +_norose_, or nine days, for which time it continues, like that made by +Ahasuerus in the third year of his reign. On this occasion, all his +nobles assemble, bringing great gifts, which he repays with princely +rewards. Being myself present on this occasion, I beheld most incredible +riches, to my amazement, in gold, pearls, precious stones, and many +brilliant vanities. I saw this festival celebrated at Mandoa, where the +Mogul has a most spacious house or palace, larger than any I ever +beheld, in which the many beautiful vaults and arches evince the +exquisite skill of his artists in architecture. At Agra he has a palace, +in which are two large towers, at least ten feet square, covered with +plates of pure gold. + +The walls of his houses have no hangings, on account of the heat, but +are either painted or beautified with a white lime, purer even than that +we term Spanish. The floors are either paved with stone or are made of +lime and sand, like our Paris plaster, and are spread with rich carpets. +None lodge within the King's house but his women and eunuchs, and some +little boys, whom he always keeps about him for a wicked use. He always +eats in private among his women, being served with a great variety of +exquisitely dressed meats, which being proved by his taster, are put +into golden vessels, as they say, covered and sealed up, and brought in +by the eunuchs. He has meats made ready at all hours, and calls for +them at pleasure. These people do not feed freely, as we do, on full +dishes of beef or mutton, but use much rice, boiled up along with pieces +of flesh, or dressed in a variety of ways. They have not many roasted or +baked meats, but stew most of their meat. Among their many dishes, I +shall only notice one, called by them _deupario_. This is made of +venison cut into slices, to which are put onions and sweet herbs, with +some roots, and a little spice and butter, forming the most savoury dish +I ever tasted; and I almost think it is the same dish that Jacob made +ready for his father Isaac when he got his blessing. + +In this kingdom there are no inns or houses of entertainment for +travellers and strangers. But, in the cities and large towns, there are +handsome buildings for their reception, called _serais_, which are not +inhabited, in which any passengers may have rooms freely, but must bring +with them their bedding, cooks, and all other necessaries for dressing +their victuals. These things are usually carried by travellers on +camels, or in carts drawn by oxen; taking likewise tents along with +them, to use when they do not find serais. The inferior people ride on +oxen, horses, mules, camels, or dromedaries, the women riding in the +same manner as the men; or else they use a kind of slight coaches on two +wheels, covered at top, and close behind, but open before and at the +sides, unless when they contain women, in which case they are close all +round. These coaches will conveniently hold two persons, besides the +driver, and are drawn by a pair of oxen, matched in colour, many of them +being white, and not large. The oxen are guided by cords which go +through the middle cartilage of the nose, and so between the horns into +the hand of the driver. The oxen are dressed and harnessed like horses, +and being naturally nimble, use makes them so expert, that they will go +twenty miles a-day or more, at a good pace. The better sort ride on +elephants, or are carried singly on men's shoulders, in a slight thing +called a _palanquin_, like a couch, but covered by a canopy. This would +appear to have been an ancient effeminacy used in Rome, as Juvenal +describes a fat lawyer who filled one of them: + +_Causidici nova, cam venial lectica Mathonis; plena ipso--_ + +They delight much in hawking, and in hunting hares, deer, and other wild +animals. Their dogs of chase somewhat resemble our greyhounds, but are +much less, and do not open when in pursuit of their game. They use +leopards also in hunting, which attain the game they pursue by leaping. +They have a very cunning device for catching wild-fowl, in the following +manner:--A fellow goes into the water, having the skin of any kind of +fowl he wishes to catch, so artificially stuffed, that it seems alive. +Keeping his whole body under water except his face, which is covered by +this counterfeit, he goes among the wild-fowl which swim in the water, +and pulls them under by the legs. They shoot much for their amusement +with bows, which are curiously made of buffaloe's horn, glewed together, +their arrows being made of small canes, excellently headed and +feathered, and are so expert in archery, that they will kill birds +flying. Others take great delight in managing their horses. Though they +have not a quarter of a mile to go, they will either ride on horseback +or be carried, as men of any quality hold it dishonourable to go on foot +any where. + +In their houses, they play much at that most ingenious game which we +call chess, or else at draughts. They have likewise cards, but quite +different from ours. Sometimes they are amused by cunning jugglers, or +mountebanks, who allow themselves to be bitten by snakes which they +carry about in baskets, immediately curing themselves by means of +certain powders which they smell to. They are likewise often amused by +the tricks of apes and monkeys. In the southern parts of Hindoostan, +there are great numbers of large white apes, some of which are as tall +as our largest greyhounds. Some of those birds which make their nests on +trees are much afraid of the apes, and nature has instructed them in a +subtle device to secure themselves, by building their nests on the most +extreme twigs, and hanging them there like purse-nets, so that the apes +cannot possibly come to them. + +Every city or great town in India has markets twice a-day, in the cool +of the morning just after sun-rise, and again in the evening a little +before it sets; and in these they sell almost every thing by weight. In +the heat of the day, every one keeps within doors, where those of any +rank lie on couches, or sit cross-legged on carpets, having servants +about them, who beat the air with fans of stiffened leather, or the +like, to cool them. While thus taking their ease, they often call their +barbers, who tenderly grip and beat upon their arms and other parts of +their bodies, instead of exercise, to stir the blood. This is a most +gratifying thing, and is much used in this hot climate. + +The Mahometans and Hindoos are much to be commended for their +truthfulness as servants; for a stranger may safely travel alone among +them with a great charge of money or goods, all through the country, +having them for his guard, and will never be neglected or injured by +them. They follow their masters on foot, carrying swords and bucklers, +or bows and arrows, for their defence; and so plentiful are provisions +in this country, that one may hire them on very easy terms, as they do +not desire more than five shillings each moon, paid the day after the +change, to provide themselves in all necessaries; and for this small +pittance give diligent and faithful service. Such is their filial piety, +that they will often give the half of these pitiful wages to their +parents, to relieve their necessities, preferring almost to famish +themselves rather than see them want. + +Both among the Mahometans and Hindoos there are many men of most +undaunted courage. The _Baloches_ are of great note on this account +among the Mahometans, being the inhabitants of _Hjykan_, adjoining to +the kingdom of Persia; as also the Patans, taking their denomination +from a province in the kingdom of Bengal.[236] These tribes dare look +their enemies in the face, and maintain the reputation of valour at the +hazard of their lives. Among the many sects of the Hindoos, there is but +one race of warriors, called _Rashbootes_, or Rajaputs, many of whom +subsist by plunder, laying in wait in great troops to surprise poor +passengers, and butchering all who have the misfortune to fall into +their hands. These excepted, all the rest of the natives are in general +pusillanimous, and had rather quarrel than fight, being so poor in +spirit, in comparison with Europeans, that the Mogul often says, +proverbially, That one Portuguese will beat three of them, and one +Englishman three Portuguese. + +[Footnote 236: This is a strange mistake, confounding the city of Patna, +in Bengal, in the east of Hindoostan, with the Patans, a race of +mountaineers between Cabul and Candahar, far to the west of India, +called likewise Afgans, and their country Afghanistan.--E.] + +In regard to arms for war, they have good ordnance, which, so far as I +could learn, were very anciently used in this country.[237] I have +already described the iron pieces carried on elephants. They have +smaller guns for the use of their foot-soldiers, who are somewhat long +in taking aim, but come as near the mark as any I ever saw. All their +pieces are fired with match, and they make excellent gun-powder. They +use also lances, swords, and targets, and bows and arrows. Their swords +are made crooked like faulchions, and very sharp; but, for want of skill +in tempering, will break rather than bend; wherefore our sword-blades, +which will bend and become straight again, are often sold at high +prices. I have seen horsemen in this country, thus accoutered, carrying +as it were a whole armory at once; a good sword by their sides, under +which a sheaf of arrows; on their back a gun fastened with belts, a +buckler on their shoulders; a bow in a case hanging on their left side, +and a good lance in their hand, two yards and a half long, with an +excellent steel head. Yet, for all these weapons, dare he not resist a +man of true courage, armed only with the worst of all these. The armies +in these eastern wars often consist of incredible multitudes, and they +talk of some which have exceeded that we read of in the Bible, which +Zerah, king of Ethiopia, brought against Asia. Their martial music +consists of kettle-drums and long wind-instruments. In their battles, +both sides usually begin with most furious onsets; but, in a short time, +for want of good discipline, they fall into disorder, and one side is +routed with much slaughter. + +[Footnote 237: Vertoman says the Portuguese who deserted at the first +discovery of India, and entered into the service of the native princes, +taught them this art.--_Purch_. + +I have somewhere read, many years ago, but cannot recollect the +authority, "That, when Alexander besieged a certain city in India, the +Brachmans, by the power of magic, raised a cloud of smoke around the +walls, whence broke frequent flashes of lightning, with thunder, and the +thunderbolts slew many of his soldiers." This would infer the very +ancient use of fire-arms of some kind in India.--E.] + +The Mahometans have fair places of worship, which they call _mesquits_, +well built of stone. That side which looks to the westwards is a +close-built wall, while that towards the east is erected on pillars, the +length being from north to south. At the corners of their great mosques, +in the cities, there are high turrets or pinnacles, called _minarets_, +to the tops of which their molahs or priests resort at certain times of +day, proclaiming their prophet in Arabic, in these words,--_Alla illa +Alla, Mahomet resul Alla_; that is, There is no God but God, and Mahomet +is the ambassador of God. This is used instead of bells, which they +cannot endure in their temples, to put religious persons in mind of +their duty. On one occasion, while Mr Coryat was residing in Agra, he +got up into a turret over against the priest, and on hearing these +words, he contradicted him, calling out, in a loud voice,--_La Alla illa +Alla, Hazaret Esa Ebn-Alla_; there is no God but God, and Christ, the +Son of God, is his prophet. He farther added, that Mahomet was an +impostor, in any other country of Asia, in which Mahomet is zealously +followed, this bold attempt had surely forfeited his life, with all the +tortures which cruelty could invent, or tyranny inflict; but in this +country every one is permitted to follow his own religion, and may even +dispute against theirs with impunity. + +In regard to their burials, every Mahometan of quality provides a fair +sepulchre for himself and his family, in his life-time, surrounding a +considerable space of ground with a high wall, and generally in the +neighbourhood of some tank, or else near springs of water, that they may +make pleasant fountains. Within the enclosure, he erects a round or +square tomb, either on pillars or of closed walls, with a door for +entrance. The rest of the enclosure is planted with trees and flowers, +as if they would make the elysian fields of the poets, in which their +souls may repose in delight. They have many such goodly monuments built +in memory of those they esteem as saints, of whom they have an ample +calendar, in these there are lamps continually burning, and thither many +resort in blind devotion, to contemplate the happiness enjoyed by these +_peires_, as they call the holy men. Among many sumptuous piles +dedicated to this use, the most splendid of them all is to be seen at +_Secuadra_, a village three miles from Agra. This was begun by Akbar +Shah, the father of the present king, and finished by his son, the +reigning Mogul. Akbar lies here interred, and Jehanguire Shah means to +be here buried when he dies. + +The molahs, or priests of the Mahometans, employ much of their time as +scribes, doing business for other men, having liberty to marry as well +as the laity, from whom they are no way distinguished by their dress. +Some live retiredly, spending their time in meditation, or in delivering +precepts of morality to the people. They are in roach esteem, as are +another set called _Seids_, who derive their pedigree from Mahomet. The +priests neither read nor preach in the mosques; yet there is a set form +of prayers in Arabic, not understood by most of the people, but which +they repeat as fluently as the molahs. They likewise repeat the name of +God, and that of Mahomet, a certain number of times every day, telling +over their beads, like the misled papists, who seem to regard the number +of prayers more than their sincerity. Before going into their mosques +they wash their feet, and, in entering, put off their shoes. On +beginning their devotions, they stop their ears, and fix their eyes, +that no extraneous circumstances may divert their thoughts, and then +utter their prayers in a soft and still voice, using many words +significantly expressive of the omnipotence, goodness, eternity, and +other attributes of God. Likewise many words full of humility, +confessing their unworthiness with many submissive gestures. While +praying, they frequently prostrate themselves on their faces, +acknowledging that they are burdens upon the earth, poisonous to the +air, and the like, and therefore dare not look up to heaven, but comfort +themselves in the mercy of God, through the intercession of their false +prophet. Many among them, to the shame of us Christians, pray five tunes +a-day, whatever may happen to be their interruptions of pleasure or +profit. Their set times are at the hours of six, nine, twelve, three, +and six, respectively. + +The manner in which they divide the day is quite different from us; as +they divide the day and the night each into four equal parts, which they +denominate _pores_, and these again are each subdivided into eight +smaller parts, called _grees_. [Hence each _pore_ contains three of our +hours, and each _gree_ is equal to 22-1/2 of our minutes.] These are +measured, according to an ancient custom, by means of water, dropping +from one small vessel into another, beside which there always stand +servants appointed for the purpose, who strike with a hammer upon a +concave plate of metal, like the inner portion of a plate, hung by a +wire, thus denoting the _pores_ and _grees_ successively as they +pass.[238] Like the mother and her seven sons, mentioned in the +Maccabees, such is the temperance of many, both among the Mahometans and +Gentiles, that they will rather die than eat or drink of any thing +forbidden by their law. Such meats and drinks as their law allows, they +use only in moderation, to satisfy nature, not to please their +appetites, hating gluttony, and esteeming drunkenness a sin, as it +really is, or a second madness; and indeed their language has only one +word, mest, for a drunkard and a madman. + +[Footnote 238: This device for measuring time is the same with the +_clepsydra_, or water-clocks, of the ancients.--_Purch._] + +They keep yearly a solemn feast, or Lent, which they call _Ram jan_, +[Ramadan] about the month of August, which continues a whole moon; +during which time, those who are strict in their religious observances, +avoid the embraces of their women, and abstain from meat or drink so +long as the sun is above the horizon, but eat after it sets, at their +pleasure. Towards the close of this Lent, or ramadan, they consecrate +one day of mourning, in memory of their departed friends; on which +occasions, I have seen many of the meaner people making bitter +lamentations. Besides this ordinary and stated time of sadness, many +foolish women are in use, oft times in the year, so long as they +survive, to water the graves of their husbands or children with the +tears of affectionate regret. On the night succeeding the day of general +mourning, they light up innumerable lamps, and other lights, which they +set on the sides and tops of their houses, and all other most +conspicuous places, taking no food till these are burnt out. When the +ramadan is entirely ended, the most devout Mahometans assemble at some +noted mosque, where some portion of the _Alcoran_ is publicly read; this +being their holy book, like our Bible, which they never touch without +some mark of reverence. They keep a festival in November, which they +call _Buccaree_, signifying the _ram-feast_; on which occasion they kill +and roast a ram, in memory, as they say, of the ram which redeemed +Ishmael, when about to be sacrificed by his father Abraham. They have +many other feasts or holidays consecrated to Mahomet, and their +_pieres_, or pretended saints. + +They have the books of Moses, whom they name _Moosa curym Alla_, the +righteous of God. Abraham they call _Ibrahim calim Alla_, the faithful +of God. Thus Ishmael is called the true sacrifice of God; David is named +_Dahoode_, the prophet of God; Solomon is _Seliman_, the wisdom of God, +and so forth; all neatly expressed, as the former instances, in short +Arabic epithets. In honour of these our scripture worthies, they +frequently sing songs or ditties of praise; and, besides, all of them, +except those of the ruder sort, when at any time they happen to mention +our Saviour, always call him _Hazaret Eesa_, the Lord Jesus; and ever +speak of him with respect and reverence, saying, that he was a good and +just man, who lived without sin, and did greater miracles than were ever +performed before or since. They even call him _Rhahew Alla_, which +signifies the breath of God, but cannot conceive how he could be the +Son of God, and therefore deny that. Yet the Mahometans look upon us as +unclean, and will neither eat with us, nor of any thing that is cooked +in our vessels. + +There are many men among the Mahometans called _Dervises_, who +relinquish the world, and spend their days in solitude, expecting a +recompence in a better life. The strict and severe penances these men +voluntarily endure, far exceed all those so much boasted of by the +Romanist monks. Some of these live alone on the tops of hills, remote +from all society, spending their lives in contemplation, and will rather +die of famine than move from their cells, being relieved from devotion +by those who dwell nearest them. Some again impose long fasts upon +themselves, till nature be almost exhausted. Many of those whom they +call religious men, wear no garments beyond a mere clout to cover their +shame, and beg for all their provisions, like the mendicant friars of +Europe. These men usually dwell about the outskirts of the cities and +towns, like the man mentioned by our blessed Saviour at the city of the +_Gadarens_, who had devils, and wore no clothes, neither abode in any +house, but dwelt among the tombs. They make little fires during the day, +sleeping at night among the warm ashes, with which they besmear their +bodies. These men never suffer a razor to come upon their heads, and +some of them let their nails grow like to bird's claws, as it is written +of Nebuchadnezzar, when driven out from among the society of men. There +is also a sort of men among them called _mendee_, who often cut and +slash their flesh with knives, like the priests of Baal. I have seen +others, who, from supposed devotion, put such massy fetters of iron on +their legs, that they are hardly able to move, yet walk in that manner +many miles upon pilgrimages, barefooted, upon the parching ground, to +visit the sepulchres of their deluding saints; thus, _tantum religio +potuit suadere malorum_, taking more pains to go to hell than any +Christian that I know does to attain heaven. These do not marry. Such +Mahometans as choose to marry, are allowed four wives by the law of +Mahomet, but they keep as many concubines as they can maintain. The +priests content themselves with one wife. + +Notwithstanding their polygamy, such is the violent jealousy of these +lustful Mahometans, that they will scarcely allow even the fathers and +brothers of their beloved wives or concubines to converse with them, +except in their own presence. Owing to this restraint, it has become +odious for such women as have the reputation of virtue, to be seen at +any time by strangers. If any of them dishonour their husbands beds, or, +being unmarried, are found incontinent, even their own brothers will put +them to death rather than they should escape punishment; and for such +unnatural actions they shall be commended, rather than called in +question. Yet is there full toleration for harlots, who are as little +ashamed of receiving visits as the men are of frequenting their houses. +The women of any fashion are waited upon by eunuchs instead of +women-servants; and these eunuchs are deprived in their youth of every +thing that can provoke jealousy. Their marriages are solemnised in great +pomp. After the molah has joined their hands, with certain ceremonies +and words of benediction, they begin their revels at the first watch of +the night. Whether the man be poor or rich, he mounts on horseback, +attended by his friends, having many _oressets_, or great lights, +carried before him, and accompanied by drums, and wind-instruments of +music, and various pageantry. The woman follows with her friends, in +covered coaches. And having thus paraded through the principal places of +the city or town, they return home and partake of a banquet, the men and +women being in separate apartments. They are mostly married at the age +of twelve or thirteen, the matches being made by their mothers. + +§4. _Of the Sects, Opinions, Rites, Priests, and other Circumstances of +the Hindoo Religion; with other Observations_. + +The Hindoos[239] are distributed into eighty and four several sects, all +of which differ materially in opinions. This has often filled me with +wonder; but I know that they are all deluded by Satan, who is the father +of division. Their illiterate priests are called _Bramins_, being the +same with the _Brachmanni_ of the ancients; and, for aught I could +learn, are so sottishly ignorant and unsteady, that they know not what +they believe. They have little round-built temples, which they call +_pagodas_, in which are images in most monstrous shapes, which they +worship. Some of them dream, of Elysian fields, to which their souls +pass over a Styx or Acheron, and there assume new bodies. Others hold +that ere long, this world shall have an end, after which they shall live +here again, upon a new earth. They talk of four books which were sent +them about 6000 years ago by their prophet _Ram_, two of which were +sealed up and might not be opened, the other two being read by the +Bramins only. They say that there are seven orbs, above which is the +seat of God; and they hold that God knoweth not of petty things, or, if +he doth, regardeth them not. They circumscribe God in place or +dimensions, alleging that he may be seen, but far off as in a mist, and +not near or clearly. They believe in the existence of devils or evil +spirits; but that they are so bound in chains, as to be incapable of +doing hurt. They call man Adam, from the first man of that name; whose +wife, as they say, when tempted with the forbidden fruit, swallowed it +down; but, as her husband was about to do the same, it was stopped in +his throat by the hand of God: Whence men have a protuberance in that +part, which we call the _pomum adami_, which women have not. + +[Footnote 239: By Terry, the Hindoos are uniformly denominated the +_Gentiles_, a word of vague and general meaning, merely signifying +idolaters, or unbelievers, literally the nations, as contradistinguished +from the Jews. By some authors, the natives of Hindoostan are called +Gentoos, a word of uncertain origin. The term of Hindoo seems the more +appropriate name; at least it has now become universal.--E.] + +As anciently among the Jews, the priesthood is hereditary with this +people; every son of a Bramin being a priest, and marries with the +daughter of a Bramin. So also among all the Hindoos, the men take their +wives among the daughters of those who are of the same tribe, sect, and +occupation, with their own fathers. Thus the son of a merchant marries a +merchant's daughter, and every man's son that lives by his labour, +marries the daughter of one of the same profession with himself, so that +they never advance themselves to higher situations. The Hindoos take but +one wife, of whom they are not so fearful as are the Mahometans of their +numerous women, for they are suffered to go abroad. They are always +married very young, at six or seven years of age, their parents making +the contracts, and they come together when twelve years old. Their +nuptials are celebrated with as much pomp and jollity as those of the +Mahometans. The habits of the Hindoos differ little from those of the +Mahometans, already described; but many of their women wear rings on +their toes, and therefore go barefooted. They have likewise broad rings +of brass, or of more valuable metal, according to their rank and wealth, +which they wear about the small of their legs, being made to put off and +on. These seem to resemble the tinkling ornaments about the feet, +mentioned by the prophet Isaiah, or the ornaments of the legs, anciently +in use among the Jewish women. They have also such on their arms. The +laps of their ears are pierced when young, and the hole is daily +stretched and widened, by things put in on purpose, so that it at length +becomes large enough to hold a ring as broad as a little saucer, made +hollow in its edges to contain the flesh. Both men and women wash their +bodies every day before they eat, and they sit entirely naked at their +food, excepting only the covering of modesty. This outward washing, as +they think, tends to cleanse them from sin, not unlike the Pharisees in +scripture, who would not eat with unwashed hands. Hence, they ascribe a +certain divine influence to rivers, but above all to the Ganges, daily +flocking thither in great companies, and throwing in pieces of gold and +silver, according to their devotion or abilities, after which they wash +themselves in the sacred stream. Both men and women paint their +foreheads, or other parts of their faces, with red or yellow spots. + +In regard to their grosser opinions, they do not believe in the +resurrection of the flesh, and therefore burn the bodies of their dead, +near some river if they can, into which they strew the ashes. Their +widows never marry again; but, after the loss of their husbands, cut +their hair close off, and spend all their remaining life in neglect; +whence it happens, that many young women are ambitious to die with +honour, as they esteem it, throwing themselves for lore of their +departed husbands into the flames, as they think, of martyrdom. +Following their dead husband to the pile, and there embracing his +corpse, they are there consumed in the same fire. This they do +voluntarily, and without compulsion, their parents, relations, and +friends joyfully accompanying them; and, when the pile of this hellish +sacrifice begins to burn, all the assembled multitude shout and make a +noise, that the screams of the tortured living victims may not be heard. +This abominable custom is not very much unlike the custom of the +Ammonites, who made their children pass through the fire to Moloch, +during which they caused certain tabrets or drums to sound, whence the +place was called _Tophet_, signifying a tabret. There is one sect among +the Hindoos, called _Parsees_, who neither burn nor inter their dead. +They surround certain pieces of ground with high walls, remote from +houses or public roads, and there deposit their dead, wrapped in sheets, +which thus have no other tombs but the maws of ravenous fowls.[240] + +[Footnote 240: These Parsees, called _Parcees_ in the Pilgrims, and +Guebres by other writers, are a remnant of the ancient Persians, who are +fire-worshippers, or followers of Zerdust, the Zoroaster of the +Greeks.--E.] + +The Hindoos are, generally speaking, an industrious race; being either +cultivators of the ground, or otherwise diligently employed in various +occupations. Among them there are many curious artificers, who are the +best imitators in the world, as they will make any thing new very +exactly after a pattern. The Mahometans, on the contrary, are generally +idle, being _all for to morrow_, a common saying among them, and live by +the labours of the Hindoos. Some of these poor deluded idolaters will +eat of nothing which has had life, feeding on grain, herbs, milk, +butter, cheese, and sweet-meats, of which last they have various kinds, +the best and most wholesome of which is green ginger remarkably well +preserved. Some tribes eat fish, and of no other living thing. The +Rajaput tribe eat swine's flesh, which is held in abomination by the +Mahometans. Some will eat of one kind of flesh, and some of another; but +all the Hindoos universally abstain from beef owing to the reverence +they entertain for cows; and therefore give large sums yearly to the +Mogul, besides his other exactions, as a ransom for the lives of these +sacred animals. Whence, though they have other and good provisions in +abundance, we meet with very little meat in that country. + +The most tender-hearted among the idolaters are called _Banians,_ who +hold the _metempsychosis_ of Pythagoras as a prime article of their +faith, believing that the souls of the best men and women, when freed +from the prison of their human bodies, transmigrate into the bodies of +cows, which they consider as the best of all creatures. They hold that +the souls of the wicked go into the bodies of viler beasts; as the souls +of gluttons into swine, those of the voluptuous and incontinent into +apes and monkies; the souls of the cruel, furious, and revengeful, into +lions, tigers, and wolves; the souls of the envious into serpents; and +so forth, according to their qualities and dispositions; transmigrating +successively from one to another of the same kind, _ad infinitum;_ and, +by consequence, believing in the eternal duration of the world. Thus, +according to them, there does not exist even a silly fly but is actuated +by a soul formerly human, considering these to have formerly belonged to +light women; and so incorrigible are their sottish opinions, that they +cannot be persuaded out of them by any reasoning. Owing to these +opinions, they will not put to death the most offensive animals, not +even the most venemous snakes, saying, that it is their nature to do +harm, and that man is gifted with reason to shun these noxious +creatures, but not at liberty to destroy them. + +Many men devote their fortunes to works of charity, as in building +_serais,_ or lodging-houses for travellers, digging wells, or +constructing tanks near highways, that the travellers may have water; +and where such cannot be had, they will hire poor men to sit by the +way-sides, and offer water to the passengers. The day of rest among the +Hindoos is Thursday, as Friday is among the Mahometans, Saturday with +the Jews, and Sunday with the Christians.[241] They have many solemn +festivals, and they make pilgrimages, among which the most famous are +_Nagracut_ and _Syba,_ formerly mentioned; where, if Mr Coryat may be +believed, who says he carefully observed the same, people cut off part +of their tongues out of devotion. It were easy to enlarge on this +subject, but I will not any farther describe their stupid idolatry. The +sum of the whole is, that both the Hindoos and Mahometans ground all +their opinions on tradition, not on reason, and are content to perish +with their fore-fathers, out of preposterous zeal and fond perverseness, +never rightly considering the grounds of their belief. + +[Footnote 241: Monday is the day of rest with the people of Pegu. In +Java, each individual keeps that day holy on which he has begun some +great work.--_Purch._] + +Both the Mahometans and Hindoos are under subjection to the Great Mogul, +the term _Mogul_ signifying a circumcised man, so that Great Mogul means +the Chief of the Circumcision. The present king is the ninth in lineal +descent from that famous eastern conqueror, whom we name Tamerlane, and +who in their histories is named Timor. Towards the close of his life, he +had the misfortune to fall from his horse, which made him halt during +the remainder of his days, whence he was called Timur-lang, or Timur the +lame. The emperor styles himself The King of Justice, the Light of the +Law of Mahomet, and the Conqueror of the World. He himself judges and +determines on all matters of importance which occur near his residence, +judging according to allegations and proofs, by his own sense of right. +The trials are conducted quickly, and the sentences speedily executed, +culprits being hanged, beheaded, impaled, torn by dogs, destroyed by +elephants, bitten by serpents, or other devices, according to the nature +of the crimes; the executions being generally in the public +market-place. The governors of provinces and cities administer justice +in a similar manner. I could never hear of any written law, the will of +the king and his substitutes being the law. His vicegerents are not +allowed to continue long in one place, lest they acquire popularity, and +are therefore usually removed yearly. They receive the letters of the +king with every possible indication of respect. They look to receive +presents from all who have occasion to apply to them; and, if not often +gratified with these, will ask for them, and will even send back such as +they do not approve, demanding better to be substituted. The cadi has +power to imprison debtors and sureties, who are bound by written deeds; +and men in power, for payment of debts due to them, will often sell the +persons, wives, and children of their debtors, which is warranted by the +customs of the land. + +The king appears in public three times every day. His first appearance +is at sun-rise, from a bow-window looking; towards the east, where great +multitudes assemble to salute him, or give him the _salam,_ calling out +_padishah salamet,_ which signifies Live, O King! At noon he again sits +in public seeing his elephants fight, or some other pastimes. A little +before sun-set, he shews himself a third time, at a window looking to +the west, whence he retires amid the sound of drums and wind-instruments +of music, the acclamations of the people adding to the noise. At any of +these three appearances, all who have any suit to him hold up their +petitions to be seen, and are heard in their own causes. Between seven +and nine in the evening, he again sits in private, attended by his +nobles. + +No subject of this empire holds any lands by inheritance, neither have +they any titles but such as depend on the will of the king. Owing to +this, many of the grandees live up fully to the extent of their means. +Merchants also, and others, are very careful to conceal their wealth, +lest they be made spunges. Some small means of living are allowed by the +king to the sons of his great men, which they can never make better, +unless they succeed to the favour enjoyed by their fathers. His pensions +are reckoned by the numbers of horsemen allotted to each; and of these +he pays a million in the whole extent of his empire, to the amount of +twenty-five pounds being yearly allowed for each horseman, which are +drawn from lands, specified in the particular grants or commissions. +There are about twenty of his courtiers who have each the pay of 5000 +horse; others of 4000, 3000, 2000, and so downwards. He who has the pay +of 5000, is bound to have 2000 always on foot ready for service, and so +in like proportion for all others. This absolute dependence renders +them dissolute parasites. When the Mogul gives advancement to any one, +he adds a new name or title, as Pharaoh did to Joseph. These names or +titles are very significant; as _Mahobet Khan_, the beloved lord; _Khan +Jahaun,_ the lord of my heart; _Khan Allum,_ the lord of the world, &c. + +The principal officers of state are, the treasurer, the master of the +eunuchs, who is steward and comptroller of the household, the secretary, +the master of the elephants, the tent-master, and the keeper of the +wardrobe. The subordinate titles of honour are Khan, Mirza, Omrah or +Captain, Haddee, which last is a soldier or horseman. Gorgeous apparel +is in a great measure prohibited, owing to the great heat of the sun; +even the Great Mogul himself being usually clothed in a garment of pure +white calico or fine muslin. Blue, being the colour of mourning, may not +be worn in his presence, neither the name of death pronounced in his +hearing. This circumstance is usually expressed by some circumlocution, +as that such a person has sacrificed himself at the feet of his majesty. + +Owing to the great heat of this country, there is but little demand for +English cloth, which is almost only employed for the housings of +elephants and horses, and the linings of coaches. This sovereign +assuredly exceeds all others in the splendour of his thrones, and the +variety and richness of his jewels. In his palace at Agra, he has a +throne upon a raised platform, to which he ascends by several steps, on +the top of which are four figures of lions of massy silver, gilded and +set with precious stones, and supporting a dome or canopy of pure gold. +I may mention, that when I was at his court, he had a tame lion which +went up and down at liberty, as harmless as a dog. The jewels with which +he daily adorns his head, neck, and arms, and the hilts of his sword and +dagger, are rich and valuable beyond all computation. On his birthday, +which happens on the 1st of September, he being now sixty years of age, +he is weighed, and an account thereof carefully noted down by his +physicians, who thereby guess at his bodily condition.[242] + +[Footnote 242: See of these and other things, formerly stated, in the +Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, and therefore here omitted. _Purch._] + +The following are parts of two letters from the Great Mogul to his +majesty King James I. translated out of Persian, and sent through Sir +Thomas Roe, one written a year before the other. What followed in both +letters, was merely complimentary assurances of his love for the +English. These letters were rolled up and covered with cloth of gold, +the covering being sealed up at both ends, which is the fashion in that +country. Copies were sent to the lord ambassador, from which these +specimens were translated out of the Persian language. + + * * * * * + +"When your majesty shall open this letter, let your royal heart be fresh +as a sweet garden. Let all people make lowly reverence at your gate, and +may your throne be exalted among the kings of the prophet Jesus. May +your majesty be the greatest of all monarchs; and may others draw +counsel and wisdom from you, as from a fountain, that the law of the +divine Jesus may revive and flourish under your protection. Your letters +of love and friendship, and the tokens of your affection towards me, I +have received by the hands of your ambassador, Sir Thomas Roe, who well +deserves to be your trusted servant, and who delivered them to me in a +happy hour. Upon them mine eyes were so fixed, that I could not easily +remove them to any other object, and have accepted them with much joy," +&c.--The other began as follows: + + * * * * * + +"How gracious is your majesty, whose greatness God preserve and prosper. +As upon a rose in a garden of pleasure, so are mine eyes fixed upon your +majesty. May God maintain your greatness, so that your monarchy may +prosper and increase, that you may obtain all your desires, worthy the +greatness of your renown. As your heart is noble and upright, so may God +give you a prosperous reign, because you powerfully defend the majesty +of Jesus, which may God render yet more flourishing, having been +confirmed by miracles," &c. + + * * * * * + +We travelled two years with the Great Mogul, who was in progress +through his dominions, moving only during the temperate months, between +October and April. On this occasion, I am confident that the _leskar_, +or camp, contained not less than 300,000 persons, including men, women, +and children, besides elephants, horses, and other beasts, that were fed +upon grain; yet we never experienced any scarcity of provisions, not +even in our nineteen days journey through a wilderness, between Mandoa +and _Amadavar_, [Ahmedabad.] On this occasion, a road was cut for us +through the forest. The tents of the leskar were of various colours, +being regularly arranged, and represented a large and splendid city. The +king's tents were red, and raised on poles to a great height, being +placed in the middle of the camp, and covering a great extent of ground; +the whole of the royal quarter being encircled by _canats_, or walls, +made of red calico, held up by canes at every breadth, and standing +upright about nine feet high, which was guarded all round by soldiers +every night. + +The king removed ten or twelve miles every day, more or less according +to the convenience of procuring water. His wives and women of all sorts, +which are not less than a thousand, all lodged and provided for in his +tents, were carried along with the leskar, some in palanquins, others +upon elephants, or in cradles or panniers slung upon dromedaries, all +closely covered up that they might not be seen, and attended upon by +eunuchs. In the choice of his wives, the Great Mogul respects fancy more +than honour, not seeking affinity with neighbouring princes, but to +please his eye at home. _Noormahal_, the best beloved among his wives, +whose name signifies the _Light of the Court_, was of mean origin, but +has since advanced her friends to high rank and employments, and in a +manner commands the commander of the empire, by engrossing his whole +affections. The king and his great men continue to maintain their women, +but little affect them after thirty years old. + +Notwithstanding the multitude of his women, the Great Mogul has only six +children, five sons and a daughter. All his sons are styled sultans, or +princes. The eldest is Sultan _Cursero_, the second, Sultan _Parrveis_, +the third, Sultan _Caroon_, the fourth, Sultan _Shahar_, and the +youngest, Sultan _Tauct_.[243] The name of this last signifies a +_Throne_; and he was so named by the king, because he was informed of +his birth at the time when he got quiet possession of the throne. The +eldest-born son of one of his legitimate wives has right to inherit the +throne, and has a title signifying the _Great Brother_. Although the +others are not put to death as with the Turks, yet it is observed that +they seldom long survive their fathers, being commonly employed on some +dangerous expedition. + +[Footnote 243: These names seem to have been written by Terry from the +ear. By others, they are respectively named Cusero, Parvis, Churrum, +Shahar, and Taucht.--E.] + +Akbar Shah, the father of the reigning Mogul, had threatened to +disinherit him, for some abuse to _Anar-Kalee_, his most beloved wife, +whose name signifies pomegranate kernel; but on his death-bed he +restored him to the succession. Akbar was wont, upon taking any +displeasure at one of his grandees, to give them pills to purge their +souls from their bodies, and is said to have come by his death in the +following manner. Intending to give one of these pills to a nobleman who +had incurred his displeasure, and meaning to take at the same time a +cordial pill himself, while he was cajoling the destined victim with +flattering speeches, he, by mistake, took the poisoned pill himself, and +gave the cordial to the nobleman. This carried him off in a few days, by +a mortal flux of blood.[244] + +[Footnote 244: Neque enim lex justior ulla est, quam necis artifices +arte perire sua.--_Purch._] + +The character of Jehanguire, the reigning Mogul, seems strangely +compounded of opposite extremes. He is at times excessively cruel, and +at other times extremely mild. He is himself much given to excess in +wine, yet severely punishes that fault in others. His subjects know not +what it is to disobey his commands, forgetting the natural bonds of +private life, even those between father and son, in the fulfilment of +their public duty. He daily relieves numbers of the poor; and often, as +a mark of his filial piety, is in use to carry the palanquin of his +mother on his own shoulders. He speaks with much reverence of our +Saviour, but is offended by his cross and poverty, deeming them +incompatible with his divine Majesty, though told that his humility was +on purpose to subdue the pride of the world. + +All religions are tolerated, and even their priests are held in good +esteem. I used often to receive from the Mogul the appellation of +_Father_, with many other gracious words, and had a place assigned me +among his nobles. The jesuits are not only admitted into his presence, +but encouraged by many gifts, and are permitted to convert the subjects, +who do not on that event lose their favour at court. On one occasion, +the Mogul put the sincerity of a convert to a severe trial. Having used +many threatenings to induce him to abandon his new faith, and finding +him undaunted, he tried by flatteries and high promises to draw him +back; but these also being unavailing, he bade him continue a Christian, +and dismissed him with a reward; saying, if he had been able to terrify +or cajole him from his religion, he would have made him a terrible +example for all waverers. + +When I was in this country, the chief jesuit residing at the court of +the Mogul, was Francisco Corsi, a Florentine by birth, who acted +likewise as agent for the Portuguese. I wish I could confirm the reports +they have made of conversions; but the real truth is, that they have +merely spilt the water of baptism on the faces of a few, working on the +necessities of some poor men, who from want of means to live, with which +the jesuits supplied them, have been persuaded to wear crucifixes, but +who, for want of instruction, are only Christians in name. Of these few +mendicants, or so called by Christians, I noticed that five of them +would beg in the name of Maria, for one who asked in the name of Jesus. +I also desired to have put my hands to the holy work, but found extreme +difficulty in the way, owing both to the Mahometan laxity in regard to +the use of women, and the debauched lives of some unchristian +Christians.--May he who hath the key of David open their eyes, and in +his good time send labourers into this vineyard. _Amen_. + + + + +SECTION VIII. + +JOURNEY OF THOMAS CORYAT BY LAND, FROM JERUSALEM TO THE COURT OF THE +GREAT MOGUL.[245] + +INTRODUCTION. + + +Without proposing to follow this singularly bold English traveller and +whimsical writer, in all his _crudities_, as he has quaintly termed his +own writings, it has seemed proper to give some abbreviated extracts of +his observations, which may serve in some measure to illustrate those of +Sir Tomas Roe and the Reverend Edward Terry.--E. + +[Footnote 245: Purch. Pilgr. I. 607. In regard to this short article, +see introduction to the immediately preceding Section.--E.] + +§1. _Letter from Ajimeer, the Court of the Great Mogul, to Mr L. +Whitaker, dated in the Year 1615_. + +My last letter to you was from _Zobah_, as it is called by the prophet +Samuel, B. II. ch. viii. v. 3. now named Aleppo, the principal emporium +of all Syria, or rather of the eastern world; which was, I think, about +fifteen months ago. I returned from Jerusalem to Aleppo, where I +remained three months afterwards, and then departed in a caravan bound +for Persia. Passing the river Euphrates, the chiefest of the rivers +which irrigated the terrestrial paradise, when about four days journey +from Aleppo, I entered into Mesopotamia, or Chaldea. Hence, in two days +journey, I reached _Ur_ of the Chaldees, where Abraham was born, a very +delicate and pleasant city.[246] I remained here four days; and in other +four days journey reached the Tigris, which I also passed, at a place +where it was so shallow that it only reached to the calf of my leg, so +that I waded over a-foot. I then entered into the greater Armenia; and +thence into lower Media, and resided six days in its metropolis, +formerly called _Ecbatana_, the summer residence of Cyrus the Great, now +called Tauris. More woeful ruins of a city I never beheld, excepting +those of Troy and of Cyzicum in Natolia. + +[Footnote 246: Probably Orfa in Diarbekir is here meant.--E.] + +From that place I went to _Cashbin_, called by Strabo, _Arsacia_, in +higher Media, once the residence of the Tartar prince; four days journey +from the Caspian Sea. From Cashbin, I went in twenty-three days to +_Ispahan_ in Parthia, the residence of the king of Persia; but while I +was there, he was in _Gurgistan_, [Georgia,] ransacking the poor +Christians of that country with fire and sword. I remained two months at +Ispahan, whence I travelled with a caravan to the eastern India, passing +four months and several days in travelling from that city, through part +of Persia proper, and a large extent of the noble and renowned India, to +the goodly city of _Lahore_. This is one of the largest cities in the +world, being, at the least, sixteen miles in circuit, and larger even +than Constantinople. Twelve days before coming to Lahore, I passed over +the famous river Indus, which is as broad again as our Thames at London, +having its original from the mountain of Caucassus, so ennobled by +ancient poets and historians, both Greek and Latin. + +When about midway between Ispahan and Lahore, just about the frontiers +between Persia and India, I met Sir Robert Shirley and his lady, +travelling from the court of the Mogul to that of Persia. They were +gallantly furnished for their journey, and shewed me, to my great +satisfaction, both my books, very neatly kept, and promised to shew +them, especially my itinerary, to the king of Persia, and to interpret +some of the principal contents to him in Turkish, that I may have the +more gracious access to him at my return. Besides other rarities which +they carried with them, they had two elephants and eight antelopes, +being the first of either I had ever seen. But afterwards, when I came +to the Mogul's, court, I saw many. They intended to present these +animals to the king of Persia. Both Sir Robert and his lady used me with +much respect; especially his lady, who presented me with forty shillings +in Persian money; and they seemed joyful at meeting me, promising to +bring me into good grace with the king of Persia, as I mean, with God's +help, to return through Persia to Aleppo. + +From Lahore, I travelled in twenty days to another goodly city named +Agra, through such a beautiful and level country as I had never seen +before. In this way, from the town's end of Lahore to the skirts of +Agra, we had a row of trees on both sides of the road, the most +incomparable avenue I ever beheld. Some ten days journey from Lahore +towards Agra, but about ten miles off the road on the left hand, there +is a mountain, the inhabitants of which have a singular custom, all the +brothers of one family having but one wife among them, so that one women +sometimes has six or seven husbands. The same is related by Strabo +concerning the inhabitants of Arabia Felix. Agra is a very great city, +but in every respect much inferior to Lahore. Here the Mogul used always +to keep his court, till within these two years. + +From Agra I went in ten days to the Mogul's court, at a town called +Asmere, [Ajimeer,] where I found an English. Cape merchant with nine +more of our countrymen, residing there in the way of trade for our East +India Company. In. my journey from Jerusalem to the court of the Great +Mogul, I spent fifteen months and some days, travelling all the way +a-foot, having been so great a _propatetic_, or walker forwards on foot, +as I doubt if you ever heard of the like; for the whole way, from +Jerusalem to Ajimeer, contains 2700 English miles. My whole +perambulation of the greater Asia is likely to extend almost to 6000 +miles, by the time I have returned back through Persia, by Babylon and +Nineveh to Cairo in Egypt, and thence down the Nile to Alexandria, when +I propose, with God's blessing, to embark for Christendom. + +The reigning Great Mogul is named Selim.[247] He is fifty-three years of +age, his birth-day having been celebrated with wonderful magnificence +since my arrival. He was that day weighed in a pair of golden scales, +which by great chance I saw that same day, the opposite scale being +filled with as much gold as counterpoised his weight, and this is +afterwards distributed among the poor. This custom is observed every +year. His complexion is of an olive colour, something between white and +black; being of a seemly stature, but somewhat corpulent. His dominions +are very extensive, being about 4000 English miles in circumference, +nearly answerable to the compass of the Turkish territories; or, if the +Mogul kingdom be any way inferior in size to that empire, it is more +than equally endowed with a fertile soil beyond that of any other +country, and in having its territory connected together in one goodly +continent, within which no other prince possesses one single foot of +land. The yearly revenue of the Mogul extends to forty millions of +crowns, of six shillings each, while that of the Turk does not exceed +fifteen millions, as I was credibly informed in Constantinople, nor that +of the Sophy five millions, as I learnt at Ispahan. It is said that the +present Great Mogul is not circumcised, in which he differs from all +other Mahometan sovereigns. + +[Footnote 247: He was Sultan Selim before his accession to the throne, +but was afterward known by the new name of Jehunguire.--E.] + +The Great Mogul speaks with much revrence of our Saviour, naming him +_Hazaret Eesa_, that is to say, the Great Prophet Jesus.[248] He +likewise uses all Christians, and especially the English, with more +benevolence than does any other Mahometan prince. He keeps many wild +beasts, such as lions, elephants, leopards, bears, antelopes, and +unicorns, [rhinoceroses,] of which I saw two at his court, the strangest +beasts in the world. They were brought out of Bengal, a kingdom in his +dominions of most wonderful fertility, above four months journey from +this place, the mid-land parts of which are watered by various channels +and branches of the famous river Ganges. I have not yet seen that +country, but mean to visit it, God willing, before my departure, the +nearest part of it being only about twelve days journey from hence. + +[Footnote 248: The Persian word _Hasaret_, here erroneously rendered +Great Prophet, seems to signify literally _face_ or _presence_, and is +metaphorically used as a term of highest dignity, of which an instance +occurs in the present section, used by Coryat himself in addressing the +Great Mogul--E.] + +Twice every week elephants are made to fight before the Mogul, forming +the bravest spectacle that can be imagined, many of them being thirteen +feet and a half in height, and they jostle together as though they were +two little mountains; and were they not separated in the midst of their +fighting, by means of certain fire-works, they would exceedingly hurt +and gore each other, by their murderous tusks. The Mogul is said to keep +30,000 elephants, at a most enormous expence; and in feeding them, +together with his lions and other beasts, he expends an incredible sum +of money, being at the least 10,000 pounds sterling daily. I have myself +rode upon an elephant since I came to this court, meaning in my next +book to have my effigies represented in that form. This king keeps a +thousand women for his own use, the chiefest of whom, called Normal, +(Noormahal) is his queen. + +In my ten months journey between Aleppo and this court, I spent just +three pounds sterling, yet fared reasonably every day; victuals being so +cheap in some of the countries through which I travelled, that I often +lived competently for one penny a-day. Of that three pounds, I was +actually cozened out of ten shillings, by certain evil Christians of the +Armenian nation; so that in reality I only expended fifty shillings in +all that time. I have been in a city of this country called +_Detee_,[249] where Alexander the Great joined battle with Porus king of +India, and defeated him; and where, in memory of his victory, he caused +erect a brazen pillar, which remains there to this day. At this time I +have many irons in the fire, as I am learning the Persian, Turkish, and +Arabic languages, having already acquired the Italian. I have been +already three months at the court of the Great Mogul, and propose, God +willing, to remain here five months longer, till I have got these three +languages; after which I propose to visit the river Ganges, and then to +return to the court of Persia. + +[Footnote 249: This is obviously a misprint for Delee, meaning Delhi; +but it is more probable that Alexander never was beyond the Punjab.--E.] + +In the course of my journey, I was robbed of my money, but not of all, +having some concealed in certain secret corners. This was done at the +city of Diarbekir in Mesopotatamia, by a Turkish horse soldier, whom +they call a _spahee_. Since my arrival here, there was sent to this king +the richest present I ever heard of. It consisted of various things, the +whole amounting to the value of ten of their lacks, a lack being £10,000 +sterling. Part of this present consisted of thirty-one elephants, two of +which were more gorgeously adorned than any thing I ever saw, or shall +see in the course of my life. They had each four massy chains all of +beaten gold, around their bodies, with two chains of the same about +their legs, furniture for their buttocks of the same rich material, and +two golden lions on their heads. + +§2. _Letter from Agra, the Capital of the Great Mogul, to his Mother, +dated 31st October, 1616_. + +Most dear and well-beloved Mother, + +This city is the metropolis of the whole dominions of the Great Mogul, +and is at the distance of ten days journey from Ajimeer, whence I +departed on the 12th September this year, after having abode there +twelve months and sixty days. This my long stay in one place, was for +two principal causes; one being to learn the languages of these +countries through which I am to pass between this country and +Christendom, namely, Persian, Turkish, and Arabic, which I have +competently attained to by labour and industry, being as available to me +as money, and the chiefest, or rather the only means to get me money if +I should happen to be in want; and, secondly, that, by the help of the +Persian, I might get myself access to the Mogul, and be able to express +my mind unto him about what I proposed to lay before him. During all +this time, I abode in the house of the English merchants, my dear +countrymen, not expending any money at all for lodging, diet, washing, +or any other thing. + +I attained to a reasonable skill in the Persian tongue, by earnest study +in a few months, so that I made an oration to the king in that +language, before many of his nobles; and afterwards discoursed with him +very readily. The copy of this speech I have sent you, as a novelty, +though the language may seem strange and uncouth to an Englishman; and I +have sent you herewith a translation, which you may shew along with the +Persian original to some of my learned friends of the clergy, and also +of the laity, who may take some pleasure in reading so rare and unusual +a tongue. The Persian is this that follows: + +_Hazaret Aallum-pennah, Salamet: fooker Darceish, ce jehaun-gesht +hastam; ke mia emadam az wellageti door, yanne as muik Ingliz-stan, ke +kessanion pesheen mushacar cardand,_ _ke wellageti mazcoor der akeri +magrub bood, ke mader hamma jezzaereti dunia ast, &c._[250]--The English +of it is this: + +"Lord protector of the world, all hail! I am a poor traveller and +world-seer, who am come here from a far country called England, which +ancient historians thought to have been situated in the farthest bounds +of the west, and which is the queen of all the islands in the world. The +causes of my coming hither are four. First, that I might behold the +blessed countenance of your majesty, whose great fame has resounded over +all Europe, and through all the Mahometan countries. When I heard of the +fame of your majesty, I made all possible haste hither, and cheerfully +endured the labour of travelling, that I might see your glorious court. +Secondly, I was desirous of seeing your majesty's elephants, which kind +of beasts I have not seen in any other country. Thirdly, that I might +see your famous river the Ganges, the captain of all the rivers in the +world. Fourthly, to entreat your majesty, that you would vouchsafe to +grant me your most gracious phirmaund, that I may travel into the +country of Tartaria to the city of Samarcand, to visit the blessed +sepulchre of the _Lord of the Corners_,[251] whose fame, by reason of +his wars and victories, is published over the whole world, so that +perhaps he is not altogether so famous in his own country of Tartary as +in England. I have a strong desire to see the sepulchre of the Lord of +the Corners for this cause, that, when in Constantinople, I saw a +notable old building in a pleasant garden near the said city, where the +Christian emperor, Emanuel, made a sumptuous banquet to the Lord of the +Corners, after he had taken Sultan Bajazet in a great battle near the +city of Brusa, when the Lord of the Corners bound Sultan Bajazet in +golden fetters, and put him into an iron cage. These causes have induced +me to travel thus far from my native country, having come a-foot through +Turkey and Persia into this country, my pilgrimage having extended so +three thousand miles, with much labour and toil, such as no mortal man +hath ever yet performed, to see the blessed countenance of your majesty, +since the first day of your being inaugurated in your imperial throne." + +[Footnote 250: The whole discourse, of which the following paragraph in +the text is the translation, is contained in the Pilgrims: But doubting +its accuracy, as that book is most incorrectly printed throughout, the +editor requested the favour of the late learned professor of oriental +languages in the University of Edinburgh, Dr Alexander Murray, to revise +and correct this first sentence, which he most readily did, adding the +following literal translation: "Presence, [or face.] of the +world--protector, salutation to thee: A poor dervish and world-wanderer +I am; that I have come from a kingdom far, to-wit, from the kingdom of +Ingliz-stan, which historians ancient, relation have made, that kingdom +said, in the end of the west was, which the mother of every island of +the world is," &c.] + +[Footnote 251: This is the title given to Tamerlane in this country, in +the Persian language, meaning that he was lord over the four corners of +the earth, that is, the highest and supreme monarch of the +world.--_Purch._] + +When I had ended my speech, I conversed with him for a short space in +Persian, when, among other things, he told me that he could do me no +service in regard to my proposed journey to Samarcand, as there was no +intimacy between him and the princes of the Tartars, so that his +commendatory letters would avail me little. He also added, that the +Tartars bore so deadly a hate against all Christians, that they would +certainly kill any who might venture into their country, wherefore he +earnestly dissuaded me from this proposed journey, as I valued my life +and welfare. At last, he concluded his discourse by throwing down to me, +from a window in which he stood, that looked into the street, an hundred +pieces of silver, worth two shillings each or ten pounds in all, which +were thrown into a sheet hanging by the four corners. + +I had conducted this affair so secretly, by the help of the Persian +which I had learnt, that neither our English ambassador, nor any other +of my countrymen, excepting one special and private friend, knew any +thing at all about the matter till I had thoroughly accomplished my +design. For I well knew, if the ambassador had got the smallest notice +of my purpose, that he would have counteracted me, as indeed he +signified to me after I had effected my purpose, alledging that this +might redound to the discredit of our nation, for one of our country to +present himself in that poor and beggarly manner before the king, to +crave money from him by flattery. But I answered our ambassador so +resolutely, that he was glad to let me alone. Indeed, I never had more +need of money in all my life than at this time, having only to the value +of twenty shillings remaining, owing to my having been stripped of +almost all my money by a miscreant Turk, in a city called _Imaret_, in +Mesopotamia. + +After my interview with the Mogul, I went to visit a certain noble and +generous Christian of the Armenian nation, two days journey from court, +to observe certain remarkable matters at that place; and, by means of my +knowledge of the Persian language, he made me very welcome, entertaining +me with much civility and kindness; and, at my departure, gave me very +bountifully twenty pieces of the same coin as the king had done, worth +forty shillings of our money. About ten days after this, I departed from +Ajimeer, the court of the Great Mogul, to resume my pilgrimage, after my +long rest of fourteen months, proposing to go back into Persia. On this +occasion, our ambassador gave me a gold piece of this king's coin, worth +twenty-four shillings, which I shall save till my arrival in England, if +it be possible. I have thus received in benevolences, since I came into +this country, twenty marks sterling,[252] bating two shillings and +eight-pence, besides £1:13:4 sterling, in Persian money, from Lady +Shirley, upon the confines of Persia. At this present, being in Agra, +whence I write this letter, I have about twelve pounds, which, according +to my manner of living on the way, at two-pence a-day, will very +competently maintain me during three years travel, considering the +cheapness of all eatables in Asia. Drink costs me nothing, as I hardly +ever drink any thing beyond pure water during my pilgrimage. + +[Footnote 252: Twenty marks are £15:6:8 sterling.--E.] + +I mean to remain in Agra for six weeks longer, waiting an excellent +opportunity of going to the famous river Ganges, about five days journey +from hence, to see a memorable meeting of the idolatrous people of this +country, called Banians, of whom to the number of 400,000 go thither, on +purpose to bathe and shave themselves in the river, and to sacrifice a +world of gold to that same river, partly in stamped coin, and partly in +great massy lumps and wedges, thrown into the river as a sacrifice, +besides many other strange ceremonies, worthy of being observed. So +notable a spectacle is no where to be seen, neither in this the +_greater_ Asia, nor in the _lesser_, now called Natolia. This shew is +made once in every year, on which occasion people flock thither from +almost a thousand miles off, worshipping the river as a god and +saviour; a most abominable and impious superstition of these brutish +heathens, aliens from Christ. As soon as I have seen this ceremony, I +propose, by God's help, to repair to Lahore, twenty days journey from +hence, and so into Persia, &c. + + Your dutiful, loving, and obedient son, + Now a desolate pilgrim in the world, + THOMAS CORYAT. + +§3. _Some Observations concerning India, by Thomas Coryat_.[253] + +Whereas in this country the beggars beg from a Christian in the name of +_Bibbee Maria_, and not of _Hazaret Eesa_, we may gather that the +Jesuits have preached our _Lady Mary_ more than the _Lord Jesus_. + +[Footnote 253: Purchas informs us, that these were taken from certain +notes written by Coryat, given him by Sir Thomas Roe; "whence, omitting +such things as have been given before from the observations of Sir +Thomas Roe himself, I have inserted a few."--_Purch._] + +A great rajah of the Hindoos, who was a notorious atheist, and a +contemner of all diety, and who boasted that he knew of no God except +the king, and neither believed nor feared any other, happened one day to +sit dallying among his women, when one of them plucked a hair from his +breast, which hair being fast-rooted, plucked off along with it a small +bit of skin, so that a small spot of blood appeared. This small scar +festered and gangrened incurably, so that in a few days his life was +despaired of, and being surrounded by all his friends, and several of +the courtiers, he broke out into these excellent words:--"Which of you +would have thought that I, a warrior, should not have died by the stroke +of a sword, a spear, or an arrow? But now am I enforced to confess the +power of the great God I have so long despised, who needs no other lance +to slay so blasphemous a wretch and contemner of his holy majesty, such +as I have been, than a small hair." + +Akbar Shah, the former king, had learnt all manner of sorceries; and +being once in a strange humour to shew a spectacle to his nobles, he +brought forth his favourite Sultana before them, and cut off her head +with a sword in their presence. Seeing them struck with horror and +amazement at this action, by virtue of his exorcisms and sorceries, he +caused her head to fix on again, and no sign remained of any wound. + +The same prince, who was very fortunate during his reign, shewed the +utmost attention and respect to his mother, of which he one day gave the +following striking instance:--Being on a journey between Lahore and +Agra, on which occasion his mother accompanied him, being carried in a +palanquin, and having to pass a river, he took one of the poles of the +palanquin on his own shoulder, commanding his greatest nobles to do the +same, and in this manner carried her across the river. He never denied +her any request that ever she made, except one, and this was, that our +Bible might be hung about the neck of an ass, and so beaten about the +town of Agra. The reason of this strange request was, that the +Portuguese had taken a ship of theirs, in which they found a copy of the +_Koran_, or bible of the Mahometans, which they tied about the neck of a +dog, and beat the dog about the streets of Ormus. But he denied her this +request, saying, That if it were evil in the Portuguese to have so done +with the Koran, it did not become a king to requite evil with evil, as +the contempt of any religion was contempt of God, and he would not be +revenged upon an innocent book. The moral of this is, that God would not +permit the sacred book of his law and truth to be contemned among the +infidels. + +One day in every year, for the amusement of the king's women, all the +tradesmen's wives are admitted into the _Mahal_, having each somewhat to +sell, after the manner of a fair, and at which the king acts as broker +for his wives, no other man being present, and by means of his gains on +this occasion, provides his own supper. By this means he attains to a +sight of all the pretty women of the city; and at a fair of this kind he +got his beloved _Noor Mahal_. + +After _Shaof Freed_ had won the battle of Lahore by a stratagem, all the +captains of the rebel army, to the number of two thousand, who had been +taken by the king, were hung up upon flesh-hooks, or set upon stakes, +forming an avenue for the king's entrance into Lahore. On this occasion, +his son _Curseroo_, [Cusero] who had been made prisoner, rode beside +him, bare-footed, on an elephant, and the king asked him how he liked +that spectacle? To this the prince answered, That he was sorry to see so +much cruelty and injustice in his father, in thus executing those who +had only done their duty, as they had lived on his bread and salt: but +that his father had done justly if he had pardoned these brave men, and +punished him, who was their master, and the author of this rebellion. + +Sultan Cusero has only one wife, owing to the following circumstance: +During his confinement, the king proposed to make a hunting progress of +four months, and consulted how he might keep his son in safe custody +during his absence. He at length determined to build a tower in which to +immure him, having neither door nor window, and only a few small holes +to let in air, and these so high as to be beyond reach. Into this tower +were to be put along with the prince all sorts of provisions and +necessaries, with a few servants to attend him. While this was building, +the wife of Cusero fell at the king's feet, and would not leave him till +she obtained his consent to be shut up along with her husband. The king +endeavoured to persuade her to enjoy her liberty, but she utterly +refused any other comfort than to be the companion of her husband's +miseries. Among these, this was the greatest, that if any of those who +were to be shut up along with him, to the number of fifty in all, should +happen to die during the king's absence, there were no means either to +remove or bury the body, as no person was to be allowed to come near the +tower. + +It is a frequent custom of the present Mogul, when he happens to be +awake in the night time, he calls for certain poor old men, making them +sit beside him, and passes his time in familiar discourse with them, +giving them clothes and bountiful alms when he dismisses them. At one +time, when residing at Ajimeer, he went a-foot on pilgrimage to the tomb +of a saint or prophet called Haji Mundin, and there kindled a fire with +his own hands, under an immense _Heidelbergian equipolent_ brass pot, in +which victuals were cooked for five thousand poor persons. When the +victuals were ready, he took out the first platter with his own hands, +and served the mess to a poor person. Noor Mahal took out and served the +second, and the rest was served by the other ladies of his +court.--_Crack me this nut, all ye papal charity-vaunters_. + +One day an Armenian procured a nobleman to present him to the king, as +one who desired to become an Mahometan; on which the king asked him, if +he had been converted from hope of preferment; to which the Armenian +answered, that be had no such motive. Some months afterwards, the new +convert craved some courtesy from the king, which he denied, saying, "I +have already done you the greatest of all favours, in allowing you to +save your soul; but you must provide for your own body the best way you +can." The king likes not those who change their religion, being himself +of none but according to his own fancy, and freely allows therefore of +all religions in his dominions. Of which I may give the following +notable example: + +He had an Armenian in his service, named Scander, whom he one day asked +if he thought any of the _padres_ had ever converted a single Mahometan +to be a true Christian, for conscience sake, and not for money. Scander +answered, with great confidence, that he had one as his servant, who was +a sincere Christian, and would not be of any other for any worldly +consideration. The king immediately caused this man to be sent for, and +bidding Scander depart, he examined the convert as to his reasons for +having become a Christian. In reply, he quoted certain feeble jesuitical +reasons, declaring his determination to be of no other religion, though +the king made him many fair speeches and large offers to return to +Mahometism, offering him pensions, and the command of horse. He said he +had now only four rupees a month, which was a poor recompense for +becoming a Christian, but if he would recant, he would give him high +dignities and large means. The fellow answered, that he had not become a +Christian for such small wages, as he was able to earn as much in the +service of a Mahometan; but was a Christian in his heart, and was +determined so to continue. Finding this method ineffectual, the king +turned his tune, and tried him with threats of severe punishment, unless +he returned to the faith of Mahomet. But the proselyte manfully declared +he would suffer any thing, being ready to endure whatever the king was +pleased to order. Upon this declaration, when all the by-standers +expected present and severe castigation, the king suddenly changed his +manner towards him, highly commending his constancy and resolution, +bidding him return to his master, and to serve him faithfully, and +ordered him an allowance of one rupee a-day for his integrity. + +About two months afterwards, the king returned from hunting wild-hogs, +an animal which is held in abhorrence by all Mahometans, and which kind +of venison, therefore, the king was in use to distribute among the +Christians and Rajaputs. On this occasion, the king sent for the +converted catechumen above mentioned, and commanded him to take up a hog +for his master, which no Mahometan will touch. He did so, but on going +out of the court gate, he was so hooted at by the Mahometans, that he +threw down his burden in a ditch, and went home; concealing what had +passed from his master. Some four days afterwards, the Armenian being on +duty in presence of the king, he asked him if the hog he had sent him +was good meat. The Armenian replied, that he had not seen or heard of +any. The king therefore immediately ordered the convert to be sent for, +who confessed that he had not carried home the hog, as being mocked by +the Mahometans for touching so great an abomination, he had for shame +thrown it away. On this the king observed, "By your Christian law there +is no difference of meats. Are you ashamed of your law, or do you +outwardly forsake it to flatter the Mahometans? I now see that you are +neither a good Christian nor a good Mahometan, but a knave dissembling +with both. When I believed you sincere, I gave you a pension, which I +now take from you for your dissimulation, and I farther condemn you to +receive an hundred stripes." These were presently paid him, instead of +his money; and the king desired all to take warning by this example, +that, having given liberty of conscience to all religions, he would have +all to adhere to what they professed. + + + + +SECTION IX. + +ACCOUNT OF THE WRONGS DONE TO THE ENGLISH AT BANDA BY THE DUTCH, IN 1617 +AND 1618.[254] + +INTRODUCTION. + + +This section contains a letter from Mr Thomas Spurway, merchant or +factor, addressed from Bantam, "To the Honourable and Right Worshipful +the East India Company of England, touching the wrongs done at Banda to +the English by the Hollanders; the former unkind disgusts and brabling +quarrels now breaking unexpectedly out into a furious and injurious +war." Such is the account given of this section by Purchas, who farther +informs his readers, "That the beginning of this letter was torn, and +therefore imperfect in his edition; but, what is here defective, was to +be afterwards supplied from the journals of Nathaniel Courthop, and +other continuations of these insolences of the Dutch at Banda, by Mr +Hayes, and others." These journals of Courthop and Hayes are so +intolerably and confusedly written, and so interlarded with numerous +letters _about_ the subject of these differences with the Dutch, that we +have been reluctantly under the necessity of omitting them, being so +monstrously inarticulate as to render it impossible to make them at all +palatable to our readers, without using freedoms that were altogether +inadmissible in a work like the present. + +[Footnote 254: Purch. Pilgr. I. 608.] + +From this letter, and other information of a similar nature, it appears +that the attempts to form establishments for trade at Banda and the +Molucca islands were found to be difficult or impracticable, owing to +the opposition of the Dutch, who were much stronger in that part of +India, and had not only conceived the plan of monopolizing the spice +trade, but even avowed their determination to exclude the English and +all other European nations from participating in any share of it. We do +not pretend, in our Collection, to write the history of the English East +India Company, but merely to give a series of the voyages which +contributed to the establishment of that princely association of +merchant adventurers. Yet it seems proper, occasionally at least, in the +introductions to leading voyages, like the present, to give some short +historical notices of the subject, for the materials of which we are +chiefly, if not solely, indebted to the Annals of the Company, a work of +meritorious and laborious research, already several times referred to. + +Under the difficulties which had long attended the exertions of the +English to acquire a share in this peculiarly called _spice trade_, the +agent and commercial council of the English company at Bantam, gave +authority to the commanders of the Swan and Defence to endeavour to +obtain from the native chiefs of the islands of Puloroon and Puloway, a +surrender of these islands to the king of England, with the stipulation +of paying annually as a quit-rent, a fruit-bearing branch of the nutmeg +tree; yet stipulating that these islanders were to continue entirely +under the guidance of their own laws and customs, providing only that +they should engage to sell their spices exclusively to the agents of the +English company, who were, in return, to supply them with provisions and +Hindoostan manufactures at a fair price, in exchange for their peculiar +productions, nutmegs and mace. They were likewise authorised, if they +procured the consent of the natives, to establish fortified stations, or +factories, at Puloroon, Puloway. Pulo-Lantore, and Rosinging, or +Rosengin.[255] The views of the Bantam factory on this occasion seem to +have been generally judicious, as to the measure they now authorised, +but exceedingly ill judged in attempting to execute so very important a +purpose with a force entirely inadequate to that with which it had to +contend. + +[Footnote 255: An. of E.I. Co. I. 187.] + +The Dutch had expelled the Portuguese, at that time the subjects of +their tyrannical oppressors, the Spaniards, from a great portion of the +spice islands, in which warlike measure, and its consequences, they had +always to support a considerable force, both naval and military, in +these seas, and in various forts upon these islands; and besides, that +they felt their preponderance from these circumstances, and used it very +naturally for their own exclusive benefit, they alleged, and with no +small appearance of equity, that the English had no right to enjoy the +advantages of a trade, which they, the Dutch, had conquered from the +Portuguese and Spaniards. This opposition of interests proceeded in the +sequel to great extremities, in which the greatly superior power of the +Hollanders in these seas, enabled them effectually to oppress the +English, in what are peculiarly called the spice islands, and even to +expel them from all participation in that trade, as will appear in some +of the subsequent sections of this chapter. + +It would be not only premature in this place, but incompatible with the +nature of our work, which is intended as a Collection of Voyages and +Travels, to attempt giving a connected history of these dissensions +between the Dutch and English in Eastern India, which will be found +detailed in the Annals of the English Company. It is hardly possible, +however, to refrain from one observation on the subject,--that the Dutch +company, and the government of Holland, appear to have mainly proceeded, +in their hostile opposition to the English East India trade, on their +knowledge of the pusillanimous character of King James, which he vainly +thought to veil under the pretensions of loving peace, but which the +Dutch, as will be seen in the present section, clearly understood, and +openly expressed, as _the childhood of St George_, the tutelary martial +saint of England. _Beati pacifici_, his favourite adage, is an excellent +Christian and moral sentiment, but is incompatible with the unavoidable +exigencies of government, at least as they were then situated.--E. + + * * * * * + +_May it please your Worships_, + +We arrived at Macassar on the 19th of November, 1616, from Bantam, with +the Swan and Defence, under the command of Captain Nicholas Courthop, +who sailed in the Swan, of which ship Mr Davis was master, the other +being commanded by Mr Hinchley. We remained there for the purpose of +taking in an hundred _quoines_[256] of rice. On the 4th December, we saw +a large Dutch ship in the offing, which came to anchor about five +leagues off, and on the 5th they sent their skiff ashore, which made +directly for the English house, having eight men on board. As soon as we +perceived this boat coming ashore, we ran to the sea side; but, before +we got there, two of her men were landed, whom we acquainted with the +danger they were in, as the king of Macassar, and all the other kings +thereabouts, were become their mortal enemies, because of the many +injuries done them by the Hollanders, who had forcibly carried away a +principal sabander, and other persons belonging to Macassar, for which +they were determined upon revenge; and, therefore, that they might all +expect to be put to death, unless the king could be prevailed upon to +spare them. The Dutchmen were so much alarmed at this intelligence, that +they wished to have gone back to their boat, but the Macassers had +already gathered about us, and laid hands upon them. + +[Footnote 256: The amount or quantity of these _quoines_ are no where +stated, or even hinted at; but, from circumstances in the sequel, they +appear to have been considerable.--E.] + +I, and other English, immediately went in all haste to the king, +acquainting him with what had happened, lest, if the Dutch had intended +any treachery, he might have suspected us as being accessary. The king +gave us thanks, and desired us to take the two Dutchmen who had landed +to our house, that we might learn from them their intentions in coming +here. This we did, and they informed us that they belonged to a fleet +lately fitted out from Holland, and had lost company of their consorts. +One of these called himself John Staunch, and reported himself to be an +under-factor. The other was an English sailor. Perceiving themselves to +be in great danger, they earnestly entreated us to stand their friends +and procure their liberty. We promised to do every thing we could for +them. Soon after this, the kings of Macassar and Talow, together with +about 2000 attendants, came to the sands near the sea side, where they +held a council upon these men. The king of Talow was clear for putting +them to death, but we used our interest so successfully for them, that +they were commanded to be gone instantly in their boat; The king of +Macassar observing, that these were too few for satisfying his revenge, +and that he should wait for one more ample. So they departed and went to +their ship. + +Next day another boat was observed coming towards the shore from the +same ship; and, on the king being informed of this, he gave immediate +orders for twenty proas and corracorras to be manned and launched. This +was done immediately, and the whole made towards the Dutch boat, which +was rowing for the land directly towards our house. On observing the +native craft endeavouring to intercept them, the Dutch turned their +boat, and rowed back to regain their ship; but the Macassars soon got +up, boarded them on both sides, and slew every man of the Hollanders, +being sixteen in number. There were at this time near 5000 people at the +sea side, and we were commanded to keep the house. + +The name of this Dutch ship was the Endraught, and imagining that we +were bound for Banda or the Moluccas, she remained at sea waiting for +us. We set sail from Macassar road on the 8th December, 1616, and when +the Dutchmen, saw us under sail, they also weighed and kept company with +us. We would gladly have gone from them, but could not, owing to the bad +sailing of the Defence. They sent their boat to us, requesting we would +spare them two quoines of rice, four tons of water, and some poultry, +all of which we gave them, only taking payment for the rice, being forty +dollars, giving the water and poultry freely. We asked why they had +attempted to land the second time; when they told us their first boat +had not then returned to the ship, so that they believed the Dutch +factory had still remained at Macassar. But I believe it proceeded from +obstinacy, believing their first boat had been denied access at our +instigation, and meaning to make a second trial, when they hoped to have +flattered the king to allow them to return, and reinstate their factory. +For both their boats passed within musket-shot of our ships on their way +to the land, yet did not go aboard to enquire what were the situation of +affairs on shore, which if they had done, we should have forewarned them +of their danger. They kept company with us till we came near Amboina, +for which place they stood in, while we continued our course. We have +since learnt that they gave out we had been the cause of their men being +slain at Macassar, which is most false: For I solemnly protest that we +used our best endeavours to save them, and if it had not been for us, +the eight men in their first boat had also been slain. + +The Swan and Defence arrived in the road of Puloroon on the 13th +December. Next day the people of that island came on board, and +conferred with us about surrendering the island to us. We represented +that our nation had come often to their island, at great cost, and at +their particular request, to settle a factory, and trade with them in a +friendly manner, bringing them rice and other provisions, with cloth and +sundry commodities, in exchange for their spices; that we had no desire +to usurp over them, or to reduce them under bondage, as had been done +formerly by the Hollanders and other nations; and that, if they would +surrender their island of Puloroon to our sovereign the king of England, +by a formal writing, and by the delivery of some earth, with a tree and +fruits of the island, as true tokens of their fidelity, and thereafter a +nut-tree yearly as an acknowledgment, we should settle a factory, and +would furnish them with rice, cloth, and other commodities, both now and +yearly afterwards. We also assured them, if we were once settled on the +island, that sufficient supplies would come to them yearly, much better +than now; and that we would use our utmost efforts, both by means of our +men and ships, to defend them and ourselves from all enemies. We also +demanded, whether they had come under any contract with the Hollanders, +or had made them any surrender of their island. To this they unanimously +replied, that they had made no such engagement, and never would, but +held the Hollanders as their mortal enemies. This was earnestly declared +to us, both by the men of Puloroon and by divers chiefs from Puloway, +who had fled from that island on its forcible reduction by the +Hollanders. And they all declared that the island of Puloway had been +lawfully surrendered to Richard Hunt, for the king of England, before +the Hollanders came into the road, the English colours having been +hoisted in the castle, which the Hollanders shot down, using many +disgraceful words of his majesty. They farther declared, that they +defended their island for his majesty's use, as long as they possibly +could; and, being constrained by force, they had fled to Puloroon, +Lantor, and Serran. + +After this conference had continued the whole day, the writings of +surrender were drawn up, and confirmed by all the chief men of Puloroon +and Puloway, and so delivered by their own hands to us, Nathaniel +Cowthorp, Thomas Spurway, and Sophonie Cozocke, for his majesty's use. +They also that same instant delivered to us a nutmeg-tree, with its +fruit growing thereon, having the earth about its root, together with +oilier fruits, and a live goat, in symbolical surrender of the +sovereignty of the island, desiring us to hoist the English colours, and +to fire a salute of ordnance. Accordingly, the colours were set up, and +we fired thirty pieces of ordnance, as a mark of taking possession; and +at night all the chiefs went ashore, parting from us on the most +friendly terms. + +On Christmas-day we descried two large Dutch ships edging towards +Puloroon. On seeing our ships in the road, they bore away to leeward for +Nero, and next day another of their ships hove in sight, which went to +the same place. The 28th, a Dutch pinnace stood right over for Puloroon, +and came bravadoing within gun-shot of our fort, having the Dutch +colours flying at her poop; but presently tacked about, lowered her +colours, and hoisted a bloody ensign instead, as if in defiance, and +then stood over for Nero. By this bravado, we daily looked for their +coming against us, according to their old injurious custom. We landed +four pieces of ordnance on the 30th, besides two others formerly landed +on the 25th, and set to work to construct fortifications for our +defence. By the assistance of the Bandanese, we erected two forts, which +were named the Swan and Defence, after our two ships, each mounted with +three guns; the fort called the Swan being within caliver shot of the +ships, and entirely commanding the road on the eastern side, where is +the principal anchorage for the westerly monsoon. + +The 3d of January, 1617, the three Dutch ships came from Nero into the +road of Puloroon, being the Horne, of 800 tons, the Star, of 500 tons, +and the Yaugar, of 160 tons. The Home anchored close by our ship the +Swan, the Star close beside the Defence, and the Yaugar a-head of all, +to cut off our intercourse with the shore. Our commission directed us, +on receiving the surrender of Puloroon, and forming a settlement there, +to give due notice thereof in writing to the Hollanders, warning them +not to come there to molest us under the pretence of ignorance, as they +had been formerly accustomed to do. We had accordingly a letter written +to that effect, but knew not how to have it sent, not daring to dispatch +it either by Englishmen or natives, for tear of being detained. On +coming into the road, however, we sent George Muschamp aboard their +admiral, the Star, to deliver the before-mentioned letter to Mynheer +Dedall, the Dutch commander; and with a message desiring them to depart +from the road of Puloroon before six glasses were run, as the islanders +would not allow them to remain in the roads, or to come near their +island, and would even have already fired upon them, if we had not +prevailed upon them to forbear. + +Soon afterwards, the Dutch commander, Dedall, came on board the Swan, +attended by their chaplain, to enquire the reason of our message; when +we told him that we suspected they came to injure us, as they had +formerly done at Paloway, Cambella, and other places; and, as they had +formerly turned the glass to Mr Ball, when in their power, threatening +to hang him if he did not immediately cause the English to quit the +land, we had now in like manner appointed a time for them to quit the +roads. We also shewed him the instrument by which Puloroon was +surrendered to us, and our consequent right to keep possession for the +king of England, which we were determined upon doing to the utmost of +our power, wishing them to be well advised in their proceedings, as they +might expect to be shortly called to answer for their abusive words and +injurious conduct to the English. We also demanded the restoration of +Puloway, which had likewise been lawfully surrendered to the king of +England. After this, we enquired if they had received any previous +surrender at Puloroon, but they could not say they had any; and, when we +shewed the formal surrender made to our king, which their chaplain +perused, he acknowledged that it was a true surrender. + +All this while the glass was running in the great cabin before their +eyes, putting them in mind to be gone. We also told them plainly, that +we believed their only purpose in coming here was to betray us, and to +drive us from the island by treachery or force, of which scandalous +conduct our nation had already had divers experience from theirs; +wherefore we neither could nor would trust them any more, and we must +insist upon their departure; as, when the glass was six times run out, +they must expect to be shot at from the shore; and, if they fired in +return against the islanders, or shewed any discourtesy or wrong to +them, we should consider it as hostility to us, and would defend them, +being now the subjects of our king. They desired to remain till next +day, which we would not agree to, doubting that more of their ships +might come to join them. They then desired to stay till midnight; which +we agreed to, on condition that we saw them preparing to weigh their +anchors, in which case we said that notice should be sent ashore to the +Bandanese, not to fire upon them. + +I also demanded to know from Dedall, what was their purpose in thus +coming into the road of Puloroon, unless to molest us. He pretended that +it was their usual custom in passing that island. But I told them that +was not true, as the islanders had declared there never was any +christian ship in their roads till we came. So he remained silent. They +came to anchor in the roads this day about three in the afternoon, and +departed about eleven at night. We have been since certainly informed, +that their purpose was to have taken possession of our ships by +treachery, or to have driven us out of the roads, and only gave up their +intentions on seeing that we were fortified on shore. Had they then +assailed us, we had little doubt of being able to have defended +ourselves against them, as we had both forts in readiness, the cannon +charged, and the gunners prepared to give fire, on the first signal from +our ships. + +A Dutch ship and pinnace came from Nero on the 10th January; the pinnace +edging near the small island or high sand, called _Nylacka_. This island +is uninhabited, but full of trees and bushes, being daily resorted to by +the men of Puloroon for fishing; and as belonging to Puloroon, belonged +now to the English. On coming near the island, the people in the pinnace +were observed continually sounding, wherefore we made four shots towards +her from Fort Defence; but, not intending to strike her, shot wide. At +every shot, the pinnace answered with a base, or some such piece, firing +into the small island among the trees and bushes, where were some +Englishmen and Bandanese of Puloroon, who were in no small danger from +the shot. Seeing they braved us in this manner, the gunner was desired +to do his best, and his next shot fell close over the stern of the +pinnace or frigate, which made her presently go away. Their purpose of +coming thus to sound about the small island, seemed to be to look out +for a landing-place; meaning to come there with their forces, and there +to fortify themselves, on purpose to compel us to quit the large island. + +On the 13th, Mr Davey complained that he was in want of water, and +proposed to go over for that purpose to Wayre upon Lantore; but on the +people of Puloroon being informed of this, they would by no means +consent to his going out of the roads, and indeed neither would we, +fearing the Hollanders might do us some injury in his absence. The +people of Puloroon, said they would rather bring him water from Lantore, +in their proas. I went on board Mr Davey to acquaint him with this; but +he and his people would not consent, saying the Bandanese would bring +them rain water, or such other as was unwholesome, and that they would +only be six days absent, or eight at most. + +At this time, the principal people of Wayre, a free town on the island +of Lantore, and of the separate island of Rosinging, came over to us, to +enter into a parley respecting the surrender of both to the sovereignty +of his majesty; and the formal deed of surrender being agreed upon and +drawn up, they desired that some Englishmen might go over to receive the +same in a public manner from all their hands, and to witness the +ceremonial. As Mr Davey still persisted to go over with his ship, it was +resolved upon, that Messrs Sophonie Cozocke, George Muschamp, Robert +Fuller, and Thomas Hodges, should go over in the Swan to Wayre and +Rosinging, to see that business accomplished, while the Swan was +procuring water; after which, it was appointed that Mr Cozocke was to +return in the Swan, while the other three were to remain upon the island +of Rosinging for possession, till farther orders. All business being +there concluded to our satisfaction, several persons in Wayre and +Rosinging desired to load nutmegs and mace in the Swan, and to have a +passage for Puloroon, there to sell us their spices for rice and cloths. +All this was agreed to, and twelve of these persons came on board, with +a great quantity of nutmegs and mace. + +The Swan then set sail for Geulegola, which is only a little way from +Wayre, and there watered, after which she again set sail. When about +eight leagues from the land, a Holland ship or two gave them chace. The +people of the Swan now asked Mr Davey what he proposed to do. He +answered, "They see my colours and I see theirs: I know them to be +Dutch, and they know us to be English: I know of no injury I have done +them, and I will continue my course for Puloroon." In short time, the +Star, for such was the Dutch ship, got up within shot of the Swan, and +without hailing, or giving the smallest intimation of her intention, +let fly both with great guns and small arms in the most violent manner. +The Swan received two or three great shot through and through before she +replied, and even had some of her men slain. After this, as Mr Davey +writes, the fight continued an hour and a half, during which five men +were killed in the Swan, viz. Mr Sophonie Cozocke, merchant, who was +driven to pieces by a cannon-ball, Robert Morton, quartermaster and +drummer, Christopher Droope, Edward Murtkin, and a Bantianese passenger +from Wayre. Three others were maimed, having lost arms or legs, with +very little hopes of recovery; and eight others were wounded, most of +them mortally. During the engagement, a Dutchman stood upon the poop of +the Star with a drawn sword, calling out in the Dutch language, English +villains and rogues, we will kill you all. + +The people of the Swan were much discouraged, on seeing so many of their +companions dead and wounded, insomuch that none of them would stand by +the sails to trim the ship to the best advantage so that the Hollander +lay upon her quarter pouring in great and small shot, and at last look +her by boarding, both with soldiers and others. They immediately broke +open and pillaged the cabins, plundered the men basely of their clothes +and every thing else worth taking, and throwing overboard whatever did +not please their fancies. Even the Spaniards never used more stern +cruelty in their professed wars, than did now the Dutch to us, with whom +they were in peace and amity. The Star had on board 160 men, mostly +soldiers taken from the castles of Nero and Puloway, while the Swan had +not above thirty able to stand to quarters, the rest being sick or lame, +and all much worn out in toilsome labour at Puloroon, in landing the +ordnance and constructing the two forts. Ten also of their complement +had been left in Puloroon to defend the two forts, two of whom, Herman +Hammond and John Day, were gunners. The Swan being thus taken and sore +battered in the action, was carried away under the guns of the castle at +Nero. The Dutch gloried much in their victory, boasting of their exploit +to the Bandanese, saying, That the king of England was not to be +compared with their great king of Holland: _That Saint George was now +turned a child_, and they cared not for the king of England; for one +Holland ship was able to take ten English ships. They landed all our men +at Nero, and kept them all strict prisoners, many of them in irons. + +The Swan left us at Puloroon on the 16th of January, and we expected her +back in eight or ten days at farthest, but never heard of her till the +25th of February, when Robert Fuller came over to us from Rosinging and +Wayre; to acquaint us that be had heard of an English ship being under +the guns of Nero castle. We immediately sent away Robert Hayes, the +purser of the Defence, accompanied by some of the chief men of Puloroon, +with directions to land on that side of Lantore which was in friendship +with us, and to go as near as possible to the Dutch ships with a flag of +truce, to enquire into the matter. After staying almost two hours, there +came at last a boat to fetch him off, but made him wade to the middle +before they would take him in. Being taken on board one of the Dutch +ships, the president and assistants of Nero met him, when he demanded to +know why they had made prize of the Swan, what was become of her men, +and wherefore they detained our ship and goods. They answered, that +_time should bring all to light_. Still urging for an answer, they used +many opprobrious words against the English, threatening to come over to +Puloroon with their forces, and to drive us from there and other places. +To this Hayes replied, that they had already done much more than they +could answer for, and was obliged to come away without seeing any one +belonging to the Swan. He could however see our poor ship all rent and +torn, in view of the natives, as an ill-got and dishonourable trophy of +Dutch treachery and ingratitude. In a short time after, they sent over a +messenger to us with a letter, which we answered, as we did others +afterwards, their messengers frequently coming over with flags of truce, +all of which letters, together with the surrenders, I brought over with +me to Bantam, and delivered to Captain Ball. + +The Dutch continually threatened us, by their letters and messengers, +that, as they had now taken tee Swan, they would soon come and take +possession of the Defence, and drive us from the island of Puloroon. We +always answered, that we expected them, and would defend ourselves to +the last. They made many bravados, daily shooting off forty, fifty, or +sixty pieces of ordnance at Nero and Puloway, thinking to frighten us. +Also the people of Lantore brought us word that they were fitting out +their ships, and shipping planks and earth, which we imagined was for +land service. They had then seven ships, four gallies and frigates, and +a great number of men, with all which force they threatened to come +against us. We were told likewise, that they had endeavoured to prevail +on their black slaves, by promise of freedom and great rewards, to come +over secretly to Puloroon and set fire to the Defence. The Hollanders +also, threatened that we should carry no spices from Puloroon or any +other of the Banda islands. Thereupon, considering our engagements with +the people of Puloroon, Wayre, and Rosinging, to all of whom we had +trusted our goods, and that we had ready at Puloroon a good quantity of +nutmegs and mace, and the threats of the Hollanders, we resolved to +maintain the honour of our king and country, and to defend the interest +of our employers, the honourable Company, to the utmost of our power. +For this purpose, we determined to land all the guns, provisions, and +stores, from the Defence, and to fortify the small island of Nylacka +adjoining to Puloroon; which the Hollanders proposed to have fortified +formerly; which, if they had done, would have commanded the road, and +done us much injury, as the people of Puloroon would have been prevented +from fishing, and English ships could not have come into the roads. + +Having therefore landed all the ordnance of the Defence, except four +pieces of cannon, and being busied in erecting a fortification with the +assistance of the Bandanese, Mr Hinshley also, the master of the +Defence, being ashore, and every one hard at work landing the things, +except a few left on board to keep the ship, a conspiracy was entered +into by some of the men on the 20th March, 1617; and that same night +they cut the cables and so drove out to sea. Perceiving this from the +small island, we immediately sent a boat after them, advising them to +return with the ship: But the mutineers would neither listen to them, +nor suffer the boat to come near the ship, pointing their pieces at +them, and even fired one musket-shot to keep off the boat; which was +therefore compelled to return to the small island. There went away in +the Defence nine of our men, including John Christmas, the boatswain's +mate, and we could distinctly see them next day going into Nero roads +under sail, and come to anchor under the guns of the castle. As we +afterwards learnt, some of the runaways went immediately on shore to +inform the Dutch of their exploit, contending among themselves which of +them had piloted the ship. They even brought a can of wine ashore with +them, and drank to the Hollanders on landing. + +The Dutch took immediate possession of the Defence, and brought all our +rascally deserters into their castle, where they examined them as to our +proceedings at Puloroon and Nylacka, in regard to our fortifications +and means of defence. By this scandalous affair, we were in great danger +of being all put to death by the Bandanese of Puloroon, as they +suspected the desertion of our ships to have been a concerted matter +between us and the Hollanders, on purpose to betray them. By this +likewise, as our weakness was made known to the Hollanders, they might +be encouraged to attack us. Indeed they made many violent threatenings +of so doing, and we daily looked for their appearance; which, if they +had so done, must have cost many lives, as we were greatly enraged +against them for the capture of the Swan, and the severe usage of her +people. + +On the 23d of March, we sent a letter to the Hollanders at Nero, by +Robert Fuller, who landed upon Lantore; but, owing to some difference +between the people of that island and the Dutch, he could not be allowed +to pass, so that he had to return. The 25th there came a messenger to us +from Lawrence Ryall, the principal commander of the Hollanders, newly +come to Nero from the Moluccas, desiring Mr Courthop and I would come in +a proa to hold a conference with two of his principal merchants, +half-way between Puloroon and Puloway; but we refused this request, +being afraid of treachery. By this messenger we had a letter from Mr +Davies, then a prisoner at Nero, intimating his disapprobation of our +proceedings in keeping possession of Puloroon, alleging that our +commission did not warrant us in so doing, and recommending a parley +between us and the Dutch general, to prevent the loss of any more lives. +It appeared that he was instigated to give us this advice by the +Hollanders, who had made him believe that they had authority in writing +from our king, to make prize of any English ships they found to the east +of Celebes, as we afterwards learnt to our great surprise, since, if +they actually had such authority we must have obeyed. + +We wrote to Lawrence Ryall, by his messenger, that, if he would send +over Henrick de Watterfoord and Peter de Yonge, two of his principal +merchants, to remain as pledges in Nylacka, Mr Courthop and another +should be sent to confer with him. We got back for answer, that the +merchants we demanded as pledges could not be sent, as the one was gone +to sea, and the other could not be spared, being their chief +book-keeper; but offering us two other principal merchants, whom we +agreed to accept. Accordingly, on the 6th April, the Dutch galley +brought over these two, whom we lodged in a tent near the landing-place +under a guard of twelve Englishmen to protect them from the Bandanese, +as we did not think it right to bring them into our fort, that they +might not have an opportunity of viewing our fortifications. + +Mr Courthop went immediately over to Nero in their galley, and had a +long conference with the Dutch, in which they used many threats, and +complained of many injuries they pretended to have suffered from the +English, but of which I shall only briefly treat, as the letter from Mr +Courthop, which I brought over from Banda and delivered to Captain Ball, +will certify your worships at large on this matter. They complained, +that Sir Henry Middleton had used the Dutch colours, when in the Red +Sea, pretending to be Holland ships, to their injury and discredit. To +this Mr Courthop replied, that it was false, as he had sailed with Sir +Henry, and never knew him to wear Dutch colours; which, moreover, Sir +Henry was too much a gentleman to have done. They pretended to have our +king's letter, authorizing them to capture any English ship seen to the +eastwards of the Celebes. Mr Courthop urged them to produce this letter, +on seeing which he declared his readiness to obey the authority of his +sovereign, and to evacuate Puloroon; but they had none such to produce. +They alleged many other things, equally false, and used many arguments +to induce us to quit Puleroon. All this time, neither Mr Davies nor any +other of the English in their hands were permitted to come near Mr +Courthop. + +Finding he could not prevail, Lawrence Ryall, the Dutch general, grew +much discontented, throwing his hat on the ground and pulling his beard +for sheer anger. At length Mr Courthop told him, that he could conclude +nothing of his own authority, being joined with a council, but should +relate every thing that had passed at Puloroon, which should be taken +into consideration and an answer sent. I had advised him to say this, to +get the easier away. Mr Courthop also urged them to restore our ship the +Defence, with her men and goods; but they would not, unless we agreed to +surrender Puloroon: offering, if we would deliver up Nylacka and our +fort, in which we had twelve pieces of ordnance, that they would then +restore both the Swan and Defence, with all our men and goods. Ryall +then desired Mr Courthop to sign a note which he had drawn, +acknowledging the proffers he had made, but this Mr Courthop refused. + +They had so wrought upon Mr Davies, that they expected he might be able +to prevail upon Mr Courthop to come into their terms, and now therefore +brought him to Mr Courthop, with whom he had much discourse, and +particularly urged the truth of the letter they pretended to have from +the king of England, as before mentioned. When Mr Courthop told him what +he had offered, in case that letter were produced, Mr Davies distinctly +saw he had been imposed upon, and broke out into a rage against them, +for having told so many falsehoods;[257] adding, that they had promised +him and his men good treatment, but that his men complained of being in +great want of food and clothing, and of general hard usage. They had sat +in judgment upon him and his men, condemning them to remain as prisoners +till they had orders from Holland as to their ultimate destination. He +even said, that he was willing to continue in durance, provided we could +keep them out of Puloroon. The conference being ended, Mr Courthop came +back to Nylacka in the galley, and the pledges were restored. + +[Footnote 257: Purchas, in a side note at this place, quaintly converts +the name of the Dutch general into Lawrence _Ly-all_.--E.] + +The eastern monsoon being now come, we fitted out a proa to send with +dispatches to Bantam, giving an account of what had passed; and it was +agreed that Mr Hinchley and I were to go, accompanied by four Englishmen +and fourteen natives of Puloroon, of whom five were chiefs, or +_orancays_, one of them being son to the sabander, who is the principal +man of the island. We set sail from Puloroon on the 17th April, 1617, +and when in sight of Bottone on our way for Macassar, we descried a +large ship and a pinnace, which gave us chase under a press of sail, so +that we had no means of escape, except by standing in for Bottone. After +being chased half a day, we got near the town of Bottone by night, +thinking the ships could not have got so far up the river; but seeing +the ship and pinnace almost within musket-shot of us next morning, we +presently landed most of what we had in the proa, taking refuge in the +woods. Having so done, we went immediately to the king, to whom we gave +a present of such things as we had, to the value of about thirty +dollars, desiring his protection, which he promised in the kindest +manner, and faithfully performed. He sent his servants along with us, +to put all our things into a house, giving us also two houses for our +lodging, desiring us to remain within, that we might not be discovered +by our enemies. + +Almost immediately afterwards, the Hollanders went to the king, giving +him a present three times the value of ours, and enquired who we were +that had landed. To which the king answered that he knew not who we +were. On being asked by the king how long they meant to stay, the Dutch +said they proposed remaining six days; of which the king sent us notice, +advising us to keep close for that time, that we might proceed in +greater security after they were gone. But at the end of these six days +the Dutch said they would stay six days longer, pretending they had to +repair one of their masts. Seeing their intention, and because our proa +lay in view of the Dutch, we bought another proa, into which the king +made all our things be carried by his slaves, causing them to navigate +that proa past the Hollanders, and to carry her to the back of the +island, whither he sent us over land under the protection of fifty men. +We went immediately aboard, but remained under the island till near +night, when we stood our course for Macassar, and saw no more of the +Hollanders. + +We arrived at Macassar on the 7th May, where we found the Attendance +intending for Banda, but was unable to beat up, owing to the change of +the monsoon. Having shipped in the Attendance 180 _suckles_ of mace, +purchased at Macassar, we sent the proa to Banjarmassen and Succadanea +in Borneo, with advice that a supply of goods could not be sent there as +expected, owing to the non-arrival of the Solomon, which had been long +expected at Bantam. The 3d June we arrived at Bantam. As Captain George +Barkley was dead, to whom Mr Ball succeeded as chief of the factory, I +have delivered all the papers to him, and doubt not that your worships +may receive them by the first conveyance. Those are, two surrenders, the +letters from the Hollanders with our answers, and every thing relative +to our proceedings in Banda. + +When I left Puloroon, it was agreed that another proa was to be +dispatched for Bantam in twenty days after our departure, lest we might +have been pursued and taken by the Hollanders. Accordingly a proa[258] +was sent, in which was laden 170 suckles of mace, containing 3366 +cattees, each cattee being six English pounds and nearly two ounces, +costing at the rate of one dollar the cattee;[259] which, had it gone +safe, might have sold in England for £5000. In this proa there were +eight Englishmen and thirty Bandanese, under the charge of Walter +Stacie, who had been mate under Mr Hinchley in the Defence. His +knowledge and care, however, did not answer expectation, for he ran the +proa on the rocky shoals near the island of Bottone, where she bilged +and lost all the mace, the men getting ashore. Stacie is much blamed by +the rest, some of whom told him they saw land on the lee-bow, but he was +peevish and headstrong, calling them all fools, and would not listen to +them. + +[Footnote 258: In a marginal note, this is called a junk.--E.] + +[Footnote 259: From the statement in the text, the suckle appears to +have been about 122 English pounds, and the quantity of mace +accordingly, shipped on this occasion, about 185 cwt. or 9 1/4 +tons.--E.] + +May it please your worships to understand, that the Hollanders replied, +when told that their vile abuses to us would lie heavy on them when +known in Europe, "That they can make as good friends in the court of +England as your worships; that this which they have done will oblige +your worships and them to join, so that a gold chain will recompence +all, and they have dollars enough in Holland to pay for a ship or two, +providing they can hinder us from trading at Banda." + +In regard to the trade of the Banda islands, Puloroon is reported to be +the worst island. It is about eight English miles in circuit, and the +small adjoining island of Nylacka is about a mile round. There is a +tolerable quantity of nutmegs and mace grown on Puloroon, and +considerably more might be got there if the island were well cultivated. +Rosengin is a fine island, producing the largest nutmegs and best mace +of all the Banda islands; and, if we hold possession of Puloroon, +abundance of nutmegs and mace could be had from Rosengin, Lantore, and +other places; as the natives would come over to us with their spices, +provided we supply them with rice, cloth, salt, pepper, molasses, and +other necessaries, and some Macassar gold, which passes as current in +Banda as Spanish rials of eight, and at the same rate, though only worth +at Bantam two shillings and fourpence or two and sixpence, for the piece +called mass. Our cargo was small, having only 100 _quoines_ of rice, and +our cloth was much decayed, having lain two or three years at Macassar. +If we had had three times as much, we could have sold it all at +Puloroon for mace and nutmegs, being entreated for cloth and rice by +people from Lantore, Rosengin and other places, but had it not, so that +some returned home again with part of their spices. They came over to +Puloroon in the night with proas and corracorras. The mace and nuts were +very good, but must be injured by lying so long, owing to the +molestations of the Hollanders, while we had no lime for preserving the +nuts. The trade will turn out very profitable, if we may quietly possess +the island of Puloroon; but we must buy rice at a lower rate than in +Macassar, and I understand it can be had in Japan for about half the +price. + +In regard to our right to the Banda islands, especially Puloway, Captain +Castleton might have made that secure, as I have often been told; and at +all events, we have a much better right than the Hollanders, who by +force of arms have dispossessed us. Except Puloroon be supplied this +year, and the possession maintained, the English name will be utterly +disgraced, with little chance of our ever being received there again. If +we are able to hold it until your worships have determined what to do in +the matter, we shall soon be able to procure there as much mace and +nutmegs as the Hollanders; and it may also serve as an entrance into the +Moluccas for cloves. The Hollanders pretend an exclusive right to the +Bandas and Moluccas, in consequence of having the son of the king of +Ternate in their hands as a prisoner. But the Bandanese deny that the +king of Ternate has any right of dominion in their islands, every one of +their islands being free, and governed by sabanders and orancays of +their own appointment. + +It is indispensible, that supplies of rice and other victuals, and +cloth, should be sent for the English and Bandanese, and to bring away +the nutmegs and mace we have there in godowns or warehouses. The +Hollanders give out that they will take all your ships that go to those +parts, so as to famish both the English and Bandanese; wherefore it +requires earnest and speedy attention, that we may quietly enjoy our +trade to these islands, which have been surrendered to us, and desire +our trade. These are Puloway, Puloroon, Rosengin, and Wayre, which last +is a town in Lantore. Puloway is reported to be a paradise, and the +Hollanders allege that it is as much worth to them as Scotland is to +his majesty. Even should your worships not be able to get Puloway +restored, yet, if you enjoy the other three, we shall be able to procure +enough of nutmegs and mace for the supply of England, and also for the +trade of Surat and other places in India. Now is the time or never, +considering the vile abuses and murders committed upon us by the +Hollanders. At this time, the Charles and the Hope are bound home from +Bantam, and I pray God to send them safe to London. I have sent your +worships a brief abstract of our cargo for Banda, and of the sales made +there. If I seem tedious, I humbly crave pardon; and, with my humble +duty, beseeching the Almighty to prosper and give good success to all +your designs, I humbly take leave, + +being your worships most humble servant in all duty, + +_Thomas Spurway_. + + + + +SECTION X. + +FIFTH VOYAGE THE JOINT STOCK BY THE ENGLISH EAST INDIA COMPANY, IN 1617, +UNDER THE COMMAND OF CAPTAIN MARTIN PRING.[260] + +INTRODUCTION. + + +The fleet appointed for this voyage consisted of five ships; the James +Royal of 1000 tons, Rowland Coytmore master; the Ann Royal of 900 tons, +Andrew Shilling master; the Gift of 800 tons, Nathaniel Salmon master; +the Bull of 400 tons, Robert Adams master; and the Bee of 150 tons, John +Hatch master; the whole under the supreme command of Martin Pring, +general, who sailed in the James Royal.--_Purch._ + +[Footnote 260: Purch. Pilgr. I. 63.] + +§1. _Occurrences on the Voyage out, and at Surat, Bantam, and Jacatra_. + +On Tuesday the 4th February, 1617, our fleet dropt down from Gravesend. +Thursday the 6th, Mr deputy Maurice Abbot, with several of the +commissioners, came aboard and mustered all our men, paying their +harbour wages. These gentlemen left us next day, when all our men were +entered upon whole pay. After much foul weather, we departed from the +Downs on the 5th March. The 22d of June we Lad sight of Saldanha point, +and anchored that same afternoon in the bay, whence we departed on the +13th July. The moon was totally eclipsed at night of the 6th August; it +began at eight o'clock and continued till past eleven, being totally +eclipsed for an hour and half. On the 25th August at night, between +seven and eight o'clock, being in latitude 4° 20' S. the water of the +sea seemed almost as white as milk, and so continued till morning, when +it began to alter. Next night we found the water similar, but not +altogether so white. Before day on the 30th, the water was again white, +and likewise the next night; but on all these occasions we could find no +ground. + +On the night of the 8th September at twelve o'clock, our ship sprung a +leak, which, when discovered, had raised the water in our hold six feet +and a half. In four hours, with both pumps, the ship was freed, but we +afterwards found that the water increased at the rate of a foot in the +half hour. In the morning of the 9th, I summoned the chief commanders of +the fleet on board, desiring them to send their carpenters to assist in +searching for the leak, and some of each of their companies to aid our +men in pumping. Some were set to rummage the hold in search of the leak, +and others to stick our sprit-sail full of oakum, with which we made +several trials under the ship's bilge, but could not find the leak. We +at length found, by divers trials within board, that the leak was before +the main-mast; and we, next morning, fitted the sprit-sail again, +letting it down at the stern, and brought it forwards by degrees, and at +length, by God's blessing, our leak was partly stopped, as the water +only rose about six inches in a glass, which had before risen twelve +inches. Bat within three glasses, the oakum being washed out, the leak +increased as before. This night we got an additional pump from the Bull, +to free the water from the fore part of our ship, where it stood +eighteen inches deeper than in our well. The 11th, we again fitted our +sprit-sail with oakum and let it down again, when it pleased God so to +favour us, that in an hour after our ship was tighter than ever. + +On the morning of the 12th we espied a sail, which the Gift came up with +in the afternoon, being a Portuguese ship belonging to Don Pedro de +Almeyda, from Mozambique bound for Diu, laden principally with about +fifty quintals of elephants teeth. In the morning of the 20th the Bee +rejoined us from Swally roads, informing us that the rest of our fleet +was safe in that anchorage. They had brought in with them a junk and two +other ships, which they had chased on the 16th. The junk was a great +ship of Surat, belonging to the mother of the Great Mogul, burden about +1200 or 1400 tons, having in her above 1000 persons, and twenty-nine +tons of silver, though some said a great deal more. The other two were +English interlopers, called the Francis and the Lion: the former of 160 +tons, belonging to-----, and commanded by Captain Neuce; and the latter +of 120 tons, fitted out by Philip Bernardy, an Italian merchant in +London, commanded by Thomas Jones, who had formerly been boatswain of +the Hector. + +This evening we anchored in the road of Swally, where we found the rest +of our fleet, with the foresaid junk and the two English privateers. On +oar arrival, we heard of two Dutch ships having been cast away at +_Gowdever_;[261] the Rotterdam of 1000 tons, and a small pinnace. The +9th October, I sent up twenty-one chests of coral to Surat, which were +landed two days before from the Ann; and at night I sent up eight tons +and four hundredweight of elephants teeth, taken out of our Portuguese +prize. This afternoon twenty sail of frigates from Goa arrived at the +bar of Surat, commanded by the Captain-major Don Pedro de Asadedo, +[_Asovedo_?] From one of these, five of the country people came ashore +among our men, two of whom were taken by our guard, and confessed they +came from Goa a month before, having orders from the viceroy to range +the coast, to discover the English, when they were to return; but if the +English were not on the coast, they were to proceed for Cambay, to +capture the caffila, or convoy of country vessels. + +[Footnote 261: This name is inexplicably corrupt.--E.] + +In the morning of the 14th October, seventeen of the frigates departed +for Cambay, passing fairly by us. This day likewise I sent fourteen tons +of elephants teeth to Surat, under a guard of thirty-six men, who +likewise conveyed our treasure to Ahmedabad; and, on the 17th, I sent +other twelve tons four hundredweight of elephants teeth. This day the +Portuguese frigates returned again, and passed in our sight to the +southwards. Next day we sent off all the rest for our ivory; and on the +22d we landed sixteen chests of coral, and two of sea-horse teeth, out +of the Bull. + +The 14th November, a month's pay was distributed to all the ships +companies, except the chief commanders and merchants, amounting to 3302 +Spanish dollars. After this, the Bee was sent off for Jasques; and we +landed from the other ships cloth, tin, cases of wine and strong waters, +and all the rest of the presents that were in the cabin. + +The 17th January, 1618, the Bee returned from Persia. This day seven +Malabar junks were seen in the offing, two of which were brought in by +the Francis, and two by the Bee. We departed from Swally roads on the +12th March, and anchored that same evening near the bar of Surat. The +17th, in the morning, the wind coming about northerly, the Ann departed +for the Red Sea, and on the 18th I dispatched the Bull. At noon of this +day, standing to the southward, we were in lat. 11° 25' N. the wind, as +for four or five days before, being, at night, a slight breath from the +land, and, by day, in the afternoon, a fresh breeze from the sea. In the +forenoon of this day, we saw eight sail to the southward of us, and +three between us and the land, besides two sallies and ten frigates. In +the afternoon of the 28th, the Francis and the Bee being near the shore +abreast of Calicut, the Zamorin sent off a boat desiring to speak with +me, but I was too far shot to the southwards before the message reached +me. + +The 2d April we got in the morning into the bay of _Brinjan_, where we +anchored in fourteen fathoms, within half a league of the town, a high +peaked hill, like a sugar-loaf; bearing N.E. by E. by the compass, which +is the best mark to know this place by, when the weather is clear. This +is a good place for refreshments, having hens, cocoa-nuts, and goats in +abundance, and plenty offish, together with excellent water springing +from the rock; but we had to pay seventy dollars, a cloth vest, a +fowling-piece, a mirror, and a sword, for leave to provide ourselves +with water, and all too little to satisfy the governor, who, after +receiving our money and giving us leave, came down with seven or eight +hundred men, demanding more money, and if we had not kept a strong guard +at the spring, would have put us from it after our money was paid. The +5th, the wind being fair off shore, we weighed anchor and departed, and +in the evening were abreast of a headland eight leagues S.E. by E. from +Brinjan, from which to Cape Comorin it is seven leagues E. two-thirds S. +At six in the evening of the 7th, we had Cape Comorin N.N.E. one-third +N. five leagues off, and had soundings in thirty fathoms. And on the +19th June we were in Bantam roads, when Captain Ball and Mr Pickham came +on board. + +On the 24th I visited the pangran, to accommodate matters for Captain +Ball, who had arrested a Chinese junk for certain debts they owed our +factory, making offer to restore the junk, if the pangran would give us +justice, which he gave me his word to do. I went to him again on 6th +July, accompanied by Mr Ball, Mr Rich, Mr Pickham, and several other +merchants, when he was so inveterate against Mr Ball, that he refused to +see him. On which I sent him word, that Mr Ball had brought the bills of +our debt due by the Chinese, and was the only person among us who could +explain the transactions between our factory and the Chinese, of which I +was entirely ignorant. The messenger returned, saying that Mr Ball could +not be received, on which we all left the court. + +The 1st September, having the wind off the land, we weighed in the +morning, and stood for point Ayre, keeping in seven fathoms till within +three miles of the point, where one cast we had a quarter less seven, +and the next cast only three fathoms. Some supposed we here touched, but +it was not perceived by me. Off this point there is a shoal almost even +with the surface of the water, but having seven fathoms within two +cables length of its edge. This afternoon, while standing towards three +Dutch ships that rode right in the fair-way, and when within a mile of +them, our ship grounded; but, God be praised, we got her off again +without any hurt, and so into the bay, where we again fell in with a +shoal, of which we came within two cables length, which lies one and a +half league from the Flemish islands. We got safely into the road of +Jacatra, [now Batavia road] in the afternoon of the 2d September, having +been providentially delivered from three several dangers the day before, +of which may we be ever thankful. + +The 19th, the Angel, a Dutch ship of 500 tons, came in from Amboina, +laden with nutmegs and cloves, and departed again on the 25th. Early in +the morning of the 26th, I went to visit the king, and found him in a +good humour, and conferring with him upon some former business, we came +to a conclusion before I left him, to the following purpose: That he was +to give us a convenient piece of ground for building upon, for which we +were to pay 1500 dollars, and were to be free from all customs on +exports and imports on payment of 800 dollars yearly. + +§2. _Dutch Injustice, and Sea-fight between them and Sir Thomas Dale_. + +The 27th of September, Mr Bishop arrived from Jappara in the roads in a +proa, in which was a _Cogee_, bringing a letter from the Matron to +Captain Ball, wherefore I sent him away to Bantam that night. He left +two English behind him at Jappara, one of whom had fled from the Dutch. +He likewise brought letters from several of our people who were +prisoners in the Moluccas, and one of these was directed to me, from Mr +Richard Tatten, in which he complained much of the gross usage of the +Dutch, who would hardly allow them a sufficiency of rice to subsist +upon, and who constantly clapped them in irons, on every idle rumour of +the coming of our ships. + +On the evening of the 30th October, Cornelius Marthen, who commanded the +French ship taken by the Dutch, came into the roads, and came aboard my +ship that same night. After some discourse, he told me we had six ships +coming from England for these seas, commanded by Sir Thomas Dale, for +some special business at the Moluccas, whither he was bound with the +Stathouder, the Neptune, and this French prize, to wait the coming of +good friends. The 27th, in the evening, we had four feet and a half +water in our hold, which we freed in two hours with both our pumps, and +kept under afterwards with one pump, till next morning about ten +o'clock, when we let down a sail wadded with oakum, which fortunately +stopped our leak. The 31st, I found an excellent place for putting our +ship on the careen, on a small island within Taniam point, in the bay of +Bantam, on which we made all preparations to remove to that place. + +The Rose arrived from Tecoo on the 15th of November, bringing news that +the Hollanders had established a Factory there soon after ours was +dissolved. The 19th, the Moon, Clove, Samson, and Peppercorn arrived +from England, and anchored between Vium point and Pulo Paniang. +Perceiving the Clove to be admiral, I went first on board her, taking +such fresh victuals as we could spare. I here found Sir Thomas Dale +admiral, and Mr Jordain president, and learnt that they had lost company +of the Globe to the westward of the Cape, and, what was far worse, they +had left the Sun, the flag ship, in great danger of being cast away on +the isle of Engano, the whole fleet having much difficulty to double +that island. They had afterwards waited two days for the Sun, but she +had been bilged on the rocks, as we afterwards learnt, to our great +regret. In the morning of the 22d, these ships sailed into Bantam roads, +and on passing the island where our ship lay, we saluted them with +fifteen guns we had planted on the shore, and struck my flag in +compliment to Sir Thomas Dale, who was admiral of that fleet. + +Two boats arrived on the 28th from Engano, with sixty-eight men +belonging to the Sun, bringing the lamentable news of the loss of that +ship, with many of her company, on, that island. The 29th, the Globe +arrived in the morning, and this day our leak broke out afresh, but was +quickly stopped by removing the bonnet.[262] The 30th, our ship being +entirely cleared from stem to stem, the carpenters went below to search +for the leak; and as they passed forwards, removing the lining as they +went, they found an auger hole left open in the middle of the keel, in +the foremost room save one, which hole was four inches and three +quarters about, and, had it sprung upon us while at sea and alone, would +have tired out our whole company in twenty-four hours. In this the great +mercy of God was manifest, that it never broke out upon us but when we +had a fleet along with us for our aid. + +[Footnote 262: Perhaps this means by shifting the wadded sail.--E.] + +A fast being proclaimed to be held on board the fleet, and the exercise +to be in the James on Sunday the 3d December, Mr Wren, the chaplain of +the Sun, preached in the morning, and our own minister, Mr Copland, in +the afternoon. This day the Bee sailed for Engano, in hopes to recover +some money and goods belonging to the Swan, from the inhabitants of that +island. The 4th, a Dutch ship, called the Black Lion, arrived from +Patania, and rode to the westward of Pulo Paniang. As Mr Denton was well +acquainted among the Dutch, he was sent aboard in the barge to enquire +whence she came. On coming aboard, he met an old acquaintance, Hendrick +Janson, who had been a long time chief factor for the Dutch in Patania. +He, and another inferior factor, came aboard the Moon along with Mr +Denton, where they were well entertained till Sir Thomas Dale came on +board, and were soon after set ashore at Bantam. That same night we held +a council, when it was determined to proceed before day with four ships, +the Moon, Clove, Globe, and Samson, against the Black Lion, the better +to prevent her escape. At break of day on the 6th, we were close around +her, and after a short parley, they yielded their ship, on condition of +being allowed to land with all their private property; and we brought +her that same day near the island, among the rest of our fleet. + +The Bee returned on the 14th, having been forced back by contrary wind, +and unable to get through the straits. On the 16th, twenty Portuguese +came on board the James Royal, who had fled from the Dutch at Jacatra, +and whom we received kindly. This evening we were ready to sail, having +eleven ships, great and small, and being in hopes to drive the Dutch +from Jacatra. Our fleet consisted of the following ships:--The Moon, in +which Sir Thomas Dale sailed as admiral; the Gift, in which I sailed as +vice-admiral; the Unicorn, Clove, Globe, Samson, Pepper-corn, Thomas, +Bee, Rose, and Black Lion. We left behind us the James Royal, the +Advice, and our prize, because the James was not ready, and the other +two had most of her provisions and stores on board. + +We sailed in the morning of the 19th, and anchored that evening between +Pulo Paniang and Pulo Tunda. In the evening of the 20th, we anchored +with our whole fleet about a league to the northward of Hector island. +This night we sent a barge to the Flemish islands, where they found no +persons on the southern island: but there lay there a Dutch galley, +which they set on fire, and so returned on board. That same evening we +saw seven Dutch vessels in the bay of Jacatra. Early in the morning of +the 21st, they all stood out towards us till near the islands, when they +anchored all together, and we stood towards them in the afternoon, +coming to anchor about a mile to windward of their fleet. In the +evening, we held a consultation on board the Moon, when it was resolved +to assault the Butch fleet in the following manner:--The Globe and +Samson were appointed to assail the Sun, and the Thomas was to pass in +between them, filled with combustible matter as a fire-ship, to set the +Sun on fire. The Moon and Clove were to attempt the Golden Lion; the +Gift and Bee were to assail the Angel; the Unicorn and Rose were to +attack the Devil of Delft; and the Pepper-corn was ordered to surprise +the burger-boat come from Jambee, which rode about three leagues from +the rest, and whose boat, with thirteen men, had been intercepted by our +barge, while making for the Dutch fleet, about seven this evening. This +arrangement being written down, we departed, every man to his own +particular charge. + +After we were gone, the admiral, Sir Thomas Dale, sent his boat to the +Thomas for three _sackers_, which kept them at work till next morning at +eight o'clock, so that the Hollanders were all away before these guns +were got on board the Moon. We were then all in a Burly-burly to weigh +and get out to sea, that we might have sea-room, and the advantage of +the turn of the tide, which we at length attained, getting without the +isles of Point Aire. In the mean time, the Dutch fleet passing between +these isles and the main of Java, anchored that night on the coast of +Java, and our fleet in the offing, without the islands. On the 23d, in +the morning, the Dutch fleet stood off to the westwards, close under +_Anti-Lackie_, in which course the Devil of Delft borrowed so near, that +she got aground, and remained fast for a quarter of an hour. On seeing +this, we made towards them, but she was got off before we could get any +thing near, when she and all the rest of their fleet stood to the +northwards. As our fleet had the weather-gage, we _paid room upon +them_[263] till we came within shot, and then the Moon, commanded by our +admiral, Sir Thomas Dale, began the fight with the headmost ship of the +enemy, called the San. The battle continued for the space of three +hours, during which time we spent upon them some 1200 cannon-shot, when +we left them for the night, they standing so for to the northwards, that +they got the _burger-boat_ again into their company, and then anchored +about half a league from us to the westwards, where they remained all +night. + +[Footnote 263: This antiquated expression evidently means bearing down +upon them to leewards.--E.] + +Both fleets weighed anchor on the 24th, ours plying to the westwards to +gain the wind, and the Hollanders ran in shore towards Point Aire. In +the mean time, we descried three sail coming before the wind from the +westwards, which at length we perceived to be the Little James, the +Hound, and the Francis. By and bye we joined altogether, and chased the +Dutch fleet through the bay of Jacatra, to its eastern point, where we +all came to anchor for the night. During the night, the Dutch from +Jacatra sent a junk filled with combustible matter, and on fire, which +came so near our fleet that we were fain to weigh our anchors and get +out of her way. The 25th, being Christmas-day, we again saw the Dutch +fleet standing to the eastwards, and we sent our barge to follow them +all night, to see what course they took, because we had left the James +Royal in the bay of Bantam, with the Advice and our prize, which they +might have surprised, if they got to Bantam before us, as there was no +ship of force but the James, and she was unprepared, being busied in +taking in her goods and stores, after being emptied to find her leak. + +The 27th of December, after midnight, the Black Lion, our Dutch prize, +was set on fire by the carelessness of three wicked fellows, and burnt +to the water's edge. The president went ashore on the morning of the +30th, to wait upon the king of Jacatra, accompanied by Mr Henry Jackson, +when an unfortunate shot carried away his leg, of which wound he +died.[264] + +[Footnote 264: It appears in the sequel that it was Jackson who lost his +leg and life though the text leaves it dubious whether he or the +president.--E.] + +The 1st of January, 1619, the James Royal, the Advice, and the prize, +joined us from Bantam. The 2d, Sir Thomas Dale went ashore to Jacatra to +visit the king, and to learn what were his intentions respecting the +Dutch fort. The king gave to both him and the president much +satisfaction, in words at least, promising to grant the English any +reasonable conditions, if they would assist him to surprise the Dutch +castle. This morning, before day, the Francis departed for Puloroon, +with provisions for the relief of Mr Nathaniel Courthop and his +companions. The 6th we held a council of war aboard the Moon, when it +was determined that we should land from our greater ships six pieces of +large cannon, three culverines, and three demi-culverines, with a +proportional store of powder and shot, to assist the king of Jacatra +against the Dutch; that Sir Thomas Dale was to remain in that road with +eight sail, to cover this business, while five ships, under my command, +were to ply up for the straits of Sunda, to lie in wait for the Dutch +ships. + +The 25th, we got into the road of Becee, and anchored in fifteen +fathoms, about two miles from the shore; the S. point of Becee bearing +S.W. 1/4 W. and the N. point _Sabaicas_, which shut in the western isle +of Pirio Tigs, bearing N. by W. three leagues off. We watered our ships +on the 27th and 28th, and cut wood. I and Mr Coytmore, with several +other masters, went twice ashore to view the harbour, which we found to +be an excellent place of refuge for a small fleet against a superior +enemy. The 31st, by order of the president, we repaired with our fleet +into Bantam roads. + +The 1st February, Captain John Jourdan the president came on board, who +acquainted me with all that had taken place between them and the Dutch, +in regard to the castle of Jacatra, during my absence, the Dutch having +agreed to deliver up that fort to the English, on condition of being +allowed to depart with bag and baggage, and a ship, _for two thousand +rials of eight_, to carry them to the coast of Coromandel.[265] Sir +Thomas Dale arrived in Bantam roads on the 4th, with the Moon, Clove, +James, Pepper-corn, Hound, and Advice. As the pangran of Bantam had +practised underhandedly with the Dutch to have the castle of Jacatra +delivered into his hands, by which we had been unjustly deprived of that +acquisition, we agreed, in a general consultation, that the president, +and all the rest of the principal persons of our factory at Bantam, +should repair on board, and get all our goods and provisions put aboard +the ships. Accordingly, we were occupied from the 10th to 16th, both +inclusive, in getting all the money and goods belonging to the +honourable Company on board. During this time, the pangran sent several +obscure persons to the president, as of their own accord, to enquire the +reason of his departure, pretending that the pangran had given no just +cause for leaving the country. Upon this the president drew up a +memorial, enumerating the several grievances and wrongs which the +English had suffered from him, meaning to have it translated into the +Javan language, and then to be transmitted to the pangran. + +[Footnote 265: This agreement was crossed by the Pangran of Bantam, who +gave us leave to beat the bush, and thought to have caught the birds +himself, but was deceived in the end.--_Purch._] + +The 17th, advice was received from Mr Ufflet, at Jacatra, that the Dutch +were daily occupied in repairing and strengthening their fortifications; +and that, when the messengers of the pangran demanded the surrender of +their fort, with part of their money, goods, and ordnance, they gave for +answer, That all these things were the property of their masters, which +therefore they could not give away. We this day received news of two +Dutch ships in the road of Jacatra, and that same night Sir Thomas Dale +set sail with eight ships in quest of them, while I remained with four +to attend upon the president. The 26th, having certain intelligence that +four Holland ships were at anchor in the mouth of the Straits of Sunda, +I went out that same evening to look for them, with the James, Gift, +Unicorn, and the Little James. Next morning we anchored near Pulo +Paniang, to take in water, and to put our ships into order, by taking +aboard some planks that were alongside. + +We weighed again in the morning of the 1st March, making sail towards +the mouth of the Straits, where we observed the two Dutch ships at +anchor near the island of Tamporan, about three leagues to the westwards +of Viun, or Palambangan point. We immediately made all sail towards +them, while they, as in a careless manner, plied to and fro, having +their topsails half mast down. At length, as we drew nigh, the Dutch +admiral and all the rest of his ships bore up with my ship, which was +most to windward, and gave us two shots, one of which went through the +ship's side under the half-deck, and the other through the steerage. +They had no sooner begun than they were as quickly answered from my +ship, and in such measure, that, in the space of two hours, they became +as quiet as lambs; their admiral, who gave the onset with so much +arrogance, being the first to run away, followed by all the rest. We +chased them till night, and then finding them too swift of foot, we gave +over the chase, standing over towards Pulo Tunda. We came to anchor +again on the 2d of March in the road of Bantam, on which day we had +intelligence that one of the two ships lately come to Jacatra had got +aground near the castle, and had been set on fire by themselves on +seeing Sir Thomas Dale. The other ship, which had taken in a valuable +loading from the castle, was also cast away on some rocks, ten leagues +east of Jacatra. + +On the 4th, we had a letter from John Powell, residing at Jacatra, +stating that Sir Thomas Dale had sailed on the 1st, with the Moon, +Hound, Rose, and Bee, in search of the stranded Dutch ship. The 14th we +heard from Sir Thomas that he had got almost within shot of the four +Dutch ships we met with, but had been taken by a dead calm for twelve +hours, succeeded in the night by a tempest, which scattered them so far +asunder by next morning, that they lost all hopes of the chase, and had +therefore returned to Point Ayre, whence he proposed bringing the Moon +immediately to Bantam, leaving the rest of his ships to take in +provisions at Jacatra. In a consultation as to the best course to be +taken with the fleet, it was resolved to go to the coast of Coromandel, +which we were informed was a good country for recovering the health of +our men, and abounding in rice, wheat, butter, and other, provisions, +which could not be procured here for any money. + + +§3. _Departure for Coromandel, with Occurrences there, and the Death of +Sir Thomas Dale,--Capture of English Ships by the Dutch; and Occurrences +at Tecoo_. + +On Monday the 19th of April, 1619, all our ships being together in +Bantam roads, with three Chinese junks riding among us, it was resolved +in council to execute the commission given us by the Honourable Company, +by appropriating to them the goods in these junks, in payment of former +debts due by the Chinese. Next day _Kewee_ came aboard to the president, +accompanied by the three _nockhadas_, or captains of the junks, to know +his intentions. He gave him the following answer:--If the young king of +Bantam would displace the pangran, who had treated us with so much +injustice, he would then return on shore and _bichar_[266] with him, and +restore the junks. The 28th, being ready to sail, intending to go for +Morrogh to take in water and unload the junks, we descried a sail coming +from the westwards round Palinbangan point, which turned out to be a +Portuguese frigate, captured at Jasques, manned by twenty Englishmen, +and sent by Captain Bonnar with advice to the president at Bantam. We +learnt from these men that Sir Thomas Roe, the lord ambassador to the +Mogul, was gone for England in the Ann Royal, having left the country +with great honour and reputation to himself, and much advantage of the +Honourable Company. Bodman, who was the cause of setting the Black Lion +on fire, was hanged on the 22d of May, and that same night we set sail. + +[Footnote 266: This unexplained term probably means to make peace.--E.] + +The 30th May, Sir Thomas Roe stood in with his fleet under the island, +while we held on our course for Masulipatam, having the Unicorn, Gift, +and Bee in our company. The 30th June we anchored in nine fathoms, about +two leagues from the coast of Coromandel, where we rode four days, +being hardly able to visit each other in all that time, owing to W.S.W. +winds, and a continual current setting to E.N.E. The surf also broke so +lofty on the beach, that we durst not attempt landing with any of our +boats. We were at length able to communicate together, when Mr Roberts, +the master of the Unicorn, gave us notice of a bay on this coast in the +latitude of 17° N. about five leagues to the eastwards of Nassapore, +[Narsipore] where there was good riding during the westerly monsoon. +This was exactly what I wanted, having no hope to recover Masulipatam +against wind and current. We accordingly set sail on the 4th, in the +morning, and stood to the eastwards, the coast trending W.S.W. and +E.N.E. And having run about nine leagues by estimation, with the wind +and current, we found the land to turn away N. and N. by W.[267] giving +me hopes of a good road. At this point of land there cometh put a great +river,[268] by the stream of which there has been raised a reef or +shoal, extending half a mile into the sea from the point, and +occasioning a smoother road. Bringing that sand to bear S.S.W. there is +good and safe anchorage in six and a half fathoms, two miles from the +land. Two leagues north from this point, which, for distinction, I name +Cape Comfort, there issues forth another branch of the same river, by +which the headland is made an island, and off the mouth of this river +there is likewise a long spit of sand, which is dry at low water. + +[Footnote 267: Obviously rounding Cape Godawery, in lat. 16° 83' N.] + +[Footnote 268: One of the two main branches forming the Delta of the +Godawery.--E.] + +The 4th of July I sent the boat belonging to the Unicorn into the second +branch of the river, which we called Mullet Sound, to see if they could +discover any town where a guide might be procured, to conduct Robert +Pickering and William Clarke to Masulipatam, by whom we proposed sending +a letter to Mr Methwould. Our boat returned on the morning of the 6th, +reporting that a guide had been procured at a little village three +leagues up the river. They likewise brought aboard twenty hens, which +they had bought for two shillings. The 8th, the barge returned from +Captain Ball with seventy-one sheep and goats, and thirty-nine hens, +having left Captain Ball and others at a town called _Narsapela_, six +leagues up in the country. The 12th, Mr Methwould came from Masulipatam +in one of the country boats, and brought with him twenty hogs, two large +jars of arrack, six goats, and two baskets of bread. He also brought us +news of a Dutch ship richly laden, then in the port of Masulipatam, and +ready to depart for Holland. + +In the evening of the 26th, I went in the barge to seek out some bar or +creek by which we might reach Coringa, the principal town in these parts +near the sea side. That same night, I got over the bar of Coringa, which +place I came to about two miles up the river, and was well received by +the principal persons of the place, who were very ready to trade with +us, and sent notice that same night of my arrival to the governor of +Vingeron. Next morning, having rowed about three miles up the main +river, and two miles up a little creek, we had sight of Vingeron, about +twelve miles off.[269] I now landed, and walked towards Vingeron; but, +before I reached it, the governor sent his horse for me, with all the +music the place afforded; and among these instruments there were two +great brass horns instead of trumpets. The governor received me very +kindly, but more kindly my present, which consisted of two pieces of +China velvet, and six pieces of China taffeta. Our compliments ended. I +took leave of him, when he caused me to be conveyed in his own palanquin +to a house near at hand, which he had appointed for my lodging. + +[Footnote 269: The town of Rajahmundry exactly answers to these +circumstances, in reference to Coringa, and is in fact the head town of +the province in which Coringa is situated.--E.] + +I returned on board the James on the 1st of August, when I learnt, to my +sorrow, that the shallop belonging to the Unicorn had been cast away +three days before, near Ponara, on which occasion Mr Harris was drowned, +together with two of the coxwain's crew, and a black; Captain Spaulding, +Mr Yard, and others, escaping with much difficulty. In the morning of +the 2d, the governor of Vingeron came aboard to see our ship, expecting +some great present; on which occasion I gave him a piece of China +damask, and four pieces of taffeta, which gave him more delight than the +sight of a thousand ships, and he departed when he found he got nothing +more by begging. The 23d I caused all the men to come on board, +intending to proceed for Masulipatam, and this evening we got on board +150 goats, to serve us for fresh provisions at sea. The 24th there +arrived a ballegat from Narsepore, bringing twenty-six candees of +garavances, a candee of butter, and an hundred gallons of arrack.[270] I +also, had letters from Masulipatam, announcing the melancholy news that +Sir Thomas Dale had died at that place on the 9th of August. + +[Footnote 270: Though not so expressed, these seem to have been intended +for the use of the English ships.--E.] + +In the morning of the 6th September, having rode most part of the +preceding night in nineteen fathoms, about three leagues S.S.E. from the +bar of Narispore, and having the wind at N.W. we again set sail toward +Masulipatam,[271] and anchored at night four leagues to the eastward of +that place. Off the river of Narsipore we found the current to set by +day to the S.S.E. and N.N.E. in the night, at the rate of half a league +an hour. In the morning of the 7th we could see the English ships in the +road of Masulipatam, in which road we came to anchor in the evening, +finding here the Moon, Clove, Globe, and Advice, which last being found +unserviceable, was here cast off, and her stores and provisions put on +board the Moon and Clove. Next day, Mr Spaulding, Mr Ball, and Mr +Methwould came aboard the James, giving me a report of all matters that +had passed in my absence, as also a state of the Company's business. I +accompanied them ashore in the afternoon, that we might the better +consult together how to proceed in the important concerns committed to +our charge. The first thing proposed was the union of both fleets, which +was thought adviseable, and I was made choice of as admiral and chief +commander of the whole ships and men thus united, according to the +direction of the Honourable Company. + +[Footnote 271: The true name of this place is Mutchelipatnam; in Purchas +it is called Messulapitan and Masulpatam.--E.] + +The 18th of October, a ship belonging to Masulipatam arrived from Mokha, +by which we had news of the Lion being at Mokha, having a small frigate +or bark in her company. The same day the Bee arrived from +Narsipore-pete, with provisions for the fleet. The 19th, the Dragon's +Claw came from Narsipore-pete[272] almost laden with rice and +paddy.[273] On Thursday the 9th December, Mr Ball, Mr Methwould, and the +other merchants who were to remain in the country, went ashore in the +afternoon. In the morning of Friday the 10th, we left the road of +Masulipatam, and anchored in the afternoon off the headland, to wait for +the Pepper-corn, which came to us in the evening. By my estimation, the +difference of longitude between the island of Engano and Masulipatam is +19° 30' of a great circle; and, although this does not give the true +longitude in these parts near the equator, as custom has so called it, I +do, that I may not savour of innovation. + +[Footnote 272: This may designate the road of Narsipore; but petah +usually signifies in India the suburb or town connected with a +fortress.--E.] + +[Footnote 273: Paddy is rice in its natural state as it comes from the +plant on which it grows; rice is paddy deprived by art of its coarse +husk.--E.] + +Next morning, very early, we descried the land of Sumatra, the hill of +Passaman bearing E.N.E 1/2 N. twelve leagues distant,[274] and the high +land of Priaman E. 1/2 S. fourteen leagues off. We here met with two +shoals, within a mile of each other, E. and W. The Gift came over the +eastermost, and had not less than four and a half fathoms. I sent the +Claw over the other, on which were four fathoms where she first crossed, +but only two fathoms in returning, a little more to the northward. About +nine this morning the wind came to the S.E. and so continued till three +in the afternoon, by which time we had got to the southward of all the +shoals; and so, with little wind, we spent the night between these +shoals and the island of Battoo, [Batoa.] In this situation, a sagging +current bore us to the northwards near the shoals, which, if it had set +S.E. as formerly experienced, it ought to have carried us near to Tecoo. + +[Footnote 274: Purchas must here have omitted a part of the text, +particularly the series of dates between Masulipatam and Passaman in +Sumatra. As the text now stands, it would seem as if they had gone from +Masulipatam to the coast of Sumatra, a run of about 1600 miles, in one +night, an utter impossibility. But from the context, instead of the 11th +December, 1619, the day after leaving Masulipatam, it would appear they +reached the coast of Sumatra on the 23d January, 1620, giving forty-four +days for the run across the bay of Bengal.--E.] + +The 24th, in the evening, we had sight of the isles of Tecoo, and came +to anchor about eight o'clock, in forty-four fathoms, these isles +bearing E. by N. seven leagues off. The 25th, with the first of the +tide, we again weighed and steered for Tecoo; and, as we drew near, we +espied three sail standing to the northwards, which came to anchor near +the coast that night, while we anchored with our whole fleet about a +league without them. Next morning they weighed anchor and joined us, +when we found them to be the Palsgrave, Elizabeth, and Hope. From them +we had the doleful news of the Dragon, Bear, Expedition, and Rose, +having been taken by six Dutch ships, while at anchor, within the isles +of Tecoo; as also that the Star had been taken by the Dutch in the +straits of Sunda. They also said that the Hollanders had sent four great +ships, doubly manned, in quest of the Samson and Hound, and that they +were exceedingly doubtful as to the safety of these ships. Thus the +English ships now taken by the Hollanders were almost equal in number to +our three fleets now joined in one under my command. + +On Monday the 31st January, 1620, we held a consultation aboard the +James Royal as to our future proceedings, when it was unanimously agreed +to go to Acheen, in hopes to meet our ships from Surat, that we might +keep our force together, according to the instructions of the Honourable +Company. Our chief reasons for this proceeding were the want of rice and +other provisions, which could not at this time be had at Bantam; +secondly, the strong naval force of the Hollanders, as we did not think +it prudent to risk the entire property now belonging to the Company in +India upon such desperate terms, as the Dutch had four ships for every +one of ours; and, lastly, which was an imperious necessity, that we +might careen three of our ships, the James, the Gift, and the Unicorn, +which could not be much longer deferred without imminent hazard. For all +these reasons, we resolved to proceed for Japan, where, as we were given +to understand, all things necessary for careening our ships, and +abundance of provisions for our relief, were to be had. + +The 11th, Mr Mills arrived in the Bee from Priaman, with 300 sacks of +very good rice, and eleven hogsheads of oil, giving us great +encouragement to send there again. The 12th, the Claw was sent off for +Pedang and Cuttatinga, to procure rice and other provisions; and, on the +15th, the Bee was sent back to Priaman for more rice and oil. The 19th +the Claw returned with thirty-four bags of rice, 16,000 cocoa-nuts, and +ten goats; and the same night the Bee came back with 980 sacks of rice, +procured with much difficulty by Mr Mills, merchant of the Elizabeth. + +The 3d March we departed from the road of Tecoo, intending first to +touch at _Mintaon_, on purpose to dispatch the Bee for England, and +thence to go for Acheen, in hopes of meeting the Charles and the Ruby +from Surat. The 30th March we all anchored in the bay of Samanca, about +a mile from shore, where we took in wood, water, and other necessaries. +Next day we sent to recall the Bee from Balembeen. The 1st April we sent +the shallop belonging to the Unicorn for Anniar, to enquire concerning +the Dutch force, and how the pangran stood affected towards us.[275] At +eleven this night, twenty-two of our men ran away with our barge. Next +morning the shallop returned from Anniar, and brought news that there +were fifteen sail of Dutch ships at Bantam and Jacatra, upon which we +resolved to proceed to Bantam, to treat with the pangram, hoping that +the Dutch _might not venture to attack us_. The Bee arrived in the +afternoon from Ballambeen, [Palimbangan.] The 6th we set sail for +Bantam, and on the 7th, between Crackastaw and Becee, we met a proa with +some of our people coming from Anniar. + +[Footnote 275: The intended voyage to Acheen seems to hate been laid +aside; perhaps the monsoon had become adverse, and forced them to the +S.E. towards Bantam.--E.] + + +§4. _News of Peace between the English and Dutch_. + +At four in the morning of Saturday the 8th April, 1620, we met the Bull, +newly come from England, bringing the joyful news of peace having been +concluded between us and the Dutch. She was accompanied by a small ship, +called the Flying Hart, with letters of advice for us, or any other of +the English ships, giving notice of the agreement and union that had +taken place between the two Honourable East India Companies of England +and Holland. We came to anchor with all our fleet in the afternoon, near +the point of Palimbangan. In the morning of the 11th, we descried the +Dutch fleet coming from Jacatra to meet us, and to congratulate with us +on the joyful intelligence of peace. General Coen was there in person, +and as soon as he came to anchor, the Holland fleet and ours began to +salute each other with peals of ordnance, to communicate the +intelligence to the natives, and to express our own joy of the happy +news of peace. + +The 12th, we came altogether into Bantam roads, the Dutch fleet +consisting of fifteen sail, besides two others of their nation which we +found already in the roads, and ours of twelve sail. This day, Mr +Janson, commander of the Dutch fleet, accompanied by their fiscal, and +divers others, came to visit me, and invited Mr Brockendon, Mr Spalding, +and myself on board the Dutch admiral's ship, where we conferred with +General Coen concerning our future conjunct arrangements. After we had +compared the articles and letters, the Dutch general agreed that we +should jointly proceed in conformity with the instructions we had +received from our Honourable Company; but he declined publishing the +articles till the arrival of some ship from Holland, with the articles +and instructions from their Company. On the 14th, in the morning, by +mutual concert between us and the Hollanders, we sent Mr Beaumont and +Philip Baduge on, shore, with one Dutch merchant, to communicate the +news of our peace and agreement to the pangran, and to inform him, as we +were now united, we only desired to have a reasonable composition with +him, through which we might remain quietly in his country, enjoying a +free trade on just and equitable conditions, as in other parts of India. +But the pangran was so much dissatisfied with the news, that he would +give no answer to their message, often times asking them why we had +become friends with the Hollanders, so that they had to return without +any answer. We sent the same message to him next day, but our messengers +were not allowed to land. + + * * * * * + +"The differences and maritime warfare which took place between the Dutch +and English East India Companies, of which some notice has been taken; +and the peace and union which are announced, as having been communicated +to their respective commanders at this time, would lead to historical +discussions and deductions, which do not properly belong to the object +of a Collection of Voyages and Travels; but which, if altogether passed +over, would leave much of the foregoing circumstances, and some that +have to be noticed in the sequel, abrupt, isolated, and almost +unintelligible. It has therefore been deemed proper to give a brief +account of these differences, and of the singular so called _union_, +which took place in consequence, extracted from the Annals of the East +India Company, vol. I. p. 201, _et seq._[276] + +[Footnote 276: This addition to §4. of the present voyage, is made by +the Editor; but almost entirely derived from the historiographer of the +East India Company.--E.] + +"When the differences and aggressions which had occurred in the spice +islands were reported in Europe, the English and Dutch Companies +presented memorials and remonstrances to their respective governments, +each complaining against the servants of the other, as guilty of +unwarrantable aggressions. In Holland, calculating on the pacific +character of King James, it was expected that the opposition to the +projects of the English for participating in the trade of the spice +islands, although of at least a tendency towards warlike aggression, +would not lead to national hostilities, but might be discussed by means +of remonstrances and negociation. + +"After long conferences between English and Dutch commissioners, for +settling the disputes between the two Companies, a treaty was concluded +at London on the 17th July, 1619; by which, after specifying an amnesty +for all past excesses, and a mutual restitution of ships and property, +the trade of the two nations in the East was declared to be free;--That +the pepper trade at Java should be equally divided;--That the English +should have a free trade at Pullicat, on paying half the expences of the +garrison;--That the English were to enjoy one third of the export and +import trade, at the Molucca and Banda islands, commonly called the +spice islands; commissioners to be appointed for regulating the trade, +and the charges of the garrisons, under their inspection, to be defrayed +in that proportion by the two Companies;--That each Company should +furnish ten ships of war for the common defence; which ships were not to +be employed to bring cargoes to Europe, but only in the carrying trade, +between one port and another in the East Indies.--The whole proceedings +arising out of this treaty, were to be under the regulation of a +_Council of Defence_, composed of four members appointed by each +Company, who were to reside in India; and this treaty was to subsist in +force for twenty years. + +"It would lead far beyond any due bounds that could be afforded in this +work, to follow out this compact, singularly weak on the part of King +James, and assuredly either contrived by his boasted _king craft_, or +devised by some wily Dutch politician, who was acquainted with his +majesty's wonderful sagacity. This union and the council of defence, +turned out a most fruitful source of advantage to the Dutch, who had +completely duped the king and government of England, and totally +expelled the English Company from any share whatever in the trade of the +spice islands; after contriving to make them pay more than two thirds of +the expence of fortifications and garrisons, instead of one third, all +of which were effectually converted to their injury and exclusion. In +the sequel of these voyages, several instances will be found, completely +illustrative of these positions; and from the year 1625, or thereabout, +the Dutch enjoyed the entire profits of the spice trade, including the +whole island of Java, till within these very few years; when, as +subjects of Buonaparte, they have been driven from every foreign +possession, and entirely excluded from all participation in the trade of +the East."--E. + +§5. _Voyage of Captain Pring from Bantam, to Patania and Japan, and +return to Jacatra_.[277] + +The 26th of April, 1620, we sailed from Bantam roads, with the James +Royal and Unicorn in company, intending, by the grace of God, to go for +Japan, there to careen and trim our ships. Mr Brockendon departed at the +same time for Jacatra with six ships; proposing, about a month after our +departure, to send five good English ships after us to Japan, that we +might have the fittest season of the year to go from thence to the +Manillas. The 27th, we took leave of this fleet, and steered towards the +north, borrowing within half a league of the eastern point of +Pulo-Tunda; and came to anchor in the evening about a league off the +N.E. point of that island, in twenty-three fathoms upon ooze, waiting +till the western stream of the tide began to return to the eastwards +which was about ten at night, when we proceeded on our course. + +[Footnote 277: Purchas gives two relations of this voyage, one brief, +"lest the longer one might interrupt the more delicate muses of some +readers with sea-sickness, the other for those that are more studious of +nautical knowledge." On the present occasion, we have preferred the more +extended narrative, and have therefore united both accounts as given by +Purchas, being the remainder of §4. joined to the whole of §5. giving +one instance of minute nautical remarks of our earlier navigators.--E.] + +The 28th at night, we anchored in 18 f. on ooze, Pulo Antekero bearing +N.E. three leagues off. Pulo Antekero bears N.N.E. 1/2 E. from Pulo +Tunda, about eight leagues distant. The depth of water between the two +islands, runs-from 16 f. to 26, and so to 22, 20, 18, 16, 14, and 12 f. +all ooze. Pulo Antekero is westernmost of the islands which extend in a +row from the bay of Jacatra, [or Batavia,] to the westward. Continuing +our course, we anchored, in the evening of the 29th, in 15 f, Pulo Kero +bearing N. by E. 1/2 E. 2-1/2 leagues off. Pulo Kero bears N.N.E. nearly +from Antekero, six leagues off. After passing halfway between these +islands we had 20, 18, 16, 14, 12 f. on ooze. At noon on the 30th we +had Pulo Kero six leagues off, S. 1/2 E. our depth continuing 13,12,11 +f. all ooze. + +At noon on the 1st May, Pulo Kero bore S. 1/2 W nine leagues, and the +depth 12 f. being just able to see that island from our top-mast head. +By observation of the sun, we were then in lat. 4° 45' S. From noon till +five p.m. our course was N.N.E. four leagues. We then anchored in 11 f. +on ooze, having Pulo Kero by estimation thirteen league S by W. This +night at nine, being still at anchor in the same place, I made the ship, +by observation of the Crozies, in lat. 4° 40' S. allowing 29° for the +complement of declination. We set sail at four a.m. of the 2d, and by +noon had run about six leagues N.N.E. the depths continuing as before, +13, 12, 11 f. By noon of the 3d our course was S. by E. five leagues, +the soundings as before, all the ground from Bantam roads hitherto being +ooze. From Bantam for the first two days, we had land and sea breezes; +afterwards, till the afternoon of the 2d, the wind was constant between +E. and S.E. when the wind came northerly, and so continued till the 3d +at noon. From Pulo Paniang to Pulo Antekero, the current set to the +westwards, somewhat strong; but from thence we found the currents more +gentle, and changing into every direction in the course of the +twenty-four hours. + +Our course from noon of the 3d till noon of the 4th was N.N.E. eleven +leagues, the depths from 12 to 10-1/2 f. From noon this day till seven +at night, we made 5-1/2 leagues N. and then anchored in 9-1/2 f. We +weighed in the morning of the 5th. having but little wind and that +variable, till half an hour after six, when it sprung up fresh at S.W. +From four to nine a.m. we made three leagues N.E. 1/2 E. and from nine +till noon only half a league N.W. by N. This day at noon we were in lat. +3° 30' S. when we descried a small island N.N.E. 1/2 E. four leagues +off, which appeared at first like a great tree rising out of the see. +From noon till six p.m. our course was five leagues N.W. We here saw two +or three hummocks like islands, N. by W. seven leagues off. From thence +till three a.m. of the 6th, we sailed W. six leagues. At six in the +evening of the 5th we had 9 f. which increased as we stood westwards in +the night, to 10, 11, and l2 f. and afterwards decreased to 8 f. where +we came to anchor. The stream by night set S.E. and by day N.W. We +weighed again at six a.m. of the 6th, and steered W.N.W. 1-1/2 league, +when we had sight of many hummocks rising like so many islands, but +which at length we perceived to be all one land. Coming now into 6-1/2 +f. we altered our course to the N.E. making our course N.N.E. till noon, +about 2-1/2 leagues; at which time, by an observation of the sun, we +were in lat. 3° 20' S. We were now in 8 f. and found the current to set +N.W. by W. About noon of this day, a junk belonging to Johor came up +with us, which had been at Cheribon in Java, and was returning to Johor. +The afternoon, we steered in with the eastern part of the hummocky land +of Banka, making our course N.N.E. 1/2 N. in which we came again to 8 f. +afterwards increasing regularly to 24 f. and then decreasing again to a +quarter less 7 f. when we came to anchor against the E. point of that +land, which bore from us N.N.E. 1/3 N. four leagues off. + +We weighed in the morning of the 7th, and stood in nearer the point, in +hopes of being able to pass through between that island and one which +lay three leagues to the E. But in our way, we found the soundings, +after increasing from 7 to 17 f. to decrease again to 6 and to one-half +less 4 f. and about two miles off the point in the fair way we had only +six feet water in the fair way, or mid-channel. To the eastwards, there +appeared many islands, and by the report of the people in the junk, the +sea is full of islands between the S.E. end of Banka and the island of +Borneo. The S.E. end of Banka now bore N.N.E. 1/2 N. about two leagues +off; and the land from this point to the entrance of the straits of +Banka, lay W. by S. the straits being thirteen leagues from us. Where we +lay at anchor, the before-mentioned point bearing N. by E. 1/2 E. 2-1/2 +leagues off, we had an observation of the sun, giving the latitude of +the ship 3° 8' S. Having little hope of finding a passage between Banka +and Borneo among these islands, by reason of the fearful shoalings we +had already met with, we resolved on the 8th to go through the straits +between the island of Banka and Sumatra, called the Straits of Banka; +wherefore we set sail, retracing as nearly as we could the course by +which we came into the present shoal water; in which course we found +still more dangerous shoalings than in our in-coming. After we had got +about eight leagues off, S.S.W. from the before-mentioned point of +Banka, we steered S.W. by W. the current setting N.W. which made our +course nearest W. by S. In this course we proceeded five leagues, and +anchored in 8 f. on ooze, about nine at night. + +In the morning of the 9th, we descried Lucepara, N.N.W. seven leagues +off, and steered towards it, till we had it N. two leagues. In this +course we passed over a spit, where we had only 4-1/2 f. and 4-3/4. But +on nearing Lucepara, we had 5-1/4 f. all ooze. We then steered N.W. by +N. till Lucepara was N.E. of us, having 5 f. and the same ground. We +then, went W.N.W. having always ooze, till we were within two leagues of +the Sumatra shore in 6 f. The isle of Lucepara bore then E.S.E. 3-1/2 +leagues off; and a hill on Banka with a deep swamp, N. by W. being about +a sail's breadth open of the point of Sumatra, which bore N. by W. 1/2 +W. from us, about three leagues off. We steered thence away with the +said point N. by W. Having 6-1/2 and 7 f. soft ground, till we came +within a league of the point, where edging too near we had but 5-1/2, +and only 4-1/2 in the boat hard by us: But, if we had kept a little +farther from the point, we might have gone in 7, 8, 9, and 10 f. all +through the strait, borrowing carefully with the lead upon the Sumatra +shore; whereas by keeping nearer to Banka than Sumatra, the soundings +are very variable, sometimes deep, and sometimes shallow, and mostly +foul ground. On the Sumatra shore, even if coming into shoal water, the +ground is mostly soft ooze, and the soundings far more regular and +certain. + +In the evening of the 12th May, having brought the N.W. point of Banka +to bear N.E. we opened two smooth hills with a little hummock between +them; one of these hills being the northermost land of Banka, and +bearing N.E. nine leagues, from the N.W. point of that island. This +night we steered N.N.E. to get through the channel between Lingan and +the N. end of Banka, having 23, 22, 20, 18, and 16 f. all ooze, till we +came near the entrance, and afterwards 15, 14, 13 f. in going through +the passage. Lingan rises at first in three islands, the northermost +being larger than both the other two, being near two leagues long and +full of hummocks. Among these three islands there are certain fragments +of isles intermixed, like so many hay-cocks, which is a good mark +whereby to know these islands. From the smooth hill which is the north +end of Banka, to the south-westermost isle of Lingan, it is N. by W. ten +leagues. From the middle of the largest isle of Lingan, which is the +north-eastermost, there is another smooth island nine leagues off, +E.N.E. 1/2 N. From that there is another flat island, and off the north +point of the round smooth island, there is a little fragment like a +rock. In the fair way between this island and Lingan, there are 14 and +13 f. the course being midway between, and to the N. to pass along by +the E. side of Bintang. This day at noon, being the 12th May, our +latitude was 1° S.[278] the greatest isle of the Lingan group being S.W. +from us five leagues, whence we estimated its latitude to be 1° 10' +nearly. + +[Footnote 278: This is an evident error, as the northern side of the +largest island of the Lingan group is exactly on the equator, and +Bintam, or Bintang, is in lat. 1° N.--E.] + +At noon of the 14th, having made way twenty-four leagues to the +northward, by aid of the wind and a current setting to the north, we had +sight of the high land of Bintang, rising with two hills and a deep +swamp or hollow between, and, as we judged, twelve leagues from us. At +this time, likewise, we had sight of three or four hummocks, S.W. by W. +eight leagues off, which seemed separate islands. We had here 20 f. our +soundings from Lingan being 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, and 20 f. From noon of +the 14th till noon of the 15th, we made twenty-seven leagues N. 1/3 W. +our soundings in these twenty-four hours being 21, 22, 23, and 24 f. +From noon till three p.m. of the 15th we made 3 1/2 leagues, and then +had sight of Pulo Laor, N.W. 1/2 N. about twelve leagues off, having +then 27 f. the ground resembling fuller's earth. At night, Pulo Laor +being N.W. by W. eight leagues off, we had 39 f. on ooze. From noon of +the 15th till eight a.m. of the 16th, we made our course N.N.W. 1/2 W. +fifteen leagues. At night of the 16th, Pulo Laor bore S.W. by S. five +leagues; the body of the island of Hermano de Layo W.S.W. 1/2 W. seven +leagues; and the S. end of Pulo Timon W. 1/2 N. ten leagues, its N.E. +end being W.N.W. 1/2 W. ten leagues. We anchored this evening within +four leagues of the N. point of Pulo Timon, in 24 f. _streamy_ ground, +that point bearing W. by S. 1/2 S. In the evening I sent my boat round +the point, where they observed a town, with a junk riding close by the +shore, and several proas fishing. One of these came to enquire what +nation our people were of, and told them there was good fresh water at +the town, with plenty of buffaloes, goats, and poultry. + +In the morning of the 17th, we sent the Unicorn's longboat along with +ours to the town, whence they came back in the evening with four butts +of water each, not willing to fill more, as it was brackish. They found +at the watering-place a junk belonging to Johor, fitted out for war, +having twenty men armed with fire-arms, besides lances and javelins. +They reported that they had taken a Chinese junk, which they had sold on +the coast of Johor; the nokhada sending me word, that he would assist me +against the Portuguese at the hazard of his life. In the bay next to the +southwards of Pulo Timon, we found excellent fresh water, but could not +conveniently take it in by means of our long-boat, which drew five feet +water when loaded. Having thus spent the day to little purpose, we set +sail at the beginning of the night, directing our course for Patane, +and steering N. all night with little wind. + +At noon of the 18th, we were in the latitude of 3° 40' N. At four p.m. +we had sight of Pulo Tingoran, N.N.W. fifteen leagues off. At night we +passed by Tingoran, about six leagues to the eastwards, having 28, 30, +and 32 f. on soft ground. At six a.m. of the 19th, Tigoran bore W.S.W. +seven leagues from us, when we had thirty-six f. soft ground. At noon of +this day we were in lat. 5° 30' N. Tingoran bearing S. 1/3 E. fourteen +leagues off, by which we estimated the latitude of that island to be 4° +50 N. We had likewise, at noon, the south isle of Pulo Rowdon, [Ridang,] +N.W. by W. seven leagues off. The same night at eight, I observed the +croziers, making the latitude of the ship 5° 48' N. At this time, the +largest of the Ridang isles, which is the eastermost, bore from us due +W. four leagues distant. From eight this night, till noon of the 20th, +our course was nearly N.W. by W. nine leagues, our sounding being from +28 to 17 f. The northermost of the Pulo Ridang isles was then S. 1/3 E. +four leagues off, being a round hummock, much like Pomo in the gulf of +Venice, but somewhat higher and more complete. These isles consist of +good high land, having fair depth all along their eastern side to +seawards, and I am told have a free and safe channel between them and +the main land. There are thirteen or fourteen islands in this group, +great and small. + +From noon of the 20th till eight in the morning of the 21st, our course +was W.N.W. nine leagues. We saw two hills by the water-side, bearing W. +and five leagues off, resembling two great tortoises. From Pulo Tingoran +all the way to Patani, the land up the country is very high, while that +just within the coast is low, with a sandy beach. This is the case for +at least twenty leagues south of Patani, but how much farther I know +not. In the afternoon of the 20th, while standing towards the two hills +just mentioned as resembling tortoises, we came from 17 into 14 and 13 +f. with hard ground; and as we drew nearer these hills, the depth again +increased to 19 f. on ooze, and then shoaled again to 18 and 17 f. on +ooze. + +The 21st of May, being Sunday, from eight a.m. to seven p.m. our course +was N.W. 3/4 W. thirteen leagues, keeping mostly within four leagues of +the low sandy shore, the depth all the way being 15, 14, and 13 f. We +then anchored in 13-3/4 f. streamy ground, the northermost point in +sight, falling down from a reasonably high land at the far end of the +low land, bore from us W.N.W. 1/2 N. near 3-1/2 leagues off. S.E. by S. +from this point, six leagues off, there is a rock, as high above water +as the hull of a small ship, which we passed about 1-1/2 league on its +E. side, finding no alteration in the soundings. This point I named the +Gurnet's Head. From this point, the land trends W.N.W. and W. by N. all +the way to the entrance into Patani roads, being all low land from the +Gurnet's Head to the point of the road, this point being the lowest of +all. The distance from the Gurnet's Head to that low point is six +leagues, all the way of fair depth till coming near the low point of the +road, to which a good birth must be given, as there lies a shoal from it +half-way over to the western shore, wherefore it must not be approached +too near, till you find in the first place the shoaling of the western +shore, which is the softest ground. From the low point, in going across +the bay to the western shore there are only from 5 f. to 4 1/2 when in +the road; and then the low point bears from the anchorage, E.N.E. 1/3 E. +the highest mountains in the western side of the bay bearing S.S.W. 1/3 +W. + +We anchored in the road of Patani on Thursday the 25th of May, when we +found the Sampson and a Dutch pinnace there at anchor. I went ashore the +day before to the English factory, where I found Mr Adam Denton and Mr +Richard Welding, lately come from Jambee in Sumatra in a proa, with +several of the Sampson's people, who were all rejoiced to see our ships +coming into the port. On getting to the English house, I told Mr Denton +that my chief purpose for coming here was for arrack and fresh victuals, +of which we were in great need, upon which he gave immediate orders to +procure every thing we needed, so that in six days we were supplied with +sixteen butts of arrack and arrack-apee; three butts of which last we +had from the Dutch, for which courtesy we were chiefly obliged by their +anxiety to have us away. We had also beeves, goats, and poultry, in +abundance. We also bought here _dammar_ and oil, for the purpose of +repairing our ships, as I understood these things were dear at Japan. I +here found a small frigate or country bark, which had been bought by the +English; and as she was of no great use there, it was agreed that she, +with most of the English sailors, should attend upon us to Japan. + +We departed from Patani on the 31st May; and at seven a.m. of the 1st +June, we saw a small rock, just above water, being very dangerous for +ships bound from Patani for the point of Camboja. When this rock bore +N.N.E. 1/2 E. at the distance of a league, the high land over Gurnet +Head was S.S.W. 1/4 W. eighteen leagues off; and by computation, the low +point of Patani road was then eighteen leagues off, W.S.W. 1/2 S. After +getting out of Patani road into 7 f. the depth increased regularly to 9, +10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, and 24 f. till we got sight of the rock; and +two leagues from it we had 25 f. on ooze, as was the ground all the way +over from Patani. This day at noon, we found the latitude of the ship to +be 7° 20' N. the rock bearing W. about four leagues off. + +From that time till the 3d, at noon, our course was E. 1/2 N. forty-five +leagues, when we had sight of Pulo Hube, bearing E.N.E. 1/2 N. eight +leagues off, having 14 f. on ooze, as we constantly had for the last +forty-eight hours, the sounding being from 27 to 36 f. and thence +decreasing again to 14 f. Pulo Hube rises at first as one round hill, +and on coming nearer some high land is seen rising in hummocks, but not +above two-thirds so high as the round hill, being all one land with it. +Then another and smaller island is seen to rise, nearly of the same +height with the hummocks, and close to the larger island. At the east +end of this lesser round island, there are two little isles very near, +and a mile east of them there is a long rock like the hull of a galley. +This night we anchored in 13 1/2 f. on ooze, about three leagues from +the largest and highest isle. In the morning of the 4th we weighed, and +stood E. by S. with little wind. At six p.m. we had the body of Pulo +Hube W. by N. four leagues off. From thence we steered E. by S. and E. +till six next morning, but were so opposed by the current, that we made +our course to the northward of east. From six a.m. of the 5th till six +p.m. we ran fifteen leagues in the before-mentioned course, when we saw +a very small round isle about four leagues to the southward, having a +long flat rock S. from it about a mile, a good height above water. From +Pulo Hube till three leagues from this island, our soundings were 13, +14, 15 f. and then 15, 14, 13 f. again, all ooze. When within two +leagues of this small island, we had 13 f. on sand. + +Here we descried Pulo Condor, its N. end bearing E. by N. from this +small island about seven leagues off. This day at noon, we made our +latitude 8° 42' N. the highest land on Pulo Condor bearing from us E. +six leagues off. From Patani till we were in sight of Pulo Condor, the +wind was mostly S.S.W. This day at noon, we steered away N.E. then N.E. +by N. and in the night N.N.E. so that we made our course on the whole, +till next day at noon, N.E. by N. about twenty-four leagues, the depths +being 13 and 14 f. on ooze. At noon of the 6th, we had sight of two +hummocks on the coast of Camboja, bearing N. by E. nine leagues off, +with low land to the westwards. From Pulo Condor till we had sight of +this coast, the current set E. by N. At this time we had 12 f. on +streamy ground. The 7th at noon, we were in lat. 10° 42' N. having run +from the former noon twenty-five leagues N.E. 1/2 N. and found that the +current had carried us ten leagues to the N. of our computation. Our +depths were in these twenty-four hours, from 12, to 16, 20, and 24 f. +and then back to 20, 18, 16, 14, on sandy ground. + +From the before-mentioned two hummocks, as we coasted along, about eight +leagues from the land, sometimes more, and sometimes less, we saw high +land all the way in the inland country, and a smooth land in most places +by the sea side, about the height of the Lizard, with many plots upon it +resembling white sand, as well as the sea side. The first of these white +spots was on a point ten leagues W. of Cape Cessier, which we at first +thought had been a town with fair white houses and white walls. This +day, at noon, being the 7th, when in the lat. of 10° 48' N. that Cape +bore from us about six leagues W.N.W. 1/2 W. At noon of the 8th, we were +in lat. 11° 30' N. having gone twenty leagues N.E. 1/2 N. from noon of +the 7th. From the 8th, till noon of the 9th, we steered along shore +N.N.E. sixteen leagues, N. by E. six leagues, N. six leagues, and N. by +W. nine leagues, making our course in all N. by E. 1/3 E. thirty-six +leagues. We now had Cape Varella[279] W.S.W. eight leagues off, and were +in the lat. of 13° 13' N. This cape is called Jentam by the Chinese, +signifying a chimney in their language, because it has a sharp hummock +on the top of the hill, much like a chimney on the top of a house. From +noon of the 9th, till noon of the 10th, our course was N. two-thirds W. +twenty-six leagues; our latitude on the 10th being 14° 30' N. when we +were about ten leagues from the land. + +[Footnote 279: Cape Verelly is in lat. 12° 40' N. on the coast of Cochin +China--E.] + +The 11th, at noon, we were in lat. 16° 10' N. having run, from the +foregoing noon, thirty-three one-third leagues due N. Next noon, the +12th, we had made other twenty-six leagues, N.N.E. 1/2 N. and were in +latitude 17° 40' N. the current having set us six leagues to the N. of +our computation. This evening, at six, we descried the island of Aynam, +[Hainan] its high land bearing N.W. by N. twelve leagues, and we had run +from noon seven leagues N.E. From hence, till noon of the 13th, our +course was N.E. by E. twenty-two leagues, and we were then in lat. 18° +30' N. We this morning chased a Portuguese frigate, but she was so light +that we could not get near her. The 14th, at noon, we were in 19° 35' N. +our course having been these twenty-four hours N.E. twenty-six leagues, +the current having carried us four leagues to the N. of our reckoning; +and yet this day at noon, in seventy-three f. on ooze, our boats found +no current at all. We here saw many ripplings, like the overfalls of +some rapid tide, yet found none. At six this evening, we again anchored +our boat in sixty-eight f. on oozy sand, and found a slight current to +the southwards. By the 15th, at noon, we had ran seventeen leagues N.E. +by N. and our latitude was 28° 30' N. the current having carried us +seven leagues to the north of our reckoning. We had here forty-five f. +sandy ooze. The 16th, at noon, in 21° 20' N. we had sight of three +islands, the eastermost N.N.W. the westermost N.W. and the nearest land +nine leagues off. We had here twenty-two f. on oosy sand, the wind being +E.S.E. and very fresh; but, from Cape Verelly till now, the wind had +always blown from S.S.E. to S.W. Next morning, at eight, we had +twenty-eight f. on ooze, having run, from noon of the 16th, eleven +leagues S.W. Finding the wind to increase, we thought it better to come +here to anchor than to run back again. + +In the morning of the 18th June, the weather being somewhat fair, we +endeavoured to weigh our anchor; but when it was right apeak, the cable +gave way, though a new one, never before wetted, by which we lost our +anchor. Just at this time the Unicorn fired a gun, on which I sent +immediately to know what was amiss, and was informed she had sprung a +great leak, by which all her men were tired out with bailing. I then +sent thirty men to her aid, to ease her crew, till it might please God +they should find the leak. This day we had the wind at S.E. and stood E. +making our course N.E. till six p.m. when we again saw the former high +island ten leagues from us, bearing N.N.E. one-third E. This evening our +men returned from the Unicorn with the joyful news that the great leak +was firmly stopped. From six p.m. till midnight, we made fourteen +leagues N.E. when we had twenty f. in ooze. From that time, till five +next morning, we stood to the southwards, making a S.W. course three and +a half leagues. + +From five in the morning of the 19th, we cast about towards the land, +with the wind at S.E. making a course N.E. and at six o'clock were +within eight leagues of the before-mentioned high island, bearing from +as N. by E. At eight this morning, Mr Roberts, the master of the +Unicorn, came on board the James, to inform me that another great leak +had broke out in that ship, and that it was necessary to seek out for +some smooth place to ride in at anchor, to enable them to search out the +leak, and fit their foremast better into the step. Upon this +intelligence, I resolved to bear up under the lee of the great island, +which bore now from us N. by E. in hope to find there a smooth anchorage +for the purposes of the Unicorn. There were many more islands in sight, +both to the eastwards and westwards of us, but that being the nearest, +and the likeliest for our purpose, and only three leagues from us, we +steered for it. The night approaching, and the wind becoming dull, we +plied off and on till morning of the 20th, when the wind had come round +so much to the northwards, that we could not fetch our intended place of +anchorage. I went aboard the Unicorn this day to enquire into their +intentions and situation, when I found them all willing to stand on our +original course, as the wind was fair, and they were hopeful of being +able to overcome their leak. I therefore sent all my Lascars on board +the Unicorn, in aid of her crew, after which we stood on our course all +that day till midnight, with a fair wind and favourable weather. + +Towards midnight of the 20th June, the wind increased so much, that we +had to lay our ship a-try all night under her main-course. In the +morning of the 21st, we saw the Unicorn a league and a half astern of +us, having a foresail and spritsail out, which I afterwards perceived +was for the purpose of floating her about towards the shore. I +immediately caused our fore-courses to be made ready to float our ship +about after the Unicorn, though we had little hope of being able to +assist her in any thing, as the sea was become very rough. While our men +were throwing loose the forecourse, there came so violent a gust, that +they were obliged to furl it again, otherwise it had been blown away. +After the gust was over, we set our foresail, and, to make her wear +better round, we brailed up our main-course, part of it being blown out +of the bolt rope before the men could furl it. After that was up, we put +our helm hard a-weather, thinking the ship would come round, but all in +vain, for our ship would not wear beyond two or three points, and then +came to again. The sea was now so much grown that we durst not let fall +our spritsail, and the wind so violent that we could not loosen our +fore-topsail; and by this time the Unicorn had gone out of sight.[280] +Finding we could not wear ship, we steered away as near as we could lie +S. by E. till noon, having by that time made a course S. by E. thirteen +leagues from the southermost island we had seen over night, which I +called the Morocco Saddle, or Saddle island, because of a high hill +having a deep swamp or hollow between two peaked tops. This Saddle +island is in lat. 21° 45' N.[281] There are four or five small islands +close to its western side, and three on its eastern side. Besides which, +there are many other islands in different directions, some N.W. others +W.N.W. and W. by N. the southermost of all the islands in sight bearing +from Saddle island to the W. about fifteen leagues off. + +[Footnote 280: It will be seen in the sequel that she was lost on the +coast of China, probably run on shore to save the men's lives from the +effects of the increasing leak.--E.] + +[Footnote 281: The indicated latitude leads to one of the numerous +islands on the coast of China, at the month of the bay of Canton, about +the longitude of 113° E. from Greenwich.--E.] + +This afternoon our ship became very leaky, having suddenly four and a +half feet water in the hold, which kept both pumps going a long while +before we could free her. Towards evening, it pleased God that we +discovered three or four great leaks between wind and water; and after +our carpenters had stopped them, we had great comfort, as we could then +let the pumps stop half an hour, and afterwards free the ship in a +quarter of an hour. From this day, the 21st, at noon, till noon of the +22d, we made five leagues S.S.W. with a pair of courses, and nine +leagues S.W. by W. a-hull, having twenty-seven and a half f. in ooze. In +the afternoon of the 22d, the violence of the wind and waves began to +abate, and our ship became tighter, which plainly shewed that most of +our leaks were between wind and water, wherefore, on the first fair +weather, I caused our carpenters to search the ship's sides, where they +found and stopped many bad places, some a yard long, where the oakum was +all rotten in the seams. + +The 24th, we had sight of a great island to the N. about seven leagues +off; having a high hill on its southern end, being the island formerly +mentioned as about fifteen leagues W. from Saddle island. From thence, +till the evening of the 26th, our course was S. by W. twenty-four +leagues, the depths increasing from nineteen to thirty-six f. on ooze. +We had here a small round island S.W. by N. two leagues off, nearly in +latitude 20° 20' N.[282] This island has four small islands on its S.W. +side, but all of them considerably lower, for we saw this from the +distance of at least ten leagues, rising in the shape of a Chinese hat. +From hence, till noon of the 27th, our course was E. by N. two-thirds N. +twelve leagues. This morning at two o'clock the wind veered round to +S.S.E. and at noon was due S. From noon of the 27th, to noon of the +28th, we stood E.N.E. eighteen leagues, and had then almost forty-one f. +on ooze. Till noon of the 29th, we made other eighteen leagues E.N.E. +when we were in 21° 10' N. To the 30th, at noon, other eighteen leagues +E.N.E. To noon of 1st July, our course was E.N.E. 1/2 N. twenty-two +leagues, our latitude being then 22° 10' N. Here, from the topmast-head +we saw land N.N.W. 1/2 N. From noon this day, till seven p.m. we sailed +N.E. by N. six leagues. At six this evening we saw three Chinese +fishing-boats. + +[Footnote 282: There must be a material error here, as the latitude in +the text would carry us back to the peninsula to the north of Hainan, +more than two degrees of longitude backwards. Indeed, the text seems +corrupted in many respects, even the bearings being extremely +suspicious.--E.] + +This evening the wind came up at E.S.E. with which we stood to the +southwards; and having sprung our main topmast only a little before, we +could only bear a course and bonnet, and therefore made our way no +better than S.W. From noon of the 2d, till eight p.m. our way was S. +four leagues. Till noon of the 3d, we sailed N.N.W. 1/4 W. seven +leagues. We here saw land twelve leagues off, from N. to N.E. rising in +certain hummocks, which land I estimated to be nearly in 22° 45' N. On +the 8th, I had an observation of the Scorpion's Heart, by which I made +our latitude 22° 35' N. Next day, at noon, on observation of the sun +gave the latitude 23° 6' N. At this time we had sight of the high land +of Logosse, eleven leagues off, N.W. by N.[283] This morning we saw +eight or more fishing boats, and came within hail of one, but could not +persuade the people to come on board. + +[Footnote 283: The latitude of the text points to the coast of China in +about the longitude of 117°E. but no such name as Logosse occurs in +these parts.--E.] + +On the 10th we had sight of some small islands, one of which, rising in +form of a sugar-loaf, bore from us W.N.N. about eight leagues off.[284] +We this day hoisted out a small boat, built by our carpenters upon the +forecastle, by which we made trial of the current, and found it to set +E.N.E. At eight this evening, we anchored in 28 f. having made no way at +all this afternoon but with the current, which went at the rate of about +a mile an hour N.E. The 11th we weighed, and drove away with the current +to the N.E. having no wind. This day at noon we had sight of the high +land of Formosa above the clouds, the highest part bearing S.E. by E. +about eighteen leagues off, the nearest island on the coast of China +bearing seven leagues from us N.W. We here saw great numbers of fishing +boats all round about us, which sent little boats to us with fish, for +which we gave them double the value to encourage them to come back. At +six this evening, the wind sprung up at N.N.E. by which, and some help +of the current setting N.E. by E. we made our way nine leagues E. to the +12th at noon. Our latitude was then 25° 20' N. The high land of Formosa +being S.E. and the nearest port eight leagues off; the northern point +ten leagues E. by N. and the depth 46 fathoms on ooze. The 13th the +northern point of Formosa bore E.S.E. ten leagues off, being then in +lat. 25° 40' N. + +[Footnote 284: These appear to have been the Poughoy, or Pescadores +islands, off the western coast of Tai-ouan, or Formosa.--E.] + +The 22d of July at noon, we were in lat. 32° 40' N. the great sound of +Langasaque, [Nangasaki,] being E. nine leagues off, and the S.E. of the +Gotto isles W. by N. ten leagues off. The 23d, we arrived in a port of +the island of Firando named Cochee, [Coetch,] which is about 4 1/2 +English miles to the southwards of Firando haven.[285] On the 25th, +Captain Cox sent a great number of funnies, or _toe_ boats, to our +assistance, by the help of which we got safe in the afternoon into the +harbour of Firando, where we found the Swan and Expedition, sent hither, +as I suppose, by the Dutch, for the disgrace of our nation in this +remote part of the world. This day, before we got in, the Elizabeth +brought in with her into Coetch, a frigate, containing silks and hides, +and some sugar, her mariners being Japanese with some Portuguese, a part +of whom were friars. Captain Adams, the admiral of the united fleet, +arrived in the same place about three hours after me in the Moon, as +likewise William Johnson in the Trow. + +[Footnote 285: Coetch, about 17 miles W. by N. from Firando, the former +on the western, and the latter on the eastern side of the island.--E.] + +The 26th, a general council was held of all the English and Dutch, in +the English house at Firando, when it was resolved to call in the ships +that lay nearest the coast of _Sashma_, because we were certainly +informed that the Portuguese frigates were just arrived from Macao at +Nangasaki. The 30th, the king of _Crats_ came aboard the James, +appearing much delighted to see such a ship, demanding of the jurabassa +if this were one of the English frigates; whence we concluded the Dutch +had reported we had only small ships like frigates. The 1st of August we +held another council at the English factory, to make choice of two men, +an Englishman and a Hollander, to carry a present to the emperor. As I +could not be spared so long from the James, nor Captain Adams from his +fleet, we made choice of Mr Charles Cleavengar, commander of the +Palsgrave, and Mr Joseph Cockram, Cape merchant of the fleet, to go on +the part of the English, and Jasques le Febre of the Harlaem, and +Mathias de Brooke, were chosen on the part of the Dutch. + +On the 6th the Palsgrave arrived in Coetch roads. The Bull arrived there +on the 7th, having cut away all her masts by the board, as they said to +save the ship and goods. This day Captain Adams and I paid a visit to +the king of Firando, carrying a small present, which was well received, +and we were courteously entertained. On the 9th the king invited the +English and Dutch to dine with him, shewing respect to our nation by +placing us on his right hand, while the Dutch sat on his left, and the +first dish of every course was offered to us. + +The 4th September we had a great tuffoon from the north, which forced +the Moon on shore, and overset the Expedition, which instantly went +down. The Trow had likewise been overset, had not her master veered out +the cable, and allowed her to go on shore, stern foremost. The 5th I +sent all my men aboard the Moon to help her off when we all strove a +long time to no purpose; but she was again got off on the 13th, having +fortunately received no damage by lying so long ashore. Having every +thing taken out of the James Royal, except some bars of lead to help in +trimming her over, she was hove down on the 19th almost halfway to the +keel. The 21st we brought her down so low as to see part of her keel, +and then began to sheath her with all expedition, and in four days the +carpenters sheathed the whole of one side, from the keel up to her lower +bends. The 27th I sent a cooper, two quarter-masters, and a butcher, to +Nangasaki, to kill and salt such meat as was provided for us. + +On the 12th October, we got the James hove down on the other side to the +keel, and on this side we found four very dangerous places, where the +main plank was eaten quite through by the worms. Into each of these we +graved a piece of plank, and in one of them we drove a trunnel where +none had been before. We also nailed a piece of lead on the end of the +bolt, which had been formerly driven through the keel to stop our great +leak. Our ship was then righted, both sides being finished up to the +lower bends. The Moon was likewise finished on the 21st on both sides. +The 24th we had news that Nangasaki was greatly injured by a fire which +began in the Portuguese street, and consumed four or five of the richest +streets in the city. + +The 7th of December we departed from Firando, and anchored the same +evening in the bay of Coetch. The 16th, Captain Cleavengar and Captain +Le Febre returned to Firando from the court of the emperor, bringing the +joyful news of having succeeded in their business. I took my leave of +them on the 17th; and the wind being fair, with favourable weather, I +set sail from the road of Coetch. + +§6. _Voyage from Japan to Bantam, and thence Home to England_.[286] + +The 18th December at noon, the islands of Mexuma bore from us N.W. four +leagues off, our course from Pomo being S.S.W. twenty-five leagues. At +noon on the 19th, our latitude was 31° 32'N. the isles of Mexuma bearing +N.E. by N. nine leagues off. The 12th January, 1621, we stood in for the +coast of Sumatra, and anchored at midnight in the river of Palembangan +in twelve fathoms. We weighed again in the morning of the 13th, +steering along the Sumatra shore through the straits of Banka; and past +midnight of the 14th we got to anchor near Pulo Paniang. The 16th, +seeing four ships in Bantam roads, we weighed and stood a little way +within Pulo Paniang, when the Pepper-corn's boat came to us with the +master, Mr Morton, who told me there were two Dutch ships in the road +and one French ship, the pangran having consented to grant trade, and +that it had been agreed to share the pepper in thirds among them. I also +learnt from him, that most part of our loading was already prepared for +us at Jacatra. I set sail, therefore, in the morning of the 17th, and +arrived that evening near Antilaky; and in the evening of the 18th we +arrived in the bay of Jacatra, [now Batavia bay,] where we found the +Charles, the Gift, and the Clove, as also two Dutch ships, the Leyden +and the Sun. The Globe and the Bee were at Hector island. + +[Footnote 286: In the former subdivision of this voyage a sufficient +sample has been given of dry nautical detail of courses, bearings, +winds, and soundings, and it does not seem necessary to insert the +minute uninteresting detail of the return voyage to Bantam, which was +along the coast of China, Cochinchina and Camboja, nearly retracing the +former course.--E.] + +I here found the master of the Unicorn with several of his ship's +company, having come over in a junk, after losing his ship on the coast +of China.[287] The James here discharged her lading, and was ready to +reload for England, there being here at this time, in the Charles, +Clove, and Gift, about 600 tons of pepper and other goods, and the Bear +daily expected from Jambee with 200 more, so that we had good hope of +soon making up our loading with pepper, benzoin, cloves, and silk. +Having taken in our whole loading of pepper, except fifty-five pekuls, +and a few sapetas of silk and some cloves, I departed in the morning of +the 26th February from the road of Jacatra, and set sail for England. + +[Footnote 287: Purchas, II. 1700, informs us, that the Unicorn being +wrecked on the coast of China, the company saved themselves and part of +their goods on shore. At first the rude Chinese would have assaulted and +rifled them; but they stood on their defence, till a magistrate came and +rescued them from the hands of the vulgar, after which they had kind +usage and just dealing. They were allowed to purchase two vessels, with +all necessary provisions, for their departure, and in these, part of the +company went to Japan, and the other to Malacca.--_Purch._] + +In the afternoon of the 20th May, we arrived in the road of Saldanha, +[Table-bay,] at the Cape of Good Hope. We here found the Ann Royal and +the Fortune, two ships belonging to the honourable Company, and three +Dutch ships, the Gowda, Black Bear, and the Herring, all bound for +Bantam and Jacatra. We trimmed our ship on the 21st, and on the 22d we +sent some water-casks on shore, and set up a tent for our sick men and +coopers, landing twenty-five men as a guard for their protection. This +night I sent out sixty men, along with sixty Dutchmen, in quest of +cattle, but they returned without procuring any. + +We left Saldanha bay in the morning of the 6th June, with the wind at +S.S.E. The 21st, at six in the morning, we got sight of St Helena, and +about ten in the forenoon of the 22d, we anchored in Chappel Bay, half a +mile from the shore, in twenty-six fathoms. The 25th, we changed to the +valley leading to the lemon-trees, being the best in all the island for +refreshments. Having remained seven days at this island, where we filled +our water-casks, and got at least fifty goats and hogs, and above 4000 +lemons, we weighed anchor on the 29th, at nine a.m. The 16th of August +we saw the high land of Pico, E.N.E. about 15 leagues off. The 15th +September we got sight of the land's end of England; and on Tuesday the +18th of that month we arrived in the Downs, having been absent on this +voyage, four years, seven months, and fourteen days. + + +SECTION XI. + +VOYAGE OF THE ANN ROYAL, FROM SURAT TO MOKHA, IN 1618.[288] + + +The Ann Royal belonged to the fleet commanded by Martin Pring, of which +an ample relation has been given in the foregoing section. The present +section gives an account of a subordinate voyage, arising out of the +former, and intended for settling a trade in the Red Sea. The Ann Royal +was commanded by Captain Andrew Shilling, and this narrative is said by +Purchas, to have been extracted from the journal of Edward Heynes, who +appears to have been second merchant in the Ann.--E. + +[Footnote 288: Purch. Pilgr. I. 622.] + + * * * * * + +Sir Thomas Roe, lord ambassador from his majesty to the Great Mogul, +having given certain articles of instruction to Captain Andrew Shilling, +commander of the Ann Royal, and Joseph Salbank, Edward Heynes, and +Richard Barber, merchants in that ship, for establishing and conducting +trade at Dabul or other places in the Red Sea, as they might see +convenient, it was thought meet by Captain Martin Pring the general, +Thomas Kerridge, and Thomas Rastell, on the 12th March, in a +consultation on board the James Royal, that we should sail direct for +the Red Sea, as the season was already too far gone for going to Dabul. + +Sailing therefore from the road of Swally, we got sight of Aden on the +10th of April. The 13th, about seven in the morning, we passed the Bab, +or straits of Bab-al-Mandub, so named from an island at the entrance, or +mouth, of the Red Sea, and forming one side of the straits. About five +in the evening we came in sight of Mokha; and as night was coming on, we +cast anchor. Shortly after, a canoe came on board, sent by the governor +to enquire who we were, and what were our intentions; and having given +them an answer, they departed, having first begged a few biscuits. Next +morning we weighed, and came again to anchor a league and half from the +shore, when we saluted the town with nine guns. The water-bailey, or +shahbander, brought off, as a present from the governor, a young +bullock, two goats, with mangoes, limes, cucumbers, and water-melons. He +welcomed us in the name of the governor, and desired us to send some +persons on shore to inform the governor of the purpose of our arrival. +About three in the afternoon, there came aboard a Jew born in Lisbon, +together with an old renegado Venetian, who was in great favour with the +governor, and in his name assured us of meeting with good usage to our +content. + +The 15th, Ali Asgee, the chief scrivano, sent a present of goats and +fruits, with a message of welcome, by two old men of good condition, who +were sent by the governor to remain aboard in pledge for such of us as +were to go on shore, with many protestations of good usage. Accordingly, +Mr Salbank and I went ashore, accompanied by two linguists and an +attendant, carrying as a present for the governor, six yards of stammel +broad cloth, six yards of green, a fowling-piece and a looking-glass. +Above a thousand people were on the shore expecting our arrival, and +several officers were in waiting to conduct us to the governor. His +house was large and handsome, built of brick and stone, having a fair +gate of entrance with a porter's lodge, and several servants in waiting. +From the gate, we went into a great court, whence a winding stair of +thirty steps led to a square terrace, from which we were conducted into +a large room, at one end of which was a great bow-window looking towards +the sea. The governor sat in this window, and there were others on the +sides of the room, which looked to the wharf or landing-place. The floor +of this room was all covered with fine mats, and towards where the +governor sat, with fine Turkey carpets and Persian felts. Where he sat, +there lay a party-coloured sattin quilt, with several rich cushions of +damask and others of velvet. He was dressed in a violet-coloured vest of +sattin, under which were garments of fine India muslin or calico, having +on his head a sattin cap, wreathed round by a white sash. He was +attended by the chief scrivano, the principal officers of the customs, +some Turks of importance, many Indian merchants, and about an hundred +servants. He seemed about fifty years of age, and his name was Mahomet +Aga. + +On our approach, and doing reverence, he bowed to us, and desired us to +sit down, demanding who we were, and what was our business. We answered +that we were Englishmen and merchants from London, who, by command of +the ambassador of the king of England to the Great Mogul, with whom we +had a league of peace and amity, had come to this place to treat for +liberty of trade. That we were in friendship with the Grand Signior, and +had free trade at Constantinople, Aleppo, and other places in the +Turkish dominions, and hoped to enjoy the same here; for which purpose +we were come to desire his and the pacha's phirmauns, giving us such +privileges as we already had in other parts of the dominions of the +Grand Signior, both for the present time and in future, as we meant to +visit his port yearly with plenty of English and Indian commodities. We +said likewise that we were commanded to say by the lord ambassador, that +hearing there were sundry pirates, English, Dutch, French, Portuguese, +Malabars and others, who infested the trade of this port, and +principally that carried on by the Guzerats, who were our friends, we +had his orders to free the seas of all such incumbrances, protecting all +honest merchant ships and junks from injury. These, we said, were the +true causes of our coming here. + +The governor then rose up and bid us welcome, applauding our declared +purposes, but asked why we were so fearful as not to come on shore +without pledges. We answered, that about six years before, some of our +countrymen being here, were enticed on shore by fair promises of good +usage, who were betrayed and imprisoned by the then governor, and +several of them murdered. For these reasons, we were under the necessity +of being careful of our safety. We said moreover, that he would shortly +be certified we were exactly what we professed, by means of two junks of +Guzerat, one of which had not come this year, but for the pass and +promise of the ambassador that they were to be protected in the voyage +home by our ship, against the enterprizes of any pirates who might be in +these seas, as one had been last year by some of our ships, which came +opportunely to their rescue, and conducted her safely to their port, and +had sent the chief commanders to England, to be tried and punished for +their wrongs against the friends of our sovereign. + +The governor acknowledged the friendly conduct of our nation in that +affair, promising that we should live as safely on shore, and conduct +our business with as much freedom and security, as in our own country, +for which we should have his phirmauns, which he would procure to be +confirmed by the pacha to our entire contentment. He said likewise that +the former governor was a bad man, long since deposed, and now living at +Constantinople in disgrace; and swore by his beard, and by Mahomet, that +not a hair of our heads should be diminished, nor any wrong offered to +us, as he should make proclamation of our liberties, that no one might +pretend ignorance and do us harm or discourtesy. He desired us, +therefore, to look out for a house for ourselves and our goods, +commanding two of his chiauses to attend upon us, and recommended us to +lodge with the Jew merchant till we could fit ourselves better, desiring +him to assist us in all things. + +After giving many thanks for his kindness, and delivering the present as +from our captain, we went, by the advice of the Jew, to visit the +scrivano, who is likewise chief customer or shahbander; and as he was +not at home, his servant received and entertained us with much civility. +They conducted us into an handsome room, not much inferior in building +and furniture to that of the governor, where we had left their master, +who soon came home and welcomed us with much politeness, assuring us +that all the governor had promised should be faithfully performed, as he +himself should see all executed, and had also power to see us righted. +We were informed that this man's power was as great in Mokha as that of +the governor, who was directed by him in all matters of importance. This +officer seemed a hearty old man. After making us drink coffee and +sherbet, we took our leaves, and remained all night with the Jew. + +Next morning we spent an hour in viewing the town, and observing the +countenances of the people towards us, whom we found gentle and +courteous, especially the Banians and Guzerats, many of whom reside here +as merchants, shopkeepers, and mechanics, having neatly-built shops and +warehouses. Their market or bazar seemed well furnished with all manner +of necessaries, among which were plenty of fruits, which are brought +daily from the country. Most of the town is built of brick and stone, +neatly plastered over with Paris plaster, some of the houses being two +stories high, and all flat-roofed, with terraces on the top, on which in +summer they construct lodges of canes and mats, in which they sleep and +spend the first quarter of the day, having at that time a fresh breeze +from the sea. All the rest of the day at that season is so hot that they +can hardly endure even a shirt. Mokha lies quite level along the +sea-shore, being about two miles from north to south, and contains many +good-looking houses, with three principal mosques. The streets are kept +clean, every person having to sweep and water before his door every +morning and evening, so that they resemble sandy alleys for bowling, +more than streets. No filth is allowed to be thrown into the streets, +but must all be carried to an appointed place, where it is scoured out +by the sea. In fine, I have never seen a sweeter, cleaner, or better +ordered town any where. + +The wharf is situated between the governor's house and that of the +scrivano, and is about twelve score square.[289] Near this, and +adjoining the governor's house, there is a platform or fort, built of +hewn stones, having battlements towards the sea, being about forty paces +square, in which there are thirteen or fourteen pieces of ordnance of +little value. Over against the landing-place two fair brass cannons are +planted, above five feet long. At the other end, is the Alfandica, where +there is a brass gun six feet long, carrying a large ball. Besides these +defences, there is a stone house at the north end of the town, built +like a sconce or redoubt, with a few pieces of ordnance; but they trust +little in their ordnance, relying mostly on their soldiers, of whom they +have always 200 in the town, and about 300 more in the country, within a +day or two days march, who are all constantly in readiness for service. + + +[Footnote 289: This is obscure, as it is not said whether it be 240 +feet, yards, or paces.--E.] + +The son of Cojah Nassan, the principal India merchant of the town, whom +we waited upon at his house, promised us all kindness, and regaled us +with tobacco and coffee, as is usual among these people. We went +afterwards to wait upon the governor before we returned on board. He +rose up at our entry to meet us, causing us to sit down by him, and +repeated all the fair promises of free trade he had given the day +before, declaring that he would deny us nothing that was reasonable. He +then told us there was another governor shortly to succeed him, who was +as his brother, and honester even than himself, who would faithfully +perform every thing he had promised. At our request, the governor +ordered the water-bailiff to furnish us at all times with boats, either +for our conveyance, or to carry water to the ship. From the governor, we +again went to visit the scrivano, who received us with much civility, +promising to come aboard to visit our ship, and compliment our captain. +After treating us with coffee, we took leave, and returned to the ship, +when the pledges were dismissed, acknowledging the good treatment they +had received, and were saluted on going ashore with five guns. + +On the 17th, the scrivano, with our two pledges, our Jew friend, and +twenty other persons, came aboard, bringing a bullock, with bread, +quinces, and other fruits, a great round cake or pasty, like puff-paste, +in which were several fowls and chickens, well seasoned and baked, and +most excellent eating. We also, with a large quince pye, and many crabs, +together with sack and cordials, added our best welcome. The scrivano +was so well pleased with his reception, that he insisted upon becoming +the sworn brother of our captain, which was accordingly celebrated with +a cup of sack; and, after much mirth, and having taken a view of our +ship, he departed highly gratified. + +We were well supplied with water by several poor people of Mokha, who +brought it off to the ship at a reasonable rate. Also, with the +concurrence of the governor and scrivano, we made every junk that +arrived anchor under our guns, and to ride in that situation till they +discharged their cargo; which indeed the governor wished us to do, +because some junks passed by that port to trade at others, to the injury +of Mokha At six in the evening of the 21st of April, we had a violent +storm of wind off the land, accompanied by much thunder and lightning, +but no rain, which continued for half an hour, all the rest of the night +being extremely hot. Although we rode above a league from the shore, +this tempest brought great quantities of dust, and even sand on board. +The 25th, we had a message from the scrivano, saying that the governor +and he had received letters from the pacha at Sinan, commanding them to +entertain us with all manner of kindness, and to give us free trade, +with liberty to reside among them in all quietness and security. + +On the 27th the new governor arrived, when the ordnance of the town, and +of our ship and the several junks in the road, all fired to welcome his +arrival. He sent the former pledges on board to return thanks for our +salute, accompanied by a present of plantains, limes, mangoes, melons, +and bread, with one bullock, promising, in the name of the pacha, as +free trade as our nation had in Constantinople. The pledges remained all +night aboard, and went ashore with us next day, when we found the new +and the old governors sitting together at the end of a large room, much +in the same way as we had found the old one at our first arrival. The +new governor was named Regib Aga, and was accompanied by several +principal Turks, and by all the principal merchants from Surat, Diu, +Dabul, Scindy, Calicut, and Cananore. On our approach, he and the other +Turks only moved their bodies, but all the merchants rose up to salute +us. He made us sit down beside him, and told us that the pacha had +commanded him to give us satisfaction in all things; and that he knew +besides, we were of a nation in friendship with the Grand Signior, and +had free trade in Constantinople, Aleppo, and other parts of the Turkish +empire, being a nation of a friendly and honest disposition, and we +should therefore always find him disposed to give us free trade, and +every other courtesy In reply, we told him we proposed, at our next +coming to Mokha, if our reasonable requests of a free trade were +granted, to settle a permanent factory at this place, and to come yearly +to the port, with plenty of English and India goods, and should defend +the trade against pirates. We even distantly hinted, that it was +needless to deny us a free trade, being in a condition to force it if +refused, and to hinder all others from coming hither, the fear of which +had already caused some junks to pass by Mokha to Jidda, the port of +Mecca, a town of great trade, 150 leagues farther up the Red Sea, and to +other places. + +The new governor replied, that we should be made as welcome as in any +place of our own country; and swore by God, and Mahomet, and by his own +beard, that we should live as free from all injury as in our own land. +We asked what security he would give us besides his word, when he said +we should have his phirmaun under his _chop_, or seal, and would procure +us the same from the pacha. With this we seemed satisfied, and gave him +many thanks; and indeed they all seemed perfectly willing to give us +every satisfaction, yet, in my opinion, not from good-will or justice, +but from fear, as they knew we were able to intercept their whole trade. +After some conversation about our ambassador, who now resided at +Constantinople, and about the Portuguese and Spaniards, whom Rajib said +were proud and faithless nations, we spoke of Sir Henry Middleton, +asking the cause of their treacherous conduct to him and his people. He +answered, that the then Vizier was a bloody, cruel, and ill-minded man, +and made worse by the instigation of the Turks and Arabs of Mokha, who +were enraged by the uncivil behaviour of our people, who made water at +the gates of their mosques, forced their way into the houses after the +citizens wives, and being daily drunk in the streets, would fight and +quarrel with the people,[290] things hateful in their eyes. These were +only in part the cause, for the covetousness of the governor, hoping to +have got their ship and goods, was the main cause of that scandalous +conduct, for which he was soon afterwards sent to Constantinople to +answer for his crimes. + +[Footnote 290: Let English Christians read, blush, and amend--_Purch._] + +We dined that day with the scrivano, and hired a house of Hassan Aga, +one of our pledges, at seventy dollars the monsoon, or yearly rent, it +being all the same. The scrivano insisted to swear himself our friend on +his Koran, yet denied the present governor to be the person who captured +Sir Henry Middleton, which we afterwards found to be Turkish faith, or +absolute falsehood. We now agreed to pay at the rate of three in the +hundred, _ad valorem_, both inwards and outwards, though the scrivano +swore that all others paid five; all money, with silver and gold in +bullion, to pass free of duty. We remained this night with the scrivano +to supper, and gave him a present. + +On the 29th of April we expected to have had our phirmaun publicly read +before all the merchants, and proclaimed to the people; but most part of +the day was spent in ceremony by the governor and other chiefs at the +mosque, on account of the death of Sultan Achmet, the Grand signior, +and the accession of his brother to the throne. They came riding past +our house while we were sitting at a window which opened to the street, +whence we made our obeisance to them, and they bowed in return. They +were all in grand gala, having their horses richly caparisoned. At four +in the afternoon we were sent for, but our linguist had got to a Jew +house and was drunk with arrack, so we sent an apology, under pretence +that Mr Salbank was indisposed, and promised attendance next day. On the +31st, the governor sent for us, and made our welcome known to all the +merchants, causing his scrivano draw up a phirmaun as full as we could +have wished, which he signed with his chop or seal in the afternoon at +the house of the principal scrivano, entirely according to what was +before agreed upon, by which we were to pay three per cent. for all we +landed, excepting money, and the same for all we took on board, except +victuals. We got afterwards a similar phirmaun from Mahomet, the pacha +of Sinan: and Rejib Aga gave us a particular safe conduct for Mr Salbank +and the rest.[291] + +[Footnote 291: Copies, or translations rather, from the Arabic, are +given in the Pilgrims of all these three phirmauns, which it was not +thought necessary to insert.--E] + +It was now agreed among ourselves that Mr Salbank and I were to remain +ashore to conduct the business of sales and purchases, while Mr Barber +staid on board to prepare and send such goods as we required. The 5th of +May we went to the scrivano to get leave to make arrack for the use of +our sick men; because, since our linguist and several of our people had +got drunk in the house of a Jew, we had complained, and procured an +order prohibiting the Jews from selling them any, and the governor had +even strictly enjoined the Jews and Turks not to sell any more arrack or +wine in the town. At our request through the scrivano, the governor +granted leave for a Jew, nominated for the purpose to brew arrack at our +house, but forbid any to be made elsewhere. + +In the afternoon of the 8th, learning that the governor and principal +men were sitting in form at the Alfandica, to receive the Surat captain +who was then coming on shore, we went also to see the ceremonial of his +reception. We found the governor at the upper end of a long room, +sitting on a stone bench spread with carpets, having on the same bench +with him various merchants and Turks of quality, to the number of about +twenty. Opposite to him sat about as many in chairs, forming a lane down +the room to a square platform raised three steps from the floor, railed +in and matted, in which the scrivano and other officers of the customs +sat on carpets. The governor bid us welcome, saying he had given orders +to the chief broker to examine our goods and promote their sale. He then +desired us to sit down, two merchants offering us their places, and +called for coffee and tobacco to regale us. + +About half an hour after, the nokhada, or captain of the Surat ship, +came ashore. His boat was curiously painted, having a tilt of red silk, +with many streamers, and sails of fine white calico. He was rowed by +twenty of his servants, all dressed in fine white calico, and he was +accompanied by a wretched band of music, consisting of drums, waits, and +bad trumpets, the noise from which was augmented by the discharge of +guns from his own great junk and those belonging to the town. Attended +by a few slaves, decked out in silks and coarse sattins, he entered the +lone room where we were, when the governor rose and saluted him, and +placed him next himself on the stone bench. Many compliments of welcome +passed between the nokhada and the other merchants; but in the height of +his pride he overlooked us, and we him accordingly. Yet we thought he +might have shewn us more respect, considering that Captain Shilling had +sent his long-boat and men to free his junk of 400 or 500 tons, when +aground, and had entertained him with much civility aboard our ship. + +After some time spent in compliments, coffee was again brought in for +all the company; after which six vests were produced, two of which were +given to the Surat captain, and one each to his four principal +merchants. When these were put on, and mutual _salams_ or reverences +given, they again sat down, like so many painted images, dressed up in +coats of coarse gold and silver velvet. We here observed one usual +custom of this town, at the arrival of any junk, and the landing of her +nokhada or captain, that free liberty is given to all the mariners and +passengers to bring ashore as much goods as each man can carry on his +back, without payment of any duty; accordingly, at this time, about 300 +persons belonging to this junk passed with their luggage to the +captain's residence, unmolested. + +On the 9th, our landlord and the scrivano told us that three junks from +Diu, and four Malabar vessels, were at Aden, whence they were afraid to +proceed without our pass or licence. Accordingly we sent them a free +pass, signed by our captain and three merchants. In this, after reciting +that we had found good usage from the governor and merchants at Mokha, +we engaged to give them all freedom to pass quietly, assuring them of +kind usage, provided they were not enemies to our sovereign or his +subjects. A more general pass was afterwards granted by us for the quiet +and free departure of all junks and other vessels, with their cargoes, +mariners, and passengers. + +On the 10th, the captain of the Dabul junk invited us to a banquet at +his house, where we found the governor with about fifty principal +persons, besides attendants, all of whom rose up to bid us welcome. +Coffee, sherbet, and tobacco, were served round, with various fruits, as +plums, apricots, and mangoes, and thinking these had been the feast, we +were about to depart; but the governor and the Dabul captain desired us +to remain, that we might _eat bread and salt with them_, which we did. +The feast at last made its appearance, though late, being about sixty +dishes of meats, baked, roasted, broiled, stewed, and boiled, but all +mingled with rice and various kinds of sallads, in the fashion of India. + +Our cargo consisted mostly of bad wares, which had lain in India till +they were nearly spoiled, and so hung long upon our hands; wherefore we +importuned the governor to dispeed our sales, which he charged the +broker to do with all expedition. We also had leave granted to come and +go between the ship and the shore at our pleasure, without demanding +leave, contrary to the usual custom of the port, the water bailiff being +ordered to give us no molestation. On the 20th, it was noticed that the +monsoon had changed. The 24th, the scrivano observed to us that our +sailors, on coming ashore, were in the custom of selling _baftas_ and +sword-blades in the bazar. He said the governor had promised liberty for +the goods of these poor fellows to pass free of custom, and therefore +they might freely bring them ashore for sale, but must sell them at our +house, and not in the public bazar, which was a disgrace to us and our +nation. + +On the 31st, our ship was in great danger of being burnt. Some one +happened to be smoking on the spritsail yardarm, when the burning +tobacco fell out unobserved into a fold of the sail, where it burnt +through two or three breadths, and was long smelt before it could be +found. After this, smoking was strictly prohibited, except in the +cook-room or the captain's cabin. At this time, for the recovery of our +sick men, the exploration of the coast, and procuring ballast instead +of lead taken out of the ship for sale, it was concluded to send the +ship over to Assab; on the African coast, on which occasion Mr Baffen, +the master's mate, was sent before to sound and discover the passage. + +On the 10th of June we had a conference with the governor, and, among +other discourse, he told us that he was governor of Aden when the +Ascension was there, when he imprisoned the captain and Mr Joseph +Salbank for two days, suspecting them to be freebooters, and not +merchants, as he alleged. He said also that he was governor here at +Mokha when Sir Henry Middleton was apprehended, but laid the whole blame +of that transaction on the then pacha, whose servant he was, and who had +given orders for that and much more, which he called God to witness was +much contrary to his inclination, and declared that these things were +past, and we had now nothing to fear. By this avowal, we had a clear +evidence how far he and the scrivano were to be trusted. The governor +sent for us again on the 13th, saying that he had acquainted the pacha +with our purpose of sending to him for his phirmaun, and that he had +promised a hearty welcome and full contentment, whether we went +personally or sent a messenger; but the governor advised that one of us +should go up to Sinan, for which purpose he would provide us with +horses, camels, and attendants, and should write in our behalf to the +pacha. + +The 19th a junk arrived from Jiddah, with many passengers from Mecca, +bringing camblets, bad coral, amber beads, and much silver, to invest in +spices and India cotton goods. She brought news of a ship, laden last +year from Mokha for Grand Cairo, which had lost her monsoon, and was +forced to wait till next year, at a place only a little way beyond +Jiddah. By this ship, the governor had letters informing him that the +Grand Signior had sent various state ornaments to the pacha of Sinan, +whom he had confirmed in his government for seven years longer, and +appointing himself to continue governor of Mokha for the like time, of +which he seemed not a little proud. + +As I was constantly indisposed, it was thought fit that Mr Salbank +should go up to Sinan to wait upon the pacha with a present, and to +carry up some goods also with him for sale at that place. On this +occasion, the scrivano offered him his own mule to ride upon, which he +thankfully accepted. He was furnished with two camels, a cook, a +horsekeeper, and three servants belonging to the governor, all of whose +wages he agreed to pay at certain fixed rates, and was also accompanied +by a linguist named Alberto. Taking leave of the governor, who gave him +letters for the pacha, he departed from Mokha about six in the evening +of the 23d June, the nights being the accustomed time of travelling. + +In the morning of the 23d, we had a letter from our captain; then at +Assab, informing of his safe arrival there, and the good health of the +people, and that he had procured ballast and provisions to his +satisfaction. On the 26th, the governor sent me a horse by one of his +servants, inviting me to accompany him to his banqueting house, about +half a mile out of town, there to spend the day in mirth along with +other merchants. About half an hour after, the chief scrivano came to +accompany me, with whom I went, joining the governor by the way, and +rode with him to the place. It was a fair house, in the middle of a +grove of date trees, beside a large tank or pond, having several rooms +handsomely fitted; up for sitting. After a little while, the governor +and several others went into the tank to bathe, where they sported +themselves for half an hour. Coffee was then handed round to the +company, after which grapes, peaches, and both musk and water; melons, +were brought in, together with blanched almonds and great quantities of +raisins, as there were between fifty and sixty guests, besides, +attendants; and always between whiles coffee, sherbet, and tobacco were +handed round. Thus, and with indifferent music, we spent the forenoon. +After prayers, the governor, went again into the tank, where he spent an +hour sporting with his company. In the sequel, the time was spent in +cards and chess, and in looking at various; jiggling tricks, till four +in the evening. At this time above an hundred dishes were served up, all +of good meat, but; cold, and ill dressed, each dish being sufficient to +have satisfied four hungry men. He treated me with much kindness, and +was earnest to have me go with him into the tank, but I excused myself; +on account of my late indisposition. He then said, if at any time I was +inclined to bathe, I might come to this place when I pleased, and he +would give orders to the keeper to admit me and use me well. + +The 12th July, the Surat captain made a fine display of many artificial +fire-works before the governor, it being then new moon. The governor +sent for me to see them, and placed me in a chair beside himself, +telling me he had letters that day from Sinan, informing him that the +Pacha had granted a phirmaun for us before the arrival of Mr Salbank, +but hearing of his coming, had delayed sending it, and had since granted +another, according to his instructions, and had delivered it to Mr +Salbank with his own hand. + +On the 13th there passed by the roads a junk of four or five hundred +tons from Jiddah, bound for _Kitchine_, a day's sail within the entrance +of the Red Sea, which I suppose is not far from Cape Guardafui, on the +coast of Africa.[292] She is said to contain great sums in gold and +silver, with much valuable merchandize. This ship comes yearly to Mokha +at the beginning of the western monsoon, bringing myrrh, and boxes for +_coho_ seeds, [coffee] and goes from hence to Jiddah or _Aliambo_, [Al +Yambo] where she sells her coffee and the India goods procured at +Kitchine; which last are brought thither by Portuguese barks from Diu +and other places. Her outward lading consists of indigo, all manner of +India cotton goods, gum-lac; and myrrh.[293] She is freighted by the +Portuguese, and the governor of Mokha wished much we had met with her, +which we had probably done, had not our ship been absent, which returned +into the road of Mokha on the 21st. I went aboard, and was told that the +king of Assab and his brother had been aboard, and were kindly +entertained, in return for which he promised to supply them with +abundance of beeves and goats; but that same evening, in consequence of +a signal of fire, he and all his people fled into the mountains, +pretending they were threatened by an attack from their enemies, and +never even gave thanks for their entertainment. + +[Footnote 292: The only place resembling this name is Kissem, on the +oceanic coast of Yemen, or Arabia Felix, nearly due N. from Cape +Guardafui.--E.] + +[Footnote 293: This must refer to her homeward lading, called outward in +the text in respect to India.--E.] + +Before day of the 27th July, Mr Salbank returned from Sinan in perfect +health, and much satisfied with his phirmauns. He gave me an account of +his whole journey, having been respectfully treated every where; always +before entering any town, being met both by horse and foot to conduct +him to the different governors, by whom he was kindly received. All his +provisions were provided by their officers, but at his own expence; and +the servant of the governor of Mokha caused him every where to be well +used. He was met a mile from Sinan by forty or fifty Turks, well +mounted, sent by the Pacha to escort him to a well-furnished house +prepared for his reception. He was there kindly received and entertained +by the xeriffe and the pacha's chief treasurer, who were both deputed to +give him welcome in the name of the pacha. Two days afterwards, he had +audience of the pacha, from whom he received courteous entertainment, +receiving two phirmauns of the same tenor, one of which was much more +ornamentally written than the other, and intended for being shown to the +Grand Signior, if necessary. + +According to his report, the city of Sinan and its neighbourhood will +give vent yearly for a good quantity of English cloth, as the weather +there is cold for three quarters of the year; and even while he was +there, though the height of summer, a person might well endure a furred +gown. Besides, there is a court at that place to which belongs _forty_ +or _fifty_ thousand gallant Turks,[294] most of whom wore garments of +high-priced Venetian cloth. Not far from thence there is a leskar, or +camp, of 30,000 soldiers,[295] continually in the field against an Arab +king in the adjoining mountains, not yet conquered; all of which +soldiers are said to wear coats of quilted India chintzes, which are +dear, and of little service to defend them from the cold of that region, +which is there excessive. To this I may add the city or Teyes, near +which there is a _leskar_ of thirty or forty thousand soldiers, +commanded by a German renegado under the pacha of Sinan. That place, +though only about five days journey from Mokha, is very cold, and much +cloth is worn by the people about that place. + +[Footnote 294: This is probably a vast exaggeration, though in words at +length in the Pilgrims; and we ought more likely to read _four_ or +_five_ thousand Turks.--E.] + +[Footnote 295: A similar reduction to 3000 is probably needful for this +army.--E.] + +On the 2d of August the governor sent a rich vest to our captain by the +chief shabander, attended by drums and trumpets, his boat being decked +out with flags and streamers. This was delivered with great ceremony, +and reverently received. The Dabul nokhada, Melic Marvet, and Roswan, +the nokhada of the Chaul ship, sent us letters of recommendation to +their kings, on the 11th August, according to our desire, certifying the +friendly usage they had experienced from us at Mokha, and our kind +offer to protect them on the homeward voyage, from pirates, and +entreating therefore for us freedom of trade and friendly usage in their +dominions. The 14th, as we had formerly done to others, we gave our +passes to two Malabar captains, Amet ben Mahomet of Cananore, under +Sultan Ala Rajah, and Aba Beker of Calicut, under the Zamorin. + +This day there came a galley into the road from Cairo, having many Turks +and Jews as passengers, bringing great store of dollars, chekins, coral, +damask, sattin, camblet, opium, velvets, and taffetas. She had come down +the whole length of the Red Sea in thirty days. I had a conference with +the Jews, one of whom I had formerly known in Barbary. They reported +that the brother of the former Grand Signior, on being made emperor, had +imprisoned his two nephews, and put to death several of the grandees, +and had otherwise given great offence to the great men at +Constantinople, whereupon he was deposed and imprisoned, and his eldest +nephew made emperor in his stead. They said likewise that an army of +200,000 men was sent against the Persians, for the conquest of +Gurgistan, adding various other particulars, some of which turned out +true, and others false, like merchants news in general. Some Turks and +Jews desired to have passage for themselves and goods in our ship to +Surat; and it is likely, when they know us better, much profit may be +made in this way, as their junks are usually pestered with rude people. + +Having sold and bartered our goods as well as we could have expected, +considering our cargo, and dispatched all our business, we visited the +governor, and desired to have his testimonials to the lord ambassador, +which he gave us. We took leave of him on the 19th of August, and of the +scrivano and other chief men of the town, from whom we received +protestations of continued kindness on all future occasions. We went +aboard that same day, proposing to sail the next day for India, taking +the Surat junk under our convoy, according to our instructions. + + + +SECTION XII. + +JOURNAL OF A VOYAGE TO SURAT AND JASQUES, IN 1620.[296] + + +"According to the title of this journal in the Pilgrims, the fleet which +sailed on this voyage consisted of the London, of 800 tons, William +Baffin master, on board of which was Captain Andrew Shilling, chief in +command, or general; the Hart, of 500 tons, Richard Blithe master; the +Roebuck, of 300 tons, Richard Swan master; and the Eagle, of 280 tons, +Christopher Brown master. The account of the voyage in Purchas is said +to consist of extracts from the journal written by Richard Swan, the +master or captain of the Roebuck."--E. + +[Footnote 296: Purch. Pilgr. 1. 723.] + +§1. _Voyage from England to Surat._ + +We sailed from Tilbury-hope on the 26th of February, 1620, and anchored +in Saldanha road [Table Bay, at the Cape of Good Hope] on 24th of June, +where we found the Lion homewards-bound, and nine Dutch ships bound for +Bantam, commanded by a gentleman named Nicolas van Baccum, who Was said +to have studied seven years at Oxford. Next morning the Lion and the +Dutch fleet departed, each their several way; and in the evening arrived +the Schidam belonging to Deft, outward-bound, which being suspected by +both admirals, the master was sent for, and producing Us commission, +gave satisfaction. On the 3d of July we made a solemn proclamation of +the right and title of his majesty King James to Saldania, and on the +7th King James's mount was erected.[297] + +[Footnote 297: It thus appears that the first fortified station at the +Cape of Good Hope was erected by the English, to whom that colony now +belongs. It would surely be a better appellation for this important +colony, which may be called the key of India, to restore its old name-of +_Saldania_, than to continue its present awkward denomination, The +Colony of the Cape of Good Hope.--E.] + +We sailed from the Cape of Good Hope on the 25th of July, and 26th of +October we put into Dabul roads, where we remained till the 2d of +November to refresh our men, and to provide the two ships bound for +Persia. The 6th November, the Hart and Eagle took leave of us and the +9th we anchored in Swally roads, where we found the Wappen van Zeland, +of 1000 tons, which at our arrival took in her colours, and saluted the +London with three guns, and the Roebuck with two. I was sent on shore, +and brought off Mr Thomas Kerridge, the president of the factory at +Surat, with Mr James, and Mr Hopkinson. Next day, in a consultation, it +was determined to dispatch us speedily after the Hart and Eagle, as we +had intelligence that four Portuguese galleons were waiting at Ormus, or +in Jasques roads, to intercept them. + +§2. _Voyage from Surat towards Jasques_. + +The 19th November, having dispatched our business at Swally with all +expedition, we set sail towards Jasques. The 21st we chased a ship, +which surrendered without resistance, being the Nostra Sennora de +Merces, of 200 tons, bound from Muscat for Chaul, having on board +forty-two Arabian horses, her principal loading, and for which trade she +was built. The residue of her cargo consisted of dates and raisins. The +name of her captain was Francisco de Mirando. + +The 5th December, when in latitude 24° 55' N. we met the Hart and Eagle +coming from Jasques for Surat, because not of sufficient strength to +encounter the Portuguese force which was waiting for them with the +intention of ruining our Persian trade. Thus happily rejoined to our +former consorts, we shaped our course for Jasques to accomplish our +purpose. The 8th, at the earnest desire of the Portuguese and Moors +taken in the prize, we set them on shore, except some Moor seamen whom +we detained in our service, and the Portuguese pilot, who entreated to +stay, as he feared some hard usage from his own people. On the 12th, +certain volunteers who had engaged to set fire to our prize, and run her +aboard the Portuguese admiral, were put on board of her, and she was +fitted as a fire-ship. The 15th we had sight of the east point of +Jasques roads, having upon it a tomb or old square flat-roofed house, +which bore W.N.W. by compass, twelve miles off. From Diu head to this +point, I make the longitude, by the ordinary plain chart, 9° 55' 36" W. +but by Mercator's projection, 10° 51'. From where we were, we could see +the Portuguese men of war sent from Lisbon to oppose our trade with +Persia, consisting of two Portuguese galleons, one of which was larger +than the London, and two Dutch ships, one as large as the Hart, while +the other was less than the Eagle. Their general was Don Ruy Frere de +Andrado; the vice-admiral, Joam Boralio; and the two Dutch ships were +commanded by Antonio Musquet and Baltazar de Chaves.[298] + +[Footnote 298: According to a special account of this and the +succeeding sea-fight, appended to the present relation in Purchas, the +Portuguese fleet on the present occasion, besides the four galleons, +consisted of two gallions and ten frigates or armed barks, none of which +are here mentioned except the four galleons.--E.] + +§3. _Account of the first Fight with the Portuguese_. + +In the morning of the 16th December, our admiral and all the masters of +our squadron went on board the prize, carrying two barrels of powder, +some tar, and other combustible materials, to fit her up as a fire-ship, +intending to lay her on board the Portuguese admiral athwart his hawse, +that both might burn together. After she was fitted, we bore up for the +Portuguese squadron, but it fell calm, and the current set us so near +them, that they reached us with their shot. We kept under sail all +night, and in the morning of the 17th, being to leeward of them in +consequence of the land breeze, they weighed and made toward us, when we +waited their approach, although they preserved the advantage of the +weather-gage. The fight began about nine in the morning, and continued +without intermission for nine hours. In the afternoon, a fine gentle +sea-breeze sprung up from the westwards, which gave us the weather-gage; +and the Portuguese admiral anchored, either of necessity to repair some +defect about his rudder, or of policy to gain some expected advantage. +His vice-admiral and the large Dutch ship anchored to the eastwards, and +the lesser Dutch ship to leeward of them all, stopping his leaks. We +were now in great hopes of putting our fire-ship to a good purpose; but +being too soon fired and forsaken by those who had her in charge, she +drove clear of them all, to their joy and our disgrace. Seeing them +remain at anchor, and keeping to windward of them, we turned to and +again close a-head of them as they rode at anchor, raking them as we +passed, through and through, fore and aft, especially the admiral, +receiving only in return their prow and bow-chases. By these, as I +passed to the north, two unfortunate shots cut asunder the weather leech +ropes of the Roebuck's foresail and fore-topsail, in the middle depth of +both sails; owing to which we could not bring her into stays, and were +forced, for repairing these sails, to bear down to leeward, between the +enemy and the shore; in which course, the three great ships plied their +whole broadsides against us, but with less hurt than I could have +imagined, God be praised. Having compassed the three large ships, I +luffed up to rejoin our squadron, which still held the advantage of the +wind, and plied their great guns on the Portuguese like so many muskets. +When I had got to windward of the smaller Dutch ship, which stood off as +I did till he had our fire-ship directly between him and me, he turned +tail, and steered right before the wind along shore to the eastwards, +with all the sail he could carry. The other three now set sail to his +rescue, and were now so tame, that as the Hart passed along their +broadsides, she received only a few shots great and small from any of +them, and from some none at all. The night now coming on, and our people +being all wearied by the long continuance of the fight, we all desisted +from any farther chase, and came to anchor in our usual road. + +In this fight, the London and Hart had very little harm in their hulls +and tackling, and less, or rather none, in their men. The main-mast of +the Eagle was hurt in five places, four of which were quite through, and +one of her men lost his right arm. In the Roebuck, I had one man slain +by a cannon ball striking his head. A piece of his skull and some +splinters of the ball wounded one of my mates in the forehead, and +destroyed his left eye; and two others of my men lost the use of their +right hands. God be praised for our good fortune; for I never heard of +so small loss in so long a fight as we now sustained. I cannot truly +state the loss of the enemy: but, by the report of our merchants, their +vice-admiral and another captain were slain, and thirty or forty men in +the admiral's ship alone, the rest as yet unknown. As to their Moors, +they do not count them among the num her of their men. + +In the morning of the 18th, the day after the action, we could see the +Portuguese at anchor ten miles to the east of us, having the wind fair +to have come down, but they did not. We then held a consultation, +whether it were better for us to take the first of the sea breeze, which +usually begins about noon, to stand towards them and try it out for the +mastery, before they could receive supplies from Ormus, Muskat, or Goa, +or else to make sail for Jasques roads, on purpose to land our goods and +money, in case of the worst, these being the prize they sought to obtain +and we to defend. Accordingly, the London got that night into Jasques +road, but the rest could not get in before the 20th, by reason of +contrary winds. On the 21st and 22d most of our goods were landed. + + +§4. _Second Sea Fight with the Portuguese_. + +On the 22d, seeing the Portuguese galleons open the road of Jasques, and +supposing they might intend to come in with the sea breeze, we set sail +and stood off for them. At first, they made a shew of giving us battle, +but soon afterwards made off upon a tack; and till the 28th, they were +either to windward, or so favourably placed at anchor, that we could not +attempt to attack them without manifest disadvantage. During this time, +they were joined by two or three frigates, or barks, from Ormus, +bringing them a supply of men and ammunition. We made one attempt on +Christmas day, but were forced back by a sudden flaw of wind; on which +occasion, some blacks aboard of us, said the Portuguese had brought a +witch from Ormus, to supply them with favourable winds. + +On Innocents day, 28th December, perceiving the drift of our Portuguese +_Fabius cunclator_, to protract and avoid fighting, that by delays and +the advantage of his frigates, he might hinder us from prosecuting your +business in Persia, we determined to attempt closing with him. About one +o'clock there sprung up a favourable east wind for our purpose, on which +we immediately weighed and put every thing in order for battle. The +London and Hart came to anchor within a cable's length and half of their +broadsides, and so endured the main brunt of this second fight; for, no +sooner were they at anchor, but it fell calm and so continued all day, +insomuch that the Roebuck and Eagle, which had steered nearer to the +shore, with the intention of coming to anchor, one on the bow of their +admiral, and the other on the bow of their vice-admiral, got astern, and +could not with all our diligence be of any service for a full half hour +after the action began. At length we got within point-blank shot of +them, and then were forced either to anchor or drive farther off with +the current, as there was not a breath of wind. + +We now brought our broadsides to bear, and our whole squadron plied +their ordnance upon them so fast, that had the knowledge of our men +equalled their resolution, not one of them had escaped from us. Not +willing to endure such hot entertainment, they cut their cables about +three o'clock, and drove from us with the tide to the westwards, till +out of our reach. Then came their frigates, which the day before had +made a bravado along shore with drums, trumpets, flags, and streamers, +and, now employed in a fitter task, towed them away all mangled and +torn. Their admiral, in the very hottest of the fight, was under the +necesity of giving his ship a heel to stop his leaks, his main-top-mast +and the head of his main-mast having fallen overboard. The great Dutch +ship had both his top-masts and part of his boltsprit shot away, and the +smaller lost all his shrouds and top-masts. Their vice-admiral escaped +best this day, having commonly one or other of their own ships between +him and us. + +We kept them company all night, in hope of being able next morning to +give them their passports; but having taken a survey of our shot, which +we found scanty, and considering the importance of the voyage we still +had to perform, we thought it best to give over the chase and return to +Jasques; leaving them glad of our absence, their two great ships towing +the two smaller. We have had no account of their loss in this action. +All your worships ships remain serviceable, God be praised, and only +five men slain outright in these two long and severe engagements. Our +worthy admiral and kind commander, Captain Andrew Shilling, received a +great and grievous wound by a cannon ball through his left shoulder, +which he bore with such wonderful courage and patience, that we were in +great hopes of his much-wished-for recovery: But he had likewise two of +his uppermost ribs broken on the left side, and died on the 6th January, +1621, shewing himself a resolute commander in the action, and an assured +Christian in his death. We intended to have carried his body to Surat, +to have there performed his funeral rites according to his great merit, +and oar surgeons undertook to preserve his body by means of embalming +and cere-cloth, but it became so noisome that we were forced to bury him +at Jasques, which was done on the 7th, with all the solemnity and +respect in our power. + +In this engagement, the London expended 1382 great shot of several +sorts, the Hart 1024, the Roebuck 815, and the Eagle 800, in all 4021. +In consequence of the death of our worthy admiral, the white box, No. I. +was opened; and according to your worships appointment, Captain Richard +Blithe succeeded to the supreme command of the London, I was removed +into the Hart, Christopher Brown into the Roebuck, and Thomas Taylor was +made master of the Eagle.[299] + +[Footnote 299: This account does not agree with an accompanying official +letter, dated 13th January, 1621, giving a similar account of the two +engagements, often in the very identical words used by Swan, in which +the name of Thomas Taylor is omitted, instead of whom William Baffin is +the last in the list of signatures; and the Christian name of Swan is +made Robert instead of Richard.--E.] + + +§5. _Sequel of the Voyage_. + +The 14th January, 1621, having had forty-eight hours continual and +excessive rain, which, or much wind, is usual at Jasques for three or +four days at the full and change of the moon, and having finished our +business at Jasques, we set sail on our return to Surat, where we +arrived on the 1st February. Nothing material occurred on the passage, +except that, on the 27th January, between Diu and the _sand-heads_, we +surprised a small ship of war, called Nostra Senaora de Remedio, of 100 +tons, commanded by Francisco de Sylva, manned by thirty-five Portuguese +and twenty-five Moors, sent out by the governor of Diu to protect their +small merchant ships against the Malabar rovers. We dismissed the men +and kept the ship for our use, calling her the Andrew, after our late +excellent general. She had in her neither meat, money, nor commodities, +and scarcely as many poor suits of clothes as there were backs. + +The 27th of February we began to take in our loading. The 5th of March, +the, Eagle was sent down to keep guard over the junk belonging to the +prince, and to hinder her from any farther loading, till they granted +free passage for our carts with goods and provisions, which had been +restrained for six or seven days by the vexatious procedure of the +governor of Olpar, a town near Surat. By this means, no cotton wool was +allowed to come down till our ships were fully laden. On the 16th of +March, having notice that the Camla, from Agra, had been robbed by the +Deccan army, we resolved to seek restitution upon the ships of the +Deccan prince and his confederates in this transaction, as we intended +wintering in the Red Sea. The 19th, the governor of Surat having given +us satisfaction in regard to the carts, and a supply of powder and shot +for our money, and promise under his hand for redress of other injuries, +we dismissed the junk belonging to the prince from duress. + +From the 25th of March to the 6th of April, 1621, the winds have been +S. and S.S.W. or W. and blowing so hard from noon till midnight, raising +so great a surf on the shore, that no business could be done except on +the last quarter of the ebb and first of the flood tide. We sailed on +the 7th April. The 9th, the Eagle and a Dutch pinnace, called the +Fortune, parted company, being consigned to Acheen and Bantam. The +London, Hart, Roebuck, and Andrew, were intended for the Red Sea, if not +too late. + +The 1st May, the Andrew and our boats surprised a Portuguese ship of 200 +tons called the St Antonio, which we named the May-flower. Her principal +lading consisted of rice taken in at Barcelor, whence she had gone to +Goa, and sailed from thence for Ormus and Muskat on the 8th of April. We +learnt from this prize, that Ruy Frere de Andrada was busy in repairing +his ships at Ormus, and that Don Emanuel de Azeredo had departed from +Gor fifty days before for Ormus, to reinforce Andrada with two galleons, +one of these being the same in which the viceroy was personally, when he +engaged our fleet under Captain Downton. During a calm on the 7th, we +captured a small frigate-built ship called the Jacinth, which we named +the Primrose, which had come from Mozambique and was bound for Goa. +Thence to the 13th, we had variable winds, with calms and much rain. +Finding the May-flower delayed us much, and that our pilots were either +ignorant or malicious, we resolved to trust to our own endeavours for +finding an anchoring place, for our safe riding till the strength of the +adverse monsoon was over, for which purpose we determined upon going to +Macera.[300] + +[Footnote 300: From the latitude of this place, mentioned afterwards in +the text, this seems to refer to Mazica, an island about sixty miles +long and fifteen or twenty in breadth, a few miles from the oceanic +coast of Arabia, in lat. 20° 48' N. and long. 57° 3O' E. from +Greenwich.--E.] + +We descried land on the 2d June, and anchored in seventeen fathoms three +miles offshore, in lat. 20° 20' N. variation 17° W. We found plenty of +water in four or five pits, three quarters of a mile from the shore. I +had forty tons from one well, which we rolled in hogsheads to the beach. +The people were tractable, but we got little else besides water. A tuft +of date trees by the watering place bore N.W. by W. from our anchorage, +and the other end of the island N.E. 1/2 E. five leagues off. The 12th +we sailed for the N.E. end of the island, and in the afternoon came to +anchor in a fair bay, having seven fathoms on clean ground, a black oozy +sand, the N.E. point bearing S. 1/2 a league off, the landing place +W.S.W. two miles off, and the north part of the bay N. by W. four miles +off. The latitude of this bay is 20° 30' N. and the variation 17° +W.[301] In this bay you may ride safely in any depth between five and +twelve fathoms. It is an excellently healthy place, cold and hungry, +affording no refreshments except water, enough of which is to be had by +digging pits; but it is ill to boat except at the usual landing place. +This place afforded us no better supplies than the former, except that +we got a few goats and lambs in exchange for canikens. Though good +anchorage, this bay was much troubled by a tumbling rolling sea, yet we +resolved to remain here with the Hart and Roebuck till the fury of the +monsoon were past. + +[Footnote 301: The north end of Mazica is in lat. 21° 12", and its south +end in 20° 15', both N.--E.] + +Having separated some time before from the London, our admiral, we sent +on the 19th of June, one Abdelavie, an inhabitant of this island, as far +as Zoar with letters in quest of the London. He returned on the 6th July +with letters in answer, informing us that the London was at Zoar, seven +leagues within Cape Rasalgat, having watered with difficulty at Teve, +where their surgeon, Mr Simons, and the chaplain's servant, were +surprised on shore by the Portuguese and Arabs. The Hart and Roebuck +sailed from Macera, [Mazica,] on the 6th of August, and anchored in the +evening of the 8th beside the admiral in the port of Zoar. This road +differs from that in which we were in, being cairn, but the air was so +hot as to take away our appetites. + +We sailed from Zoar on the 15th of August and returned to Swally roads. +The 21st September, our whole fleet sailed from Swally, and on the 27th +we took leave of the fleet bound for Jasques, consisting of the London, +Jonas, Whale, Dolphin, Lion, Rose, Shilling, Richard, and Robert. The +1st January, 1622, we were between Johanna and Mayotta, two of the +Comoro islands. The 29th we anchored in Saldanha roads, [Table Bay,] +having come thither from Surat in nine weeks and three days, blessed be +God for our safe and speedy passage. We here watered, bathed in the +river, caught fish, and buried our letters; purchasing three cows, one +calf, and four sheep, all unsavoury meat. + +We sailed again on the 3d February, and anchored on the 19th at St +Helena, where we found the Wappen and the Hollandia, two Dutch ships, +the latter of which caught fire on the 22d, owing to her cloves, which +had been taken in too green at Amboina. There was likewise a third small +Dutch ship. They arrived eleven days before us, and it will take them at +least ten days more to discharge and reload their damaged cloves. We +sailed from St Helena on the 28th February, and anchored in the Downs on +the 7th June, 1622. + + + +SECTION XIII. + +RELATION OF THE WAR OF ORMUS, AND THE TAKING OF THAT PLACE BY THE +ENGLISH AND PERSIANS, IN 1622.[302] + + +"In the Pilgrims of Purchas, vol. II. pp. 1785-1805, there is a long +confused account of this business, contained in four several sections; +to which many letters and certificates on the subject are subjoined. +The _first_ is a brief historical memoir of the foundation of Ormus, from +a chronicle in the Arabic, said to have been composed by _Pacha +Turunxa_, perhaps Pacha Turun Shah, one of the kings of that petty +sovereignty. The _second_ is a relation of the Ormus war, by Mr W. +Pinder, who appears to have served under Andrew Shilling, during the +preceding voyage, and sailed as master of the Andrew on this occasion. +The _third_ is an account of the earlier part of this war of Ormus, +written by T. Wilson, a surgeon serving in the expedition. The fourth is +a more particular relation of the whole events of this expedition, +extracted by Purchas from the journal of Mr Edward Monoxe, agent for the +East Indian merchants trading in Persia. This last has been chosen, as +best adapted to give a distinct view of the expedition, but some +freedoms have been assumed with it, by assisting the narrative from the +other documents in Purchas, already specified."--E. + +[Footnote 302: Purch. Pilgr. II. 179s.] + + + * * * * * + +At a consultation held in Swally roads on the 14th November, 1621, a +commission was given by Mr Thomas Rastell, president, and the rest of +the council, of our factory at Surat, to Captains Richard Blithe and +John Weddell, who were bound for Jasques, with five good ships and four +pinnaces. The ships were the London, Jonas, Whale, Dolphin, and Lion, +and the pinnaces the Shilling, Rose, Robert, and Richard. They were +directed to sail with the earliest opportunity for Jasques, keeping +together for their mutual defence against the enemy; and, as the +Portuguese had disturbed the trade, and made sundry assaults on our +ships, killing, maiming, and imprisoning our men, they were authorized +to chase and capture any vessels belonging to the ports or subjects +under the viceroy of Goa; as likewise, if they met any ships belonging +to Dabul, Chaul, or other ports of the Deccan, or to the subjects of the +Zamorin of Calicut, to arrest them, in replacement of goods robbed and +spoiled by these powers, without embezzling any part of their cargoes, +that restitution might be made, after due satisfaction rendered on their +parts. A sixth part of the goods taken from the Portuguese were to be +distributed as prize, the ship and the rest of the goods to remain to +the company; and all the prisoners to be retained, that they might be +exchanged for our countrymen, held by them in miserable bondage. They +were directed to hasten their business and dispatch at Jasques, if +possible within thirty days. And as our enemy under Ruy Frere de +Andrada, was reinforced to six galleons, with other small vessels, +waiting on the coast of Persia in all likelihood to attack our fleet, +they were authorized, both defensively and offensively also, to use all +opportunities or advantages against the Portuguese fleet, even in their +own ports, if approved by a general council of war. + +We arrived in Costack roads on the 23d December, about twenty-seven +leagues from Jasques, Ormus being in sight about ten leagues W.N.W. by a +meridional compass. Our factors here informed us, that after our +sea-fight in the former year, the Portuguese governor of Ormus had +erected a fort on Kismis, an island within sight of Ormus, to which the +Persians had laid siege for seven or eight months ineffectually, and had +lost eight or nine thousand men in the siege; wherefore the Khan or +prince of Shiras had, by his ministers, demanded the aid of our ships +against the common enemy, the Portuguese, otherwise threatening to +detain all the goods and money belonging to the company in Persia. In a +consultation held on the 26th December on board the Jonas, in which were +present, Captain Richard Blithe, John Weddell, Edward Monoxe, William +Baffin, and many others, articles of agreement for giving our aid to the +Persians against the Portuguese were drawn up, and being translated into +the Persian language, were forwarded by the governor of the province of +Mogustan to the Khan of Shiras, then on his way towards Mina, near the +mouth of the Persian gulf. + +In this consultation, it was considered, as it was required of us by the +Persians, that we should give them aid with our ships and people in this +war, not only for the purpose of vanquishing the Portuguese navy, but +for conquering the island and castle of Ormus; and as we were confident +they would endeavour to force us into this service, by embargoing our +goods, the governors having already refused to give us camels for their +carriage from Mina to the ports: Wherefore, the foresaid proposition +being maturely considered, together with the commission from the factors +at Surat, warranting us to right ourselves for the great losses and +hindrances suffered from the Portuguese, by interrupting our trade both +in India and Persia, and their attack last year against the fleet under +Captain Shilling; we therefore agreed to proffer the following articles +to the Khan, for the public benefit and the securing a peaceable and +profitable trade. + +_First_.--In case of conquering the island and castle of Ormus by the +Persians with our aid, one half of the spoil and purchase of both to +belong to the English, and the other half to the Persians. +_Secondly_--The castle of Ormus shall be delivered up to the English, +with all the ordnance, arms, and ammunition thereunto belonging; and the +Persians to build another fortress there for themselves, at their own +charges. _Thirdly_.--The customs of Ormus shall be equally divided +between the English and the Persians, and the English shall be for ever +free from customs. _Fourthly_.--All Christians made prisoners in this +war shall be given up to the disposal of the English, and all Mahomedan +prisoners to the Persians. _Fifthly_.--The Persians shall be at half the +charges of the ships employed in this enterprize, in victuals, wages, +wear-and-tear, and shall furnish all necessary powder and shot at their +sole expence. + +These were the chief articles, besides which several others were agreed +upon, to be proposed to the Khan. After his arrival at Mina, Mr Bell and +Mr Monaxe were sent to wait upon him, on the 8th January, 1622, and were +entertained at a sumptuous banquet. A great feast and triumph was also +made, in consequence of intelligence that the Shah had conquered a +great country in Arabia, with its capital Aweiza.[303] Next day, the +Khan sent his vizier and two other principal officers to give an answer +to our proposed articles. The _first_ was granted. For the _second_, it +was substituted that the castle of Ormuz was to be occupied by both +nations till the King's pleasure was known. The _third_ was granted, +provided also, that the goods from India belonging to the king and the +Khan were to pass free of duty. In regard to the _fourth_, reservation +was made as to the two principal Portuguese captains, Ruy Frere, captain +of Kismis Castle, and Simon de Mela, governor of Ormus, till the king's +pleasure were known. Other articles were agreed upon; such as that no +change was to be made in regard to religion, and the expence of military +stores was to be divided. The Khan and Mr Bell signed these articles; +and presently our goods were laden upon the Khan's own camels at free +cost, which could not be procured before for any money. + +[Footnote 303: This assuredly alludes to Ahwas in Khosistan, to the N.W. +of the lower Euphrates, opposite to Bussrah, which, though not in +Arabia, is in its immediate neighbourhood, and principally inhabited by +people of Arabian origin.--E.] + +The 10th of January we returned to Costack, and going on board, +acquainted our commanders with the success of our mission. When the news +of this agreement became known among the several ships companies, they +consulted among themselves, and with one voice refused to take any share +in the business. This broke out first in the London, in which ship fifty +or sixty of her crew took part in refusing to have any thing to do with +this warlike measure; but, after taking much pains to reconcile them to +the propriety and necessity of joining with the Persians, Captain Blithe +at last prevailed with them, and they promised to go with him wherever +he chose to lead them. In a day or two, the flame of discontent and +opposition spread among the other ships, alleging that it was no +mercantile business, and that it might lead to a breach of the peace +between our nation and Spain; but formal protests being taken against +the crews, what with the fear of forfeiting their wages, and a promised +gratification of a month's pay, they all at last yielded. + +We set sail for Ormus on the 19th of January, and anchored on the night +of the 22d before the town, about two leagues from the castle, expecting +that the enemy's armada would come out to fight us, consisting of five +galleons, and some fifteen or twenty frigates, or armed barks; but they +hauled in so near the castle, that we could not get nigh them. For which +reason, and because our avowed enemy, Ruy Frere de Andrada, was in his +newly-erected castle of Kismis, we sailed to that place, where we +arrived the next day, and were just in time to save the lives of the +Portuguese, who were no longer able to hold out against the Persians, +and were willing rather to yield to us than them. After many meetings +and treaties, they yielded up both themselves and their castle into our +hands on the 1st February, it being concluded that the whole garrison +was to depart with their private property to any place except Ormus, +their commander only remaining in our hands as a pledge for the +fulfilment of the capitulation. In this service two of our people were +slain, one of whom was Mr Baffin.[304] + +[Footnote 304: Mr Baffin was a mathematician and mariner, to whom our +northern and north-western voyages are much indebted.--_Purch_. + +Hence almost certainly the person to whom Baffin's bay, in the +north-east of America, owes its name.--E.] + +There were about a thousand persons of all sorts in this castle, of whom +the Portuguese and some Mahometans were sent away: But the Khan required +certain Mahometans to be given up, who he pretended had revolted from +him. They were accordingly delivered up, and, though he had formerly +promised them mercy, he put them all to death. This castle had seventeen +pieces of ordnance, one of which was a brass pedro, two iron +demiculverins, four brass sackers, two iron minions, and six iron +falcons.[305] + +[Footnote 305: On a former occasion, we have given an account of the +various kinds of ordnance used about the 17th century. The _pedro_ was +probably a gun of large calibre for throwing _stone_ bullets. In modern +times, cannon are designated by the weights of their respective balls, +in combination with their being long or short, land or sea, field or +garrison, single or double fortified, iron or brass.--E.] + +Leaving some Englishmen to assist in keeping possession of this fortress +along with the Persians, according to agreement, we set sail on the 4th +February for Gambroon, on the mainland of Persia, within three leagues +of Ormus, and directly opposite. Ruy Frere de Andrada, the late +commander of Kismis, was sent off for Surat, in the Lion, accompanied by +the Rose and Richard. The London, Jonas, Whale, and Dolphin, with the +two prizes of 250 tons each, remained to transport the Persians in +safety to Ormus. We were royally feasted at Gambroon by the Khan, who +was much dissatisfied that Andrada and some of the Moors had not been +delivered up to him, yet dissembled his discontent, in regard of his +farther need for our ships in the enterprise against Ormus. After the +feast, all the English gentlemen present were presented with vests, each +according to his rank. + +On the 9th of February we set sail for Ormus, having about two hundred +Persian boats of all sizes, besides two frigates or barks, and our +ships, having in them about 2500 or 3000 Persian soldiers, of various +sorts. We anchored that night about two leagues from the castle; and +next forenoon all the Persians were landed on the island of Ormus, a +little way from the town, to which they marched in a confused manner, +penetrating as far as the Meidan, or market-place, without resistance. +The market-place was barricadoed and defended for some time by the +Portuguese with shot and pikes; but the Persians soon made way, with +small loss, and drove the Portuguese before them into the castle, like +so many sheep. One Persian only, who first entered, was slain by a pike, +and he who slew him soon lost his head, his heels being too heavy to +carry it away. + +On first entering the city, the Persian general, named Einam Culi Beg, +placed captains with detachments of soldiers in various quarters, +proclaiming that each officer was to be answerable for the safety of the +quarter assigned to him, and threatening death to all who were found +pillaging. Some infringing these orders were severely punished, some +being hanged, others having their ears or noses cut off, and others +bastinadoed even for trifles. Yet, in two or three days after, the shops +and houses were forced open, and every man so wearied with carrying away +plunder all day long, and sleeping so securely at night without any +proper military precautions, that the Portuguese might easily have slain +many, if they had ventured upon making a sally. + +On the night of our landing, I took possession of a very commodious +house for a factory, which, for convenience and goodness of its rooms, +exceeded, as I think, any factory belonging to the Honourable Company. +But it proved too hot for me on the 13th, in the night, as one of the +master's mates of the Whale, with others of his companions, after I was +in bed, by carelessness of candles, while searching for plunder, set a +room on fire in which were some goods given me in charge by the general. +Fortunately the wind favoured us, so that the house was not consumed. +Considering the strength of this city, and that every house was as it +were a little castle, I was astonished the Portuguese should have +abandoned it so soon. But it seems they were afraid of being intercepted +by the Persians in their retreat to the castle, and dreaded that the +Mahometan inhabitants might have betrayed them. + +The Persians began presently to throw up trenches, and daily approached +nearer the castle, and, with our help, erected batteries for ordnance, +and sconces or redoubts for securing their men, and protecting the +trenches. With the cannon from our ships, we sore galled the Portuguese +ships, forcing them to haul in as close as possible to the castle. On +the 24th of February, four of our boats set fire to the San Pedro, +formerly admiral of Andrada's fleet, which put all the rest in great +danger, but the tide carried her out to sea, and her relics were towed +on shore at Gambroon by the Arab and other country boats, some iron +ordnance and shot being got out of her burnt carkass. The Khan was much +rejoiced at this exploit. + +The Persians having succeeded in constructing a mine under one of the +bastions, which was charged with upwards of forty barrels of powder, it +was exploded on the 17th of March, by which a practicable breach was +made in the salient angle of the bastion. The Persians made immediately +a fierce assault, and Shah Culi Beg got possession of the bastion with +200 of his bravest men, and maintained himself there for at least three +hours; but the Portuguese made a brave defence, and with powder-pots, +scalding lead, and other devices of fire, did much hurt to the +assailants, burning, scalding, and slaying many of them, so that the +Persians were at last driven out with considerable loss, most of them +being wounded, scalded, or scorched. On the same day, the city was set +on fire in several places, by the command of the Persian general, as was +reported, because his Arab soldiers lurked among the houses, and could +not be got forth to do any service in the siege. + +To the number of four or five thousand men, we were now cooped up in a +barren island without shelter, producing nothing in itself except salt; +and I know not by what mistaken policy the general had been induced to +send away all the rice and other victuals, by which means we were +reduced to depend upon the continent for a daily supply of provisions, +and even water; so that, if a fleet of Portuguese frigates had come, as +was expected, we must have been famished, as the country boats durst not +have ventured to us from the main. The rain water in the open cisterns +was daily wasted, and became brackish, no care being taken to fill the +jars and private cisterns in almost every house, while it remained good. +The Persians are quite ignorant in the art of war, for they entered the +breach without fear, precaution, or means of establishing themselves; +and they lost with shame what they might have defended with honour. I +observed other defects in their management, even of the very sinews of +war; and I am astonished that Shah Abbas, the wonder of our age, should +have sent his army on this expedition so weakly provided with money, +arms, ammunition, ships, and all other necessaries. I am even satisfied +that all the money belonging to the khan was consumed in one month's pay +to our ships, and I fear we shall have to wait for the rest till the +plunder is converted into money. In regard to arms and ammunition, they +have only small pieces, with bows and arrows, and swords, some of their +chiefs having coats of mail. They were so scarce of powder, that after +blowing their mine, they had hardly enough to supply the small arms for +entering the breach, though furnished with twenty or twenty-five barrels +from our ships. They had not a single scaling-ladder to assist their +entry. Were we to forsake them, they would soon be completely at a +stand, yet they have already broken conditions with us in several +things, and I much fear, when all is done, we shall be paid with +reversions, and what else they themselves please. + +Our ordnance so galled the Portuguese ships from the shore, that a +galleon was sunk on the 19th of March, and two more on the 20th and 23d. +The last come ship from Goa, which was their admiral, and one of the +others, were, I think, sacrificed by the policy of the governor, that +the garrison might have no means of escape, and might therefore defend +themselves manfully to the last, in hopes of relief from Goa, though +some thought they went down in consequence of injuries from sunken +rocks, in hauling them so near the castle to get them out of the range +of our battery. + +On the 27th, news was brought me that some of the Portuguese were come +from the castle to treat of peace, upon which I repaired to the +general's tent, where I could well perceive, by the countenances of our +two English commanders, that I was by no means welcome: But, to requite +them in their own coin, both they and I soon saw that none of us were +acceptable to the Persians, for they long delayed bringing in the +Portuguese messenger, in hopes we would have gone away, but at length, +seeing we remained, he was brought in. The drift of his speech was to +the following effect:--"His captain had sent him to kiss the hands of +the general, and to ask the reason of making war upon the Portuguese, +who were friends to the Persians, and thought it strange, considering +their ancient league and friendship, that so great a war should be made +only for one or two wells of water. Besides, that the governor and +people of Ormus were not to blame for what had been done at Kismis by +Ruy Frere de Andrada; yet were they willing, so far as might consist +with the honour of their sovereign, to purchase peace, which they needed +not to do either from fear or weakness, having above a thousand +able-bodied men in the castle, with provisions and water for many +months; besides which, they were in daily expectation of succours from +Goa. He concluded by saying, that the Persians would find it a hard +matter to win the castle, as they were resolved to defend themselves to +the last man." + +The latter part of this speech, consisting of bravado, was by no means +pleasing to the Persian general, who desired the messenger to declare +the purpose of his coming. On which he said, the governor wished to know +what the Persian general would have? To this the general answered, that +he would have the castle; and with that answer the messenger was +dismissed, without even the offer of a cup of wine, if I had not caused +one to be given him. I suspect he brought a more substantial message, +which was omitted on account of our presence, having been so instructed +by Shah Culi Beg, in whose house he was at least for an hour before he +was brought before the general. I fear therefore some sinister designs +of the Persians, which a few days will discover. + +Our captains, by means of their interpreters, now moved their own +affairs with the general, to which he gave no great heed, but desired +that business might be deferred for some time; yet had he that very day +earnestly entreated them to send him a quantity of powder from the +ships, meaning that night to attempt blowing up the castle, for which +the mines were all ready, and he wanted nothing but powder. They had +accordingly sent him thirty-four barrels, for which forwardness I fear +the Company at home will give them little thanks. + +The 28th March, understanding that two chief men of the Portuguese +garrison were in Shah Culi Beg's house, where they had been four or five +hours in conference with the Persian general, without sending to us, +which increased our suspicions that the Persians meant to deal +fraudulently with us; the two English commanders and I went together to +the tent of the Persian general, and expressed our dislike of this +underhand manner of proceeding. We stated, that we were partakers with +them in this war, in which we had hazarded ourselves, our ships, and our +goods, besides the hindrance we sustained by losing the monsoon, and +that we ought to be equal participators in all treaties and proceedings, +as well as in the war, and desired therefore to know what they had +concluded, or meant to conclude, with the Portuguese. To this he +answered, that nothing had been done, neither should any thing be +concluded without acquainting us. This was a mere empty compliment, +which all his actions belied. We must, however, be content to suffer all +with patience: Yet, were it not for our merchants and woods in Persia, +we could easily have remedied this affair, and have brought the +Portuguese to such terms as we pleased. As matters stand, however, we +are so tied down, we must be patient, and I fear things will turn out +very ill, though they pretend all things shall be done to our +contentment. + +About noon this day, seeing many Arabs in the Meidan armed with pikes +and guns, whom I did not usually see so armed, I at length observed them +ranged upon both sides of the market-place, and presently afterwards two +Portuguese gentlemen passed, attended by six or eight pages and +servants, one of whom carried an umbrella over their heads. They were +accompanied by Shah Culi Beg, and other chief Persians, who conducted +them to the house of Agariza of Dabul. Though uninvited, I went there +also, and intruded into their company, where I found the Persian general +and other chiefs, his assistants and counsellors. The general gave me a +kind welcome, and made me sit down next himself, which I did not refuse, +that the Portuguese might see we were in grace and favour. Having made +my obeisance to the Persians, I then saluted the Portuguese officers, +who returned the compliment, after which I had some general conversation +with them, not pertaining to the great purpose in hand, of which I did +not presume to speak, till the general gave me occasion, which was not +until after a collation of _pilaw_, and other dishes, after the fashion +of Persia. + +The collation being ended, the general asked them what was now their +desire. They answered, that the captain of the castle had given them +written instructions, but had desired them to make their proposals to +the Khan himself, who now resided at Gombroon, if they might be +permitted to wait upon him. To this the general answered, that he durst +not allow them, unless the Khan were first made acquainted with their +desire. I could plainly perceive that this proceeded only from affected +delays on both sides, to give time for attaining their several purposes. +The Portuguese then proceeded to complain, as formerly, against Ruy +Frere, as if he durst have presumed to seize and fortify Kismis without +orders from the king his master. They alleged also that the affair was +in itself of no moment, being only a barren island with a well or two. +To this the Persian general replied, it was of no matter what might be +its value, but they had gone to war against the king of Persia and his +subjects, for which their castle of Ormus must make satisfaction; +wherefore, if they would surrender the castle without any more +bloodshed, they should have good quarter and kind usage. The Portuguese +said they had no commission to treat of any such matter, and so the +conference ended, and they were dismissed. + +Notwithstanding of the Portuguese being refused leave to go to the Khan, +they had licence that same night, and were sent over to treat with him +at Gambroon. I could never know the certainty of the proposed treaty, +but shall here insert what I heard reported on the subject. They +proposed, in the first place, to the Khan, to raise the siege, and +permit them to enjoy their city and castle of Ormus as formerly, in +consideration of which, they offered to pay 200,000 tomans in hand, and +the yearly rent they had formerly paid to the king of Ormus, from the +revenue of the custom-house, which, as I have heard, was 140,000 rials +of eight or Spanish dollars yearly. But some said, besides the 200,000 +tomans in hand, they offered as much yearly. [306] It was reported that +the Khan demanded 500,000 tomans in hand, equal to £172,418:10:7 +sterling,[307] and an yearly rent of 200,000 tomans. + +[Footnote 306: A toman, by the data in the text immediately following, +is about seven shillings; hence 200,000 tomans are equal to £70,000 +sterling.--E.] + +[Footnote 307: At the former computation, this sum is equal to £175,000; +and the conversion in the text gives 6s. 11-3/4d, and a small fraction +more for each toman, being very near 7s. which is more convenient.--E.] + +The 2d April, with the aid of the English, the Persians blew up two +other mines, by which a fair and practicable breach was opened, through +which the besiegers might have entered without much difficulty, yet was +there no assault made. Having noticed this carefully, Captain Weddell +went to the Persian general to learn his purposes; when, to excuse the +backwardness of his people, he pretended that the breach was too +difficult to be assaulted with any hope of success. Yet we knew the +contrary, as an English youth, who was servant to the master of the +Jonas, bolder than any of the Persians, had gone up the breach to the +very top of the castle wall, and told us it was as easily ascendible as +a pair of stairs, and broad enough for many men to go abreast. In +representing this to the general, and asking what were his future plans +of proceeding, he told us he would be ready with another mine in three +days. This I believed to be true, for his mining is to procure gold, not +to make breaches, unless breach of promise to us, which he can easily +do; for of late they have not performed any of their engagements, yet +will not this teach us to look to ourselves. + +The greatest hurt done by the Portuguese to the Persians in the assault +on the castle, was by means of powder-pots, by which many of the +assailants were scorched and severely burned. To guard against this, the +Khan has now sent over many coats and jackets of leather, as not so +liable to catch fire as their calico coats, quilted or stuffed with +cotton wool. Yet, according to the English proverb, _The burnt child +dreads the fire;_ notwithstanding their leathern coats, none of them are +hardy enough to attempt this new breach, though much easier to enter +than the former, any farther than to pillage certain bales of _bastas_ +and other stuffs which have fallen down from a barricade or breast-work, +thrown up by the Portuguese for defending the top of the breach from the +fire of the Persians. + +On the 5th of April the Persian general had news that 100,000 maunds of +powder were arrived from Bahrein. On the 12th, a Portuguese came to the +Persian general, having escaped from the castle, and gave accounts of +the great wants and weaknesses of the garrison, insomuch, that six or +eight died daily of the flux, chiefly owing to their having nothing to +drink, but corrupted brackish water, of which even they have so little +as to be put on short allowance, so that several have died of thirst. +Their only food consists of rice and salt fish, both of which would +require a good allowance of drink. Notwithstanding all this, the Persian +general wastes his time in constructing new mines, of which he has no +less than three in hand at this time, as if he proposed to blow up the +wall all round about, before making any fresh assault. On the night of +the 12th, one of our frigates or barks, which belonged to the London, +being on guard alone, to prevent the escape of the Portuguese frigates, +was clapped on board by two of these at once, but beat them both off. I +know not what might be the loss of the Portuguese on this occasion, but +two of our men were slain, and seven wounded; yet, had not our black +rowers forsaken them, our people might easily have taken the assailants. + +The 14th, the Persians sprung another mine, by which a very assailable +breach was made, yet no assault was attempted. On this occasion, the +mine had to be sprung before it was quite ready, because the Portuguese +had already come so near it with a counter mine, that the Persians were +afraid of their mine being rendered useless before they could place +their powder. Another deserter came from the castle on the 15th, who +confirmed the report given by the former, and told us that the two +frigates which had assailed ours had come from Muskat, with the son of +the deceased Don Francisco de Sousa, late governor of the castle of +Ormus, who had come on purpose to carry away his mother and other women +from the castle. + +At this time, the Moors who had surrendered to us from the castle of +Kismis, were delivered up to the Persian general, at his earnest +request, and partly with their own consent, on promise of being pardoned +for having served under the Portuguese against their own king and +country, and of being provided for and employed in the siege of Ormus. +He seemed to ratify this promise, both to them and us, by entertaining +some of their chiefs in our presence, with much apparent courtesy, even +giving fine new vests to five or six of the principal officers. Yet next +morning he caused eighty of their heads to be cut off, and sent the five +or six newly-vested chiefs to the Khan at Gambroon, to receive their +final doom, which was soon settled, as they were sentenced to the same +fate with their fellows. Mir Senadine, their chief captain, was executed +by the hands of Shere Alli, governor of Mogustan, who had married his +daughter, and yet put his father-in-law to death with as much +willingness as if he had been his mortal enemy. + +The 17th of April, the Persians sprung another mine, closely adjoining +their first. This did not produce the effect expected, as it burst out +at the side, carrying part of the wall along with it, yet did little or +no harm upwards, which was the point aimed at, on purpose to widen the +former breach. Yet it encouraged the Persian general to try another +assault, with at least 2000 soldiers. They ran up the breach with great +resolution, into part of a bulwark or bastion, which they might easily +have gained, had not their haste run their resolution out of breath; +insomuch, that eight or ten Portuguese, assisted by a few blacks, armed +only with rapiers, made them give ground and retire to the outer skirt +of the bulwark, where there was not room for forty men to face the +enemy. They here endeavoured, however, to entrench themselves; but, +before they could establish a lodgement, the Portuguese plied two or +three pieces of ordnance upon them from a flanking battery, which sent +some scores of the Persians with news to their prophet _Mortus Alli_ +that more of his disciples would shortly be with them. This accordingly +was the case, chiefly owing to their own ignorance and cowardice; for, +had they not made a stand in that place, but rushed pell-mell along with +the Portuguese into the castle, they might have carried it with less +than half the loss they sustained that day to little purpose. Had I not +been an eye-witness, I could hardly have believed the stupid ignorance +of the Persian general on this occasion. He had two breaches, almost +equally good, yet applied all his men to the assault of one only, +instead of attempting both at one time. Besides, he had at least eighty +or an hundred scaling-ladders, yet not one of them was brought near the +castle walls. His soldiers hung clustering on the breach, like a swarm +of bees, or a flock of sheep at a gap, none having the heart to enter, +while the Portuguese gleaned away five or six at a shot, sometimes more, +driving forwards their black soldiers to throw powder-pots among the +Persians. + +The assault was renewed on the 18th, but with more harm to the Persians +than the Portuguese. During the intervening night, two blacks made signs +to the Persians on the top of the breach, that they wished to come over +to them, and were drawn up with ropes. By these it was learned that the +captain of the castle had been wounded in the head by a stone; that +there were not above an hundred men in the garrison able to handle their +arms: and that their water grew daily more scanty and worse in quality, +by which the mortality continually increased. They reported also that +great difference in opinion prevailed among the Portuguese, some wishing +to endeavour to escape by sea, while others held it more honourable to +sell their lives at a dear rate, by defending the castle to the last +extremity, and proposed, when they could no longer hold out, to put all +their women and treasure into a house and blow them up, that the +Persians might neither enjoy their wealth nor abuse their wives; and, +when this was done, to rush upon the Persians, and so end their days. + +In the evening of the 19th, the Persians made another effort to press +forwards, and got possession of the entire bulwark, forcing the +Portuguese to retire farther within the castle. In this conflict many of +the Portuguese were wounded, and sore scalded with fire-pots, in the +management of which the Persians had now become expert, though many of +them had paid dearly for their instruction. In this conflict four +Portuguese were slain, and their heads brought to the Persian general. +In this art of cutting off heads, the Persians are particularly cunning, +insomuch, that I do not think there is an executioner in all Germany +that can excel them. No sooner does a Persian lay hold of an enemy, than +off goes his head at one blow of his scymitar.[308] He then makes a hole +in the ear or cheek with his dagger, by which he will sometimes bring +three or four heads at once to his general. When it is proposed to send +these heads taken in war to be seen by the king or the khan, they very +adroitly flea off the skin of the head and face, which they stuff up +with straw like a foot-ball, and so send them by whole sackfulls.[309] + +[Footnote 308: This, however, is to the praise of the Persians, as good +swordsmen, on which account the Turks fear coming to hand blows with +them.--_Purch_.] + +[Footnote 309: In Turkey they manage this barbarous trophy of success +more conveniently, as the Grand Signior is satisfied with a display of +the ears of his enemies preserved in salt.--E.] + +This night, one of the frigates that came from Muskat for Douna de +Sousa, made her escape, no doubt very richly freighted. Her consort, +which likewise attempted to get away, was chased in again. That which +escaped, being hailed by the Arab boats that lay in wait to intercept +the passage, got off by using the watch-word usual between the English +and Arabs, _Ingres ingresses,_ which had not been once changed since the +commencement of this enterprize, in which oversight both the Persians +and English were highly blameable, as, by the continual use of this +watch-word, it had come to the knowledge of the Portuguese, who thus +used it to their great benefit. + +During the night of the 20th April, the other frigate made an effort to +escape, but was intercepted and taken by the frigate and pinnace +belonging to the London. This frigate was employed to carry away the +Portuguese _almirante,_ named Luis de Brito, a kinsman to the viceroy of +Goa, but the captain of the castle would not permit him to go away; and +the men belonging to this frigate, being seven persons, fearing the +capture of the castle and desirous to secure their own lives, stole away +without leave. + +The 21st, the Persians made a display of making themselves masters of +the castle by storm; but, while we expected to see them put this bold +measure in execution, I discovered that they and the Portuguese were +engaged in a parley. While I was preparing to wait on the Persian +general, to enquire the cause of this sudden change of measures, I met a +messenger from our English commanders, informing me that a boat had come +off to our ships from the castle, bearing a flag of truce, and desiring +my presence on board to see what was the purpose of this communication. +On my getting on board the London, I found two Portuguese there, with +the following letters from the captain of the castle, and the almirante: + + "There hath been such ancient friendship between the + Portuguese and English nations, that, considering the present + war at this place, we ought to come to a mutual good + understanding. From what I see of the mines made by the + Persians, by which one of my bulwarks is already won, I am + of opinion these could not have been constructed without + your aid. Wherefore, I request you would be the means of + procuring peace for me with the Persians, if the same may + be done with your and their good pleasure, yet so that I may + not lose my credit, nor you fail to gain honour. Thus, not + else, our Lord keep you," &c. + + _Simon de Mela Pereira_. + + "This castle is so hard pressed, that the Persians demand + us to surrender by capitulation, but which we will not consent + to: For, when reduced to that necessity, we will call + upon your worships for that purpose, as it were not reasonable + for us to capitulate with the infidels when you are present. + We hold it more humane to deliver our innocent women, + and other unnecessary people, to the rigour of our own + weapons, than to the clemency of the Persians; and that you + might know this our purpose, I have written these lines to + accompany the letter from our captain. What else you may + wish to know, you may learn from the bearer of these letters, + to whom you may give the same credit as to myself. And so + God keep your worships," &c. + + _Luis de Brito Dar_. + + Dated 1st May, 1622.[310] + +Taking these letters into consideration, and commiserating their +situation as Christians, it was resolved to give them a favourable +answer, which was done accordingly in a letter to the Captain Simon de +Mela, offering to become an intermedium for procuring them such +conditions from the Persians as might save the lives of the Christians +who still remained in the castle, which we had in our power to warrant, +and were willing to shew them such farther courtesy as might tend to +their relief, as far as we could see. We desired him therefore to put +his demands in writing, and send them to us as soon as possible. A +similar answer was written to the almirante, and with these the two +messengers were sent back to the castle in one of our own boats. They +soon returned with other letters from the captain and almirante, saying, +"That they left themselves entirely in our hands, the necessity of their +situation not allowing time for farther writing, lest the Persians might +in the mean while break in and put them all to the sword." + +[Footnote 310: The 1st of May, _new style_, was the 21st April, _old +style_; the difference being then ten days.--E.] + +Upon this we addressed ourselves to the Persian general, requesting him +to grant a truce of two days to the distressed Portuguese, in which time +we might treat with them for such conditions as might be at the same +time beneficial for the Persians and ourselves. At length, a Persian +officer and I were deputed to go into the castle to treat with the +Portuguese, and they also desired our vice-admiral, Mr Woodcock, might +accompany us. We all three went to the castle gate, but could not be +allowed to enter; yet were met by Luis de Brito, the Portuguese +almirante, and five or six other _cavalieros_, but did not see the +captain, as the inferior officers and soldiers had mutinied against him, +and detained him as a prisoner. Our whole conference, therefore, was +with the almirante, who chiefly addressed himself to Captain Woodcock, +our almirante, or vice-admiral. + +Mir Adul Hassan, and Pulot Beg, had been sent for to the ship, where +some persons had embezzled a portion of treasure, as we now wished them +to be present at the conference on the part of the Khan. They came +accordingly to the English house, when one of them made a long speech, +saying how kindly the Khan esteemed the services and assistance given by +the English in this war, which he should never forget, nor allow to pass +unrewarded. They next declared that the Khan intended to proceed, after +the surrender of Ormus, to besiege both Muskat and Sware, and therefore +that the Portuguese ought on no account to be allowed to go to either of +these places. Lastly, they insinuated basely and dishonourably, that we +should betray the Portuguese captain, and five or six more of his +principal officers, into their hands, as this would tend greatly to the +honour and satisfaction of the Khan, by enabling him to present them to +Shah Abas. On hearing this vile and dishonourable proposal, I left the +room, that my ears might not be contaminated by such abominable +conditions; saying, at my departure, to these Persians, that I would not +be guilty of consenting to so infamous a business for a whole houseful +of gold. + +The Portuguese being reduced to such extremity as to be under the +necessity of surrendering on any terms that might save their lives from +the cruelty of the Persians, sent on the morning of the 23d, offering to +put themselves into our hands, on condition that we furnished them with +the means of being conveyed either to Muskat or India. We agreed to this +proposal, on which Captain Blithe and I went as hostages into the +castle, to see them safely set out; the Persian general promising that +not one of his soldiers or men should enter the castle till all the +Portuguese were gone out, and that only three of his people and three of +ours should sit at the gate, to see that they did not carry away any +thing of value. This the Persians watched so narrowly, that they most +basely searched and abused the women. But the king of Ormus with his +rich vizier, together with their women, treasure, and servants, were all +conveyed over the breach in the wall, and not a single Englishman called +or allowed to see what they carried out with them. Not only they, but +all other Mahometans and Banyans, with their treasure and best things, +were conveyed out of the castle in the same manner; whole bales of +goods, with boxes and caskets full of treasure, to an unknown amount, +were carried at the same time over the breaches. No sooner were the +gates opened for letting out the Portuguese, but at least forty Persians +got in and spread themselves about the castle, besides whom, some of the +ruder sort among the English got in likewise, whose coming in I fear was +the cause of the Persians doing the same, judging themselves as worthy +of this liberty as our people. + +Before mid-day of the 24th, both the Persians and English began to +pillage in a most shameful manner, so that I was both grieved and +ashamed, yet could see no means of remedy. The Persians drove out the +poor sick, wounded, and scorched Christians, who were not able to help +themselves, so that my heart yearned with compassion to see their woeful +plight. In the evening, the Khan of Shiras came over, as if in triumph, +to view the castle and its great ordnance, of which there were near +three hundred pieces,[311] part of which belonged to the galleons, and +the rest to the castle. This evening, the commanders and I, wishing to +retain possession of the church in which we had placed a quantity of +plate and treasure, for its better security against being embezzled, our +design was utterly denied by Pulot Beg, who told our commanders, in +plain terms, that they might lie out of doors. Being justly incensed at +this, we all three left the castle, the two captains going on board +their ships, while I went to the city; but, as the tide was up, and I +could not get a boat, I had to remain at the castle wall till near +midnight. At this time there came about sixty Persians, by their own +report, sent by the Khan to prevent the Arabs from conveying away any of +the ordnance which lay by the shore, but I suspect their real object was +to cut the throats of the poor Christians who lay at the shore, for want +of boats to carry them on board; but fortunately they were protected by +an English guard. Our chief business the whole of this day was to see +the poor Portuguese sent safely out of the castle, most of them so +weakened by divers maladies, but chiefly by famine, and many of them so +noisome by their putrified wounds, and scorchings with gunpowder, that +their pitiful cries and complaints might have moved pity in a heart of +stone; yet such was the cruel disposition of the Persians, that they +drove them out of the castle like so many dogs, stripping many of them +even of their shirts. + +[Footnote 311: In a shorter relation of this siege, by Mr W. Pinder, the +ordnance in the castle of Ormus are thus enumerated:--Fifty-three pieces +mounted, of the following descriptions,--four brass cannons, six brass +demi-cannons, sixteen brass cannons-pedro, nine brass culverins, two +brass demi-culverins, three iron demi-culverins, ten brass basses, one +iron minion, one iron culverin, one iron cannon-pedro. Besides +ninety-two brass pieces not mounted, and seven brass bastels which they +had landed from the ships that were sunk. In all, 152 pieces.--E.] + +On the evening of the 27th, we allowed the Portuguese to depart for Goa, +to the number of 2500 persons, including men, women, and children, to +whom we gave our two prizes, the Robert and Shilling, for their +transport, with victuals and water necessary for the voyage, and a pass +to free them from any molestation, in case they met with any of our +ships at sea. Besides these, there were upwards of an hundred persons, +so maimed or sick as to be incapable of being sent off at this time, for +want of room in these two ships. + +The king of Ormus was very poor, and lived chiefly on a pension or +allowance of 140,000 rees, allowed him by the king of Spain, with some +small reserved petty customs. In rummaging among his papers, we found +the copy of a letter from him to the king of Spain, complaining loudly +of the injustice of the Portuguese, and charging them with the entire +overthrow of the kingdom of Ormus.[312] + +[Footnote 312: Besides this letter, too long and uninteresting for +insertion, there are several other letters and documents in the Pilgrims +at this place, so much in the same predicament as to be here +omitted.--E.] + +When we expected to have received 1200 tomans[313] from Pulot Beg, who +was chief commissioner under the Khan of Shiras, as our pay for the time +occupied in this enterprize, he contrived to make us a larger sum in +their debt, under pretence of embezzling the plunder in the castle; +while we, on the other hand, made counter demands of a much larger sum +due to us from the Persians, in the same manner. At length, three months +pay were allowed, and our other demands were shifted off, as he +pretended to have no power to liquidate them without an order from the +Khan. After business was ended, our misery began, occasioned by the +insufferable heat of Ormus, and the disorders of our own people in +drinking arrack, and other excesses no less injurious; through which +such diseases arose among our people, that three-fourths of them were +dangerously sick, and many died so suddenly, that the plague was feared +to have got among them, although no symptoms of that dreadful malady as +yet appeared. This extremity lasted for fourteen days, during which +time, six or seven of our men died every day; but after this, it pleased +God to stay the mortality, and the rest recovered. Ten pieces of +ordnance belonging to the Portuguese, were taken into our ships, to +replace that number of our own which had been broken or otherwise +spoiled during the siege. Our fleet was detained till the 1st September, +owing to the shifting of the monsoon, and waiting its return. Leaving +Ormus on that day, we arrived in Swally roads on the 24th of that month, +where the London, Jonas, and Lion, loaded for England, and sailed +homewards bound on the 30th December. Before setting sail, news was +brought of sinking three Portuguese carracks off the port of +Masulipatam, by the English and Dutch in conjunction. + +[Footnote 313: This must be a gross error, as by the value of the toman +formerly given, the sum in the text very little exceeds £400. Purchas +mentions, in a side-note, that he had heard the English received £20,000 +for this service from the Persians.--E.] + + * * * * * + +In the Annals of the East India Company,[314] the English are said on +this occasion to have received a proportion of the plunder acquired at +Ormus, and a grant of the moiety of the customs at Gambroon, which +place, in the sequel, became the principal station of their trade with +Persia and other places in the Persian gulf. The treaty made in 1615 by +Mr Connock was also renewed, and an additional phirmaund granted by the +Sophi, allowing them to purchase whatever quantity of Persian silks they +might think proper, in any part of his dominions, with the privilege of +bringing their goods from Gambroon to Ispahan free of duties. + +[Footnote 314: Vol. I. p. 236. The historiographer makes, however, a +small mistake, naming Ruy Frere de Andrada as chief commander of the +Portuguese at Ormus, who only commanded in a subordinate fortress at +Kismis.--E.] + +In consequence of the war of Ormus, a claim was set up in 1624 by the +crown and the Duke of Buckingham, as lord high admiral of England, by +which the Company was demanded to pay a proportion of the prize-money, +which their ships were supposed to have obtained in the seas bordering +on the countries within the limits of their exclusive charter. In order +to substantiate these claims, Captains Weddell, Blithe, Clevenger, +Beversham, and other officers of the Company's ships were examined, and +particularly those who had been employed against Ormus. According to +their statements, it appeared that the amount of this prize-money was +calculated at £100,000 and 240,000 rials of eight, but without taking +into view the charges and losses incurred by the Company on this +occasion, and by their ships being called off from commercial +engagements, to act as ships of war for the protection of their trade +against the Portuguese, and in the assistance of the government of +Persia, by which they had been compelled, either to engage in this war, +or to relinquish a trade in which they had expended large sums, together +with the loss of all their goods then in Persia. At last the Company was +obliged to compound, by payment of £10,000 to the Duke of Buckingham in +discharge of his claim, and received an order from the secretary of +state, Sir Edward Conway, to pay a similar sum also to the crown.--E. + + + + +SECTION XIV. + + +ACCOUNT OF THE MASSACRE OF AMBOINA, IN 1623.[315] + +In the preceding sections of this chapter, the early commercial voyages +of the English East India Company have been detailed; and it is now +proposed to conclude this part of our arrangement, by a brief narrative +of the unjustifiable conduct of the Dutch at Amboina, in cruelly +torturing and executing several Englishmen and others on false pretences +of a conspiracy, but the real purpose of which was to appropriate to +themselves the entire trade of the spice islands, Amboina, Banda, and +the Moluccas. They effectually succeeded in this nefarious attempt, and +preserved that rich, but ill-got source of wealth, for almost two +hundred years; till recently expelled from thence, and from every other +commercial or colonial possession in Asia, Africa, and America. A just +retribution for submitting to, or seconding rather, the revolutionary +phrenzy of French democracy; for which they now deservedly suffer, under +the iron sceptre of the modern Atilla. + +[Footnote 315: Purch. Pilgr. II. 1853. Harris, I. 877.] + +In giving a short narrative of this infamous transaction, besides the +original account of Purchas, abridged from a more extended relation +published at the time by the East India Company, advantage has been +taken of the account given by Harris of the same event, which is fuller +and better connected than that of Purchas, who most negligently garbled +this story, under pretence of abbreviation. Harris appears evidently to +have used the authorised narrative published by the Company, in drawing +up his account of the event. There are other documents, relative to this +tragical event, both in the Pilgrims of Purchas and the Collection by +Harris, particularly the Dutch justificatory memorial, in which they +endeavour to vindicate their conduct, and to shew that the English +merited the lingering tortures and capital punishments to which they +were condemned; to which is added a reply or refutation, published by +order of the English Company. But the abridged narrative contained in +this section seems quite sufficient on so disgusting a subject, +especially so long after the events which it records.--E. + + * * * * * + +After the fruitless issue of two several treaties, for arranging the +differences that had taken place in eastern India, between the English +and Hollanders respecting the trade of the spice islands, the first at +London in 1613, and the second at the Hague in 1616, a third negociation +was entered into at London in 1619, by which a solemn compact was +concluded upon for settling these disputes, and full and fair +arrangement made for the future proceedings of the servants of both +Companies in the Indies, as well in regard to their trade and commerce, +as to other matters. Among other points, it was agreed, in consideration +of the great losses the Dutch pretended to have sustained, both in men +and expence, in conquering the trade of the isles, namely, the Moluccas, +Banda, and Amboina, from the Spaniards and Portuguese, and in the +erection of forts for securing the same, that the Hollanders were to +enjoy two-third parts of that trade, and the English one-third; the +expences of the forts and garrisons to be maintained by taxes and +impositions, to be levied ratably on the merchandize. In consequence of +this agreement, the English East India Company established certain +factories, for managing their share of this trade, some at the Moluccas, +some at Banda, and others at Amboina. + +The island of Amboina, near Ceram, is about forty leagues in circuit, +and gives its name also to some other small adjacent isles. This island +produces cloves, for the purpose of procuring which valuable spice, the +English had five several factories, the head and rendezvous of all being +at the town of Amboina, in which at the first, Mr George Muschamp was +chief factor, who was succeeded by Mr Gabriel Towerson; having authority +over the subordinate factories of Hitto and Larica on the same island, +and at Loho and Cambello on a point of the neighbouring island of Ceram. +On the island of Amboina and the point of Ceram, the Hollanders have +four forts, the chief of all being at the town of Amboina, which is very +strong, having four bastions or bulwarks, on each of which there are six +great cannons, most of them brass. One side of this castle is washed by +the sea, and the other is protected on the land side by a very deep +ditch, four or five fathoms broad, always filled by the sea. The +garrison of this castle consists of about 200 Dutch soldiers, and one +company of free burghers; besides which there are three or four hundred +_mardykers_, by which name the free natives are known, who reside in the +town, and are always ready to serve in the castle at an hour's warning. +There are likewise, for the most part, several good Dutch ships in the +roads, both for the protection of this place by sea, and for the +purposes of trade, as this is the central rendezvous of trade for the +Banda islands, as well as for Amboina. At this place, the English +factory was established in the town, under the protection of the castle, +in a house of their own, where they lived as they thought in security, +both in consideration of the ancient league of amity between the two +nations, and in virtue of the firm compact of union, made by the late +treaty of 1619, already mentioned. + +The English factory continued here for about two years, trading +conjunctly with the Hollanders under the treaty. During this period +there occurred several differences and debates between the servants of +the two companies. The English complained that the Hollanders not only +lavished much unnecessary charges, in buildings and other needless +expences upon the forts and otherwise, but also paid the garrisons in +victuals and Coromandel cloths, which they issued to the soldiers at +three or four times the value which they cost, yet would not allow the +English proportion of the charges to be advanced in like manner, but +insisted always on their paying in ready money: Thus drawing from the +English, who only were bound to contribute one-third part, more than +two-thirds of the just and true charges. Upon this head there arose +frequent disputes, and the complaints of the English were conveyed to +Jacatra, now called Batavia, in Java, to the _council of defence_ of +both nations, there residing. The members of that council not being able +to agree upon these points of difference, the complaints were +transmitted to Europe, to be settled between the two companies; or, in +default of their agreement, by the king and the states general, pursuant +to one of the articles of the before-mentioned treaty, providing against +such contingencies. In the meantime, these, and other differences and +discontents between the English and Dutch, daily continued and +increased, till at length this knot, which all the tedious controversies +at Amboina and Jacatra were unable to untie, was cut asunder by the +sword, in the following manner. + +About the 11th February, 1622, _old style_, or 21st of that month, 1623, +_new style_, a Japanese soldier belonging to the Dutch garrison of +Amboina castle, walking one night upon the wall, fell into conversation +with a centinel, in the course of which he asked several questions +respecting the strength of the fortifications and the number of its +garrison. It is to be observed, that most of the Japanese in Amboina +were actually soldiers in the Dutch service, yet not in these trusty +bands which always lodged within the castle, but only occasionally +called in from the town to assist in its defence. This Japanese, in +consequence of his conference with the centinel, was soon after +apprehended on suspicion of treason, and put to the torture by the +Dutch, to extort confession. While suffering under the torture, he was +induced to confess, that he and some others of his countrymen had +plotted to take possession of the castle. Several other Japanese were +consequently apprehended, and examined by torture; as also a Portuguese, +who was guardian or superintendent of the slaves belonging to the Dutch. +While these examinations were going on, which continued during three or +four days, some of the English, then resident at Amboina, were several +times in the castle on business, saw the prisoners, and heard of the +tortures they had undergone, and of the crime laid to their charge; yet +during all this time, never once suspected that this affair had any +connection with themselves, being unconscious of any evil intentions, +and having held no conversation with the prisoners. + +At this time, one Abel Price, surgeon to the English factory at Amboina, +was a prisoner in the castle, for having offered or attempted, in a fit +of drunkenness, to set a Dutchman's house on fire. The Dutch shewed this +man some of the Japanese whom they had tortured, telling him they had +confessed that the English were in confederacy with them, in the plot +for seizing the castle, and threatened him with similar or worse +tortures, if he did not confess the same; and accordingly, on the 15th +February, O.S. they gave him the torture, and soon made him confess +whatever they were pleased to direct. That same morning, about nine +o'clock, they sent for Captain Gabriel Towerson, and the other +Englishmen belonging to the factory at Amboina, to come to speak with +the governor of the castle; on which they all went, except one, who was +left to take care of the house. On their arrival, the governor told +Captain Towerson, that he and others of his nation were accused of a +conspiracy to surprise the castle, and must therefore remain prisoners, +until tried for the same. The Dutch, immediately after this, took into +custody the person who had been left in charge of the English factory, +sequestrated all the merchandize belonging to the English Company, under +an inventory, and seized all the chests, boxes, books, writings, and +other things in the English house. + +Captain Towerson was committed prisoner to his own chamber in the +English house, under a guard of Dutch soldiers. Emanuel Thomson was +imprisoned in the castle. All the rest, namely, John Beaumont, Edward +Collins, William Webber, Ephraim Ramsay, Timothy Johnson, John Fardo, +and Robert Brown, were distributed among the Dutch ships then in the +harbour, and secured in irons. The same day, the governor sent to the +two other factories in the same island, Hitto and Larica, to apprehend +the rest of the English residents, who were all brought prisoners to +Amboina on the 16th; Samuel Colson, John Clark, and George Sharrock, +from the former, and Edward Collins,[2] William Webber,[2] and John +Sadler, from the latter. On the same day, John Pocol, John Wetheral, +Thomas Ladbrook, were apprehended at Cambello, and John Beaumont,[2] +William Griggs, and Ephraim Ramsay,[316] at Loho; and were all brought +in irons to Amboina on the 20th of February. + +[Footnote 316: These four persons are already named, as apprehended at +Amboina.--E.] + +On the 15th of February, the governor and fiscal began to examine the +prisoners. John Beaumont and Timothy Johnson were first brought to the +castle, John Beaumont being left in a hall under a guard, while Johnson +was conducted into another room. Beaumont soon after heard him cry out +very pitifully, then become quiet for a while, and afterwards cried out +aloud. Abel Price, the surgeon, who was first questioned and put to the +torture, was brought in to confront and accuse him; but as Johnson +refused to confess any thing laid to his charge, Price was soon taken +away, and Johnson again put to the question, when Beaumont heard him +repeatedly roar under the torture. At the end of an hour, Johnson was +brought out into the hall, weeping and lamenting, all cut and cruelly +burnt in many parts of his body, and so laid aside in a corner of the +hall, having a soldier to watch him, with strict injunctions not to +allow him to speak to any one. + +Emanuel Thomson was next brought in for examination, not in the same +room where Johnson had been, but in one farther from the hall; yet +Beaumont, who still remained in the hall, heard him often roar out most +lamentably. After half an hour spent in torturing him, he was led to +another place, but not through the hall where Beaumont was. Beaumont was +then called in for examination, and asked many questions concerning the +alleged conspiracy, all knowledge of which he denied with the most +solemn oaths. He was then made fast on purpose to be tortured, having a +cloth fastened about his neck, while two men stood ready with jars of +water to pour on his head: But the governor ordered him to be set loose +again, saying he would spare him for a day or two, being an old man. + +Next day, being the 16th, William Webber, Edward Collins, Ephraim +Ramsay, and Robert Brown, were brought on shore for examination; and at +the same time Samuel Colson, William Griggs, John Clark, George +Sharrock, and John Sadler, from Hitto and Larica, were brought into the +hall. Robert Brown, a tailor, was first called in, and being subjected +to torture by water, confessed all in order, as interrogated by the +fiscal. Edward Collins was next called in, and told that those who were +formerly examined had accused him as accessory to the conspiracy for +taking the castle. Denying all knowledge of or participation in any such +plot, with great oaths, his hands and feet were made fast to the rack, +and a cloth bound about his throat, ready to administer the water +torture, upon which he entreated to be let down, saying that he would +confess all. On being loosed, he again protested his entire innocence +and ignorance of every thing laid to his charge; yet, as he knew they +would make him confess any thing they pleased by means of torture, +however false, he said they would do him a great favour by informing him +what they wished he should say, which he would speak as they desired, to +avoid the torture. The fiscal said he mocked them, ordered him to be +fastened up again, and to receive the water torture. After suffering +this for some time, he desired to be let down again to make his +confession, devising as well as he could what he should say. +Accordingly, he said that he, with Thomson, Johnson, Brown, and Fardo, +had plotted about ten weeks before, to surprise the castle with the aid +of the Japanese. + +While making this contrived confession, he was interrupted by the +fiscal, who asked whether Captain Towerson were privy to this +conspiracy. He protested that Towerson knew nothing of the matter. "You +lie," said the fiscal, "did not he call you all before him, telling you +that the daily abuses of the Dutch had instigated him to devise a plot, +and that he wanted nothing but your consent and secrecy?" Then a Dutch +merchant who was present, named Jan Igost, asked him, if they had not +all been sworn to secrecy on the Bible? Collins declared with great +oaths, that he knew nothing of any such matter. He was again ordered to +be seized up again to the torture, on which he said that all was true +they had said. Then the fiscal asked, if the English in the other +factories were consenting to this plot? To which he answered, no. The +fiscal then next asked, if the English president at Jacatra, or Mr +Weldon the agent at Banda, were engaged in this plot, or privy to its +contrivance? He again answered, no. The fiscal next enquired by what +means the Japanese were to have executed their purpose? And, when +Collins stood amazed, and devising some probable fictions to satisfy +them, the fiscal helped him out, saying, "Were not two Japanese to have +gone to each bulwark, and two to the door of the governor's chamber, to +have killed him on coming out to enquire into the disturbance you were +to have raised without?" Upon this, a person who stood by, desired the +fiscal not to put words into the mouth of the witness, but to allow him +to speak for himself. After this reproof, without waiting any answer to +his former question, the fiscal asked what reward was to have been given +the Japanese for their services? Collins answered 1000 dollars each. He +was then asked, when this plot was to have been carried into execution? +But, although he made no answer to this question, not knowing on the +sudden what to say, he was dismissed, glad to get away from the torture, +yet certainly believing they would put him to death for his confession. + +Samuel Colson was next brought in; and, for fear of the tortures that +Collins had endured, whom he saw brought out in a pitiable condition, +with his eyes almost starting out of their sockets, he chose rather to +confess all they asked, and so was quickly dismissed, yet came out +weeping and lamenting, and protesting his innocence. John Clark was then +taken in, and tortured with fire and water for two hours, in the same +manner as had been done with Johnson and Thomson.[317] + +[Footnote 317: The minute description of these tortures, in Purchas, and +copied in Harris, are disgusting; insomuch, that Purchas exclaims at one +place, _I have no heart to proceed_. They are here therefore +omitted,--E.] + +Finding that all their cruelties could not force him to any consistent +confession of himself, they helped him along to particular circumstances +of their own contrivance, by leading questions. Thus wearied out and +overpowered, by terror of the tortures being renewed, he answered, +_yes_, to whatever they asked, by which means they trumped up a body of +evidence to this effect:--"That Captain Towerson, on new-year's-day +last, had sworn all the English at Amboina to be secret and aiding in a +plot he had devised for surprising the castle, by the aid of the +Japanese, putting the governor and all the Dutch to death." + +On the 17th, William Griggs and John Fardo, with some Japanese, were +brought to examination. The Japanese were first cruelly tortured to +accuse Griggs, which at last they did; and Griggs, to avoid torture, +confessed whatever the fiscal was pleased to demand. The same was next +done with Fardo and other Japanese. Fardo endured the torture for some +time, but at length confessed all they pleased to ask. That same day, +John Beaumont was brought a second time to the fiscal's chamber, when +one Captain Newport, the son of a Dutchman, but born and educated in +England, acted as interpreter. Griggs was also brought in to accuse +Beaumont of being present at the consultation for surprising the castle. +Beaumont denied all, with great earnestness, and many oaths; but, on +enduring the torture, was constrained to confess every thing laid to his +charge. + +George Sharrock was then brought in and examined. He fell on his knees, +protesting his innocence, telling them he was at Hitto on +new-year's-day, when the pretended consultation was held, and had not +been at Amboina since the preceding November, as was well known to +several Dutchmen who resided at Hitto along with him. Being ordered to +the rack, he told them he had often heard John Clark say that the Dutch +had done insufferable wrongs to the English, and was resolved to be +revenged on them; for which purpose he had proposed to Captain Towerson +to allow him to go to Macassar, to consult with the Spaniards about +sending some gallies to plunder the small factories of Amboina and Ceram +in the absence of the ships. Being asked what Captain Towerson had said +to all this? he answered, that Towerson was very much offended with +Clark for the proposal, and could never abide him since. The fiscal then +called him a rogue and liar, saying, that he wandered idly from the +matter, and must go to the torture. He craved favour again, and began +another tale, saying, that John Clark had told him at Hitto of a plot to +surprise the castle of Amboina, with the participation of Towerson. He +was then asked, when this consultation was held? which he said was in +November preceding. The fiscal said that could not be, for it was on +new-year's-day. The prisoner urged, as before, that he had not been in +Amboina since last November, till now that he was brought thither in +custody. "Why, then," said the fiscal, "have you belied yourself?" To +this he resolutely answered, that all he had confessed respecting a +conspiracy was false, and merely feigned to avoid torment. + +Sharrock was then remanded to prison, but was brought up again next day, +when a formal confession, in writing, of his last-mentioned conference +with Clark, respecting the plot for surprising the castle of Amboina, +was read over to him, after which, the fiscal asked, if it were all +true. To this he answered, that every word of it was false, and that he +had confessed it solely to avoid torture. The fiscal and the rest then +said, in rage, that he was a false liar, for it was all true, and had +been spoken from his own mouth, and therefore he must sign it, which he +did accordingly. Having done this, he broke out into a great passion, +charging them as guilty of the innocent blood of himself and the rest, +which they should have to answer for at the judgment-seat of God. He +even grappled with the fiscal, and would have hindered him from carrying +in the confession to the governor, but was instantly laid hold of, and +carried away to prison. + +William Webber was next examined; being told by the fiscal that Clarke +accused him of having sworn to Towerson's plot on new-year's-day, with +all the other circumstances already mentioned; Webber strenuously denied +all this, declaring, that he was then at Larika, and could not possibly +be present in Amboina on that day. But, being put to the torture, he was +forced to confess having been present at the consultation, with all the +other circumstances in regular order, as asked. He also told of having a +letter from Clark, in which was a postscript excusing his brief writing +at this time, as there was then a great business in hand. But a Dutch +merchant, named Kinder, who was present, told the governor that Webber +and he were together making merry at Larika, on new-year's-day, the time +of this pretended consultation. The governor then went away, but the +fiscal held on with him respecting the letter and postscript, promising +to save his life if he would produce these. + +Captain Towerson was next brought in for examination, and was shewn what +the others had confessed concerning him. He deeply professed his +innocence, on which Colson was brought in to confront him, being assured +he should be again tortured unless he made good his former confession +against Towerson. On this he repeated what he had said before, and was +then sent away. Griggs and Fardo were next brought in, and desired to +justify to his face what they had before confessed. Captain Towerson +seriously admonished them, as they should answer at the day of judgment, +to speak nothing but the truth. They then fell upon their knees, +beseeching him to forgive them for God's sake, and declared openly that +all they had formerly said was utterly false, and spoken only to avoid +the torture. The fiscal then commanded them to be led to the torture, +which they were unable to endure, and again affirmed their former +extorted confessions to be true. When Colson was required to subscribe +this confession, he asked the fiscal, upon whose head he thought the sin +would rest, whether on his who was constrained to confess falsely, or +upon the constrainer? After a pause on this home-question, the fiscal +went out to speak with the governor, and returned again shortly, +commanding him to subscribe. Colson did so, yet with this remark,--"You +force me to accuse myself and others of that which is as false as God is +true; for I call God to witness that I and they are as innocent as the +child unborn." + +Having thus examined all the servants of the English company in the +several factories of the island of Amboina, they began on the 21st of +February to examine John Wetheral, factor at Cambello, in Ceram. He +acknowledged being at Amboina on new-year's-day, but declared he knew of +no other consultation but about certain cloth belonging to the company, +which lay spoiling in the factory, which they considered how best to get +sold. The governor said he was not questioned about cloth, but treason; +and protesting his innocence, he was dismissed for that day. Next day he +was again brought in, and Captain Towerson was produced to confront and +accuse him, as he had formerly emitted something in his confessions +against him. But Towerson only desired him to speak the truth, and +nothing but the truth, as God should put into his heart. Mr Towerson was +then removed, and Mr Wetheral tortured by water, with threats of fire +being applied if he did not confess. At length, they read over to him +the confessions of the others, asking him leading questions from point +to point, to all of which he answered affirmatively, to free himself +from torture. + +John Powel, assistant to Mr Wetheral, was next called; but he proved +that he had not been at Amboina since November; and being likewise +spoken for by Jan Joost, his old acquaintance, was dismissed without +torture. Thomas Ladbrook, servant to Wetheral and Powel at Cambello, was +then brought in; but he, too, was speedily dismissed. Ephraim Ramsay, +proving that he was not in Amboina on new-year's-day, and being likewise +spoken for by Joost, was also dismissed, after hanging up some time +ready for being tortured. Lastly, John Sadler, servant to William Griggs +at Larika, was brought in for examination; and as he was not in Amboina +on new-year's-day, he too was dismissed. + +On the 25th of February, all the prisoners, English, Portuguese, and +Japanese, were brought into the great hall of the castle, and there +solemnly condemned to die, except John Powel, Ephraim Ramsay, John +Sadler, and Thomas Ladbrook. Next day, they were again brought into the +hall, except Captain Towerson and Emanuel Thomson, to be prepared for +death by the Dutch ministers. That same night, Colson and Collins were +taken into the room where Emanuel Thomson lay, when they were told the +governor was pleased to grant mercy to one of the three, and desired +they might draw lots, when the free lot fell to Edward Collins, who was +then carried to the chamber of the acquitted persons before-named. John +Beaumont was soon after brought to the same place, and told that he owed +his life to Peter Johnson, the Dutch merchant of Loho, and the +secretary, who had begged his life. The condemned, who still remained in +the hall, were afterwards joined by the Dutch ministers, and received +the sacrament, protesting their innocence. Samuel Colson, on this +occasion, said, in a loud voice, "O Lord, as I am innocent of this +treason, do thou pardon all my other sins; and, if in the smallest +degree guilty thereof may I never be a partaker in the joys of thy +heavenly kingdom." To these words all the rest exclaimed, _Amen! for me, +Amen! for me, good Lord!_ + +After this, each, knowing whom he had accused, went one to another, +craving forgiveness for their false accusations, as wrung from them by +the pains or dread of torture. They all freely forgave their comrades; +for none had been so falsely accused, but that he also had accused +others with equal falseness. In particular, George Sharrock, who +survived to relate the scene exhibited at this time, knelt down to John +Clark, whom he had accused, as before related, earnestly begging +forgiveness. Clark freely forgave him, saying, "How shall I look to be +forgiven of God, if I do not forgive you? as I have myself falsely +accused Captain Towerson and others!" After this, they spent the rest of +this doleful night in prayer and psalm-singing, comforting each other +the best they could. The Dutch who guarded them offered them wine, of +which they desired them to drink heartily, to drive away sorrow, as is +the custom of their country in like situations, but this the English +refused. + +Next morning, the 27th February, William Webber was again called before +the fiscal, and offered his life if he would produce the letter and +postscript he confessed to have received from John Clark, which he could +not do, as it never had existed: Yet, at last, they pardoned him, and +sent him to the rest of those who were freed, and Sharrock with him, +whom they also pardoned. That morning, Emanuel Thomson, learning that +John Beaumont was pardoned, contrived to have him allowed to visit him, +which was allowed with much difficulty. Beaumont found him in a most +miserable condition, the wounds or sores occasioned by the torture bound +up, but the blood and matter issuing through the bandages. Taking Mr +Beaumont by the hand, he conjured him, when he came to England, to offer +his duty to the Honourable Company, and others of his friends whom he +named, and to assure them he died innocent, as was well known to +Beaumont. + +It is needless to dwell upon the minute circumstances of the catastrophe +of this bloody tragedy: Suffice it to say, that ten Englishmen, one +Portuguese, and eleven Japanese, were publicly executed; of whom the +following is a list: + + _English._ + + Capt. Gabriel Towerson, agent for the English at Amboina. + Samuel Colson, factor at Hitto. + Emanuel Thomson, assistant at Amboina. + Timothy Johnson, assistant at the same place. + John Wetheral, assistant at Cambello. + John Clark, assistant at Hitto. + + William Griggs, factor at Larika. + John Fardo, steward of the factory at Amboina. + Abel Price, surgeon to that factory. + Robert Brown, tailor. + +The only Portuguese was Augustine Perez, born in Bengal, who was +superintendant of the slaves in the employment of the English at +Amboina. + + _Japanese_. + Hititso, Tsiosa, and Sinsa, natives of Firando. + Sidney Migial, Pedro Congie, Thomas Corea, from Nangasaki. + Quinandaya, a native of Coaets. + Tsabinda, a native of Tsoncketgo. + Zanchae, a native of Fisien. + +Besides these, there were two other Japanese tortured, who both +confessed a participation in the pretended plot, but were not executed, +or even condemned, for reasons which the surviving English did not +learn. The executions were all by cutting off the heads of the condemned +with a scymitar; and the Dutch prepared a black velvet pall for Captain +Towerson's body to fall upon, which they afterwards had the effrontery +to charge in account against the English East India Company. + + +SECTION XV. + +OBSERVATIONS DURING A RESIDENCE IN TISLAND OF CHUSAN, IN 1701, BY DOCTOR +JAMES CUNNINGHAM; WITH SOME EARLY NOTICES RESPECTING CHINA.[318] + +Among the early voyages of the English to the East Indies, none have +been preserved that were made to China, nor have we been able to +discover any satisfactory account of the commencement of the trade of +our East India Company with that distant country, now said to be by far +the most profitable branch of the exclusive commerce. In the _Annals of +the Company_,[319] several references are made to the China trade, but +more in the nature of notices or memoranda for the purpose of after +investigation, than as conveying any actual information on the subject. +In this singular paucity of materials, we are reduced to the following +short "Observations and Remarks, by Doctor James Cunningham, made during +his Residence as Physician to the English Factory at the Island of +Chusan, on the Coast of China." Doctor Cunningham is stated by Harris to +have been a fellow of the Royal Society, distinguished by his natural +talents and acquired accomplishments, well versed in ancient and modern +learning, and to have diligently used these advantages in making +judicious remarks on the places where he resided in the service of the +Company. Yet all that has been recorded by Harris of these remarks, give +only a very imperfect account of Chusan and of China. This short article +consists of extracts from two letters written by Cunningham from Chusan, +and a brief supplement by Harris respecting two unfortunate factories at +Pulo Condore and Pulo Laut.--E. + +[Footnote 318: Harris. I. 852.] + +[Footnote 319: Annals of the E.I. Co. vol. II. and III. _passim_.] + +§1. _Voyage to Chusan, and short Notices of that Island_.[320] + +In my last letter, from the island of Borneo, I gave you an account of +our arrival at that island on the 17th July. We only remained there two +days, as the season of the year was already far advanced, and made the +best of our way from thence through the Straits of Banda,[321] with +favourable winds and weather. We got upon the coast of China on the 13th +August, when we had variable winds, which carried us abreast of +_Emoy_[322] by the 19th following. The wind then set in fresh at N.E. so +that we were in great fear of losing our passage, and were now obliged +to beat up all the way against both wind and current; yet the weather +remained so favourable that we were never obliged to hand our top-sails, +otherwise we must have lost more way in a single day than we could have +recovered in eight. On the 31st August we came to anchor under the +_Crocodile islands_,[323] both for shelter from the bad weather, usual +on this coast at new and full-moon, which has been fatal to many ships, +and also to procure fresh water, now scarce with us, as we had not +recruited our store since leaving the Cape of Good Hope. These are three +small islands in lat. 26° N. about six leagues from the river of +_Hokien_, [Fo-kien] on two of which we found very good water, with a +convenient landing-place on the S.W. side of the innermost island. By +the assistance of some Chinese fishers, we procured also some fresh +provisions from the main land, not thinking it safe to venture there +ourselves, lest we may have been brought into trouble by the governor of +that part of the country. While here, on the 5th September, we had a +sudden short shift of the monsoon from the S.W. blowing with great fury; +which was also experienced by other vessels then coming on the coast of +China. We again put to sea on the 18th September, turning to windward +night and day on the outside of all the islands, which are very numerous +all along this coast, but with which we were unacquainted after passing +beyond _Emoy_. Besides, the hydrography of this coast is hitherto so +very imperfect, that we could not trust in any degree to our draughts, +owing to which our navigation was both difficult and dangerous. + +[Footnote 320: From a letter to a member of the Royal Society, dated in +September, 1701.--Harris.] + +[Footnote 321: This must have been the straits of Macasser, as Banda is +far out of the way between Borneo and China.--E.] + +[Footnote 322: Emoy or Amoy, was on the coast of China, opposite to the +island of Formosa, and appears, from the Annals, to have been the first +port frequented by the ships of the India Company for the Chinese +trade.--E.] + +[Footnote 323: The islands of Pe-la-yang are, in the indicated latitude, +off the estuary of the principal river of the province of Fo-kien.--E.] + +On the 1st October, we got into the latitude of 30° N. where we came to +anchor near the land, and found our way by boat to _Chusan_,[324] about +twelve leagues within the islands, whence we got a pilot, who brought +our ship safely to that place on the 11th of the month. The Chinese +government have granted us a settlement on that island, with the liberty +of trade; but do not allow us to go up to Ning-po,[325] which is six or +eight hours sail to the westwards, all the way among islands, of which +this of Chusan is the largest, being eight or nine leagues from E. to W. +and four or five from N. to S. + +[Footnote 324: Tcheou-chan, an island about twenty English miles in +length from E. to W. in lat. 30° 23' N. long. 121° 43' E. off the +estuary of Ning-po river, in the province of Che-kiang, is obviously the +Chusan of the text--E.] + +[Footnote 325: The city of Ning-po stands at the head of a bay, +stretching from the S. side of the estuary of the river of the same +name, in lat. 30° 10' N. long. 121° E. It appears, from the Annals, +that the English had been excluded from trading at Canton, by the +influence of the Portuguese in Macao.--E.] + +About three leagues from the point of land named _Liampo_ by the +Portuguese, and _Khi-tu_ by the Chinese, there is a very safe and +convenient harbour at the west end of this island, where the ships ride +within call of the factory, which stands close to the shore in a low +flat valley, having near two hundred houses built around for the benefit +of trade. The town of Chusan, of which the houses are very mean, is +about three quarters of a mile farther from the shore, and is surrounded +by a fine stone wall, flanked at irregular distances by twenty-two +square bastions or towers; and has four great gates, on which a few old +iron guns are planted, seldom or never used. The _chumpeen_, or governor +of the island, resides here, and the town contains about three or four +thousand beggarly inhabitants, mostly soldiers and fishers; for, as the +trade of this island has only been granted of late, it has not hitherto +attracted any considerable merchants. + +This island abounds in all sorts of provisions, as cows, buffaloes, +deer, hogs, both wild and tame, geese, ducks, poultry, rice, wheat, +calavanccs, cole-worts, turnips, carrots, potatoes, beets, spinach, and +so forth. It has, however, no merchandise, except what comes from +Ning-po, Stan-chew,[326] Nankin, and other inland towns and cities. Some +of these I hope to see, when I have acquired a little of the Chinese +language. Tea grows here in great plenty on the tops of the hills, but +is not so much esteemed as that which grows on more mountainous islands. +Although tolerably populous, this island is far from being what it was +in the time of Father Martini, who describes it under the name of +_Cheu-xan_. The superstitious pilgrimages mentioned by him, must refer +to the island of Pou-to,[327] which is nine leagues from this place, and +to another island three miles to the eastwards, to which the emperor +proposes coming to worship at a pagoda greatly renowned for its +sanctity, in the ensuing month of May, being his birth-day, and the +fortieth year of his age. One of his bonzes is already come there, to +get all things in order. + +[Footnote 326: Probably Hang-tcheon, a city about forty miles W. from +Ning-po.--E.] + +[Footnote 327: Pou-teou, is directly E. from the eastern end of +Tcheou-chan.--E.] + +§2. _Ancient and modern State of the Country, and of the coming of the +English to reside there.[328]_ + +In my former letter, I informed you that the emperor designed to have +come to worship at Pou-to in May last, being the fortieth year of his +age, but I ought to have said of his reign. After every thing was +prepared for his reception, he was dissuaded from his purpose by some of +his mandarins, who made him believe that the thunder at that place was +very dangerous. This Pou-to is a small island, only about five leagues +round, and at the east end of Chusan. It has been famous for the space +of eleven hundred years, for the superstitious pilgrimages made to it, +and is only inhabited by bonzes to the number of three thousand, all of +the sect of _Heshang,_ or unmarried bonzes, who live a Pythagorean life. +They have built four hundred pagodas, two of which are considerable for +their size and splendour, and were lately covered with green and yellow +tiles, brought from the emperor's palace at Nankin. They are adorned +within by stately idols, finely carved and gilded, the chief of these +being an idol named _Quonem._ To-these two pagodas there are two chief +priests, who govern all the rest. They have many walks and avenues cut +in different directions through the island, some of which are paved with +flag-stones, and overshaded by trees planted on both sides. The +dwellings of the bonzes are the best I have seen in these parts, all of +which are maintained by charitable donations. All the Chinese junks +which sail from Ning-po and Chusan touch at Pou-to, both outwards and +homewards-bound, making offerings for the safety of their voyages. There +is another island named _Kim-Tong,_[329] five leagues from hence, on the +way towards Ning-po, where a great many mandarins are said to live in +retirement, after having given up their employments. On that island +there are said to be silver mines, but prohibited from being opened. The +rest of the circumjacent islands are either desert, or very meanly +inhabited, but all of them abound in deer. + +[Footnote 328: The sequel of these observations is said by Harris to +have been taken from another letter to the same correspondent with the +former, and dated in November, 1701; but, from circumstances in the +text, it would appear to have been written in 1702.--E.] + +[Footnote 329: Probably that named Silver-island in modern maps.--E.] + +It is not long since this island of Chusan began to be inhabited. Yet in +the days of Father Martini, about fifty years ago, it was very populous +for three or four years; at which time, in the fury of the Tartar +conquest, it was laid entirely desolate, not even sparing the mulberry +trees, which were then numerous, as they made a great deal of raw silk +here. It continued in this desolate condition till about eighteen years +ago, when the walls of the present town were built by the governor of +_Ting-hai_, as a strong-hold for a garrison, in order to expel some +pirates who had taken shelter on the island. As the island began to grow +populous, a _chumpeen_ was sent to govern it for three years, to whom +the late chumpeen succeeded, who continued till last April, and procured +licence to open this port to strangers. On the last chumpeen being +promoted to the government of _Tien-ching-wei_[330] near Pekin, he was +succeeded by the present governor, who is son to the old chumpeen of +Emoy. They have no arts or manufactures in this island, except lacquered +ware; the particulars of which I cannot as yet send you. They have begun +to plant mulberry-trees, in order to breed up silk-worms for the +production of raw silk; and they gather and cure some tea, but chiefly +for their own use. + +[Footnote 330: Probably that called Tien-sing in modern maps, on the +river Pay, between Pekin and the sea.--E.] + +§3. _Of the Manner of cultivating Tea in Chusan_. + +The three sorts of tea usually carried to England are all from the same +plant, their difference being occasioned by the soils in which they +grow, and the season of the year at which they are gathered. The +_bohea_, or _vo-u-i_, so called from certain mountains in the province +of _Token_,[331] where it is chiefly made, is the very bud, gathered in +the beginning of March, and dried in the shade. The tea named _bing_ is +the second growth, gathered in April, and _siriglo_ is the last growth, +gathered in May and June; both of these being gently dried over the fire +in _taches_ or pans. The tea shrub is an evergreen, being in flower from +October to January, and the seed ripens in the September or October +following, so that both flower and seed may be gathered at the same +time; but for one fully ripened seed, an hundred are abortive. There are +the two sorts of seeds mentioned by Father Le Compte, in his description +of tea; and what be describes as a third sort, under the name of +_slymie_ pease, consists merely of the young flower-buds, not yet open. +The seed vessels of the tea tree are three-capsular, each capsule +containing one nut or seed; and though often two or one of these only +come to perfection, yet the vestiges of the rest may easily be +discerned. It grows naturally in a dry gravelly soil on the sides of +hills, without any cultivation, in several places of this island. + +[Footnote 331: Fo-kien is almost certainly here meant--E.] + +Le Compte is mistaken in saying that the Chinese are ignorant of the art +of grafting; for I nave seen many of his paradoxical tallow-trees +ingrafted here, besides trees of other sorts. When they ingraft, they do +not slit the stock as we do, but slice off the outside of the stock, to +which they apply the graft, which is cut sloping on one side, to +correspond with the slice on the stock, bringing the bark of the slice +up on the outside of the graft, after which the whole is covered up with +mud and straw, exactly as we do. The commentator on Magalhen seems +doubtful as to the length of the Chinese _che_ or cubit. At this island +they have two sorts, one measuring thirteen inches and seven-tenths +English, which, is commonly used by merchants; the other is only eleven +inches, being used by carpenters, and also in geographical measures. +Though Father Martini is censured by Magalhen for spelling a great many +Chinese words with _ng_, which the Portuguese and others express with +_in_, yet his way is more agreeable to our English pronunciation and +orthography; only the g may be left out in Pekin, Nankin, and some +others. + +Having made enquiry about what is mentioned by Father Martini of sowing +their _fields_ at _Van-cheu_ with oyster-shells, to make new ones grow, +I was told, that after they have taken out the oysters, they sprinkle +the empty shells with urine, and throw them into the water, by which +means there grow new oysters on the old shells.[332] Martini says he +could never find a Latin name for the _Tula Mogorin_ of the Portuguese; +but I am sure it is the same with the _Syringa arabica, flore pleno +albo_, of Parkinson. Martini also says that the _kieu-yeu_, or +tallow-tree, bears a white flower, like that of the cherry-tree: But all +that I have seen here bear spikes of small yellow flowers, like the +_julus_ of the _Salix_. The bean-broth, or mandarin-broth, so frequently +mentioned in the Dutch embassy, and by other authors, is only an +emulsion made of the seeds of _sesamum_ with hot water. + +[Footnote 332: This strange story may possibly be thus explained. At +certain seasons, numerous minute oysters may be seen sticking to the +shells of the old ones; and the Chinese may have thrown the emptied +shells into the sea, in the highly probable expectation of these minute +oysters continuing to live and grow. The circumstances in the text are +absurd additions, either from ignorance or imposition.--E.] + +The chief employments of the people here are fishing and agriculture. In +fishing, they use several sorts of nets and lines as we do; but, as +there are great banks of mud in some places, the fishermen have +contrived a small frame, three or four feet long, not much larger than a +hen-trough, and a little elevated at each end, to enable them to go more +easily on these mud banks. Resting with one knee on the middle of one of +these frames, and leaning his arms on a cross stick raised breast high, +he uses the other foot on the mud to push the frame and himself +forwards. + +In their agricultural operations, all their fields on which any thing is +to be cultivated, whether high or low, are formed into such plots or +beds as may admit of retaining water over them when the cultivator +thinks proper. The lands are tilled by ploughs drawn by one cow or +buffalo; and when it is intended to sow rice, the soil is remarkably +well prepared and cleared from all weeds, after which it is moistened +into the state of a pulp, and smoothed by a frame drawn across, when the +rice is sown very thick, and covered over with water, only to the height +of two or three inches. When the seedling plants are six or eight inches +long, they are all pulled up, and transplanted in straight lines into +other fields, which are overflowed with water; and, when weeds grow up, +they destroy them by covering them up in the interstices between the +rows of rice, turning the mud over them with their hands. When they are +to sow wheat, barley, pulse, or other grain, they grub up the surface of +the ground superficially, earth, grass, and rook, and mixing this with +some straw, burn all together. This earth, being sifted fine, they mix +with the seed, which they sow in holes made in straight lines, so that +it grows in tufts or rows like the rice. The field is divided into +regular beds, well harrowed both before and after the seed is sown, +which makes them resemble gardens. The rice grounds are meliorated +merely by letting water into them; but for the other grains, where the +soil requires it, they use dung, night-soil, ashes, and the like. For +watering their fields, they use the machine mentioned by Martini in the +preface to his Atlas, being entirely constructed of wood, and the same +in principle with the chain-pump. + +In order to procure salt, as all the shores are of mud instead of sand, +they pare off in summer the superficial part of this mud, which has been +overflowed by the sea-water, and lay it up in heaps, to be used in the +following manner: Having first dried it in the sun, and rubbed it into a +fine powder, they dig a pit, the bottom of which is covered with straw, +and from the bottom a hollow cane leads through the side of the pit to a +jar standing below the level of the bottom. They then fill the pit +almost full of the dried salt mud, and pour on sea-water till it stands +two or three inches above the top of the mud. This sea-water drains +through the mud, carrying the salt along with it from the mud as well as +its own, and runs out into the jar much-saturated with salt; which is +afterwards procured by boiling. + +§4. _Of the famous Medicinal Root, called Hu-tchu-u_. + +Having last year seen, in a newspaper, some account of a singular root, +brought from China by Father Fontaney, I shall inform you that I have +seen this root since my arrival at Chuaan. It is called _Hu-tchu-n_[333] +by the Chinese, and they ascribe to it most wonderful virtues, such as +prolonging life, and changing grey hair to black, by using its infusion +by way of tea. It is held in such high estimation as to be sold at a +great price, as I have been told, from ten tael up to a thousand, or +even two thousand tael-for a single root; for the larger it is, so much +the greater is its fancied value and efficacy: But the price is too high +to allow me to try the experiment. You will find it mentioned in the +_Medecina Sinica_ of Cleyer, No. 84; under the name of _He-xeu-ti_, +according to the Portuguese orthography. It is also figured in the 27th +table of the plants which Mr _Pettier_ had from me. The following is the +story of its discovery, which I will not warrant for gospel. + +[Footnote 333: This is probably the ginseng, so famed for its fancied +virtues.--E.] + +Once upon a time, a certain person went to gather simples among the +mountains, and fell by some accident into a vale of which the sides were +so steep that he was unable to get out again. In this situation, he had +to look about for some means to support life, and discovered this root, +of which he made trial, and found that it served him both as food and +cloathing; for it preserved his body in such a temperature, that the +injuries of the weather had no evil influence upon him during a +residence of several hundred years. At length, by means of an +earthquake, the mountains were rent, and he found a passage from the +vale to his house, whence he had been so long absent. But so many +alterations had taken place during his long absence, that nobody would +believe his story; till, on consulting the annals of his family, they +found that one of them had been lost at the time he mentioned, which +confirmed the truth of his relation.--This is a fable, not even credited +among the Chinese, invented merely to blazon forth the virtues of this +wonderful root. + +§5. _Removal of Dr Cunningham to Pulo Condore, with an Account of the +Rise, Progress, and Ruin of that Factory_.[334] + +The English factory at Chusan was broken up in the year 1702, so that Dr +Cunningham had very little time allowed him for making his proposed +observations respecting China. From this place he removed to another new +settlement at _Pulo Condore,_ in a small cluster of four or five +islands, about fifteen leagues south of the west channel of the river of +Camboja, usually called the Japanese river.[335] I am unable to say what +were the advantages proposed from this factory; but, from the memoirs I +have seen on the subject, this place seems to have been very ill chosen, +and much worse managed. The person who had at this time the management +and direction of the affairs belonging to the East India Company in this +distant part of the world, was one Mr Katchpole, who, according to the +usual custom of the Europeans in eastern India at this period, took into +the service a certain number of Macassers or native soldiers, by whose +assistance he soon constructed a small fort for the protection of the +factory. So far as I can learn, the most indispensable necessaries of +life, water, wood, and fish, were all that these islands ever afforded. + +[Footnote 334: This and the subsequent subdivision of the section are +related historically by Harris.--E.] + +[Footnote 335: Pulo Condore is in lat. 8° 45' N. long. 106° 5' E. and +the object of a factory at this place was evidently to endeavour to +secure a portion of the trade of China, from which the English at this +time were excluded by the arts of the Portuguese at Macao, as we learn +from the Annals; as also to combine some trade with Siam, Camboja, +Tsiompa, Cochin-China, and Tonquin.--E.] + +The Macassers are a brave, industrious, and faithful people, to such as +deal fairly with them; and on this account are highly esteemed in the +Eastern Indies, more especially by the Dutch. They are, however, +daring, cruel, and revengeful, if once provoked. Mr Katchpole had +contracted with these men to serve for three years, at the end of which +period, if they pleased, they were to receive their wages and to depart: +But he, though they strictly performed their part of the agreement, +broke faith with them, keeping them beyond their time against their +will. In addition to this great breach in morality, he added as +notorious an error in politics; for, after provoking these men so +egregiously by refusing to fulfil his engagement, he still confided to +them the guard of his own person and the custody of the factory. This +gave them ample opportunity of revenging the ill usage they had met +with, and with that ferocity which is so natural to untutored +barbarians. They rose in mutiny one night, and murdered Mr Katchpole, +and all who were at the time along with him in the factory. A few, who +happened to lodge on the outside of the fort, hearing the cries of their +friends within during the massacre, fled from their beds to the +sea-shore; where, by a singular interposition of Providence, they found +a bark completely ready for sea, in which they embarked half naked, and +put immediately to sea, just in time to escape the rage of the +Macassers, who came in search of them to the shore, precisely when they +had weighed anchor and pushed off to sea. + +Dr Cunningham was one of the number who escaped on this occasion. Their +navigation was attended with excessive difficulty, being exposed at the +same time to incredible fatigue, and to the utmost extremity of hunger +and thirst: But at length, after a tedious and difficult course of an +hundred leagues, in the most wretched condition, they reached a small +creek in the dominions of the king of Johor, where they were received +with kindness. + +§6. _Some Account of the Factory at Pulo Laut, with the Overthrow of +that Factory, and of the English Trade to Borneo_. + +A year or two after this ruin of the factory at Pulo Condore, the +Company thought fit to order the establishment of a new factory on the +coast of the great island of Borneo. On the south of that vast island, +there is a small isle called Pulo Laut, having an excellent harbour. The +country here is but thinly peopled, and yields nothing except rice; but, +as it lies near the mouth of the great rivers which come from the pepper +countries in the interior; it is extremely well situated for trade. +Between this island and the great island of Borneo, there is a channel +about two miles wide in most places, narrower in some and broader in +others, and having from seven to five fathoms water the whole way +through. On the coast of this channel there are several rising grounds +fit for building on, and which were therefore extremely proper for the +situation of a factory, which, it may be presumed, induced those who had +the direction of the Company's affairs, to make choice of this place. + +One Captain Barry, who is said to have been a very ingenious gentleman, +had the charge of establishing this new factory, in which he is reported +to have acted with much skill and prudence. But he died before the works +were completed; and the direction of the factory devolved upon Doctor +Cunningham, who came to this place after the ruin of the factory at Pulo +Condore. He is said to have given himself so entirely up to his studies, +that he left the care of the Company's concerns too much to the people +who were under him, who were unequal to the trust, and proved the ruin +of the factory. Before the fort was half finished, these people began to +insult the natives of the country; and, among other wanton acts of +folly, they very imprudently chose to search one of the boats belonging +to the king, which was carrying a female of rank down the river. This so +provoked the Bornean sovereign that he determined upon the utter +destruction of the English; for which purpose he collected his forces +together, amounting to about three thousand resolute men, which he +embarked in above an hundred proas, and sent them down to attack the +factory and unfinished fort. + +There happened at this time to be two ships belonging to the Company in +the river, besides two merchant vessels of inconsiderable force; and as +Cunningham and his people had received advice of the preparations making +against them, they left their factory, taking refuge aboard the ships, +thinking themselves in greater security there than ashore. When all +things were in readiness for the intended assault, the native armament +came down the river in the night; and, while some landed and destroyed +the factory and fortifications, others attacked the ships, which were +fortunately prepared for their reception, the English having made fast +nettings along both sides of their ships, about two fathoms high above +the gunnels, to prevent the enemy from boarding, and were in readiness +to use their blunderbusses and pikes, to prevent them from forcing their +way to the decks. + +On seeing the approach of the proas towards the ships, the English plied +their great guns, loaded with double, round, and partridge shot, and +made great carnage among the Borneans, yet this did not deter them from +pushing forwards and using their utmost endeavours to board. But, having +got up to the gunnels, they were unable to get over the netting, and so +were slaughtered with great ease by the English from the decks. Some of +the assailants got in at the _head doors_ of one of the ships and killed +a few of the English on the forecastle, but were soon overpowered and +slain. Thus, after a long and sanguinary contest, the two large ships +beat off the enemy with small loss; but the two little vessels were both +burnt with most of their men, among whom was one Mynheer Hoogh Camber, a +Dutch gentleman who had been ambassador of the king of Persia, and had +fled from Batavia in one of these small vessels. Some say that the +English killed above fifteen hundred of the assailants in two hours, for +the heat of the assault continued during that space, besides many others +wounded and maimed. But the English were under the necessity of +abandoning the settlement at Pulo Laut. + +The Bornean king or rajah thought his revenge had gone far enough in +driving the English from their factory: And, finding his revenue +considerably diminished by the loss of trade with the English, he sent +notice to such of them as traded to Johor, and other places in the +neighbourhood of Borneo, that he would still admit them to trade in his +dominions on the old footing, but would never allow them or any other +nation to erect forts in his territories. Several English vessels have +been there since to load pepper, and were civilly treated. The Dutch +also sent a ship there from Batavia in the year 1712; but the natives +refused to have any dealings with them. + + +END OF THE NINTH VOLUME. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of +Voyages and Travels, Volume IX., by Robert Kerr + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOL. IX. *** + +***** This file should be named 13055-8.txt or 13055-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/3/0/5/13055/ + +Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed +Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made +available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions. + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |